Arkansas Administrative Code › Agency 209 - Arkansas Agriculture Department › Division 02 - State Plant Board › Rule 209.02.16-002 - Arkansas Weights and Measures Regulations and Fuel and Lubricants Regulations

Current through Register Vol. 49, No. 6, June, 2024
I.
Introduction
A.
Source
The Uniform Laws and Regulations1 in
				this handbook comprise all of those adopted by the National Conference on
				Weights and Measures, Inc. (NCWM). Contact NCWM at:
1135 M Street, Suite 100
Phone:
(402) 434-4880
E-mail: infor@ncwm.net
Lincoln, NE 68508
Fax:
(402) 434-4878
URL:
www.ncwm.net
The NCWM is supported by the National Institute of Standards
				and Technology (NIST), which provides its Executive Secretary and publishes its
				documents. NIST also develops technical publications for use by weights and
				measures agencies; these publications may subsequently be endorsed or adopted
				by the NCWM.
All of the Uniform Laws and Regulations given herein are
				recommended by NCWM for adoption by states when reviewing or amending their
				official laws and regulations in the areas covered. A similar recommendation is
				made with regard to the local jurisdictions within a state in the absence of
				the promulgation of such laws and regulations at the state level.
(Amended 2015)
B.
Purpose
The purpose of these Uniform Laws and Regulations is to
				achieve, to the maximum extent possible, uniformity in weights and measures
				laws and regulations among the various states and local jurisdictions in order
				to facilitate trade between the states, permit fair competition among
				businesses, and provide uniform and sufficient protection to all consumers in
				commercial weights and measures practices.
C.
Amendments
Proposed amendments to NIST Handbook 130 are deliberated and
				developed by NCWM's Committee on Laws and Regulations before presentation to
				the general membership for vote. In some instances amendments that
				significantly affect other NIST Handbooks may be processed jointly by two or
				more committees.
Amendments to the handbooks are made in accordance with NCWM
				procedures and policies. The process begins at the regional weights and
				measures association meetings in the fall of each year and it is culminated at
				the NCWM Annual Meeting in July. After passing through one or more of the
				regional associations, the proposed amendment is placed on the agenda of the
				appropriate NCWM committee for consideration at the NCWM's Interim Meeting in
				January, and after final deliberation and development by the committee the
				amendment may be presented to the membership for a vote at the annual NCWM
				meeting in July. NCWM policy provides for exceptions to the process to
				accommodate urgent or priority items. NIST staff provides technical assistance
				and advice throughout the process.
The policy is available on the NCWM website at
www.ncwm.net.
For information on the
				regional weights and measures associations, visit
www.ncwm.net/resources/regional associations.
(Amended 2015)
1
When referring to the
				Uniform Laws and Regulations in Handbook 130, Laws and Regulations will be
				capitalized. When referring to general federal or state laws and regulations,
				no capitalization will be used.
D.
Annual Meeting
1. The Committee will hold a public hearing
			 at the Annual Meeting to discuss items on its agenda.
2. Those who want to speak on an item during
			 the public hearing should request time from the Committee Chairman. The
			 Committee Chairman may impose time limits on presentations, the discussion of a
			 question, or the discussion of a proposed amendment.
E.
Final Committee Reports and
			 Conference Action
1. Following the
			 public hearings, the Committee will prepare its final report for action by the
			 voting membership of the Conference. Copies of the final report will be
			 provided to the membership prior to the voting session for that
			 report.
2. The Chairman of the
			 Committee will present the final report of the Committee to the Conference
			 body. A vote will be taken on items, proposals, or sections in the report as
			 circumstances require. The Conference will vote on the entire final report as
			 presented in accordance with established Conference voting procedures.
			 Parliamentary procedures according to Robert's Rules of Order, as amended by
			 NCWM Bylaws, must be adhered to in the presentation of, and any action on, a
			 Standing Committee report.
(Amended 1998)
F.
Revisions to the Handbook
NIST may not publish a new edition if it determines that it is
				reasonable to forego an annual publication (e.g., amendments were minor or
				editorial in nature) to save printing, mailing, and other costs. If this
				occurs, NIST will issue a notice that the current edition is still valid and
				will explain its action. (
Note:
Section numbering may be changed
				from one edition of the handbook to another to accommodate additions or
				deletions.) (Amended 2008)
G.
Annotation
Beginning in 1971, amendments or additions to sections in the
				Uniform Laws and Regulations are delineated at the end of each section (e.g.,
				"amended 1982") as a service to those states that are planning to update their
				own laws or regulations. The references to each revision and the year will
				enable legislators and rule makers to study the actual wording and rationale
				for changes (appearing in the Annual Report of NCWM for that year) and
				subsequently adopt changes in their own laws and regulations, modeling them
				after the Uniform Laws and Regulations.
H.
Effective Enforcement Dates of
			 Regulations
Unless otherwise specified, the new or amended regulations
				listed in this section are intended to become effective and subject to
				enforcement on January 1 of the year following adoption by NCWM.
1. Uniform Packaging and Labeling
			 Regulation
2. Uniform Regulation
			 for the Method of Sale of Commodities
3. Uniform Unit Pricing Regulation
4. Uniform Regulation for the Voluntary
			 Registration of Servicepersons and Service Agencies for Commercial Weighing and
			 Measuring Devices
5. Uniform Open
			 Dating Regulation
6. Uniform
			 Regulation for National Type Evaluation
7. Uniform Regulation for Engine Fuels,
			 Petroleum Products, and Automotive Lubricants (Added 1992)
I.
Section References
In most references made to specific sections or subsections in
				this handbook, the word "Section" is used, followed by the section
				number.
J.
The
			 International System of Units
The "International System of Units," "SI," or "SI Units" means
				the modernized metric system as established in 1960 by the General Conference
				on Weights and Measures (GIPM). In 1988, Congress amended the Metric Conversion
				Act of 1975 (see Section 5164 of Public Law 100-418 ) to declare that it is the
				policy of the United States to designate the metric system of measurement as
				the preferred measurement system for U.S. trade and commerce, and it further
				defined "the metric system of measurement" to be the International System as
				established by the GIPM and as interpreted or modified for the United States by
				the Secretary of Commerce. [See Metric Conversion Law
				15 U.S.C.
				205, NIST Special Publication 330 - The
				International System of Units (SI); NIST Special Publication 814 - Metric
				System of Measurement; and, Interpretation of the International System of Units
				for the United States in Federal Register of May 16, 2008, ("Federal Register"
				Vol. 73, No. 96) or subsequent revisions]. In 1992, Congress amended the
				Federal Fair Packaging and Labeling Act to require certain consumer commodities
				to include the appropriate SI units along with the U.S. customary units in
				their quantity statements.
(Added 1993) (Revised 2008)
K.
"Mass" and "Weight."
The mass of an object is a measure of the object's inertial
				property, or the amount of matter it contains. The weight of an object is a
				measure of the force exerted on the object by gravity, or the force needed to
				support it. The pull of gravity on the earth gives an object a downward
				acceleration of about 9.8 m/s2. In trade and
				commerce and everyday use, the term "weight" is often used as a synonym for
				"mass." The "net mass" or "net weight" declared on a label indicates that the
				package contains a specific amount of commodity exclusive of wrapping
				materials. The use of the term "mass" is predominant throughout the world, and
				is becoming increasingly common in the United States.
(Added 1993)
L.
Use of the Terms "Mass" and
			 "Weight."
[
NOTE
1
,
									page
									3]
When used in this handbook, the term "weight" means "mass." The
				term "weight" appears when U.S. customary units are cited or when both U.S.
				customary and SI units are included in a requirement. The terms "mass" or
				"masses" are used when only SI units are cited in a requirement. The following
				note appears where the term "weight" is first used in a law or
				regulation.
NOTE 1:
When used in this
				law (or regulation), the term "weight" means "mass." (See paragraphs K. "Mass"
				and Weight and L. Use of the Terms "Mass" and "Weight" in Section I.
				Introduction of NIST Handbook 130 for an explanation of these
				terms.)
(Added 1993)
Appendix A.
Fundamental Considerations
				Associated with the Enforcement of Handbook 44 Codes
1.
Uniformity of Requirements
1.1.
National Conference Codes.
- Weights and measures jurisdictions are urged to promulgate and adhere
			 to the National Conference codes, to the end that uniform requirements may be
			 in force throughout the country. This action is recommended even though a
			 particular jurisdiction does not wholly agree with every detail of the National
			 Conference codes. Uniformity of specifications and tolerances is an important
			 factor in the manufacture of commercial equipment. Deviations from standard
			 designs to meet the special demands of individual weights and measures
			 jurisdictions are expensive, and any increase in costs of manufacture is, of
			 course, passed on to the purchaser of equipment. On the other hand, if designs
			 can be standardized by the manufacturer to conform to a single set of technical
			 requirements, production costs can be kept down, to the ultimate advantage of
			 the general public. Moreover, it seems entirely logical that equipment that is
			 suitable for commercial use in the "specification" states should be equally
			 suitable for such use in other states.
Another consideration supporting the recommendation for
				uniformity of requirements among weights and measures jurisdictions is the
				cumulative and regenerative effect of the widespread enforcement of a single
				standard of design and performance. The enforcement effort in each jurisdiction
				can then reinforce the enforcement effort in all other jurisdictions. More
				effective regulatory control can be realized with less individual effort under
				a system of uniform requirements than under a system in which even minor
				deviations from standard practice are introduced by independent state
				action.
Since the National Conference codes represent the majority
				opinion of a large and representative group of experienced regulatory
				officials, and since these codes are recognized by equipment manufacturers as
				their basic guide in the design and construction of commercial weighing and
				measuring equipment, the acceptance and promulgation of these codes by each
				state are strongly recommended.
1.2.
Form of Promulgation.
- A
			 convenient and very effective form of promulgation already successfully used in
			 a considerable number of states is promulgation by citation of National
			 Institute of Standards and Technology Handbook 44. It is especially helpful
			 when the citation is so made that, as amendments are adopted from time to time
			 by the National Conference on Weights and Measures, these automatically go into
			 effect in the state regulatory authority. For example, the following form of
			 promulgation has been used successfully and is recommended for consideration:
The specifications, tolerances, and other technical
				requirements for weighing and measuring devices as recommended by the National
				Conference on Weights and Measures and published in the National Institute of
				Standards and Technology Handbook 44, "Specifications, Tolerances, and Other
				Technical Requirements for Weighing and Measuring Devices," and supplements
				thereto or revisions thereof, shall apply to commercial weighing and measuring
				devices in the state.
In some states, it is preferred to base technical requirements
				upon specific action of the state legislature rather than upon an act of
				promulgation by a state officer. The advantages cited above may be obtained and
				may yet be surrounded by adequate safeguards to insure proper freedom of action
				by the state enforcing officer if the legislature adopts the National
				Conference requirements by language somewhat as follows:
The specifications, tolerances, and other technical
				requirements for weighing and measuring devices as recommended by the National
				Conference on Weights and Measures shall be the specifications, tolerances, and
				other technical requirements for weighing and measuring devices of the state
				except insofar as specifically modified, amended, or rejected by a regulation
				issued by the state (insert title of enforcing officer).
2.
Tolerances for
			 Commercial Equipment
2.1.
Acceptance and Maintenance Tolerances.
- The official tolerances
			 prescribed by a weights and measures jurisdiction for commercial equipment are
			 the limits of inaccuracy officially permissible within that jurisdiction. It is
			 recognized that errorless value or performance of mechanical equipment is
			 unattainable. Tolerances are established, therefore, to fix the range of
			 inaccuracy within which equipment will be officially approved for commercial
			 use. In the case of classes of equipment on which the magnitude of the errors
			 of value or performance may be expected to change as a result of use, two sets
			 of tolerances are established: acceptance tolerances and maintenance
			 tolerances.
Acceptance tolerances are applied to new or newly reconditioned
				or adjusted equipment, and are smaller than (usually one-half of) the
				maintenance tolerances. Maintenance tolerances thus provide an additional range
				of inaccuracy within which equipment will be approved on subsequent tests,
				permitting a limited amount of deterioration before the equipment will be
				officially rejected for inaccuracy and before reconditioning or adjustment will
				be required. In effect, there is assured a reasonable period of use for
				equipment after it is placed in service before reconditioning will be
				officially required. The foregoing comments do not apply, of course, when only
				a single set of tolerance values is established, as is the case with equipment
				such as glass milk bottles and graduates, which maintain their original
				accuracy regardless of use, and measure-containers, which are used only
				once.
2.2.
Theory of
			 Tolerances.
- Tolerance values are so fixed that the permissible errors
			 are sufficiently small that there is no serious injury to either the buyer or
			 the seller of commodities, yet not so small as to make manufacturing or
			 maintenance costs of equipment disproportionately high. Obviously, the
			 manufacturer must know what tolerances his equipment is required to meet, so
			 that he can manufacture economically. His equipment must be good enough to
			 satisfy commercial needs, but should not be subject to such stringent tolerance
			 values as to make it unreasonably costly, complicated, or delicate.
2.3.
Tolerances and Adjustments.
- Tolerances are primarily accuracy criteria for use by the regulatory
			 official. However, when equipment is being adjusted for accuracy, either
			 initially or following repair or official rejection, the objective should be to
			 adjust as closely as practicable to zero error. Equipment owners should not
			 take advantage of tolerances by deliberately adjusting their equipment to have
			 a value, or to give performance, at or close to the tolerance limit. Nor should
			 the repair or service personnel bring equipment merely within tolerance range
			 when it is possible to adjust closer to zero
			 error.2
3.
Testing Apparatus
3.1.
Adequacy.
3- Tests can be made properly only
			 if, among other things, adequate testing apparatus is available. Testing
			 apparatus may be considered adequate only when it is properly designed for its
			 intended use, when it is so constructed that it will retain its characteristics
			 for a reasonable period under conditions of normal use, when it is available in
			 denominations appropriate for a proper determination of the value or
			 performance of the commercial equipment under test, and when it is accurately
			 calibrated.
3.2.
Tolerances
			 for Standards.
- Except for work of relatively high precision, it is
			 recommended that the accuracy of standards used in testing commercial weighing
			 and measuring equipment be established and maintained so that the use of
			 corrections is not necessary. When the standard is used without correction, its
			 combined error and uncertainty must be less than one-third of the applicable
			 device tolerance.
Device testing is complicated to some degree when corrections
				to standards are applied. When using a correction for a standard, the
				uncertainty associated with the corrected value must be less than one-third of
				the applicable device tolerance. The reason for this requirement is to give the
				device being tested as nearly as practicable the full benefit of its own
				tolerance.
3.3.
Accuracy of Standards.
- Prior to the official use of testing apparatus,
			 its accuracy should invariably be verified. Field standards should be
			 calibrated as often as circumstances require. By their nature, metal volumetric
			 field standards are more susceptible to damage in handling than are standards
			 of some other types. A field standard should be calibrated whenever damage is
			 known or suspected to have occurred or significant repairs have been made. In
			 addition, field standards, particularly volumetric standards, should be
			 calibrated with sufficient frequency to affirm their continued accuracy, so
			 that the official may always be in an unassailable position with respect to the
			 accuracy of his testing apparatus. Secondary field standards, such as special
			 fabric testing tapes, should be verified much more frequently than such basic
			 standards as steel tapes or volumetric provers to demonstrate their constancy
			 of value or performance.
Accurate and dependable results cannot be obtained with faulty
				or inadequate field standards. If either the service person or official is
				poorly equipped, their results cannot be expected to check consistently.
				Disagreements can be avoided and the servicing of commercial equipment can be
				expedited and improved if service persons and officials give equal attention to
				the adequacy and maintenance of their testing apparatus.
4.
Inspection of
			 Commercial Equipment
4.1.
Inspection Versus Testing.
- A distinction may be made between the
			 inspection and the testing of commercial equipment that should be useful in
			 differentiating between the two principal groups of official requirements;
			 i.e., specifications and performance requirements. Although the term inspection
			 is frequently loosely used to include everything that the official has to do in
			 connection with commercial equipment, it is useful to limit the scope of that
			 term primarily to examinations made to determine compliance with design,
			 maintenance, and user requirements. The term testing may then be limited to
			 those operations carried out to determine the accuracy of value or performance
			 of the equipment under examination by comparison with the actual physical
			 standards of the official. These two terms will be used herein in the limited
			 senses defined.
4.2.
Necessity for Inspection.
- It is not enough merely to determine that
			 the errors of equipment do not exceed the appropriate tolerances. Specification
			 and user requirements are as important as tolerance requirements and should be
			 enforced. Inspection is particularly important, and should be carried out with
			 unusual thoroughness whenever the official examines a type of equipment not
			 previously encountered.
This is the way the official learns whether or not the design
				and construction of the device conform to the specification requirements. But
				even a device of a type with which the official is thoroughly familiar and that
				he has previously found to meet specification requirements should not be
				accepted entirely on faith. Some part may have become damaged, or some detail
				of design may have been changed by the manufacturer, or the owner or operator
				may have removed an essential element or made an objectionable addition. Such
				conditions may be learned only by inspection. Some degree of inspection is
				therefore an essential part of the official examination of every piece of
				weighing or measuring equipment.
4.3.
Specification Requirements.
- A thorough knowledge by the official of the specification requirements
			 is a prerequisite to competent inspection of equipment. The inexperienced
			 official should have his specifications before him when making an inspection,
			 and should check the requirements one by one against the equipment itself.
			 Otherwise some important requirement may be overlooked. As experience is
			 gained, the official will become progressively less dependent on the handbook,
			 until finally observance of faulty conditions becomes almost automatic and the
			 time and effort required to do the inspecting are reduced to a minimum. The
			 printed specifications, however, should always be available for reference to
			 refresh the official's memory or to be displayed to support his decisions, and
			 they are an essential item of his kit.
Specification requirements for a particular class of equipment
				are not all to be found in the separate code for that class. The requirements
				of the General Code apply, in general, to all classes of equipment, and these
				must always be considered in combination with the requirements of the
				appropriate separate code to arrive at the total of the requirements applicable
				to a piece of commercial equipment.
4.4.
General Considerations.
-
			 The simpler the commercial device, the fewer are the specification requirements
			 affecting it, and the more easily and quickly can adequate inspection be made.
			 As mechanical complexity increases, however, inspection becomes increasingly
			 important and more time consuming, because the opportunities for the existence
			 of faulty conditions are multiplied. It is on the relatively complex device,
			 too, that the official must be on the alert to discover any modification that
			 may have been made by an operator that might adversely affect the proper
			 functioning of the device.
It is essential for the officials to familiarize themselves
				with the design and operating characteristics of the devices that he inspects
				and tests. Such knowledge can be obtained from the catalogs and advertising
				literature of device manufacturers, from trained service persons and plant
				engineers, from observation of the operations performed by service persons when
				reconditioning equipment in the field, and from a study of the devices
				themselves.
Inspection should include any auxiliary equipment and general
				conditions external to the device that may affect its performance
				characteristics. In order to prolong the life of the equipment and forestall
				rejection, inspection should also include observation of the general
				maintenance of the device and of the proper functioning of all required
				elements. The official should look for worn or weakened mechanical parts, leaks
				in volumetric equipment, or elements in need of cleaning.
4.5.
Misuse of Equipment.
-
			 Inspection, coupled with judicious inquiry, will sometimes disclose that
			 equipment is being improperly used, either through ignorance of the proper
			 method of operation or because some other method is preferred by the operator.
			 Equipment should be operated only in the manner that is obviously indicated by
			 its construction or that is indicated by instructions on the equipment, and
			 operation in any other manner should be prohibited.
4.6.
Recommendations.
- A
			 comprehensive knowledge of each installation will enable the official to make
			 constructive recommendations to the equipment owner regarding proper
			 maintenance of his weighing and measuring devices and the suitability of his
			 equipment for the purposes for which it is being used or for which it is
			 proposed that it be used. Such recommendations are always in order and may be
			 very helpful to an owner. The official will, of course, carefully avoid
			 partiality toward or against equipment of specific makes, and will confine his
			 recommendations to points upon which he is qualified, by knowledge and
			 experience, to make suggestions of practical merit.
4.7.
Accurate and Correct Equipment.
- Finally, the weights and measures official is reminded that commercial
			 equipment may be accurate without being correct. A piece of equipment is
			 accurate when its performance or value (that is, its indications, its
			 deliveries, its recorded representations, or its capacity or actual value,
			 etc., as determined by tests made with suitable standards) conforms to the
			 standard within the applicable tolerances and other performance requirements.
			 Equipment that fails so to conform is inaccurate. A piece of equipment is
			 correct when, in addition to being accurate, it meets all applicable
			 specification requirements. Equipment that fails to meet any of the
			 requirements for correct equipment is incorrect. Only equipment that is correct
			 should be sealed and approved for commercial
			 use.4
5.
Correction of Commercial
			 Equipment
5.1.
Adjustable
			 Elements.
- Many types of weighing and measuring instruments are not
			 susceptible to adjustment for accuracy by means of adjustable elements. Linear
			 measures, liquid measures, graduates, 4 See Section 1.10. General Code and
			 Appendix D. Definitions.
measure-containers, milk and lubricating-oil bottles, farm milk
				tanks, dry measures, and some of the more simple types of scales are in this
				category. Other types (for example, taximeters and odometers and some metering
				devices) may be adjusted in the field, but only by changing certain parts such
				as gears in gear trains.
Some types, of which fabric-measuring devices and
				cordage-measuring devices are examples, are not intended to be adjusted in the
				field and require reconditioning in shop or factory if inaccurate.
				Liquid-measuring devices and most scales are equipped with adjustable elements,
				and some vehicle-tank compartments have adjustable indicators. Field
				adjustments may readily be made on such equipment. In the discussion that
				follows, the principles pointed out and the recommendations made apply to
				adjustments on any commercial equipment, by whatever means accomplished.
5.2.
When Corrections
			 Should Be Made.
- One of the primary duties of a weights and measures
			 official is to determine whether equipment is suitable for commercial use. If a
			 device conforms to all legal requirements, the official "marks" or "seals" it
			 to indicate approval. If it does not conform to all official requirements, the
			 official is required to take action to ensure that the device is corrected
			 within a reasonable period of time. Devices with performance errors that could
			 result in serious economic injury to either party in a transaction should be
			 prohibited from use immediately and not allowed to be returned to service until
			 necessary corrections have been made. The official should consider the most
			 appropriate action, based on all available information and economic factors.
Some officials contend that it is justifiable for the official
				to make minor corrections and adjustments if there is no service agency nearby
				or if the owner or operator depends on this single device and would be "out of
				business" if the use of the device were prohibited until repairs could be made.
				Before adjustments are made at the request of the owner or the owner's
				representative, the official should be confident that the problem is not due to
				faulty installation or a defective part, and that the adjustment will correct
				the problem. The official should never undertake major repairs, or even minor
				corrections, if services of commercial agencies are readily available. The
				official should always be mindful of conflicts of interest before attempting to
				perform any services other than normal device examination and testing
				duties.
(Amended 1995)
5.3.
Gauging.
- In the majority
			 of cases, when the weights and measures official tests commercial equipment, he
			 is verifying the accuracy of a value or the accuracy of the performance as
			 previously established either by himself or by someone else. There are times,
			 however, when the test of the official is the initial test on the basis of
			 which the calibration of the device is first determined or its performance
			 first established. The most common example of such gauging is in connection
			 with vehicle tanks the compartments of which are used as measures. Frequently
			 the official makes the first determination on the capacities of the
			 compartments of a vehicle tank, and his test results are used to determine the
			 proper settings of the compartment indicators for the exact compartment
			 capacities desired. Adjustments of the position of an indicator under these
			 circumstances are clearly not the kind of adjustments discussed in the
			 preceding paragraph.
6.
Rejection of Commercial Equipment
6.1.
Rejection and Condemnation.
- The Uniform Weights and Measures Law contains a provision stating that
			 the director shall reject and order to be corrected such physical weights and
			 measures or devices found to be incorrect. Weights and measures and devices
			 that have been rejected, may be seized if not corrected within a reasonable
			 time or if used or disposed of in a manner not specifically authorized. The
			 director shall remove from service and may seize weights and measures found to
			 be incorrect that are not capable of being made correct.
These broad powers should be used by the official with
				discretion. The director should always keep in mind the property rights of an
				equipment owner, and cooperate in working out arrangements whereby an owner can
				realize at least something from equipment that has been rejected. In cases of
				doubt, the official should initially reject rather than condemn outright.
				Destruction and confiscation of equipment are harsh procedures. Power to seize
				and destroy is necessary for adequate control of extreme situations, but
				seizure and destruction should be resorted to only when clearly
				justified.
On the other hand, rejection is clearly inappropriate for many
				items of measuring equipment. This is true for most linear measures, many
				liquid and dry measures, graduates, measure-containers, milk bottles,
				lubricating-oil bottles,
and some scales. When such equipment is "incorrect," it is
				either impractical or impossible to adjust or repair it, and the official has
				no alternative to outright condemnation. When only a few such items are
				involved, immediate destruction or confiscation is probably the best procedure.
				If a considerable number of items are involved (as, for example, a stock of
				measures in the hands of a dealer or a large shipment of bottles), return of
				these to the manufacturer for credit or replacement should ordinarily be
				permitted provided that the official is assured that they will not get into
				commercial use. In rare instances, confiscation and destruction are justified
				as a method of control when less harsh methods have failed.
In the case of incorrect mechanisms such as fabric-measuring
				devices, taximeters, liquid-measuring devices, and most scales, repair of the
				equipment is usually possible, so rejection is the customary procedure. Seizure
				may occasionally be justified, but in the large majority of instances this
				should be unnecessary. Even in the case of worn-out equipment, some salvage is
				usually possible, and this should be permitted under proper controls.
(Amended 1995)
7.
Tagging of Equipment
7.1.
Rejected and Condemned.
-
			 It will ordinarily be practicable to tag or mark as rejected each item of
			 equipment found to be incorrect and considered susceptible of proper
			 reconditioning. However, it can be considered justifiable not to mark as
			 rejected incorrect devices capable of meeting acceptable performance
			 requirements if they are to be allowed to remain in service for a reasonable
			 time until minor problems are corrected since marks of rejection may tend to be
			 misleading about a device's ability to produce accurate measurements during the
			 correction period. The tagging of equipment as condemned, or with a similar
			 label to indicate that it is permanently out of service, is not recommended if
			 there is any other way in which the equipment can definitely be put out of
			 service. Equipment that cannot successfully be repaired should be dismantled,
			 removed from the premises, or confiscated by the official rather than merely
			 being tagged as "condemned."
(Amended 1995)
7.2.
Nonsealed and Noncommercial.
- Rejection is not appropriate if measuring equipment cannot be tested
			 by the official at the time of his regular visit-for example, when there is no
			 gasoline in the supply tank of a gasoline-dispensing device. Some officials
			 affix to such equipment a nonsealed tag stating that the device has not been
			 tested and sealed and that it must not be used commercially until it has been
			 officially tested and approved. This is recommended whenever considerable time
			 will elapse before the device can be tested.
Where the official finds in the same establishment, equipment
				that is in commercial use and also equipment suitable for commercial use that
				is not presently in service, but which may be put into service at some future
				time, he may treat the latter equipment in any of the following ways:
(a) Test and approve the same as commercial
			 equipment in use.
(b) Refrain from
			 testing it and remove it from the premises to preclude its use for commercial
			 purposes.
(c) Mark the equipment
			 nonsealed.
Where the official finds commercial equipment and noncommercial
				equipment installed or used in close proximity, he may treat the noncommercial
				equipment in any of the following ways:
(a) Test and approve the same as commercial
			 equipment.
(b) Physically separate
			 the two groups of equipment so that misuse of the noncommercial equipment will
			 be prevented.
(c) Tag it to show
			 that it has not been officially tested and is not to be used
			 commercially.
8.
Records of Equipment
8.1. The official will be well advised to
			 keep careful records of equipment that is rejected, so that he may follow up to
			 insure that the necessary repairs have been made. As soon as practicable
			 following completion of repairs, the equipment should be retested. Complete
			 records should also be kept of equipment that has been tagged as nonsealed or
			 noncommercial. Such records may be invaluable should it subsequently become
			 necessary to take disciplinary steps because of improper use of such
			 equipment.
9.
Sealing of Equipment
9.1.
Types
			 of Seals and Their Locations.
- Most weights and measures jurisdictions
			 require that all equipment officially approved for commercial use (with certain
			 exceptions to be pointed out later) be suitably marked or sealed to show
			 approval. This is done primarily for the benefit of the public to show that
			 such equipment has been officially examined and approved. The seal of approval
			 should be as conspicuous as circumstances permit and should be of such a
			 character and so applied that it will be reasonably permanent. Uniformity of
			 position of the seal on similar types of equipment is also desirable as a
			 further aid to the public.
The official will need more than one form of seal to meet the
				requirements of different kinds of equipment. Good quality, weather-resistant,
				water-adhesive, or pressure-sensitive seals or decalcomania seals are
				recommended for fabric-measuring devices, liquid-measuring devices, taximeters,
				and most scales, because of their permanence and good appearance. Steel stamps
				are most suitable for liquid and dry measures, for some types of linear
				measures, and for weights. An etched seal, applied with suitable etching ink,
				is excellent for steel tapes, and greatly preferable to a seal applied with a
				steel stamp. The only practicable seal for a graduate is one marked with a
				diamond or carbide pencil, or one etched with glass-marking ink. For a vehicle
				tank, the official may wish to devise a relatively large seal, perhaps of
				metal, with provision for stamping data relative to compartment capacities, the
				whole to be welded or otherwise permanently attached to the shell of the tank.
				In general, the lead-and-wire seal is not suitable as an approval seal.
9.2.
Exceptions.
-
			 Commercial equipment such as measure-containers, milk bottles, and
			 lubricating-oil bottles are not tested individually because of the time element
			 involved. Because manufacturing processes for these items are closely
			 controlled, an essentially uniform product is produced by each manufacturer.
			 The official normally tests samples of these items prior to their sale within
			 his jurisdiction and subsequently makes spot checks by testing samples selected
			 at random from new stocks.
Another exception to the general rule for sealing approved
				equipment is found in certain very small weights whose size precludes
				satisfactory stamping with a steel die.
10.
Rounding Off Numerical
			 Values
10.1.
Definition.
- To round off or round a numerical value is to change the value of
			 recorded digits to some other value considered more desirable for the purpose
			 at hand by dropping or changing certain figures. For example, if a computed,
			 observed, or accumulated value is 4738, this can be rounded off to the nearest
			 thousand, hundred, or ten, as desired. Such rounded-off values would be,
			 respectively, 5000, 4700, and 4740. Similarly, a value such as 47.382 can be
			 rounded off to two decimal places, to one decimal place, or to the units place.
			 The rounded-off figures in this example would be, respectively, 47.38, 47.4,
			 and 47.
10.2.
General Rules.
- The general rules for rounding off may be stated briefly as follows:
(a) When the figure next beyond the last
			 figure or place to be retained is less than 5, the figure in the last place
			 retained is to be kept unchanged. When rounding off 4738 to the nearest
			 hundred, it is noted that the figure 3 (next beyond the last figure to be
			 retained) is less than 5. Thus the rounded-off value would be 4700. Likewise,
			 47.382 rounded to two decimal places becomes 47.38.
(b) When the figure next beyond the last
			 figure or place to be retained is greater than 5, the figure in the last place
			 retained is to be increased by 1. When rounding off 4738 to the nearest
			 thousand, it is noted that the figure 7 (next beyond the last figure to be
			 retained) is greater than 5. Thus the rounded-off value would be 5000.
			 Likewise, 47.382 rounded to one decimal place becomes 47.4.
(c) When the figure next beyond the last
			 figure to be retained is 5 followed by any figures other than zero(s), treat as
			 in (b) above; that is, the figure in the last place retained is to be increased
			 by 1. When rounding off 4501 to the nearest thousand, 1 is added to the
			 thousands figure and the result becomes 5000.
(d) When the figure next beyond the last
			 figure to be retained is 5 and there are no figures, or only zeros, beyond this
			 5, the figure in the last place to be retained is to be left unchanged if it is
			 even (0, 2, 4, 6, or 8) and is to be increased by 1 if it is odd (1, 3, 5, 7,
			 or 9). This is the odd and even rule, and may be stated as follows: "If odd,
			 then add." Thus, rounding off to the first decimal place, 47.25 would become
			 47.2 and 47.15 would become 47.2. Also, rounded to the nearest thousand, 4500
			 would become 4000 and 1500 would become 2000.
It is important to remember that, when there are two or more
				figures to the right of the place where the last significant figure of the
				final result is to be, the entire series of such figures must be rounded off in
				one step and not in two or more successive rounding steps. [Expressed
				differently, when two or more such figures are involved, these are not to be
				rounded off individually, but are to be rounded off as a group.] Thus, when
				rounding off 47.3499 to the first decimal place, the result becomes 47.3. In
				arriving at this result, the figures "499" are treated as a group. Since the 4
				next beyond the last figure to be retained is less than 5, the "499" is dropped
				(see subparagraph (a) above). It would be incorrect to round off these figures
				successively to the left so that 47.3499 would become 47.350 and then 47.35 and
				then 47.4.
10.3.
Rules for Reading of Indications.
- An important aspect of
			 rounding off values is the application of these rules to the reading of
			 indications of an indicator-and-graduated-scale combination (where the majority
			 of the indications may be expected to lie somewhere between two graduations) if
			 it is desired to read or record values only to the nearest graduation. Consider
			 a vertical graduated scale and an indicator. Obviously, if the indicator is
			 between two graduations but is closer to one graduation than it is to the other
			 adjacent graduation, the value of the closer graduation is the one to be read
			 or recorded.
In the case where, as nearly as can be determined, the
				indicator is midway between two graduations, the odd-and-even rule is invoked,
				and the value to be read or recorded is that of the graduation whose value is
				even. For example, if the indicator lies exactly midway between two graduations
				having values of 471 and 472, respectively, the indication should be read or
				recorded as 472, this being an even value. If midway between graduations having
				values of 474 and 475, the even value 474 should be read or recorded.
				Similarly, if the two graduations involved had values of 470 and 475, the even
				value of 470 should be read or recorded.
A special case not covered by the foregoing paragraph is that
				of a graduated scale in which successive graduations are numbered by twos, all
				graduations thus having even values; for example, 470, 472, 474, etc. When, in
				this case, an indication lies midway between two graduations, the recommended
				procedure is to depart from the practice of reading or recording only to the
				value of the nearest graduation and to read or record the intermediate odd
				value. For example, an indication midway between 470 and 472 should be read as
				471.
10.4.
Rules for
			 Common Fractions.
- When applying the rounding-off rules to common
			 fractions, the principles are to be applied to the numerators of the fractions
			 that have, if necessary, been reduced to a common denominator. The principle of
			 "5s" is changed to the one-half principle; that is, add if more than one-half,
			 drop if less than one-half, and apply the odd-and even rule if exactly
			 one-half.
For example, a series of values might be 
				11/32, 
				12/32, 
				13/32, 
				14/32 , 
				15/32, 
				16/32, 
				17/32, 
				18/32, 
				19/32. Assume that these values are to
				be rounded off to the nearest eighth (4/32 ).
				Then,
11/32 becomes 1.
				(1/32 is less than half of 
				4/32 and accordingly is dropped.)
12/32 becomes 1.
				(2/32 is exactly one-half of 
				4/32; it is dropped because it is
				rounded (down) to the "even" eighth, which in this instance is 
				0/8.)
13/32 becomes
				14/32 or 11/8.
				(3/32 is more than half of 
				4/32, and accordingly is rounded "up" to
				
				4/32 or 
				1/8).
14/32 remains unchanged, being an
				exact eighth (11/8).
15/32 becomes
				14/32 or 11/8.
				(5/32 is 
				1/32 more than an exact 
				1/8; 
				1/32 is less than half of 
				4/32 and accordingly is dropped.)
16/32 becomes
				12/8 or 1¼. (6/32
				is 
				2/32 more than an exact 
				1/8; 
				2/32 is exactly one-half of 
				4/32, and the final fraction is rounded
				(up) to the "even" eighth, which in this instance is 
				2/8.)
17/32 becomes
				12/8 or 1¼. (7/32
				is 
				3/32 more than an exact 
				1/8; 
				3/32 is more than one-half of 
				4/32 and accordingly the final fraction
				is rounded (up) to 
				2/8 or ¼.)
18/32 remains unchanged, being an
				exact eighth (12/8 or 1¼.)
19/32 becomes
				12/8 or 1¼. (9/32
				is 
				1/32 more than an exact 
				1/8; 
				1/32 is less than half of 
				4/32 and accordingly is dropped.)
Appendix B.
Units and Systems of Measurement
				Their Origin, Development, and Present Status
1.
Introduction
The National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)
				(formerly the National Bureau of Standards) was established by Act of Congress
				in 1901 to serve as a national scientific laboratory in the physical sciences,
				and to provide fundamental measurement standards for science and industry. In
				carrying out these related functions the Institute conducts research and
				development in many fields of physics, mathematics, chemistry, and engineering.
				At the time of its founding, the Institute had custody of two primary standards
				- the meter bar for length and the kilogram cylinder for mass. With the
				phenomenal growth of science and technology over the past century, the
				Institute has become a major research institution concerned not only with
				everyday weights and measures, but also with hundreds of other scientific and
				engineering standards that are necessary to the industrial progress of the
				nation. Nevertheless, the country still looks to NIST for information on the
				units of measurement, particularly their definitions and equivalents.
The subject of measurement systems and units can be treated
				from several different standpoints. Scientists and engineers are interested in
				the methods by which precision measurements are made. State weights and
				measures officials are concerned with laws and regulations that assure equity
				in the marketplace, protect public health and safety, and with methods for
				verifying commercial weighing and measuring devices. But a vastly larger group
				of people is interested in some general knowledge of the origin and development
				of measurement systems, of the present status of units and standards, and of
				miscellaneous facts that will be useful in everyday life. This material has
				been prepared to supply that information on measurement systems and units that
				experience has shown to be the common subject of inquiry.
2.
Units and Systems of
			 Measurement
The expression "weights and measures" is often used to refer to
				measurements of length, mass, and capacity or volume, thus excluding such
				quantities as electrical and time measurements and thermometry. This section on
				units and measurement systems presents some fundamental information to clarify
				the concepts of this subject and to eliminate erroneous and misleading use of
				terms.
It is essential that the distinction between the terms "units"
				and "standards" be established and kept in mind.
A
unit
is a special quantity in terms
				of which other quantities are expressed. In general, a unit is fixed by
				definition and is independent of such physical conditions as temperature.
				Examples: the meter, the liter, the gram, the yard, the pound, the
				gallon.
A
standard
is a physical realization
				or representation of a unit. In general, it is not entirely independent of
				physical conditions, and it is a representation of the unit only under
				specified conditions. For example, a meter standard has a length of one meter
				when at some definite temperature and supported in a certain manner. If
				supported in a different manner, it might have to be at a different temperature
				to have a length of one meter.
2.1.
Origin and Early History of Units and Standards.
2.1.1.
General Survey of Early History
			 of Measurement Systems.
- Weights and measures were among the earliest
			 tools invented by man. Primitive societies needed rudimentary measures for many
			 tasks: constructing dwellings of an appropriate size and shape, fashioning
			 clothing, or bartering food or raw materials.
Man understandably turned first to parts of the body and the
				natural surroundings for measuring instruments. Early Babylonian and Egyptian
				records and the Bible indicate that length was first measured with the forearm,
				hand, or finger and that time was measured by the periods of the sun, moon, and
				other heavenly bodies. When it was necessary to compare the capacities of
				containers such as gourds or clay or metal vessels, they were filled with plant
				seeds which were then counted to measure the volumes. When means for weighing
				were invented, seeds and stones served as standards. For instance, the "carat,"
				still used as a unit for gems, was derived from the carob seed.
Our present knowledge of early weights and measures comes from
				many sources. Archaeologists have recovered some rather early standards and
				preserved them in museums. The comparison of the dimensions of buildings with
				the descriptions of contemporary writers is another source of information. An
				interesting example of this is the comparison of the dimensions of the Greek
				Parthenon with the description given by Plutarch from which a fairly accurate
				idea of the size of the Attic foot is obtained. In some cases, we have only
				plausible theories and we must sometimes select the interpretation to be given
				to the evidence.
For example, does the fact that the length of the double-cubit
				of early Babylonia was equal (within two parts per thousand) to the length of
				the seconds pendulum at Babylon suggest a scientific knowledge of the pendulum
				at a very early date, or do we merely have a curious coincidence? By studying
				the evidence given by all available sources, and by correlating the relevant
				facts, we obtain some idea of the origin and development of the units. We find
				that they have changed more or less gradually with the passing of time in a
				complex manner because of a great variety of modifying influences. We find the
				units modified and grouped into measurement systems: the Babylonian system, the
				Egyptian system, the Phileterian system of the Ptolemaic age, the Olympic
				system of Greece, the Roman system, and the British system, to mention only a
				few.
2.1.2.
Origin
			 and Development of Some Common Customary Units.
- The origin and
			 development of units of measurement has been investigated in considerable
			 detail and a number of books have been written on the subject. It is only
			 possible to give here, somewhat sketchily, the story about a few units.
Units of length: The
cubit
was the
				first recorded unit used by ancient peoples to measure length. There were
				several cubits of different magnitudes that were used. The common cubit was the
				length of the forearm from the elbow to the tip of the middle finger. It was
				divided into the span of the hand (one-half cubit), the palm or width of the
				hand (one sixth), and the digit or width of a finger (one twenty-fourth). The
				Royal or Sacred Cubit, which was 7 palms or 28 digits long, was used in
				constructing buildings and monuments and in surveying. The
inch
,
foot
, and
yard
evolved from these units through a complicated
				transformation not yet fully understood. Some believe they evolved from cubic
				measures; others believe they were simple proportions or multiples of the
				cubit. In any case, the Greeks and Romans inherited the foot from the
				Egyptians. The Roman foot was divided into both 12 unciae (inches) and 16
				digits. The Romans also introduced the mile of 1000 paces or double steps, the
				pace being equal to five Roman feet. The Roman mile of 5000 feet was introduced
				into England during the occupation. Queen Elizabeth, who reigned from 1558 to
				1603, changed, by statute, the mile to 5280 feet or 8 furlongs, a furlong being
				40 rods of 5½ yards each.
The introduction of the
yard
as a unit
				of length came later, but its origin is not definitely known. Some believe the
				origin was the double cubit, others believe that it originated from cubic
				measure. Whatever its origin, the early yard was divided by the binary method
				into 2, 4, 8, and 16 parts called the half-yard, span, finger, and nail. The
				association of the yard with the "gird" or circumference of a person's waist or
				with the distance from the tip of the nose to the end of the thumb of Henry I
				are probably standardizing actions, since several yards were in use in Great
				Britain.
The
point
, which is a unit for
				measuring print type, is recent. It originated with Pierre Simon Fournier in
				1737. It was modified and developed by the Didot brothers, Francois Ambroise
				and Pierre Francois, in 1755. The point was first used in the United States in
				1878 by a Chicago type foundry (Marder, Luse, and Company). Since 1886, a point
				has been exactly 0.351 459 8 millimeters, or about 
				1/72 inch.
Units of mass: The
grain
was the
				earliest unit of mass and is the smallest unit in the apothecary, avoirdupois,
				Tower, and Troy systems. The early unit was a grain of wheat or barleycorn used
				to weigh the precious metals silver and gold. Larger units preserved in stone
				standards were developed that were used as both units of mass and of monetary
				currency. The
pound
was derived from the mina used by
				ancient civilizations. A
smaller unit was the shekel, and a larger unit was the talent.
				The magnitude of these units varied from place to place. The Babylonians and
				Sumerians had a system in which there were 60 shekels in a mina and 60 minas in
				a talent. The Roman talent consisted of 100 libra (pound) which were smaller in
				magnitude than the mina. The Troy pound used in England and the United States
				for monetary purposes, like the Roman pound, was divided into 12 ounces, but
				the Roman uncia (ounce) was smaller. The
carat
is a
				unit for measuring gemstones that had its origin in the carob seed, which later
				was standardized at 
				1/444 ounce and then 0.2 gram.
Goods of commerce were originally traded by number or volume.
				When weighing of goods began, units of mass based on a volume of grain or water
				were developed. For example, the talent in some places was approximately equal
				to the mass of one cubic foot of water. Was this a coincidence or by design?
				The diverse magnitudes of units having the same name, which still appear today
				in our dry and liquid measures, could have arisen from the various commodities
				traded. The larger avoirdupois
pound
for goods of
				commerce might have been based on volume of water, which has a higher bulk
				density than grain. For example, the Egyptian hon was a volume unit about 11 %
				larger than a cubic palm and corresponded to one mina of water. It was almost
				identical in volume to the present U.S. pint.
The
stone
,
quarter
,
hundredweight
, and
ton
were larger units of mass used in Great Britain.
				Today only the stone continues in customary use for measuring personal body
				weight. The present stone is 14 pounds, but an earlier unit appears to have
				been 16 pounds. The other units were multiples of 2, 8, and 160 times the
				stone, or 28, 112, and 2240 pounds, respectively. The hundredweight was
				approximately equal to two talents. In the United States the ton of 2240 pounds
				is called the "long ton." The "short ton" is equal to 2000 pounds.
Units of time and angle: We can trace the division of the
				circle into 360 degrees and the day into hours, minutes, and seconds to the
				Babylonians who had a sexagesimal system of numbers. The 360 degrees may have
				been related to a year of 360 days.
2.2.
The Metric System.
2.2.1.
Definition, Origin, and
			 Development.
- Metric systems of units have evolved since the adoption
			 of the first well-defined system in France in 1791. During this evolution the
			 use of these systems spread throughout the world, first to the
			 non-English-speaking countries, and more recently to the English-speaking
			 countries. The first metric system was based on the centimeter, gram, and
			 second (cgs) and these units were particularly convenient in science and
			 technology. Later metric systems were based on the meter, kilogram, and second
			 (mks) to improve the value of the units for practical applications. The present
			 metric system is the International System of Units (SI). It is also based on
			 the meter, kilogram and second as well as additional base units for
			 temperature, electric current, luminous intensity, and amount of substance. The
			 International System of Units is referred to as the modern metric system.
The adoption of the metric system in France was slow, but its
				desirability as an international system was recognized by geodesists and
				others. On May 20, 1875, an international treaty known as the International
				Metric Convention or the Treaty of the Meter was signed by seventeen countries
				including the United States. This treaty established the following
				organizations to conduct international activities relating to a uniform system
				for measurements:
(1) The General
			 Conference on Weights and Measures (French initials: CGPM), an
			 intergovernmental conference of official delegates of member nations and the
			 supreme authority for all actions;
(2) The International Committee of Weights
			 and Measures (French initials: CIPM), consisting of selected scientists and
			 metrologists, which prepares and executes the decisions of the CGPM and is
			 responsible for the supervision of the International Bureau of Weights and
			 Measures;
(3) The International
			 Bureau of Weights and Measures (French initials: BIPM), a permanent laboratory
			 and world center of scientific metrology, the activities of which include the
			 establishment of the basic standards and scales of the principal physical
			 quantities and maintenance of the international prototype standards.
The National Institute of Standards and Technology provides
				official United States representation in these organizations. The CGPM, the
				CIPM, and the BIPM have been major factors in the continuing refinement of the
				metric system on a scientific basis and in the evolution of the International
				System of Units.
Multiples and submultiples of metric units are related by
				powers of ten. This relationship is compatible with the decimal system of
				numbers and it contributes greatly to the convenience of metric units.
International System of Units.
- At the end of
				World War II, a number of different systems of measurement still existed
				throughout the world. Some of these systems were variations of the metric
				system, and others were based on the customary U.S. customary system of the
				English-speaking countries. It was recognized that additional steps were needed
				to promote a worldwide measurement system. As a result the
				9th GCPM, in 1948, asked the ICPM to conduct an
				international study of the measurement needs of the scientific, technical, and
				educational communities. Based on the findings of this study, the
				10th General Conference in 1954 decided that an
				international system should be derived from six base units to provide for the
				measurement of temperature and optical radiation in addition to mechanical and
				electromagnetic quantities. The six base units recommended were the meter,
				kilogram, second, ampere, Kelvin degree (later renamed the kelvin), and the
				candela.
In 1960, the 11th General Conference
				of Weights and Measures named the system based on the six base quantities the
				International System of Units, abbreviated SI from the French name: Le
				Système International d'Unités. The SI metric system is now
				either obligatory or permissible throughout the world.
2.2.3.
Units and Standards of the
			 Metric System.
- In the early metric system there were two fundamental
			 or base units, the meter and the kilogram, for length and mass. The other units
			 of length and mass, and all units of area, volume, and compound units such as
			 density were derived from these two fundamental units.
The meter was originally intended to be one ten-millionth part
				of a meridional quadrant of the earth. The Meter of the Archives, the platinum
				length standard which was the standard for most of the
				19th century, at first was supposed to be exactly
				this fractional part of the quadrant. More refined measurements over the
				earth's surface showed that this supposition was not correct. In 1889, a new
				international metric standard of length, the International Prototype Meter, a
				graduated line standard of platinum-iridium, was selected from a group of bars
				because precise measurements found it to have the same length as the Meter of
				the Archives. The meter was then defined as the distance, under specified
				conditions, between the lines on the International Prototype Meter without
				reference to any measurements of the earth or to the Meter of the Archives,
				which it superseded. Advances in science and technology have made it possible
				to improve the definition of the meter and reduce the uncertainties associated
				with artifacts. From 1960 to 1983, the meter was defined as the length equal to
				1 650 763.73 wavelengths in a vacuum of the radiation corresponding to the
				transition between the specified energy levels of the krypton 86 atom. Since
				1983 the meter has been defined as the length of the path traveled by light in
				a vacuum during an interval of 
				1/299 792 458 of a second.
The kilogram, originally defined as the mass of one cubic
				decimeter of water at the temperature of maximum density, was known as the
				Kilogram of the Archives. It was replaced after the International Metric
				Convention in 1875 by the International Prototype Kilogram which became the
				unit of mass without reference to the mass of a cubic decimeter of water or to
				the Kilogram of the Archives. Each country that subscribed to the International
				Metric Convention was assigned one or more copies of the international
				standards; these are known as National Prototype Meters and Kilograms.
The liter is a unit of capacity or volume. In 1964, the
				12th GCPM redefined the liter as being one cubic
				decimeter. By its previous definition - the volume occupied, under standard
				conditions, by a quantity of pure water having a mass of one kilogram - the
				liter was larger than the cubic decimeter by 28 parts per 1 000 000. Except for
				determinations of high precision, this difference is so small as to be of no
				consequence.
The modern metric system (SI) includes two classes of
				units:
(a)
base
units for length, mass, time, temperature,
			 electric current, luminous intensity, and amount of substance; and
(b)
derived
units
			 for all other quantities (e.g., work, force, power) expressed in terms of the
			 seven base units.
For details, see NIST Special Publication 330 (2008), The
				International System of Units (SI) and NIST Special Publication 811 (2008),
				Guide for the Use of the International System of Units.
2.2.4.
International Bureau
			 of Weights and Measures.
- The International Bureau of Weights and
			 Measures (BIPM) was established at Sèvres, a suburb of Paris, France, by
			 the International Metric Convention of May 20, 1875. The BIPM maintains the
			 International Prototype Kilogram, many secondary standards, and equipment for
			 comparing standards and making precision measurements. The Bureau, funded by
			 assessment of the signatory governments, is truly international. In recent
			 years the scope of the work at the Bureau has been considerably broadened. It
			 now carries on researches in the fields of electricity, photometry and
			 radiometry, ionizing radiations, and time and frequency besides its work in
			 mass, length, and thermometry.
2.2.5.
Status of the Metric System in
			 the United States.
- The use of the metric system in this country was
			 legalized by Act of Congress in 1866, but was not made obligatory then or
			 since. Following the signing of the Convention of the Meter in 1875, the United
			 States acquired national prototype standards for the meter and the kilogram.
			 U.S. Prototype Kilogram No. 20 continues to be the primary standard for mass in
			 the United States. It is recalibrated from time to time at the BIPM. The
			 prototype meter has been replaced by modern stabilized lasers following the
			 most recent definition of the meter.
From 1893 until 1959, the yard was defined as equal exactly to 
				3600/3937 meter. In 1959, a small change
				was made in the definition of the yard to resolve discrepancies both in this
				country and abroad. Since 1959, we define the yard as equal exactly to 0.9144
				meter; the new yard is shorter than the old yard by exactly two parts in a
				million. At the same time, it was decided that any data expressed in feet
				derived from geodetic surveys within the United States would continue to bear
				the relationship as defined in 1893 (one foot equals 
				1200/3937 meter). We call this foot the
				U.S. Survey Foot, while the foot defined in 1959 is called the International
				Foot. Measurements expressed in U.S. statute miles, survey feet, rods, chains,
				links, or the squares thereof, and acres should be converted to the
				corresponding metric values by using pre-1959 conversion factors if more than
				five significant figure accuracy is required.
Since 1970, actions have been taken to encourage the use of
				metric units of measurement in the United States. A brief summary of actions by
				Congress is provided below as reported in the Federal Register Notice dated
				July 28, 1998.
Section 403 of Public Law 93-380, the Education Amendment of
				1974, states that it is the policy of the United States to encourage
				educational agencies and institutions to prepare students to use the metric
				system of measurement as part of the regular education program. Under both this
				act and the Metric Conversion Act of 1975, the "metric system of measurement"
				is defined as the International System of Units as established in 1960 by the
				General Conference on Weights and Measures and interpreted or modified for the
				United States by the Secretary of Commerce (Section 4(4)- Public Law 94-168;
				Section 403(a)(3)- Public Law 93-380 ). The Secretary has delegated authority
				under these subsections to the Director of the National Institute of Standards
				and Technology.
Section 5164 of Public Law 100-418, the Omnibus Trade and
				Competitiveness Act of 1988, amends Public Law 94-168, The Metric Conversion
				Act of 1975. In particular, Section 3, The Metric Conversion Act is amended to
				read as follows:
" Sec. 3. It is therefore the declared policy of the United
				States-
(1) to designate the metric
			 system of measurement as the preferred system of weights and measures for
			 United States trade and commerce;
(2) to require that each federal agency, by a
			 date certain and to the extent economically feasible by the end of the fiscal
			 year 1992, use the metric system of measurement in its procurements, grants,
			 and other business-related activities, except to the extent that such use is
			 impractical or is likely to cause significant inefficiencies or loss of markets
			 to U.S. firms, such as when foreign competitors are producing competing
			 products in non-metric units;
(3)
			 to seek ways to increase understanding of the metric system of measurement
			 through educational information and guidance and in government publications;
			 and
(4) to permit the continued use
			 of traditional systems of weights and measures in nonbusiness activities."
The Code of Federal Regulations makes the use of metric units
				mandatory for agencies of the federal government. (Federal Register, Vol. 56,
				No. 23, page 160, January 2, 1991.)
2.3.
British and United States Systems
			 of Measurement.
- In the past, the customary system of weights and
			 measures in the British Commonwealth countries and that in the United States
			 were very similar; however, the SI metric system is now the official system of
			 units in the United Kingdom, while the customary units are still predominantly
			 used in the United States. Because references to the units of the old British
			 customary system are still found, the following discussion describes the
			 differences between the U.S. and British customary systems of units.
After 1959, the U.S. and the British inches were defined
				identically for scientific work and were identical in commercial usage. A
				similar situation existed for the U.S. and the British pounds, and many
				relationships, such as 12 inches = 1 foot, 3 feet = 1 yard, and 1760 yards = 1
				international mile, were the same in both countries; but there were some very
				important differences.
In the first place, the U.S. customary bushel and the U.S.
				gallon, and their subdivisions differed from the corresponding British Imperial
				units. Also the British ton is 2240 pounds, whereas the ton generally used in
				the United States is the short ton of 2000 pounds. The American colonists
				adopted the English wine gallon of 231 cubic inches. The English of that period
				used this wine gallon and they also had another gallon, the ale gallon of 282
				cubic inches. In 1824, the British abandoned these two gallons when they
				adopted the British Imperial gallon, which they defined as the volume of 10
				pounds of water, at a temperature of 62 °F, which, by calculation, is
				equivalent to 277.42 cubic inches. At the same time, they redefined the bushel
				as 8 gallons.
In the customary British system, the units of dry measure are
				the same as those of liquid measure. In the United States these two are not the
				same; the gallon and its subdivisions are used in the measurement of liquids
				and the bushel, with its subdivisions, is used in the measurement of certain
				dry commodities. The U.S. gallon is divided into four liquid quarts and the
				U.S. bushel into 32 dry quarts. All the units of capacity or volume mentioned
				thus far are larger in the customary British system than in the U.S. system.
				But the British fluid ounce is smaller than the U.S. fluid ounce, because the
				British quart is divided into 40 fluid ounces whereas the U.S. quart is divided
				into 32 fluid ounces.
From this we see that in the customary British system an
				avoirdupois ounce of water at 62 °F has a volume of one fluid ounce,
				because 10 pounds is equivalent to 160 avoirdupois ounces, and 1 gallon is
				equivalent to 4 quarts, or 160 fluid ounces. This convenient relation does not
				exist in the U.S. system because a U.S. gallon of water at 62 °F weighs
				about 8[1/3] pounds, or 133[1/3] avoirdupois ounces, and the U.S. gallon is
				equivalent to 4 x 32, or 128 fluid ounces.
1 U.S. fluid ounce
= 1.041 British fluid ounces
1 British fluid ounce
= 0.961 U.S. fluid ounce
1 U.S. gallon
= 0.833 British Imperial gallon
1 British Imperial gallon
= 1.201 U.S. gallons
Among other differences between the customary British and the
				United States measurement systems, we should note that they abolished the use
				of the troy pound in England January 6, 1879; they retained only the troy ounce
				and its subdivisions, whereas the troy pound is still legal in the United
				States, although it is not now greatly used. We can mention again the common
				use, for body weight, in England of the stone of 14 pounds, this being a unit
				now unused in the United States, although its influence was shown in the
				practice until World War II of selling flour by the barrel of 196 pounds (14
				stone). In the apothecary system of liquid measure the British add a unit, the
				fluid scruple, equal to one third of a fluid drachm (spelled
dram
in the United States) between their minim and
				their fluid drachm. In the United States, the general practice now is to sell
				dry commodities, such as fruits and vegetables, by their mass.
2.4.
Subdivision of Units.
- In general, units are subdivided by one of three methods:
(a) decimal, into tenths;
(b) duodecimal, into twelfths; or
(c) binary, into halves (twos). Usually the
			 subdivision is continued by using the same method. Each method has its
			 advantages for certain purposes, and it cannot properly be said that any one
			 method is "best" unless the use to which the unit and its subdivisions are to
			 be put is known.
For example, if we are concerned only with measurements of
				length to moderate precision, it is convenient to measure and to express these
				lengths in feet, inches, and binary fractions of an inch, thus 9 feet,
				43/8 inches. However, if these lengths are to be
				subsequently used to calculate area or volume, that method of subdivision at
				once becomes extremely inconvenient. For that reason, civil engineers, who are
				concerned with areas of land, volumes of cuts, fills, excavations, etc.,
				instead of dividing the foot into inches and binary subdivisions of the inch,
				divide it decimally; that is, into tenths, hundredths, and thousandths of a
				foot.
The method of subdivision of a unit is thus largely made based
				on convenience to the user. The fact that units have commonly been subdivided
				into certain subunits for centuries does not preclude their also having another
				mode of subdivision in some frequently used cases where convenience indicates
				the value of such other method. Thus, while we usually subdivide the gallon
				into quarts and pints, most gasoline-measuring pumps, of the price-computing
				type, are graduated to show tenths, hundredths, or thousandths of a
				gallon.
Although the mile has for centuries been divided into rods,
				yards, feet, and inches, the odometer part of an automobile speedometer shows
				tenths of a mile. Although we divide our dollar into 100 parts, we habitually
				use and speak of halves and quarters. An illustration of rather complex
				subdividing is found on the scales used by draftsmen. These scales are of two
				types:
(a) architects, which are
			 commonly graduated with scales in which 
			 3/32, 
			 3/16, 
			 1/8, ¼, 
			 3/8, ½, ¾, 1, 1½, and
			 3 inches, respectively, represent 1 foot full scale, and also having a scale
			 graduated in the usual manner to 
			 1/16 inch; and
(b) engineers, which are commonly subdivided
			 to 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, and 60 parts to the inch.
The dictum of convenience applies not only to subdivisions of a
				unit but also to multiples of a unit. Land elevations above sea level are given
				in feet although the height may be several miles; the height of aircraft above
				sea level as given by an altimeter is likewise given in feet, no matter how
				high it may be.
On the other hand, machinists, toolmakers, gauge makers,
				scientists, and others who are engaged in precision measurements of relatively
				small distances, even though concerned with measurements of length only, find
				it convenient to use the inch, instead of the tenth of a foot, but to divide
				the inch decimally to tenths, hundredths, thousandths, etc., even down to
				millionths of an inch. Verniers, micrometers, and other precision measuring
				instruments are usually graduated in this manner. Machinist scales are commonly
				graduated decimally along one edge and are also graduated along another edge to
				binary fractions as small as 
				1/64 inch. The scales with binary
				fractions are used only for relatively rough measurements.
It is seldom convenient or advisable to use binary subdivisions
				of the inch that are smaller than 
				1/64. In fact, 
				1/32-, 
				1/16-, or 
				1/8-inch subdivisions are usually
				preferable for use on a scale to be read with the unaided eye.
2.5.
Arithmetical
			 Systems of Numbers.
- The subdivision of units of measurement is closely
			 associated with arithmetical systems of numbers. The systems of units used in
			 this country for commercial and scientific work, having many origins as has
			 already been shown, naturally show traces of the various number systems
			 associated with their origins and developments. Thus, (a) the binary
			 subdivision has come down to us from the Hindus, (b) the duodecimal system of
			 fractions from the Romans, (c) the decimal system from the Chinese and
			 Egyptians, some developments having been made by the Hindus, and (d) the
			 sexagesimal system (division by 60) now illustrated in the subdivision of units
			 of angle and of time, from the ancient Babylonians. The use of decimal numbers
			 in measurements is becoming the standard practice.
3.
Standards of Length, Mass, and
			 Capacity or Volume
3.1.
Standards of Length.
- The meter, which is defined in terms of the speed
			 of light in a vacuum, is the unit on which all length measurements are based.
The yard is defined5 as
				follows:
1 yard = 0.914 4 meter, and
1 inch = 25.4 millimeters exactly.
3.1.1.
Calibration of Length
			 Standards.
- NIST calibrates standards of length including meter bars,
			 yard bars, miscellaneous precision line standards, steel tapes, invar geodetic
			 tapes, precision gauge blocks, micrometers, and limit gauges. It also measures
			 the linear dimensions of miscellaneous apparatus such as penetration needles,
			 cement sieves, and hemacytometer chambers. In general, NIST accepts for
			 calibration only apparatus of such material, design, and construction as to
			 ensure accuracy and permanence sufficient to justify calibration by the
			 Institute. NIST performs calibrations in accordance with fee schedules, copies
			 of which may be obtained from NIST.
NIST does not calibrate carpenters' rules, machinist scales,
				draftsman scales, and the like. Such apparatus, if they require calibration,
				should be submitted to state or local weights and measures officials.
3.2.
Standards
			 of Mass.
- The primary standard of mass for this country is United
			 States Prototype Kilogram 20, which is a platinum-iridium cylinder kept at
			 NIST. We know the value of this mass standard in terms of the International
			 Prototype Kilogram, a platinum-iridium standard which is kept at the
			 International Bureau of Weights and Measures.
In Colonial Times the British standards were considered the
				primary standards of the United States. Later, the U.S. avoirdupois pound was
				defined in terms of the Troy Pound of the Mint, which is a brass standard kept
				at the United States Mint in Philadelphia. In 1911, the Troy Pound of the Mint
				was superseded, for coinage purposes, by the Troy Pound of the
				Institute.
The avoirdupois pound is defined in terms of the kilogram by
				the relation:
1 avoirdupois pound = 0.453 592 37
				kilogram.6
These changes in definition have not made any appreciable
				change in the value of the pound.
5 See Federal Register for July 1,
				1959. Also see next-to-last paragraph of 2.2.5.
6 See Federal Register for July 1,
				1959.
The grain is 
				1/7000 of the avoirdupois pound and is
				identical in the avoirdupois, troy, and apothecary systems. The troy ounce and
				the apothecary ounce differ from the avoirdupois ounce but are equal to each
				other, and equal to 480 grains. The avoirdupois ounce is equal to 437.5
				grains.
3.2.1.
Mass and Weight.
- The mass of a body is a measure of its inertial property or how much
			 matter it contains. The weight of a body is a measure of the force exerted on
			 it by gravity or the force needed to support it. Gravity on earth gives a body
			 a downward acceleration of about 9.8 m/s2. (In
			 common parlance, weight is often used as a synonym for mass in weights and
			 measures.) The incorrect use of weight in place of mass should be phased out,
			 and the term mass used when mass is meant.
Standards of mass are ordinarily calibrated by comparison to a
				reference standard of mass. If two objects are compared on a balance and give
				the same balance indication, they have the same "mass" (excluding the effect of
				air buoyancy). The forces of gravity on the two objects are balanced. Even
				though the value of the acceleration of gravity,
g
, is
				different from location to location, because the two objects of equal mass in
				the same location (where both masses are acted upon by the same
g
) will be affected in the same manner and by the same
				amount by any change in the value of
g
, the two
				objects will balance each other under any value of
g
.
However, on a spring balance the mass of a body is not balanced
				against the mass of another body. Instead, the gravitational force on the body
				is balanced by the restoring force of a spring. Therefore, if a very sensitive
				spring balance is used, the indicated mass of the body would be found to change
				if the spring balance and the body were moved from one locality to another
				locality with a different acceleration of gravity. But a spring balance is
				usually used in one locality and is adjusted or calibrated to indicate mass at
				that locality.
3.2.2.
Effect of Air Buoyancy.
- Another point that must be taken into
			 account in the calibration and use of standards of mass is the buoyancy or
			 lifting effect of the air. A body immersed in any fluid is buoyed up by a force
			 equal to the force of gravity on the displaced fluid. Two bodies of equal mass,
			 if placed one on each pan of an equal-arm balance, will balance each other in a
			 vacuum. A comparison in a vacuum against a known mass standard gives "true
			 mass." If compared in air, however, they will not balance each other unless
			 they are of equal volume. If of unequal volume, the larger body will displace
			 the greater volume of air and will be buoyed up by a greater force than will
			 the smaller body, and the larger body will appear to be of less mass than the
			 smaller body.
The greater the difference in volume, and the greater the
				density of the air in which we make the comparison weighing, the greater will
				be the apparent difference in mass. For that reason, in assigning a precise
				numerical value of mass to a standard, it is necessary to base this value on
				definite values for the air density and the density of the mass standard of
				reference.
The apparent mass of an object is equal to the mass of just
				enough reference material of a specified density (at 20 °C) that will
				produce a balance reading equal to that produced by the object if the
				measurements are done in air with a density of 1.2
				mg/cm3 at 20 °C. The original basis for
				reporting apparent mass is apparent mass versus brass. The apparent mass versus
				a density of 8.0 g/cm3 is the more recent
				definition, and is used extensively throughout the world. The use of apparent
				mass versus 8.0 g/cm3 is encouraged over apparent
				mass versus brass. The difference in these apparent mass systems is
				insignificant in most commercial weighing applications.
A full discussion of this topic is given in NIST Monograph 133,
				Mass and Mass Values, by Paul E. Pontius [for sale by the National Technical
				Information Service, 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, VA 22161 (COM
				7450309)].
3.2.3.
Calibrations of Standards of Mass.
- Standards of mass regularly used in
			 ordinary trade should be tested by state or local weights and measures
			 officials. NIST calibrates mass standards submitted, but it does not
			 manufacture or sell them. Information regarding the mass calibration service of
			 NIST and the regulations governing the submission of standards of mass to NIST
			 for calibration are contained in NIST Special Publication 250, Calibration and
			 Related Measurement Services of NIST, latest edition.
3.3.
Standards of Capacity.
-
			 Units of capacity or volume, being derived units, are in this country defined
			 in terms of linear units. Laboratory standards have been constructed and are
			 maintained at NIST. These have validity only by calibration with reference
			 either directly or indirectly to the linear standards. Similarly, NIST has made
			 and distributed standards of capacity to the several states. Other standards of
			 capacity have been verified by calibration for a variety of uses in science,
			 technology, and commerce.
3.3.1.
Calibrations of Standards of Capacity.
- NIST makes calibrations on
			 capacity or volume standards that are in the customary units of trade; that is,
			 the gallon, its multiples, and submultiples, or in metric units. Further, NIST
			 calibrates precision-grade volumetric glassware which is normally in metric
			 units. NIST makes calibrations in accordance with fee schedules, copies of
			 which may be obtained from NIST.
3.4.
Maintenance and Preservation of
			 Fundamental Standard of Mass.
- It is a statutory responsibility of NIST
			 to maintain and preserve the national standard of mass at NIST and to realize
			 all the other base units. The U.S. Prototype Kilogram maintained at NIST is
			 fully protected by an alarm system. All measurements made with this standard
			 are conducted in special air-conditioned laboratories to which the standard is
			 taken a sufficiently long time before the observations to ensure that the
			 standard will be in a state of equilibrium under standard conditions when the
			 measurements or comparisons are made. Hence, it is not necessary to maintain
			 the standard at standard conditions, but care is taken to prevent large changes
			 of temperature. More important is the care to prevent any damage to the
			 standard because of careless handling.
4.
Specialized Use of the Terms "Ton"
			 and "Tonnage"
As weighing and measuring are important factors in our everyday
				lives, it is quite natural that questions arise about the use of various units
				and terms and about the magnitude of quantities involved. For example, the
				words "ton" and "tonnage" are used in widely different senses, and a great deal
				of confusion has arisen regarding the application of these terms.
The ton is used as a unit of measure in two distinct senses:
(1) as a unit of mass, and
(2) as a unit of capacity or volume.
In the first sense, the term has the following meanings:
(a) The
short
, or
net
ton of 2000 pounds.
(b) The
long
,
gross
, or
shipper's
ton of
			 2240 pounds.
(c) The
metric
ton of 1000 kilograms, or 2204.6 pounds.
In the second sense (capacity), it is usually restricted to
				uses relating to ships and has the following meaning:
(a) The
register
ton
			 of 100 cubic feet.
(b) The
measurement
ton of 40 cubic feet.
(c) The
English
			 water
ton of 224 British Imperial gallons.
In the United States and Canada the ton (mass) most commonly
				used is the
short
ton. In Great Britain, it is the
long
ton, and in countries using the metric system, it
				is the
metric
ton. The
register
ton and the
measurement
ton are capacity or volume units used in
				expressing the tonnage of ships. The
English water
ton
				is used, chiefly in Great Britain, in statistics dealing with petroleum
				products.
There have been many other uses of the term ton such as the
timber
ton of 40 cubic feet and the
wheat
ton of 20 bushels, but their uses have been
				local and the meanings have not been consistent from one place to another.
				Properly, the word "tonnage" is used as a noun only in respect to the capacity
				or volume and dimensions of ships, and to the amount of the ship's cargo. There
				are two distinct kinds of tonnage; namely,
vessel
				tonnage
and
cargo tonnage
and each of
				these is used in various meanings. The several kinds of
vessel
				tonnage
are as follows:
Gross tonnage
, or
gross
				register tonnage
, is the total cubical capacity or volume of a
				ship expressed in register tons of 100 cubic feet, or 2.83 cubic meters, less
				such space as hatchways, bakeries, galleys, etc., as are exempted from
				measurement by different governments. There is some lack of uniformity in the
				gross tonnages as given by different nations due to lack of agreement on the
				spaces that are to be exempted. Official merchant marine statistics of most
				countries are published in terms of the
gross register
				tonnage
. Press references to ship
tonnage
are usually to the
gross tonnage
.
The
net tonnage
, or
net
				register tonnage
, is the
gross tonnage
less the different spaces specified by maritime nations in their measurement
				rules and laws. The spaces deducted are those totally unavailable for carrying
				cargo, such as the engine room, coal bunkers, crew quarters, chart and
				instrument room, etc. The
net tonnage
is used in
				computing how much cargo that can be loaded on a ship. It is used as the basis
				for wharfage and other similar charges.
The
register under-deck tonnage
is the
				cubical capacity of a ship under her tonnage deck expressed in register tons.
				In a vessel having more than one deck, the tonnage deck is the second from the
				keel.
There are several variations of
displacement
				tonnage
.
The
dead weight tonnage
is the
				difference between the "loaded" and "light"
displacement
				tonnages
of a vessel. It is expressed in terms of the long ton of
				2240 pounds, or the metric ton of 2204.6 pounds, and is the weight of fuel,
				passengers, and cargo that a vessel can carry when loaded to its maximum
				draft.
The second variety of tonnage,
cargo
				tonnage
, refers to the weight of the particular items making up
				the cargo. In overseas traffic it is usually expressed in long tons of 2240
				pounds or metric tons of 2204.6 pounds. The short ton is only occasionally
				used. Therefore, the
cargo tonnage
is very distinct
				from
vessel tonnage
.
Appendix C. General Tables of Units of
				Measurement
These tables have been prepared for the benefit of those
				requiring tables of units for occasional ready reference. In Section 4 of this
				Appendix, the tables are carried out to a large number of decimal places and
				exact values are indicated by underlining. In most of the other tables, only a
				limited number of decimal places are given, therefore making the tables better
				adapted to the average user.
1.
Tables of Metric Units of Measurement
In the metric system of measurement, designations of multiples
				and subdivisions of any unit may be arrived at by combining with the name of
				the unit the prefixes
deka, hecto
, and
kilo
meaning, respectively, 10, 100, and 1000, and
deci
,
centi
, and
milli,
meaning, respectively, one-tenth,
				one-hundredth, and one-thousandth. In some of the following metric tables, some
				such multiples and subdivisions have not been included for the reason that
				these have little, if any currency in actual usage.
In certain cases, particularly in scientific usage, it becomes
				convenient to provide for multiples larger than 1000 and for subdivisions
				smaller than one-thousandth. Accordingly, the following prefixes have been
				introduced and these are now generally recognized:
yotta,
(Y)
meaning 1024
zetta,
(Z),
meaning 1021
exa,
(E),
meaning 1018
peta,
(P),
meaning 1015
tera,
(T),
meaning 1012
giga,
(G),
meaning 109
mega,
(M),
meaning 106
kilo,
(k),
meaning 103
hecto,
(h),
meaning 102
deka,
(da),
meaning 101
deci,
(d),
meaning 10-1
centi,
(c),
meaning 10-2
milli,
(m),
meaning 10-3
micro,
(µ),
meaning 10-6
nano,
(n),
meaning 10-9
pico,
(p),
meaning 10-12
femto,
(f),
meaning 10-15
atto,
(a),
meaning 10-18
zepto,
(z),
meaning 10-21
yocto,
(y),
meaning 10-24
Thus a kilometer is 1000 meters and a millimeter is 0.001
				meter.
Units of Length
10 millimeters (mm)
= 1 centimeter (cm)
10 centimeters
= 1 decimeter (dm) = 100 millimeters
10 decimeters
= 1 meter (m) = 1000 millimeters
10 meters
= 1 dekameter (dam)
10 dekameters
= 1 hectometer (hm) = 100 meters
10 hectometers
= 1 kilometer (km) = 1000 meters
Units of Area
100 square millimeters
						  (mm2)
= 1 square centimeter
						  (cm2)
100 square centimeters
= 1 square decimeter
						  (dm2)
100 square decimeters
= 1 square meter (m2)
100 square meters
= 1 square dekameter (dam2)
						  = 1 are
100 square dekameters
= 1 square hectometer (hm2)
						  = 1 hectare (ha)
100 square hectometers
= 1 square kilometer
						  (km2)
Units of Liquid Volume
10 milliliters (mL)
= 1 centiliter (cL)
10 centiliters
= 1 deciliter (dL) = 100 milliliters
10 deciliters
= 1 liter7 = 1000
						  milliliters
10 liters
= 1 dekaliter (daL)
10 dekaliters
= 1 hectoliter (hL) = 100 liters
10 hectoliters
= 1 kiloliter (kL) = 1000 liters
Units of Volume
1000 cubic millimeters
						  (mm3)
= 1 cubic centimeter
						  (cm3)
1000 cubic centimeters
= 1 cubic decimeter
						  (dm3)
= 1 000 000 cubic millimeters
1000 cubic decimeters
= 1 cubic meter (m3)
= 1 000 000 cubic centimeters
= 1 000 000 000 cubic millimeters
Units of Mass
10 milligrams (mg)
= 1 centigram (cg)
10 centigrams
= 1 decigram (dg) = 100 milligrams
10 decigrams
= 1 gram (g) = 1000 milligrams
10 grams
= 1 dekagram (dag)
10 dekagrams
= 1 hectogram (hg) = 100 grams
10 hectograms
= 1 kilogram (kg) = 1000 grams
1000 kilograms
= 1 megagram (Mg) or 1 metric ton (t)
2.
Tables of U.S. Customary Units of Measurement
8In these tables where
foot
or
mile
is underlined,
				it is survey foot or U.S. statute mile rather than international foot or mile
				that is meant.
Units of Length
12 inches (in)
= 1 foot (ft)
3 feet
= 1 yard (yd)
16½
feet
= 1 rod (rd), pole, or perch
40 rods
= 1 furlong (fur) = 660
feet
8 furlongs
= 1 U.S. statute mile (mi) = 5280
feet
1852 meters (m)
= 6076.115 49 feet (approximately)
= 1 international nautical mile
7 By action of the 12th General
				Conference on Weights and Measures (1964), the liter is a special name for the
				cubic decimeter.
8 This section lists units of measurement that have
				traditionally been used in the United States. In keeping with the Omnibus Trade
				and Competitiveness Act of 1988, the ultimate objective is to make the
				International System of Units the primary measurement system used in the United
				States.
Units of Area
9
144 square inches
						  (in2)
= 1 square foot (ft2)
9 square feet
= 1 square yard (yd2)
= 1296 square inches
272¼ square
feet
= 1 square rod (rd2)
160 square rods
= 1 acre = 43 560 square
feet
640 acres
= 1 square
mile
(mi2)
1
mile
square
= 1 section of land
6
miles
square
= 1 township
= 36 sections = 36 square
miles
Units of Volume3
1728 cubic inches
						  (in3)
= 1 cubic foot (ft3)
27 cubic feet
= 1 cubic yard (yd3)
Gunter's or Surveyors Chain Units of
				Measurement
0.66
foot
(ft)
= 1 link (li)
100 links
= 1 chain (ch)
= 4 rods = 66
feet
80 chains
= 1 U.S. statute mile (mi)
= 320 rods = 5280
feet
Units of Liquid
				Volume
10
4 gills (gi)
= 1 pint (pt) = 28.875 cubic inches
						  (in3)
2 pints
= 1 quart (qt) = 57.75 cubic inches
4 quarts
= 1 gallon (gal) = 231 cubic inches
= 8 pints = 32 gills
Apothecaries Units of Liquid Volume
60 minims
= 1 fluid dram (fl dr or f [OUNCE])
= 0.225 6 cubic inch
						  (in3)
8 fluid drams
= 1 fluid ounce (fl oz or f
&#8485;
)
= 1.804 7 cubic inches
16 fluid ounces
= 1 pint (pt)
= 28.875 cubic inches
= 128 fluid drams
2 pints
= 1 quart (qt) = 57.75 cubic inches
9 Squares and cubes of customary but
				not of metric units are sometimes expressed by the use of abbreviations rather
				than symbols. For example, sq ft means square foot, and cu ft means cubic foot.
10 When necessary to distinguish the
liquid
pint or quart from the
dry
pint or quart, the word "liquid" or the
				abbreviation "liq" should be used in combination with the name or abbreviation
				of the
liquid
unit.
= 32 fluid ounces = 256 fluid drams
4 quarts
= 1 gallon (gal) = 231 cubic inches
= 128 fluid ounces = 1024 fluid drams
Units of Dry
				Volume
11
2 pints (pt)
= 1 quart (qt) = 67.200 6 cubic inches
						  (in3)
8 quarts
= 1 peck (pk) = 537.605 cubic inches
= 16 pints
4 pecks
= 1 bushel (bu) = 2150.42 cubic inches
= 32 quarts
Avoirdupois Units of
				Mass
12
[The "grain" is the same in avoirdupois, troy, and apothecaries
				units of mass.]
1 µlb
= 0.000 001 pound (lb)
2711/32 grains (gr)
= 1 dram (dr)
16 drams
= 1 ounce (oz)
= 437½ grains
16 ounces
= 1 pound (lb)
= 256 drams
= 7000 grains
100 pounds
= 1 hundredweight
						  (cwt)13
20 hundredweights
= 1 ton (tn)14
= 2000 pounds7
In "gross" or "long" measure, the following values are
				recognized:
112 pounds (lb)
= 1 gross or long hundredweight
						  (cwt)7
11 When necessary to distinguish
dry
pint or quart from the
liquid
pint or quart, the word "dry" should be used in
				combination with the name or abbreviation of the dry unit.
6 When necessary to distinguish the
avoirdupois
dram from the
apothecaries
dram, or to distinguish the
avoirdupois
dram or ounce from the
fluid
dram or ounce, or to distinguish the avoirdupois
				ounce or pound from the
troy
or
apothecaries
ounce or pound, the word "avoirdupois" or
				the abbreviation "avdp" should be used in combination with the name or
				abbreviation of the
avoirdupois
unit.
7 When the terms "hundredweight" and "ton" are used unmodified,
				they are commonly understood to mean the 100-pound hundredweight and the
				2000-pound ton, respectively; these units may be designated "net" or "short"
				when necessary to distinguish them from the corresponding units in
gross
or
long
measure.
14 As of January 1, 2014, "tn" is
				the required abbreviation for "short ton." Devices manufactured between January
				1, 2008, and December 31, 2013, may use an abbreviation other than "tn" to
				specify "short ton."
20 gross or long hundredweights
= 1 gross or long ton
= 2240 pounds7
Troy Units of Mass
[The "grain" is the same in avoirdupois, troy, and apothecaries
				units of mass.]
24 grains (gr)
= 1 pennyweight (dwt)
20 pennyweights
= 1 ounce troy (oz t) = 480 grains
12 ounces troy
= 1 pound troy (lb t)
= 240 pennyweights = 5760 grains
Apothecaries Units of Mass
[The "grain" is the same in avoirdupois, troy, and apothecaries
				units of mass.]
20 grains (gr)
= 1 scruple (s ap or [SCRUPLE])
3 scruples
= 1 dram apothecaries (dr ap or [OUNCE])
= 60 grains
8 drams apothecaries
= 1 ounce apothecaries (oz ap or &#8485;)
= 24 scruples = 480 grains
12 ounces apothecaries
= 1 pound apothecaries (lb ap)
= 96 drams apothecaries
= 288 scruples = 5760 grains
3.
Notes on British Units of Measurement
In Great Britain, the yard, the avoirdupois pound, the troy
				pound, and the apothecaries pound are identical with the units of the same
				names used in the United States. The tables of British linear measure, troy
				mass, and apothecaries mass are the same as the corresponding United States
				tables, except for the British spelling "drachm" in the table of apothecaries
				mass. The table of British avoirdupois mass is the same as the United States
				table up to 1 pound; above that point the table reads:
14 pounds
= 1 stone
2 stones
= 1 quarter = 28 pounds
4 quarters
= 1 hundredweight = 112 pounds
20 hundredweight
= 1 ton = 2240 pounds
The present British gallon and bushel - known as the "Imperial
				gallon" and "Imperial bushel" - are, respectively, about 20 % and 3 % larger
				than the United States gallon and bushel. The Imperial gallon is defined as the
				volume of 10 avoirdupois pounds of water under specified conditions, and the
				Imperial bushel is defined as 8 Imperial gallons. Also, the subdivision of the
				Imperial gallon as presented in the table of British apothecaries fluid measure
				differs in two important respects from the corresponding United States
				subdivision, in that the Imperial gallon is divided into 160 fluid ounces
				(whereas the United States gallon is divided into 128 fluid ounces), and a
				"fluid scruple" is included. The full table of British measures of capacity
				(which are used alike for liquid and for dry commodities) is as follows:
4 gills
= 1 pint
2 pints
= 1 quart
4 quarts
= 1 gallon
2 gallons
= 1 peck
8 gallons (4 pecks)
= 1 bushel
8 bushels
= 1 quarter
The full table of British apothecaries measure is as
				follows:
20 minims
= 1 fluid scruple
3 fluid scruples
= 1 fluid drachm
= 60 minims
8 fluid drachms
= 1 fluid ounce
20 fluid ounces
= 1 pint
8 pints
= 1 gallon (160 fluid ounces)
4.
Tables of Units of Measurement
(all
underlined
figures are
				exact)
Units of Length - International
				Measure
15
Units
Inches
Feet
Yards
Miles
Centimeters
Meters
1 inch =
1
0.083 333 33
0.027 777 78
0.000 015 782 83
2.54
0.025 4
1 foot =
12
1
0.333 333 3
0.000 189 393 9
30.48
0.304 8
1 yard =
36
3
1
0.000 568 181 8
91.44
0.914 4
1 mile =
63 360
5 280
1 760
1
160 934.4
1609.344
1 centimeter =
0.393 700 8
0.032 808 40
0.010 936 13
0.000 006 213 712
1
0.01
1 meter =
39.370 08
3.280 840
1.093 613
0.000 621 371 2
100
1
Units of Length - Survey
				Measure9
Units
Links
Feet
Rods
Chains
Miles
Meters
1 link =
1
0.66
0.04
0.01
0.000 125
0.201 168 4
1 foot =
1.515 152
1
0.060 606 06
0.015 151 52
0.000 189 393 9
0.304 800 6
1 rod =
25
16.5
1
0.25
0.003 125
5.029 210
1 chain =
100
66
4
1
0.0125
20.116 84
1 mile =
8 000
5 280
320
80
1
1609.347
1 meter =
4.970 960
3.280 833
0.198 838 4
0.049 709 60
0.000 621 369 9
1
15 One international foot = 0.999 998
				survey foot (exactly) One international mile = 0.999 998 survey mile
				(exactly)
Units of Area - International
				Measure
16
(all
underlined
figures are
				exact)
Units
Square Inches
Square Feet
Square Yards
1 square inch =
1
0.006 944 444
0.000 771 604 9
1 square foot =
144
1
0.111 111 1
1 square yard =
1 296
9
1
1 square mile =
4 014 489 600
27 878 400
3 097 600
1 square centimeter =
0.155 000 3
0.001 076 391
0.000 119 599 0
1 square meter =
1550.003
10.763 91
1.195 990
Note
: 1 survey foot = 1 international foot
						  = 1 international foot =
1200/3937 meter
						  (exactly)
12 x 0.0254 meter (exactly)
0.0254 x 39.37 survey foot (exactly
Units
Square Miles
Square Centimeters
Square Meters
1 square inch =
0.000 000 000 249 097 7
6.451 6
0.000 645 16
1 square foot =
0.000 000 035 870 06
929.030 4
0.092 903 04
1 square yard =
0.000 000 322 830 6
8361.273 6
0.836 127 36
1 square mile =
1
25 899 881 103.36
2 589 988.110 336
1 square centimeter =
0.000 000 000 038 610 22
1
0.0001
1 square meter =
0.000 000 386 102 2
10 000
1
Units of Area - Survey
				Measure10,
17
Units
Square Feet
Square Rods
Square Chains
Acres
1 square foot =
1
0.003 673 095
0.000 229 568 4
0.000 022 956 84
1 square rod =
272.25
1
0.062 5
0.006 25
1 square chain =
4 356
16
1
0.1
1 acre =
43 560
160
10
1
16 One square survey foot = 1.000
				004 square international feet One square survey mile = 1.000 004 square
				international miles 
				10 One square survey foot = 1.000 004
				square international feet One square survey mile = 1.000 004 square
				international miles
17 One international foot = 0.999
				998 survey foot (exactly) One international mile = 0.999 998 survey mile
				(exactly)
1 square mile =
27 878 400
102 400
6 400
640
1 square meter =
10.763 87
0.039 536 70
0.002 471 044
0.000 247 104 4
1 hectare =
107 638.7
395.367 0
24.710 44
2.471 044
Units
Square Miles
Square Meters
Hectares
1 square foot =
0.000 000 035 870 06
0.092 903 41
0.000 009 290 341
1 square rod =
0.000 009 765 625
25.292 95
0.002 529 295
1 square chain =
0.000 156 25
404.687 3
0.040 468 73
1 acre =
0.001 562 5
4 046.873
0.404 687 3
1 square mile =
1
2 589 998
258.999 8
1 square meter =
0.000 000 386 100 6
1
0.000 1
1 hectare =
0.003 861 006
10 000
1
Units of Volume
(all
underlined
figures are
				exact)
Units
Cubic Inches
Cubic Feet
Cubic Yards
1 cubic inch =
1
0.000 578 703 7
0.000 021 433 47
1 cubic foot =
1 728
1
0.037 037 04
1 cubic yard =
46 656
27
1
1 cubic centimeter =
0.061 023 74
0.000 035 314 67
0.000 001 307 951
1 cubic decimeter =
61.023 74
0.035 314 67
0.001 307 951
1 cubic meter =
61 023.74
35.314 67
1.307 951
Units
Milliliters (Cubic Centimeters)
Liters (Cubic Decimeters)
Cubic Meters
1 cubic inch =
16.387 064
0.016 387 064
0.000 016 387 064
1 cubic foot =
28 316.846 592
28.316 846 592
0.028 316 846 592
1 cubic yard =
764 554.857 984
764.554 857 984
0.764 554 857 984
1 cubic centimeter =
1
0.001
0.000 001
1 cubic decimeter =
1 000
1
0.001
1 cubic meter =
1 000 000
1000
1
Units of Capacity or Volume - Dry Volume
				Measure
Units
Dry Pints
Dry Quarts
Pecks
Bushels
1 dry pint =
1
0.5
0.062 5
0.015 625
1 dry quart =
2
1
0.125
0.031 25
1 peck =
16
8
1
0.25
1 bushel =
64
32
4
1
1 cubic inch =
0.029 761 6
0.014 880 8
0.001 860 10
0.000 465 025
1 cubic foot =
51.428 09
25.714 05
3.214 256
0.803 563 95
1 liter =
1.816 166
0.908 083 0
0.113 510 4
0.028 377 59
1 cubic meter =
1 816.166
908.083 0
113.510 4
28.377 59
Units
Cubic Inches
Cubic Feet
Liters
Cubic Meters
1 dry pint =
33.600 312 5
0.019 444 63
0.550 610 5
0.000 550 610 5
1 dry quart =
67.200 625
0.038 889 25
1.101 221
0.001 101 221
1 peck =
537.605
0.311 114
8.809 768
0.008 809 768
1 bushel =
2 150.42
1.244 456
35.239 070 166 88
0.035 239 070 166 88
1 cubic inch =
1
0.000 578 703 7
0.016 387 064
0.000 016 387 064
1 cubic foot =
1728
1
28.316 846 592
0.028 316 846 592
1 liter =
61.023 74
0.035 314 67
1
0.001
1 cubic meter =
61 023.74
35.314 67
1000
1
Units of Capacity or Volume - Liquid Volume
				Measure
(All underlined figures are exact)
Units
Minims
Fluid Drams
Fluid Ounces
Gills
1 minim =
1
0.016 666 67
0.002 083 333
0.000 520 833 3
1 fluid dram =
60
1
0.125
0.031 25
1 fluid ounce =
480
8
1
0.25
1 gill =
1 920
32
4
1
1 liquid pint =
7 680
128
16
4
1 liquid quart =
15 360
256
32
8
1 gallon =
61 440
1024
128
32
1 cubic inch =
265.974 0
4.432 900
0.554 112 6
0.138 528 1
1 cubic foot =
459 603.1
7660.052
957.506 5
239.376 6
1 milliliter =
16.230 73
0.270 512 2
0.033 814 02
0.008 453 506
1 liter =
16 230.73
270.512 2
33.814 02
8.453 506
Units
Liquid Pints
Liquid Quarts
Gallons
Cubic Inches
1 minim =
0.000 130 208 3
0.000 065 104 17
0.000 016 276 04
0.003 759 766
1 fluid dram =
0.007 812 5
0.003 906 25
0.000 976 562 5
0.225 585 94
1 fluid ounce =
0.062 5
0.031 25
0.007 812 5
1.804 687 5
1 gill =
0.25
0.125
0.031 25
7.218 75
1 liquid pint =
1
0.5
0.125
28.875
1 liquid quart =
2
1
0.25
57.75
1 gallon =
8
4
1
231
1 cubic inch =
0.034 632 03
0.017 316 02
0.004 329 004
1
1 cubic foot =
59.844 16
29.922 08
7.480 519
1 728
1 milliliter =
0.002 113 376
0.001 056 688
0.000 264 172 1
0.061 023 74
1 liter =
2.113 376
1.056 688
0.264 172 1
61.023 74
Units
Cubic Feet
Milliliters
Liters
1 minim =
0.000 002 175 790
0.061 611 52
0.000 061 611 52
1 fluid dram =
0.000 130 547 4
3.696 691
0.003 696 691
1 fluid ounce =
0.001 044 379
29.573 53
0.029 573 53
1 gill =
0.004 177 517
118.294 1
0.118 294 1
1 liquid pint =
0.016 710 07
473.176 5
0.473 176 5
1 liquid quart =
0.033 420 14
946.352 9
0.946 352 9
1 gallon =
0.133 680 6
3785.411 784
3.785 411 784
1 cubic inch =
0.000 578 703 7
16.387 06
0.016 387 06
1 cubic foot =
1
28 316.85
28.316 85
1 milliliter =
0.000 035 314 67
1
0.001
1 liter =
0.035 314 67
1 000
1
Units of Mass Not Less Than Avoirdupois
				Ounces
(all underlined figures are exact)
Units
Avoirdupois Ounces
Avoirdupois Pounds
Short Hundredweights
Short Tons
1 avoirdupois ounce =
1
0.0625
0.000 625
0.000 031 25
1 avoirdupois pound =
16
1
0.01
0.000 5
1 short hundredweight =
1 600
100
1
0.05
1 short ton =
32 000
2 000
20
1
1 long ton =
35 840
2 240
22.4
1.12
1 kilogram =
35.273 96
2.204 623
0.022 046 23
0.001 102 311
1 metric ton =
35 273.96
2204.623
22.046 23
1.102 311
Units
Long Tons
Kilograms
Metric Tons
1 avoirdupois ounce =
0.000 027 901 79
0.028 349 523 125
0.000 028 349 523 125
1 avoirdupois pound =
0.000 446 428 6
0.453 592 37
0.000 453 592 37
1 short hundredweight =
0.044 642 86
45.359 237
0.045 359 237
1 short ton =
0.892 857 1
907.184 74
0.907 184 74
1 long ton =
1
1016.046 908 8
1.016 046 908 8
1 kilogram =
0.000 984 206 5
1
0.001
1 metric ton =
0.984 206 5
1 000
1
Units of Mass Not Greater Than Pounds and
				Kilograms
(all underlined figures are exact)
Units
Grains
Apothecaries Scruples
Pennyweights
Avoirdupois Drams
1 grain =
1
0.05
0.041 666 67
0.036 571 43
1 apoth. scruple =
20
1
0.833 333 3
0.731 428 6
1 pennyweight =
24
1.2
1
0.877 714 3
1 avdp. dram =
27.343 75
1.367 187 5
1.139 323
1
1 apoth. dram =
60
3
2.5
2.194 286
1 avdp. ounce =
437.5
21.875
18.229 17
16
1 apoth. or troy oz. =
480
24
20
17.554 29
1 apoth. or troy pound =
5 760
288
240
210.651 4
1 avdp. pound =
7 000
350
291.666 7
256
1 milligram =
0.015 432 36
0.000 771 617 9
0.000 643 014 9
0.000 564 383 4
1 gram =
15.432 36
0.771 617 9
0.643 014 9
0.564 383 4
1 kilogram =
15432.36
771.617 9
643.014 9
564.383 4
Units
Apothecaries Drams
Avoirdupois Ounces
Apothecaries or Troy Ounces
Apothecaries or Troy Pounds
1 grain =
0.016 666 67
0.002 285 714
0.002 083 333
0.000 173 611 1
1 apoth. scruple =
0.333 333 3
0.045 714 29
0.041 666 67
0.003 472 222
1 pennyweight =
0.4
0.054 857 14
0.05
0.004 166 667
1 avdp. dram =
0.455 729 2
0.062 5
0.56 966 15
0.004 747 179
1 apoth. dram =
1
0.137 142 9
0.125
0.010 416 67
1 avdp. ounce =
7.291 667
1
0.911 458 3
0.075 954 86
1 apoth. or troy ounce =
8
1.097 143
1
0.083 333 333
1 apoth. or troy pound =
96
13.165 71
12
1
1 avdp. pound =
116.666 7
16
14.583 33
1.215 278
1 milligram =
0.000 257 206 0
0.000 035 273 96
0.000 032 150 75
0.000 002 679 229
1 gram =
0.257 206 0
0.035 273 96
0.032 150 75
0.002 679 229
1 kilogram =
257.206 0
35.273 96
32.150 75
2.679 229
Units
Avoirdupois Pounds
Milligrams
Grams
Kilograms
1 grain =
0.000 142 857 1
64.798 91
0.064 798 91
0.000 064 798 91
1 apoth. scruple =
0.002 857 143
1 295.978 2
1.295 978 2
0.001 295 978 2
1 pennyweight =
0.003 428 571
1 555.173 84
1.555 173 84
0.001 555 173 84
1 avdp. dram =
0.003 906 25
1 771.845 195 312 5
1.771 845 195 312 5
0.001 771 845 195 312 5
1 apoth. dram =
0.008 571 429
3 887.934 6
3.887 934 6
0.003 887 934 6
1 avdp. ounce =
0.062 5
28 349.523 125
28.349 523 125
0.028 349 523 125
1 apoth. or troy ounce =
0.068 571 43
31 103.476 8
31.103 476 8
0.031 103 476 8
1 apoth. or troy pound =
0.822 857 1
373 241.721 6
373.241 721 6
0.373 241 721 6
1 avdp. pound =
1
453 592.37
453.592 37
0.453 592 37
1 milligram =
0.000 002 204 623
1
0.001
0.000 001
1 gram =
0.002 204 623
1 000
1
0.001
1 kilogram =
2.204 623
1 000 000
1 000
1
5.
Tables of Equivalents
In these tables it is necessary to differentiate between the
				"international foot" and the "survey foot." Therefore, the survey foot is
				underlined.
When the name of a unit is enclosed in brackets (thus, [1 hand]
				. . . ), this indicates (1) that the unit is not in general current use in the
				United States, or (2) that the unit is believed to be based on "custom and
				usage" rather than on formal authoritative definition.
Equivalents involving decimals are, in most instances, rounded
				off to the third decimal place except where they are exact, in which cases
				these exact equivalents are so designated. The equivalents of the imprecise
				units "tablespoon" and "teaspoon" are rounded to the nearest milliliter.
Units of Length
angstrom (A)18
0.1 nanometer (exactly) 0.000 1 micrometer (exactly)
						  0.000 000 1 millimeter (exactly) 0.000 000 004 inch
1 cable's length
120 fathoms (exactly) 720
feet
(exactly) 219 meters
1 centimeter (cm)
0.393 7 inch
1 chain (ch) (Gunter's or surveyors)
66
feet
(exactly) 20.116 8
						  meters
1 decimeter (dm)
3.937 inches
1 dekameter (dam)
32.808 feet
1 fathom
6
feet
(exactly) 1.828 8
						  meters
1 foot (ft)
0.304 8 meter (exactly)
1 furlong (fur)
10 chains (surveyors) (exactly) 660
feet
(exactly) 
						  1/8 U.S. statute mile (exactly)
						  201.168 meters
[1 hand]
4 inches
1 inch (in)
2.54 centimeters (exactly)
1 kilometer (km)
0.621 mile
1 league (land)
3 U.S. statute miles (exactly) 4.828 kilometers
1 link (li) (Gunter's or surveyors)
0.66
foot
(exactly) 0.201 168
						  meter
18 The angstrom is basically defined
				as 10-10 meter.
1 meter (m)
39.37 inches 1.094 yards
1 micrometer
0.001 millimeter (exactly) 0.000 039 37 inch
1 mil
0.001 inch (exactly)
0.025 4 millimeter (exactly)
1 mile (mi) (U.S.
						  statute)19
5280
feet
survey (exactly)
						  1.609 kilometers
1 mile (mi) (international)
5280 feet international (exactly)
1 mile (mi) (international
						  nautical)20
1.852 kilometers (exactly) 1.151 survey miles
1 millimeter (mm)
0.039 37 inch 0.001 meter (exactly)
1 nanometer (nm)
0.000 000 039 37 inch
1 Point (typography)
0.013 837 inch (exactly) 
						  1/72 inch (approximately) 0.351
						  millimeter
1 rod (rd), pole, or perch
16½
feet
(exactly)
						  5.029 2 meters
1 yard (yd)
0.914 4 meter (exactly)
19 The term "statute mile" originated
				with Queen Elizabeth I who changed the definition of the mile from the Roman
				mile of 5000 feet to the statute mile of 5280 feet. The international mile and
				the U.S. statute mile differ by about 3 millimeters although both are defined
				as being equal to 5280 feet. The international mile is based on the
				international foot (0.3048 meter) whereas the U.S. statute mile is based on the
				survey foot (1200/3937 meter).
20 The international nautical mile
				of 1852 meters (6076.115 49 feet) was adopted effective July 1, 1954, for use
				in the United States. The value formerly used in the United States was 6080.20
				feet = 1 nautical (geographical or sea) mile.
Units of Area
1 acre21
43 560 square
feet
(exactly)
						  0.405 hectare
1 are
119.599 square yards 0.025 acre
1 hectare
2.471 acres
[1 square (building)]
100 square feet
1 square centimeter
						  (cm2)
0.155 square inch
1 square decimeter
						  (dm2)
15.500 square inches
1 square foot (ft2)
929.030 square centimeters
1 square inch (in2)
6.451 6 square centimeters (exactly)
1 square kilometer
						  (km2)
247.104 acres 0.386 square mile
1 square meter (m2)
1.196 square yards 10.764 square feet
1 square mile (mi2)
258.999 hectares
1 square millimeter
						  (mm2)
0.002 square inch
1 square rod (rd2), sq pole,
						  or sq perch
25.293 square meters
1 square yard (yd2)
0.836 square meter
Units of Capacity or Volume
1 barrel (bbl), liquid
31 to 42 gallons22
1 barrel (bbl), standard for fruits, vegetables, and
						  other dry commodities, except cranberries
7056 cubic inches
105 dry quarts
3.281 bushels, struck measure
1 barrel (bbl), standard, cranberry
5826 cubic inches 8645/64
						  dry quarts
21 The question is often asked as to
				the length of a side of an acre of ground. An acre is a unit of area containing
				43560 square
feet
. It is not necessarily square, or
				even rectangular. But, if it is square, then the length of a side is equal
				toV43560 ft2 =208.710 ft (not exact)
.22 There are a variety of "barrels"
				established by law or usage. For example, federal taxes on fermented liquors
				are based on a barrel of 31 gallons; many state laws fix the "barrel for
				liquids" as 31½ gallons; one state fixes a 36-gallon barrel for cistern
				measurement; federal law recognizes a 40-gallon barrel for "proof spirits;" by
				custom, 42 gallons comprise a barrel of crude oil or petroleum products for
				statistical purposes, and this equivalent is recognized "for liquids" by four
				states.
Units of Capacity or Volume
2.709 bushels, struck measure
1 bushel (bu) (U.S.) struck measure
2150.42 cubic inches (exactly) 35.238 liters
[1 bushel, heaped (U.S.)]
2747.715 cubic inches
1.278 bushels, struck
						  measure23
[1 bushel (bu) (British Imperial) (struck
						  measure)]
1.032 U.S. bushels, struck measure 2219.36 cubic
						  inches
1 cord (cd) (firewood)
128 cubic feet (exactly)
1 cubic centimeter
						  (cm3)
0.061 cubic inch
1 cubic decimeter
						  (dm3)
61.024 cubic inches
1 cubic foot (ft3)
7.481 gallons
28.316 cubic decimeters
1 cubic inch (in3)
0.554 fluid ounce 4.433 fluid drams 16.387 cubic
						  centimeters
1 cubic meter (m3)
1.308 cubic yards
1 cubic yard (yd3)
0.765 cubic meter
1 cup, measuring
8 fluid ounces (exactly)
237 milliliters
½ liquid pint (exactly)
1 dekaliter (daL)
2.642 gallons 1.135 pecks
1 dram, fluid (or liquid) (fl dr) or f [OUNCE])
						  (U.S.)
1/8 fluid ounce
						  (exactly)
0.226 cubic inch
3.697 milliliters
1.041 British fluid drachms
[1 drachm, fluid (fl dr) (British)]
0.961 U.S. fluid dram 0.217 cubic inch 3.552
						  milliliters
1 gallon (gal) (U.S.)
231 cubic inches (exactly)
3.785 liters
0.833 British gallon
128 U.S. fluid ounces (exactly)
[1 gallon (gal) (British Imperial)]
277.42 cubic inches
1.201 U.S. gallons
4.546 liters
160 British fluid ounces (exactly)
1 gill (gi)
7.219 cubic inches
4 fluid ounces (exactly)
0.118 liter
23 Frequently recognized as
1
¼ bushels, struck measure.
Units of Capacity or Volume
1 hectoliter (hL)
26.418 gallons 2.838 bushels
1 liter (1 cubic decimeter exactly)
1.057 liquid quarts 0.908 dry quart 61.025 cubic
						  inches
1 milliliter (mL)
0.271 fluid dram 16.231 minims 0.061 cubic inch
1 ounce, fluid (or liquid) (fl oz) or/
5
)
						  (U.S.)
1.805 cubic inches
29.573 milliliters
1.041 British fluid ounces
[1 ounce, fluid (fl oz) (British)]
0.961 U.S. fluid ounce 1.734 cubic inches 28.412
						  milliliters
1 peck (pk)
8.810 liters
1 pint (pt), dry
33.600 cubic inches 0.551 liter
1 pint (pt), liquid
28.875 cubic inches exactly 0.473 liter
1 quart (qt), dry (U.S.)
67.201 cubic inches 1.101 liters 0.969 British
						  quart
1 quart (qt), liquid (U.S.)
57.75 cubic inches (exactly)
0.946 liter
0.833 British quart
[1 quart (qt) (British)]
69.354 cubic inches 1.032 U.S. dry quarts 1.201 U.S.
						  liquid quarts
1 tablespoon, measuring
3 teaspoons (exactly) 15 milliliters
4 fluid drams
½ fluid ounce (exactly)
1 teaspoon, measuring
[1/3] tablespoon (exactly)
5 milliliters
1[1/3] fluid drams 
						  24
1 water ton (English)
270.91 U.S. gallons
224 British Imperial gallons (exactly)
24 The equivalent "1 teaspoon =
				1[1/3] fluid drams" has been found by the Bureau to correspond more closely
				with the actual capacities of "measuring" and silver teaspoons than the
				equivalent "1 teaspoon = 1 fluid dram," which is given by a number of
				dictionaries.
Units of Mass
1 assay ton (AT)25
29.167 grams
1 carat (c)
200 milligrams (exactly) 3.086 grains
1 dram apothecaries (dr ap or 3)
60 grains (exactly) 3.888 grams
1 dram avoirdupois (dr avdp)
2711/32 (= 27.344) grains
						  1.772 grams
1 gamma ([GAMMA])
1 microgram (exactly)
1 grain
64.798 91 milligrams (exactly)
1 gram (g)
15.432 grains
0.035 ounce, avoirdupois
1 hundredweight, gross or long26
							 (gross cwt)
112 pounds (exactly) 50.802 kilograms
1 hundredweight, gross or short (cwt or net cwt)
100 pounds (exactly) 45.359 kilograms
1 kilogram (kg)
2.205 pounds
1 milligram (mg)
0.015 grain
1 ounce, avoirdupois (oz avdp)
437.5 grains (exactly)
0.911 troy or apothecaries ounce
28.350 grams
1 ounce, troy or apothecaries (oz t or oz ap or
						  [OUNCE])
480 grains (exactly) 1.097 avoirdupois ounces 31.103
						  grams
1 pennyweight (dwt)
1.555 grams
1 point
0.01 carat 2 milligrams
1 pound, avoirdupois (lb avdp)
7000 grains (exactly)
1.215 troy or apothecaries pounds
453.592 37 grams (exactly)
1 micropound (µlb) [the Greek letter mu in
						  combination with the letters lb]
0.000 001 pound (exactly)
1 pound, troy or apothecaries (lb t or lb ap)
5760 grains (exactly) 0.823 avoirdupois pound 373.242
						  grams
25 Used in assaying. The assay ton bears
				the same relation to the milligram that a ton of 2000 pounds avoirdupois bears
				to the ounce troy; hence the mass in milligrams of precious metal obtained from
				one assay ton of ore gives directly the number of troy ounces to the net
				ton.
26 The gross or long ton and
				hundredweight are used commercially in the Untied States to only a very
				limitied extent, usually in restricted industrial fields. The units are the
				same as the British "ton" and the "hundredweights."
Units of Mass
1 scruple (s ap or [SCRUPLE])
20 grains (exactly) 1.296 grams
1 ton, gross or
						  long27
2240 pounds (exactly) 1.12 net tons (exactly) 1.016
						  metric tons
1 ton, metric (t)
2204.623 pounds 0.984 gross ton 1.102 net tons
1 ton, net or short
						  (tn)21
2000 pounds (exactly) 0.893 gross ton 0.907 metric
						  ton
21 As of January 1, 2014, "tn" is the
				required abbreviation for "short ton." Devices manufactured between January 1,
				2008, and December 31, 2013, may use an abbreviation other than "tn" to specify
				"short ton."
Appendix D. Definitions
The specific code to which the definition applies is shown in
				[brackets] at the end of the definition. Definitions for the General Code
				[1.10] apply to all codes in Handbook 44.
A
absolute value. -
The absolute value of a number
				is the magnitude of that number without considering the positive or negative
				sign. [2.20]
acceptance test.
- The first official test of a
				farm milk tank, at a particular location, in which the tank is accepted as
				correct. This test applies to newly constructed tanks, relocated used tanks,
				and recalibrated tanks. [4.42]
accurate.
- A piece of equipment is "accurate"
				when its performance or value - that is, its indications, its deliveries, its
				recorded representations, or its capacity or actual value, etc., as determined
				by tests made with suitable standards - conforms to the standard within the
				applicable tolerances and other performance requirements. Equipment that fails
				so to conform is "inaccurate." (Also see "correct.") [Appendix A]
all-class. -
A description of a multi-class
				calibration that includes all the classes of a grain type. [5.56(a), 5.57]
				(Added 2007)
analog or digital recorder.
- An element used with
				a belt-conveyor scale that continuously records the rate-of-flow of bulk
				material over the scale (formerly referred to as a chart recorder).
				[2.21]
(Amended 1989)
analog type.
- A system of indication or recording
				in which values are presented as a series of graduations in combination with an
				indicator, or in which the most sensitive element of an indicating system moves
				continuously during the operation of the device. [1.10]
animal scale.
- A scale designed for weighing
				single heads of livestock. [2.20] (Amended 1987)
apparent mass versus 8.0
				g/cm3.
- The apparent mass of an object
				versus 8.0 g/cm3 is the mass of material of density
				8.0 g/cm3 that produces exactly the same balance
				reading as the object when the comparison is made in air with a density of 1.2
				mg/cm3 at 20 °C. [3.37]
approval seal.
- A label, tag, stamped or etched
				impression, or the like, indicating official approval of a device. (Also see
				"security seal.") [1.10]
assumed atmospheric pressure.
- The average
				atmospheric pressure agreed to exist at the meter at various ranges of
				elevation, irrespective of variations in atmospheric pressure from time to
				time. [3.33]
audit trail. -
An electronic count and/or
				information record of the changes to the values of the calibration or
				configuration parameters of a device. [1.10, 2.20, 2.21, 2.24, 3.30, 3.37,
				5.56(a)]
(Added 1993)
automatic bulk weighing system. -
A weighing
				system adapted to the automatic weighing of bulk commodities in successive
				drafts of predetermined amounts, automatically recording the no-load and loaded
				weight values and accumulating the net weight of each draft. [2.22]
automatic checkweigher. -
An automatic weighing
				system that does not require the intervention of an operator during the
				weighing process and used to subdivide items of different weights into one or
				more subgroups, such as identifying packages that have acceptable or
				unacceptable fill levels according to the value of the difference between their
				weight and a pre-determined set point. These systems may be used to fill
				standard packages for compliance with net weight requirements. [2.24]
(Amended 2004)
automatic gravimetric filling machine (instrument). -
A filling machine or instrument that fills containers or packages with
				predetermined and virtually constant mass of product from bulk by automatic
				weighing, and which comprises essentially an automatic feeding device or
				devices associated with one or more weighing unit and the appropriate discharge
				devices. [2.24]
(Added 2004)
automatic temperature or density compensation. -
The use of integrated or ancillary equipment to obtain from the output
				of a volumetric meter an equivalent mass, or an equivalent liquid volume at the
				assigned reference temperature below and a pressure of 14.696
				lb/in2 absolute.
Cryogenic liquids: 21 °C (70 °F) [3.34]
Hydrocarbon gas vapor: 15 °C (60 °F) [3.33]
Liquid carbon dioxide: 21 °C (70 °F) [3.38]
Liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) and Anhydrous ammonia: 15 °C
				(60 °F) [3.32]
Petroleum liquid fuels and lubricants: 15 °C (60 °F)
				[3.30]
automatic weighing system (AWS). -
An automatic
				weighing system is a weighing device that, in combination with other hardware
				and/or software components, automatically weighs discrete items and that does
				not require the intervention of an operator during the weighing process.
				Examples include, but are not limited to, weigh-labelers and checkweighers.
				[2.24]
(Amended 2004)
automatic zero-setting mechanism (AZSM). -
See
				"automatic zero-setting mechanism" under "zero-setting mechanism."
				[2.22]
(Amended 2010)
automatic zero-setting mechanism (belt-conveyor scale). -
A zero setting device that operates automatically without intervention
				of the operator after the belt has been running empty. [2.21]
(Added 2002)
automatic zero-tracking (AZT) mechanism. -
Automatic means provided to maintain the zero balance indication, within
				specified limits, without the intervention of an operator. [2.20, 2.22,
				2.24]
(Amended 2010)
automatic-indicating scale. -
One on which the
				weights of applied loads of various magnitudes are automatically indicated
				throughout all or a portion of the weighing range of the scale. (A scale that
				automatically weighs out commodity in predetermined drafts, such as an
				automatic hopper scale, a packaging scale, and the like, is not an
				"automatic-indicating" scale.) [2.20. 2.22]
auxiliary indicator. -
Any indicator other than
				the master weight totalizer that indicates the weight of material determined by
				the scale. [2.21]
axle-load scale. -
A scale permanently installed
				in a fixed location, having a load-receiving element specially adapted to
				determine the combined load of all wheels (1) on a single axle or (2) on a
				tandem axle of a highway vehicle. [2.20]
B
badge. -
A metal plate affixed to the meter by
				the manufacturer showing the manufacturer's name, serial number and model
				number of the meter, and its rated capacity. [3.33]
balance, zero-load. -
See "zero-load balance."
				[2.20]
balance indicator. -
A combination of elements,
				one or both of which will oscillate with respect to the other, for indicating
				the balance condition of a nonautomatic indicating scale. The combination may
				consist of two indicating edges, lines, or points, or a single edge, line, or
				point and a graduated scale. [2.20]
balancing mechanism. -
A mechanism (including a
				balance ball) that is designed for adjusting a scale to an accurate zero-load
				balance condition. [2.20]
base pressure. -
The absolute pressure used in
				defining the gas measurement unit to be used, and is the gauge pressure at the
				meter plus an agreed atmospheric pressure. [3.33]
basic distance rate. -
The charge for distance for
				all intervals except the initial interval. [5.54]
basic time rate. -
The charge for time for all
				intervals except the initial interval. [5.54]
basic tolerances. -
Basic tolerances are those
				tolerances on underregistration and on overregistration, or in excess and in
				deficiency, that are established by a particular code for a particular device
				under all normal tests, whether maintenance or acceptance. Basic tolerances
				include minimum tolerance values when these are specified. Special tolerances,
				identified as such and pertaining to special tests, are not basic tolerances.
				[1.10]
batching meter. -
A device used for the purpose of
				measuring quantities of water to be used in a batching operation. [3.36]
beam.
-
See "weighbeam." [2.20]
beam scale. -
One on which the weights of loads of
				various magnitudes are indicated solely by means of one or more weighbeam bars
				either alone or in combination with counterpoise weights. [2.20]
bell prover. -
A calibrated cylindrical metal tank
				of the annular type with a scale thereon that, in the downward travel in a
				surrounding tank containing a sealing medium, displaces air through the meter
				being proved or calibrated. [3.33]
belt-conveyor.
-
An endless moving belt for
				transporting material from place to place. [2.21]
belt-conveyor
scale. -
A device that employs a
				weighing element in contact with a belt to sense the weight of the material
				being conveyed and the speed (travel) of the material, and integrates these
				values to produce total delivered weight. [2.21]
belt-conveyor
scale systems area. -
The scale
				system area refers to the scale suspension, weigh idlers attached to the scale
				suspension, 5 approach (-) idlers, and 5 retreat (+) idlers. [2.21]
(Added 2001)
belt load
. - The weight of the material carried by
				the conveyor belt, expressed in terms of weight units per unit of length (e.g.,
				pounds per foot, kilograms per meter). Also called "belt loading."
				[2.21]
(Added 2013)
belt revolution.
- The amount of conveyor belt
				movement or travel that is equivalent to the total length of the conveyor belt.
				Also referred to as "belt circuit." [2.21]
(Added 2013)
billed weight. -
The weight used in the
				computation of the freight, postal, or storage charge, whether actual weight or
				dimensional weight. [5.58]
binary submultiples. -
Fractional parts obtained
				by successively dividing by the number two. Thus, one-half, one-fourth,
				one-eighth, one-sixteenth, and so on, are binary submultiples. [1.10]
built-for-purpose device. -
Any main device or
				element which was manufactured with the intent that it be used as, or part of,
				a weighing or measuring device or system. [1.10]
(Added 2003)
C
calibration parameter.
- Any adjustable parameter
				that can affect measurement or performance accuracy and, due to its nature,
				needs to be updated on an ongoing basis to maintain device accuracy, e.g., span
				adjustments, linearization factors, and coarse zero adjustments. [2.20, 2.21,
				2.24, 3.30, 3.37, 5.56(a)]
(Added 1993)
carbon dioxide liquid-measuring device.
- A system
				including a mechanism or machine of (a) the meter or (b) a weighing type of
				device mounted on a vehicle designed to measure and deliver liquid carbon
				dioxide. Means may be provided to indicate automatically, for one of a series
				of unit prices, the total money value of the quantity measured. [3.38]
car-wash
timer.
- A timer used in conjunction
				with a coin-operated device to measure the time during which car-wash water,
				cleaning solutions, or waxing solutions are dispensed. [5.55]
center-reading tank.
- One so designed that the
				gauge rod or surface gauge, when properly positioned for use, will be
				approximately in the vertical axis of the tank, centrally positioned with
				respect to the tank walls. [4.43]
cereal grain and oil seeds.
- Agricultural
				commodities including, but not limited to, corn, wheat, oats, barley, flax,
				rice, sorghum, soybeans, peanuts, dry beans, safflower, sunflower, fescue seed,
				etc. [5.56(a), 5.56(b)]
chart recorder.
- See analog or digital recorder.
				(Amended 1989)
check rate.
- A rate of flow usually 20 % of the
				capacity rate. [3.33]
checkweighing scale.
- One used to verify
				predetermined weight within prescribed limits. [2.24]
class of grain.
- Hard Red Winter Wheat as
				distinguished from Hard Red Spring Wheat as distinguished from Soft Red Winter
				Wheat, etc. [5.56(a), 5.56(b), 5.57]
clear interval between graduations.
- The distance
				between adjacent edges of successive graduations in a series of graduations. If
				the graduations are "staggered," the interval shall be measured, if necessary,
				between a graduation and an extension of the adjacent graduation. (Also see
				"minimum clear interval.") [1.10]
cleared.
- A taximeter is "cleared" when it is
				inoperative with respect to all fare indication, when no indication of fare or
				extras is shown and when all parts are in those positions in which they are
				designed to be when the vehicle on which the taximeter is installed is not
				engaged by a passenger. [5.54]
cold-tire
pressure.
- The pressure in a tire at
				ambient temperature. [5.53, 5.54]
commercial equipment.
- See "equipment." (Added
				2008)
computing scale.
- One that indicates the money
				values of amounts of commodity weighed, at predetermined unit prices,
				throughout all or part of the weighing range of the scale. [2.20]
computing type or computing type device.
- A
				device designed to indicate, in addition to weight or measure, the total money
				value of product weighed or measured, for one of a series of unit prices.
				[1.10]
concave curve.
- A change in the angle of
				inclination of a belt conveyor where the center of the curve is above the
				conveyor. [2.21]
concentrated load capacity (CLC)
(also referred to
				as Dual Tandem Axle Capacity[DTAC]). - A capacity rating of a vehicle or
				axle-load scale, specified by the manufacturer, defining the maximum load
				applied by a group of two axles with a centerline spaced four feet apart and an
				axle width of eight feet for which the weighbridge is designed. The
				concentrated load capacity rating is for both test and use. [2.20]
(Added 1988) (Amended 1991, 1994, and 2003)
configuration parameter.
- Any adjustable or
				selectable parameter for a device feature that can affect the accuracy of a
				transaction or can significantly increase the potential for fraudulent use of
				the device and, due to its nature, needs to be updated only during device
				installation or upon replacement of a component, e.g., division value
				(increment), sensor range, and units of measurement. [2.20, 2.21, 2.24, 3.30,
				3.37, 5.56(a)]
(Added 1993)
consecutive-car test train.
- A train consisting
				of cars weighed on a reference scale, then coupled consecutively and run over
				the coupled-in-motion railway track scale under test. [2.20]
(Added 1990)
construction materials hopper scale.
- A scale
				adapted to weighing construction materials such as sand, gravel, cement, and
				hot oil. [2.20]
contract sale.
- A sale where a written agreement
				exists, prior to the point of sale, in which both buyer and seller have
				accepted pricing conditions of the sale. Examples include, but are not limited
				to: e-commerce, club sales, or pre-purchase agreements. Any devices used in the
				determination of quantity must comply with NIST Handbook 44. [3.30, 3.32,
				3.37]
(Added 1993) (Amended 2002)
conventional scale.
- If the use of conversion
				tables is necessary to obtain a moisture content value, the moisture meter
				indicating scale is called "conventional scale." The values indicated by the
				scale are dimensionless. [5.56(b)]
conversion table.
- Any table, graph, slide rule,
				or other external device used to determine the moisture content from the value
				indicated by the moisture meter. [5.56(b)]
convex curve.
- A change in the angle of
				inclination of a belt conveyor where the center of the curve is below the
				conveyor. [2.21]
conveyor stringers.
- Support members for the
				conveyor on which the scale and idlers are mounted. [2.21]
correct.
- A piece of equipment is "correct" when,
				in addition to being accurate, it meets all applicable specification
				requirements. Equipment that fails to meet any of the requirements for correct
				equipment is "incorrect." (Also see "accurate.") [Appendix A]
correction table.
- Any table, graph, slide rule,
				or other external device used to determine the moisture content from the value
				indicated by the moisture meter when the indicated value is altered by a
				parameter not automatically corrected for in the moisture meter (for example,
				temperature or test weight). [5.56(b)]
counterbalance weight(s).
- One intended for
				application near the butt of a weighbeam for zero-load balancing purposes.
				[2.20]
counterpoise weight(s).
- A slotted or "hanger"
				weight intended for application near the tip of the weighbeam of a scale having
				a multiple greater than one. [2.20]
coupled-in-motion railroad weighing system.
- A
				device and related installation characteristics consisting of (1) the
				associated approach trackage, (2) the scale (i.e., the weighing element, the
				load-receiving element, and the indicating element with its software), and (3)
				the exit trackage, which permit the weighing of railroad cars coupled in
				motion. [2.20, 2.23]
(Added 1992)
crane scale. -
One with a nominal capacity of 5000
				pounds or more designed to weigh loads while they are suspended freely from an
				overhead, track-mounted crane. [2.20]
cryogenic liquid-measuring device. -
A system
				including a liquid-measuring element designed to measure and deliver cryogenic
				liquids in the liquid state. [3.34]
(Amended 1986 and 2003)
cryogenic liquids. -
Fluids whose normal boiling
				point is below 120 kelvin (- 243 °F). [3.34]
cubic foot, gas. -
The amount of a cryogenic
				liquid in the gaseous state at a temperature of 70 °F and under a pressure
				of 14.696 lb/in2 absolute that occupies one cubic
				foot (1 ft3). (See NTP.) [3.34]
D
"d," dimension division value. -
The smallest
				increment that the device displays for any axis and length of object in that
				axis. [5.58]
d, value scale division. -
See "scale division,
				value of (d)." [2.20, 2.22]
Dmax (maximum load of the
				measuring range). -
Largest value of a quantity (mass) which is applied
				to a load cell during test or use. This value shall not be greater than
				E
max
. [2.20]
(Added 2005)
Dmin (minimum load of the
				measuring range). -
Smallest value of a quantity (mass) which is applied
				to a load cell during test or use. This value shall not be less than
				Emin. [2.20]
(Added 2006)
dairy-product-test scale. -
A scale used in
				determining the moisture content of butter and/or cheese or in determining the
				butterfat content of milk, cream, or butter. [2.20]
decimal submultiples. -
Parts obtained by
				successively dividing by the number 10. Thus 0.1, 0.01, 0.001, and so on are
				decimal submultiples. [1.10]
decreasing-load test. -
A test for
				automatic-indicating scales only, wherein the performance of the scale is
				tested as the load is reduced. [2.20, 2.22]
(Amended 1987)
deficiency. -
See "excess and deficiency."
				[1.10]
diesel gallon equivalent (DGE). -
means 2.821 kg
				(6.22 lb) of natural gas. [5.2] (Added 2013)
diesel liter equivalent (DLE). -
means 0.756 kg of
				natural gas. [5.2] (Added 2013)
digital type. -
A system of indication or
				recording of the selector type or one that advances intermittently in which all
				values are presented digitally, or in numbers. In a digital indicating or
				recording element, or in digital representation, there are no graduations.
				[1.10]
dimensional weight (or dim, weight). -
A value
				computed by dividing the object's volume by a conversion factor; it may be used
				for the calculation of charges when the value is greater than the actual
				weight. [5.58]
(Added 2004)
direct sale. -
A sale in which both parties in the
				transaction are present when the quantity is being determined. An unattended
				automated or customer-operated weighing or measuring system is considered to
				represent the device/business owner in transactions involving an unattended
				device. [1.10]
(Amended 1993)
discharge hose. -
A flexible hose connected to the
				discharge outlet of a measuring device or its discharge line. [3.30, 3.31,
				3.32, 3.34, 3.37, 3.38]
(Added 1987)
discharge line. -
A rigid pipe connected to the
				outlet of a measuring device. [3.30, 3.31, 3.32, 3.34, 3.37] (Added
				1987)
discrimination (of an automatic-indicating scale). -
The value of the test load on the load-receiving element of the scale
				that will produce a specified minimum change of the indicated or recorded value
				on the scale. [2.20, 2.22]
dispenser. -
See motor-fuel device. [3.30,
				3.37]
distributed-car test train. -
A train consisting
				of cars weighed first on a reference scale, cars coupled consecutively in
				groups at different locations within the train, then run over the
				coupled-in-motion railway track scale under test. The groups are typically
				placed at the front, middle, and rear of the train. [2.20]
(Added 1990)
dry hose. -
A discharge hose intended to be
				completely drained at the end of each delivery of product. (Also see "dry-hose
				type.") [3.30, 3.31]
(Amended 2002)
dry-hose
type. -
A type of device in which it is
				intended that the discharge hose be completely drained following the mechanical
				operations involved in each delivery. (Also see "dry hose.") [3.30, 3.31, 3.34,
				3.35]
dynamic monorail weighing system. -
A weighing
				system which employs hardware or software to compensate for dynamic effects
				from the load or the system that do not exist in static weighing, in order to
				provide a stable indication. Dynamic factors may include shock or impact
				loading, system vibrations, oscillations, etc., and can occur even when the
				load is not moving across the load-receiving element. [2.20]
(Added 1999)
E
e, value of verification scale division. -
See
				"verification scale division, value of (e)." [2.20]
Emax (maximum capacity). -
Largest value of a quantity (mass) which may be applied to a load cell
				without exceeding the mpe. [2.20]
(Added 2005)
Emin (minimum dead load). -
Smallest value of a quantity (mass) which may be applied to a load cell
				during test or use without exceeding the mpe. [2.20]
(Added 2006)
emin (minimum verification scale
				division). -
The smallest scale division for which a weighing element
				complies with the applicable requirements. [2.20, 2.21, 2.24]
(Added 1997)
electronic link. -
An electronic connection
				between the weighing/load-receiving or other sensing element and indicating
				element where one recognizes the other and neither can be replaced without
				calibration. [2.20]
(Added 2001)
element.
- A portion of a weighing or measuring
				device or system which performs a specific function and can be separated,
				evaluated separately, and is subject to specified full or partial error
				limits.
(Added 2002)
equal-arm
scale.
- A scale having only a single
				lever with equal arms (that is, with a multiple of one), equipped with two
				similar or dissimilar load-receiving elements (pan, plate, platter, scoop, or
				the like), one intended to receive material being weighed and the other
				intended to receive weights. There may or may not be a weighbeam. [2.20]
equipment, commercial.
- Weights, measures, and
				weighing and measuring devices, instruments, elements, and systems or portion
				thereof, used or employed in establishing the measurement or in computing any
				basic charge or payment for services rendered on the basis of weight or
				measure. As used in this definition, measurement includes the determination of
				size, quantity, value, extent, area, composition (limited to meat and poultry),
				constituent value (for grain), or measurement of quantities, things, produce,
				or articles for distribution or consumption, purchased, offered, or submitted
				for sale, hire, or award. [1.10, 2.20, 2.21, 2.22, 2.24, 3.30, 3.31, 3.32,
				3.33, 3.34, 3.35, 3.38, 4.40, 5.51, 5.56.(a), 5.56.(b), 5.57, 5.58,
				5.59]
(Added 2008)
event counter.
- A non-resettable counter that
				increments once each time the mode that permits changes to sealable parameters
				is entered and one or more changes are made to sealable calibration or
				configuration parameters of a device. [2.20, 2.21, 3.30, 3.37, 5.54, 5.56(a),
				5.56(b), 5.57]
(Added 1993)
event logger.
- A form of audit trail containing a
				series of records where each record contains the number from the event counter
				corresponding to the change to a sealable parameter, the identification of the
				parameter that was changed, the time and date when the parameter was changed,
				and the new value of the parameter. [2.20, 2.21, 3.30, 3.37, 5.54, 5.56(a),
				5.56(b), 5.57]
(Added 1993)
excess and deficiency.
- When an instrument or
				device is of such a character that it has a value of its own that can be
				determined, its error is said to be "in excess" or "in deficiency," depending
				upon whether its actual value is, respectively, greater or less than its
				nominal value. (Also see "nominal.") Examples of instruments having errors "in
				excess" are: a linear measure that is too long; a liquid measure that is too
				large; and a weight that is "heavy." Examples of instruments having errors "in
				deficiency" are: a lubricating-oil bottle that is too small; a vehicle tank
				compartment that is too small; and a weight that is "light." [1.10]
extras.
- Charges to be paid by a passenger in
				addition to the fare, including any charge at a flat rate for the
				transportation of passengers in excess of a stated number and any charge for
				the transportation of baggage. [5.54]
F
face.
-
That side of a taximeter on which
				passenger charges are indicated. [5.54]
face.
-
That portion of a computing-type pump or
				dispenser which displays the actual computation of price per unit, delivered
				quantity, and total sale price. In the case of some electronic displays, this
				may not be an integral part of the pump or dispenser. [3.30]
(Added 1987)
fare.
-
That portion of the charge for the hire
				of a vehicle that is automatically calculated by a taximeter through the
				operation of the distance and/or time mechanism. [5.54]
farm milk tank. -
A unit for measuring milk or
				other fluid dairy product, comprising a combination of (1) a stationary or
				portable tank, whether or not equipped with means for cooling its contents, (2)
				means for reading the level of liquid in the tank, such as a removable gauge
				rod or a surface gauge, and (3) a chart for converting level-of-liquid readings
				to volume; or such a unit in which readings are made on a gauge rod or surface
				gauge directly in terms of volume. Each compartment of a subdivided tank shall,
				for purposes of this code, be construed to be a "farm milk tank." [4.43]
feeding mechanism. -
The means for depositing
				material to be weighed on the belt conveyor. [2.21]
fifth wheel. -
A commercially-available
				distance-measuring device which, after calibration, is recommended for use as a
				field transfer standard for testing the accuracy of taximeters and odometers on
				rented vehicles. [5.53, 5.54]
fifth-wheel test. -
A distance test similar to a
				road test, except that the distance traveled by the vehicle under test is
				determined by a mechanism known as a "fifth wheel" that is attached to the
				vehicle and that independently measures and indicates the distance. [5.53,
				5.54]
flag. -
A plate at the end of the lever arm or
				similar part by which the operating condition of a taximeter is controlled and
				indicated. [5.54]
fractional bar. -
A weighbeam bar of relatively
				small capacity for obtaining indications intermediate between notches or
				graduations on a main or tare bar. [2.20]
ft3/h. -
Cubic feet per
				hour. [3.33]
G
gasoline gallon equivalent (GGE). -
Gasoline
				gallon equivalent (GGE) means 5.660 pounds of natural gas. [3.37] (Added
				1994)
gasoline liter equivalent (GLE). -
Gasoline liter
				equivalent (GLE) means 0.678 kilograms of natural gas. [3.37] (Added
				1994)
gauge pressure. -
The difference between the
				pressure at the meter and the atmospheric pressure (psi). [3.33]
gauge rod. -
A graduated, "dip-stick" type of
				measuring rod designed to be partially immersed in the liquid and to be read at
				the point where the liquid surface crosses the rod. [4.42]
gauging. -
The process of determining and
				assigning volumetric values to specific graduations on the gauge or gauge rod
				that serve as the basis for the tank volume chart. [4.42]
graduated interval. -
The distance from the center
				of one graduation to the center of the next graduation in a series of
				graduations.
-
(Also see "value of minimum graduated interval.")
				[1.10]
graduation. -
A defining line or one of the lines
				defining the subdivisions of a graduated series. The term includes such special
				forms as raised or indented or scored reference "lines" and special characters
				such as dots. (Also see "main graduation" and "subordinate graduation.")
				[1.10]
grain class. -
Different grains within the same
				grain type. For example, there are six classes for the grain type "wheat:"
				Durum Wheat, Hard Red Spring Wheat, Hard Red Winter Wheat, Soft Red Winter
				Wheat, Hard White Wheat, and Soft White Wheat. [5.56(a), 5.57]
(Added 2007)
grain hopper scale. -
One adapted to the weighing
				of individual loads of varying amounts of grain. [2.20]
grain moisture meter. -
Any device indicating
				either directly or through conversion tables and/or correction tables the
				moisture content of cereal grains and oil seeds. Also termed "moisture meter."
				[5.56(a), 5.56(b)]
grain sample. -
That portion of grain or seed
				taken from a bulk quantity of grain or seed to be bought or sold and used to
				determine the moisture content of the bulk. [5.56(a), 5.56(b)]
grain-test scale. -
A scale adapted to weighing
				grain samples used in determining moisture content, dockage, weight per unit
				volume, etc. [2.20]
grain type. -
See "kind of grain." [5.56(a), 5.57]
				(Added 2007)
gravity discharge. -
A type of device designed for
				discharge by gravity. [3.30, 3.31]
H
head pulley. -
The pulley at the discharge end of
				the belt conveyor. The power drive to drive the belt is generally applied to
				the head pulley. [2.21]
hexahedron. -
A geometric solid (i.e., box) with
				six rectangular or square plane surfaces. [5.58] (Added 2008)
hired.
-
A taximeter is "hired" when it is
				operative with respect to all applicable indications of fare or extras. The
				indications of fare include time and distance where applicable unless qualified
				by another indication of "Time Not Recording" or an equivalent expression.
				[5.54]
hopper scale. -
A scale designed for weighing bulk
				commodities whose load-receiving element is a tank, box, or hopper mounted on a
				weighing element. (Also see "automatic hopper scale," "grain hopper scale," and
				"construction materials hopper scale.") [2.20]
I
idler space. -
The center-to-center distance
				between idler rollers measured parallel to the belt. [2.21]
idlers or idler rollers. -
Freely turning
				cylinders mounted on a frame to support the conveyor belt. For a flat belt, the
				idlers consist of one or more horizontal cylinders transverse to the direction
				of belt travel. For a troughed belt, the idlers consist of one or more
				horizontal cylinders and one or more cylinders at an angle to the horizontal to
				lift the sides of the belt to form a trough. [2.21]
in-service
light indicator. -
A light used to
				indicate that a timing device is in operation. [5.55]
increasing-load test. -
The normal basic
				performance test for a scale in which observations are made as increments of
				test load are successively added to the load-receiving element of the scale.
				[2.20, 2.22]
increment. -
The value of the smallest change in
				value that can be indicated or recorded by a digital device in normal
				operation. [1.10]
index of an indicator. -
The particular portion of
				an indicator that is directly utilized in making a reading. [1.10]
indicating element. -
An element incorporated in a
				weighing or measuring device by means of which its performance relative to
				quantity or money value is "read" from the device itself as, for example, an
				index-and-graduated-scale combination, a weighbeam-and-poise combination, a
				digital indicator, and the like. (Also see "primary indicating or recording
				element.") [1.10]
indicator, balance. -
See "balance indicator."
				[2.20]
initial distance or time interval. -
The interval
				corresponding to the initial money drop. [5.54]
initial zero-setting mechanism. -
See "initial
				zero-setting mechanism" under "zero-setting mechanism." [2.20] (Added
				1990)
integrator. -
A device used with a belt-conveyor
				scale that combines conveyor belt load (e.g., lb/ft) and belt travel (e.g.,
				feet) to produce a total weight of material passing over the belt-conveyor
				scale. An integrator may be a separate, detached mechanism or may be a
				component within a totalizing device. (Also see "master weight totalizer.")
				[2.21]
(Added 2013)
interval, clear, between graduations. -
See "clear
				interval between graduations." [1.10]
interval, graduated. -
See "graduated interval."
				[1.10]
irregularly-shaped object. -
Any object that is
				not a hexahedron shape. [5.58] (Added 2008)
J
jewelers' scale. -
One adapted to weighing gems
				and precious metals. [2.20]
K
kind of grain. -
Corn as distinguished from
				soybeans as distinguished from wheat, etc. [5.56(a), 5.56(b)]
L
label. -
A printed ticket, to be attached to a
				package, produced by a printer that is a part of a prepackaging scale or that
				is an auxiliary device. [2.20]
large-delivery
device. -
Devices used primarily
				for single deliveries greater than 200 gallons, 2000 pounds, 20 000 cubic feet,
				2000 liters, or 2000 kilograms. [3.34, 3.38]
laundry-drier timer. -
A timer used in conjunction
				with a coin-operated device to measure the period of time that a laundry drier
				is in operation. [5.55]
liquefied petroleum gas. -
A petroleum product
				composed predominantly of any of the following hydrocarbons or mixtures
				thereof: propane, propylene, butanes (normal butane or isobutane), and
				butylenes. [3.31, 3.32, 3.33, 3.34, 3.37]
liquefied petroleum gas liquid-measuring device. -
A system including a mechanism or machine of the meter type designed to
				measure and deliver liquefied petroleum gas in the liquid state by a definite
				quantity, whether installed in a permanent location or mounted on a vehicle.
				Means may or may not be provided to indicate automatically, for one of a series
				of unit prices, the total money value of the liquid measured. [3.33]
(Amended 1987)
liquefied petroleum gas vapor-measuring device. -
A system including a mechanism or device of the meter type, equipped
				with a totalizing index, designed to measure and deliver liquefied petroleum
				gas in the vapor state by definite volumes, and generally installed in a
				permanent location. The meters are similar in construction and operation to the
				conventional natural- and manufactured-gas meters. [3.33]
liquid fuel. -
Any liquid used for fuel purposes,
				that is, as a fuel, including motor-fuel. [3.30, 3.31]
liquid volume correction factor. -
A correction
				factor used to adjust the liquid volume of a cryogenic product at the time of
				measurement to the liquid volume at NBP. [3.34]
liquid-fuel device. -
A device designed for the
				measurement and delivery of liquid fuels. [3.30]
liquid-measuring device. -
A mechanism or machine
				designed to measure and deliver liquid by definite volume. Means may or may not
				be provided to indicate automatically, for one of a series of unit prices, the
				total money value of the liquid measured, or to make deliveries corresponding
				to specific money values at a definite unit price. [3.30]
livestock scale. -
A scale equipped with stock
				racks and gates and adapted to weighing livestock standing on the scale
				platform. [2.20]
(Amended 1989)
load cell. -
A device, whether electric,
				hydraulic, or pneumatic, that produces a signal (change in output) proportional
				to the load applied. [2.20, 2.21, 2.23]
load cell verification interval (v). -
The load
				cell interval, expressed in units of mass, used in the test of the load cell
				for accuracy classification. [2.20, 2.21]
(Added 1996)
loading point. -
A location on a conveyor where
				the material is received by the belt. The location of the discharge from a
				hopper, chute, or pre-feed device used to supply material to a conveyor.
				[2.21]
(Amended 2013)
load-receiving
element. -
That element of a scale
				that is designed to receive the load to be weighed; for example, platform,
				deck, rail, hopper, platter, plate, scoop. [2.20, 2.21, 2.23]
low-flame
test. -
A test simulating extremely
				low-flow rates such as caused by pilot lights. [3.33]
lubricant device. -
A device designed for the
				measurement and delivery of liquid lubricants, including, but not limited to,
				heavy gear lubricants and automatic transmission fluids (automotive).
				[3.30]
M
m3/h. -
Cubic meters
				per hour.[3.33]
main bar. -
A principal weighbeam bar, usually of
				relatively large capacity as compared with other bars of the same weighbeam.
				(On an automatic-indicating scale equipped with a weighbeam, the main weighbeam
				bar is frequently called the "capacity bar.") [2.20]
main graduation. -
A graduation defining the
				primary or principal subdivisions of a graduated series. (Also see
				"graduation.") [1.10]
main-weighbeam
elements. -
The combination of a
				main bar and its fractional bar, or a main bar alone if no fractional bar is
				associated with it. [2.20]
manual zero-setting mechanism. -
See "manual
				zero-setting mechanism" under "zero-setting mechanism." [2.20]
manufactured device. -
Any commercial weighing or
				measuring device shipped as new from the original equipment manufacturer.
				[1.10]
(Amended 2001)
mass flow meter. -
A device that measures the mass
				of a product flowing through the system. The mass measurement may be determined
				directly from the effects of mass on the sensing unit or may be inferred by
				measuring the properties of the product, such as the volume, density,
				temperature, or pressure, and displaying the quantity in mass units.
				[3.37]
master meter test method. -
A method of testing
				milk tanks that utilizes an approved master meter system for measuring test
				liquid removed from or introduced into the tank. [4.42]
master weight totalizer. -
A primary indicating
				element used with a belt-conveyor scale that incorporates the function of an
				integrator to indicate the totalized weight of material passed over the scale.
				(Also see "integrator.") [2.21]
(Amended 2013)
material test. -
The test of a belt-conveyor scale
				using material (preferably that for which the device is normally used) that has
				been weighed to an accuracy of 0.1 %. [2.21]
(Amended 1989)
maximum capacity. -
The largest load that may be
				accurately weighed. [2.20, 2.24] (Added 1999)
maximum cargo load. -
The maximum cargo load for
				trucks is the difference between the manufacturer's rated gross vehicle weight
				and the actual weight of the vehicle having no cargo load. [5.53]
measurement field. -
A region of space or the
				measurement pattern produced by the measuring instrument in which objects are
				placed or passed through, either singly or in groups, when being measured by a
				single device. [5.58]
measuring element. -
That portion of a complete
				multiple dimension measuring device that does not include the indicating
				element. [5.58]
meter register. -
An observation index for the
				cumulative reading of the gas flow through the meter. In addition there are one
				or two proving circles in which one revolution of the test hand represents
				½, 1, 2, 5, or 10 cubic feet, or 0.025, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, or 0.25 cubic
				meter, depending on meter size. If two proving circles are present, the circle
				representing the smallest volume per revolution is referred to as the
				"leak-test circle." [3.33]
metrological integrity (of a device). -
The
				design, features, operation, installation, or use of a device that facilitates
				(1) the accuracy and validity of a measurement or transaction, (2) compliance
				of the device with weights and measures requirements, or (3) the suitability of
				the device for a given application. [1.10, 2.20]
(Added 1993)
minimum capacity. -
The smallest load that may be
				accurately weighed. The weighing results may be subject to excessive error if
				used below this value. [2.20, 2.24]
(Added 1999)
minimum clear interval. -
The shortest distance
				between adjacent graduations when the graduations are not parallel. (Also see
				"clear interval.") [3.30, 3.31, 3.32, 3.33, 3.34, 3.35, 3.36, 3.38, 5.50, 5.51,
				5.56(b)]
minimum delivery. -
The least amount of weight
				that is to be delivered as a single weighment by a belt-conveyor scale system
				in normal use. [2.21]
minimum tolerance. -
Minimum tolerances are the
				smallest tolerance values that can be applied to a scale. Minimum tolerances
				are determined on the basis of the value of the minimum graduated interval or
				the nominal or reading face capacity of the scale. (Also see definition for
				basic tolerances.) [2.20, 2.22, 2.24]
minimum totalized load. -
The least amount of
				weight for which the scale is considered to be performing accurately.
				[2.21]
moisture content (wet basis). -
The mass of water
				in a grain or seed sample (determined by the reference method) divided by the
				mass of the grain or seed sample expressed as a percentage (%). [5.56(a),
				5.56(b)]
money drop. -
An increment of fare indication. The
				"initial money drop" is the first increment of fare indication following
				activation of the taximeter. [5.54]
money-operated type. -
A device designed to be
				released for service by the insertion of money, or to be actuated by the
				insertion of money to make deliveries of product. [1.10]
motor-fuel. -
Liquid used as fuel for
				internal-combustion engines. [3.30]
motor-fuel device or motor-fuel dispenser or retail
				motor-fuel device. -
A device designed for the measurement and delivery
				of liquids used as fuel for internal-combustion engines. The term "motor-fuel
				dispenser" means the same as "motor-fuel device"; the term "retail motor-fuel
				device" applies to a unique category of device. (Also see definition of "retail
				device.") [3.30, 3.32, 3.37]
multi-class.
-
A description of a grouping of
				grain classes, from the same grain type, in one calibration. A multi-class
				grain calibration may include (1) all the classes of a grain type (all-class
				calibration), or (2) some of the classes of a grain type within the
				calibration. [5.56(a), 5.57.]
(Added 2007)
multi-interval scale. -
A scale having one
				weighing range which is divided into partial weighing ranges (segments), each
				with different scale intervals, with each partial weighing range (segment)
				determined automatically according to the load applied, both on increasing and
				decreasing loads. [2.20]
(Added 1995)
multi-jet water meter. -
A water meter in which
				the moving element takes the form of a multiblade rotor mounted on a vertical
				spindle within a cylindrical measuring chamber. The liquid enters the measuring
				chamber through several tangential orifices around the circumference and leaves
				the measuring chamber through another set of tangential orifices placed at a
				different level in the measuring chamber. These meters register by recording
				the revolutions of a rotor set in motion by the force of flowing water striking
				the blades. [3.36]
(Added 2003)
multi-revolution scale. -
An automatic-indicating
				scale having a nominal capacity that is a multiple of the reading-face capacity
				and that is achieved by more than one complete revolution of the indicator.
				[2.20]
multiple. -
An integral multiple; that is, a
				result obtained by multiplying by a whole number. (Also see "multiple of a
				scale.") [1.10]
multiple cell application load cell. -
A load cell
				intended for use in a weighing system which incorporates more than one load
				cell. A multiple cell application load cell is designated with the letter "M"
				or the term "Multiple." (Also see "single cell application load cell.")
				[2.20]
(Added 1999)
multiple of a scale. -
In general, the multiplying
				power of the entire system of levers or other basic weighing elements. (On a
				beam scale, the multiple of the scale is the number of pounds on the
				load-receiving element that will be counterpoised by one pound applied to the
				tip pivot of the weighbeam.) [2.20]
multiple range scale. -
A scale having two or more
				weighing ranges with different maximum capacities and different scale intervals
				for the same load receptor, each range extending from zero to its maximum
				capacity. [2.20]
(Added 1995)
multiple-tariff taximeter. -
One that may be set
				to calculate fares at any one of two or more rates. [5.54]
N
natural gas. -
A gaseous fuel, composed primarily
				of methane, that is suitable for compression and dispensing into a fuel storage
				container(s) for use as an engine fuel. [3.37]
(Added 1994)
NBP.
-
Normal Boiling Point of a cryogenic liquid
				at 14.696 lb/in2 absolute. [3.34]
nmax (maximum number of scale
				divisions). -
The maximum number of scale divisions for which a main
				element or load cell complies with the applicable requirements. The maximum
				number of scale divisions permitted for an installation is limited to the
				lowest nmax marked on the scale indicating element,
				weighing element, or load cell. [2.20, 2.21, 2.24]
(Added 1997)
no-load reference value. -
A positive weight
				value indication with no load in the load-receiving element (hopper) of the
				scale. (Used with automatic bulk-weighing systems and certain single-draft,
				manually-operated receiving hopper scales installed below grade and used to
				receive grain.) [2.20]
nominal. -
Refers to "intended" or "named" or
				"stated," as opposed to "actual." For example, the "nominal" value of something
				is the value that it is supposed or intended to have, the value that it is
				claimed or stated to have, or the value by which it is commonly known. Thus,
				"1-pound weight," "1-gallon measure," "1-yard indication," and "500-pound
				scale" are statements of nominal values; corresponding actual values may be
				greater or lesser. (Also see nominal capacity of a scale.) [1.10]
nominal capacity. -
The nominal capacity of a
				scale is (a) the largest weight indication that can be obtained by the use of
				all of the reading or recording elements in combination, including the amount
				represented by any removable weights furnished or ordinarily furnished with the
				scale, but excluding the amount represented by any extra removable weights not
				ordinarily furnished with the scale, and excluding also the capacity of any
				auxiliary weighing attachment not contemplated by the original design of the
				scale, and excluding any fractional bar with a capacity less than 2½ %
				of the sum of the capacities of the remaining reading elements, or (b) the
				capacity marked on the scale by the manufacturer, whichever is less. (Also see
				"nominal capacity, batching scale"; "nominal capacity, hopper scale.")
				[2.20]
nominal capacity, batching scale. -
The nominal
				capacity of a batching scale is the capacity as marked on the scale by the
				scale manufacturer, or the sum of the products of the volume of each of the
				individual hoppers, in terms of cubic feet, times the weight per cubic foot of
				the heaviest material weighed in each hopper, whichever is less. [2.20]
nominal capacity, hopper scale. -
The nominal
				capacity of a hopper scale is the capacity as marked on the scale by the scale
				manufacturer, or the product of the volume of the hopper in bushels or cubic
				feet times the maximum weight per bushel or cubic foot, as the case may be, of
				the commodity normally weighed, whichever is less. [2.20]
non-automatic
checkweigher. -
A weighing
				instrument that requires the intervention of an operator during the weighing
				process, used to subdivide items of different weights into one or more
				subgroups, such as identifying packages that have acceptable or unacceptable
				fill levels according to the value of the difference between their weight and a
				pre-determined set point. [2.24]
Notes:
Determining the weighing result includes
				any intelligent action of the operator that affects the result, such as
				deciding and taking an action when an indication is stable or adjusting the
				weight of the weighed load.
Deciding the weighing result is acceptable means making a
				decision regarding the acceptance of each weighing result on observing the
				indication or releasing a print-out. The weighing process allows the operator
				to take an action which influences the weighing result in the case where the
				weighing result is not acceptable.
(Added 2004)
non-automatic
weighing instrument. -
A weighing
				instrument or system that requires the intervention of an operator during the
				weighing process to determine the weighing result or to decide that it is
				acceptable. [2.20, 2.24]
Notes:
Determining the weighing result includes
				any intelligent action of the operator that affects the result, such as
				deciding and taking an action when an indication is stable or adjusting the
				weight of the weighed load.
Deciding the weighing result is acceptable means making a
				decision regarding the acceptance of each weighing result on observing the
				indication or releasing a print-out. The weighing process allows the operator
				to take an action which influences the weighing result in the case where the
				weighing result is not acceptable.
(Added 2004) (Amended 2005)
nonretroactive. -
"Nonretroactive" requirements
				are enforceable after the effective date for:
1. devices manufactured within a state after
			 the effective date;
2. both new and
			 used devices brought into a state after the effective date; and
3. devices used in noncommercial applications
			 which are placed into commercial use after the effective date.
Nonretroactive requirements are not enforceable with respect to
				devices that are in commercial service in the state as of the effective date or
				to new equipment in the stock of a manufacturer or a dealer in the state as of
				the effective date.
(Nonretroactive requirements are printed in italic
				type.)
[1.10]
(Amended 1989)
nose-iron. -
A slide-mounted, manually-adjustable
				pivot assembly for changing the multiple of a lever. [2.20]
notes. -
A section included in each of a number
				of codes, containing instructions, pertinent directives, and other specific
				information pertaining to the testing of devices. Notes are primarily directed
				to weights and measures officials.
NTP. -
Normal Temperature and Pressure of a
				cryogen at a temperature of 21 °C (70 °F) and a pressure of 101.325 kPa
				(14.696 lb/in2 absolute). [3.34]
NTP density and volume correction factor. -
A
				correction factor used to adjust the liquid volume of a cryogenic product at
				the time of measurement to the gas equivalent at NTP. [3.34]
O
odometer. -
A device that automatically indicates
				the total distance traveled by a vehicle. For the purpose of this code, this
				definition includes hub odometers, cable-driven odometers, and the
				distance-indicating or odometer portions of "speedometer" assemblies for
				automotive vehicles. [5.53]
official grain samples. -
Grain or seed used by
				the official as the official transfer standard from the reference standard
				method to test the accuracy and precision of grain moisture meters. [5.56(a),
				5.56(b)]
official with statutory authority. -
The
				representative of the jurisdiction(s) responsible for certifying the accuracy
				of the device. [2.20, 2.21, 2.22]
(Added 1991)
operating tire pressure. -
The pressure in a tire
				immediately after a vehicle has been driven for at least 5 miles or 8
				kilometers. [5.53, 5.54]
over-and-under
indicator. -
An
				automatic-indicating element incorporated in or attached to a scale and
				comprising an indicator and a graduated scale with a central or intermediate
				"zero" graduation and a limited range of weight graduations on either side of
				the zero graduation, for indicating weights greater than and less than the
				predetermined values for which other elements of the scale may be set. (A scale
				having an over-and-under indicator is classed as an automatic-indicating
				scale.) [2.20]
overregistration and underregistration. -
When an
				instrument or device is of such a character that it indicates or records values
				as a result of its operation, its error is said to be in the direction of
				overregistration or underregistration, depending upon whether the indications
				are, respectively, greater or less than they should be. Examples of devices
				having errors of "overregistration" are: a fabric-measuring device that
				indicates more than the true length of material passed through it; and a
				liquid-measuring device that indicates more than the true amount of the liquid
				delivered by the device. Examples of devices having errors of
				"underregistration" are: a meter that indicates less than the true amount of
				product that it delivers; and a weighing scale that indicates or records less
				than the true weight of the applied load. [1.10]
P
parallax. -
The apparent displacement, or apparent
				difference in height or width, of a graduation or other object with respect to
				a fixed reference, as viewed from different points. [1.10]
parking meter. -
A coin-operated device for
				measuring parking time for vehicles. [5.55]
passenger vehicles. -
Vehicles such as
				automobiles, recreational vehicles, limousines, ambulances, and hearses.
				[5.53]
performance requirements. -
Performance
				requirements include all tolerance requirements and, in the case of
				nonautomatic-indicating scales, sensitivity requirements (SR). (Also see
				definitions for "tolerance" and "sensitivity requirement.") [1.10]
point-of-sale
system. -
An assembly of elements
				including a weighing or measuring element, an indicating element, and a
				recording element (and may also be equipped with a "scanner") used to complete
				a direct sales transaction. The system components, when operated together, must
				be capable of the following:
1.
			 determining the weight or measure of a product or service offered;
2. calculating a charge for the product or
			 service based on the weight or measure and an established price/rate
			 structure;
3. determining a total
			 cost that includes all associated charges involved with the transaction;
			 and
4. providing a sales receipt.
			 [2.20, 3.30, 3.32, 3.37]
(Added 1986) (Amended 1997 and 2015)
poise.
-
A movable weight mounted upon or
				suspended from a weighbeam bar and used in combination with graduations, and
				frequently with notches, on the bar to indicate weight values. (A suspended
				poise is commonly called a "hanging poise.") [2.20]
postal scale. -
A scale (usually a computing
				scale) designed for use to determine shipping weight or delivery charges for
				letters or parcels delivered by the U.S. Postal Service or private shipping
				companies. A weight classifier may be used as a postal scale. [2.20]
(Added 1987)
prepackaging scale. -
A computing scale specially
				designed for putting up packages of random weights in advance of sale.
				[2.20]
prescription scale. -
A scale or balance adapted
				to weighing the ingredients of medicinal and other formulas prescribed by
				physicians and others and used or intended to be used in the ordinary trade of
				pharmacists. [2.20]
pressure type (device). -
A type of device
				designed for operation with the liquid under artificially produced pressure.
				[3.30, 3.31]
primary indicating or recording elements. -
The
				term "primary" is applied to those principal indicating (visual) elements and
				recording elements that are designed to, or may, be used by the operator in the
				normal commercial use of a device. The term "primary" is applied to any element
				or elements that may be the determining factor in arriving at the sale
				representation when the device is used commercially. (Examples of primary
				elements are the visual indicators for meters or scales not equipped with
				ticket printers or other recording elements and both the visual indicators and
				the ticket printers or other recording elements for meters or scales so
				equipped.) The term "primary" is not applied to such auxiliary elements as, for
				example, the totalizing register or predetermined-stop mechanism on a meter or
				the means for producing a running record of successive weighing operations,
				these elements being supplementary to those that are the determining factors in
				sales representations of individual deliveries or weights. (Also see
				"indicating element" and "recording element.") [1.10]
prover method. -
A method of testing milk tanks
				that utilizes approved volumetric prover(s) for measuring the test liquid
				removed from or introduced into the tank. [4.42]
prover oil. -
A light oil of low vapor pressure
				used as a sealing medium in bell provers, cubic-foot bottles, and portable
				cubic-foot standards. [3.33]
proving indicator. -
The test hand or pointer of
				the proving or leak-test circle on the meter register or index. [3.33,
				3.36.]
R
"r" factor. -
A computation for determining the
				suitability of a vehicle scale for weighing vehicles with varying axle
				configurations. The factor was derived by dividing the weights in FHWA Federal
				Highway Bridge Gross Weight Table B by 34 000 lbs. (The resultant factors are
				contained in Table UR.3.2.1.) [2.20]
radio frequency interference (RFI). -
Radio
				frequency interference is a type of electrical disturbance that, when
				introduced into electronic and electrical circuits, may cause deviations from
				the normally expected performance. [1.10]
random error(s). -
The sample standard deviation
				of the error (indicated values) for a number of consecutive automatic weighings
				of a load, or loads, passed over the load receptor, shall be expressed
				mathematically as:
Click here
				to view image
where: X = error of a load indication
n = the number of loads
[2.24]
ranges, weight. -
See "weight ranges."
				[2.20]
rated capacity. -
The rate of flow in cubic meters
				per hour of a hydrocarbon gas vapor-measuring device as recommended by the
				manufacturer. This rate of flow should cause a pressure drop across the meter
				not exceeding ½-inch water column. [3.33]
rated scale capacity. -
That value representing
				the weight that can be delivered by the device in one hour. [2.21]
ratio test. -
A test to determine the accuracy
				with which the actual multiple of a scale agrees with its designed multiple.
				This test is used for scales employing counterpoise weights and is made with
				standard test weights substituted in all cases for the weights commercially
				used on the scale. (It is appropriate to use this test for some scales not
				employing counterpoise weights.) [2.20]
reading face. -
That portion of an
				automatic-indicating weighing or measuring device that gives a visible
				indication of the quantity weighed or measured. A reading face may include an
				indicator and a series of graduations or may present values digitally, and may
				also provide money-value indications. [1.10, 2.20]
(Amended 2005)
reading-face capacity. -
The largest value that
				may be indicated on the reading face, exclusive of the application or addition
				of any supplemental or accessory elements. [1.10]
recorded representation. -
The printed, embossed,
				or other representation that is recorded as a quantity by a weighing or
				measuring device. [1.10]
recording element. -
An element incorporated in a
				weighing or measuring device by means of which its performance relative to
				quantity or money value is permanently recorded on a tape, ticket, card, or the
				like, in the form of a printed, stamped, punched, or perforated representation.
				[1.10, 2.21]
recording scale. -
One on which the weights of
				applied loads may be permanently recorded on a tape, ticket, card, or the like
				in the form of a printed, stamped, punched, or perforated representation.
				[2.20]
reference weight car. -
A railcar that has been
				statically weighed for temporary use as a mass standard over a short period of
				time, typically the time required to test one scale.
Note:
A test weight car that is representative of
				the types of cars typically weighed on the scale under test may be used
				wherever reference weight cars are specified. [2.20]
(Added 1991) (Amended 2012)
remanufactured device. -
A device that is
				disassembled, checked for wear, parts replaced or fixed, reassembled and made
				to operate like a new device of the same type. [1.10]
(Added 2001)
remanufactured element. -
An element that is
				disassembled, checked for wear, parts replaced or fixed, reassembled and made
				to operate like a new element of the same type. [1.10]
(Added 2001)
remote configuration capability. -
The ability to
				adjust a weighing or measuring device or change its sealable parameters from or
				through some other device that is not itself necessary to the operation of the
				weighing or measuring device or is not a permanent part of that device. [2.20,
				2.21, 2.24, 3.30, 3.37, 5.56(a)]
(Added 1993)
repaired device. -
A device to which work is
				performed that brings the device back into proper operating condition.
				[1.10]
(Added 2001)
repaired element. -
An element to which work is
				performed that brings the element back into proper operating condition.
				[1.10]
(Added 2001)
retail device. -
A measuring device primarily used
				to measure product for the purpose of sale to the end user. [3.30, 3.32,
				3.37]
(Amended 1987 and 2004)
retroactive. -
"Retroactive" requirements are
				enforceable with respect to all equipment. Retroactive requirements are printed
				herein in upright roman type. (Also see "nonretroactive.") [1.10]
road test. -
A distance test, over a measured
				course, of a complete taximeter assembly when installed on a vehicle, the
				mechanism being actuated as a result of vehicle travel. [5.53, 5.54]
rolling circumference. -
The rolling circumference
				is the straight line distance traveled per revolution of the wheel (or wheels)
				that actuates the taximeter or odometer. If more than one wheel actuates the
				taximeter or odometer, the rolling circumference is the average distance
				traveled per revolution of the actuating wheels. [5.53, 5.54]
S
scale. -
See specific type of scale. [2.20]
scale area, belt-conveyor. -
See belt-conveyor
				scale systems area. [2.21] (Added 2001)
scale division, number of (n). -
Quotient of the
				capacity divided by the value of the verification scale division. [2.20]
Click here
				to view image
scale division, value of (d). -
The value of the
				scale division, expressed in units of mass, is the smallest subdivision of the
				scale for analog indication or the difference between two consecutively
				indicated or printed values for digital indication or printing. (Also see
				"verification scale division.") [2.20, 2.22]
scale section. -
A part of a vehicle, axle-load,
				livestock, or railway track scale consisting of two main load supports, usually
				transverse to the direction in which the load is applied. [2.20]
seal. -
See "approval seal," "security seal."
				[1.10]
section capacity. -
The section capacity of a
				scale is the maximum live load that may be divided equally on the load pivots
				or load cells of a section. [2.20]
(Added 2001)
section test. -
A shift test in which the test
				load is applied over individual sections of the scale. This test is conducted
				to disclose the weighing performance of individual sections, since scale
				capacity test loads are not always available and loads weighed are not always
				distributed evenly over all main load supports. [2.20]
security means. -
A method used to prevent access
				by other than qualified personnel, or to indicate that access has been made to
				certain parts of a scale that affect the performance of the device.
				[2.21]
security seal. -
A uniquely identifiable physical
				seal, such as a lead-and-wire seal or other type of locking seal, a
				pressure-sensitive seal sufficiently permanent to reveal its removal, or
				similar apparatus attached to a weighing or measuring device for protection
				against or indication of access to adjustment. (Also see "approval seal.")
				[1.10]
(Amended 1994)
selector-type. -
A system of indication or
				recording in which the mechanism selects, by means of a ratchet-and-pawl
				combination or by other means, one or the other of any two successive values
				that can be indicated or recorded. [1.10]
semi-automatic
zero-setting mechanism. -
See
				"semi-automatic zero-setting mechanism" under "zero-setting mechanism."
				[2.20]
sensitivity (of a nonautomatic-indicating scale). -
The value of the test load on the load-receiving element of the scale
				that will produce a specified minimum change in the position of rest of the
				indicating element or elements of the scale. [2.20]
sensitivity requirement (SR). -
A performance
				requirement for a non automatic-indicating scale; specifically, the minimum
				change in the position of rest of the indicating element or elements of the
				scale in response to the increase or decrease, by a specified amount, of the
				test load on the load-receiving element of the scale. [2.20]
shift test. -
A test intended to disclose the
				weighing performance of a scale under off-center loading. [2.20]
side.
-
That portion of a pump or dispenser which
				faces the consumer during the normal delivery of product. [3.30] (Added
				1987)
simulated-road test. -
A distance test during
				which the taximeter or odometer may be actuated by some means other than road
				travel. The distance traveled is either measured by a properly calibrated
				roller device or computed from rolling circumference and wheel-turn data.
				[5.53, 5.54]
simulated test. -
A test using artificial means of
				loading the scale to determine the performance of a belt-conveyor scale.
				[2.21]
single cell application load cell. -
A load cell
				intended for use in a weighing system which incorporates one or more load
				cells. A single cell application load cell is designated with the letter "S" or
				the term "Single." (Also see "multiple cell application load cell.")
				[2.20]
(Added 1999)
single-tariff taximeter. -
One that calculates
				fares at a single rate only. [5.54]
skirting. -
Stationary side boards or sections of
				belt conveyor attached to the conveyor support frame or other stationary
				support to prevent the bulk material from falling off the side of the belt.
				[2.21]
slow-flow
meter. -
A retail device designed for
				the measurement, at very slow rates (less than 40 L (10 gal) per hour), of
				liquid fuels at individual domestic installations. [3.30]
small-delivery
device. -
Any device other than a
				large-delivery device. [3.34, 3.38]
span (structural).
The distance between adjoining
				sections of a scale. [2.20] (Added 1988)
specification. -
A requirement usually dealing
				with the design, construction, or marking of a weighing or measuring device.
				Specifications are directed primarily to the manufacturers of devices.
				[1.10]
static monorail weighing system. -
A weighing
				system in which the load being applied is stationary during the weighing
				operation. [2.20]
(Added 1999)
strain-load test. -
The test of a scale beginning
				with the scale under load and applying known test weights to determine accuracy
				over a portion of the weighing range. The scale errors for a strain-load test
				are the errors observed for the known test loads only. The tolerances to be
				applied are based on the known test load used for each error that is
				determined. [2.20, 2.22]
subordinate graduation. -
Any graduation other
				than a main graduation. (Also see "graduation.") [1.10]
subsequent distance or time intervals. -
The
				intervals corresponding to money drops following the initial money drop.
				[5.54]
substitution test. -
A scale testing process used
				to quantify the weight of material or objects for use as a known test load.
				[2.20]
(Added 2003)
substitution test load. -
The sum of the
				combination of field standard test weights and any other applied load used in
				the conduct of a test using substitution test methods. [2.20]
(Added 2003)
surface gauge. -
A combination of (1) a stationary
				indicator, and (2) a movable, graduated element designed to be brought into
				contact with the surface of the liquid from above. [4.42]
systematic
(average)
error
(
X
)
.
-
The mean
				value of the error (of indication) for a number of consecutive automatic
				weighings of a load, or loads, passed over the load-receiving element (e.g.,
				weigh-table), shall be expressed mathematically as:
Click here
				to view image
where: x = error of a load indication
n = the number of loads
[2.24]
T
tail pulley. -
The pulley at the opposite end of
				the conveyor from the head pulley. [2.21]
take-up.
-
A device to provide sufficient tension
				in a conveyor belt so that the belt will be positively driven by the drive
				pulley.
-
A counter-weighted take-up consists of a pulley free to
				move in either the vertical or horizontal direction with dead weights applied
				to the pulley shaft to provide the tension required. [2.21]
tare mechanism. -
A mechanism (including a tare
				bar) designed for determining or balancing out the weight of packaging
				material, containers, vehicles, or other materials that are not intended to be
				included in net weight determinations. [2.20]
tare-weighbeam
elements. -
The combination of a
				tare bar and its fractional bar, or a tare bar alone if no fractional bar is
				associated with it. [2.20]
taximeter. -
A device that automatically
				calculates, at a predetermined rate or rates, and indicates the charge for hire
				of a vehicle. [5.54]
test chain. -
A device used for simulated tests
				consisting of a series of rollers or wheels linked together in such a manner as
				to assure uniformity of weight and freedom of motion to reduce wear, with
				consequent loss of weight, to a minimum. [2.21]
test liquid. -
The liquid used during the test of
				a device. [3.30, 3.31, 3.34, 3.35, 3.36, 3.37, 3.38]
test object. -
An object whose dimensions are
				verified by appropriate reference standards and intended to verify compliance
				of the device under test with certain metrological requirements. [5.58]
test puck. -
A metal, plastic, or other suitable
				object that remains stable for the duration of the test, used as a test load to
				simulate a package. Pucks can be made in a variety of dimensions and have
				different weights to represent a wide range of package sizes. Metal versions
				may be covered with rubber cushions to eliminate the possibility of damage to
				weighing and handling equipment. The puck mass is adjusted to an accuracy
				specified in N.1.2. Accuracy of Test Pucks or Packages. [2.24]
(Amended 2004)
test train. -
A train consisting of or including
				reference weight cars and used to test coupled-in-motion railway track scales.
				The reference weight cars may be placed consecutively or distributed in
				different places within a train.
[2.20]
(Added 1990) (Amended 1991)
test weight car. -
A railroad car designed to be a
				stable mass standard to test railway track scales. The test weight car may be
				one of the following types: a self-contained composite car, a self-propelled
				car, or a standard rail car. [2.20]
(Added 1991)
testing. -
An operation consisting of a series of
				volumetric determinations made to verify the accuracy of the volume chart that
				was developed by gauging. [4.42]
time recorder. -
A clock-operated mechanism
				designed to record the time of day. Examples of time recorders are those used
				in parking garages to record the "in" and "out" time of day for parked
				vehicles. [5.55]
timing device. -
A device used to measure the time
				during which a particular paid-for service is dispensed. Examples of timing
				devices are laundry driers, car-wash timers, parking meters, and parking-garage
				clocks and recorders. [5.55]
tolerance. -
A value fixing the limit of allowable
				error or departure from true performance or value. (Also see "basic
				tolerances.") [1.10]
training idlers. -
Idlers of special design or
				mounting intended to shift the belt sideways on the conveyor to assure the belt
				is centered on the conveying idlers. [2.21]
transfer standard. -
A measurement system designed
				for use in proving and testing cryogenic liquid-measuring devices.
				[3.38]
tripper. -
A device for unloading a belt conveyor
				at a point between the loading point and the head pulley.
				[2.21]
U
uncoupled-in-motion railroad weighing system. -
A
				device and related installation characteristics consisting of (1) the
				associated approach trackage, (2) the scale (i.e., the weighing element, the
				load-receiving element, and the indicating element with its software), and (3)
				the exit trackage, which permit the weighing of railroad cars uncoupled in
				motion. [2.20]
(Added 1993)
underregistration
.
-
See
				"overregistration" and "underregistration." [1.10]
unit price. -
The price at which the product is
				being sold and expressed in whole units of measurement. [1.10, 3.30] (Added
				1992)
unit train. -
A unit train is defined as a number
				of contiguous cars carrying a single commodity from one consignor to one
				consignee. The number of cars is determined by agreement among the consignor,
				consignee, and the operating railroad. [2.20]
unit weight. -
One contained within the housing of
				an automatic-indicating scale and mechanically applied to and removed from the
				mechanism. The application of a unit weight will increase the range of
				automatic indication, normally in increments equal to the reading-face
				capacity. [2.20]
user requirement. -
A requirement dealing with the
				selection, installation, use, or maintenance of a weighing or measuring device.
				User requirements are directed primarily to the users of devices. (Also see
				Introduction, Section Q.) [1.10]
usual and customary. -
Commonly or ordinarily
				found in practice or in the normal course of events and in accordance with
				established practices. [1.10]
utility-type water meter. -
1) A device used for
				the measurement of water, generally applicable to meters installed in
				residences or business establishments. excluding batching meters. [3.36]
(Added 2011)
V
value of minimum graduated interval. -
(1) The
				value represented by the interval from the center of one graduation to the
				center of the succeeding graduation. (2) The increment between successive
				recorded values. (Also see "graduated interval.") [1.10]
vapor equalization credit. -
The quantity deducted
				from the metered quantity of liquid carbon dioxide when a vapor equalizing line
				is used to facilitate the transfer of liquid during a metered delivery.
				[3.38]
vapor equalization line. -
A hose or pipe
				connected from the vapor space of the seller's tank to the vapor space of the
				buyer's tank that is used to equalize the pressure during a delivery.
				[3.38]
vehicle on-board weighing system. -
A weighing
				system designed as an integral part of or attached to the frame, chassis,
				lifting mechanism, or bed of a vehicle, trailer, industrial truck, industrial
				tractor, or forklift truck. [2.20]
(Amended 1993)
vehicle scale. -
A scale adapted to weighing
				highway, farm, or other large industrial vehicles (except railroad freight
				cars), loaded or unloaded. [2.20]
verification scale division, value of (e). -
A
				value, expressed in units of weight (mass) and specified by the manufacturer of
				a device, by which the tolerance values and the accuracy class applicable to
				the device are determined. The verification scale division is applied to all
				scales, in particular to ungraduated devices since they have no graduations.
				The verification scale division (e) may be different from the displayed scale
				division (d) for certain other devices used for weight classifying or weighing
				in pre-determined amounts, and certain other Class I and II scales.
				[2.20]
visible type. -
A type of device in which the
				measurement takes place in a see-through glass measuring chamber. [3.30]
vmin (minimum load cell
				verification interval). -
The smallest load cell verification interval,
expressed in units of mass*
into which the load cell measuring
				range can be divided. [2.20, 2.24]
[*Nonretroactive as of January 1,
				2001]
(Added 1996) (Amended 1999)
W
weighbeam. -
An element comprising one or more
				bars, equipped with movable poises or means for applying counterpoise weights
				or both. [2.20]
weigh-belt
system. - A type of belt-conveyor scale
				system designed by the manufacturer as a self-contained conveyor system and
				that is installed as a unit. A unit is comprised of integral components and, at
				minimum, includes a: conveyor belt; belt drive; conveyor frame; and weighing
				system. A weigh-belt system may operate at single or multiple flow rates and
				may use variable-speed belt drives. [2.21]
(Added 2015)
weighing element. -
That portion of a scale that
				supports the load-receiving element and transmits to the indicating element a
				signal or force resulting from the load applied to the load-receiving element.
				[2.20, 2.21, 2.22]
(Added 1988)
weigh-labeler.
-
An automatic weighing system
				that determines the weight of a package and prints a label or other document
				bearing a weight declaration for each discrete item (usually a label also
				includes unit and total price declarations). Weigh-labelers are sometimes used
				to weigh and label standard and random packages (also called "Prepackaging
				Scales"). [2.24]
(Amended 2004)
weigh module
- The portion of a load-receiving
				element supported by two sections. The length of a module is the distance to
				which load can be applied. [2.20]
(Added 2013)
weighment. -
A single complete weighing operation.
				[2.20, 2.21] (Added 1986)
weight, unit. -
See "unit weight." [2.20]
weight classifier. -
A digital scale that rounds
				weight values up to the next scale division. These scales usually have a
				verification scale division (e) that is smaller than the displayed scale
				division. [2.20]
(Added 1987)
weight ranges. -
Electrical or electro-mechanical
				elements incorporated in an automatic indicating scale through the application
				of which the range of automatic indication of the scale is increased, normally
				in increments equal to the reading-face capacity. [2.20]
wet basis. -
See "moisture content (wet basis)."
				[5.56(a), 5.56(b)]
wet hose. -
A discharge hose intended to be full
				of product at all times. (Also see "wet-hose type.") [3.30, 3.31, 3.38]
(Amended 2002)
wet-hose
type. -
A type of device designed to be
				operated with the discharge hose full of product at all times. (Also see "wet
				hose.") [3.30, 3.32, 3.34, 3.37, 3.38]
(Amended 2002)
wheel-load
weighers. -
Compact, self-contained,
				portable weighing elements specially adapted to determining the wheel loads or
				axle loads of vehicles on highways for the enforcement of highway weight laws
				only. [2.20]
wholesale device. -
Any device other than a retail
				device. (Also see "retail device.") [3.30, 3.32]
wing pulley. -
A pulley made of widely spaced
				metal bars in order to set up a vibration to shake loose material off the
				underside (return side) of the belt. [2.21]
Z
zero-load
balance. -
A correct weight indication
				or representation of zero when there is no load on the load-receiving element.
				(Also see "zero-load balance for an automatic-indicating scale," "zero-load
				balance for a nonautomatic-indicating scale," "zero-load balance for a
				recording scale.") [2.20]
zero-load
balance, automatic-indicating scale. -
A condition in which the indicator is at rest at, or oscillates through
				approximately equal arcs on either side of, the zero graduation. [2.20]
zero-load
balance, nonautomatic-indicating scale. -
A condition in which (a) the weighbeam is at rest at, or oscillates
				through approximately equal arcs above and below, the center of a trig loop;
				(b) the weighbeam or lever system is at rest at, or oscillates through
				approximately equal arcs above and below, a horizontal position or a position
				midway between limiting stops; or (c) the indicator of a balance indicator is
				at rest at, or oscillates through approximately equal arcs on either side of,
				the zero graduation. [2.20]
zero-load
balance for a recording scale. -
A
				condition in which the scale will record a representation of zero load.
				[2.20]
zero-load
reference (belt-conveyor scales). -
A
				zero-load reference value represents no load on a moving conveyor belt. This
				value can be either; a number representing the electronic load cell output, a
				percentage of full scale capacity, or other reference value that accurately
				represents the no load condition of a moving conveyor belt. The no load
				reference value can only be updated after the completion of a zero load
				test.[2.21]
(Added 2002)
zero-setting
mechanism. -
Means provided to
				attain a zero balance indication with no load on the load-receiving element.
				The types of zero-setting mechanisms are: [2.20, 2.22, 2.24]
automatic zero-setting mechanism (AZSM). -
Automatic means provided to set the zero-balance indication without the
				intervention of an operator. [2.22]
(Added 2010)
automatic zero-tracking (AZT) mechanism. -
See
				"automatic zero-tracking (AZT) mechanism." (NOTE: AZT maintains zero with
				specified limits. "Zero-setting sets/establishes zero with limits based on
				scale capacity.) [2.20, 2.22, 2.24]
initial zero-setting mechanism. -
Automatic means
				provided to set the indication to zero at the time the instrument is switched
				on and before it is ready for use. [2.20]
(Added 1990)
manual zero-setting mechanism. -
Nonautomatic
				means provided to attain a zero balance indication by the direct operation of a
				control. [2.20]
semiautomatic zero-setting mechanism. -
Automatic
				means provided to attain a direct zero balance indication requiring a single
				initiation by an operator. [2.20]
(Amended 2010)
zero-setting
mechanism (belt-conveyor scale). -
A
				mechanism enabling zero totalization to be obtained over a whole number of belt
				revolutions. [2.21, 2.23]
(Added 2002)
zero-tracking
mechanism. -
See "automatic
				zero-tracking mechanism" under "zero-setting mechanism." [2.20, 2.22,
				2.24]
zone of uncertainty. -
The zone between adjacent
				increments on a digital device in which the value of either of the adjacent
				increments may be displayed. [2.20]
Section
			 1.10.
General Code
G-A.
Application
G-A.1.
Commercial and Law-Enforcement
			 Equipment.
- These specifications, tolerances, and other technical
			 requirements apply as follows:
(a) To
			 commercial weighing and measuring equipment; that is, to weights and measures
			 and weighing and measuring devices commercially used or employed in
			 establishing the size, quantity, extent, area, composition (limited to meat and
			 poultry), constituent values (limited to grain), or measurement of quantities,
			 things, produce, or articles for distribution or consumption, purchased,
			 offered, or submitted for sale, hire, or award, or in computing any basic
			 charge or payment for services rendered on the basis of weight or measure.
(Amended 2008)
(b) To any accessory attached to or used in
			 connection with a commercial weighing or measuring device when such accessory
			 is so designed that its operation affects the accuracy of the device.
(c) To weighing and measuring equipment in
			 official use for the enforcement of law or for the collection of statistical
			 information by government agencies.
(These requirements should be used as a guide by the weights
				and measures official when, upon request, courtesy examinations of
				noncommercial equipment are made.)
G-A.2.
Code Application.
- This
			 General Code shall apply to all classes of devices as covered in the specific
			 codes. The specific code requirements supersede General Code requirements in
			 all cases of conflict.
(Amended 1972)
G-A.3.
Special and Unclassified
			 Equipment.
- Insofar as they are clearly appropriate, the requirements
			 and provisions of the General Code and of specific codes apply to equipment
			 failing, by reason of special design or otherwise, to fall clearly within one
			 of the particular equipment classes for which separate codes have been
			 established. With respect to such equipment, code requirements and provisions
			 shall be applied with due regard to the design, intended purpose, and
			 conditions of use of the equipment.
G-A.4.
Metric Equipment.
-
			 Employment of the weights and measures of the metric system is lawful
			 throughout the United States. These specifications, tolerances, and other
			 requirements shall not be understood or construed as in any way prohibiting the
			 manufacture, sale, or use of equipment designed to give results in terms of
			 metric units. The specific provisions of these requirements and the principles
			 upon which the requirements are based shall be applied to metric equipment
			 insofar as appropriate and practicable. The tolerances on metric equipment,
			 when not specified herein, shall be equivalent to those specified for similar
			 equipment constructed or graduated in the U.S. customary system.
G-A.5.
Retroactive Requirements.
- "Retroactive" requirements are enforceable with respect to all
			 equipment. Retroactive requirements are printed herein in upright roman
			 type.
G-A.6.
Nonretroactive
			 Requirements.
- "Nonretroactive" requirements are enforceable on or
			 after the effective date for devices:
(a)
			 manufactured within a state after the effective date;
(b) both new and used, brought into a state
			 after the effective date;
(c) used
			 in noncommercial applications which are placed into commercial use after the
			 effective date; and
(d) undergoing
			 type evaluation, including devices that have been modified to the extent that a
			 new NTEP Certificate of Conformance (CC) is required.
Nonretroactive requirements are not enforceable with respect to
				devices that are in commercial service in the state as of the effective date or
				to new equipment in the stock of a manufacturer or a dealer in the state as of
				the effective date.
[Nonretroactive requirements are printed in italic
				type.]
(Amended 1989 and 2011)
G-A.7.
Effective Enforcement Dates of
			 Code Requirements.
- Unless otherwise specified, each new or amended
			 code requirement shall not be subject to enforcement prior to January 1 of the
			 year following the adoption by the National Conference on Weights and Measures
			 and publication by the National Institute of Standards and
			 Technology.
G-S.
Specifications
G-S.1.
Identification.
- All equipment, except weights and separate parts
			 necessary to the measurement process but not having any metrological effect,
			 shall be clearly and permanently marked for the purposes of identification with
			 the following information:
(a) the name,
			 initials, or trademark of the manufacturer or distributor;
(b) a model identifier that positively
			 identifies the pattern or design of the device;
(1)
The model identifier shall be
			 prefaced by the word "Model," "Type," or "Pattern." These terms may be followed
			 by the word "Number" or an abbreviation of that word. The abbreviation for the
			 word "Number" shall, as a minimum, begin with the letter "N" (e.g., No or No.).
			 The abbreviation for the word "Model" shall be "Mod" or "Mod." Prefix lettering
			 may be initial capitals, all capitals, or all lower case. [Nonretroactive as of
			 January 1, 2003]
(Added 2000) (Amended 2001)
(c)
a nonrepetitive serial number,
			 except for equipment with no moving or electronic component parts and
			 not-built-for-purpose, software-based devices;
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1968]
(Amended 2003)
(1)
The serial number shall be prefaced by words, an abbreviation, or a
			 symbol, that clearly identifies the number as the required serial
			 number.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
(2)
Abbreviations for the
			 word "Serial" shall, as a minimum, begin with the letter "S," and abbreviations
			 for the word "Number" shall, as a minimum, begin with the letter "N" (e.g.,
			 S/N, SN, Ser. No., and S. No.).
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2001]
(d)
the
			 current software version or revision identifier for not-built-for-purpose,
			 software-based devices; [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2004]
(Added 2003)
(1)
The version or revision identifier shall be prefaced by words, an
			 abbreviation, or a symbol, that clearly identifies the number as the required
			 version or revision.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2007]
(Added 2006)
(2)
Abbreviations for the word
			 "Version" shall, as a minimum, begin with the letter "V" and may be followed by
			 the word "Number." Abbreviations for the word "Revision" shall, as a minimum,
			 begin with the letter "R" and may be followed by the word "Number." The
			 abbreviation for the word "Number" shall, as a minimum, begin with the letter
			 "N" (e.g., No or No.).
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2007]
(Added 2006)
(e)
an National Type Evaluation
			 Program (NTEP) Certificate of Conformance (CC) number or a corresponding CC
			 Addendum Number for devices that have a CC. The CC Number or a corresponding CC
			 Addendum Number shall be prefaced by the terms "NTEP CC," "CC," or "Approval."
			 These terms may be followed by the word "Number" or an abbreviation of that
			 word. The abbreviation for the word "Number" shall, as a minimum, begin with
			 the letter "N" (e.g., No or No.). [Nonretroactive as of January 1,
			 2003]
The required information shall be so located that it is readily
				observable without the necessity of the disassembly of a part requiring the use
				of any means separate from the device.
(Amended 1985, 1991, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2003, and 2006)
G-S.1.1.
Location of
			 Marking Information for Not-Built-For-Purpose, Software-Based Devices.
-
For not-built-for-purpose, software-based devices
			 either:
(a)
The required
			 information in G-S.1 Identification. (a), (b), (d), and (e) shall be
			 permanently marked or continuously displayed on the device; or
(b)
The Certificate of
			 Conformance (CC) Number shall be:
(1)
permanently marked on the
			 device;
(2)
continuously displayed; or
(3)
accessible through an easily
			 recognized menu and, if necessary, a submenu. Examples of menu and submenu
			 identification include, but are not limited to, "Help," "System
			 Identification," "G-S.1. Identification," or "Weights and Measures
			 Identification."
Note:
For (b), clear
				instructions for accessing the information required in G-S.1.
(a , (b), and (d) shall be listed on the CC, including
				information necessary to identify that the software in the device is the same
				type that was evaluated.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1,
				2004]
(Added 2003) (Amended 2006)
G-S.1.2.
Devices
			 and Main Elements Remanufactured as of January 1, 2002.
- All devices
			 and main elements remanufactured as of January 1, 2002, shall be clearly and
			 permanently marked for the purposes of identification with the following
			 information:
(a) the name, initials, or
			 trademark of the last remanufacturer or distributor; and
(b) the remanufacturer's or distributor's
			 model designation, if different than the original model designation.
(Added 2001) (Amended 2011)
Note:
Definitions for "manufactured device,"
				"repaired device," and "repaired element" are included (along with definitions
				for "remanufactured device" and "remanufactured element") in Appendix D,
				Definitions.
G-S.2.
Facilitation of Fraud.
-
			 All equipment and all mechanisms, software, and devices attached to or used in
			 conjunction therewith shall be so designed, constructed, assembled, and
			 installed for use such that they do not facilitate the perpetration of fraud.
(Amended 2007)
G-S.3.
Permanence.
- All
			 equipment shall be of such materials, design, and construction as to make it
			 probable that, under normal service conditions:
(a) accuracy will be maintained;
(b) operating parts will continue to function
			 as intended; and
(c) adjustments
			 will remain reasonably permanent.
Undue stresses, deflections, or distortions of parts shall not
				occur to the extent that accuracy or permanence is detrimentally
				affected.
G-S.4.
Interchange or Reversal of Parts.
- Parts of a device that may
			 readily be interchanged or reversed in the course of field assembly or of
			 normal usage shall be:
(a) so constructed that
			 their interchange or reversal will not affect the performance of the device;
			 or
(b) so marked as to show their
			 proper positions.
G-S.5.
Indicating and Recording Elements.
G-S.5.1.
General.
- All
			 weighing and measuring devices shall be provided with indicating or recording
			 elements appropriate in design and adequate in amount. Primary indications and
			 recorded representations shall be clear, definite, accurate, and easily read
			 under any conditions of normal operation of the device.
G-S.5.2.
Graduations, Indications, and
			 Recorded Representations.
G-S.5.2.1.
Analog Indication and Representation.
- Graduations and a suitable
			 indicator shall be provided in connection with indications designed to advance
			 continuously.
G-S.5.2.2.
Digital Indication and Representation.
- Digital elements shall be
			 so designed that:
(a) All digital values of
			 like value in a system agree with one another.
(b) A digital value coincides with its
			 associated analog value to the nearest minimum graduation.
(c) A digital value "rounds off" to the
			 nearest minimum unit that can be indicated or recorded.
(d)
A digital zero indication
			 includes the display of a zero for all places that are displayed to the right
			 of the decimal point and at least one place to the left. When no decimal values
			 are displayed, a zero shall be displayed for each place of the displayed scale
			 division.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
(Amended 1973 and 1985)
G-S.5.2.3.
Size and Character.
-
			 In any series of graduations, indications, or recorded representations,
			 corresponding graduations and units shall be uniform in size and character.
			 Graduations, indications, or recorded representations that are subordinate to,
			 or of a lesser value than others with which they are associated, shall be
			 appropriately portrayed or designated.
[Made retroactive as of January 1, 1975]
G-S.5.2.4.
Values.
- If
			 graduations, indications, or recorded representations are intended to have
			 specific values, these shall be adequately defined by a sufficient number of
			 figures, words, symbols, or combinations thereof, uniformly placed with
			 reference to the graduations, indications, or recorded representations and as
			 close thereto as practicable, but not so positioned as to interfere with the
			 accuracy of reading.
G-S.5.2.5.
Permanence.
- Graduations, indications, or recorded
			 representations and their defining figures, words, and symbols shall be of such
			 character that they will not tend easily to become obliterated or
			 illegible.
G-S.5.3.
Values of Graduated Intervals or Increments.
- In any series of
			 graduations, indications, or recorded representations, the values of the
			 graduated intervals or increments shall be uniform throughout the series.
G-S.5.3.1.
On Devices That Indicate or
			 Record in More Than One Unit.
- On devices designed to indicate or
			 record in more than one unit of measurement, the values indicated and recorded
			 shall be identified with an appropriate word, symbol, or abbreviation.
(Amended 1978 and 1986)
G-S.5.4.
Repeatability of Indications.
- A device shall be capable of repeating, within prescribed tolerances,
			 its indications and recorded representations. This requirement shall be met
			 irrespective of repeated manipulation of any element of the device in a manner
			 approximating normal usage (including displacement of the indicating elements
			 to the full extent allowed by the construction of the device and repeated
			 operation of a locking or relieving mechanism) and of the repeated performance
			 of steps or operations that are embraced in the testing procedure.
G-S.5.5.
Money Values, Mathematical
			 Agreement.
- Any recorded money value and any digital money-value
			 indication on a computing-type weighing or measuring device used in retail
			 trade shall be in mathematical agreement with its associated quantity
			 representation or indication to the nearest 1 cent of money value. This does
			 not apply to auxiliary digital indications intended for the operator's use
			 only, when these indications are obtained from existing analog customer
			 indications that meet this requirement.
(Amended 1973)
G-S.5.6.
Recorded Representations.
- Insofar as they are appropriate, the requirements for indicating and
			 recording elements shall also apply to recorded representations. All recorded
			 values shall be printed digitally. In applications where recorded
			 representations are required, the customer may be given the option of not
			 receiving the recorded representation. For systems equipped with the capability
			 of issuing an electronic receipt, ticket, or other recorded representation, the
			 customer may be given the option to receive any required information
			 electronically (e.g., via cell phone, computer, etc.) in lieu of or in addition
			 to a hard copy.
(Amended 1975 and 2014)
G-S.5.6.1.
Indicated and Recorded
			 Representation of Units.
- Appropriate abbreviations.
(a) For equipment manufactured on or after
			 January 1, 2008, the appropriate defining symbols are shown in NIST Special
			 Publication SP 811 "Guide for the Use of International System of Units (SI)"
			 and Handbook 44 Appendix C - General Tables of Units of Measurement.
Note:
SP 811 can be viewed or downloaded at
http://physics.nist.gov/cuu/pdf/sp811.pdf
or by going to
http://www.nist.gov/pml/wmd/index.cfm
and selecting Weights and Measures Publications and the link to Special
				Publications (SP 811),
"Guide for the Use of
				the International System of Units
(SI)."
(Added 2007)
(b) The
			 appropriate defining symbols on equipment manufactured prior to January 1,
			 2008, with limited character sets are shown in Table 1. Representation of SI
			 Units on Equipment Manufactured Prior to January 1, 2008, with Limited
			 Character Sets.
(Added 1977) (Amended 2007)
Table 1. Representation of SI Units on Equipment
						  Manufactured Prior to January 1, 2008,
with Limited Character Sets
Name of Unit
International
Symbol (common
use symbol)
Representation
Form I
Form II
(double case)
(single case lower)
(single case upper)
Base SI Units
meter
m
m
m
M
kilogram
kg
kg
kg
KG
Derived SI Units
newton
N
N
n
N
pascal
Pa
Pa
pa
PA
watt
W
W
w
W
volt
V
V
v
V
degree Celsius
°C
°C
°c
°C
Other Units
liter
l or L
L
l
L
gram
g
g
g
G
metric ton
t
t
tne
TNE
bar
bar
bar
bar
BAR
(Table Amended 2007)
G-S.5.7.
Magnified Graduations and
			 Indications.
- All requirements for graduations and indications apply to
			 a series of graduations and an indicator magnified by an optical system or as
			 magnified and projected on a screen.
G-S.6.
Marking Operational
			 Controls, Indications, and Features.
-
All operational
			 controls, indications, and features, including switches, lights, displays, push
			 buttons, and other means, shall be clearly and definitely identified. The use
			 of approved pictograms or symbols shall be acceptable. [Nonretroactive as of
			 January 1, 1977]
(Amended 1978 and 1995)
G-S.7.
Lettering.
- All
			 required markings and instructions shall be distinct and easily readable and
			 shall be of such character that they will not tend to become obliterated or
			 illegible.
G-S.8.
Provision for Sealing Electronic Adjustable Components.
-
A device shall be designed with provision(s) for applying a security
			 seal that must be broken, or for using other approved means of providing
			 security (e.g., data change audit trail available at the time of inspection),
			 before any change that detrimentally affects the metrological integrity of the
			 device can be made to any electronic mechanism. [Nonretroactive as of January
			 1, 1990]
A device may be fitted with an automatic or a semi-automatic
				calibration mechanism. This mechanism shall be incorporated inside the device.
				After sealing, neither the mechanism nor the calibration process shall
				facilitate fraud.
(Added 1985) (Amended 1989 and 1993)
G-S.8.1.
Multiple Weighing or
			 Measuring Elements that Share a Common Provision for Sealing.
-
A change to any metrological parameter (calibration or configuration)
			 of any weighing or measuring element shall be individually identified.
			 [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2010]
Note:
For devices that utilize an electronic form
				of sealing, in addition to the requirements in G-S.8.1., any appropriate audit
				trail requirements in an applicable specific device code also apply. Examples
				of identification of a change to the metrological parameters of a weighing or
				measuring element include, but are not limited to:
(1) a broken, missing, or replaced physical
			 seal on an individual weighing, measuring, or indicating element or active
			 junction box;
(2) a change in a
			 calibration factor or configuration setting for each weighing or measuring
			 element;
(3) a display of the date
			 of calibration or configuration event for each weighing or measuring element;
			 or
(4) counters indicating the
			 number of calibration and/or configuration events for each weighing or
			 measuring element. (Added 2007)
G-N.
Notes
G-N.1.
Conflict of Laws and
			 Regulations.
- If any particular provisions of these specifications,
			 tolerances, and other requirements are found to conflict with existing state
			 laws, or with existing regulations or local ordinances relating to health,
			 safety, or fire prevention, the enforcement of such provisions shall be
			 suspended until conflicting requirements can be harmonized. Such suspension
			 shall not affect the validity or enforcement of the remaining provisions of
			 these specifications, tolerances, and other requirements.
G-N.2.
Testing With Nonassociated
			 Equipment.
- Tests to determine conditions, such as radio frequency
			 interference (RFI) that may adversely affect the performance of a device shall
			 be conducted with equipment and under conditions that are usual and customary
			 with respect to the location and use of the device.
(Added 1976)
G-T.
Tolerances
G-T.1.
Acceptance Tolerances.
-
			 Acceptance tolerances shall apply to equipment:
(a) to be put into commercial use for the
			 first time;
(b) that has been
			 placed in commercial service within the preceding 30 days and is being
			 officially tested for the first time;
(c) that has been returned to commercial
			 service following official rejection for failure to conform to performance
			 requirements and is being officially tested for the first time within 30 days
			 after corrective service;
(d) that
			 is being officially tested for the first time within 30 days after major
			 reconditioning or overhaul; and
(e)
			 undergoing type evaluation. (Amended 1989)
G-T.2.
Maintenance Tolerances.
- Maintenance tolerances shall apply to equipment in actual use, except
			 as provided in G-T.1. Acceptance Tolerances.
G-T.3.
Application.
-
			 Tolerances "in excess" and tolerances "in deficiency" shall apply to errors in
			 excess and to errors in deficiency, respectively. Tolerances "on
			 overregistration" and tolerances "on underregistration" shall apply to errors
			 in the direction of overregistration and of underregistration, respectively.
			 (Also see Appendix D, Definitions.)
G-T.4.
For Intermediate Values.
- For a capacity, indication, load, value, etc., intermediate between
			 two capacities, indications, loads, values, etc., listed in a table of
			 tolerances, the tolerances prescribed for the lower capacity, indication, load,
			 value, etc., shall be applied.
G-UR.
User Requirements
G-UR.1.
Selection Requirements.
G-UR.1.1.
Suitability of Equipment.
- Commercial equipment shall be suitable for the service in which it is
			 used with respect to elements of its design, including but not limited to its
			 weighing capacity (for weighing devices), its computing capability (for
			 computing devices), its rate of flow (for liquid-measuring devices), the
			 character, number, size, and location of its indicating or recording elements,
			 and the value of its smallest unit and unit prices.
(Amended 1974)
G-UR.1.2.
Environment.
-
			 Equipment shall be suitable for the environment in which it is used including,
			 but not limited to, the effects of wind, weather, and RFI.
(Added 1976)
G-UR.1.3.
Liquid-Measuring Devices.
- To be suitable for its application, the minimum delivery for
			 liquid-measuring devices shall be no less than 100 divisions, except that the
			 minimum delivery for retail analog devices shall be no less than 10 divisions.
			 Maximum division values and tolerances are stated in the specific codes.
(Added 1995)
G-UR.2.
Installation
			 Requirements.
G-UR.2.1.
Installation.
- A device shall be installed in accordance with the
			 manufacturer's instructions, including any instructions marked on the device. A
			 device installed in a fixed location shall be installed so that neither its
			 operation nor its performance will be adversely affected by any characteristic
			 of the foundation, supports, or any other detail of the installation.
G-UR.2.1.1.
Visibility of
			 Identification.
- Equipment shall be installed in such a manner that all
			 required markings are readily observable.
(Added 1978)
G-UR.2.2.
Installation of Indicating
			 or Recording Element.
- A device shall be so installed that there is no
			 obstruction between a primary indicating or recording element and the weighing
			 or measuring element; otherwise there shall be convenient and permanently
			 installed means for direct communication, oral or visual, between an individual
			 located at a primary indicating or recording element and an individual located
			 at the weighing or measuring element. (Also see G-UR.3.3. Position of
			 Equipment.)
G-UR.2.3.
Accessibility for Inspection, Testing, and Sealing Purposes.
- A device
			 shall be located, or such facilities for normal access thereto shall be
			 provided, to permit:
(a) inspecting and
			 testing the device;
(b) inspecting
			 and applying security seals to the device; and
(c) readily bringing the testing equipment of
			 the weights and measures official to the device by customary means and in the
			 amount and size deemed necessary by such official for the proper conduct of the
			 test.
Otherwise, it shall be the responsibility of the device owner
				or operator to supply such special facilities, including such labor as may be
				needed to inspect, test, and seal the device, and to transport the testing
				equipment to and from the device, as required by the weights and measures
				official.
(Amended 1991)
G-UR.3.
Use Requirements.
G-UR.3.1.
Method of Operation.
- Equipment shall be operated only in the manner that is obviously
			 indicated by its construction or that is indicated by instructions on the
			 equipment.
G-UR.3.2.
Associated and Nonassociated Equipment.
- A device shall meet all
			 performance requirements when associated or nonassociated equipment is operated
			 in its usual and customary manner and location.
(Added 1976)
G-UR.3.3.
Position of Equipment.
- A device or system equipped with a primary indicating element and used
			 in direct sales, except for prescription scales, shall be positioned so that
			 its indications may be accurately read and the weighing or measuring operation
			 may be observed from some reasonable "customer" and "operator" position. The
			 permissible distance between the equipment and a reasonable customer and
			 operator position shall be determined in each case upon the basis of the
			 individual circumstances, particularly the size and character of the indicating
			 element.
(Amended 1974 and 1998)
G-UR.3.4.
Responsibility,
			 Money-Operated Devices.
- Money-operated devices, other than parking
			 meters, shall have clearly and conspicuously displayed thereon, or immediately
			 adjacent thereto, adequate information detailing the method for the return of
			 monies paid when the product or service cannot be obtained. This information
			 shall include the name, address, and phone number of the local responsible
			 party for the device. This requirement does not apply to devices at locations
			 where employees are present and responsible for resolving any monetary
			 discrepancies for the customer.
(Amended 1977 and 1993)
G-UR.4.
Maintenance
			 Requirements.
G-UR.4.1.
Maintenance of Equipment.
- All equipment in service and all mechanisms
			 and devices attached thereto or used in connection therewith shall be
			 continuously maintained in proper operating condition throughout the period of
			 such service. Equipment in service at a single place of business shall not be
			 considered "maintained in a proper operating condition" if:
(a) predominantly, equipment of all types or
			 applications are found to be in error in a direction favorable to the device
			 user; or
(b) predominantly,
			 equipment of the same type or application is found to be in error in a
			 direction favorable to the device user.
(Amended 1973, 1991, and 2015)
G-UR.4.2.
Abnormal Performance.
- Unstable indications or other abnormal equipment performance observed
			 during operation shall be corrected and, if necessary, brought to the attention
			 of competent service personnel.
(Added 1976)
G-UR.4.3.
Use of Adjustments.
-
			 Weighing elements and measuring elements that are adjustable shall be adjusted
			 only to correct those conditions that such elements are designed to control,
			 and shall not be adjusted to compensate for defective or abnormal installation
			 or accessories or for badly worn or otherwise defective parts of the assembly.
			 Any faulty installation conditions shall be corrected, and any defective parts
			 shall be renewed or suitably repaired, before adjustments are undertaken.
			 Whenever equipment is adjusted, the adjustments shall be so made as to bring
			 performance errors as close as practicable to zero value.
G-UR.4.4.
Assistance in Testing
			 Operations.
- If the design, construction, or location of any device is
			 such as to require a testing procedure involving special equipment or
			 accessories or an abnormal amount of labor, such equipment, accessories, and
			 labor shall be supplied by the owner or operator of the device as required by
			 the weights and measures official.
G-UR.4.5.
Security Seal.
- A
			 security seal shall be appropriately affixed to any adjustment mechanism
			 designed to be sealed.
G-UR.4.6.
Testing Devices at a Central Location.
(a) When devices in commercial service
			 require special test facilities, or must be removed from service for testing,
			 or are routinely transported for the purpose of use (e.g., vehicle-mounted
			 devices and devices used in multiple locations), the official with statutory
			 authority may require that the devices be brought to a central location for
			 testing. The dealer or owner of these devices shall provide transportation of
			 the devices to and from the test location.
(b) When the request for removal and delivery
			 to a central test location involves devices used in submetering (e.g.,
			 electric, hydrocarbon vapor, or water meters), the owner or operator shall not
			 interrupt the utility service to the customer or tenant except for the removal
			 and replacement of the device. Provisions shall be made by the owner or
			 operator to minimize inconvenience to the customer or tenant. All replacement
			 or temporary meters shall be tested and sealed by a weights and measures
			 official or bear a current, valid approval seal prior to use.
(Added 1994)
Section
			 2.20.
Scales
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code applies to all types of weighing devices other than
			 automatic bulk-weighing systems, belt-conveyor scales, and automatic weighing
			 systems. The code comprises requirements that generally apply to all weighing
			 devices, and specific requirements that are applicable only to certain types of
			 weighing devices.
(Amended 1972 and 1983)
A.2.
Wheel-Load Weighers, Portable
			 Axle-Load Weighers, and Axle-Load Scales.
- The requirements for
			 wheel-load weighers, portable axle-load weighers, and axle-load scales apply
			 only to such scales in official use for the enforcement of traffic and highway
			 laws or for the collection of statistical information by government
			 agencies.
A.3.
Additional
			 Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code,
			 devices covered by the Scales code shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10.
			 General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Design of
			 Indicating and Recording Elements and of Recorded Representations.
S.1.1.
Zero Indication.
(a) On a scale equipped with indicating or
			 recording elements, provision shall be made to either indicate or record a
			 zero-balance condition.
(b) On an
			 automatic-indicating scale or balance indicator, provision shall be made to
			 indicate or record an out-of-balance condition on both sides of zero.
(c) A zero-balance condition may be indicated
			 by other than a continuous digital zero indication, provided that an effective
			 automatic means is provided to inhibit a weighing operation or to return to a
			 continuous digital indication when the scale is in an out-of-balance condition.
(Added 1987) (Amended 1993)
(Amended 1987)
S.1.1.1.
Digital Indicating
			 Elements.
(a) A digital zero indication
			 shall represent a balance condition that is within ±
															½ the value
			 of the scale division.
(b)
A digital indicating device shall either automatically maintain a
			 "center-of-zero" condition to ±
																¼ scale division or less, or have
			 an auxiliary or supplemental "center-of-zero" indicator that defines a
			 zero-balance condition to ±
																¼ of a scale division or less. A
			 "center-of-zero" indication may operate when zero is indicated for gross and/or
			 net mode(s).
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1993]
(Amended 1992 and 2008)
S.1.1.2.
No-Load Reference Value.
- On a single draft manually operated receiving hopper scale installed
			 below grade, used to receive grain, and utilizing a no-load reference value,
			 provision shall be made to indicate and record the no-load reference value
			 prior to the gross load value.
(Added 1983)
S.1.2.
Value of Scale Division
			 Units.
-
Except for batching scales and weighing
			 systems used
exclusively for weighing in predetermined amounts, the
				value of a scale division "d" expressed in a unit of weight shall be equal
				to:
(a)
1, 2, or 5;
			 or
(b)
a decimal
			 multiple or submultiple of 1, 2, or 5; or
Examples: scale divisions may be 10, 20, 50, 100; or
				0.01, 0.02, 0.05; or 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, etc.
(c)
a binary submultiple of a
			 specific unit of weight.
Examples: scale divisions may be ½, ¼, 
				1/8, 
				1/16, etc. [Nonretroactive as of January
				1, 1986]
S.1.2.1.
Digital Indicating Scales, Units.
-
Except for postal scales, a digital-indicating scale shall indicate
			 weight values using only a single unit of measure. Weight values shall be
			 presented in a decimal format with the value of the scale division expressed as
			 1, 2, or 5, or a decimal multiple or submultiple of 1, 2, or 5.
The requirement that the value of the scale division be
				expressed only as 1, 2, or 5, or a decimal multiple or submultiple of only 1,
				2, or 5 does not apply to net weight indications and recorded representations
				that are calculated from gross and tare weight indications where the scale
				division of the gross weight is different from the scale division of the tare
				weight(s) on multi-interval or multiple range scales. For example, a multiple
				range or multi-interval scale may indicate and record tare weights in a lower
				weighing range (WR) or weighing segment (WS), gross weights in the higher
				weighing range or weighing segment, and net weights as follows:
55 kg Gross Weight (WR2 d = 5
						  kg)
10.05 lb Gross Weight (WS2 d = 0.05
						  lb)
- 4 kg
Tare Weight
						  (WR1 d = 2 kg)
- 0.06 lb
Tare Weight
						  (WS1 d = 0.02 lb)
= 51 kg Net Weight (Mathematically
						  Correct)
= 9.99 lb Net Weight (Mathematically
						  Correct)
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1989]
(Added
				1987) (Amended 2008)
S.1.2.2.
Verification Scale Interval.
S.1.2.2.1.
Class I and II Scales and Dynamic Monorail Scales.
If e [NOT
			 EQUAL TO] d, the verification scale interval "e" shall be determined by the
			 expression:
d [LESS THAN] e
[LESS THAN]
10
				d
If the displayed division (d) is less than the verification
				division (e), then the verification division shall be less than or equal to 10
				times the displayed division.
The value of e must satisfy the relationship, e =
				10k of the unit of measure, where k is a positive or
				negative whole number or zero. This requirement does not apply to a Class I
				device with d [LESS THAN] 1 mg where e = 1 mg. If e [NOT EQUAL TO] d, the value
				of "d" shall be a decimal submultiple of "e," and the ratio shall not be more
				than 10:1. If e [NOT EQUAL TO] d, and both "e" and "d" are continuously
				displayed during normal operation, then "d" shall be differentiated from "e" by
				size, shape, color, etc. throughout the range of weights displayed as "d."
(Added 1999)
S.1.2.2.2.
Class III and IIII Scales.
The value of "e" is specified by the manufacturer as marked on the
			 device. Except for dynamic monorail scales, "e" must be less than or equal to
			 "d."
(Added 1999)
S.1.2.3.
Prescription Scale with a
			 Counting Feature.
- A Class I or Class II prescription scale with an
			 operational counting feature shall not calculate a piece weight or total count
			 unless the sample used to determine the individual piece weight meets the
			 following conditions:
(a) minimum individual
			 piece weight is greater than or equal to 3 e; and
(b) minimum sample piece count is greater
			 than or equal to 10 pieces. (Added 2003)
S.1.3.
Graduations.
S.1.3.1.
Length.
- Graduations shall be so varied in length that they may be conveniently
			 read.
S.1.3.2.
Width.
- In any series of graduations, the width of a graduation shall in no
			 case be greater than the width of the clear space between graduations. The
			 width of main graduations shall be not more than 50 % greater than the width of
			 subordinate graduations. Graduations shall be not less than 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
			 wide.
S.1.3.3.
Clear Space
			 Between Graduations.
- The clear space between graduations shall be not
			 less than 0.5 mm (0.02 in) for graduations representing money-values, and not
			 less than 0.75 mm (0.03 in) for other graduations. If the graduations are not
			 parallel, the measurement shall be made:
(a)
			 along the line of relative movement between the graduations at the end of the
			 indicator; or
(b) if the indicator
			 is continuous, at the point of widest separation of the graduations.
S.1.4.
Indicators.
S.1.4.1.
Symmetry.
- The index of an indicator shall be of the same shape as the
			 graduations, at least throughout that portion of its length associated with the
			 graduations.
S.1.4.2.
Length.
- The index of an indicator shall reach to the finest
			 graduations with which it is used, unless the indicator and the graduations are
			 in the same plane, in which case, the distance between the end of the indicator
			 and the ends of the graduations, measured along the line of the graduations,
			 shall be not more than 1.0 mm (0.04 in).
S.1.4.3.
Width.
- The width of
			 the index of an indicator in relation to the series of graduations with which
			 it is used shall be not greater than:
(a)
the width of the narrowest graduation; [Nonretroactive as of January
			 1, 2002]
(b) the width of
			 the clear space between weight graduations; and
(c) three-fourths of the width of the clear
			 space between money-value graduations.
When the index of an indicator extends along the entire length
				of a graduation, that portion of the index of the indicator that may be brought
				into coincidence with the graduation shall be of the same width throughout the
				length of the index that coincides with the graduation.
S.1.4.4.
Clearance.
- The clearance between the index of an indicator and the graduations
			 shall in no case be more than 1.5 mm (0.06 in).
S.1.4.5.
Parallax.
- Parallax
			 effects shall be reduced to the practicable minimum.
S.1.5.
			 Weighbeams.
S.1.5.1.
Normal Balance Position.
- The normal balance position of the weighbeam
			 of a beam scale shall be horizontal.
S.1.5.2.
Travel.
- The
			 weighbeam of a beam scale shall have equal travel above and below the
			 horizontal. The total travel of the weighbeam of a beam scale in a trig loop or
			 between other limiting stops near the weighbeam tip shall be not less than the
			 minimum travel shown in Tables 1M and 1. When such limiting stops are not
			 provided, the total travel at the weighbeam tip shall be not less than 8 % of
			 the distance from the weighbeam fulcrum to the weighbeam tip.
Table 1M.
Minimum Travel of Weighbeam of Beam
						  Scale
Between Limiting Stops
Distance From
Weighbeam Fulcrum to
Limiting Stops
(centimeters)
Minimum Travel
Between
Limiting Stops
(millimeter)
30 or less
10
30+ to 50, inclusive
13
50+ to 100, inclusive
18
Over 100
23
Table 1.
Minimum Travel of Weighbeam of Beam
						  Scale
Between Limiting Stops
Distance From
Weighbeam Fulcrum to
Limiting Stops
(inches)
Minimum Travel
Between
Limiting Stops
(inch)
12 or less
0.4
12+ to 20, inclusive
0.5
20+ to 40, inclusive
0.7
Over 40
0.9
S.1.5.3.
Subdivision.
- A
			 subdivided weighbeam bar shall be subdivided by scale division graduations,
			 notches, or a combination of both. Graduations on a particular bar shall be of
			 uniform width and perpendicular to the top edge of the bar. Notches on a
			 particular bar shall be uniform in shape and dimensions and perpendicular to
			 the face of the bar. When a combination of graduations and notches is employed,
			 the graduations shall be positioned in relation to the notches to indicate
			 notch values clearly and accurately.
S.1.5.4.
Readability.
- A
			 subdivided weighbeam bar shall be so subdivided and marked, and a weighbeam
			 poise shall be so constructed, that the weight corresponding to any normal
			 poise position can easily and accurately be read directly from the beam,
			 whether or not provision is made for the optional recording of representations
			 of weight.
S.1.5.5.
Capacity.
- On an automatic-indicating scale having a nominal capacity
			 of 15 kg (30 lb) or less and used for direct sales to retail customers:
(a) the capacity of any weighbeam bar shall
			 be a multiple of the reading-face capacity;
(b) each bar shall be subdivided throughout
			 or shall be subdivided into notched intervals, each equal to the reading-face
			 capacity; and
(c) the value of any
			 turnover poise shall be equal to the reading-face capacity.
S.1.5.6.
Poise Stop.
- Except on a steelyard with no zero graduation, a shoulder or stop
			 shall be provided on each weighbeam bar to prevent a poise from traveling and
			 remaining back of the zero graduation.
S.1.6.
Poises.
S.1.6.1.
General.
- No part of
			 a poise shall be readily detachable. A locking screw shall be perpendicular to
			 the longitudinal axis of the weighbeam and shall not be removable. Except on a
			 steelyard with no zero graduation, the poise shall not be readily removable
			 from a weighbeam. The knife-edge of a hanging poise shall be hard and sharp and
			 so constructed as to allow the poise to swing freely on the bearing surfaces in
			 the weighbeam notches.
S.1.6.2.
Adjusting Material.
- The adjusting material in a poise shall be
			 securely enclosed and firmly fixed in position; if softer than brass, it shall
			 not be in contact with the weighbeam.
S.1.6.3.
Pawl.
- A poise, other
			 than a hanging poise, on a notched weighbeam bar shall have a pawl that will
			 seat the poise in a definite and correct position in any notch, wherever in the
			 notch the pawl is placed, and hold it there firmly and without appreciable
			 movement. The dimension of the tip of the pawl that is transverse to the
			 longitudinal axis of the weighbeam shall be at least equal to the corresponding
			 dimension of the notches.
S.1.6.4.
Reading Edge or Indicator.
- The reading edge or indicator of a
			 poise shall be sharply defined, and a reading edge shall be parallel to the
			 graduations on the weighbeam.
S.1.7.
Capacity Indication, Weight
			 Ranges, and Unit Weights.
(a)
Gross Capacity.
- An indicating or recording element shall not
			 display nor record any values when the gross load (not counting the initial
			 dead load that has been canceled by an initial zero-setting mechanism) is in
			 excess of 105 % of scale capacity.
(b)
Capacity
			 Indication
.
- Electronic computing scales (excluding
			 postal scales and weight classifiers) shall neither display nor record a gross
			 or net weight in excess of scale capacity plus 9 d. [Nonretroactive as of
			 January 1, 1993]
The total value of weight ranges and of unit weights in effect
				or in place at any time shall automatically be accounted for on the reading
				face and on any recorded representation.
This requirement does not apply to:
(1) single-revolution dial scales,
(2) multi-revolution dial scales not equipped
			 with unit weights,
(3) scales
			 equipped with two or more weighbeams, nor
(4) devices that indicate mathematically
			 derived totalized values.
(Amended 1990, 1992, and 1995)
S.1.8.
Computing Scales.
S.1.8.1.
Money-Value Graduations,
			 Metric Unit Prices.
- The value of the graduated intervals representing
			 money-values on a computing scale with analog indications shall not exceed:
(a) 1 cent at all unit prices of 55 cents per
			 kilogram and less;
(b) 2 cents at
			 unit prices of 56 cents per kilogram through $2.75 per kilogram (special
			 graduations defining 5-cent intervals may be employed but not in the spaces
			 between regular graduations);
(c) 5
			 cents at unit prices of $2.76 per kilogram through $7.50 per kilogram;
			 or
(d) 10 cents at unit prices
			 above $7.50 per kilogram.
Value figures and graduations shall not be duplicated in any
				column or row on the graduated chart. (Also see S.1.8.2. Money-Value
				Computation.)
S.1.8.2.
Money-Value Graduations, U.S.
			 Customary Unit Prices.
- The value of the graduated intervals
			 representing money-values on a computing scale with analog indications shall
			 not exceed:
(a) 1 cent at all unit prices of
			 25 cents per pound and less;
(b) 2
			 cents at unit prices of 26 cents per pound through $1.25 per pound (special
			 graduations defining 5-cent intervals may be employed but not in the spaces
			 between regular graduations);
(c) 5
			 cents at unit prices of $1.26 per pound through $3.40 per pound; or
(d) 10 cents at unit prices above $3.40 per
			 pound.
Value figures and graduations shall not be duplicated in any
				column or row on the graduated chart. (Also see S.1.8.2. Money-Value
				Computation.)
S.1.8.3.
Money-Value Computation.
- A computing scale with analog quantity indications used in retail
			 trade may compute and present digital money-values to the nearest quantity
			 graduation when the value of the minimum graduated interval is 0.005 kg (0.01
			 lb) or less. (Also see Sec. 1.10. General Code G-S.5.5. Money-Values,
			 Mathematical Agreement.)
S.1.8.4.
Customer's Indications.
- Weight indications shall be shown on
			 the customer's side of computing scales when these are used for direct sales to
			 retail customers. Computing scales equipped on the operator's side with digital
			 indications, such as the net weight, unit price, or total price, shall be
			 similarly equipped on the customer's side. Unit price displays visible to the
			 customer shall be in terms of single whole units of weight and not in common or
			 decimal fractions of the unit. Scales indicating in metric units may indicate
			 price per 100 g.
(Amended 1985 and 1995)
S.1.8.4.1.
Scales that will function
			 as either a normal round off scale or as a weight classifier shall be provided
			 with a sealable means for selecting the mode of operation and shall have a
			 clear indication (annunciator), adjacent to the weight display on both the
			 operator's and customer's side whenever the scale is operating as a weight
			 classifier
.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2001]
(Added 1999)
S.1.8.5.
Recorded Representations,
			 Point-of-Sale Systems.
- The sales information recorded by cash
			 registers when interfaced with a weighing element shall contain the following
			 information for items weighed at the checkout stand:
(a) the net
			 weight;28
(b) the unit
			 price;1
28 For devices interfaced with scales
				indicating in metric units, the unit price may be expressed in price per 100
				grams. Weight values shall be identified by kilograms, kg, grams, g, ounces,
				oz, pounds, or lb.
The "#" symbol is not acceptable. [Nonretroactive as
				of January 1, 2006]
(Amended 1995 and 2005)
(c) the total price; and
(d) the product class or, in a system
			 equipped with price look-up capability, the product name or code
			 number.
S.1.9.
Prepackaging Scales.
S.1.9.1.
Value of the Scale Division.
- On a prepackaging scale, the value of the intervals representing
			 weight values shall be uniform throughout the entire reading face. The recorded
			 weight values shall be identical with those on the indicator.
S.1.9.2.
Label Printer.
- A
			 prepackaging scale or a device that produces a printed ticket to be used as the
			 label for a package shall print all values digitally and of such size, style of
			 type, and color as to be clear and conspicuous on the label.
S.1.10.
Adjustable
			 Components.
- An adjustable component such as a pendulum, spring, or
			 potentiometer shall be held securely in adjustment and, except for a zero-load
			 balance mechanism, shall be located within the housing of the element.
(Added 1986)
S.1.11.
Provision for
			 Sealing.
(a)
Except
			 on Class I scales, provision shall be made for applying a security seal in a
			 manner that requires the security seal to be broken before an adjustment can be
			 made to any component affecting the performance of an electronic
			 device.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1979]
(b)
Except on Class I
			 scales, a device shall be designed with provision(s) for applying a security
			 seal that must be broken, or for using other approved means of providing
			 security (e.g., data change audit trail available at the time of inspection),
			 before any change that detrimentally affects the metrological integrity of the
			 device can be made to any electronic mechanism.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1990]
(c)
Except on Class I
			 scales, audit trails shall use the format set forth in Table S.1.11. Categories
			 of Device and Methods of Sealing.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1995]
A device may be fitted with an automatic or a semi-automatic
				calibration mechanism. This mechanism shall be incorporated inside the device.
				After sealing, neither the mechanism nor the calibration process shall
				facilitate fraud.
(Amended 1989, 1991, and 1993)
Table S.1.11. Categories of Device and
						  Methods of Sealing
Categories of
						  Device
Methods of Sealing
Category 1:
No
						  remote configuration capability.
Seal by physical seal or two event counters:
						  one for calibration parameters and one for configuration
						  parameters.
Category 2:
Remote configuration capability, but access is
						  controlled by physical hardware.
The device shall clearly indicate that it is in
						  the remote configuration mode and record such message if capable of printing in
						  this mode.
The hardware enabling access for remote
						  communication must be at the device and sealed using a physical seal or two
						  event counters: one for calibration parameters and one for configuration
						  parameters.
Category 3:
Remote configuration capability access may be unlimited
						  or controlled through a software switch (e.g., password).
An event logger is required in the device; it
						  must include an event counter (000 to 999), the parameter ID, the date and time
						  of the change, and the new value of the parameter. A printed copy of the
						  information must be available through the device or through another on-site
						  device. The event logger shall have a capacity to retain records equal to 10
						  times the number of sealable parameters in the device, but not more than 1000
						  records are required. (
Note:
Does not require 1000 changes to be
						  stored for each parameter.)
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1995]
(Table
				added 1993)
S.1.12.
Manual Weight Entries.
-
A device when being used for direct sale shall accept
			 an entry of a manual gross or net weight value only when the scale gross or
			 net* weight indication is at zero. Recorded manual weight entries, except those
			 on labels generated for packages of standard weights, shall identify the weight
			 value as a manual weight entry by one of the following terms: "Manual Weight,"
			 "Manual Wt," or "MAN WT." The use of a symbol to identify multiple manual
			 weight entries on a single document is permitted, provided that the symbol is
			 defined on the same page on which the manual weight entries appear and the
			 definition of the symbol is automatically printed by the recording element as
			 part of the document. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1993] [*Nonretroactive
			 as of January 1, 2005]
(Added 1992) (Amended 2004)
S.1.13.
Vehicle On-Board Weighing
			 Systems: Vehicle in Motion.
- When the vehicle is in motion, a vehicle
			 on-board weighing system shall either:
(a) be
			 accurate; or
(b) inhibit the
			 weighing operation. (Added 1993)
S.2.
Design of Balance, Tare, Level,
			 Damping, and Arresting Mechanisms.
S.2.1.
Zero-Load Adjustment.
S.2.1.1.
General.
- A scale
			 shall be equipped with means by which the zero-load balance may be adjusted.
			 Any loose material used for this purpose shall be enclosed so that it cannot
			 shift in position and alter the balance condition of the scale.
Except for an initial zero-setting mechanism, an automatic zero
				adjustment outside the limits specified in S.2.1.3. Scales Equipped with an
				Automatic Zero-Tracking Mechanism is prohibited. (Amended 2010)
S.2.1.2.
Scales used in
			 Direct Sales.
- A manual zero-setting mechanism (except on a digital
			 scale with an analog zero-adjustment mechanism with a range of not greater than
			 one scale division) shall be operable or accessible only by a tool outside of
			 and entirely separate from this mechanism, or it shall be enclosed in a
			 cabinet. Except on Class I or II scales, a balance ball shall either meet this
			 requirement or not itself be rotatable.
A semiautomatic zero-setting mechanism shall be operable or
				accessible only by a tool outside of and separate from this mechanism or it
				shall be enclosed in a cabinet, or it shall be operable only when the
				indication is stable within plus or minus:
(a) 3.0 scale divisions for scales of more
			 than 2000 kg (5000 lb) capacity in service prior to January 1, 1981, and for
			 all axle load, railway track, and vehicle scales; or
(b) 1.0 scale division for all other
			 scales.
S.2.1.3.
Scales Equipped with an Automatic Zero-Tracking Mechanism.
S.2.1.3.1.
Automatic Zero-Tracking
			 Mechanism for Scales Manufactured Between January 1, 1981, and January 1, 2007.
- The maximum load that can be "rezeroed," when either placed on or
			 removed from the platform all at once under normal operating conditions, shall
			 be for:
(a) bench, counter, and livestock
			 scales: 0.6 scale division;
(b)
			 vehicle, axle load, and railway track scales: 3.0 scale divisions;
			 and
(c) all other scales: 1.0 scale
			 division. (Amended 2005)
S.2.1.3.2.
Automatic Zero-Tracking
			 Mechanism for Scales Manufactured on or after January 1, 2007.
- The
			 maximum load that can be "rezeroed," when either placed on or removed from the
			 platform all at once under normal operating conditions, shall be:
(a) for vehicle, axle load, and railway track
			 scales: 3.0 scale divisions; and
(b) for all other scales: 0.5 scale division.
			 (Added 2005)
S.2.1.3.3.
Means to Disable Automatic Zero-Tracking Mechanism on Class III
			 L Devices.
-
Class III L devices equipped with an
			 automatic zero-tracking mechanism shall be designed with a sealable means that
			 would allow zero tracking to be disabled during the inspection and test of the
			 device.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2001]
(Added 1999) (Amended 2005)
S.2.1.4.
Monorail Scales.
- On
			 a static monorail scale equipped with digital indications, means shall be
			 provided for setting the zero-load balance to within 0.02 % of scale capacity.
			 On a dynamic monorail weighing system, means shall be provided to automatically
			 maintain these conditions.
(Amended 1999)
S.2.1.5.
Initial Zero-Setting
			 Mechanism.
- Scales of accuracy Classes I, II, and III may be equipped
			 with an initial zero-setting device.
(a) For
			 weighing, load-receiving, and indicating elements in the same housing or
			 covered on the same CC, an initial zero-setting mechanism shall not zero a load
			 in excess of 20 % of the maximum capacity of the scale unless tests show that
			 the scale meets all applicable tolerances for any amount of initial load
			 compensated by this device within the specified range.
(b)
For indicating elements not
			 permanently attached to weighing and load-receiving elements covered on a
			 separate CC, the maximum initial zero-setting mechanism range of electronic
			 indicators shall not exceed 20 % of the configured capacity.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2009]
(Added 2008) (Added 1990) (Amended 2008)
S.2.1.6.
Combined Zero-Tare
			 (
"
0/T
"
) Key.
- Scales not intended to be used
			 in direct sales applications may be equipped with a combined zero and tare
			 function key, provided that the device is clearly marked as to how the key
			 functions. The device must also be clearly marked on or adjacent to the weight
			 display with the statement "Not for Direct Sales."
(Added 1998)
S.2.2.
Balance Indicator.
- On
			 a balance indicator consisting of two indicating edges, lines, or points, the
			 ends of the indicators shall be sharply defined. When the scale is in balance,
			 the ends shall be separated by not more than 1.0 mm (0.04 in).
S.2.2.1.
Dairy-Product Test,
			 Grain-Test, Prescription, and Class I and II Scales.
- Except on digital
			 indicating devices, a dairy-product test, grain-test, prescription, or Class I
			 or II scale shall be equipped with a balance indicator. If an indicator and a
			 graduated scale are not in the same plane, the clearance between the indicator
			 and the graduations shall be not more than 1.0 mm (0.04 in).
S.2.2.2.
Equal-Arm Scale.
-
An equal-arm scale shall be equipped with a balance
			 indicator. If the indicator and balance graduation are not in the same plane,
			 the clearance between the indicator and the balance graduation shall be not
			 more than 1.0 mm (0.04 in).
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1989]
(Added 1988)
S.2.3.
Tare.
-
On any
			 scale (except a monorail scale equipped with digital indications and
			 multi-interval scales or multiple range scales when the value of tare is
			 determined in a lower weighing range or weighing segment), the value of the
			 tare division shall be equal to the value of the scale division.*
The
			 tare mechanism shall operate only in a backward direction (that is, in a
			 direction of underregistration) with respect to the zero-load balance condition
			 of the scale.
A device designed to automatically clear any tare value
			 shall also be designed to prevent the automatic clearing of tare until a
			 complete transaction has been indicated.* [*Nonretroactive as of January 1,
			 1983]
(Amended 1985 and 2008)
Note
: On a computing
				scale, this requires the input of a unit price, the display of the unit price,
				and a computed positive total price at a readable equilibrium. Other devices
				require a complete weighing operation, including tare, net, and gross weight
				determination* [*Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1983]
S.2.3.1.
Monorail Scales Equipped with
			 Digital Indications.
- On a static monorail weighing system equipped
			 with digital indications, means shall be provided for setting any tare value of
			 less than 5 % of the scale capacity to within 0.02 % of scale capacity. On a
			 dynamic monorail weighing system, means shall be provided to automatically
			 maintain this condition.
(Amended 1999)
S.2.4.
Level-Indicating Means.
- Except for portable wheel-load weighers and portable axle load scales,
			 a portable scale shall be equipped with level-indicating means if its weighing
			 performance is changed by an amount greater than the appropriate acceptance
			 tolerance when it is tilted up to and including 5 % rise over run in any
			 direction from a level position and rebalanced. The level-indicating means
			 shall be readable without removing any scale parts requiring a tool.
[This requirement is nonretroactive as of January 1,
				1986, for prescription, jewelers', and dairy-product test scales and scales
				marked Class I and II.]
Note:
Portable wheel-load weighers and portable
				axle-load scales shall be accurate when tilted up to and including 5 % rise
				over run in any direction from a level position and rebalanced.
(Amended 1991 and 2008)
S.2.4.1.
Vehicle On-Board Weighing
			 Systems.
- A vehicle on-board weighing system shall operate within
			 tolerance when the weighing system is tilted up to and including 5 % rise over
			 run in any direction from a level position and rebalanced. If the accuracy of
			 the system is affected by out-of-level conditions normal to the use of the
			 device, the system shall be equipped with an out-of-level sensor that inhibits
			 the weighing operation when the system is out of level to the extent that the
			 accuracy limits are exceeded.
(Added 1992) (Amended 2008)
S.2.5.
Damping Means.
- An
			 automatic-indicating scale and a balance indicator shall be equipped with
			 effective means to damp oscillations and to bring the indicating elements
			 quickly to rest.
S.2.5.1.
Digital
			 Indicating Elements.
- Digital indicating elements equipped with
			 recording elements shall be equipped with effective means to permit the
			 recording of weight values only when the indication is stable within plus or
			 minus:
(a) 3.0 scale divisions for scales of
			 more than 2000 kg (5000 lb) capacity in service prior to January 1, 1981,
			 hopper (other than grain hopper) scales with a capacity exceeding 22 000 kg (50
			 000 lb), and for all vehicle, axle load, livestock, and railway track scales;
			 and
(b) 1.0 scale division for all
			 other scales.
The values recorded shall be within applicable tolerances.
				(Amended 1995)
S.2.5.2.
Jewelers', Prescription, and
			 Class I, and Class II Scales.
- A jewelers', prescription, Class I, or
			 Class II scales shall be equipped with appropriate means for arresting the
			 oscillation of the mechanism.
S.2.5.3.
Class I and Class II
			 Prescription Scales with a Counting Feature.
- A Class I or Class II
			 prescription scale shall indicate to the operator when the piece weight
			 computation is complete by a stable display of the quantity placed on the
			 load-receiving element.
(Added 2003)
S.3.
Design of Load-Receiving
			 Elements.
S.3.1.
Travel of Pans
			 of Equal-Arm Scale.
- The travel between limiting stops of the pans of a
			 nonautomatic-indicating equal-arm scale not equipped with a balance indicator
			 shall be not less than the minimum travel shown in Table 2M. and Table 2.
Table 2M.
Minimum Travel of Pans of
Nonautomatic Indicating Equal-Arm
						  Scale
Withoutwithout Balance Indicator
Nominal Capacity (kilograms)
Minimum Travel of Pans
						  (millimeters)
2 or less
9
2+ to 5, inclusive
13
5+ to 12, inclusive
19
Over 12
25
Table 2.
Minimum Travel of Pans of
Nonautomatic Indicating Equal-Arm
						  Scale
Withoutwithout Balance Indicator
Nominal Capacity (pounds)
Minimum Travel of Pans (inch)
4 or less
0.35
4+ to 12, inclusive
0.5
12+ to 26, inclusive
0.75
Over 26
1.0
S.3.2.
Drainage.
- A load-receiving element intended to receive wet
			 commodities shall be so constructed as to drain effectively.
S.3.3.
Scoop Counterbalance.
-
			 A scoop on a scale used for direct sales to retail customers shall not be
			 counterbalanced by a removable weight. A permanently attached
			 scoop-counterbalance shall indicate clearly on both the operator's and
			 customer's sides of the scale whether it is positioned for the scoop to be on
			 or off the scale.
S.4.
Design of Weighing Elements.
S.4.1.
Antifriction Means.
-
			 Frictional effects shall be reduced to a minimum by suitable antifriction
			 elements. Opposing surfaces and points shall be properly shaped, finished, and
			 hardened. A platform scale having a frame around the platform shall be equipped
			 with means to prevent interference between platform and frame.
S.4.2.
Adjustable Components.
-
			 An adjustable component such as a nose-iron or potentiometer shall be held
			 securely in adjustment. The position of a nose-iron on a scale of more than
			 1000 kg (2000 lb) capacity, as determined by the factory adjustment, shall be
			 accurately, clearly, and permanently defined.
(Amended 1986)
S.4.3.
Multiple Load-Receiving
			 Elements.
- Except for mechanical bench and counter scales, a scale with
			 a single indicating or recording element, or a combination indicating-recording
			 element, that is coupled to two or more load-receiving elements with
			 independent weighing systems, shall be provided with means to prohibit the
			 activation of any load-receiving element (or elements) not in use, and shall be
			 provided with automatic means to indicate clearly and definitely which
			 load-receiving element (or elements) is in use.
S.5.
Design of Weighing
			 Devices, Accuracy Class.
S.5.1.
Designation of Accuracy
			 Class.
-
Weighing devices are divided into accuracy
			 classes and shall be designated as I, II, III, III L, or IIII.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
S.5.2.
Parameters
			 for Accuracy Class.
-
The accuracy class of a weighing
			 device is designated by the manufacturer and shall comply with parameters shown
			 in Table 3.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
S.5.3.
Multi-Interval and
			 Multiple Range Scales, Division Value.
- On a multi-interval scale and
			 multiple range scale, the value of "e" shall be equal to the value of
			 "d."29
(Added 1986) (Amended 1995)
S.5.4.
Relationship of Load
			 Cell Verification Interval Value to the Scale Division.
-
The relationship of the value for the load cell verification scale
			 interval, vmin, to the scale division, d, for a specific
			 scale installation using National Type Evaluation Program (NTEP) load cells
			 shall comply with the following formulae where N is the number of load cells in
			 the scale (such as hopper or vehicle scale weighing/load-receiving
			 elements):
Click here
				to view image
Click here
				to view image
[*When the value of the scale division, d, is different
				from the verification scale division, e, for the scale, the value of e must be
				used in the formulae above.]
This requirement does not apply to complete
				weighing/load-receiving elements or scales, which satisfy all the following
				criteria:
the complete weighing/load-receiving element or scale
				has been evaluated for compliance with T.N.8.1. Temperature under the
				NTEP;
the complete weighing/load-receiving element or scale
				has received an NTEP Certificate of Conformance; and
the complete weighing/load-receiving element or scale
				is equipped with an automatic zero-tracking mechanism which cannot be made
				inoperative in the normal weighing mode. (A test mode which permits the
				disabling of the automatic zero-tracking mechanism is permissible, provided the
				scale cannot function normally while in this mode. [Nonretroactive as of
				January 1, 1994]
(Added 1993) (Amended 1996) Footnote 1 to Table 3 Parameters
				for Accuracy Classes.
Table 3. Parameters for Accuracy
						  Classes
Class
Value of the Verification Scale Division
						  (d or e1)
Number of
						  Scale4 Divisions (n)
Minimum
Maximum
SI Units
I
equal to or greater than 1 mg
50 000
--
II
1 to 50 mg, inclusive
100
100 000
equal to or greater than 100 mg
5 000
100 000
III2,5
0.1 to 2 g, inclusive
100
10 000
equal to or greater than 5 g
500
10 000
III
						  L3
equal to or greater than 2 kg
2 000
10 000
IIII
equal to or greater than 5 g
100
1 200
U.S. Customary
						  Units
III5
0.0002 lb to 0.005 lb,
						  inclusive
100
10 000
0.005 oz to 0.125 oz, inclusive
100
10 000
equal to or greater than 0.01
						  lb
500
10 000
equal to or greater than 0.25
						  oz
500
10 000
III
						  L3
equal to or greater than 5 lb
2 000
10 000
IIII
greater than 0.01 lb
100
1 200
greater than 0.25 oz
100
1 200
1 For Class I and II
						  devices equipped with auxiliary reading means (i.e., a rider, a vernier, or a
						  least significant decimal differentiated by size, shape, or color), the value
						  of the verification scale division "e" is the value of the scale division
						  immediately preceding the auxiliary means.
2 A Class III scale
						  marked "For prescription weighing only" may have a verification scale division
						  (e) not less than 0.01 g
.
(Added 1986) (Amended 2003)
3 The value of a
						  scale division for crane and hopper (other than grain hopper) scales shall be
						  not less than 0.2 kg (0.5 lb). The minimum number of scale divisions shall be
						  not less than 1000.
4 On a multiple
						  range or multi-interval scale, the number of divisions for each range
						  independently shall not exceed the maximum specified for the accuracy class.
						  The number of scale divisions, n, for each weighing range is determined by
						  dividing the scale capacity for each range by the verification scale division,
						  e, for each range. On a scale system with multiple load-receiving elements and
						  multiple indications, each element considered shall not independently exceed
						  the maximum specified for the accuracy class. If the system has a summing
						  indicator, the nmax for the summed indication shall not
						  exceed the maximum specified for the accuracy class.
(Added 1997)
5 The minimum number
						  of scale divisions for a Class III Hopper Scale used for weighing grain shall
						  be 2000.
)
[
Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986
]
(Amended 1986, 1987, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2003, and 2004)
S.6.
Marking
			 Requirements.
- (Also see G-S.1. Identification, G-S.4. Interchange or
			 Reversal of Parts, G-S.6. Marking Operational Controls, Indications, and
			 Features, G-S.7. Lettering, G-UR.2.1.1. Visibility of Identification, and
			 UR.3.4.1. Use in Pairs.)
S.6.1.
Nominal Capacity; Vehicle and Axle-Load Scales.
- For
			 all vehicle and axle-load scales, the marked nominal capacity shall not exceed
			 the concentrated load capacity (CLC) times the quantity of the number of
			 sections in the scale minus 0.5.
As a formula, this is stated as: nominal capacity
[LESS THAN]
CLC × (N - 0.5)
where N = the number of sections in the scale.
				[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1989]
Note:
When the device is used in a combination
				railway track and vehicle weighing application, the above formula shall apply
				only to the vehicle scale application.
(Added 1988) (Amended 1999 and 2002)
S.6.2.
Location of Marking
			 Information.
- Scales that are not permanently attached to an indicating
			 element, and for which the load-receiving element is the only part of the
			 weighing/load-receiving element visible after installation, may have the
			 marking information required in Section 1.10. General Code, G-S.1.
			 Identification and Section 2.20. Scales Code, S.6. Marking Requirements located
			 in an area that is accessible only through the use of a tool; provided that the
			 information is easily accessible (e.g., the information may appear on the
			 junction box under an access plate). The identification information for these
			 scales shall be located on the weighbridge (load-receiving element) near the
			 point where the signal leaves the weighing element or beneath the nearest
			 access cover.
(Added 1989)
S.6.3.
Scales, Main Elements, and
			 Components of Scales or Weighing Systems.
Scales, main elements of
			 scales when not contained in a single enclosure for the entire scale, load
			 cells for which Certificates of Conformance (CC) have been issued under the
			 National Type Evaluation Program (NTEP), and other equipment necessary to a
			 weighing system, but having no metrological effect on the weighing system,
			 shall be marked as specified in Table S.6.3.a. Marking Requirements and
			 explained in the accompanying notes in Table S.6.3.b. Notes for Table S.6.3.a.
(Added 1990)
Table S.6.3.a. Marking Requirements
To Be Marked With
Weighing Equipment
Weighing, Load-Receiving, and Indicating Element
						  in Same Housing or Covered on the Same
						  CC1
Indicating
Element not
Permanently
Attached to
Weighing and
Load-Receiving
Element or
Covered by a
Separate CC
Weighing and
Load-Receiving
Element Not
Permanently
Attached to
Indicating
Element or
Covered by a
Separate CC
Load Cell
with CC
(11)
Other
Equipment
or Device
(10)
Manufacturer's ID (1)
X
X
X
X
X
Model Designation and Prefix (1)
X
X
X
X
X
Serial Number and Prefix (2)
X
X
X
X
X (16)
Certificate of Conformance Number (CC) (23)
X
X
X
X
X (23)
Accuracy Class (17)
X
X (8)
X (19)
X
Nominal Capacity (3)(18)(20)
X
X
X
Value of Scale Division, "d" (3)
X
X
Value of "e" (4)
X
X
Temperature Limits (5)
X
X
X
X
Concentrated Load Capacity (CLC) (12)(20)(22)
X
X (9)
Special Application (13)
X
X
X
Maximum Number of Scale Divisions
						  (nmax) (6)
X (8)
X (19)
X
Minimum Verification Scale Division
						  (emin)
X (19)
"S" or "M" (7)
X
Direction of Loading (15)
X
Minimum Dead Load
X
Maximum Capacity
X
Safe Load Limit
X
Load Cell Verification Interval
						  (vmin) (21)
X
Section Capacity and Prefix
(14)(20)(22)(24)
X
X
Table S.6.3.a. Marking Requirements
Note:
For applicable notes, Table
						  S.6.3.b.
1 Weighing/load-receiving
						  elements and indicators which are in the same housing or which are permanently
						  attached will generally appear on the same CC. If not in the same housing,
						  elements shall be hard-wired together or sealed with a physical seal or an
						  electronic link. This requirement does not apply to peripheral equipment that
						  has no input or effect on device calibrations or configurations.
(Added 2001)
(Added 1990) (Amended 1992, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, and
				2004)
Table S.6.3.b. Notes for Table S.6.3.a. Marking
						  Requirements
1. Manufacturer's identification and model designation
						  and
model designation prefix.* [*Nonretroactive as of January 1,
						  2003
] (Also see G-S.1. Identification.)
[Prefix lettering may
						  be initial capitals, all capitals or all lower case]
(Amended 2000)
2.
Serial number [Nonretroactive as of January
						  1, 1968] and prefix [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986].
(Also see
						  G-S.1. Identification.)
3. The device shall be marked with the nominal
						  capacity.
The nominal capacity shall be shown together with the value
						  of the scale division (e.g., 15 × 0.005 kg, 30 × 0.01 lb, or
						  capacity = 15 kg, d = 0.005 kg) in a clear and conspicuous manner and be
						  readily apparent when viewing the reading face of the scale indicator unless
						  already apparent by the design of the device. Each scale division value or
						  weight unit shall be marked on multiple range or multi-interval
						  scales.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1,
						  1983]
(Amended 2005)
4.
Required only if different from
						  "d."
[Nonretroactive as of January 1,
						  1986]
5.
Required only on Class III, III L, and IIII
						  devices if the temperature range on the NTEP CC is narrower than and within -
						  10
°
C to 40
°
C (14
°
F to 104
°
F). [Nonretroactive as of January 1,
						  1986]
(Amended 1999)
6.
This value may be stated on load cells in
						  units of 1000; e.g., n: 10 is 10 000 divisions. [Nonretroactive as of January
						  1, 1988]
7.
Denotes compliance for single or multiple
						  load cell applications. It is acceptable to use a load cell with the "S" or
						  Single Cell designation in multiple load cell applications as long as all other
						  parameters meet applicable requirements. A load cell with the "M" or Multiple
						  Cell designation can be used only in multiple load cell
						  applications.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1,
						  1988]
(Amended 1999)
8.
An indicating element not permanently
						  attached to a weighing element shall be clearly and permanently marked with the
						  accuracy Class of I, II, III, III L, or IIII, as appropriate, and the maximum
						  number of scale divisions, nmax, for which the indicator
						  complies with the applicable requirement. Indicating elements that qualify for
						  use in both Class III and III L applications may be marked III/III L and shall
						  be marked with the maximum number of scale divisions for which the device
						  complies with the applicable requirements for each accuracy class.
						  [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1988]
9.
For vehicle and axle-load scales only. The
						  CLC shall be added to the load-receiving element of any such scale not
						  previously marked at the time of modification. [Nonretroactive as of January 1,
						  1989]
(Amended 2002)
10. Necessary to the weighing system but having no
						  metrological effect, e.g., auxiliary remote display, keyboard, etc.
11.
The markings may be either on the load cell
						  or in an accompanying document; except that, if an accompanying document is
						  provided, the serial number shall appear both on the load cell and in the
						  document. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1988] The manufacturer's name or
						  trademark, the model designation, and identifying symbols for the model and
						  serial numbers as required by paragraph G-S.1. Identification shall also be
						  marked both on the load cell and in any accompanying document.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1,
						  1991]
12. Required on the indicating element
and the
						  load-receiving element
of vehicle and axle-load scales.
Such
						  marking shall be identified as "concentrated load capacity" or by the
						  abbreviation "CLC."* [*Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1989]
(Amended 2002)
13.
A scale designed for a special application
						  rather than general use shall be conspicuously marked with suitable words,
						  visible to the operator and to the customer, restricting its use to that
						  application, e.g., postal scale, prepack scale, weight classifier, etc.*
When a scale is installed with an operational counting feature, the
						  scale shall be marked on both the operator and customer sides with the
						  statement "The counting feature is not legal for trade," except when a Class I
						  or Class II prescription scale complies with all Handbook 44 requirements
						  applicable to counting features.
[*Nonretroactive as of
						  1986]
(Amended 1994 and 2003)
14. Required on
livestock*
and railway
						  track scales. When marked on vehicle and axle-load scales manufactured before
						  January 1, 1989, it may be used as the CLC. For livestock scales manufactured
						  between January 1, 1989, and January 1, 2003, required markings may be either
						  CLC or section capacity.
[*Nonretroactive as of January 1,
						  2003]
(Amended 2002)
15.
Required if the direction of loading the
						  load cell is not obvious. [Nonretroactive as of January 1,
						  1988]
16.
Serial number [Nonretroactive as of January
						  1, 1968] and prefix [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986].
(Also see
						  G-S.1. Identification.) Modules without "intelligence" on a modular system
						  (e.g., printer, keyboard module, cash drawer, and secondary display in a
						  point-of-sale system) are not required to have serial numbers.
17.
The accuracy class of a device shall be
						  marked on the device with the appropriate designation as I, II, III, III L, or
						  IIII. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
18. The nominal capacity shall be conspicuously marked
						  as follows:
(a) on any scale equipped with unit weights or weight
						  ranges;
(b) on any scale with which counterpoise or equal-arm
						  weights are intended to be used;
(c) on any automatic-indicating or recording scale so
						  constructed that the capacity of the indicating or recording element, or
						  elements, is not immediately apparent;
(d) on any scale with a nominal capacity less than the
						  sum of the reading elements; and
(e) on the load-receiving element (weighbridge)
						  of vehicle, axle-load, and livestock scales.*
[*Nonretroactive as of January 1,
						  1989]
(Amended 1992)
19.
For weighing and load-receiving elements
						  not permanently attached to indicating element or covered by a separate CC.
						  [Nonretroactive as of January, 1, 1988]
(Amended 1992)
20.
Combination vehicle/railway track scales
						  must be marked with both the nominal capacity and CLC for vehicle weighing and
						  the nominal capacity and section capacity for railway weighing. All other
						  requirements relating to these markings will apply. [Nonretroactive as of
						  January 1, 2000]
(Added 1999)
21.
The value of the load cell verification
						  interval (vmin) must be stated in mass units. In
						  addition to this information, a device may be marked with supplemental
						  representations of vmin. [Nonretroactive as of January
						  1, 2001]
(Added 1999)
22.
Combination vehicle/livestock scales must
						  be marked with both the CLC for vehicle weighing and the section capacity for
						  livestock weighing. All other requirements relative to these markings will
						  apply. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2003]
(Added 2002) (Amended 2003)
Note
: The marked
						  section capacity for livestock weighing may be less than the marked CLC for
						  vehicle weighing.
(Amended 2003)
23.
Required only if a CC has been issued for
						  the device or equipment. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2003]
(G-S.1. Identification (e) Added 2001)
24.
The section capacity shall be prefaced by
						  the words "Section Capacity" or an abbreviation of that term. Abbreviations
						  shall be "Sec Cap" or "Sec C." All capital letters and periods may be used.
						  [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2005]
(Added 2004)
S.6.4.
Railway Track Scales.
- A railway track scale shall be marked with
			 the maximum capacity of each section of the load-receiving element of the
			 scale. Such marking shall be accurately and conspicuously presented on, or
			 adjacent to, the identification or nomenclature plate that is attached to the
			 indicating element of the scale. The nominal capacity marking shall satisfy the
			 following:
(a) For scales manufactured from
			 January 1, 2002, through December 31, 2013:
(1) the nominal capacity of a scale with more
			 than two sections shall not exceed twice its rated section capacity;
			 and
(2) the nominal capacity of a
			 two section scale shall not exceed its rated section capacity.
(b) For scales manufactured on or
			 after January 1, 2014, the nominal scale capacity shall not exceed the lesser
			 of:
(1) the sum of the Weigh Module Capacities
			 as shown in Table S.6.4.M. and Table S.6.4.; or
(2) the Rated Section Capacity (RSC)
			 multiplied by the Number of Sections (Ns) minus the Number of Dead Spaces (Nd)
			 minus 0.5. As a formula this is stated as:
RSC × (Ns - Nd - 0.5); or
(3) 290 300 kg (640 000 lb).
			 (Amended 1988, 2001, 2002, and 2013)
Table S.6.4.M. Railway Track Scale - Weigh Module
						  Capacity
Weigh Module Length (meters)
Weigh Module Capacity (kilograms)
[LESS THAN] 1.5
36 300
1.5 to [LESS THAN] 3.0
72 600
3.0 to [LESS THAN] 4.5
108 900
4.5 to [LESS THAN] 7.0
145 100
7.0 to [LESS THAN] 9.0
168 700
9.0 to [LESS THAN] 10.5
192 300
10.5 to [LESS THAN] 12.0
234 100
12.0 to [LESS THAN] 17.0
257 600
Note: The capacity of a particular module is based on
						  its length as shown above. To determine the "sum of the weigh module
						  capacities" referenced in paragraph S.6.4.(b)(1): (1) determine the length of
						  each individual weigh module in the scale; (2) find its corresponding "weigh
						  module capacity" in the table above; and (3) add all of the individual weigh
						  module capacities."
(Table Added 2013)
Table S.6.4. Railway Track Scale - Weigh Module
						  Capacity
Weigh Module Length (feet)
Weigh Module Capacity (pounds)
[LESS THAN] 5
80 000
5 to [LESS THAN] 10
160 000
10 to [LESS THAN] 15
240 000
15 to [LESS THAN] 23
320 000
23 to [LESS THAN] 29
372 000
29 to [LESS THAN] 35
424 000
35 to [LESS THAN] 40
516 000
40 to [LESS THAN] 56
568 000
Note: The capacity of a particular module is based on
						  its length as shown above. To determine the "sum of the weigh module
						  capacities" referenced in paragraph S.6.4.(b)(1): (1) determine the length of
						  each individual weigh module in the scale; (2) find its corresponding "weigh
						  module capacity" in the table above; and (3) add all of the individual weigh
						  module capacities."
(Table Added 2013)
S.6.5.
Livestock Scales.
- A
			 livestock scale manufactured prior to January 1, 1989, or after January 1,
			 2003, shall be marked with the maximum capacity of each section of the
			 load-receiving element of the scale. Livestock scales manufactured between
			 January 1, 1989, and January 1, 2003, shall be marked with either the
			 Concentrated Load Capacity (CLC) or the Section Capacity. Such marking shall be
			 accurately and conspicuously presented on, or adjacent to the identification or
			 nomenclature plate that is attached to the indicating element of the scale.
The nominal capacity of a scale with more than two sections shall not
			 exceed twice its rated section capacity. The nominal capacity of a two-section
			 scale shall not exceed its rated section capacity.
*
[*Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2003]
(Added 2002)
Also see Note 14 in Table S.6.3.b. Notes for Table
				S.6.3.a.
S.6.6.
Counting Feature, Minimum Individual Piece Weight, and Minimum Sample Piece
			 Count.
- A Class I or Class II prescription scale with an operational
			 counting feature shall be marked with the minimum individual piece weight and
			 minimum number of pieces used in the sample to establish an individual piece
			 weight.
(Added 2003)
N.
Notes
N.1.
Test Procedures.
N.1.1.
Increasing-Load Test.
-
			 The increasing-load test shall be conducted on all scales with the test loads
			 approximately centered on the load-receiving element of the scale, except on a
			 scale having a nominal capacity greater than the total available known test
			 load. When the total test load is less than the nominal capacity, the test load
			 is used to greatest advantage by concentrating it, within prescribed load
			 limits, over the main load supports of the scale.
N.1.2.
Decreasing-Load Test (Automatic
			 Indicating Scales).
- The decreasing-load test shall be conducted with
			 the test load approximately centered on the load-receiving element of the
			 scale.
N.1.2.1.
Scales Marked I, II,
			 III, or IIII.
- Except for portable wheel load weighers, decreasing-load
			 tests shall be conducted on scales marked I, II, III or IIII and with "n" equal
			 to or greater than 1000 with test loads equal to the maximum test load at each
			 tolerance value. For example, on a Class III scale, at test loads equal to 4000
			 d, 2000 d, and 500 d; for scales with n less than 1000, the test load shall be
			 equal to one-half of the maximum load applied in the increasing-load test.
			 (Also see Table 6. Maintenance Tolerances.)
(Amended 1998)
N.1.2.2.
All Other Scales.
- On
			 all other scales, except for portable wheel load weighers, the decreasing-load
			 test shall be conducted with a test load equal to one-half of the maximum load
			 applied in the increasing-load test.
(Amended 1998)
N.1.3.
Shift Test.
N.1.3.1.
Dairy-Product Test Scales.
- A shift test shall be conducted with a test load of 18 g successively
			 positioned at all points on which a weight might reasonably be placed in the
			 course of normal use of the scale.
N.1.3.2.
Equal-Arm Scales.
- A
			 shift test shall be conducted with a half-capacity test load centered
			 successively at four points positioned equidistance between the center and the
			 front, left, back, and right edges of each pan as shown in the diagrams below.
			 An equal test load shall be centered on the other pan.
Click here
				to view image
N.1.3.3.
Vehicle Scales, Axle-Load
			 Scales, and Livestock Scales.
N.1.3.3.1.
Vehicle Scales, Axle-Load
			 Scales, and Combination Vehicle/Livestock Scales.
(a)
Minimum Shift Test.
- At
			 least one shift test shall be conducted with a minimum test load of 12.5 % of
			 scale capacity, which may be performed anywhere on the load-receiving element
			 using the prescribed test patterns and maximum test loads specified below.
			 (Combination Vehicle/Livestock Scales shall also be tested consistent with
			 N.1.3.3.2. Prescribed Test Pattern and Test Loads for Livestock Scales with
			 More Than Two Sections and Combination Vehicle/Livestock Scales.)
(Amended 1991, 2000, and 2003)
(b)
Prescribed Test Pattern and Loading
			 for Vehicle Scales, Axle-Load Scales, and Combination Vehicle/Livestock Scales.
- The normal prescribed test pattern shall be an area of 1.2 m (4 ft) in
			 length and 3.0 m (10 ft) in width or the width of the scale platform, whichever
			 is less. Multiple test patterns may be utilized when loaded in accordance with
			 paragraph (c), (d), or (e) as applicable. An example of a possible test pattern
			 is shown in the diagram below.
(Amended 1997, 2001, and 2003)
Click here
				to view image
(c)
Loading Precautions for Vehicle
			 Scales, Axle-Load Scales, and Combination Vehicle/Livestock Scales.
-
			 When loading the scale for testing, one side of the test pattern shall be
			 loaded to no more than half of the concentrated load capacity or test load
			 before loading the other side. The area covered by the test load may be less
			 than 1.2 m (4 ft) × 3.0 m (10 ft) or the width of the scale platform,
			 whichever is less; for test patterns less than 1.2 m (4 ft) in length the
			 maximum loading shall meet the formula: [(wheel base of test cart or length of
			 test load divided by 48 in) × 0.9 × CLC]. The maximum test load
			 applied to each test pattern shall not exceed the concentrated load capacity of
			 the scale. When the test pattern exceeds 1.2 m (4 ft), the maximum test load
			 applied shall not exceed the concentrated load capacity times the largest "r"
			 factor in Table UR.3.2.1. Span Maximum Load for the length of the area covered
			 by the test load. For load-receiving elements installed prior to January 1,
			 1989, the rated section capacity may be substituted for concentrated load
			 capacity to determine maximum loading. An example of a possible test pattern is
			 shown above.
(Amended 1997 and 2003)
(d)
Multiple Pattern Loading.
-
			 To test to the nominal capacity, multiple patterns may be simultaneously loaded
			 in a manner consistent with the method of use.
(e)
Other Designs.
- Special
			 design scales and those that are wider than 3.7 m (12 ft) shall be tested in a
			 manner consistent with the method of use but following the principles described
			 above.
(Amended 1988, 1991, 1997, 2000, 2001, and 2003)
(Amended 2003)
N.1.3.3.2.
Prescribed Test Pattern and
			 Test Loads for Livestock Scales with More Than Two Sections and Combination
			 Vehicle/Livestock Scales.
- A minimum test load of 5 000 kg (10 000 lb)
			 or one-half of the rated section capacity, whichever is less, shall be placed,
			 as nearly as possible, successively over each main load support as shown in the
			 diagram below. For livestock scales manufactured between January 1, 1989, and
			 January 1, 2003, the required loading shall be no greater than one-half CLC.
			 (Two-section livestock scales shall be tested consistent with N.1.3.7. All
			 Other Scales Except Crane Scales, Hanging Scales, Hopper Scales, Wheel-Load
			 Weighers, and Portable Axle-Load Weighers.)
Click here
				to view image
[]= Load Bearing Point (Added 2003)
N.1.3.3.3.
Prescribed Test Patterns
			 and Test Loads for Two-Section Livestock Scales.
A shift test shall be
			 conducted using the following prescribed test loads and test patterns, provided
			 the shift test load does not exceed one-half the rated section capacity or
			 one-half the rated concentrated load capacity whichever is applicable, using
			 either:
(a) A one-half nominal capacity test
			 load centered as nearly as possible, successively at the center of each quarter
			 of the load-receiving element as shown in N.1.3.7. All Other Scales Except
			 Crane Scales, Hanging Scales, Hopper Scales, Wheel-Load Weighers, and Portable
			 Axle-Load Weighers Figure 1; or
(b)
			 A one-quarter nominal capacity test load centered as nearly as possible,
			 successively over each main load support as shown in N.1.3.7. All Other Scales
			 Except Crane Scales, Hanging Scales, Hopper Scales, Wheel-Load Weighers, and
			 Portable Axle-Load Weighers Figure 2.
(Added 2007)
N.1.3.4.
Railway Track Scales Weighing
			 Individual Cars in Single Drafts.
A shift test shall be conducted with
			 at least two different test loads, if available, distributed over, to the right
			 and left of, each pair of main levers or other weighing elements supporting
			 each section of the scale.
N.1.3.5.
Monorail Scales, Static Test.
- A shift test shall be conducted
			 with a test load equal to the largest load that can be anticipated to be
			 weighed in a given installation, but never less than one-half scale capacity.
			 The load shall be placed successively on the right end, the left end, and the
			 center of the live rail.
(Added 1985)
N.1.3.5.1.
Dynamic Monorail Weighing
			 Systems.
- Dynamic tests with livestock carcasses or portions of
			 carcasses shall be conducted during normal plant production. No less than 20
			 test loads using carcasses or portions of carcasses of the type normally
			 weighed shall be used in the dynamic test. If the plant conveyor chain does not
			 space or prevent the carcasses or portions of carcasses from touching one
			 another, dynamic tests shall not be conducted until this condition has been
			 corrected.
All carcasses or portions of carcasses shall be individually
				weighed statically on either the same scale being tested dynamically or another
				monorail scale with the same or smaller divisions and in close proximity. (The
				scale selected for static weighing of the carcasses or portions of carcasses
				shall first be tested statically with certified test weights that have been
				properly protected from the harsh environment of the packing plant to ensure
				they maintain accuracy.)
If the scale being tested is used for weighing freshly
				slaughtered animals (often referred to as a "hot scale"), care must be taken to
				get a static weighment as quickly as possible before or following the dynamic
				weighment to avoid loss due to shrink. If multiple dynamic tests are conducted
				using the same carcasses or portions of carcasses, static weights shall be
				obtained before and after multiple dynamic tests. If the carcass or portion of
				a carcass changes weight between static tests, the amount of weight change
				shall be taken into account, or the carcass or portion of a carcass shall be
				disregarded for tolerance purposes.
Note:
For a dynamic monorail test, the reference
				scale shall comply with the principles in the Fundamental Considerations
				paragraph 3.2. Tolerances for Standards.
(Added 1996) (Amended 1999 and 2007)
N.1.3.6.
Vehicle On-Board Weighing
			 Systems.
- The shift test for a vehicle on-board weighing system shall
			 be conducted in a manner consistent with its normal use. For systems that weigh
			 as part of the lifting cycle, the center of gravity of the load may be shifted
			 in the vertical direction as well as from side to side. In other cases, the
			 center of gravity may be moved to the extremes of the load-receiving element
			 using loads of a magnitude that reflect normal use (i.e., the load for the
			 shift test may exceed one-half scale capacity), and may, in some cases, be
			 equal to the capacity of the scale. The shift test may be conducted when the
			 weighing system is out of level to the extent that the weighing system remains
			 operational.
(Added 1992)
N.1.3.7.
All Other Scales Except Crane
			 Scales, Hanging Scales, Hopper Scales, Wheel-Load Weighers, and Portable
			 Axle-Load Weighers.
- A shift test shall be conducted using the
			 following prescribed test loads and test patterns. A single field standard
			 weight used as the prescribed test load shall be applied centrally in the
			 prescribed test pattern. When multiple field standard weights are used as the
			 prescribed test load, the load shall be applied in a consistent pattern in the
			 shift test positions throughout the test and applied in a manner that does not
			 concentrate the load in a test pattern that is less than when that same load is
			 a single field standard weight on the load-receiving element.
(a) For scales with a nominal capacity of 500
			 kg (1000 lb) or less, a shift test shall be conducted using a one-third nominal
			 capacity test load (defined as test weights in amounts of at least 30 % of
			 scale capacity, but not to exceed 35 % of scale capacity) centered as nearly as
			 possible at the center of each quadrant of the load-receiving element using the
			 prescribed test pattern as shown in Figure 1.
(b) For scales with a nominal capacity
			 greater than 500 kg (1000 lb), a shift test may be conducted by either using a
			 one-third nominal capacity test load (defined as test weights in amounts of at
			 least 30 % of scale capacity, but not to exceed 35 % of scale capacity)
			 centered as nearly as possible at the center of each quadrant of the
			 load-receiving element using the prescribed test pattern as shown in Figure 1,
			 or by using a one-quarter nominal capacity test load centered as nearly as
			 possible, successively, over each corner of the load-receiving element using
			 the prescribed test pattern as shown in Figure 2.
Click here
				to view image
Click
				here to view image
(Added 2003)
(Amended 1987, 2003, and 2007)
N.1.4.
Sensitivity
			 Test.
- A sensitivity test shall be conducted on nonautomatic-indicating
			 (weighbeam)
scales only, with the weighing device in equilibrium at
				zero-load and at maximum test load. The test shall be conducted by increasing
				or decreasing the test load in an amount equal to the applicable value
				specified in T.2. Sensitivity Requirement (SR) or T.N.6. Sensitivity.
N.1.5.
Discrimination Test.
-
A discrimination
			 test shall be conducted on all automatic indicating scales
with the weighing device in equilibrium at or near zero
				load and at or near maximum test load, and under controlled conditions in which
				environmental factors are reduced to the extent that they will not affect the
				results obtained. For scales equipped with an Automatic Zero-Tracking Mechanism
				(AZT), the discrimination test may be conducted at a range outside of the AZT
				range. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
(Added 1985) (Amended 2004)
N.1.5.1.
Digital Device.
- On a
			 digital device, this test is conducted from just below the lower edge of the
			 zone of uncertainty for increasing load tests, or from just above the upper
			 edge of the zone of uncertainty for decreasing-load tests.
N.1.6.
RFI Susceptibility Tests, Field
			 Evaluation.
- An RFI test shall be conducted at a given installation
			 when the presence of RFI has been verified and characterized if those
			 conditions are considered "usual and customary."
(Added 1986)
N.1.7.
Ratio Test.
- A ratio
			 test shall be conducted on all scales employing counterpoise weights and on
			 nonautomatic-indicating equal-arm scales.
N.1.8.
Material Tests.
- A
			 material test shall be conducted on all customer-operated bulk weighing systems
			 for recycled materials using bulk material for which the device is used. Insert
			 into the device, in a normal manner, several accurately pre-weighed samples
			 (free of foreign material) in varying amounts approximating average
			 drafts.
N.1.9.
Zero-Load
			 Balance Change.
- A zero-load balance change test shall be conducted on
			 all scales after the removal of any test load. The zero-load balance should not
			 change by more than the minimum tolerance applicable. (Also see G-UR.4.2.
			 Abnormal Performance.)
N.1.10.
Counting Feature Test.
- A test of the counting function shall be
			 conducted on all Class I and
Class II prescription scales having an active counting feature
				used in "legal for trade" applications. The test should verify that the scale
				will not accept a sample with less than either the minimum sample piece count
				or the minimum sample weight of 30 e. Counting feature accuracy should be
				verified at a minimum of two test loads. Verification of the count calculations
				shall be based upon the weight indication of the test load.
Note:
(1)
			 The minimum sample weight is equal to the marked minimum individual piece
			 weight times the marked minimum sample piece count.
(2) Test load as used in this section refers
			 to actual calibration test weights selected from an appropriate test weight
			 class.
(Added 2003)
N.1.11.
Substitution Test.
- In
			 the substitution test procedure, material or objects are substituted for known
			 test weights, or a combination of known test weights and previously quantified
			 material or objects, using the scale under test as a comparator. Additional
			 test weights or other known test loads may be added to the known test load to
			 evaluate higher weight ranges on the scale.
(Added 2003)
N.1.12.
Strain-Load Test.
- In
			 the strain-load test procedure, an unknown quantity of material or objects are
			 used to establish a reference load or tare to which test weights or
			 substitution test loads are added.
(Added 2003)
N.2.
Verification (Testing) Standards.
- Field standard weights used in verifying weighing devices shall comply
			 with requirements of NIST Handbook 105-Series standards (or other suitable and
			 designated standards) or the tolerances expressed in Fundamental
			 Considerations, paragraph 3.2. (i.e., one-third of the smallest tolerance
			 applied).
(Amended 1986)
N.3.
Minimum Test Weights and Test
			 Loads.
- The minimum test weights and test loads for in-service tests
			 (except railway track scales) are shown in Table 4. (Also see Footnote 2 in
			 Table 4. Minimum Test Weights and Test Loads.)
(Added 1984) (Amended 1988)
N.3.1.
Minimum Test-Weight Load and
			 Tests for Railway Track Scales.
(Amended 1990 and 2012)
N.3.1.1.
Initial and Subsequent Tests.
- The test-weight load shall be not less than 35 000 kg (80 000 lb). A
			 strain-load test conducted up to the used capacity of the weighing system is
			 recommended.
(Added 1990) (Amended 2012)
N.3.1.2.
Interim Test.
- An
			 Interim Test may be used to return a railway track scale into temporary service
			 following repairs that could affect the accuracy of the weighing system
			 providing all of the following conditions are met:
(a) a test weight load of not less than 13
			 500 kg (30 000 lb) shall be used;
(b) a shift (section) test shall be conducted
			 using a test-weight load of not less than 13 500 kg (30 000 lb);
(c) a strain-load test shall be conducted up
			 to at least 25 % of scale capacity;
(d) all test results shall be within
			 applicable tolerances; and
(e) the
			 official with statutory authority shall be immediately notified when scales are
			 repaired and placed in temporary service with an Interim Test. The length of
			 temporary service following repair is at the discretion of the official with
			 statutory authority.
(Added 1990) (Amended 2012)
N.3.1.3.
Enforcement Action for
			 Inaccuracy.
- To take enforcement action on a scale that is found to be
			 inaccurate, a minimum test load of 13 500 kg (30 000 lb) must be used.
(Added 1990)
Table 4. Minimum Test Weights and Test
						  Loads1
Devices in Metric Units
Devices in U.S. Customary Units
Device Capacity (kg)
Minimums (in terms of device
						  capacity)
Device Capacity (lb)
Minimums (in terms of device
						  capacity)
Test Weights (greater of)
Test
Loads2
Test Weights (greater of)
Test
Loads2
0 to 150 kg
100 %
0 to 300 lb
100 %
151 to 1 500 kg
25 % or 150 kg
75 %
301 to 3 000 lb
25 % or 300 lb
75 %
1 501 to 20 000 kg
12.5 % or 500 kg
50 %
3001 to 40 000 lb
12.5 % or 1 000 lb
50 %
20 001 kg+
12.5 % or 5 000 kg
25 %3
40 001 lb+
12.5 % or 10 000 lb
25 %3
Where practicable:
* Test weights to dial face capacity, 1000 d, or test
						  load to used capacity, if greater than minimums specified.
* During initial verification, a scale should be tested
						  to capacity.
1 If the amount of test
						  weight in Table 4 combined with the load on the scale would result in an unsafe
						  condition, then the appropriate load will be determined by the official with
						  statutory authority.
2 The term "test load" means
						  the sum of the combination of field standard test weights and any other applied
						  load used in the conduct of a test using substitution test methods. Not more
						  than three substitutions shall be used during substitution testing, after which
						  the tolerances for strain load tests shall be applied to each set of test
						  loads.
3 The scale shall be tested
						  from zero to at least 12.5 % of scale capacity using known test weights and
						  then to at least 25 % of scale capacity using either a substitution or strain
						  load test that utilizes known test weights of at least 12.5 % of scale
						  capacity. Whenever practical, a strain load test should be conducted to the
						  used capacity of the scale. When a strain load test is conducted, the
						  tolerances apply only to the test weights or substitution test loads.
(Amended 1988, 1989, 1994, and 2003)
Note:
GIPSA requires devices subject to
						  their inspection to be tested to at least "used capacity," which is calculated
						  based on the platform area of the scale and a weight factor assigned to the
						  species of animal weighed on the scale. "Used capacity" is calculated using the
						  formula:
Used Scale Capacity = Scale Platform Area x Species
						  Weight Factor
Where species weight factor = 540
						  kg/m2 (110 lb/ft2) for
						  cattle, 340 kg/m2 (70
						  lb/ft2) for calves and hogs, and 240
						  kg/m2 (50 lb/ft2) for
						  sheep and lambs.
N.3.2.
Field Standard Weight Carts.
- Field Standard Weight Carts that comply with the tolerances expressed
			 in Fundamental Considerations, paragraph 3.2. (i.e., one-third of the smallest
			 tolerance applied) may be included as part of the minimum required test load
			 (Also see Table 4. Minimum Test Weights and Test Loads.) for shift tests and
			 other test procedures.
(Added 2004)
N.4.
Coupled-in-Motion Railroad
			 Weighing Systems.
30
N.4.1.
Weighing Systems Used to Weigh
			 Trains of Less Than Ten Cars.
- These weighing systems shall be tested
			 using a consecutive-car test train consisting of the number of cars weighed in
			 the normal operation run over the weighing system a minimum of five times in
			 each mode of operation following the final calibration.
(Added 1990) (Amended 1992)
N.4.2.
Weighing Systems Placed in
			 Service Prior to January 1, 1991, and Used to Weigh Trains of
Ten or More Cars.
- The minimum test train shall
				be a consecutive-car test train of no less than ten cars run over the scale a
				minimum of five times in each mode of operation following final
				calibration.
(Added 1990) (Amended 1992)
N.4.3.
Weighing Systems Placed in
			 Service on or After January 1, 1991, and Used to Weigh Trains
of Ten or More Cars.
(a) These weighing systems shall be tested
			 using a consecutive-car test train of no less than ten cars run over the scale
			 a minimum of five times in each mode of operation following final calibration;
			 or
(b) if the official with
			 statutory authority determines it necessary, the As-Used Test Procedures
			 outlined in N.4.3.1. shall be used.
(Added 1990) (Amended 1992)
N.4.3.1.
As-Used Test Procedures
- A weighing system shall be tested in a manner that represents the
			 normal method of operation and length(s) of trains normally weighed. The
			 weighing systems may be tested using either a:
(a) consecutive-car test train of a length
			 typical of train(s) normally weighed; or
(b) distributed-car test train of a length
			 typical of train(s) normally weighed.
However, a consecutive-car test train of a shorter length may
				be used, provided that initial verification test results for the shorter
				consecutive-car test train agree with the test results for the distributed-car
				or full-length consecutive-car test train as specified in N.4.3.1.1. Initial
				Verification.
The official with statutory authority shall be responsible for
				determining the minimum test train length to be used on subsequent
				tests.
(Added 1990) (Amended 1992)
30 A test weight car that is
				representative of one of the types of cars typically weighed on the scale under
				test may be used wherever reference weight cars are specified. (Added
				1991)
N.4.3.1.1.
Initial Verification.
- Initial verification tests should be performed
			 on any new weighing system and whenever either the track structure or the
			 operating procedure changes. If a consecutive-car test train of length shorter
			 than trains normally weighed is to be used for subsequent verification, the
			 shorter consecutive-car test train results shall be compared either to a
			 distributed-car or to a consecutive-car test train of length(s) typical of
			 train(s) normally weighed.
The difference between the total train weight of the train(s)
				representing the normal method of operation and the weight of the shorter
				consecutive-car test train shall not exceed 0.15 %. If the difference in test
				results exceeds 0.15 %, the length of the shorter consecutive-car test train
				shall be increased until agreement within 0.15 % is achieved. Any adjustments
				to the weighing system based upon the use of a shorter consecutive-car test
				train shall be offset to correct the bias that was observed between the
				full-length train test and the shorter consecutive-car test train.
(Added 1990) (Amended 1992 and 1993)
N.4.3.1.2.
Subsequent Verification.
- The test train may consist of either a consecutive-car test train with
			 a length not less than that used in initial verification, or a distributed-car
			 test train representing the number of cars used in the normal operation.
(Added 1990)
N.4.3.1.3.
Distributed-Car Test
			 Trains.
(a) The length of the train
			 shall be typical of trains that are normally weighed.
(b) The reference weight cars shall be split
			 into three groups, each group consisting of ten cars or 10 % of the train
			 length, whichever is less.
(Amended 1991)
(c) The test groups shall be placed near the
			 front, around the middle, and near the end of the train.
(d) Following the final adjustment, the
			 distributed-car test train shall be run over the scale at least three times or
			 shall produce 50 weight values, whichever is greater.
(e) The weighing system shall be tested in
			 each mode of operation. (Added 1990) (Amended 1992)
N.4.3.1.4.
Consecutive-Car Test
			 Trains.
(a) A consecutive-car test
			 train shall consist of at least ten cars.
(b) If the consecutive-car test train
			 consists of between ten and twenty cars, inclusive, it shall be run over the
			 scale a minimum of five times in each mode of operation following the final
			 calibration.
(c) If the
			 consecutive-car test train consists of more than twenty cars, it shall be run
			 over the scale a minimum of three times in each mode of operation.
(Added 1990) (Amended 1992)
N.5.
Uncoupled-in-Motion Railroad Weighing System.
- An uncoupled-in-motion
			 scale shall be tested statically before being tested in motion by passing
			 railroad reference weight cars over the scale. When an uncoupled-in-motion
			 railroad weighing system is tested, the car speed and the direction of travel
			 shall be the same as when the scale is in normal use. The minimum in-motion
			 test shall be three reference weight cars passed over the scale three times.
			 The cars shall be selected to cover the range of weights that are normally
			 weighed on the system and to reflect the types of cars normally weighed.
(Added 1993)
N.6.
Nominal Capacity of Prescription
			 Scales.
- The nominal capacity of a prescription scale shall be assumed
			 to be one-half apothecary ounce, unless otherwise marked. (Applicable only to
			 scales not marked with an accuracy class.)
T.
Tolerances Applicable to Devices
			 not Marked I, II, III, III L, or IIII
T.1.
Tolerance Values.
T.1.1.
General.
- The tolerances
			 applicable to devices not marked with an accuracy class shall have the
			 tolerances applied as specified in Table T.1.1. Tolerances for Unmarked Scales.
(Amended 1990)
T.1.2.
Postal and Parcel Post Scales.
- The tolerances for postal and parcel post scales are given in
Table T.1.1. Tolerances for Unmarked Scales and Table 5.
				Maintenance and Acceptance Tolerances for Unmarked Postal and Parcel Post
				Scales.
(Amended 1990)
Ta
b
le T.1.1.
						  Tol
e
rances for Un
m
arked
						  Scales
Type of Device
Subcategory
Minimum Tolerance
Acceptance Tolerance
Maintenance Tolerance
Decreasing-Load
Multiplier
1
Other Applicable Requirements
Vehicle, axle-load, livestock, railway track (weighing
						  statically), crane, and hopper (other than grain hopper)
Class III L, T.N.3.1 (Table 6) and T.N.3.2.
1.0
T.N.2., T.N.3., T.N.4.1.,
T.N.4.2., T.N.4.3.,
T.N.4.4., T.N.5.,
T.N.7.2.,
T.N.8.1.4.4
,
T.N.9.
Grain test scales
n [LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO] 10 000 n [GREATER THAN] 10
						  000
Class III, T.N.3.1. (Table 6) and T.N.3.2. Class II,
						  T.N.3.1. (Table 6) and T.N.3.2.
1.0
T.N.8.1.4.4
,
						  T.N.9.
Railway track scales weighing in motion
T.N.3.6. except that for T.N.3.6.2. (a), no single
						  error shall exceed four times the maintenance tolerance.
1.0
T.N.8.1.4.4
,
						  T.N.9.
Monorail scales, in-motion
T.N.3.8.
1.0
T.N.8.1.4.
4
,
						  T.N.9.
Customer-operated bulk-weighing systems for recycled
						  materials
± 5 % of applied material test load.
Average error on 10 or more test loads [LESS THAN OR
						  EQUAL TO]
2.5 %.
1.0
T.N.8.1.4.4
,
						  T.N.9.
Wheel-load weighers and portable axle-load
						  scales
Tested individually or in
						  pairs2
0.5 d or 50
lb,
whichever is greater
1 % of test load
2 % of test load
1.53
T.N.8.1.4.4
,
						  T.N.9.
Prescription scales
0.1 grain (6 mg)
0.1 % of test load
0.1 % of test load
1.5
T.N.8.1.4.4
,
						  T.N.9.
Jewelers' scales
Graduated
0.5 d
0.05 % of test load
0.05 % of test load
1.5
T.N.8.1.4.4
,
						  T.N.9.
Ungraduated
Sensitivity or smallest weight,
whichever is less
Dairy-product test scale
Loads [LESS THAN] 18 g 18 g load
0.2 grain 0.2 grain
0.2 grain 0.3 grain
0.2 grain 0.5 grain
1.5
T.N.8.1.4.4
,
						  T.N.9.
Postal and parcel post scales designed/used to weigh
						  loads [LESS THAN] 2 lb
Loads [LESS THAN] 2 lb
15 grain, 1 g, 
						  1/32 oz,
						  0.03 oz, or
0.002 lb
15 grain, 1 g,
1/32
						  oz,
0.03 oz, or 0.002 lb
15 grain, 1 g,
1/32
						  oz, 0.03 oz,
or 0.002 lb
1.5
T.N.8.1.4.4
,
						  T.N.9.
Loads
[LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO]
2 lb
Table 5
Table 5
Table 5
Other postal and parcel post scales
Table 5
Table 5
Table 5
1.5
T.N.8.1.4.4
,
						  T.N.9.
All other scales (including grain hopper)
n [GREATER THAN] 5000
0.5 d or 0.05 % of scale
capacity,
whichever is less
0.05 % of test load
0.1 % of test load
1.5
T.N.2.5., T.N.4.1.,
T.N.4.2., T.N.4.3.,
T.N.5., T.N.7.2.,
T.N.8.1.4.4
,
						  T.N.9.
n [LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO] 5000
Class III, T.N.3.1., Table 6 and T.N.3.2.
1.0
T.N.2., T.N.3., T.N.4.1.,
T.N.4.2., T.N.4.3.,
T.N.5., T.N.7.2.,
T.N.8.1.4.
4
,
						  T.N.9.
1 The decreasing load test
						  applies only to automatic indicating scales.
2 If marked and tested as a
						  pair, the tolerance shall be applied to the sum of the indication.
3 The decreasing load test
						  does not apply to portable wheel load weighers.
4
T.N.8.1.4.
						  Operating Temperature. is nonretroactive and effective for unmarked devices
						  manufactured as of January 1, 1981.
Table 5.
Maintenance and Acceptance Tolerances for
						  Unmarked
Postal and Parcel Post Scales
Scale Capacity
Test Loads
Maintenance Tolerance
(±)
Acceptance Tolerance
(±)
(lb)
(lb)
(oz)
(lb)
(oz)
(lb)
0 to 4, inclusive*
0 to 1, inclusive over 1
1/32 
						  1/8
0.002 0.008
1/32 
						  1/16
0.002 0.004
over 4*
0 to 7, inclusive 7+ to 24, inclusive 24+ to 30,
						  inclusive
3/16 ½
0.012 0.024 0.030
3/16 
						  3/16 ¼
0.012 0.012 0.015
over 30
0.1 % of
Test Load
0.05 % of
Test Load
*Also see Table T.1.1. Tolerances for Unmarked Scales
						  for scales designed and/or used to weigh loads less than 2 lb.
T.2.
Sensitivity Requirement
			 (SR).
T.2.1.
Application.
- The sensitivity requirement (SR) is applicable to all
			 nonautomatic-indicating scales not marked I, II, III, III L, or IIII, and is
			 the same whether acceptance or maintenance tolerances apply.
T.2.2.
General.
- Except for
			 scales specified in paragraphs T.2.3. Prescription Scales through T.2.8.
Railway Track Scales: 2 d, 0.2 % of the scale capacity, or 40
				lb, whichever is least.
T.2.3.
Prescription Scales.
6 mg
			 (0.1 grain).
T.2.4.
Jewelers'
			 Scales.
T.2.4.1.
With One-Half
			 Ounce Capacity or Less.
- 6 mg (0.1 grain).
T.2.4.2.
With More Than One-Half Ounce
			 Capacity.
- 1 d or 0.05 % of the scale capacity, whichever is
			 less.
T.2.5.
Dairy-Product Test Scales.
T.2.5.1.
Used in Determining Butterfat
			 Content.
- 32 mg (0.5 grain).
T.2.5.2.
Used in Determining Moisture
			 Content.
- 19 mg (0.3 grain).
T.2.6.
Grain Test Scales.
- The
			 sensitivity shall be as stated in T.N.6. Sensitivity.
(Amended 1987)
T.2.7.
Vehicle, Axle-Load, Livestock,
			 and Animal Scales.
T.2.7.1.
Equipped With Balance Indicators.
- 1 d.
T.2.7.2.
Not Equipped With Balance
			 Indicators.
- 2 d or 0.2 % of the scale capacity, whichever is
			 less.
T.2.8.
Railway Track Scales.
- 3 d or 100 lb, whichever is
			 less.
T.3.
Sensitivity Requirement, Equilibrium Change Required.
The minimum change in equilibrium with test loads equal to the
				values specified in T.2. Sensitivity Requirements (SR) shall be as
				follows:
(a)
Scale with a Trig
			 Loop but without a Balance Indicator.
- The position of rest of the
			 weighbeam shall change from the center of the trig loop to the top or bottom,
			 as the case may be.
(b)
Scale
			 with a Single Balance Indicator and Having a Nominal Capacity of Less Than 250
			 kg (500 lb).
- The position of rest of the indicator shall change 1.0 mm
			 (0.04 in) or one division on the graduated scale, whichever is
			 greater.
(c)
Scale with a
			 Single Balance Indicator and Having a Nominal Capacity of 250 kg (500 lb) or
			 Greater.
- The position of rest of the indicator shall change 6.4 mm
			 (0.25 in) or one division on the graduated scale or the width of the central
			 target area, whichever is greater. However, the indicator on a batching scale
			 shall change 3.2 mm (0.125 in) or one division on the graduated scale,
			 whichever is greater.
(d)
Scale with Two Opposite-Moving Balance Indicators.
- The position
			 of rest of the two indicators moving in opposite directions shall change 1.0 mm
			 (0.04 in) with respect to each other.
(e)
Scale with Neither a Trig Loop nor
			 a Balance Indicator.
- The position of rest of the weighbeam or lever
			 system shall change from the horizontal, or midway between limiting stops, to
			 either limit of motion.
T.N. Tolerances Applicable to Devices Marked I, II, III,
				III L, and IIII.
T.N.1.
Principles.
T.N.1.1.
Design.
- The
			 tolerance for a weighing device is a performance requirement independent of the
			 design principle used.
T.N.1.2.
Accuracy Classes.
- Weighing devices are divided into accuracy
			 classes according to the number of scale divisions (n) and the value of the
			 scale division (d).
T.N.1.3.
Scale Division.
- The tolerance for a weighing device is related to the
			 value of the scale division (d) or the value of the verification scale division
			 (e) and is generally expressed in terms of d or e.
T.N.2.
Tolerance Application.
T.N.2.1.
General.
- The
			 tolerance values are positive (+) and negative (-) with the weighing device
			 adjusted to zero at no load. When tare is in use, the tolerance values are
			 applied from the tare zero reference (zero net weight indication); the
			 tolerance values apply to the net weight indication for any possible tare load
			 using certified test loads.
(Amended 2008)
T.N.2.2.
Type Evaluation Examinations.
- For type evaluation examinations, the tolerance values apply to
			 increasing and decreasing load tests within the temperature, power supply, and
			 barometric pressure limits specified in T.N.8.
T.N.2.3.
Subsequent Verification
			 Examinations.
- For subsequent verification examinations, the tolerance
			 values apply regardless of the influence factors in effect at the time of the
			 conduct of the examination. (Also see G-N.2. Testing with Nonassociated
			 Equipment.)
T.N.2.4.
Multi-Interval and Multiple Range (Variable Division-Value) Scales.
-
			 For multi-interval and multiple range scales, the tolerance values are based on
			 the value of the scale division of the range in use.
T.N.2.5.
Ratio Tests.
- For
			 ratio tests, the tolerance values are 0.75 of the applicable
			 tolerances.
T.N.3.
Tolerance Values.
T.N.3.1.
Maintenance Tolerance Values.
- The maintenance tolerance values
			 are as specified in Table 6. Maintenance Tolerances.
T.N.3.2.
Acceptance Tolerance Values.
- The acceptance tolerance values shall be one-half the maintenance
			 tolerance values.
T.N.3.3.
Wheel-Load Weighers and Portable Axle-Load Weighers of Class IIII.
- The
			 tolerance values are two times the values specified in T.N.3.1. Maintenance
			 Tolerance Values and T.N.3.2. Acceptance Tolerance Values.
(Amended 1986)
T.N.3.4.
Crane and Hopper (Other than
			 Grain Hopper) Scales.
- The maintenance and acceptance tolerances shall
			 be as specified in T.N.3.1. Maintenance Tolerance Values and T.N.3.2.
			 Acceptance Tolerance Values for Class III L, except that the tolerance for
			 crane and construction materials hopper scales shall not be less than 1 d or
			 0.1 % of the scale capacity, whichever is less.
(Amended 1986)
Table 6.
Maintenance Tolerances
(All values in this table are in scale
						  divisions)
Tolerance in Scale Divisions
1
2
3
5
Class
Test Load
I
0 - 50 000
50 001 - 200 000
200 001 +
II
0 - 5 000
5 001 - 20 000
20 001 +
III
0 - 500
501 - 2 000
2 001 - 4 000
4 001 +
IIII
0 - 50
51 - 200
201 - 400
401 +
III L
0 - 500
501 - 1 000
(Add 1 d for each additional 500 d
or fraction thereof)
T.N.3.5.
Separate Main Elements: Load
			 Transmitting Element, Indicating Element, Etc.
- If a main element
			 separate from a complete weighing device is submitted for laboratory type
			 evaluation, the tolerance for the main element is 0.7 that for the complete
			 weighing device. This fraction includes the tolerance attributable to the
			 testing devices used.
(Amended 2015)
T.N.3.6.
Coupled-In-Motion Railroad
			 Weighing Systems.
- The maintenance and acceptance tolerance values for
			 the group of weight values appropriate to the application must satisfy the
			 following conditions:
(Amended 1990 and 1992)
T.N.3.6.1. - For any group of weight values,
			 the difference in the sum of the individual in-motion car weights of the group
			 as compared to the sum of the individual static weights shall not exceed 0.2 %.
(Amended 1990)
T.N.3.6.2. - If a weighing system is used to
			 weigh trains of five or more cars, and if the individual car weights are used,
			 any single weight value within the group must meet the following criteria:
(a) no single error may exceed three times
			 the static maintenance tolerance;
(b) not more than 5 % of the errors may
			 exceed two times the static maintenance tolerance; and
(c) not more than 35 % of the errors may
			 exceed the static maintenance tolerance. (Amended 1990 and 1992)
T.N.3.6.3. - For any group of
			 weight values wherein the sole purpose is to determine the sum of the group,
			 T.N.3.6.1. alone applies.
(Amended 1990)
T.N.3.6.4. - For a weighing system used to
			 weigh trains of less than five cars, no single car weight within the group may
			 exceed the static maintenance tolerance.
(Amended 1990 and 1992)
T.N.3.7.
Uncoupled-in-Motion Railroad
			 Weighing Systems.
- The maintenance and acceptance tolerance values for
			 any single weighment within a group of non-interactive (i.e., uncoupled) loads,
			 the weighment error shall not exceed the static maintenance tolerance.
(Amended 1992)
T.N.3.8.
Dynamic Monorail Weighing
			 System.
- Acceptance tolerance shall be the same as the maintenance
			 tolerance shown in Table 6. Maintenance Tolerances. On a dynamic test of twenty
			 or more individual test loads, 10 % of the individual test loads may be in
			 error, each not to exceed two times the tolerance. The error on the total of
			 the individual test loads shall not exceed ± 0.2 %. (Also see Note in
			 N.1.3.5.1. Dynamic Monorail Weighing Systems.)
For equipment undergoing
			 type evaluation, a tolerance equal to one-half the maintenance tolerance values
			 shown in Table 6. Maintenance Tolerances shall apply. [Nonretroactive January
			 1, 2002]
(Added 1986) (Amended 1999 and 2001)
T.N.3.9.
Materials Test on
			 Customer-Operated Bulk Weighing Systems for Recycled Materials.
- The
			 maintenance and acceptance tolerance shall be ± 5 % of the applied
			 materials test load except that the average error on ten or more test materials
			 test loads shall not exceed ± 2.5 %.
(Added 1986)
T.N.3.10.
Prescription Scales with a
			 Counting Feature.
- In addition to Table 6. Maintenance Tolerances (for
			 weight), the indicated piece count value computed by a Class I or Class II
			 prescription scale counting feature shall comply with the tolerances in Table
			 T.N.3.10. Maintenance and Acceptance Tolerances in Excess and in Deficiency for
			 Count.
Table T.N.3.10.
Maintenance and Acceptance
						  Tolerances
in Excess and in Deficiency for
						  Count
Indication of Count
Tolerance (piece count)
0 to 100
0
101 to 200
1
201 or more
0.5 %
(Added 2003)
T.N.3.11.
Tolerances for Substitution
			 Test.
- Tolerances are applied to the scale based on the substitution
			 test load.
(Added 2003)
T.N.3.12.
Tolerances for Strain-Load
			 Test.
- Tolerances apply only to the test weights or substitution test
			 loads.
(Added 2003)
T.N.4.
Agreement of
			 Indications.
T.N.4.1.
Multiple
			 Indicating/Recording Elements.
- In the case of a scale or weighing
			 system equipped with more than one indicating element or indicating element and
			 recording element combination, where the indicators or indicator/recorder
			 combination are intended to be used independently of one another, tolerances
			 shall be applied independently to each indicator or indicator/recorder
			 combination.
(Amended 1986)
T.N.4.2.
Single Indicating/Recording
			 Element.
- In the case of a scale or weighing system with a single
			 indicating element or an indicating/recording element combination, and equipped
			 with component parts such as unit weights, weighbeam and weights, or multiple
			 weighbeams that can be used in combination to indicate a weight, the difference
			 in the weight value indications of any load shall not be greater than the
			 absolute value of the applicable tolerance for that load, and shall be within
			 tolerance limits.
(Amended 1986)
T.N.4.3.
Single Indicating
			 Element/Multiple Indications.
- In the case of an analog indicating
			 element equipped with two or more indicating means within the same element, the
			 difference in the weight indications for any load other than zero shall not be
			 greater than one-half the value of the scale division (d) and be within
			 tolerance limits.
(Amended 1986)
T.N.4.4.
Shift or Section Tests.
- The range of the results obtained during the conduct of a shift test
			 or a section test shall not exceed the absolute value of the maintenance
			 tolerance applicable and each test result shall be within applicable
			 tolerances.
(Added 1986)
T.N.4.5.
Time Dependence.
- A
			 time dependence test shall be conducted during type evaluation and may be
			 conducted during field verification, provided test conditions remain constant.
(Amended 1989 and 2005)
T.N.4.5.1.
Time Dependence: Class II,
			 III, and IIII Non-automatic Weighing Instruments.
- A non-automatic
			 weighing instrument of Classes II, III, and IIII shall meet the following
			 requirements at constant test conditions. During type evaluation, this test
			 shall be conducted at 20 °C ± 2 °C (68 °F ± 4
			 °F):
(a) When any load is kept on an
			 instrument, the difference between the indication obtained immediately after
			 placing the load and the indication observed during the following 30 minutes
			 shall not exceed 0.5 e. However, the difference between the indication obtained
			 at 15 minutes and the indication obtained at 30 minutes shall not exceed 0.2
			 e.
(b) If the conditions in (a) are
			 not met, the difference between the indication obtained immediately after
			 placing the load on the instrument and the indication observed during the
			 following four hours shall not exceed the absolute value of the maximum
			 permissible error at the load applied.
(Added 2005) (Amended 2006 and 2010)
T.N.4.5.2.
Time Dependence:
			 Class III L Non-automatic Weighing Instruments.
- A non-
automatic weighing instrument of Class III L shall meet the
				following requirements:
(a) When any
			 load is kept on an instrument, the difference between the indication obtained
			 immediately after placing the load and the indication observed during the
			 following 30 minutes shall not exceed 1.5 e. However, the difference between
			 the indication obtained at 15 minutes and the indication obtained at 30 minutes
			 shall not exceed 0.6 e.
(b) If the
			 conditions in (a) are not met, the difference between the indication obtained
			 immediately after placing the load on the instrument and the indication
			 observed during the following four hours shall not exceed the absolute value of
			 the maximum permissible error at the load applied.
(Added 2005) (Amended 2010)
T.N.4.5.3.
Zero Load Return:
			 Non-automatic Weighing Instruments. -
A non-automatic weighing
			 instrument shall meet the following requirements at constant test conditions.
			 During type evaluation, this test shall be conducted at 20 °C ± 2
			 °C (68 °F ± 4 °F). The deviation on returning to zero as
			 soon as the indication has stabilized, after the removal of any load which has
			 remained on the instrument for 30 minutes shall not exceed:
(a) 0.5 e for Class II and IIII
			 devices,
(b) 0.5 e for Class III
			 devices with 4000 or fewer divisions,
(c) 0.83 e for Class III devices with more
			 than 4000 divisions, or
(d)
			 one-half of the absolute value of the applicable tolerance for the applied load
			 for Class III L devices.
For a multi-interval instrument, the deviation shall not exceed
				0.83 e
1
(where
				e
1
is the interval of the first weighing
				segment of the scale).
On a multiple range instrument, the deviation on returning to
				zero from Max
i
(load in the applicable
				weighing range) shall not exceed 0.83 e
i
(interval of the weighing range). Furthermore, after returning to zero
				from any load greater than Max
1
(capacity
				of the first weighing range) and immediately after switching to the lowest
				weighing range, the indication near zero shall not vary by more than
				e
1
(interval of the first weighing range)
				during the following five minutes.
(Added 2010)
T.N.4.6.
Time Dependence (Creep) for
			 Load Cells during Type Evaluation.
- A load cell (force transducer)
			 marked with an accuracy class shall meet the following requirements at constant
			 test conditions:
(a)
Permissible
			 Variations of Readings
. - With a constant maximum load for the measuring
			 range (D
max
) between 90 % and 100 % of
			 maximum capacity (E
max
), applied to the
			 load cell, the difference between the initial reading and any reading obtained
			 during the next 30 minutes shall not exceed the absolute value of the maximum
			 permissible error (mpe) for the applied load. (Also see Table T.N.4.6. Maximum
			 Permissible Error (mpe) for Load Cells During Type Evaluation.) The difference
			 between the reading obtained at 20 minutes and the reading obtained at 30
			 minutes shall not exceed 0.15 times the absolute value of the mpe. (Also see
			 Table T.N.4.6. Maximum Permissible Error (mpe) for Load Cells During Type
			 Evaluation)
(b)
Apportionment Factors.
- The mpe for creep shall be determined from
			 Table T.N.4.6. Maximum Permissible Error (mpe) for Load Cells During Type
			 Evaluation using the following apportionment factors
			 (pLC):
pLC = 0.7 for load cells marked with S
				(single load cell applications),
pLC = 1.0 for load cells marked with M
				(multiple load cell applications), and pLC = 0.5 for
				Class III L load cells marked with S or M.
(Added 2005, Amended 2006)
Table T.N.4.6. Maximum Permissible Error (mpe)*
						  for Load Cells During Type Evaluation
mpe in Load Cell Verifications Divisions (v) =
						  pLC x Basic Tolerance in v
Class
pLC x 0.5 v
pLC x 1.0 v
pLC x 1.5 v
I
0 - 50 000 v
200 000 50 001 v -
v
200 001 v +
II
0 - 5 000 v
5 001 v - 20 000 v
20 001 v +
III
0 - 500 v
501 v - 2 000 v
2 001 v +
IIII
0 - 50 v
51 v - 200 v
201 v +
III L
0 - 500 v
501 v - 1 000 v
(Add 0.5 v to the basic tolerance for each additional
						  500 v or fraction thereof up to a maximum load of 10 000 v)
v represents the load cell verification interval
pLC represents the apportionment
						  factors applied to the basic tolerance
pLC = 0.7 for load cells marked
						  with S (single load cell applications)
pLC = 1.0 for load cells marked
						  with M (multiple load cell applications)
pLC = 0.5 for Class III L load
						  cells marked with S or M
* mpe = pLC
																				× Basic
						  Tolerance in load cell verifications divisions (v)
(Table Added 2005) (Amended 2006)
T.N.4.7.
Creep Recovery for Load Cells
			 During Type Evaluation.
- The difference between the initial reading of
			 the minimum load of the measuring range (Dmin) and the
			 reading after returning to minimum load subsequent to the maximum load
			 (Dmax) having been applied for 30 minutes shall not
			 exceed:
(a) 0.5 times the value of the load
			 cell verification interval (0.5 v) for Class II and IIII load cells;
(b) 0.5 times the value of the load cell
			 verification interval (0.5 v) for Class III load cells with 4000 or fewer
			 divisions;
(c) 0.83 times the value
			 of the load cell verification interval (0.83 v) for Class III load cells with
			 more than 4000 divisions; or
(d)
			 2.5 times the value of the load cell verification interval (2.5 v) for Class
			 III L load cells. (Added 2006) (Amended 2009 and 2011)
T.N.5.
Repeatability.
- The results obtained from several weighings of the same
			 load under reasonably static test conditions shall agree within the absolute
			 value of the maintenance tolerance for that load, and shall be within
			 applicable tolerances.
T.N.6.
Sensitivity.
- This section is applicable to all
			 nonautomatic-indicating scales marked I, II, III, III L, or IIII.
T.N.6.1.
Test Load.
(a) The test load for sensitivity for
			 nonautomatic-indicating vehicle, axle-load, livestock, and animal scales shall
			 be 1 d for scales equipped with balance indicator, and 2 d or 0.2 % of the
			 scale capacity, whichever is less, for scales not equipped with balance
			 indicators.
(b) For all other
			 nonautomatic-indicating scales, the test load for sensitivity shall be 1 d at
			 zero and 2 d at maximum test load.
T.N.6.2.
Minimum Change of
			 Indications.
- The addition or removal of the test load for sensitivity
			 shall cause a minimum permanent change as follows:
(a) for a scale with trig loop but without a
			 balance indicator, the position of the weighbeam shall change from the center
			 to the outer limit of the trig loop;
(b) for a scale with balance indicator, the
			 position of the indicator shall change one division on the graduated scale, the
			 width of the central target area, or the applicable value as shown below,
			 whichever is greater:
Scale of Class I or II: 1 mm (0.04 in),
Scale of Class III or IIII with a maximum capacity of 30 kg (70
				lb) or less: 2 mm (0.08 in),
Scale of Class III, III L, or IIII with a maximum capacity of
				more than 30 kg (70 lb): 5 mm (0.20 in);
(c) for a scale without a trig loop or
			 balance indicator, the position of rest of the weighbeam or lever system shall
			 change from the horizontal or midway between limiting stops to either limit of
			 motion.
(Amended 1987)
T.N.7.
Discrimination.
T.N.7.1.
Analog Automatic Indicating
			 (i.e., Weighing Device with Dial, Drum, Fan, etc.).
- A test load
			 equivalent to 1.4 d shall cause a change in the indication of at least 1.0 d.
			 (Also see N.1.5. Discrimination Test.)
T.N.7.2.
Digital Automatic Indicating.
- A test load equivalent to 1.4 d shall cause a change in the indicated
			 or recorded value of at least 2.0 d. This requires the zone of uncertainty to
			 be not greater than three-tenths of the value of the scale division. (Also see
			 N.1.5.1. Digital Device.)
T.N.8.
Influence Factors.
- The
			 following factors are applicable to tests conducted under controlled conditions
			 only, provided that:
(a) types of devices
			 approved prior to January 1, 1986, and manufactured prior to January 1, 1988,
			 need not meet the requirements of this section;
(b) new types of devices submitted for
			 approval after January 1, 1986, shall comply with the requirements of this
			 section; and
(c) all devices
			 manufactured after January 1, 1988, shall comply with the requirements of this
			 section. (Amended 1985)
T.N.8.1.
Temperature.
- Devices shall satisfy the tolerance requirements
			 under the following temperature conditions:
T.N.8.1.1. If not specified in the operating
			 instructions for Class I or II scales, or if not marked on the device for Class
			 III, III L, or IIII scales, the temperature limits shall be: - 10 °C to 40
			 °C (14 °F to 104 °F).
T.N.8.1.2. If temperature limits are
			 specified for the device, the range shall be at least that specified in Table
			 T.N.8.1.2. Temperature Range by Class.
Table T.N.8.1.2. Temperature Range by
						  Class
Class
Temperature Range
I
5 ºC (9 °F)
II
15 ºC (27 °F)
III, III L, and IIII
30 ºC (54 °F)
T.N.8.1.3.
Temperature Effect on
			 Zero-Load Balance.
- The zero-load indication shall not vary by more
			 than:
(a) three divisions per 5 °C (9
			 °F) change in temperature for Class III L devices; or
(b) one division per 5 °C (9 °F)
			 change in temperature for all other devices. (Amended 1990)
T.N.8.1.4.
Operating
			 Temperature.
- Except for Class I and II devices, an indicating or
			 recording element shall not display nor record any usable values until the
			 operating temperature necessary for accurate weighing and a stable zero balance
			 condition have been attained.
T.N.8.2.
Barometric Pressure.
-
			 Except for Class I scales, the zero indication shall not vary by more than one
			 scale division for a change in barometric pressure of 1 kPa over the total
			 barometric pressure range of 95 kPa to 105 kPa (28 in to 31 in of
			 Hg).
T.N.8.3.
Electric Power
			 Supply.
T.N.8.3.1.
Power Supply,
			 Voltage and Frequency.
(a) Weighing
			 devices that operate using alternating current must perform within the
			 conditions defined in paragraphs T.N.3. Tolerance Values through T.N.7.
			 Discrimination, inclusive, when tested over the range of - 15 % to + 10 % of
			 the marked nominal line voltage(s) at 60 Hz, or the voltage range marked by the
			 manufacturer, at 60 Hz.
(Amended 2003)
(b) Battery operated instruments shall not
			 indicate nor record values outside the applicable tolerance limits when battery
			 power output is excessive or deficient.
T.N.8.3.2.
Power Interruption.
-
			 A power interruption shall not cause an indicating or recording element to
			 display or record any values outside the applicable tolerance
			 limits.
T.N.9.
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) and Other Electromagnetic
			 Interference Susceptibility.
- The difference between the weight
			 indication due to the disturbance and the weight indication without the
			 disturbance shall not exceed one scale division (d); or the equipment shall:
(a) blank the indication; or
(b) provide an error message; or
(c) the indication shall be so completely
			 unstable that it cannot be interpreted, or transmitted into memory or to a
			 recording element, as a correct measurement value.
The tolerance in T.N.9. Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) and
				Other Electromagnetic Interference Susceptibility is to be applied
				independently of other tolerances. For example, if indications are at allowable
				basic tolerance error limits when the disturbance occurs, then it is acceptable
				for the indication to exceed the applicable basic tolerances during the
				disturbance.
(Amended 1997)
UR.
User
			 Requirements
UR.1.
Selection
			 Requirements.
- Equipment shall be suitable for the service in which it
			 is used with respect to elements of its design, including but not limited to,
			 its capacity, number of scale divisions, value of the scale division or
			 verification scale division, minimum capacity, and computing
			 capability.31
UR.1.1.
General.
(a) For devices marked with a class
			 designation, the typical class or type of device for particular weighing
			 applications is shown in Table 7a. Typical Class or Type of Device for Weighing
			 Applications.
(b) For devices not
			 marked with a class designation, Table 7b. Applicable to Devices not Marked
			 with a Class Designation applies.
31 Purchasers and users of scales
				such as railway track, hopper, and vehicle scales should be aware of possible
				additional requirements for the design and installation of such devices.
(Footnote Added 1995)
Table 7a. Typical Class or Type of Device for
						  Weighing Applications
Class
Weighing Application or Scale Type
I
Precision laboratory weighing
II
Laboratory weighing, precious metals and gem weighing,
						  grain test scales
III
All commercial weighing not otherwise specified, grain
						  test scales, retail precious metals and semiprecious gem weighing, grain-hopper
						  scales, animal scales, postal scales, vehicle on-board weighing systems with a
						  capacity less than or equal to 30 000 lb, and scales used to determine laundry
						  charges
III L
Vehicle scales, vehicle on-board weighing systems with
						  a capacity greater than 30 000 lb, axle-load scales, livestock scales, railway
						  track scales, crane scales, and hopper (other than grain hopper) scales
IIII
Wheel-load weighers and portable axle-load weighers
						  used for highway weight enforcement
Note
: A scale with a higher accuracy class
						  than that specified as "typical" may be used.
(Amended 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1992, 1995, and 2012)
Table 7b. Applicable to Devices not Marked with a
						  Class Designation
Scale Type or Design
Maximum Value of d
Retail Food Scales, 50 lb capacity and less
1 oz
Animal Scales
1 lb
Grain Hopper Scales
Capacity up to and including 50 000 lb Capacity over 50
						  000 lb
10 lb (not greater than 0.05 % of capacity) 20
						  lb
Crane Scales
not greater than 0.2 % of capacity
Vehicle and Axle-Load Scales Used in Combination
						  Capacity up to and including 200 000 lb Capacity over 200 000 lb
20 lb 50 lb
Railway Track Scales With weighbeam Automatic
						  indicating
20 lb 100 lb
Scales with capacities greater than 500 lb except
						  otherwise specified
0.1 % capacity (but not greater than 50 lb)
Wheel-Load Weighers
0.25 % capacity (but not greater than 50 lb)
Note
: For scales not specified in this
						  table, G-UR.1.1. and UR.1. apply.
(Added 1985) (Amended 1989)
UR.1.2.
Grain Hopper Scales.
-
			 Hopper scales manufactured as of January 1, 1986, that are used to weigh grain
			 shall be Class III and have a minimum of 2000 scale divisions.
(Amended 2012)
UR.1.3.
Value of the Indicated
			 and Recorded Scale Division.
-
The value of the scale
			 division as recorded shall be the same as the division value indicated.
			 [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
(Added 1985) (Amended 1999)
UR.1.3.
1.
Exceptions.
- The provisions of UR.1.3. Value of the Indicated and Recorded Scale
Division shall not apply to:
(a) Class I scales, or
(b) Dynamic monorail weighing systems when
			 the value of d is less than the value of e. (Added 1999)
UR.1.4.
Grain-Test Scales: Value of
			 the Scale Divisions.
- The scale division for grain-test scales shall
			 not exceed 0.2 g for loads through 500 g, and shall not exceed 1 g for loads
			 above 500 g through 1000 g.
(Added 1992)
UR.1.5.
Recording Element,
			 Class III L Railway Track Scales.
-
Class III L Railway
			 Track Scales must be equipped with a recording element. [Nonretroactive as of
			 January 1, 1996]
(Added 1995)
UR.2.
Installation
			 Requirements.
UR.2.1.
Supports.
- A scale that is portable and that is being used on a counter, table,
			 or the floor shall be so positioned that it is firmly and securely
			 supported.
UR.2.2.
Suspension of Hanging Scale.
- A hanging scale shall be freely suspended
			 from a fixed support when in use.
UR.2.3.
Protection From Environmental
			 Factors.
- The indicating elements, the lever system or load cells, and
			 the load-receiving element of a permanently installed scale, and the indicating
			 elements of a scale not intended to be permanently installed, shall be
			 adequately protected from environmental factors such as wind, weather, and RFI
			 that may adversely affect the operation or performance of the device.
UR.2.4.
Foundation, Supports, and
			 Clearance.
- The foundation and supports of any scale installed in a
			 fixed location shall be such as to provide strength, rigidity, and permanence
			 of all components, and clearance shall be provided around all live parts to the
			 extent that no contacts may result when the load-receiving element is empty,
			 nor throughout the weighing range of the scale. An in-motion railway track
			 scale is not required to provide clearance using rail gaps to separate the live
			 rail portion of the weighing/load-receiving element from that which is not live
			 if the scale is designed to be installed and operated using continuous rail.
On vehicle and livestock scales, the clearance between the
			 load-receiving elements and the coping at the bottom edge of the platform shall
			 be greater than at the top edge of the platform.* [*Nonretroactive as of
			 January 1, 1973]
(Amended 2014)
UR.2.5.
Access to Weighing Elements.
- Adequate provision shall be made for ready access to the pit of a
			 vehicle, livestock, animal, axle-load, or railway track scale for the purpose
			 of inspection and maintenance. Any of these scales without a pit shall be
			 installed with adequate means for inspection and maintenance of the weighing
			 elements.
(Amended 1985)
UR.2.6.
Approaches.
UR.2.6.
1.
Vehicle Scales.
-
On the entrance and exit end(s) of a vehicle scale, there shall be
			 a
straight approach as follows:
(a)
the width at least the width of
			 the platform,
(b)
the length at least one-half the length of the platform but not required to be
			 more than 12 m (40 ft), and
(c)
not less than 3 m (10 ft) of any
			 approach adjacent to the platform shall be in the same plane as the platform.
			 Any slope in the remaining portion of the approach shall ensure (1) ease of
			 vehicle access, (2) ease for testing purposes, and (3) drainage away from the
			 scale.
In addition to (a), (b), and (c),
s
cales installed in any one location for a period of six
				months or more shall have not less than 3 m (10 ft) of any approach adjacent to
				the platform constructed of concrete or similar durable material to ensure that
				this portion remains smooth and level and in the same plane as the platform;
				however, grating of sufficient strength to withstand all loads equal to the
				concentrated load capacity of the scale may be installed in this portion.
				[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1976]
(Amended 1977, 1983, 1993, 2006, and 2010)
UR.2.6.
2.
Axle-Load Scales.
- At each end of an axle-load
			 scale there shall be a straight paved approach in the same plane as the
			 platform. The approaches shall be the same width as the platform and of
			 sufficient length to insure the level positioning of vehicles during weight
			 determinations.
UR.2.7.
Stock Racks.
- A livestock or animal scale shall be equipped with a
			 suitable stock rack, with gates as required, which shall be securely mounted on
			 the scale platform. Adequate clearances shall be maintained around the outside
			 of the rack.
UR.2.8.
Hoists.
- On vehicle scales equipped with means for raising the load-receiving
			 element from the weighing element for vehicle unloading, means shall be
			 provided so that it is readily apparent to the scale operator when the
			 load-receiving element is in its designed weighing position.
UR.2.9.
Provision for Testing
			 Dynamic Monorail Weighing Systems
.
-
Provisions shall
			 be made at the time
of installation of a dynamic monorail weighing systems
				for testing in accordance with N.1.3.5.1. Dynamic
Monorail Weighing Systems (a rail around or other means
				for returning the test carcasses to the scale being
tested).
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1998]
(Added 1997) (Amended 1999)
UR.3.
Use Requirements.
UR.3.1.
Recommended Minimum Load.
- A recommended minimum load is specified in Table 8 since the use of a
			 device to weigh light loads is likely to result in relatively large errors.
Table 8. Recommended Minimum Load
Class
Value of Scale Division (d or e*)
Recommended Minimum Load (d or e*)
I
equal to or greater than 0.001 g
100
II
0.001 g to 0.05 g, inclusive equal to or greater than
						  0.1 g
20 50
III
All**
20
III L
All
50
IIII
All
10
*For Class I and II devices equipped with auxiliary
						  reading means (i.e., a rider, a vernier, or a least significant decimal
						  differentiated by size, shape or color), the value of the verification scale
						  division "e" is the value of the scale division immediately preceding the
						  auxiliary means. For Class III and IIII devices the value of "e" is specified
						  by the manufacturer as marked on the device; "e" must be less than or equal to
						  "d."
**A minimum load of 10 d is recommended for a weight
						  classifier marked in accordance with a statement identifying its use for
						  special applications.
(Amended 1990)
UR.3.1.
1.
Minimum Load,
			 Grain Dockage Determination.
- When determining the quantity of foreign
			 material (dockage) in grain, the weight of the sample shall be equal to or
			 greater than 500 scale divisions.
(Added 1985)
UR.3.2.
Maximum Load.
- A scale
			 shall not be used to weigh a load of more than the nominal capacity of the
			 scale.
UR.3.2.
1.
Maximum Loading for Vehicle Scales.
- A vehicle
			 scale shall not be used to weigh loads exceeding the maximum load capacity of
			 its span as specified in Table UR.3.2.1. Span Maximum Load.
(Added 1996)
Table UR.3.2.1. Span Maximum Load
Distance in Feet
Between the Extremes of any
Two or More Consecutive Axles
Ratio of CLC to Maximum Load ("r" factor) Carried
						  on Any
Group of Two or Mo
r
e
						  Consecut
i
ve Axles.
2 axles
3 axles
4 axles
5 axles
6 axles
7 axles
8 axles
9 axles
4
1
1.000
INSTRUCTIONS:
5
1
1.000
1. Determine the scale's CLC.
6
1
1.000
2. Count the number of axles on the vehicle in a given
						  span and determine the distance in feet between the first and last axle in the
						  span.
7
1
1.000
8 and
						  less
1
1.000
1.000
3. Multiply the CLC by the corresponding multiplier in
						  the table.*
More than
						  8
1
1.118
1.235
9
1.147
1.257
4. The resulting number is the scale's maximum
						  concentrated load for a single span based on the vehicle configuration.
10
1.176
1.279
11
1.206
1.301
* note and formula on next page.
12
1.235
1.324
1.471
1.632
13
1.265
1.346
1.490
1.651
14
1.294
1.368
1.510
1.669
15
1.324
1.390
1.529
1.688
1.853
16
1.353
1.412
1.549
1.706
1.871
17
1.382
1.434
1.569
1.724
1.888
18
1.412
1.456
1.588
1.743
1.906
19
1.441
1.478
1.608
1.761
1.924
20
1.471
1.500
1.627
1.779
1.941
21
1.500
1.522
1.647
1.798
1.959
22
1.529
1.544
1.667
1.816
1.976
23
1.559
1.566
1.686
1.835
1.994
24
1.588
1.588
1.706
1.853
2.012
2.176
25
1.618
1.610
1.725
1.871
2.029
2.194
26
1.632
1.745
1.890
2.047
2.211
27
1.654
1.765
1.908
2.065
2.228
28
1.676
1.784
1.926
2.082
2.245
2.412
29
1.699
1.804
1.945
2.100
2.262
2.429
30
1.721
1.824
1.963
2.118
2.279
2.445
31
1.743
1.843
1.982
2.135
2.297
2.462
32
1.765
1.863
2.000
2.153
2.314
2.479
2.647
33
1.882
2.018
2.171
2.331
2.496
2.664
34
1.902
2.037
2.188
2.348
2.513
2.680
35
1.922
2.055
2.206
2.365
2.529
2.697
36
2.0002
2.074
2.224
2.382
2.546
2.713
37
2.0002
2.092
2.241
2.400
2.563
2.730
38
2.0002
2.110
2.259
2.417
2.580
2.746
39
2.000
2.129
2.276
2.434
2.597
2.763
40
2.020
2.147
2.294
2.451
2.613
2.779
41
2.039
2.165
2.312
2.468
2.630
2.796
42
2.059
2.184
2.329
2.485
2.647
2.813
43
2.078
2.202
2.347
2.502
2.664
2.829
44
2.098
2.221
2.365
2.520
2.681
2.846
45
2.118
2.239
2.382
2.537
2.697
2.862
46
2.137
2.257
2.400
2.554
2.714
2.879
47
2.157
2.276
2.418
2.571
2.731
2.895
48
2.176
2.294
2.435
2.588
2.748
2.912
49
2.196
2.313
2.453
2.605
2.765
2.928
50
2.216
2.331
2.471
2.623
2.782
2.945
51
2.235
2.349
2.488
2.640
2.798
2.961
52
2.255
2.368
2.506
2.657
2.815
2.978
53
2.275
2.386
2.524
2.674
2.832
2.994
54
2.294
2.404
2.541
2.691
2.849
3.011
55
2.314
2.423
2.559
2.708
2.866
3.028
56
2.333
2.441
2.576
2.725
2.882
3.044
57
2.353
3
2.460
2.594
2.742
2.899
3.061
58
2.478
2.612
2.760
2.916
3.077
59
2.496
2.629
2.777
2.933
3.094
60
2.515
2.647
2.794
2.950
3.110
*
Note:
This table was developed based upon
						  the following formula. Values may be rounded in some cases for ease of
						  use.
Click here to view
						  image
1 Tandem Axle Weight.
2 Exception - These values
						  in the third column correspond to the maximum loads in which the inner bridge
						  dimensions of 36, 37, and 38 ft are considered to be equivalent to 39 ft. This
						  allows a weight of 68 000 lb on axles 2 through 5.
3 Corresponds to the
						  Interstate Gross Weight Limit.
UR.3.3.
Single-Draft Vehicle Weighing.
- A vehicle or a coupled-vehicle combination shall be commercially
			 weighed on a vehicle scale only as a single draft. That is, the total weight of
			 such a vehicle or combination shall not be determined by adding together the
			 results obtained by separately and not simultaneously weighing each end of such
			 vehicle or individual elements of such coupled combination. However, the weight
			 of:
(a) a coupled combination may be
			 determined by uncoupling the various elements (tractor, semitrailer, trailer),
			 weighing each unit separately as a single draft, and adding together the
			 results; or
(b) a vehicle or
			 coupled-vehicle combination may be determined by adding together the weights
			 obtained while all individual elements are resting simultaneously on more than
			 one scale platform.
Note:
This paragraph does not apply to
				highway-law-enforcement scales and scales used for the collection of
				statistical data.
(Added 1992)
UR.3.4.
Wheel-Load Weighing.
UR.3.4.1.
Use in Pairs.
- When wheel-load weighers or portable axle-load
			 weighers are to be regularly used in pairs, both weighers of each such pair
			 shall be appropriately marked to identify them as weighers intended to be used
			 in combination.
UR.3.4.2.
Level Condition.
- A vehicle of which either an axle-load
			 determination or a gross-load determination is being made utilizing wheel-load
			 weighers or portable axle-load weighers, shall be in a reasonably level
			 position at the time of such determination.
UR.3.5.
Special Designs.
- A
			 scale designed and marked for a special application (such as a prepackaging
			 scale or prescription scale with a counting feature) shall not be used for
			 other than its intended purpose32.
(Amended 2003)
UR.3.6.
Wet Commodities.
- Wet
			 commodities not in watertight containers shall be weighed only on a scale
			 having a pan or platform that will drain properly.
(Amended 1988)
UR.3.7.
Minimum Load on a Vehicle
			 Scale.
- A vehicle scale shall not be used to weigh net loads smaller
			 than:
(a) 10 d when weighing scrap material
			 for recycling or weighing refuse materials at landfills and transfer stations;
			 and
(b) 50 d for all other
			 weighing.
As used in this paragraph, scrap materials for recycling shall
				be limited to ferrous metals, paper (including cardboard), textiles, plastic,
				and glass.
(Amended 1988, 1992, and 2006)
UR.3.8.
Minimum Load for Weighing
			 Livestock.
- A scale with scale divisions greater than 2 kg (5 lb) shall
			 not be used for weighing net loads smaller than 500 d.
(Amended 1989)
UR.3.9.
Use of Manual Weight Entries.
- Manual gross or net weight entries are permitted for use in the
			 following applications only when:
(a) a
			 point-of-sale system interfaced with a scale is giving credit for a weighed
			 item;
(b) an item is pre-weighed on
			 a legal for trade scale and marked with the correct net weight;
(c) a device or system is generating labels
			 for standard weight packages;
(d)
			 postal scales or weight classifiers are generating manifests for packages to be
			 picked up at a later time; or
(e)
			 livestock and vehicle scale systems generate weight tickets to correct
			 erroneous tickets. (Added 1992) (Amended 2000 and 2004) 
			 32 Prepackaging scales and prescription
			 scales with a counting feature (and other commercial devices) used for putting
			 up packages in advance of sale are acceptable for use in commerce only if all
			 appropriate provisions of NIST Handbook 44 are met. Users of such devices must
			 be alert to the legal requirements relating to the declaration of quantity on a
			 package. Such requirements are to the effect that, on the average, the contents
			 of the individual packages of a particular commodity comprising a lot,
			 shipment, or delivery must contain at least the quantity declared on the label.
			 The fact that a prepackaging scale may overregister, but within established
			 tolerances, and is approved for commercial service is not a legal justification
			 for packages to contain, on the average, less than the labeled quantity.
(Amended 2003)
UR.3.10.
Dynamic Monorail Weighing
			 Systems.
- When the value of d is different from the value of e, the
			 commercial transaction must be based on e.
(Added 1999)
UR.3.11.
Minimum Count.
- A
			 prescription scale with an operational counting feature shall not be used to
			 count a quantity of less than 30 pieces weighing a minimum of 90 e.
(Added 2003)
Note:
The minimum count as defined in this
				paragraph refers to the use of the device in the filling of prescriptions and
				is different from the minimum sample piece count as defined in S.1.2.3. and as
				required to be marked on the scale by S.6.6.
(Note Added 2004)
UR.3.12.
Correct Stored Piece Weight.
- For prescription scales with a counting feature, the user is
			 responsible for maintaining the correct stored piece weight. This is especially
			 critical when a medicine has been reformulated or comes from different lots.
(Added 2003)
UR.4.
Maintenance Requirements.
UR.4.1.
Balance Condition.
-
			 The zero-load adjustment of a scale shall be maintained so that, with no load
			 on the load-receiving element and with all load-counterbalancing elements of
			 the scale (such as poises, drop weights, or counterbalance weights) set to
			 zero, the scale shall indicate or record a zero balance condition. A scale not
			 equipped to indicate or record a zero-load balance shall be maintained in
			 balance under any no-load condition.
UR.4.2.
Level Condition.
- If a
			 scale is equipped with a level-condition indicator, the scale shall be
			 maintained in level.
UR.4.3.
Scale Modification.
- The dimensions (e.g., length, width, thickness,
			 etc.) of the load receiving element of a scale shall not be changed beyond the
			 manufacturer's specifications, nor shall the capacity of a scale be increased
			 beyond its design capacity by replacing or modifying the original primary
			 indicating or recording element with one of a higher capacity, except when the
			 modification has been approved by a competent engineering authority, preferably
			 that of the engineering department of the manufacturer of the scale, and by the
			 weights and measures authority having jurisdiction over the scale.
(Amended 1996)
UR.5.
Coupled-in-Motion Railroad
			 Weighing Systems.
- A coupled-in-motion weighing system placed in
			 service on or after January 1, 1991, should be tested in the manner in which it
			 is operated, with the locomotive either pushing or pulling the cars at the
			 designed speed and in the proper direction. The cars used in the test train
			 should represent the range of gross weights that will be used during the normal
			 operation of the weighing system. Except as provided in N.4.2. Weighing Systems
			 Placed in Service Prior to January 1, 1991, and Used to Weigh Trains of Ten or
			 More Cars and N.4.3.(a) Weighing Systems Placed in Service on or After January
			 1, 1991, and Used to Weigh Trains of Ten or More Cars, normal operating
			 procedures should be simulated as nearly as practical. Approach conditions for
			 a train length in each direction of the scale site are more critical for a
			 weighing system used for individual car weights than for a
			 unit-train-weights-only facility, and should be considered prior to
			 installation.
(Added 1990) (Amended 1992)
Section 2.21.
Belt-Conveyor Scale Systems
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code applies to belt-conveyor scale systems and
			 weigh-belt systems used for the weighing of bulk materials.
(Amended 2015)
A.2.
Exceptions.
- The code
			 does not apply to:
(a) devices used for
			 discrete weighing while moving on conveyors;
(b) devices that measure quantity on a time
			 basis;
(c) checkweighers;
			 or
(d) controllers or other
			 auxiliary devices except as they may affect the weighing performance of the
			 belt-conveyor scale.
A.3.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code, Belt-Conveyor Scale
			 Systems shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Design of Indicating and
			 Recording Elements.
S.1.1.
General.
- A belt-conveyor scale shall be equipped with a primary
			 indicating element in the form of a master weight totalizer
and shall
			 also be equipped with a recording element, and a rate of flow indicator and
			 recorder (which may be analog).*
An auxiliary indicator shall not be
			 considered part of the master weight totalizer.
[*Nonretroactive as of
			 January 1, 1986]
(Amended 1986)
S.1.2.
Units.
- A belt-conveyor
			 scale shall indicate and record weight units in terms of pounds, tons, long
			 tons, metric tons, or kilograms. The value of a scale division (d) expressed in
			 a unit of weight shall be equal to:
(a) 1, 2,
			 or 5; or
(b) a decimal multiple or
			 submultiples of 1, 2, or 5.
S.1.3.
Value of the Scale
			 Division.
S.1.3.1.
For
			 Scales Installed After January 1, 1986.
- The value of
			 the scale division shall not be greater than 0.125 %
			 (1 /800) of the minimum totalized load.
			 [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
(
Added 1985)(Amended 2009)
S.1.3.2.
For Scales Installed Before
			 January 1, 1986.
- The value of the scale division shall not be greater
			 than 
			 1/1200 of the rated capacity of the
			 device. However, provision shall be made so that compliance with the
			 requirements of the zero-load test as prescribed in N.3.1. Zero Load Tests may
			 be readily and accurately determined in 20 minutes of operation.
S.1.4.
Recording
			 Elements and Recorded Representations.
-
The value of
			 the scale division of the recording element shall be the same as that of the
			 indicating element.
a)
The
			 belt-conveyor scale system shall record the unit of measurement (i.e.,
			 kilograms, tonnes, pounds, tons, etc.), the date, and the
			 time.
b)
The
			 belt-conveyor scale system shall record the initial indication and the final
			 indication of the master weight totalizer and the quantity.*
All of the information in (a) and (b) must be recorded
				for each delivery.* [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986] [*Nonretroactive as
				of January 1, 1994]
(Amended 1993)
S.1.4.1.
The belt-conveyor scale
			 system shall be capable of recording the results of automatic or semiautomatic
			 zero load tests.** [**Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2004]
(Added 2002)
S.1.5.
Rate of Flow Indicators
			 and Recorders.
- A belt-conveyor scale shall be
			 equipped with a rate of flow indicator and an analog or digital recorder.
			 Permanent means shall be provided to produce an audio or visual signal when the
			 rate of flow is equal to or less than 20 % and when the rate of flow is equal
			 to or greater than 100 % of the rated capacity of the scale. The type of alarm
			 (audio or visual) shall be determined by the individual installation.
			 [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
(Amended 1989 and 2004)
S.1.6.
Advancement of Primary
			 Indicating or Recording Elements.
- The master weight totalizer shall
			 advance only when the belt conveyor is in operation and under load.
(Amended 1989)
S.1.7.
Master Weight
			 Totalizer.
-
The master weight totalizer shall not be
			 resettable without breaking a security means. [Nonretroactive as of January 1,
			 1986]
S.1.8.
Power Loss.
-
In the event of a power
			 failure of up to 24 hours, the accumulated measured quantity on the master
			 weight totalizer of an electronic digital indicator shall be retained in memory
			 during the power loss. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
(Amended 1989)
S.1.9.
Zero-Ready Indicator.
-
A belt-conveyor scale shall be equipped with a
			 zero-ready indicator that produces an audio or visual signal when the zero
			 balance is within
±
0.12 % of the rated capacity of the
			 scale during an unloaded belt condition. The type of indication (audio or
			 visual) shall be determined by the individual installation. [Nonretroactive as
			 of January 1, 2014]
(Added 2012)
S.2.
Design of Weighing Elements.
- A belt-conveyor scale system shall be designed to combine
			 automatically belt travel with belt load to provide a determination of the
			 weight of the material that has passed over the scale.
S.2.1.
Speed Measurement.
- A
			 belt-conveyor scale shall be equipped with a belt speed or travel sensor that
			 will accurately sense the belt speed or travel whether the belt is empty or
			 loaded.
S.2.2.
Adjustable
			 Components.
- An adjustable component that can affect the performance of
			 the device (except as prescribed in S.3.1. Design of Zero-Setting Mechanism)
			 shall be held securely in adjustment.
(Amended 1998)
S.2.3.
Overload Protection.
-
			 The load-receiving elements shall be equipped with means for overload
			 protection of not less than 150 % of rated capacity. The accuracy of the scale
			 in its normal loading range shall not be affected by overloading.
S.3.
Zero Setting.
S.3.1.
Design of Zero-Setting
			 Mechanism.
- Automatic and semiautomatic zero-setting mechanisms shall
			 be so constructed that the resetting operation is carried out only after a
			 whole number of belt revolutions and the completion of the setting or the whole
			 operation is indicated.
An audio or visual signal shall be given when
			 the automatic and semiautomatic zero-setting mechanisms reach the limit of
			 adjustment of the zero-setting mechanism.*
(Amended 1999 and 2002)
Except for systems that record the zero load reference
				at the beginning and end of a delivery,
the range of the zero-setting
				mechanism shall not be greater than ± 2 % of the rated capacity of the
				scale without breaking the security means.
For systems that record the
				zero-load reference at the beginning and end of a delivery, the
				range
of
zero-setting
mechanism
shall
not
be
greater
than
±
5
%
without
breaking
the
security
means.**
				[*Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1990] [**Nonretroactive as of January 1,
				2004]
(Amended 1989 and 2002)
S.3.1.1.
Automatic Zero-Setting
			 Mechanism. -
The automatic zero-setting mechanism shall
			 indicate or record any change in the zero reference. [Nonretroactive as of
			 January 1, 2010]
(Added 2009)
S.3.2.
Sensitivity at Zero
			 Load (For Type Evaluation).
-
When a system is operated
			 for a time period equal to the time required to deliver the minimum test load
			 and with a test load calculated to indicate two scale divisions applied
			 directly to the weighing element, the totalizer shall advance not less than one
			 or more than three scale divisions. An alternative test of equivalent
			 sensitivity, as specified by the manufacturer, shall also be acceptable.
			 [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
S.4.
Marking Requirements.
-
			 Belt-conveyor scale systems and weigh-belt systems shall be marked with the
			 following: (Also see also G-S.1. Identification.)
(a) the rated capacity in units of weight per
			 hour (minimum and maximum);
(b) the
			 value of the scale division;
(c)
			 the belt speed in terms of feet (or meters) per minute at which the belt will
			 deliver the rated capacity, or the maximum and minimum belt speeds at which the
			 conveyor system will be operated for variable speed belts;
(d) the load in terms of pounds per foot or
			 kilograms per meter (determined by material tests); and
(e)
the
operational
temperature
range
if
other
than
-
10
°
C
to
40
°
C
(14
°
F
to
104
°
F).
			 [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
(Amended 2015)
S.5.
Provision for Sealing.
-
A device shall be designed using the format set forth
			 in Table S.5. with provision(s) for applying a security seal that must be
			 broken, or for using other approved means of providing security (e.g. data
			 change audit trail available at the time of inspection), before any change that
			 affects the metrological integrity of the device can be made to any electronic
			 mechanism. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1999]
(Added 1998)
Table S.5. Categories of Device and
						  Methods of Sealing
Categories of
						  Devices
Methods
of Sealing
Category 1:
No
						  remote configuration capability.
Seal by physical seal or two event counters:
						  one for calibration parameters and one for configuration
						  parameters.
Category 3:
Remote configuration capability.
An event logger is required in the device; it
						  must include an event counter (000 to 999), the parameter ID, the date and time
						  of the change, and the new value of the parameter. A printed copy of the
						  information must be available through the device or through another on-site
						  device. The event logger shall have a capacity to retain records equal to 10
						  times the number of sealable parameters in the device, but not more than 1000
						  records are required. (
Note:
Does not require 1000 changes to be
						  stored for each parameter.)
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1999]
(Table
				Added 1998)
N.
Notes
N.1.
General.
- Belt-conveyor scales are capable of weighing bulk material accurately.
			 (Also see Tolerances.) However, their performance can be detrimentally affected
			 by the conditions of the installation. (Also see User Requirements.) The
			 performance of the equipment is not to be determined by averaging the results
			 of the individual tests. The results of all tests shall be within the tolerance
			 limits. (Amended 2002)
N.1.1.
Official
			 Test.
- An official test of a belt-conveyor scale system shall include
			 tests specified in
N.3.1. Zero Load
			 Tests, N.3.2. Material Tests, and, if applicable, N.3.3. Simulated Load Tests.
			 (Amended 2006)
N.1.2.
Simulated Test.
- Simulated loading conditions as recommended by
			 the manufacturer and approved by the official with statutory authority may be
			 used to properly monitor the system operational performance between official
			 tests, but shall not be used for official certification. (Amended
			 1991)
N.2.
Conditions of Tests.
- A belt-conveyor scale shall be tested after it is
			 installed on the conveyor system with which it is to be used and under such
			 environmental conditions as may normally be expected. Each test shall be
			 conducted with test loads no less than the minimum test load. Before each test
			 run, the inspector shall check the zero setting and adjust as necessary.
(Amended 1986, 2004, and 2009)
N.2.1.
Initial Verification. -
A
			 belt-conveyor scale system or a weigh-belt system shall be tested using a
			 minimum of two test runs as indicated in Table N.2.1. Initial Verification.
Results of the individual test runs in each pair of tests shall
				not differ by more than the absolute value of the tolerance as specified in
				T.2. Tolerance Values, Repeatability Tests. All tests shall be within the
				tolerance as specified in T.1. Tolerance Values.
Test runs may also be conducted at any other rate of flow that
				may be used at the installation. A minimum of four test runs may be conducted
				at only one flow rate if evidence is provided that the system is used at a
				constant speed/constant loading setting and that rate does not vary in either
				direction by an amount more than 10 % of the normal flow rate that can be
				developed at the installation for at least 80 % of the time.
Table N.2.1. Initial Verification
Device Configuration
Minimum of Two Test Runs at Each of the Following
						  Settings
Total Tests (Minimum)
Constant Belt Speed and Variable Loading
- Belt Loading: high (normal)
- Belt Loading: medium (intermediate)
- Belt Loading: low (35 %)
6
Variable Belt Speed and Constant Loading
- Belt Speed: maximum
- Belt Speed: medium
- Belt Speed: minimum
6
Variable Belt Speed and Variable Loading
- Belt Speed: maximum; Belt Loading: high
						  (normal)
- Belt Speed: maximum; Belt Loading: medium
						  (intermediate)
- Belt Speed: maximum; Belt Loading: low (35 %)
- Belt Speed: minimum; Belt Loading: high
						  (normal)
- Belt Speed: minimum; Belt Loading: medium
						  (intermediate)
- Belt Speed: minimum; Belt Loading: low (35 %)
12
1. Use the device configurations in the left-hand
						  column to identify the scale being tested.
2. Perform two test runs (minimum) at each of the
						  settings shown in the center column.
3. The following terminology applies to "Belt
						  Loading":
* Low: 35 % of the maximum rated capacity of the
						  system.
* Medium: an intermediate rate between the high and low
						  settings.
* High: maximum (normal use) operational rate.
(Table Added 2015) (Added 2004) (Amended 2009 and 2015)
N.2.2.
Subsequent
			 Verification.
- Subsequent testing shall include testing at the normal
			 use flow rate and other flow rates used at the installation. The official with
			 statutory authority may determine that testing only at the normal use flow rate
			 is necessary for subsequent verifications if evidence is provided that the
			 system is used to operate:
(a) at no less than
			 70 % of the maximum rated capacity for at least 80 % of the time (excluding
			 time that the belt is unloaded); or
(b) with a normal use flow rate that does not
			 vary by more than 10 % of the maximum rated capacity.
Example:
If a belt-conveyor scale system has a
				maximum rated capacity of 200 tons per hour (tph), and the normal use flow rate
				is 150 tph (75 % of the maximum rated capacity), no testing at additional flow
				rates is required provided the flow rates remain above 140 tph for more than 80
				% of the time. If the same device were operating with a normal use flow rate of
				130 tph, it is operating at 65 % of the maximum rated capacity. In this case,
				testing at flow rates in addition to the normal use flow rate would be required
				if the normal use flow rate varies by more than 20 tph (10 % of the maximum
				rated capacity). (Added 2004)
N.2.3.
Minimum Test Load.
N.2.3.1.
Minimum Test Load, Weigh-Belt Systems.
- The minimum test load
			 shall not be less than the largest of the following values:
(a) 800 scale divisions;
(b) the load obtained at maximum flow rate in
			 one revolution of the belt; or
(c)
			 at least one minute of operation. (Amended 2015)
N.2.3.2.
Minimum Test Load, All Other
			 Belt-Conveyor Scale Systems.
- Except for applications where a normal
			 weighment is less than 10 minutes, the minimum test load shall not be less than
			 the largest of the following values:
(a) 800
			 scale divisions;
(b) the load
			 obtained at maximum flow rate in one revolution of the belt; or
(c) at least 10 minutes of operation.
For applications where a normal weighment is less than 10
				minutes (e.g., belt-conveyor scale systems used exclusively to issue net
				weights for material conveyed by individual vehicles and railway track cars)
				the minimum test load shall be the normal weighment that also complies with
				N.2.3.2.(a) and (b).
The official with statutory authority may determine that a
				smaller minimum totalized load down to 2 % of the load totalized in one hour at
				the maximum flow rate may be used for subsequent tests, provided that:
1. the smaller minimum totalized load is
			 greater than the quantities specified in N.2.3.2.(a) and (b); and
2. consecutive official testing with the
			 minimum totalized loads described in N.2.3.2.(a), (b), or (c) and the smaller
			 minimum test load has been conducted that demonstrates the system complies with
			 applicable tolerances for repeatability, acceptance, and maintenance.
(Added 2004) (Amended 2008 and 2015)
N.3.
Test Procedures.
N.3.1.
Zero-Load Tests.
- A
			 zero-load test shall be conducted to establish that the belt scale system
(including the conveyor) is capable of holding a stable,
				in-service zero.
(Amended 1989 and 2002)
N.3.1.1.
Determination of Zero.
- A zero-load test is a determination of the error in zero, expressed as
			 an internal reference, a percentage of the full-scale capacity, or a change in
			 a totalized load over a whole number of complete belt revolutions. A zero-load
			 test shall be performed as follows:
(a) For
			 belt-conveyor scales with electronic integrators, the test must be performed
			 over a period of at least three minutes and with a whole number of complete
			 belt revolutions.
(b) For
			 belt-conveyor scales with mechanical integrators, the test shall be performed
			 with no less than three complete revolutions or 10 minutes of operation,
			 whichever is greater.
(c) For weigh
			 belt systems, the test must be performed over a period of at least one minute
			 and at least one complete revolution of the belt.
(Added 2002) (Amended 2015)
N.3.1.2.
Test of Zero Stability.
- The conveyor system shall be operated to warm up the belt and the belt
			 scale shall be zero adjusted as required. A series of zero-load tests shall be
			 carried out immediately before conducting the simulated load or materials test
			 until the three consecutive zero-load tests each indicate an error which does
			 not exceed ± 0.06 % of the totalized load at full scale capacity for the
			 duration of the test. No adjustments can be made during the three consecutive
			 zero-load test readings.
(Added 2002) (Amended 2004 and 2009)
N.3.1.3.
Check for Consistency of the
			 Conveyor Belt along Its Entire Length.
- During a zero-load test with
			 any operational low-flow lock-out disabled, the absolute value of the
			 difference between the maximum and minimum totalizer readings indicated on the
			 totalizer during any complete revolution of the belt shall not exceed 0.12 % of
			 the minimum test load.
Note:
The end value of the zero-load test must
				meet the
±
0.06 % requirement referenced in the "Test
				for Zero Stability."
(Added 2002) (Amended 2004 and 2011)
N.3.2.
Material Tests.
- Material tests should be conducted using actual belt loading
			 conditions. These belt loading conditions shall include, but are not limited to
			 conducting materials tests using different belt loading points, all types and
			 sizes of products weighed on the scale, at least one other belt speed, and in
			 both directions of weighing.
On subsequent verifications, at least two individual tests
				shall be conducted. The results of all these tests shall be within the
				tolerance limits.
Either pass a quantity of pre-weighed material over the
				belt-conveyor scale in a manner as similar as feasible to actual loading
				conditions, or weigh all material that has passed over the belt-conveyor scale.
				Means for weighing the material test load will depend on the capacity of the
				belt-conveyor scale and availability of a suitable scale for the test. To
				assure that the test load is accurately weighed and determined, the following
				precautions shall be observed:
(a) The
			 containers, whether railroad cars, trucks, or boxes, must not leak, and shall
			 not be overloaded to the point that material will be lost.
(b) The actual empty or tare weight of the
			 containers shall be determined at the time of the test. Stenciled tare weight
			 of railway cars or trucks shall not be used. Gross and tare weights shall be
			 determined on the same scale.
(c)
			 When a pre-weighed test load is passed over the scale, the belt-loading hopper
			 shall be examined before and after the test to assure that the hopper is empty
			 and that only the material of the test load has passed over the
			 scale.
(d) Where practicable, a
			 reference scale should be tested within 24 hours preceding the determination of
			 the weight of the test load used for a belt-conveyor scale material test.
A reference scale which is not "as found" within maintenance
				tolerance should have its accuracy re-verified after the belt-conveyor test
				with a suitable known weight load if the "as found" error of the belt-conveyor
				scale material test exceeds maintenance tolerance values.*
(e) If any suitable known weight load other
			 than a certified test weight load is used for re-verification of the reference
			 scale accuracy, its weight shall be determined on the reference scale after the
			 reference scale certification and before commencing the belt scale material
			 test.*
(f) The test shall not be
			 conducted if the weight of the test load has been affected by environmental
			 conditions.
*Note:
Even if the reference scale is within
				maintenance tolerance it may require adjusting to be able to meet paragraph
				N.3.2.1. Accuracy of Material.
(Amended 1986, 1989, 1998, 2000, 2002, and 2009)
N.3.2.1.
Accuracy of Material.
- The quantity of material used to conduct a material test shall be
			 weighed on a reference scale to an accuracy within 0.1 %. Scales typically used
			 for this purpose include Class III and III L scales or a scale without a class
			 designation as described in Handbook 44, Section 2.20., Table T.1.1. Tolerances
			 for Unmarked Scales.
(Added 1989) (Amended 1991, 1993, 1998 and 2000)
N.3.3.
Simulated
			 Load Tests.
(a) As required by the
			 official with statutory authority, simulated load tests as recommended by the
			 manufacturer are to be conducted between material tests to monitor the system's
			 operational performance, but shall not be used for official certification.
(Amended 1991)
(b) A simulated load test consisting of at
			 least three consecutive test runs shall be conducted as soon as possible, but
			 not more than 12 hours after the completion of the material test, to establish
			 the factor to relate the results of the simulated load test to the results of
			 the material tests.
(Added 1990)
(c) The results of the simulated load test
			 shall repeat within 0.1 %. (Added 1990)
(Amended 1989 and 1990)
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Tolerance
			 Values.
33- Maintenance and acceptance
			 tolerances on materials tests, relative to the weight of the material, shall be
			 ± 0.25 % of the test load. (Amended 1993)
T.1.1.
Tolerance Values - Test of Zero
			 Stability.
- Immediately after material has been weighed over the
			 belt-conveyor scale during the conduct of any material test run, the zero-load
			 test shall be repeated. The change in the accumulated or subtracted weight
			 during the zero-load test shall not exceed 0.12 % of the totalized load at full
			 scale capacity for the duration of that test. If the range of zero adjustments
			 during a complete (official) verification test exceeds 0.18 % of the totalized
			 load at full scale capacity for the duration of the zero-load test, the
			 official with statutory authority may establish an interval for zero-load
			 testing during normal operation.
(Added 2004) (Amended 2009)
T.2.
Tolerance Values, Repeatability
			 Tests.
- The variation in the values obtained during the conduct of
			 materials tests shall not be greater than 0.25 %
			 (1/400).
T.3.
Influence Factors.
- The
			 following factors are applicable to tests conducted under controlled conditions
			 only, provided that:
(a) types of devices
			 approved prior to January 1, 1986, and manufactured prior to January 1, 1988,
			 need not meet the requirements of this section;
(b) new types of devices submitted for
			 approval after January 1, 1986, shall comply with the requirements of the
			 section; and
(c) all devices
			 manufactured after January 1, 1988, shall comply with the requirements of this
			 section.
T.3.1.
Temperature.
- Devices shall satisfy the tolerance requirements at temperatures from
			 - 10 °C to 40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F).
T.3.1.1.
Effect on Zero-Load Balance.
- The zero-load indication shall not change by more than 0.035 % of the
			 rated capacity of the scale (without the belt) for a change in temperature of
			 10 °C (18 °F) at a rate not to exceed 5 °C (9 °F) per hour.
			 (Amended 2004)
T.3.1.2.
Temperature Limits.
-
If a temperature
			 range other than
-10°C to 40°C (14°Fto104°F)
			 is specified for the device, the range shall be atleast 30°C (54°F).
			 [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1990]
33 The variables and uncertainties
				included in the relative tolerance represent only part of the variables that
				affect the accuracy of the material weighed on belt-conveyor scales. If this
				tolerance was based on an error analysis beginning with mass standards through
				all of the test processes and following the principle expressed in Section 3.2.
				of the Fundamental Considerations in Appendix A, the tolerance would be 0.5 %.
(Added 1993)
(Added 1989)
T.3.2.
Power Supply, Voltage, and
			 Frequency.
- A belt-conveyor scale system shall satisfy the tolerance
			 requirements over a range of 100 V to 130 V or 200 V to 250 V as appropriate
			 and over a frequency range of 59.5 Hz to 60.5 Hz.
UR.
User
			 Requirements
UR.1.
Installation
			 Requirements.
UR.1.1.
Protection
			 from Environmental Factors.
- The indicating elements, the lever system
			 or load cells, and the load-receiving element of a belt-conveyor scale shall be
			 adequately protected from environmental factors such as wind, moisture, dust,
			 weather, and radio frequency interference (RFI) and electromagnetic
			 interference (EMI) that may adversely affect the operation or performance of
			 the device.
UR.1.2.
Conveyor
			 Installation.
- The design and installation of the conveyor leading to
			 and from the belt-conveyor scale is critical with respect to scale performance.
			 Installation shall be in accordance with the scale manufacturer's instructions
			 and the following:
(a)
Installation -
			 General.
- A belt-conveyor scale shall be so installed that neither its
			 performance nor operation will be adversely affected by any characteristic of
			 the installation, including but not limited to, the foundation, supports,
			 covers, or any other equipment.
(Amended 2002)
(b)
Live Portions of Scale.
-
			 All live portions of the scale shall be protected with appropriate guard
			 devices and clearances, as recommended by the scale manufacturer, to prevent
			 accidental interference with the weighing operation. (Also see UR.3.1. Scale
			 and Conveyor Maintenance.)
(Amended 2004)
(c)
Storage of Simulated Load
			 Equipment.
- Suitable protection shall be provided for storage of any
			 simulated load equipment.
(d)
Take-up Device.
- Any take-up device shall provide constant and
			 consistent tension for the belt under all operating conditions.
(Amended 2014)
(e)
Scale Location and Training
			 Idlers.
- The scale shall be so installed that the first weigh idler of
			 the scale is at least 6 m (20 ft) or five idler spaces, whichever is greater,
			 from loading point, skirting, head or tail pulley, or convex curve in the
			 conveyor. Any training idler shall be located at least 18 m (60 ft) from the
			 centerline of the weigh span of the scale. Training idlers shall not be
			 restrained at any time in order to force belt alignment.
(Amended 1998)
(f)
Concave Curve.
- If there
			 is a concave curve in the conveyor, before or after the scale, the scale shall
			 be installed so that the belt is in contact with all the idler rollers at all
			 times for at least 6 m (20 ft) or five idler spaces, whichever is greater,
			 before and after the scale.34 A concave curve shall
			 start no closer than 12 m (40 ft) from the scale to the tangent point of the
			 concave curve. (Amended 1998)
(g)
Tripper and Movable Pulleys.
- There shall be no tripper or
			 movable head pulleys in the conveyor.
(h)
Conveyor Orientation.
- The
			 conveyor may be horizontal or inclined, but, if inclined, the angle shall be
			 such that slippage of material along the belt does not occur.
(i)
Conveyor Stringers.
-
			 Conveyor stringers at the scale and for not less than 6 m (20 ft) before and
			 beyond the scale shall be continuous or securely joined and of sufficient size
			 and so supported as to eliminate relative deflection between the scale and
			 adjacent idlers when under load. The conveyor stringers should be so designed
			 that the deflection between any two adjacent idlers within the weigh area does
			 not exceed 0.6 mm (0.025 in) under load.
(j)
Identification of Scale Area.
- The scale area and five idlers on both ends of the scale shall be of a
			 contrasting color, or other suitable means shall be used to distinguish the
			 scale from the remainder of the conveyor installation, and the scale shall be
			 readily accessible.
(Amended 1998)
(k)
Belt Composition and Maintenance.
- In a loaded or unloaded condition, the belt shall make constant
			 contact with horizontal and wing rollers of the idlers in the scale area.
			 Splices shall not cause any undue disturbance in scale operation. (Also see
			 N.3. Test Procedures.)
(Amended 1998, 2000, 2001, and 2015)
(l)
Uniformity of Belt Loading and
			 Flow.
- The conveyor loading mechanism shall be designed to provide
			 uniform belt loading. The distance from the loading point to the scale shall
			 allow for adequate settling time of the material on the belt before it is
			 weighed. Feeding mechanisms shall have a positive closing or stopping action so
			 that material leakage does not occur. Feeders shall provide an even flow over
			 the scale through the full range of scale operation. Sufficient impact idlers
			 shall be provided in the conveyor under each loading point to prevent
			 deflection of the belt during the time material is being loaded.
(m)
Belt Alignment.
- The belt
			 shall not extend beyond the edge of the outermost roller of any carry side
			 (top) roller in any area of the conveyor nor touch the conveyor structure on
			 the return (bottom) side of the conveyor.
(Amended 1998 and 2008)
(Amended 2002, 2012, 2013, 2014, and 2015)
UR.1.3.
Material
			 Test.
-
A belt-conveyor scale shall be installed so
			 that a material test can be conveniently conducted.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1981]
34 Installing the belt scale
				five-idler spaces from the tail pulley or the infeed skirting will be in the
				area of least belt tension on the conveyor and should produce the best
				accuracy. The performance of a belt-conveyor scale may be adversely affected by
				a concave curve in the conveyor that is located between the loading point and
				the scale. Therefore, whenever possible, a belt-conveyor scale should not be
				installed with a concave curve in the conveyor between the loading point and
				the scale.
(Amended 1995 and 1998)
UR.1.4.
Belt Travel (Speed or
			 Velocity).
- The belt travel sensor shall be so positioned that it
			 accurately represents the travel of the belt over the scale for all flow rates
			 between the maximum and minimum values. The belt travel sensor shall be so
			 designed and installed that there is no slip.
(Amended 2012)
UR.2.
Use Requirements.
UR.2.1.
Rate of Operation.
- A
			 belt-conveyor scale system shall be operated between 20 % and 100 % of its
			 rated capacity.
(Amended 2004)
UR.2.2.
Minimum Totalized Load.
- Delivered quantities of less than the minimum test load shall not be
			 considered a valid weighment.
UR.2.3.
Security Means.
- When
			 a security means has been broken, it shall be reported to the official with
			 statutory authority. (Amended 1991)
UR.2.4.
Loading.
- The feed of
			 material to the scale shall be controlled to assure that, during normal
			 operation, the material flow is in accordance with the manufacturer's
			 recommendation for rated capacity.
UR.2.5.
Diversion or Loss of Measured
			 Product.
- There shall be no operation(s) or condition(s) of use that
			 result in loss or diversion that adversely affects the quantity of measured
			 product.
(Added 2005)
UR.2.6.
Retention of Maintenance,
			 Test, and Analog or Digital Recorder Information.
- Records of
			 calibration and maintenance, including conveyor alignment, analog or digital
			 recorder, zero-load test, and material test data shall be maintained on site
			 for at least the three concurrent years as a history of scale performance.
			 Copies of any report as a result of a test or repair shall be mailed to the
			 official with statutory authority as required. The current date and correction
			 factor(s) for simulated load equipment shall be recorded and maintained in the
			 scale cabinet.
(Added 2002)
(Amended 2012)
Maintenance Requirements UR.3.1. - Scale and Conveyor
				Maintenance.
- Weighing systems and idlers shall be maintained and
				serviced in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the
				following:
(a)
Zero Balance.
- The zero balance condition of a belt-conveyor scale shall be
			 maintained such that, prior to beginning any commercial transaction, with no
			 load on the belt, the zero balance condition is within
±
0.12 % of the scale's rated capacity.
(Added 2012)
(b)
Scale Clearance. -
The
			 scale and area surrounding the scale shall be kept clean of debris or other
			 foreign material that can detrimentally affect the performance of the
			 system.
(c)
Weighed
			 Material. -
There shall be provisions to ensure that weighed material
			 does not adhere to the belt and return to the scale system area.
(Added 2004)
(d)
Simulated and Zero-Load Test
			 Intervals. -
Zero-load tests and simulated load or material tests shall
			 be conducted at periodic intervals between official tests and after a repair or
			 mechanical adjustment to the conveyor system in order to provide reasonable
			 assurance that the device is performing correctly. The minimum interval for
			 periodic zero-load tests and simulated load tests shall be established by the
			 official with statutory authority or according to manufacturer recommendations.
The actions to be taken as a result of the zero-load test are
				shown in the following table.
Change in Zero ([DELTA] 0)
Actions to be Taken
If the change in zero is less than ± 0.25 %
						  ([DELTA] 0 [LESS THAN] 0.25 %)
Perform zero adjustment and proceed to simulated load
						  test.
If the change in zero is ± 0.25 % to ±
						  0.5 % (0.25 % [LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO] [DELTA] 0 [LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO] 0.5
						  %)
Inspect the conveyor and weighing area for compliance
						  with UR.1. Installation Requirements and repeat the zero-load test.
If the change in zero is greater than ± 0.5 %
						  ([DELTA] 0 [GREATER THAN] 0.5 %)
Inspect the conveyor and weighing area for compliance
						  with UR.1. Installation Requirements, repeat the zero-load test, and reduce the
						  interval between zero-load tests.
The action to be taken as a result of the simulated load or
				material tests is shown in the following table.
Change in Factor (Reference) Established
						  in
N.3.3.(b)
[
[DELTA] N.3.3.(b)]
Action to be Taken
If the error is less than 0.25 %
([DELTA] N.3.3.(b) [LESS THAN] 0.25 %)
No Action
If the error is at least 0.25 % but not more than 0.6
						  %
(0.25 % [LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO] [DELTA] N.3.3.(b) [LESS
						  THAN OR EQUAL TO] 0.6 %)
Inspect the conveyor and weighing area for compliance
						  with UR.1. Installation Requirements and, after compliance is verified, repeat
						  the test.
If the result of that test remains greater than
						  ± 0.25 %, a span correction shall be made and the official with
						  statutory authority notified.
(Amended 1991)
If the error is greater than 0.6 % but does not exceed
						  0.75 %
(0.6 % [LESS THAN] [DELTA] N.3.3.(b) [LESS THAN OR
						  EQUAL TO] 0.75 %)
Inspect the conveyor and weighing area for compliance
						  with UR.1. Installation Requirements and, after compliance is verified, repeat
						  the test.
If the result of that test remains greater than
						  ± 0.25 %, a span correction shall be made, the official with statutory
						  authority shall be notified, and an official test shall be conducted.
(Amended 1991)
If the error is greater than 0.75 %
([DELTA] N.3.3.(b) [GREATER THAN] 0.75 %)
An official test is required. (Amended 1987)
(Amended 2002 and 2009)
(e)
Scale Alignment.
-
			 Alignment checks shall be conducted in accordance with the manufacturer's
			 recommendation. A material test is required after any realignment.
(Amended 1986, 2000, and 2015)
(f)
Simulated Load Equipment.
-
			 Simulated load equipment shall be clean and properly maintained.
(g)
Zero Load Reference Information.
- When zero load reference information is recorded for a delivery, the
			 information must be based upon zero load tests performed as a minimum both
			 immediately before and immediately after the totalized load.
(Added 2002)
1986, 2000, 2002, 2004, 2009, 2012, and (Amended
				20122015)
UR.4.
Compliance.
- Prior to initial verification, the scale
			 manufacturer or installer shall certify to the owner that the scale meets code
			 requirements. Prior to initial verification and each subsequent verification,
			 the scale owner or his agent shall notify the official with statutory authority
			 in writing that the belt-conveyor scale system is in compliance with this
			 specification and ready for material testing.
(Amended 1991)
Section 2.22.
Automatic Bulk Weighing
			 Systems
35
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code applies to automatic bulk weighing systems, that is,
			 weighing systems adapted to the automatic weighing of a commodity in successive
			 drafts of predetermined amounts automatically recording the no-load and loaded
			 weight values and accumulating the net weight of each draft.
(Amended 1987)
A.2.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code, Automatic Bulk Weighing
			 Systems shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Design of
			 Indicating and Recording Elements and Recorded Representations.
S.1.1.
Zero Indication.
-
			 Provisions shall be made to indicate and record a no-load reference value and,
			 if the no-load reference value is a zero value indication, to indicate and
			 record an out-of-balance condition on both sides of zero.
S.1.1.1.
Digital Zero Indication.
- A digital zero indication shall represent a balance condition that is
			 within ±
														½ the value of the scale division.
S.1.2.
Value of Scale Division
			 (d).
-
The value of the scale division (d), expressed
			 in a unit of weight, shall be equal to:
(a)
1, 2, or 5;
			 or
(b)
a decimal
			 multiple or submultiple of 1, 2, or 5; or
(c)
a binary submultiple of a unit
			 of weight.
Examples: Scale divisions may be 0.01, 0.02, or 0.05;
				0.1, 0.2, or 0.5; 1, 2, or 5; 10, 20, or 50; or ½,
				¼,
1/8,
1
/16,
etc.
				[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
(Amended 1987)
S.1.3.
Capacity
			 Indication and Recorded Representation.
- An indicating or recording
			 element shall not indicate or record any values when the gross load is in
			 excess of 105 % of the capacity of the system.
S.1.4.
Weighing Sequence.
- For
			 systems used to receive (weigh in), the no-load reference value shall be
			 determined and recorded only at the beginning of each weighing cycle. For
			 systems used to deliver (weigh out), the no-load reference value shall be
			 determined and recorded only after the gross load reference value for each
			 weighing cycle has been indicated and recorded.
1 (Title amended 1986)
S.1.5.
Recording Sequence.
-
			 Provision shall be made so that all weight values are indicated until the
			 completion of the recording of the indicated value.
S.1.6.
Provision for Sealing
			 Adjustable Components on Electronic Devices.
- Provision shall be made
			 for applying a security seal in a manner that requires the security seal to be
			 broken before an adjustment can be made to any component affecting the
			 performance of the device.
S.2.
Design of Balance and Damping
			 Mechanism.
S.2.1.
Zero-Load
			 Adjustment.
- The weighing system shall be equipped with manual or
			 semiautomatic means by which the zero-load balance or no-load reference value
			 indication may be adjusted. Automatic zero-tracking and automatic zero-setting
			 mechanisms are prohibited.
(Amended 2010)
S.2.1.1.
Manual.
- A manual
			 zero-load or no-load reference value setting mechanism shall be operable or
			 accessible only by a tool outside of or entirely separate from this mechanism
			 or enclosed in a cabinet.
S.2.1.2.
Semiautomatic.
- A semiautomatic zero-load or no-load reference
			 value setting mechanism shall meet the provisions of S.2.1.1. or shall be
			 operable only when:
(a) the indication is
			 stable within ± 3 scale divisions; and
(b) cannot be operated during a weighing
			 operation.
S.2.2.
Damping Means.
- A
			 system shall be equipped with effective means necessary to bring the
			 indications quickly to a readable, stable equilibrium. Effective means shall
			 also be provided to permit the recording of weight values only when the
			 indication is stable within plus or minus three scale divisions for devices
			 with 10 000 scale divisions, or plus or minus one division for devices with
			 less than 10 000 scale divisions.
S.3.
Interlocks and Gate
			 Control.
S.3.1.
Gate Position.
- Provision shall be made to clearly indicate to the operator the
			 position of the gates leading directly to and from the weigh hopper.
S.3.2.
Interlocks.
- Each
			 automatic bulk weighing system shall have operating interlocks to provide for
			 the following:
(a) Product cannot be cycled
			 and weighed if the weight recording element is disconnected or subjected to a
			 power loss.
(b) The recording
			 element cannot print a weight if either of the gates leading directly to or
			 from the weigh hopper is open.
(c)
			 A "low paper" sensor, when provided, is activated.
(d) The system will operate only in the
			 proper sequence in all modes of operation.
(e) When an overfill alarm is activated, the
			 system shall indicate and record an overfill condition. (Amended
			 1993)
S.3.3.
Overfill Sensor.
(a) The weigh
			 hopper shall be equipped with an overfill sensor which will cause the feed gate
			 to close, activate an alarm, and inhibit weighing until the overfill condition
			 has been corrected.
(Added 1993)
(b)
If the system is equipped with a
			 lower garner or surge bin, that garner shall also be equipped with an overfill
			 sensor which will cause the gate of the weigh hopper to remain open, activate
			 an alarm, and inhibit weighing until the overfill condition has been
			 corrected.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1998]
(Amended 1997)
S.4.
Design of Weighing
			 Elements.
S.4.1.
Antifriction
			 Means.
- At all points at which a live part of the mechanism may come
			 into contact with another part in the course of normal usage, frictional
			 effects shall be reduced to a minimum by means of suitable antifriction means,
			 opposing surfaces and points being properly shaped, finished, and
			 hardened.
S.4.2.
Adjustable
			 Components.
- An adjustable component, such as a potentiometer, shall be
			 held securely in adjustment and, except for a component for adjusting level or
			 a no-load reference value, shall not be adjustable from the outside of the
			 device.
S.4.3.
Multiple
			 Load-Receiving Elements.
- A system with a single indicating or
			 recording element, or a combination indicating recording element, that is
			 coupled to two or more load-receiving elements with independent weighing
			 systems, shall be provided with means to prohibit the activation of any
			 load-receiving element (or elements) not in use, and shall be provided with
			 automatic means to indicate clearly and definitely which load-receiving element
			 (or elements) is in use.
S.4.4.
Venting.
- All weighing systems shall be vented so that any
			 internal or external pressure will not affect the accuracy or operation of the
			 system.
S.5.
Marking Requirements.
(Also see Section 1.10. General Code paragraph
			 G-S.1. Identification.)
S.5.1.
Capacity
			 and Value of the Scale Division.
- The capacity of the weighing system
			 and the value of the scale division shall be clearly and conspicuously marked
			 on the indicating element near the weight value indications.
S.5.2.
Weighing Elements.
- On
			 a weighing element not permanently attached to an indicating element, there
			 shall be clearly and permanently marked for the purposes of identification, the
			 name, initials, or trademark of the manufacturer, the manufacturer's
			 designation that positively identifies the pattern or design, and the nominal
			 capacity.
S.5.3.
Temperature Limits.
-
Unless the temperature range is -
			 10 °C to + 40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F), the temperature range shall
			 be marked on the device.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
(Added 1985)
S.5.4.
Accuracy
			 Class.
(a)
All
			 systems used to weigh grain shall be marked Class III.*
(b)
All other systems shall be
			 marked either Class III or III L.*
(*Also see Section 2.20. Scales Code for the parameters
				for these accuracy classes for scales. The specific requirements for automatic
				bulk weighing systems apply to these devices when there is a conflict between
				the Scales Code and the Automatic Bulk Weighing Systems Code.) [Nonretroactive
				as of January 1, 1986]
(Added 1985) (Amended 1992)
N.
Notes
N.1.
Testing Procedures.
N.1.1.
Test Weights.
- The
			 increasing load test shall be conducted using test weights equal to at least 10
			 % of the capacity of the system:
(a) on
			 automatic grain bulk-weighing systems installed after January 1, 1984;
			 and
(b) on other automatic
			 bulk-weighing systems installed after January 1, 1986. (Amended
			 1987)
N.1.2.
Increasing-Load Test.
- An increasing-load test consisting of
			 substitution and strain-load tests shall be conducted up to the used capacity
			 of the weighing system.
(Amended 1987)
N.1.3.
Decreasing-Load Test.
- A
			 decreasing-load test shall be conducted on devices used to weigh out.
(Added 1986)
N.1.4.
Zero-Balance or No-Load
			 Reference Value Change Test.
- A test for change of zero-balance or
			 no-load reference value shall be conducted on all scales after the removal of
			 any test load. The change shall not be more than the minimum tolerance
			 applicable.
N.1.5.
Discrimination Test.
-
A discrimination
			 test shall be conducted on all automatic indicating scales
with the weighing device in equilibrium at zero-load
				and at maximum test load, and under controlled conditions in which
				environmental factors are reduced to the extent that they will not affect the
				results obtained. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
N.1.5.1.
Digital Device.
- On a
			 digital device, this test is conducted from just below the lower edge of the
			 zone of uncertainty for increasing-load tests, or from just above the upper
			 edge of the zone of uncertainty for decreasing-load tests.
(Added 1987)
N.2.
Verification (Testing) Standards.
- Standard weights and masses used in verifying weighing devices shall
			 comply with requirements of NIST Handbook 105-1 (Class F) or the tolerances
			 expressed in Appendix A, Fundamental Considerations, paragraph 3.2. (i.e.,
			 one-third of the smallest tolerance applied).
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Tolerance Application.
-
			 Tolerance values shall be applied to all indications and recorded
			 representations of a weighing system.
T.1.1.
To Errors of Underregistration and Overregistration.
- The
			 tolerances hereinafter prescribed shall be applied equally to errors of
			 underregistration and errors of overregistration.
T.1.2.
To Increasing-Load Tests.
- Basic tolerances shall be applied.
T.1.3.
To Decreasing-Load Tests.
- Basic tolerances shall be applied to systems used to weigh out.
(Added 1986)
T.1.4.
To Tests Involving Digital
			 Indications or Representations.
- To the tolerances that would otherwise
			 be applied, there shall be added an amount equal to one-half the value of the
			 scale division. This does not apply to digital indications or recorded
			 representations that have been corrected for rounding using error weights.
(Added 1986)
T.2. Minimum Tolerance Values.
- The
				minimum tolerance value shall not be less than half the value of the scale
				division.
T.2.1.
For
			 Systems Used to Weigh Construction Materials.
- The minimum maintenance
			 and acceptance tolerance shall be 0.1 % of the weighing capacity of the system,
			 or the value of the scale division, whichever is less.
(Added 1986)
T.3.
Basic Tolerance Values.
T.3.1.
Acceptance Tolerance.
-
			 The basic acceptance tolerance shall be one-half the basic maintenance
			 tolerance.
T.3.2.
For Systems
			 Used to Weigh Grain.
- The basic maintenance tolerance shall be 0.1 % of
			 test load.
T.3.3.
For All
			 Other Systems.
- The basic maintenance tolerance shall be 0.2 % of test
			 load.
(Amended 1986)
T.4.
Time Dependence.
-
At constant test conditions, the indication 20
			 seconds after the application of a load and the indication after one hour shall
			 not differ by more than the absolute value of the applicable tolerance for the
			 applied load. [Nonretroactive and enforceable as of January 1, 1987]
(Added 1986)
T.5.
Repeatability.
- The
			 results obtained by several weighings of the same load under reasonably static
			 test conditions shall agree within the absolute value of the maintenance
			 tolerance for that load, and shall be within applicable tolerances.
(Added 1986)
T.6.
Discrimination, Digital Automatic
			 Indicating Scales.
- A test load equivalent to 1.4 d shall cause a
			 change in the indicated or recorded value of at least 2.0 d. This requires the
			 zone of uncertainty to be not greater than 0.3 times the value of the scale
			 division.
(Added 1985)
T.7.
Influence Factors.
-
The following factors are applicable to tests
			 conducted under controlled conditions only, provided that:
(a)
types of devices approved prior
			 to January 1, 1986, and manufactured prior to January 1, 1988, need not meet
			 the requirements of this section; and
(b)
new types of devices submitted
			 for approval after January 1, 1986, shall comply with the requirements of this
			 section; and
(c)
all devices manufactured after January 1, 1988, shall comply with the
			 requirements of this section. [Nonretroactive as of January 1,
			 1986]
T.7.1.
Temperature.
-
Devices shall satisfy the
			 tolerance requirements under the following temperature
conditions:
T.7.1.1.
If not marked on the device,
			 the temperature limits shall be: - 10 °C to 40 °C (14 °F to 104
			 °F).
T.7.1.2.
If temperature limits are specified for the device, the range shall be
			 at least 30 °C (54 °F).
T.7.1.3.
Temperature Effect on
			 Zero-Load Balance.
-
The zero-load indicator shall not
			 vary by more than one division per 5 °C (9 °F) change in
			 temperature
.
T.7.1.4.
Operating Temperature.
-
An indicating
			 or recording element shall not display or record any usable values until the
			 operating temperature necessary for accurate weighing and a stable zero-balance
			 condition has been attained. [Nonretroactive as of January 1,
			 1986]
T.7.2.
Barometric Pressure.
-
The zero
			 indication shall not vary by more than one scale division for a
change in barometric pressure of 1 kPa over the total
				barometric range of 95 kPa to 105 kPa (28 in to 31 in of
mercury).
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
T.7.3.
Electric Power
			 Supply.
T.7.3.1.
Power Supply,
			 Voltage, and Frequency.
(a) Weighing
			 devices that operate using alternating current must perform within the
			 conditions defined in paragraphs T.2. through T.7., inclusive over the line
			 voltage range of 100 V to 130 V or 200 V to 250 V rms as appropriate and over
			 the frequency range of 59.5 Hz to 60.5 Hz.
(b) Battery-operated instruments shall not
			 indicate nor record values outside the applicable tolerance limits when battery
			 power output is excessive or deficient.
T.7.3.2.
Power Interruption.
-
A power interruption shall not cause an indicating or recording element
			 to display or record any values outside the applicable tolerance limits.
			 [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
(Added 1985)
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Selection Requirements.
UR.1.1.
For Systems used to
			 Weigh Grain.
-
The number of scale divisions of a
			 weighing system shall not be less than 2 000 nor greater than 10 000 divisions.
			 [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1984]
(Amended 1986 and 1992)
U.R.1.2.
For Systems used to
			 Weigh Commodities other than Grain.
-
The number of
			 scale divisions shall not be less than 500 nor greater than 10 000.
			 [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1987]
(Added 1986)
UR.2.
Installation
			 Requirements.
UR.2.1.
Protection
			 from Environmental Factors.
- The indicating elements, the lever system
			 or load cells, the load-receiving element, and any permanently installed test
			 weights shall be adequately protected from environmental factors such as wind,
			 weather, and RFI that may adversely affect the operation or performance of the
			 system.
UR.2.2.
Foundation,
			 Supports, and Clearance.
- The foundation and supports of any system
			 shall be such as to provide strength, rigidity, and permanence of all
			 components, and clearance shall be provided around all live parts so that no
			 contact can result before or during operation of the system.
UR.3.
Loading
			 Requirements.
UR.3.1.
For
			 Systems Used to Weigh Grain.
- A system shall not be used to weigh
			 drafts less than 40 % of the weighing capacity of the system except for a final
			 partial draft. Loads shall not normally be retained on the weighing element for
			 a period longer than a normal weighing cycle.
(Amended 1986)
UR.3.2.
For Systems Used to Weigh
			 Commodities Other than Grain.
-
A system shall not be used to
			 weigh drafts less than 20 % of the weighing capacity of the system except for a
			 final partial draft. Loads shall not normally be retained on the weighing
			 element for a period longer than a normal weighing cycle. [Nonretroactive as of
			 January 1, 1987]
(Added 1986)
UR.4.
System Modification.
-
			 The weighing system shall not be modified except when the modification has been
			 approved by a competent engineering authority, preferably that of the
			 engineering department of the manufacturer of the scale, and the official with
			 statutory authority having jurisdiction over the scale.
(Amended 1991)
Section 2.23.
Weights
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code
			 applies to commercial weights; that is, weights used in connection with
			 commercial weighing devices.
A.2.
Exceptions.
- This code does not apply to test weights or to
			 other "standards" of mass.
A.3.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements
			 of this code, Weights shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General
			 Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Material.
- The material used for weights shall be as follows:
(a) Weights of 6 g or 100 gr and larger shall
			 be made of a metal, or a metal alloy, not softer than brass.
(b) Weights of less than 6 g or 100 gr may be
			 made of aluminum, but shall not be made of iron or of unplated steel, except
			 stainless steel.
S.2.
Design.
S.2.1.
Surface.
- The surface of a weight shall be smooth and shall not be coated with
			 thick, soft, or brittle material. A weight of more than 2 g or 30 gr or shall
			 not have sharp edges, points, or corners.
S.2.2.
Ring.
- A ring on a
			 weight shall not be split or removable.
S.3.
Adjusting Material.
-
			 Adjusting material shall be securely positioned and shall not project beyond
			 the surface of the weight.
S.4.
Marking Requirements.
S.4.1.
General.
- A weight shall be marked to show clearly its nominal
			 value, which shall include identification of the unit; however, the nominal
			 value of a weight of 30 gr or 2 g, or less, may be designated by dots, lines,
			 figures, distinctive shape, or other appropriate means.
S.4.2.
Apothecaries' Weights.
-
			 On apothecaries' dram, ounce, and pound weights, the letters "ap" shall be used
			 in combination with the nominal value and the appropriate abbreviation of or
			 symbol for the unit.
S.4.3.
Troy Weights.
- On troy ounce and pound weights, the letter "t" shall be
			 used in combination with the nominal value and the appropriate symbol of the
			 unit.
S.4.4.
Metric Weights.
- On metric weights, the symbols "kg," "g," and "mg" shall be used in
			 combination with the nominal value of kilograms, grams, and milligrams,
			 respectively.
S.4.5.
Carat
			 Weights.
- On carat weights, the letter "c" shall be used in combination
			 with the nominal value.
S.4.6.
Counterpoise Weight.
- A counterpoise weight shall be marked to
			 show clearly both its nominal value and the value it represents when used on
			 the multiplying-lever scale for which it is intended.
N.
Notes
N.1.
Testing Procedures.
-
			 Commercial weights should be tested on a precision balance using standard
			 weights, the errors of which, when used without correction, do not exceed 
			 1/3 of the smallest tolerance to be
			 applied. (Also see Appendix A, Fundamental Considerations, paragraphs 3.2.
			 Tolerance for Standars and 3.3. Accuracy of Standards.)
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
In Excess and In Deficiency.
- The tolerances hereinafter prescribed shall be applied equally to
			 errors in excess and errors in deficiency.
T.2.
On Avoirdupois Weights.
-
			 The maintenance tolerances shall be as shown in Table 1. Maintenance Tolerance
			 for Avoirdupois Weights. Acceptance tolerances shall be one-half the
			 maintenance tolerances.
Table 1. Maintenance Tolerance for Avoirdupois
						  Weights
Maintenance Tolerance
Nominal Value
Equal-Arm Weights
Counterpoise Weights
For scales with multiples of less than
						  1000
For scales with multiples of 1000 or
						  over
oz
Grains
mg
grains
mg
grains
mg
V64
0.1
6
V32
0.3
19
V16
0.4
26
V8
0.5
32
%
1.0
65
'/2
1.5
97
1.0
65
1
1.7
110
1.0
65
2
2.0
130
1.0
65
3
2.0
130
1.5
97
4
3.0
190
1.5
97
1.0
65
5
3.5
230
1.5
97
1.0
65
6
3.5
230
1.5
97
8
4.0
260
2.0
130
1.5
97
10
4.0
260
2.5
160
2.0
130
12
5.0
320
2.5
160
2.0
130
Lb
Grains
mg
grains
mg
grains
mg
1
5.0
320
3.0
190
2.5
160
2
7.0
450
6.0
390
4.0
260
3
9.0
580
9.0
580
5.0
320
4
11.0
710
11.0
710
6.0
390
5
15.0
970
12.0
780
6.5
420
6
17.0
1190
7
19.0
1200
8
21.0
1400
15.0
970
9.0
580
9
23.0
1500
10
25.0
1600
18.0
1160
10.0
650
15
28.0
1800
20
30.0
1900
25
35.0
2300
30
40.0
2600
40
45.0
2900
50
50.0
3200
T.3.
On Metric Weights.
- The maintenance tolerances shall be as shown
			 in Table 2. Maintenance Tolerances for Metric Weights. Acceptance tolerances
			 shall be one-half the maintenance tolerances.
T.4.
On Carat Weights.
- The
			 maintenance tolerances shall be as shown in Table 2. Maintenance Tolerances for
			 Metric Weights. Acceptance tolerances shall be one-half the maintenance
			 tolerances.
Table 2. Maintenance Tolerances for Metric
						  Weights
Nominal Value (mg)
Maintenance
Tolerance
(mg)
Nominal
Value
(g)
Maintenance
Tolerance
(mg)
5 or less
0.1
1
4
10
0.3
2
6
20
0.4
3
8
30
0.6
5
10
50
0.8
10
15
100
1.0
20
20
200
1.5
30
30
300
2.0
50
40
500
3.0
100
70
200
100
300
150
500
175
Nominal
Value
(kg)
Maintenance
Tolerance
(mg)
Nominal
Value
(carats)
Maintenance
Tolerance
(mg)
1
250
0.25*
0.6
2
400
0.5**
1.0
3
500
1.0
1.5
5
800
2.0
2.0
10
1000
3.0
3.0
20
1500
5.0
4.0
10.0
6.0
20.0
10.0
30.0
12.0
50.0
15.0
100.0
25.0
*25 points or less
**50 points
T.5.
On Apothecaries and Troy Weights.
- The maintenance tolerances
			 shall be as shown in Table 3. Maintenance Tolerances for Apothecaries' and Troy
			 Weights. Acceptance tolerances shall be one-half the maintenance tolerances.
Table 3. Maintenance Tolerances for Apothecaries'
						  and Troy Weights
Nominal Value
Maintenanc
e Tolerance
Nominal Value
Maintenanc
e Tolerance
grains
grains
mg
oz
grains
mg
1
0.01
0.6
1
0.4
25.0
2
0.02
1.3
2
0.6
40.0
3
0.03
2.0
3
1.0
65.0
5
0.03
2.0
4
1.5
100.0
10
0.04
2.5
5
1.6
105.0
20
0.06
4.0
scruples
grains
mg
oz
grains
mg
1
0.06
4.0
6
1.8
115.0
2
0.10
6.5
7
1.9
125.0
8
2.0
130.0
9
2.1
135.0
10
2.2
145.0
dr
grains
mg
oz
grains
mg
0.5
0.07
4.5
11
2.4
155.0
1.0
0.10
6.5
12
2.5
160.0
2.0
0.20
13.0
20
2.9
190.0
3.0
0.30
20.0
30
3.7
240.0
4.0
0.40
25.0
50
5.4
350.0
5.0
0.50
30.0
6.0
0.60
40.0
dwt
grains
mg
oz
grains
mg
1
0.06
4.0
100
7.7
500.0
2
0.10
6.5
200
12.3
800.0
3
0.15
10.0
300
15.4
1 000.0
4
0.20
13.0
500
23.1
1 500.0
5
0.30
20.0
1 000
38.6
2 500.0
10
0.40
25.0
Section 2.24.
Automatic Weighing
			 Systems
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code
			 applies to devices used to automatically weigh pre-assembled discrete loads or
			 single loads or loose materials in applications where automatic weighing
			 systems36 are used or employed in the determination
			 of quantities, things, produce, or articles for distribution, for purchase,
			 offered or submitted for sale, for distribution, purchase, or in computing any
			 basic charge or payment for services rendered on the basis of weight, and in
			 packaging plants subject to regulation by the USDA. Some weigh-labelers and
			 checkweighers may also include a scale that is incorporated in a conveyor
			 system that weighs packages in a static or non-automatic weighing
			 mode37.
This includes:
(a)
			 Automatic weigh-labelers;
(b)
			 Combination automatic and non-automatic weigh-labelers;
(c) Automatic checkweighers;
(d) Combination automatic and non-automatic
			 checkweighers; and
(e) Automatic
			 gravimetric filling machines that weigh discrete loads or single loads of loose
			 materials and determine package and production lot compliance with net content
			 representations.
(Amended 1997 and 2004)
A.2.
Exceptions. -
This code
			 does not apply to:
(a) Belt-Conveyor Scale
			 Systems;
(b) Railway Track
			 Scales;
(c) Monorail
			 Scales;
(d) Automatic Bulk-Weighing
			 Systems;
36 An automatic weighing system does
				not require the intervention of an operator during the weighing process. The
				necessity to give instructions to start a process or to release a load or the
				function of the instrument (static, dynamic, set-up, etc.) is not relevant in
				deciding the category of automatic or non-automatic instruments.
(Added 2004)
37 Prepackaging scales (and other
				commercial devices) used for putting up packages in advance of sale are
				acceptable for use in commerce if all appropriate provisions of Handbook 44 are
				met. Users of such devices must be alert to the legal requirements relating to
				the declaration of quantity on a package. Such requirements are to the effect
				that, on the average, the contents of the individual packages of a particular
				commodity comprising a lot, shipment, or delivery must contain at least the
				quantity declared on the label. The fact that a scale or other commercial
				device may overregister, but within established tolerances, and is approved for
				commercial service is not a legal justification for packages to contain, on the
				average, less than the labeled quantity.
(Added 2004)
(e) Devices that measure quantity on a time
			 basis;
(f) Controllers or other
			 auxiliary devices except as they may affect the weighing performance;
			 or
(g) Automatic gravimetric
			 filling machines and other automatic weighing systems employed in determining
			 the weight of a commodity in a plant or business with a separate quantity
			 control program (e.g., a system of statistical process control) using suitable
			 weighing instruments and measurement standards traceable to national standards
			 to determine production lot compliance with net content
			 representations.38
(Added 2004)
A.3.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code, Automatic Weighing
			 Systems shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Design
			 of Indicating and Recording Elements and of Recorded Representations.
S.1.1.
Zero Indication.
(a) A weigh-labeler shall be equipped with an
			 indicating or recording element. Additionally, a weigh-labeler equipped with an
			 indicating or recording element shall either indicate or record a zero-balance
			 condition and an out-of-balance condition on both sides of zero.
(Amended 2004)
(b) An automatic checkweigher may be equipped
			 with an indicating or recording element.
(c) A zero-balance condition may be indicated
			 by other than a continuous digital zero indication, provided that effective
			 automatic means is provided to inhibit a weighing operation or to return to a
			 continuous digital indication when the device is in an out-of-balance
			 condition.
S.1.1.1.
Digital
			 Indicating Elements.
(a) A digital zero
			 indication shall represent a balance condition that is within ±
															½
			 scale division.
(b) A digital
			 indicating device shall either automatically maintain a "center of zero"
			 condition to ±
															¼ scale division or less, or have an auxiliary or
			 supplemental "center-of-zero" indicator that defines a zero-balance condition
			 to ±
															¼ scale division or less.
(c) Verification of the accuracy of the
			 center of zero indication to ±
															¼ scale division or less during
			 automatic operation is not required on automatic checkweighers.
(Amended 2004)
38 See NIST Handbook 130, "Uniform Laws
				and Regulations in the Area of Legal Metrology and Engine Fuel Quality,"
				Interpretations and Guidelines, paragraph 2.6.11. Good Quantity Control
				Practices.
S.1.2.
Value of Division Units.
- The value of a division d expressed in a unit of weight shall be equal
			 to:
(a) 1, 2, or 5; or
(b) a decimal multiple or submultiple of 1,
			 2, or 5.
The requirement that the value of the scale division be
				expressed only as 1, 2, or 5, or a decimal multiple or submultiple of only 1,
				2, or 5 does not apply to net weight indications and recorded representations
				that are calculated from gross and tare weight indications where the scale
				division of the gross weight is different from the scale division of the tare
				weight(s) on multi-interval or multiple range scales. For example, a multiple
				range or multi-interval scale may indicate and record tare weights in a lower
				weighing range (WR) or weighing segment (WS), gross weights in the higher
				weighing range or weighing segment, and net weights as follows:
55 kg Gross Weight (WR2 d = 5 kg)
10.05 lb Gross Weight (WS2 d = 0.05 lb)
- 4 kg
Tare Weight (WR1 d = 2
						  kg)
- 0.06 lb
Tare Weight (WS1 d =
						  0.02 lb)
= 51 kg Net Weight (Mathematically Correct)
= 9.99 lb Net Weight (Mathematically Correct)
(Amended 2008)
S.1.2.1.
Weight Units.
- Except
			 for postal scales, indicating and recording elements for shipping and postal
			 applications, and scales used to print standard pack labels, a device shall
			 indicate weight values using only a single unit of measure.
(Amended 2004)
S.1.3.
Provision for Sealing.
(a)
Automatic Weighing Systems, Except
			 Automatic Checkweighers.
- A device shall be designed with provision(s)
			 as specified in Table S.1.3. Categories of Device and Methods of Sealing for
			 applying a security seal that must be broken, or for using other approved means
			 of providing security (e.g., data change audit trail available at the time of
			 inspection), before any change that detrimentally affects the metrological
			 integrity of the device can be made to any electronic mechanism.
(b)
For Automatic Checkweighers.
- Security seals are not required in applications where it would
			 prohibit an authorized user from having access to the calibration functions of
			 a device.
Table S.1.3. Categories of Device and Methods of
						  Sealing
Categories of Device
Methods of Sealing
Category 1:
No Remote configuration
						  capability.
Seal by physical seal or two event counters: one for
						  calibration parameters and one for configuration parameters.
Category 2:
Remote configuration
						  capability, but access is controlled by physical hardware.
The device shall clearly indicate that it is in the
						  remote configuration mode and record such message if capable of printing in
						  this mode.
The hardware enabling access for remote communication
						  must be at the device and sealed using a physical seal or two event counters:
						  one for calibration parameters and one for configuration parameters.
Category 3:
Remote configuration
						  capability access may be unlimited or controlled through a software switch
						  (e.g., password).
An event logger is required in the device; it must
						  include an event counter (000 to 999), the parameter ID, the date and time of
						  the change, and the new value of the parameter. A printed copy of the
						  information must be available through the device or through another on-site
						  device. The event logger shall have a capacity to retain records equal to 10
						  times the number of sealable parameters in the device, but not more than 1000
						  records are required. (
Note:
Does not require 1000 changes to be
						  stored for each parameter.)
S.1.4.
Automatic Calibration.
-
			 A device may be fitted with an automatic or a semi-automatic calibration
			 mechanism. This mechanism shall be incorporated inside the device. After
			 sealing, neither the mechanism nor the calibration process shall facilitate
			 fraud.
S.1.5.
Adjustable
			 Components.
- Adjustable components shall be held securely in adjustment
			 and, except for a zero-load balance mechanism, shall be located within the
			 housing of the element.
S.2.
Design of Zero and Tare
			 Mechanisms.
S.2.1.
Zero Load
			 Adjustment.
S.2.1.1.
Automatic
			 Zero-Tracking Mechanism.
- Except for automatic checkweighers, under
			 normal operating conditions the maximum load that can be "rezeroed," when
			 either placed on or removed from the platform all at once, shall be 1.0 scale
			 division.
Except for an initial zero-setting mechanism, an automatic zero
				adjustment outside these limits is prohibited.
(Amended 2004 and 2010)
S.2.1.2.
Initial Zero-Setting
			 Mechanism.
- Except for automatic checkweighers, an initial zero-setting
			 mechanism shall not zero a load in excess of 20 % of the maximum capacity of
			 the automatic weighing system unless tests show that the scale meets all
			 applicable tolerances for any amount of initial load compensated by this device
			 within the specified range.
S.2.2.
Tare.
- On any automatic
			 weighing system (except for multi-interval scales or multiple range scales when
			 the value of tare is determined in a lower weighing range or weighing segment)
			 the value of the tare division shall be equal to the value of the scale
			 division. The tare mechanism shall operate only in a backward direction (i.e.,
			 in a direction of underregistration) with respect to the zero-load balance
			 condition of the automatic weighing system. A device designed to automatically
			 clear any tare value shall also be designed to prevent the automatic clearing
			 of tare until a complete transaction has been indicated.
(Amended 2008)
Note:
On a computing automatic weighing system,
				this requires the input of a unit price, the display of the unit price, and a
				computed positive total price at a readable equilibrium. Other devices require
				that a transaction or lot run be completed.
(Note Amended 2004)
S.3.
Verification Scale
			 Interval.
S.3.1.
Multiple Range
			 and Multi-Interval Automatic Weighing System.
- The value of e shall be
			 equal to the value of d.
S.3.2.
Load Cell Verification Interval Value.
- The relationship of the
			 value for the load cell verification scale interval,
			 vmin, to the scale division d for a specific scale
			 installation shall be:
Click
				here to view image
, where N is the number of load cells in the scale.
Note:
When the value of the scale division d
				differs from the verification scale division e for the scale, the value of e
				must be used in the formula above.
S.3.3. - For automatic checkweighers, the
			 value of e shall be specified by the manufacturer and may be larger than d, but
			 in no case can e be more than ten times the value of d.
S.4.
Weight Indicators, Weight
			 Displays, Reports, and Labels.
S.4.1.
Additional Digits in Displays.
- Auxiliary digital displays that
			 provide additional digits for use during performance evaluation may be included
			 on automatic checkweighers. However, in cases where these indications are not
			 valid for determining the actual weight of a package (e.g., only appropriate
			 for use in statistical process control programs by users) they shall be clearly
			 and distinctly differentiated from valid weight displays by indicating them to
			 the user.
For example, the additional digits may be differentiated by
				color, partially covered by placing crosshatch overlays on the display, or made
				visible only after the operator presses a button or turns a key to set the
				device in a mode which enables the additional digits.
S.4.2.
Damping.
- An indicating
			 element equipped with other than automatic recording elements shall be equipped
			 with effective means to permit the recording of weight values only when the
			 indication is stable within plus or minus one scale division. The values
			 recorded shall be within applicable tolerances.
S.4.3.
Over Capacity Indication.
- An indicating or recording element shall not display nor record any
			 values when the scale capacity is exceeded by nine scale divisions.
S.4.4.
Label Printer.
- A
			 device that produces a printed ticket to be used as the label for a package
			 shall print all values digitally and of such size, style of type, and color as
			 to be clear and conspicuous on the label.
S.4.4.1.
Label Printing.
- If
			 an automatic checkweigher prints a label containing weight information that
			 will be used in a commercial transaction, it must conform to all of the
			 requirements specified for weigh-labelers so that the printed ticket meets
			 appropriate requirements.
S.5.
Accuracy Class.
S.5.1.
Marking.
- Weigh-labelers
			 and automatic checkweighers shall be Class III devices and shall be marked
			 accordingly, except that a weigh-labeler marked Class IIIS may be used in
			 package shipping applications.
(Amended 1997)
S.6.
Parameters for Accuracy Classes.
- The number of divisions for device capacity is designated by the
			 manufacturer and shall comply with parameters shown in Table S.6. Parameters
			 for Accuracy Classes.
Table S.6. Parameters for Accuracy
						  Classes
Number of Divisions (n)
Class
Value of the Verification Division
						  (e)
Minimum
Maximum
SI Units
III
0.1 to 2 g, inclusive
100
10 000
equal to or greater than 5 g
500
10 000
U.S. Customary Units
III
0.0002 lb to 0.005 lb, inclusive
100
10 000
0.005 oz to 0.125 oz, inclusive
100
10 000
equal to or greater than 0.01 lb
500
10 000
equal to or greater than 0.25 oz
500
10 000
IIIS
greater than 0.01 lb
100
1 000
greater than 0.25 oz
100
1 000
For Class III devices, the value of e is specified by
						  the manufacturer as marked on the device; d shall not be smaller than 0.1 e. e
						  shall be differentiated from d by size, shape, or color.
(Amended 2004)
S.7.
Marking Requirements.
[Also see G-S.1. Identification, G-S.4. Interchange or Reversal of
			 Parts, G-S.6. Marking Operational Controls, Indications, and Features, G-S.7.
			 Lettering, G-UR.2.1.1. Visibility of Identification, and UR.3.3. Special
			 Designs]
S.7.1.
Location of Marking
			 Information.
- Automatic weighing systems which are not permanently
			 attached to an indicating element, and for which the load-receiving element is
			 the only part of the weighing/load-receiving element visible after
			 installation, may have the marking information required in Section 1.10.
			 General Code, G-S.1. Identification, and Section 2.24. Automatic Weighing
			 Systems Code, Table S.7.a. Marking Requirements and Table S.7.b. Notes for
			 Table S.7.a. located in an area that is accessible only through the use of a
			 tool; provided that the information is easily accessible (e.g., the information
			 may appear on the junction box under an access plate). The identification
			 information for these automatic weighing systems shall be located on the
			 weighbridge (load-receiving element) near the point where the signal leaves the
			 weighing element, or beneath the nearest access cover.
Table S.7.a. Marking Requirements
To Be
Marked With
Weighing Equipment
Weighing, load-receiving, and indicating element
						  in same housing
Indicating element
not permanently
attached to
weighing and
load-receiving
element
Weighing and load-receiving
element not permanently
attached to indicating element
Load cell with CC (10)
Other
equipment
or device
(9)
Manufacturer's ID (1)
x
x
x
x
x
Model Designation (1)
x
x
x
x
x
Serial Number and Prefix (2)
x
x
x
x
x (13)
Certificate of Conformance
(CC) Number
(16)
x
x
x
x
x (16)
Accuracy Class (14)
x
x (8)
x
x
Nominal Capacity (3)(15)
x
x
x
Value of Division, d (3)
x
x
Value of e
(4)
x
x
Temperature Limits (5)
x
x
x
x
Special Application (11)
x
x
x
Maximum Number of Scale Divisions, nmax
						  (6)
x (8)
x
x
Minimum Verification Division,
						  (emin)
x
"S" or "M"
(7)
x
Direction of Loading (12)
x
Minimum Dead Load
x
Maximum Capacity
(
Max)
x
x
Minimum Capacity (Min
)
x
Safe Load Limit
x
Load Cell Verification Interval
						  (vmin)
x
Maximum Belt Speed (m/sec or m/min)
x
x
Note:
Also see Table S.7.b. for applicable
						  parenthetical notes.
(Amended 1999)
Table S.7.b. Notes for Table S.7.a.
1. Manufacturer's identification and model designation.
						  (Also see G-S.1. Identification)
2. Serial number and prefix. Also see G-S.1.
						  Identification)
3. The nominal capacity and value of the automatic
						  weighing system division shall be shown together (e.g., 50 000 × 5 kg, or
						  30 × 0.01 lb) adjacent to the weight display when the nominal capacity
						  and value of the automatic weighing system division are not immediately
						  apparent. Each division value or weight unit shall be marked on
						  variable-division value or division-unit automatic weighing systems.
4. Required only if different from d.
5. Required only on automatic weighing systems if the
						  temperature range on the NTEP CC is narrower than and within - 10 ºC to 40
						  ºC (14 ºF to 104 ºF). (Amended 2007)
6. This value may be stated on load cells in units of
						  1000; (e.g., nmax 10 is 10 000 divisions.)
7. Denotes compliance for single or multiple load cell
						  applications.
8. An indicating element not permanently attached to a
						  weighing element shall be clearly and permanently marked with the accuracy
						  Class III, or IIIS and the maximum number of divisions,
						  nmax.
9. Necessary to the weighing system but having no
						  metrological effect (e.g., auxiliary remote display, keyboard, etc.).
10. The markings may be either on the load cell or in
						  an accompanying document; except that, if an accompanying document is provided,
						  the serial number shall appear both on the load cell and in the document. The
						  manufacturer's name or trademark, the model designation, and identifying symbol
						  for the serial number shall also be marked both on the load cell and in any
						  accompanying document.
11. An automatic weighing system designed for a special
						  application rather than general use shall be conspicuously marked with suitable
						  words visible to the operator and customer restricting its use to that
						  application.
12. Required if the direction of loading the load cell
						  is not obvious.
13. Serial number and prefix (Also see G-S.1.
						  Identification) modules without "intelligence" on a modular system (e.g.,
						  printer, keyboard module, cash drawer, and secondary display in a point-of-sale
						  system) are not required to have serial numbers.
14. The accuracy class of a device shall be marked on
						  the device with the appropriate designation.
15. The nominal capacity shall be conspicuously marked
						  on any automatic-indicating or recording automatic weighing system so
						  constructed that the capacity of the indicating or recording element, or
						  elements, is not immediately apparent.
16. Required only if a CC has been issued for the
						  equipment.
S.7.2.
Marking Required on Components of Automatic Weighing Systems.
-
			 The following components of automatic weighing systems shall be marked as
			 specified in Tables S.7.a. Marking Requirements and S.7.b. Notes for Table
			 S.7.2.a.:
(a) Main elements and components
			 when not contained in a single enclosure for the entire automatic weighing
			 system;
(b) Load cells for which
			 Certificates of Conformance (CC) have been issued under the National Type
			 Evaluation Program; and
(c) Other
			 equipment necessary to a weighing system but having no metrological effect on
			 the weighing system.
N.
Notes
N.1.
Test Requirements for Automatic
			 Weighing Systems.
N.1.1.
Test
			 Pucks and Packages.
(a) Test pucks and
			 packages shall be:
(1) representative of the
			 type, size, and weight ranges to be weighed on a device; and
(2) stable while in motion, hence the length
			 and width of a puck or package should be greater than its height.
(b) For type evaluation the
			 manufacturer shall supply the test pucks or packages for each range of test
			 loads.
(Amended 1997)
N.1.2.
Accuracy of Test Pucks or
			 Packages.
- The error in any test puck or package shall not exceed
			 one-fourth (¼) of the acceptance tolerance. If packages are used to
			 conduct field tests on automatic weighing systems, the package weights shall be
			 determined on a reference scale or balance with an inaccuracy that does not
			 exceed one-fifth (1/5) of the smallest tolerance
			 that can be applied to the device under test.
N.1.3.
Verification (Testing)
			 Standards.
- Field standard weights shall comply with requirements of
NIST Handbook 105-1, "Specifications and Tolerances for Field
				Standard Weights (Class F)" or the tolerances expressed in Fundamental
				Considerations, paragraph 3.2. (i.e., one-third of the smallest tolerance
				applied).
N.1.4.
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) and Other Electromagnetic Interference
			 Susceptibility, Field Evaluation.
- An RFI test shall be conducted at a
			 given installation when the presence of RFI has been verified and characterized
			 if those conditions are considered "usual and customary."
(Added 2004)
N.1.5.
Tests Loads.
- A performance test shall consist of four separate
			 test runs conducted at different test loads according to Table N.1.5. Test
			 Loads.
Table N.1.5. Test Loads
At or near minimum capacity
At or near maximum capacity
At two (2) critical points between minimum and maximum
						  capacity
Test may be conducted at other loads if the device is
						  intended for use at other specific capacities
N.1.6.
Influence Factor Testing.
- Influence factor testing shall be
			 conducted statically.
N.2.
Test Procedures - Weigh-Labelers.
- If the device is designed for use in a non-automatic weighing mode, it
			 shall be tested in the non-automatic mode according to NIST Handbook 44,
			 Section 2.20. Scales Code.
Note:
If the device is designed for only automatic
				weighing, it shall only be tested in the automatic weighing mode. (Amended
				2004)
N.2.1.
Non-Automatic
			 Tests.
N.2.1.1.
Increasing-Load
			 Test.
- The increasing-load test shall be conducted with the test loads
			 approximately centered on the load-receiving element of the scale.
N.2.1.2.
Decreasing-Load Test.
- The decreasing-load test shall be conducted with the test loads
			 approximately centered on the load-receiving element of the scale.
N.2.1.3.
Shift Test.
- To
			 determine the effect of off-center loading, a test load equal to one-half
			 (½) maximum capacity shall be placed in the center of each of the four
			 points equidistant between the center and front, left, back, and right edges of
			 the load receiver.
N.2.1.4.
Discrimination Test.
- A discrimination test shall be conducted with the
			 weighing device in equilibrium at zero-load and at maximum test load, and under
			 controlled conditions in which environmental factors are reduced to the extent
			 that they will not affect the results obtained. This test is conducted from
			 just below the lower edge of the zone of uncertainty for increasing-load tests,
			 or from just above the upper edge of the zone of uncertainty for
			 decreasing-load tests.
N.2.1.5.
Zero-Load Balance Change.
- A zero-load balance change test shall
			 be conducted on all automatic weighing systems after the removal of any test
			 load. The zero-load balance should not change by more than the minimum
			 tolerance applicable. (Also see G-UR.4.2. Abnormal Performance)
(Amended 2004)
N.2.2.
Automatic Test
			 Procedures.
N.2.2.1.
Tests
			 Non-Automatic.
- If the automatic weighing system is designed to operate
			 non-automatically, and is used in that manner, during normal use operation, it
			 shall be tested non-automatically using mass standards. The device shall not be
			 tested non-automatically if it is used only in the automatic mode.
N.2.2.2.
Automatic Tests.
- The
			 device shall be tested at the normal operating speed using packages. Test runs
			 should be conducted using at least two test loads distributed over its normal
			 weighing range (e.g., near the lowest and highest ranges in which the device is
			 typically operated.) Each test load should be run a minimum of ten consecutive
			 times.
(Amended 2004)
N.3.
Test Procedures - Automatic
			 Checkweigher.
N.3.1.
Tests
			 Non-Automatic.
- If the scale is designed to operate non-automatically
			 during normal user operation, it shall be tested non-automatically according to
			 paragraphs N.2.1.1. Increasing Load Test through N.2.1.5. Zero-Balance Change.
(Amended 2004)
N.3.2.
Automatic Tests.
- The
			 device shall be tested at the highest speed in each weight range using
			 standardized test pucks or packages. Test runs shall be conducted using two
			 test loads. The number of consecutive test weighments shall be as specified in
			 Table N.3.2. Number of Sample Weights per Test for Automatic Checkweighers.
(Amended 2004)
Table N.3.2. Number of Sample Weights per Test
						  for Automatic Checkweighers
Weighing Range m = mass of test
						  load
Number of Sample
Weights per Test
Field
Type Evaluation
20 divisions
[LESS THAN]
m
[LESS THAN]
10 kg 20 divisions
[LESS
						  THAN]
m
[LESS THAN]
22 lb
30
60
10 kg [LESS THAN] m
[LESS
						  THAN]
25 kg 22 lb [LESS THAN] m
[LESS
						  THAN]
55 lb
16
32
25 kg [LESS THAN] m
[LESS
						  THAN]
100 kg 55 lb [LESS THAN] m
[LESS
						  THAN]
220 lb
10
20
100 kg (220 lb) [LESS THAN] m
10
10
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Principles.
T.1.1.
Design.
- The tolerance
			 for a weighing device is a performance requirement independent of the design
			 principle used.
T.1.2.
Scale
			 Division.
- The tolerance for a weighing device is related to the value
			 of the scale division (d) or the value of the verification scale division (e)
			 and is generally expressed in terms of d or e. The random tolerance for
			 automatic checkweighers is expressed in terms of Maximum Allowable Variance
			 (MAV).
T.2.
Tolerance Application.
T.2.1.
General.
- The tolerance values are positive (+) and negative (-)
			 with the weighing device adjusted to zero at no load. When tare is in use, the
			 tolerance values are applied from the tare zero reference (zero net weight
			 indication); the tolerance values apply to the net weight indication for any
			 possible tare load using certified test loads.
(Amended 2008)
T.2.2.
Type Evaluation Examinations.
- For type evaluation examinations, the tolerance values apply to
			 increasing and decreasing load tests within the temperature and power supply
			 limits specified in T.7. Influence Factors.
(Amended 2004)
T.2.3.
Subsequent Verification
			 Examinations.
- For subsequent verification examinations, the tolerance
			 values apply regardless of the influence factors in effect at the time of the
			 conduct of the examination. (Also see G-N.2. Testing with Nonassociated
			 Equipment.)
(Added 2007)
T.2.4.
Multiple Range and
			 Multi-Interval Automatic Weighing System.
- For multiple range and
			 multi-interval devices, the tolerance values are based on the value of the
			 scale division of the range in use.
T.3.
Tolerance Values.
Table T.3. Class III - Tolerance in Divisions
						  (e)
Test Load in Divisions
Tolerance in Divisions
Class III
Acceptance
Maintenance
0 - 500
± 0.5
± 1
501 - 2000
± 1.0
± 2
2001 - 4000
± 1.5
± 3
4001 +
± 2.5
± 5
T.3.1.
Tolerance Values - Class III Weigh-Labeler.
(Also see Section
			 T.3.2. Class IIIS
Weigh-Labelers.)
T.3.1.1.
Non-automatic Tests.
-
			 Tolerance values shall be as specified in
Table T.3. Class III - Tolerance in Divisions (e).
(Amended 2004)
T.3.1.2.
Automatic Tests.
-
			 Acceptance tolerance values shall be the same as maintenance tolerance values
			 specified in Table T.3. Class III - Tolerance in Divisions (e).
(Amended 2004)
T.3.2.
Tolerance Values - Class IIIS
			 Weigh-labelers in Package Shipping Applications.
(Added 1997)
T.3.2.1.
Non-automatic Tests.
- Tolerance values shall be as specified in
			 Table T.3.2.1. Non-automatic Tolerances for Class IIIS Weigh-labelers.
(Amended 2004)
T.3.2.2.
Automatic Tests.
-
			 Tolerance values specified in Table T.3.2.2. Automatic Tolerances for Class
			 IIIS Weigh-labelers shall be applied.
(Amended 2004)
Table T.3.2.1.
Non-automatic Tolerances
for Class IIIS Weigh-labelers
Test Load in Divisions
Tolerance in Divisions
Class IIIS
Acceptance
Maintenance
0 - 50
± 0.5
± 1
51 - 200
± 1.0
± 2
201 - 1000
± 1.5
± 3
(Added 1997) (Amended 2004)
Table T.3.2.2.
Automatic Tolerances
for Class IIIS Weigh-labelers
Test Load in Divisions
Tolerance in Divisions
Class IIIS
Acceptance
Maintenance
0 - 50
± 1.5
± 2
51 - 200
± 2.0
± 3
201 - 1000
± 2.5
± 4
(Added 1997) (Amended 2004)
T.3.3.
Tolerance Values.
-
			 Automatic Checkweighers.
T.3.3.1.
Laboratory Tests for Automatic Checkweighers.
T.3.3.1.1.
Non-Automatic Tests.
- The acceptance tolerance values specified in Table T.3. Class III -
			 Tolerance in Divisions (e), shall be applied.
(Amended 2004)
T.3.3.1.2.
Automatic Tests.
(a) The systematic error for each test run
			 shall be within the acceptance tolerances specified in Table T.3. Class III -
			 Tolerance in Divisions (e) for the test loads specified in Table N.1.5. Test
			 Loads.
(Amended 2004)
(b) The standard deviation of the results
			 shall not exceed one-ninth (1/9) of the MAV for
			 specific package weights (which means that three standard deviations cannot
			 exceed one-third (1/3) of the MAV value) as required
			 in the latest edition of NIST Handbook 133, "Checking the Net Contents of
			 Packaged Goods." This value does not change regardless of whether acceptance or
			 maintenance tolerances are being applied to the device under test.
(Amended 2004)
(1) For
			 U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) inspected meat and poultry products
			 packaged at a plant subject to inspection by the USDA Food Safety and
			 Inspection Service, use NIST Handbook 133, Appendix A. Tables, Table 2-9, U.S.
			 Department of Agriculture, Meat and Poultry, Groups and Lower Limits for
			 Individual Packages;
(2) for all
			 other packages with a labeled net quantity in terms of weight, use NIST
			 Handbook 133, Appendix A. Tables, Table 2-5, Maximum Allowable Variations
			 (MAVs) for Packages Labeled by Weight; or
(3) for all packages with a labeled net
			 quantity in terms of liquid or dry volume use NIST Handbook 133, Appendix A.
			 Tables, Table 2-6, Maximum Allowable Variations (MAVs) for Packages Labeled by
			 Liquid or Dry Volume.
(Amended 2004)
T.3.3.2.
Field Tests for
			 Automatic Checkweighers.
T.3.3.2.1.
Non-Automatic Test.
- The tolerance values shall be as specified
			 in Table T.3. Class III - Tolerance in Divisions (e).
(Amended 2004)
T.3.3.2.2.
Automatic Test.
(a) The systematic error requirement is not
			 applied in a field test.
(b) The
			 standard deviation of the test results shall not exceed one-ninth
			 (1/9) of the MAV for specific package weights (which
			 means that three standard deviations cannot exceed one-third
			 (1/3) of the MAV value) as required in the latest
			 Edition of NIST Handbook 133. This value does not change regardless of whether
			 acceptance or maintenance tolerances are being applied to the device under
			 test.
(Amended 2004)
(1) For
			 USDA inspected meat and poultry products packaged at a plant subject to
			 inspection by the USDA Food Safety and Inspection Service, use NIST Handbook
			 133, Appendix A, Tables, Table 2-9, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Meat and
			 Poultry, Groups and Lower Limits for Individual Packages;
(2) for all other packages with a labeled net
			 quantity in terms of weight, use NIST Handbook 133, Appendix A. Tables, Table
			 2-5, Maximum Allowable Variations (MAVs) for Packages Labeled by Weight;
			 or
(3) for all packages with a
			 labeled net quantity in terms of liquid or dry volume use NIST Handbook 133,
			 Appendix A. Tables, Table 2-6. Maximum Allowable Variations (MAVs) for Packages
			 Labeled by Liquid or Dry Volume.
T.4.
Agreement
			 of Indications.
- In the case of a weighing system equipped with more
			 than one indicating element or indicating element and recording element
			 combination, the difference in the weight value indications of any load shall
			 not be greater than the absolute value of the applicable tolerance for that
			 load, and shall be within tolerance limits.
T.5.
Repeatability.
- The
			 results obtained from several weighings of the same load under reasonably
			 constant test conditions shall agree within the absolute value of the
			 maintenance tolerance for that load, and shall be within applicable tolerances.
(Amended 2004)
T.6.
Discrimination.
- A test
			 load equivalent to 1.4 d shall cause a change in the indicated or recorded
			 value of at least 2.0 d. This requires the zone of uncertainty to be not
			 greater than 0.3 d (See N.2.1.4. Discrimination Test).
(Amended 2004)
T.7.
Influence Factors.
- The
			 following factors are applicable to tests conducted under controlled conditions
			 only.
T.7.1.
Temperature.
-
			 Devices shall satisfy the tolerance requirements under the following
			 temperature conditions:
T.7.1.1. if not
			 specified in the operating instructions or if not marked on the device, the
			 temperature limits shall be: - 10 °C to 40 °C (14 °F to 104
			 °F).
T.7.1.2. if temperature
			 limits are specified for the device, the range shall be at least 30 °C (54
			 °F).
T.7.1.3.
Temperature Effect on Zero-Load Balance.
- The zero-load indication
			 shall not vary by more than one division per 5 °C (9 °F) change in
			 temperature.
T.7.1.4.
Operating Temperature.
- The indicating or recording element shall not
			 display nor record any usable values until the operating temperature necessary
			 for accurate weighing and a stable zero balance condition have been
			 attained.
T.7.2.
Electric Power Supply.
T.7.2.1.
Range of Voltages.
(a)
			 Automatic weighing systems that operate using alternating current must perform
			 within the conditions defined in paragraphs T.3. Tolerance Values through T.6.
			 Discrimination, inclusive, when tested over the range of - 15 % to + 10 % of
			 the marked nominal line voltage(s) at 60 Hz, or the voltage range marked by the
			 manufacturer, at 60 Hz.
(b)
			 Automatic weighing systems that operate using DC current must perform within
			 the conditions defined in paragraphs T.3. Tolerance Values through T.6.
			 Discrimination, inclusive, when tested over the range from minimum operating
			 voltage39 to + 20 % of the voltage marked on the
			 instrument (nominal voltage).
(c)
			 Battery-operated electronic automatic weighing systems with external or plug-in
			 power supply (AC or DC) shall either continue to function correctly or not
			 indicate any weight values if the voltage is below the manufacturer's specified
			 value, the latter being larger than or equal to the minimum operating
			 voltage.4
Note:
This requirement applies only to
				metrologically significant voltage supplies. (Amended 2001) (Amended
				2004)
T.7.2.2.
Power
			 Interruption.
- A power interruption shall not cause an indicating or
			 recording element to display or record any values outside the applicable
			 tolerance limits.
T.8.
Radio Frequency Interference
			 (RFI) and Other Electromagnetic Interference Susceptibility.
- The
			 difference between the weight indication with the disturbance and the weight
			 indication without the disturbance (also see N.1.4. Radio Frequency
			 Interference (RFI) and Other Electromagnetic Interference Susceptibility, Field
			 Evaluation) shall not exceed one scale division (d) or the equipment shall:
(a) blank the indication;
(b) provide an error message; or
(c) the indication shall be so completely
			 unstable that it could not be interpreted, or transmitted into memory or to a
			 recording element, as a correct measurement value.
(Amended 2004)
39 The minimum operating voltage is
				defined as the lowest possible operating voltage before the automatic weighing
				system no longer indicates nor records weight values. (Added 2004)
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Selection Requirements.
- Equipment shall be suitable for the service in
			 which it is used with respect to elements of its design, including but not
			 limited to, its capacity, number of scale divisions, value of the scale
			 division or verification scale division, minimum capacity, and computing
			 capability.
UR.1.1.
General.
-
			 Automatic Weighing Systems shall be designated by the manufacturer for that
			 service.
UR.1.2.
Value of
			 the Indicated and Recorded Scale Division.
- The value of the division
			 as recorded shall be the same as the division value indicated.
UR.2.
Installation
			 Requirements.
UR.2.1.
Protection
			 from Environmental Factors.
- The indicating elements, the lever system
			 or load cells, and the load-receiving element of a permanently installed scale,
			 and the indicating elements of a scale not intended to be permanently
			 installed, shall be adequately protected from environmental factors such as
			 wind, weather, and RFI that may adversely affect the operation or performance
			 of the device.
UR.2.2.
Foundation, Supports, and Clearance.
- The foundation and supports of
			 any scale installed in a fixed location shall be such as to provide strength,
			 rigidity, and permanence of all components, and clearance shall be provided
			 around all live parts to the extent that no contacts may result when the
			 load-receiving element is empty, nor throughout the weighing range of the
			 scale.
UR.2.3.
Entry and
			 Departure from Weighing Area.
- The belt or other conveyance that
			 introduces the weighed load to the weighing zone and that carries the weighed
			 load away from the weighing zone shall be maintained per the manufacturer's
			 recommendations.
UR.3.
Use Requirements.
UR.3.1.
Minimum Load.
- The minimum load shall be as specified by the
			 manufacturer, but not less than twenty divisions since the use of a device to
			 weigh light loads is likely to result in relatively large errors.
UR.3.1.
1.
Minimum Load for
			 Class IIIS Weigh-Labelers.
- The minimum load shall be as specified by
			 the manufacturer, but not less than ten divisions since the use of a device to
			 weigh light loads is likely to result in relatively large errors.
(Added 1997)
UR.3.2.
Maximum Load.
- An
			 automatic weighing system shall not be used to weigh a load of more than its
			 maximum capacity.
(Amended 2004)
UR.3.3.
Special Designs.
- An
			 automatic weighing system designed and marked for a special application shall
			 not be used for other than its intended purpose.
UR.3.4.
Use of Manual Gross Weight
			 Entries.
- Manual entries are permitted only when a device or system is
			 generating labels for standard weight packages.
UR.4.
Maintenance Requirements.
UR.4.1.
Balance Condition.
- If
			 an automatic weighing system is equipped with a zero-load display, the
			 zero-load adjustment of an automatic weighing system shall be maintained so
			 that the device indicates or records a zero balance condition.
UR.4.2.
Level Condition.
- If
			 an automatic weighing system is equipped with a level-condition indicator, the
			 automatic weighing system shall be maintained in level.
UR.4.3.
Automatic Weighing System
			 Modification.
- The length or the width of the load-receiving element of
			 an automatic weighing system shall not be increased beyond the manufacturer's
			 design dimension, nor shall the capacity of an automatic weighing system be
			 increased beyond its design capacity by replacing or modifying the original
			 primary indicating or recording element with one of a higher capacity, except
			 when the modification has been approved by competent engineering authority,
			 preferably that of the engineering department of the manufacturer of the
			 automatic weighing system, and by the weights and measures authority having
			 jurisdiction over the automatic weighing system.
Section 3.30.
Liquid-Measuring Devices
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code applies to:
(a) devices
			 used for the measurement of liquids, including liquid fuels and lubricants;
			 and
(b) wholesale devices used for
			 the measurement and delivery of agri-chemical liquids such as fertilizers,
			 feeds, herbicides, pesticides, insecticides, fungicides, and defoliants.
(Added 1985)
A.2.
Exceptions.
- This code
			 does not apply to:
(a) meters mounted on
			 vehicle tanks (Also see Section 3.31. Code for Vehicle-Tank Meters.);
(b) devices used for dispensing liquefied
			 petroleum gases (Also see Section 3.32. Code for Liquefied Petroleum Gas and
			 Anhydrous Ammonia Liquid-Measuring Devices.);
(c) devices used for dispensing other liquids
			 that do not remain in a liquid state at atmospheric pressures and
			 temperatures;
(d) water
			 meters;
(e) devices used solely for
			 dispensing a product in connection with operations in which the amount
			 dispensed does not affect customer charges; or
(f) mass flow meters. (Also see Section 3.37.
			 Code for Mass Flow Meters.) (Added 1994)
A.3.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code, liquid-measuring devices
			 shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Indicating and Recording Elements
			 and Recorded Representations.
S.1.1.
General.
- A liquid-measuring device:
(a) shall be equipped with a primary
			 indicating element; and
(b) may be
			 equipped with a primary recording element.
S.1.2.
Units.
- A
			 liquid-measuring device shall indicate, and record if the device is equipped to
			 record, its deliveries in liters, gallons, quarts, pints, fluid ounces, or
			 binary-submultiples or decimal subdivisions of the liter or gallon.
(Amended 1987, 1994, and 2006)
S.1.2.1.
Retail Motor-Fuel Devices.
- Deliveries shall be indicated and recorded, if the device is equipped
			 to record, in liters or gallons and decimal subdivisions or fractional
			 equivalents thereof.
(Added 1979)
S.1.2.2.
Agri-Chemical Liquid
			 Devices.
S.1.2.2.1.
Liquid
			 Measure.
- Deliveries shall be indicated and recorded in liters or
			 gallons and decimal subdivisions or fractional equivalents thereof.
S.1.2.3.
Value of Smallest
			 Unit.
- The value of the smallest unit of indicated delivery, and
			 recorded delivery if the device is equipped to record, shall not exceed the
			 equivalent of:
(a) 0.5 L (0.1 gal) on devices
			 with a maximum rated flow rate of 750 L/min (200 gal/min) or less;
(b) 5 L (1 gal) on devices with a maximum
			 rated flow of more than 750 L/min (200 gal/min); or
(c) 5 L (1 gal) on meters with a rated
			 maximum flow rate of 375 L/min (100 gal/min) or more used for jet fuel aviation
			 refueling systems.
(Added 2007)
This requirement does not apply to manually operated devices
				equipped with stops or stroke-limiting means.
(Amended 1983, 1986, and 2007)
S.1.3.
Advancement of
			 Indicating and Recording Elements.
- It shall not be possible to advance
			 primary indicating and recording elements except by the mechanical operation of
			 the device. Clearing a device by advancing its elements to zero is permitted,
			 but only if:
(a) once started, the advancement
			 movement cannot be stopped until zero is reached; and
(b) in the case of indicating elements only,
			 such elements are automatically obscured until the elements reach the correct
			 zero position.
S.1.4.
Graduations.
S.1.4.1.
Length.
- Graduations shall be varied in length so that they may be
			 conveniently read.
S.1.4.2.
Width.
- In a series of graduations, the width of:
(a) every graduation shall be at least 0.2 mm
			 (0.008 in) but not greater than the minimum clear interval between graduations;
			 and
(b) main graduations shall be
			 not more than 50 % greater than the width of subordinate graduations.
S.1.4.3.
Clear Interval
			 Between Graduations.
- The clear interval between graduations shall be
			 not less than 1.0 mm (0.04 in). If the graduations are not parallel, the
			 measurement shall be made:
(a) along the line
			 of movement of the tip of the index of the indicator as it passes over the
			 graduations; or
(b) if the
			 indicator extends over the entire length of the graduations, at the point of
			 widest separation of the graduations.
S.1.5.
Indicators.
S.1.5.1.
Symmetry.
- The
			 portion of the index of an indicator associated with the graduations shall be
			 symmetrical with respect to the graduations.
S.1.5.2.
Length.
(a) If the indicator and the graduations are
			 in different planes, the index of the indicator shall extend to each graduation
			 with which it is to be used.
(b) If
			 the indicator is in the same plane as the graduations, the distance between the
			 index of the indicator and the ends of the graduations, measured along the line
			 of the graduations, shall be not more than 1.0 mm (0.04 in).
S.1.5.3.
Width.
(a)
The index of an indicator shall
			 not be wider than the width of the narrowest graduation. [Nonretroactive as of
			 January 1, 2002]
(Amended 2000)
(b) If the index of an indicator extends over
			 the entire length of a graduation, it shall be of uniform width throughout the
			 portion that coincides with the graduation.
S.1.5.4.
Clearance.
- If the
			 indicator and the graduations are in different planes, the clearance between
			 the index of an indicator and the plane of the graduations shall be no greater
			 than 1.5 mm (0.06 in).
S.1.5.5.
Parallax.
- Parallax effects shall be reduced to the practical
			 minimum.
S.1.6.
Additional Operating Requirements, Retail Devices (Except Slow-flow
			 Meters).
S.1.6.1.
Indication of
			 Delivery.
- The device shall automatically show on its face the initial
			 zero condition and the quantity delivered (up to the nominal capacity).
			 However, the following requirements shall apply:
For electronic devices manufactured prior to January 1, 2006,
				the first 0.03 L (or 0.009 gal) of a delivery and its associated total sales
				price need not be indicated.
For electronic devices manufactured on or after January
				1, 2006, the measurement, indication of delivered quantity, and the indication
				of total sales price shall be inhibited until the fueling position reaches
				conditions necessary to ensure that the delivery starts at zero.
				[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2006]
(Added 2005)
(Amended 1982 and 2005)
S.1.6.2.
Provisions for Power
			 Loss.
S.1.6.2.1.
Transaction Information.
-
In the event of a power
			 loss, the information needed to complete any transaction in progress at the
			 time of the power loss (such as the quantity and unit price, or sales price)
			 shall be determinable for at least 15 minutes at the dispenser or at the
			 console if the console is accessible to the customer.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1983]
S.1.6.2.2.
User
			 Information.
-
The device memory shall retain
			 information on the quantity of fuel dispensed and the sales price totals during
			 power loss.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1983]
S.1.6.3.
Return
			 to Zero.
(a) The primary indicating
			 elements, and primary recording elements if the device is equipped to record,
			 shall be readily returnable to a definite zero indication. However, a key-lock
			 operated or other self-operated device may be equipped with cumulative
			 indicating or recording elements, provided that it is also equipped with a
			 zero-return indicating element.
(b)
			 It shall not be possible to return primary indicating elements, or primary
			 recording elements beyond the correct zero position.
(Amended 1972)
S.1.6.4.
Display of Unit Price and
			 Product Identity.
S.1.6.4.1.
Unit Price.
(a) A computing or
			 money-operated device shall be able to display on each face the unit price at
			 which the device is set to compute or to dispense.
(b)
Except for dispensers used
			 exclusively for fleet sales, other price contract sales, and truck refueling
			 (e.g., truck stop dispensers used only to refuel trucks), whenever a grade,
			 brand, blend, or mixture is offered for sale from a device at more than one
			 unit price, then all of the unit prices at which that product is offered for
			 sale shall meet the following conditions:
(1)
For a system that applies a
			 discount prior to the delivery, all unit prices shall be displayed or shall be
			 capable of being displayed on the dispenser through a deliberate action of the
			 customer prior to the delivery of the product. It is not necessary that all of
			 the unit prices for all grades, brands, blends, or mixtures be simultaneously
			 displayed prior to the delivery of the product. [Effective and Nonretroactive
			 as of January 1, 1991]
(2)
			 For a system that offers post-delivery discounts on fuel sales, display of
			 pre-delivery unit price information is exempt from (b)(1), provided the system
			 complies with S.1.6.8. Recorded Representations for Transactions Where a
			 Post-Delivery Discount(s) is Provided.
(Added 2012)
Note:
When a product is offered at more than one
				unit price, display of the unit price information may be through the deliberate
				action of the customer:
1) using
			 controls on the device;
2) through
			 the customer's use of personal or vehicle-mounted electronic equipment
			 communicating with the system; or
3)
			 verbal instructions by the customer.
(Added 2012)
(Amended 1989, 1997, and 2012)
S.1.6.4.2.
Product
			 Identity.
(a) A device shall be able
			 to conspicuously display on each side the identity of the product being
			 dispensed.
(b) A device designed to
			 dispense more than one grade, brand, blend, or mixture of product also shall be
			 able to display on each side the identity of the grade, brand, blend, or
			 mixture being dispensed.
S.1.6.5.
Money-Value
			 Computations.
(a)
A computing
			 device shall compute the total sales price at any single-purchase unit price
			 (i.e., excluding fleet sales, other price contract sales, and truck stop
			 dispensers used only to refuel trucks) for which the product being measured is
			 offered for sale at any delivery possible within either the measurement range
			 of the device or the range of the computing elements, whichever is
			 less.
[Effective and Nonretroactive as of January 1,
				1991]
(b) The
			 analog sales price indicated for any delivered quantity shall not differ from a
			 mathematically computed price (quantity × unit price = total sales price)
			 by an amount greater than the value in Table 1. Money-Value Divisions and
			 Maximum Allowable Variations for Money-Value Computations on Mechanical Analog
			 Computers.
(Amended 1984, 1989, and 1993)
S.1.6.5.1.
Money-Value Divisions,
			 Analog.
- The values of the graduated intervals representing money
			 values on a computing type device shall be no greater than those in Table 1.
			 Money-Value Divisions and Maximum Allowable Variations for Money-Value
			 Computations on Mechanical Analog Computers.
(Amended 1991)
Table 1.
Money-Value Divisions and
Maximum Allowable Variations for
						  Money-Value
Computations on Mechanical Analog
						  Computers
Unit Price
Money-Value Division
Maximum Allowable Variation
From
To and including
Design Test
Field Test
0
$0.25/liter or $1.00/gallon
1¢
± 1¢
± 1¢
$0.25/liter or $1.00/gallon
$0.75/liter or $3.00/gallon
1¢ or 2¢
± 1¢
± 2¢
$0.75/liter or $3.00/gallon
$2.50/liter or $10.00/gallon
1¢ or 2¢
± 1¢
± 2¢
$0.75/liter or $3.00/gallon
$2.50/liter or $10.00/gallon
5¢
± 2½¢
± 5¢
S.1.6.5.2.
Money-Value Divisions,
			 Digital.
- A computing type device with digital indications shall comply
			 with the requirements of paragraph G.S.5.5. Money-Values, Mathematical
			 Agreement, and the total price computation shall be based on quantities not
			 exceeding 0.05 L for devices indicating in metric units and 0.01 gal intervals
			 for devices indicating in U.S. customary units.
(Added 1980)
S.1.6.5.3.
Auxiliary Elements.
-
If a system is equipped with auxiliary indications,
			 all indicated money-value divisions of the auxiliary element shall be identical
			 with those of the primary element. [Nonretroactive and Enforceable as of
			 January 1, 1985]
S.1.6.5.4.
Selection of Unit Price.
- A system shall not permit a change to the unit price during delivery
			 of product. When a product or grade is offered for sale at more than one unit
			 price through a computing device, the following conditions shall be met:
Except for a system only capable of applying a
				post-delivery discount(s), the selection of the unit price shall be made prior
				to delivery through a deliberate action of the customer to select the unit
				price for the fuel delivery. [Nonretroactive as of January 1,
				1991]
For a system only capable of applying a post-delivery
				discount(s), the selection of the unit price shall be made through a deliberate
				action of the customer to select the unit price for the fuel delivery.
(Added 2012)
Note:
When a product is offered at more than one
				unit price, selection of the unit price may be through the deliberate action of
				the customer:
1) using controls on the
			 device;
2) through the customer's
			 use of personal or vehicle-mounted electronic equipment communicating with the
			 system; or
3) verbal instructions by
			 the customer
.
(Added 2012)
The provisions in (a) and (b) do not apply to dispensers used
				exclusively for fleet sales, other price contract sales, and truck refueling
				(e.g., truck stop dispensers used only to refuel trucks).
(Added 1989) (Amended 1991, 1992, 1993, 1996, and 2012)
S.1.6.5.5.
Display of Quantity and Total Price.
-
Except for aviation refueling applications, when a delivery is
			 completed, the total price and quantity for that transaction shall be displayed
			 on the face of the dispenser for at least five minutes or until the next
			 transaction is initiated by using controls on the device or other
			 customer-activated controls.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1994]
(Added 1992) (Amended 1996 and 2007)
S.1.6.5.6.
Display of Quantity
			 and Total Price, Aviation Refueling Applications.
(a)
The quantity shall be displayed
			 throughout the transaction.
(b)
The total price shall also be
			 displayed under one of the following conditions:
(1) The total price can appear on the face of
			 the dispenser or through a controller adjacent to the device.
(2) If a device is designed to continuously
			 compute and display the total price, then the total price shall be computed and
			 displayed throughout the transaction for the quantity delivered.
(c)
The total price and
			 quantity shall be displayed for at least five minutes or until the next
			 transaction is initiated by using controls on the device or other
			 customer-activated controls.
(d)
A printed receipt shall be
			 available and shall include, at a minimum, the total price, quantity, and unit
			 price.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2008]
(Added 2007)
S.1.6.6.
Agreement Between
			 Indications.
(a) When a quantity value
			 indicated or recorded by an auxiliary element is a derived or computed value
			 based on data received from a retail motor fuel dispenser, the value may differ
			 from the quantity value displayed on the dispenser, provided the following
			 conditions are met:
(1) all total money-values
			 for an individual sale that are indicated or recorded by the system agree;
			 and
(2)
within each
			 element, the values indicated or recorded meet the formula (quantity ×
			 unit price = total sales price) to the closest cent. [Nonretroactive as of
			 January 1, 1988]
(b) When a system applies a post-delivery
			 discount(s) to a fuel's unit price through an auxiliary element, the following
			 conditions shall apply for computed values:
(1) the total volume of the delivery shall be
			 in agreement between all elements in the system. (Added 2012) (Added 1985)
			 (Amended 1987, 1988, and 2012)
S.1.6.7.
Recorded
			 Representations.
-
Except for fleet sales and other
			 price contract sales and for transactions where a post-delivery discount is
			 provided, a printed receipt providing the following information shall be
			 available through a built-in or separate recording element for all transactions
			 conducted with point-of-sale systems or devices activated by debit cards,
			 credit cards, and/or cash:
(a)
the total volume of the delivery;
(b)
the unit
			 price
;
(c)
the
			 total computed price; and
(d)
the product identity by name,
			 symbol, abbreviation, or code number. [Nonretroactive as of January 1,
			 1986]
(Added 1985) (Amended 1997, 2012, and 2014)
S.1.6.8.
Recorded
			 Representations for Transactions Where a Post-Delivery Discount(s) is
			 Provide
d
.
- Except for fleet sales and other price contract
			 sales, a printed receipt providing the following information shall be available
			 through a built-in or separate recording element that is part of the system for
			 transactions involving a post-delivery discount:
(a) the product identity by name, symbol,
			 abbreviation, or code number;
(b)
			 transaction information as shown on the dispenser at the end of the delivery
			 and prior to any post-delivery discount(s), including the:
(1) total volume of the delivery;
(2) unit price; and
(3) total computed price of the fuel
			 sale.
(c) an itemization
			 of the post-delivery discounts to the unit price; and
(d) the final total price of the fuel sale
			 after all post-delivery discounts are applied. (Added 2012) (Amended
			 2014)
S.1.6.9.
Lubricant Devices, Travel of Indicator.
- The indicator shall move at
			 least 2.5 cm (1 in) in relation to the graduations, if provided, for a delivery
			 of 0.5 L (1 pt).
S.1.7.
Additional Operating Requirements, Wholesale Devices Only.
S.1.7.1.
Travel of Indicator.
-
			 A wholesale device shall be readily operable to deliver accurately any quantity
			 from 200 L (50 gal) to the capacity of the device. If the most sensitive
			 element of the indicating system utilizes an indicator and graduations, the
			 relative movement of these parts corresponding to a delivery of 4 L (1 gal)
			 shall be not less than 5 mm (0.20 in).
(Amended 1987)
S.1.7.2.
Money-Values - Mathematical
			 Agreement.
- Any digital money-value indication and any recorded
			 money-value on a computing-type device shall be in mathematical agreement with
			 its associated quantity indication or representation to within 1 cent of
			 money-value.
S.2.
Measuring Elements.
S.2.1.
Vapor Elimination.
(a) A liquid-measuring device shall be
			 equipped with a vapor or air eliminator or other automatic means to prevent the
			 passage of vapor and air through the meter.
(b) Vent lines from the air or vapor
			 eliminator shall be made of metal tubing or other rigid material. (Amended
			 1975)
S.2.1.1.
Vapor
			 Elimination on Loading Rack Metering Systems.
(a) A loading rack metering system shall be
			 equipped with a vapor or air eliminator or other automatic means to prevent the
			 passage of vapor and air through the meter unless the system is designed or
			 operationally controlled by a method, approved by the weights and measures
			 jurisdiction having control over the device, such that air and/or vapor cannot
			 enter the system.
(b) Vent lines
			 from the air or vapor eliminator (if present) shall be made of metal tubing or
			 other rigid material.
(Added 1994)
S.2.2.
Provision for Sealing.
-
			 Adequate provision shall be made for an approved means of security (e.g., data
			 change audit trail) or for physically applying a security seal in such a manner
			 that requires the security seal to be broken before an adjustment or
			 interchange can be made of:
(a) any measuring
			 or indicating element;
(b) any
			 adjustable element for controlling delivery rate when such rate tends to affect
			 the accuracy of deliveries; and
(c)
			 any metrological parameter that will affect the metrological integrity of the
			 device or system.
When applicable, the adjusting mechanism shall be readily
				accessible for purposes of affixing a security seal.
[Audit trails
				shall use the format set forth in Table S.2.2.]* [*Nonretroactive and
				Enforceable as of January 1, 1995]
(Amended 1991, 1993, 1995, and 2006)
Table S.2.2. Categories of Device and
						  Methods of Sealing
Categories of
						  Device
Methods of Sealing
Category 1:
No
						  remote configuration capability.
Seal by physical seal or two event counters:
						  one for calibration parameters and one for configuration
						  parameters.
Category 2:
Remote configuration capability, but access is
						  controlled by physical hardware.
The device shall clearly indicate that it is in
						  the remote configuration mode and record such message if capable of printing in
						  this mode or shall not operate while in this mode.
[The hardware enabling access for remote
						  communication must be on-site. The hardware must be sealed using a physical
						  seal or an event counter for calibration parameters and an event counter for
						  configuration parameters. The event counters may be located either at the
						  individual measuring device or at the system controller; however, an adequate
						  number of counters must be provided to monitor the calibration and
						  configuration parameters of the individual devices at a location. If the
						  counters are located in the system controller rather than at the individual
						  device, means must be provided to generate a hard copy of the information
						  through an on-site device.]* [*Nonretroactive as of January 1,
						  1996]
Category 3:
Remote configuration capability access may be unlimited
						  or controlled through a software switch (e.g., password)
.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1995]
The device shall clearly indicate that it is in
						  the remote
configuration mode and record such message if
						  capable
of printing in this mode or shall not operate
						  while in this
mode.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1,
						  2001]
An event logger is required in the device; it
						  must include an event counter (000 to 999), the parameter ID, the date and time
						  of the change, and the new value of the parameter. A printed copy of the
						  information must be available on demand through the device or through another
						  on-site device. The information may also be available electronically. The event
						  logger shall have a capacity to retain records equal to 10 times the number of
						  sealable parameters in the device, but not more than 1000 records are required.
						  (
Note:
Does not require 1000 changes to be stored for each
						  parameter.)
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1995]
(Table Added 1993) (Amended 1995, 1998, 1999, 2006, and
				2015)
S.2.3.
Directional Flow Valves.
- Valves intended to prevent reversal of
			 flow shall be automatic in operation.
S.2.4.
Stop Mechanism.
S.2.4.1.
Indication.
- The
			 delivery for which the device is set shall be conspicuously indicated. (Amended
			 1983)
S.2.4.2.
Stroke
			 Limiting Elements.
- Stops or other stroke limiting elements subject to
			 direct pressure or impact shall be:
(a) made
			 secure by positive, nonfrictional engagement of these elements; and
(b) adjustable to provide for deliveries
			 within tolerances. (Amended 1983)
S.2.4.3.
Setting.
- If two or
			 more stops or other elements may be selectively brought into operation to
			 permit predetermined quantities of deliveries:
(a) the position for the proper setting of
			 each such element shall be accurately defined; and
(b) any inadvertent displacement from the
			 proper setting shall be obstructed. (Amended 1983)
S.2.5.
Zero-Set-Back
			 Interlock, Retail Motor-Fuel Devices.
- A device shall be constructed so
			 that:
(a) after a delivery cycle has been
			 completed by moving the starting lever to any position that shuts off the
			 device, an automatic interlock prevents a subsequent delivery until the
			 indicating elements, and recording elements if the device is equipped and
			 activated to record, have been returned to their zero positions;
(b) the discharge nozzle cannot be returned
			 to its designed hanging position (that is, any position where the tip of the
			 nozzle is placed in its designed receptacle and the lock can be inserted) until
			 the starting lever is in its designed shut-off position and the zero-set-back
			 interlock has been engaged; and
(c)
			 in a system with more than one dispenser supplied by a single pump, an
			 effective automatic control valve in each dispenser prevents product from being
			 delivered until the indicating elements on that dispenser are in a correct zero
			 position.
(Amended 1981 and 1985)
S.2.6.
Temperature
			 Determination - Wholesale Devices.
-
For test purposes,
			 means shall be provided (e.g., thermometer well) to determine the temperature
			 of the liquid either:
(a)
in
			 the liquid chamber of the meter; or
(b)
in the meter inlet or discharge
			 line immediately adjacent to the meter. [Nonretroactive as of January 1,
			 1985]
(Added 1984) (Amended 1986)
S.2.7.
Wholesale Devices Equipped with
			 Automatic Temperature Compensators.
S.2.7.1.
Automatic Temperature
			 Compensation.
- A device may be equipped with an automatic means for
			 adjusting the indication and registration of the measured volume of product to
			 the volume at 15 °C (60 °F).
S.2.7.2.
Provision for Deactivating.
- On a device equipped with an automatic temperature-compensating
			 mechanism that will indicate or record only in terms of gallons compensated to
			 15 °C (60 °F), provision shall be made for deactivating the automatic
			 temperature-compensating mechanism so that the meter can indicate and record,
			 if it is equipped to record, in terms of the uncompensated volume.
(Amended 1972)
S.2.7.3.
Provision for Sealing
			 Automatic Temperature-Compensating Systems.
- Provision shall be made
			 for applying security seals in such a manner that an automatic
			 temperature-compensating system cannot be disconnected and that no adjustment
			 may be made to the system without breaking the seal.
S.2.7.4.
Temperature Determination
			 with Automatic Temperature-Compensation.
- For test purposes, means
			 shall be provided (e.g., thermometer well) to determine the temperature of the
			 liquid either:
(a) in the liquid chamber of
			 the meter; or
(b) immediately
			 adjacent to the meter in the meter inlet or discharge line. (Amended
			 1987)
S.2.8.
Exhaustion of Supply, Lubricant Devices Other than Meter Types.
-
			 When the level of the supply of lubricant becomes so low as to compromise the
			 accuracy of measurement, the device shall:
(a)
			 automatically become inoperable; or
(b) give a conspicuous and distinct
			 warning.
S.3.
Discharge Lines and Valves.
S.3.1.
Diversion of Measured Liquid.
- No means shall be provided by which any measured liquid can be
			 diverted from the measuring chamber of the meter or its discharge line. Two or
			 more delivery outlets may be installed only if automatic means are provided to
			 ensure that:
(a) liquid can flow from only one
			 outlet at a time; and
(b) the
			 direction of flow for which the mechanism may be set at any time is clearly and
			 conspicuously indicated.
An outlet that may be opened for purging or draining the
				measuring system or for recirculating, if recirculation is required in order to
				maintain the product in a deliverable state, shall be permitted only when the
				system is measuring food products, agri-chemicals, biodiesel, or biodiesel
				blends. Effective automatic means shall be provided to prevent passage of
				liquid through any such outlet during normal operation of the measuring system
				and to inhibit meter indications (or advancement of indications) and recorded
				representations while the outlet is in operation.
(Amended 1991, 1995, 1996, and 2007)
S.3.2.
Exceptions.
-
			 The provisions of S.3.1. Diversion of Measured Liquid shall not apply to truck
			 refueling devices when diversion of flow to other than the receiving vehicle
			 cannot readily be accomplished and is readily apparent. Allowable deterrents
			 include, but are not limited to, physical barriers to adjacent driveways,
			 visible valves, or lighting systems that indicate which outlets are in
			 operation, and explanatory signs.
(Amended 1982, 1990, 1991, and 2002)
S.3.3.
Pump-Discharge Unit.
- A
			 pump-discharge unit equipped with a flexible discharge hose shall be of the
			 wet-hose type.
S.3.4.
Gravity-Discharge Unit.
- On a gravity-discharge unit:
(a) the discharge hose or equivalent pipe
			 shall be of the dry-hose type with no shutoff valve at its outlet end unless
			 the hose or pipe drains to the same level under all conditions of
			 use;
(b) the dry-hose shall be
			 sufficiently stiff and only as long as necessary to facilitate
			 drainage;
(c) an automatic vacuum
			 breaker, or equivalent mechanism, shall be incorporated to prevent siphoning
			 and to ensure rapid and complete drainage; and
(d) the inlet end of the hose or outlet pipe
			 shall be high enough to ensure complete drainage.
S.3.5.
Discharge Hose, Reinforcement.
- A discharge hose shall be reinforced so that the performance of the
			 device is not affected by the expansion or contraction of the hose.
S.3.6.
Discharge Valve.
- A
			 discharge valve may be installed in the discharge line only if the device is of
			 the wet-hose type. Any other shutoff valve on the discharge side of the meter
			 shall be of the automatic or semiautomatic predetermined-stop type or shall be
			 operable only:
(a) by means of a tool (but not
			 a pin) entirely separate from the device; or
(b) by mutilation of a security seal with
			 which the valve is sealed open.
S.3.7.
Anti-drain Means.
- In a
			 wet-hose pressure-type device, means shall be incorporated to prevent the
			 drainage of the discharge hose.
(Amended 1990)
S.4.
Marking Requirements.
S.4.1.
Limitation on Use.
- The
			 limitations on its use shall be clearly and permanently marked on any device
			 intended to measure accurately only:
(a)
			 products having particular properties;
(b) under specific installation or operating
			 conditions; or
(c) when used in
			 conjunction with specific accessory equipment.
S.4.2.
Air Pressure.
- If a
			 device is operated by air pressure, the air pressure gauge shall show by
			 special graduations or other means the maximum and minimum working pressures
			 recommended by the manufacturer.
S.4.3.
Wholesale Devices.
S.4.3.1.
Discharge Rates.
- A
			 wholesale device shall be marked to show its designed maximum and minimum
			 discharge rates. However, the minimum discharge rate shall not exceed 20 % of
			 the maximum discharge rate.
S.4.3.2.
Temperature Compensation.
- If a device is equipped with an automatic temperature compensation,
			 the primary indicating elements, recording elements, and recorded
			 representation shall be clearly and conspicuously marked to show that the
			 volume delivered has been adjusted to the volume at 15 °C (60
			 °F).
S.4.4.
Retail Devices.
S.4.4.1.
Discharge Rates.
-
On a retail device with a designed maximum discharge
			 rate of 115 L (30 gal) per minute or greater, the maximum and minimum discharge
			 rates shall be marked in accordance with S.4.4.2. Location of Marking
			 Information; Retail Motor-Fuel Dispensers. The marked minimum discharge rate
			 shall not exceed 20 % of the marked maximum discharge rate. [Nonretroactive as
			 of January 1, 1985]
(Added 1984) (Amended 2003)
Example: With a marked maximum discharge rate of 230 L/min (60
				gpm), the marked minimum discharge rate shall be 45 L/min (12 gpm) or less
				(e.g., 40 L/min [10 gpm] is acceptable). A marked minimum discharge rate
				greater than 45 L/min (12 gpm) (e.g., 60 L/min [15 gpm]) is not
				acceptable.
S.4.4.2.
Location of Marking Information; Retail Motor-Fuel Dispensers.
-
The marking information required in the General Code,
			 paragraph G-S.1. Identification shall appear as follows:
(a)
within 60 cm (24 in) to 150 cm
			 (60 in) from the base of the dispenser;
(b)
either internally and/or
			 externally provided the information is permanent and easily read;
			 and
(c)
on a
			 portion of the device that cannot be readily removed or interchanged (i.e., not
			 on a service access panel).
Note:
The use of a dispenser key or tool
				to access internal marking information is permitted for retail liquid-measuring
				devices. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2003]
(Added 2002) (Amended 2004)
S.5.
Totalizers for Retail Motor-Fuel Dispensers
. -
Retail motor-fuel dispensers shall be equipped with a non-resettable
			 totalizer for the quantity delivered through the metering device.
			 [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1995]
(Added 1993) (Amended 1994)
N.
Notes
N.1.
Test Liquid.
N.1.1.
Type of Liquid.
- The
			 liquid used for testing a liquid-measuring device shall be the type the device
			 is used to measure, or another liquid with the same general physical
			 characteristics.
N.1.2.
Labeling.
- Following the completion of a successful examination
			 of a wholesale device, the weights and measures official should attach a label
			 or tag indicating the type of liquid used during the test.
N.2.
Volume Change.
- Care
			 shall be taken to minimize changes in volume of the test liquid due to
			 temperature changes and evaporation losses.
N.3.
Test Drafts.
N.3.1.
Retail Piston-Type and
			 Visible-Type Devices.
- Test drafts shall include the full capacity
			 delivery and each intermediate delivery for which the device is
			 designed.
N.3.2.
Slow-flow
			 Meters.
- Test drafts shall be equal to at least four times the minimum
			 volume that can be measured and indicated through either a visible indication
			 or an audible signal.
N.3.3.
Lubricant Devices.
- Test drafts shall be 1 L (1 qt). Additional
			 test drafts may include 0.5 L
(1 pt), 4 L (4 qt), and 6 L (6 qt).
N.3.4.
Other Retail Devices.
-
			 On devices with a designed maximum discharge rate of:
(a) less than 80 L (20 gal) per minute, tests
			 shall include drafts of one or more amounts, including a draft of at least 19 L
			 (5 gal).
(b) 80 L (20 gal) per
			 minute or greater, tests shall include drafts of one or more amounts, including
			 a draft of at least the amount delivered by the device in one minute at the
			 maximum flow rate of the installation.
(Amended 1984)
N.3.5.
Wholesale Devices.
- The
			 delivered quantity should be equal to at least the amount delivered by the
			 device in one minute at its maximum discharge rate, and shall in no case be
			 less than 200 L (50 gal).
(Amended 1987 and 1996)
N.4.
Testing Procedures.
N.4.1.
Normal Tests.
- The
			 "normal" test of a device shall be made at the maximum discharge flow rate
			 developed under the conditions of installation. Any additional tests conducted
			 at flow rates down to and including one-half of the sum of the maximum
			 discharge flow rate and the rated minimum discharge flow rate shall be
			 considered normal tests.
(Amended 1991)
N.4.1.1.
Wholesale Devices Equipped
			 with Automatic Temperature-Compensating Systems.
- On wholesale devices
			 equipped with automatic temperature-compensating systems, normal tests shall be
			 conducted:
(a) by comparing the compensated
			 volume indicated or recorded to the actual delivered volume corrected to 15
			 °C (60 °F); and
(b) with
			 the temperature-compensating system deactivated, comparing the uncompensated
			 volume indicated or recorded to the actual delivered volume.
The first test shall be performed with the automatic
				temperature-compensating system operating in the "as found" condition.
On devices that indicate or record both the compensated and
				uncompensated volume for each delivery, the tests in (a) and (b) may be
				performed as a single test.
(Amended 1987)
N.4.1.2.
Repeatability Tests.
-
			 Tests for repeatability should include a minimum of three consecutive test
			 drafts of approximately the same size and be conducted under controlled
			 conditions where variations in factors such as temperature, pressure, and flow
			 rate are reduced to the extent that they will not affect the results obtained.
(Added 2001)
N.4.2.
Special Tests.
-
			 "Special" tests shall be made to develop the operating characteristics of a
			 device and any special elements and accessories attached to or associated with
			 the device. Any test except as set forth in N.4.1. Normal Tests shall be
			 considered a special test.
N.4.2.1.
Slow-Flow Meters.
- A "special" test shall be made at a flow rate:
(a) not larger than twice the actual minimum
			 flow rate; and
(b) not smaller than
			 the actual minimum flow rate of the installation.
N.4.2.2.
Retail Motor-Fuel
			 Devices.
(a) Devices without a marked
			 minimum flow-rate shall have a "special" test performed at the slower of the
			 following rates:
(1) 19 L (5 gal) per minute;
			 or
(2) the minimum discharge rate
			 at which the device will deliver when equipped with an automatic discharge
			 nozzle set at its slowest setting.
(b) Devices with a marked minimum flow-rate
			 shall have a "special" test performed at or near the marked minimum flow rate.
(Added 1984) (Amended 2005)
N.4.2.3.
Other Retail Devices.
- "Special" tests of other retail devices shall be made at the slower of
			 the following rates:
(a) 50 % of the maximum
			 discharge rate developed under the conditions of installation; or
(b) the minimum discharge rate marked on the
			 device.
N.4.2.4.
Wholesale Devices.
- "Special" tests shall be made to develop the
			 operating characteristics of a measuring system and any special associated or
			 attached elements and accessories. "Special" tests shall include a test at or
			 slightly above the slower of the following rates:
(a) 20 % of the marked maximum discharge
			 rate; or
(b) the minimum discharge
			 rate marked on the device.
In no case shall the test be performed at a flow rate less than
				the minimum discharge rate marked on the device.
(Amended 2014)
N.4.3.
Money-Value Computation
			 Tests.
N.4.3.1.
Laboratory
			 Tests.
- When testing the device in the laboratory:
(a) compliance with paragraph S.1.6.5.
			 Money-Value Computations, shall be determined by using the cone gear as a
			 reference for the total quantity delivered;
(b) the indicated quantity shall agree with
			 the cone gear representation with the index of the indicator within the width
			 of the graduation; and
(c) the
			 maximum allowable variation of the indicated sales price shall be as shown in
			 Table 1. Money-Value Divisions and Maximum Allowable Variations for Money-Value
			 Computations on Mechanical Analog Computers.
(Amended 1984)
N.4.3.2.
Field Tests.
- In the
			 conduct of field tests to determine compliance with paragraph S.1.6.5.
			 Money-Value Computations, the maximum allowable variation in the indicated
			 sales price shall be as shown in Table 1. Money-Value Divisions and Maximum
			 Allowable Variations for Money-Value Computations on Mechanical Analog
			 Computers.
(Added 1982) (Amended 1984)
N.4.4.
Pour and Drain Times.
N.4.4.1.
Pour and Drain Times for
			 Hand-held Test Measures.
- Hand-held test measures require a 30-second
			 (± 5 seconds) pour followed by a 10-second drain with the measure held
			 at a 10-degree to 15-degree angle from vertical.
N.4.4.2.
Drain Times for Bottom Drain
			 Test Measures or Provers.
- Bottom drain field standard provers require
			 a 30-second drain time after main flow cessation.
(Added 2009)
N.5.
Temperature Correction on
			 Wholesale Devices.
- Corrections shall be made for any changes in volume
			 resulting from the differences in liquid temperatures between time of passage
			 through the meter and time of volumetric determination in the prover. When
			 adjustments are necessary, appropriate petroleum measurement tables should be
			 used.
(Amended 1974)
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Application to Underregistration
			 and to Overregistration.
- The tolerances hereinafter prescribed shall
			 be applied to errors of underregistration and errors of overregistration,
			 whether or not a device is equipped with an automatic temperature
			 compensator.
T.2.
Tolerance
			 Values.
- Maintenance, acceptance, and special test tolerances shall be
			 as shown in Table T.2. Accuracy Classes and Tolerances for Liquid Measuring
			 Devices Covered in NIST Handbook 44, Section 3.30.
Table T.2.
Accuracy Classes and Tolerances for Liquid
						  Measuring Devices Covered in
NIST Handbook 44, Section 3.30.
Accuracy Class
Application
Acceptance Tolerance
Maintenance Tolerance
Special Test
Tolerance1
0.3
- Petroleum products delivered from large capacity
						  (flow rates greater than 115 L/min or 30 gpm)** devices, including motor-fuel
						  devices
- Heated products (other than asphalt) at temperatures
						  greater than 50 °C (122 °F)
- Asphalt at temperatures equal to or below 50 °C
						  (122 °F)
- All other liquids not shown in the table where the
						  typical delivery is over 200 L (50 gal)
0.2 %
0.3 %
0.5 %
0.3A
- Asphalt at temperatures greater than 50 °C (122
						  °F)
0.3 %
0.3 %
0.5 %
0.5*
- Petroleum products delivered from small capacity (at
						  4 L/min (1 gpm) through 115 L/min or 30 gpm)** motor-fuel devices
- Agri-chemical liquids
- All other applications not shown in the table where
						  the typical delivery is [LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO] 200 L (50 gal)
0.3 %
0.5 %
0.5 %
1.1
- Petroleum products and other normal liquids from
						  devices with flow rates** less than 1 gpm.
- Devices designed to deliver less than 1 gal
0.75 %
1.0 %
1.25 %
* For test drafts [LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO] 40 L or 10
						  gal, the tolerances specified for Accuracy Class 0.5 in the table above do not
						  apply. For these test drafts, the following applies:
(a) Maintenance tolerances on normal and special tests
						  shall be 20 mL plus 4 mL per indicated liter or 1 in3
							 plus 1 in3 per indicated
						  gallon.
(b) Acceptance tolerances on normal and special tests
						  shall be one-half the maintenance tolerance values.
1 Special test tolerances
						  are not applicable to retail motor fuel dispensers.
** Flow rate refers to designed or marked maximum flow
						  rate.
(Added 2002) (Amended 2006 and 2013)
T.3.
Repeatability.
- When
			 multiple tests are conducted at approximately the same flow rate and draft
			 size, the range of the test results for the flow rate shall not exceed 40 % of
			 the absolute value of the maintenance tolerance and the results of each test
			 shall be within the applicable tolerance. This tolerance does not apply to the
			 test of the automatic temperature-compensating system. (Also see N.4.1.2.
			 Repeatability Tests.)
(Added 1992) (Amended 2001 and 2002)
T.4.
Automatic
			 Temperature-Compensating Systems.
-
The difference
			 between the meter error (expressed as a percentage) for results determined with
			 and without the automatic temperature-compensating system activated shall not
			 exceed:
(a)
0.2 % for
			 mechanical automatic temperature-compensating systems; and
(b)
0.1 % for electronic automatic
			 temperature-compensating systems.
The delivered quantities for each test shall be
				approximately the same size. The results of each test shall be within the
				applicable acceptance or maintenance tolerance. [Nonretroactive as of January
				1, 1988]
(Added 1987) (Amended 1992, 1996, and 2002)
UR.
User
			 Requirements
UR.1.
Selection
			 Requirements.
UR.1.1.
Discharge
			 Hose.
UR.1.1.1.
Length.
-
			 The length of the discharge hose on a retail motor-fuel device:
(a) shall be measured from its housing or
			 outlet of the discharge line to the inlet of the discharge nozzle;
(b) shall be measured with the hose fully
			 extended if it is coiled or otherwise retained or connected inside a housing;
			 and
(c) shall not exceed 5.5 m (18
			 ft) unless it can be demonstrated that a longer hose is essential to permit
			 deliveries to be made to receiving vehicles or vessels.
An unnecessarily remote location of a device shall not be
				accepted as justification for an abnormally long hose.
(Amended 1972 and 1987)
UR.1.1.2.
Marinas and Airports.
UR.1.1.2.1.
Length.
- The
			 length of the discharge hose shall be as short as practicable, and shall not
			 exceed 15 m (50 ft) unless it can be demonstrated that a longer hose is
			 essential.
UR.1.1.2.2.
Protection.
- Discharge hoses exceeding 8 m (26 ft) in length shall be
			 adequately protected from weather and other environmental factors when not in
			 use.
(Made retroactive 1974 and Amended 1984)
UR.2.
Installation
			 Requirements.
UR.2.1.
Manufacturer's Instructions.
- A device shall be installed in accordance
			 with the manufacturer's instructions, and the installation shall be
			 sufficiently secure and rigid to maintain this condition.
(Added 1987)
UR.2.2.
Discharge Rate.
- A
			 device shall be installed so that the actual maximum discharge rate will not
			 exceed the rated maximum discharge rate. Automatic means for flow regulation
			 shall be incorporated in the installation if necessary.
UR.2.3.
Suction Head.
- A
			 piston-type device shall be installed so that the total effective suction head
			 will not be great enough to cause vaporization of the liquid being dispensed
			 under the highest temperature and lowest barometric pressure likely to
			 occur.
UR.2.4.
Diversion of
			 Liquid Flow.
- A motor-fuel device equipped with two delivery outlets
			 used exclusively in the fueling of trucks shall be so installed that any
			 diversion of flow to other than the receiving vehicle cannot be readily
			 accomplished and is readily apparent. Allowable deterrents include, but are not
			 limited to, physical barriers to adjacent driveways, visible valves, or
			 lighting systems that indicate which outlets are in operation, and explanatory
			 signs.
(Amended 1991)
UR.2.5.
Product Storage
			 Identification.
(a) The fill connection
			 for any petroleum product storage tank or vessel supplying motor-fuel devices
			 shall be permanently, plainly, and visibly marked as to product
			 contained.
(b) When the fill
			 connection device is marked by means of a color code, the color code key shall
			 be conspicuously displayed at the place of business.
(Added 1975) (Amended 1976)
UR.3.
Use of Device.
UR.3.1.
Return of Indicating and
			 Recording Elements to Zero.
- On any dispenser used in making retail
			 deliveries, the primary indicating element, and recording element if so
			 equipped, shall be returned to zero before each delivery.
Exceptions to this requirement are totalizers on
				key-lock-operated or other self-operated dispensers and the primary recording
				element if the device is equipped to record.
UR.3.2.
Unit Price and Product
			 Identity
.
(a) The following information
			 shall be conspicuously displayed or posted on the face of a retail dispenser
			 used in direct sale:
(1) except for unit
			 prices resulting from any post-delivery discount and dispensers used
			 exclusively for fleet sales, other price contract sales, and truck refueling
			 (e.g., truck stop dispensers used only to refuel trucks), all of the unit
			 prices at which the product is offered for sale; and
(2) in the case of a computing type or
			 money-operated type, the unit price at which the dispenser is set to compute.
Provided that the dispenser complies with S.1.6.4.1. Display of
				Unit Price, it is not necessary that all the unit prices for all grades,
				brands, blends, or mixtures be simultaneously displayed or posted.
(b) The following
			 information shall be conspicuously displayed or posted on each side of a retail
			 dispenser used in direct sale:
(1) the
			 identity of the product in descriptive commercial terms; and
(2) the identity of the grade, brand, blend,
			 or mixture that a multi-product dispenser is set to deliver. (Amended 1972,
			 1983, 1987, 1989, 1992, 1993, and 2012)
UR.3.3.
Computing Device.
- Any
			 computing device used in an application where a product or grade is offered for
			 sale at one or more unit prices shall be used only for sales for which the
			 device computes and displays the sales price for the selected transaction.
(Became retroactive 1999)
(Added 1989) (Amended 1992)
The following exceptions apply:
(a) Fleet sales and other price contract
			 sales are exempt from this requirement.
(b) A truck stop dispenser used exclusively
			 for refueling trucks is exempt from this requirement provided that:
(1) all purchases of fuel are accompanied by
			 a printed receipt of the transaction containing the applicable price per
			 gallon, the total gallons delivered, and the total price of the sale; and
(Added 1993)
(2) unless a dispenser complies with
			 S.1.6.4.1. Display of Unit Price, the price posted on the dispenser and the
			 price at which the dispenser is set to compute shall be the highest price for
			 any transaction which may be conducted.
(Added 1993)
(c) A dispenser used in an application where
			 a price per unit discount is offered following the delivery is exempt from this
			 requirement, provided the following conditions are satisfied:
(1) the unit price posted on the dispenser
			 and the unit price at which the dispenser is set to compute prior to the
			 application of any discount shall be the highest unit price for any
			 transaction;
(Amended 2014)
(2) all purchases of fuel are accompanied by
			 a receipt recorded by the system. The receipt shall contain:
a. the product identity by name, symbol,
			 abbreviation, or code number;
b.
			 transaction information as shown on the dispenser at the end of the delivery
			 and prior to any post-delivery discount including the:
1. total volume of the delivery;
2. unit price; and
3. total computed price of the fuel sale
			 prior to post-delivery discounts being applied.
c. an itemization of the post-delivery
			 discounts to the unit price; and d. the final total price of the fuel sale.
			 (Added 2012) (Amended 2014)
(Added 1989) (Amended 1992, 1993, 2012, and 2014)
UR.3.4.
Printed Ticket.
- The
			 total price, the total volume of the delivery, and the price per liter or
			 gallon shall be shown, either printed by the device or in clear hand script, on
			 any printed ticket issued by a device and containing any one of these values.
(Amended 2001)
UR.3.5.
Steps after Dispensing.
- After delivery to a customer from a retail motor-fuel device:
(a) the starting lever shall be returned to
			 its shutoff position and the zero-set-back interlock engaged; and
(b) the discharge nozzle shall be returned to
			 its designed hanging position unless the primary indicating elements, and
			 recording elements, if the device is equipped and activated to record, have
			 been returned to a definite zero indication.
UR.3.6.
Temperature Compensation,
			 Wholesale.
UR.3.6.1.
Automatic.
UR.3.6.1.1.
When to be Used.
- If a device is equipped with a mechanical automatic
			 temperature compensator, it shall be connected, operable, and in use at all
			 times. An electronic or mechanical automatic temperature-compensating system
			 may not be removed, nor may a compensated device be replaced with an
			 uncompensated device, without the written approval of the responsible weights
			 and measures jurisdiction.
Note
: This requirement does not specify the method
				of sale for product measured through a meter. (Amended 1989)
UR.3.6.1.2.
Invoices.
(a) A written invoice based on a reading of a
			 device that is equipped with an automatic temperature compensator shall show
			 that the volume delivered has been adjusted to the volume at 15 °C (60
			 °F).
(b) The invoice issued
			 from an electronic wholesale device equipped with an automatic
			 temperature-compensating system shall also indicate:
(1) the API gravity, specific gravity or
			 coefficient of expansion for the product;
(2) product temperature; and
(3) gross reading. (Amended 1987)
UR.3.6.2.
Nonautomatic.
UR.3.6.2.1.
Temperature Determination.
- If the volume of the product delivered is
			 adjusted to the volume at 15 °C (60 °F), the product temperature shall
			 be taken during the delivery in:
(a) the
			 liquid chamber of the meter; or
(b)
			 the meter inlet or discharge line adjacent to the meter; or
(c) the compartment of the receiving vehicle
			 at the time it is loaded.
UR.3.6.2.2.
Invoices.
- The
			 accompanying invoice shall indicate that the volume of the product has been
			 adjusted for temperature variations to a volume at 15 °C (60 °F) and
			 shall also state the product temperature used in making the adjustment.
UR.3.6.3.
Period
			 of Use.
- When fuel is bought or sold on an automatic or non-automatic
			 temperature-compensated basis, it shall be bought or sold using this method
			 over at least a consecutive 12-month period, unless otherwise agreed to by both
			 the buyer and seller in writing.
(Added 2003)
Section 3.31.
Vehicle-Tank Meters
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code applies to meters mounted on vehicle tanks including those
			 used for the measurement and delivery of petroleum products or agri-chemical
			 liquids such as fertilizers, feeds, pesticides, defoliants, and bulk deliveries
			 of water.
(Amended 1985 and 1995)
A.2.
Exceptions.
- This code
			 does not apply to the following devices:
(a)
			 Devices used for dispensing liquefied petroleum gases, or other liquids that do
			 not remain in a liquid state at atmospheric pressures and temperatures. (Also
			 see Section 3.32. Code for Liquefied Petroleum Gas and Anhydrous Ammonia
			 Liquid-Measuring Devices.)
(b)
			 Devices used solely for dispensing a product in connection with operations in
			 which the amount dispensed does not affect customer charges.
(c) Vehicle tanks used as measures. (Also see
			 Section 4.40. Code for Vehicle Tanks Used as Measures.)
(d) Mass flow meters. (Also see Section 3.37.
			 Code for Mass Flow Meters.) (Added 1994)
(e) Devices used to measure cryogenic
			 liquids. (Also see Section 3.34. Code for Cryogenic Liquid-Measuring
			 Devices.)
(f) Devices used to
			 measure carbon dioxide liquids. (Also see Section 3.38. Code for Carbon Dioxide
			 Liquid-Measuring Devices.)
A.3.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code, Vehicle-Tank Meters
			 shall meet the requirements of 1.10. General Code requirements.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Design of Indicating and
			 Recording Elements and of Recorded Representations.
S.1.1.
Primary Elements.
S.1.1.1.
General.
- A meter
			 shall be equipped with a primary indicating element and may also be equipped
			 with a primary recording element.
Note:
Except for systems used solely for the sale
				of aviation fuel into aircraft and for aircraft-related operations,
				vehicle-tank meters shall be equipped with a primary recording element as
				required by paragraph UR.2.2. Ticket Printer; Customer Ticket.
(Amended 1993)
S.1.1.2.
Units.
(a) A meter shall indicate, and record if the
			 meter is equipped to record, its deliveries in terms of liters or gallons.
			 Fractional parts of the liter or gallon shall be in terms of either decimal or
			 binary subdivisions.
(b) When it is
			 an industry practice to purchase and sell milk by weight based upon 1.03 kg/L
			 (8.6 lb/gal), the primary indicating element may indicate in kilograms or
			 pounds and decimal kilograms or pounds. The weight value division shall be a
			 decimal multiple or submultiple of 1, 2, or 5. (Also see Section S.5.5.
			 Conversion Factor.)
S.1.1.3.
Value of Smallest Unit.
- The value of the smallest unit of indicated delivery, and recorded
			 delivery if the meter is equipped to record, shall not exceed the equivalent
			 of:
(a) 0.5 L (0.1 gal) or 0.5 kg (1 lb) on
			 milk-metering systems;
(b) 0.5 L
			 (0.1 gal) on meters with a rated maximum flow rate of 750 L/min (200 gal/min)
			 or less;
(c) 5 L (1 gal) on meters
			 with a rated maximum flow of 375 L/min (100 gal/min) or more used for jet fuel
			 aviation refueling systems; or
(Added 2006)
(d) 5 L (1 gal) on other meters. (Amended
			 1989, 1994 and 2006)
S.1.1.4.
Advancement of Indicating and
			 Recording Elements.
- Primary indicating and recording elements shall be
			 susceptible to advancement only by the mechanical operation of the meter.
			 However, a meter may be cleared by advancing its elements to zero, but only if:
(a) the advancing movement, once started,
			 cannot be stopped until zero is reached; or
(b) in the case of indicating elements only,
			 such elements are automatically obscured until the elements reach the correct
			 zero position.
S.1.1.5.
Return to Zero.
- Primary indicating elements shall be readily
			 returnable to a definite zero indication. Means shall be provided to prevent
			 the return of primary indicating elements, and of primary recording elements if
			 these are returnable to zero, beyond their correct zero position.
S.1.2.
Graduations.
S.1.2.1.
Length.
- Graduations shall be so varied in length that they may be conveniently
			 read.
S.1.2.2.
Width.
- In any series of graduations, the width of a graduation shall in no
			 case be greater than the width of the minimum clear interval between
			 graduations, and the width of main graduations shall be not more than 50 %
			 greater than the width of subordinate graduations. Graduations shall in no case
			 be less than 0.2 mm (0.008 in) wide.
S.1.2.3.
Clear Interval Between
			 Graduations.
- The clear interval shall be not less than 2.5 mm (0.10
			 in). If the graduations are not parallel, the measurement shall be made:
(a) along the line of relative movement
			 between the graduations at the end of the indicator; or
(b) if the indicator is continuous, at the
			 point of widest separation of the graduations. (Amended 1986)
S.1.3.
Indicators.
S.1.3.1.
Symmetry.
- The index of an indicator shall be symmetrical with respect to the
			 graduations at least throughout that portion of its length associated with the
			 graduations.
S.1.3.2.
Length.
- The index of an indicator shall reach to the finest
			 graduations with which it is used, unless the indicator and the graduations are
			 in the same plane, in which case the distance between the end of the indicator
			 and the ends of the graduations, measured along the line of the graduations,
			 shall be not more than 1.0 mm (0.04 in).
S.1.3.3.
Width.
- The width of
			 the index of an indicator in relation to the series of graduations with which
			 it is used shall be not greater than:
(a)
the width of the narrowest graduation;* and [*Nonretroactive as of
			 January 1, 2002]
(Amended 2001)
(b) the width of the minimum clear interval
			 between graduations.
When the index of an indicator extends along the entire length
				of a graduation, that portion of the index of the indicator that may be brought
				into coincidence with the graduation shall be of the same width throughout the
				length of the index that coincides with the graduation.
S.1.3.4.
Clearance.
- The clearance between the index of an indicator and the graduations
			 shall in no case be more than 1.5 mm (0.06 in).
S.1.3.5.
Parallax.
- Parallax
			 effects shall be reduced to the practicable minimum.
S.1.3.6.
Travel of Indicator.
-
			 If the most sensitive element of the primary indicating element utilizes an
			 indicator and graduations, the relative movement of these parts corresponding
			 to the smallest indicated value shall not be less than 5 mm (0.20
			 in).
S.1.4.
Computing-Type Device.
S.1.4.1.
Display of Unit Price.
- In a device of the computing type, means shall
			 be provided for displaying, in a manner clear to the operator and an observer,
			 the unit price at which the device is set to compute. The unit price is not
			 required to be displayed continuously.
(Amended 1983 and 2005)
S.1.4.2.
Printed Ticket.
- If a
			 computing-type device issues a printed ticket which displays the total computed
			 price, the ticket shall also have printed clearly thereon the total quantity of
			 the delivery, the appropriate fraction of the quantity, and the price per unit
			 of quantity.
(Amended 1989)
S.1.4.3.
Money-Value Computations.
- Money-value computations shall be of the full-computing type in which
			 the money-value at a single unit price, or at each of a series of unit prices,
			 shall be computed for every delivery within either the range of measurement of
			 the device or the range of the computing elements, whichever is less. Value
			 graduations shall be supplied and shall be accurately positioned. The value of
			 each graduated interval shall be one cent. On electronic devices with digital
			 indications, the total price may be computed on the basis of the quantity
			 indicated when the value of the smallest division indicated is equal to or less
			 than 0.2 L (0.1 gal) or 0.2 kg (1 lb).
(Amended 1979 and 1989)
S.1.4.4.
Money-Values, Mathematical
			 Agreement.
- Any digital money-value indication and any recorded
			 money-value on a computing-type device shall be in mathematical agreement with
			 its associated quantity indication or representation to within one cent of
			 money-value.
S.2.
Design of Measuring
			 Elements.
S.2.1.
Vapor
			 Elimination.
- A metering system shall be equipped with an effective
			 vapor or air eliminator or other automatic means to prevent the passage of
			 vapor and air through the meter. Vent lines from the air or vapor eliminator
			 shall be made of metal tubing or some other suitable rigid material.
(Amended 1993)
S.2.2.
Provision for Sealing.
-
			 Adequate provision shall be made for an approved means of security (e.g., data
			 change audit trail) or for physically applying a security seal in such a manner
			 that requires the security seal to be broken before a change or an adjustment
			 or interchange may be made of:
(a) any
			 measuring or indicating element;
(b) any adjustable element for controlling
			 delivery rate when such rate tends to affect the accuracy of deliveries;
			 and
(c) any metrological parameter
			 that will affect the metrological integrity of the device or system.
When applicable, the adjusting mechanism shall be readily
				accessible for purposes of affixing a security seal.
[Audit trails
				shall use the format set forth in Table S.2.2. Categories of Device and Methods
				Sealing.]* [*Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1995]
(Amended 2006)
Table S.2.2. Categories of Device and
						  Methods of Sealing
Categories of
						  Device
Methods of Sealing
Category 1:
No
						  remote configuration capability.
Seal by physical seal or two event counters:
						  one for calibration parameters and one for configuration
						  parameters.
Category 2:
Remote configuration capability, but access is
						  controlled by physical hardware.
The device shall clearly indicate that it is in
						  the remote configuration mode and record such message if capable of printing in
						  this mode or shall not operate while in this mode.
The hardware enabling access for remote
						  communication must be on-site. The hardware must be sealed using a physical
						  seal or an event counter for calibration parameters and an event counter for
						  configuration parameters. The event counters may be located either at the
						  individual measuring device or at the system controller; however, an adequate
						  number of counters must be provided to monitor the calibration and
						  configuration parameters of the individual devices at a location. If the
						  counters are located in the system controller rather than at the individual
						  device, means must be provided to generate a hard copy of the information
						  through an on-site device.
Category 3:
Remote configuration capability access may be unlimited
						  or controlled through a software switch (e.g., password)
.
The device shall clearly indicate that it is in
						  the remote configuration mode and record such message if capable of printing in
						  this mode or shall not operate while in this mode.
An event logger is required in the device; it
						  must include an event counter (000 to 999), the parameter ID, the date and time
						  of the change, and the new value of the parameter. A printed copy of the
						  information must be available through the device or through another on-site
						  device. The event logger shall have a capacity to retain records equal to 10
						  times the number of sealable parameters in the device, but not more than 1000
						  records are required. (
Note:
Does not require 1000 changes to be
						  stored for each parameter.)
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1995]
(Table
				Added 2006)
S.2.3.
Directional Flow Valves.
- Valves intended to prevent reversal of flow shall be automatic in
			 operation. However, on equipment used exclusively for fueling aircraft, such
			 valves may be manual in operation.
S.2.4.
Zero-Set-Back
			 Interlock, Vehicle-Tank Meters, Electronic.
-
Except
			 for vehicle-mounted metering systems used solely for the delivery of aviation
			 fuel, a device shall be so constructed that after an individual or multiple
			 deliveries at one location have been completed, an automatic interlock system
			 shall engage to prevent a subsequent delivery until the indicating and, if
			 equipped, recording elements have been returned to their zero position. For
			 individual deliveries, if there is no product flow for three minutes the
			 transaction must be completed before additional product flow is allowed. The
			 3-minute timeout shall be a sealable feature on an indicator.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2006]
(Added 2005)
S.2.5.
Automatic Temperature
			 Compensation for Refined Petroleum Products.
S.2.5.1.
Automatic Temperature
			 Compensation for Refined Petroleum Products.
- A device may be equipped
			 with an automatic means for adjusting the indication and registration of the
			 measured volume of product to the volume at 15 °C for liters or the volume
			 at 60 °F for gallons and decimal subdivisions or fractional equivalents
			 thereof where not prohibited by state law.
S.2.5.2.
Provision for Deactivating.
- On a device equipped with an automatic temperature-compensating
			 mechanism that will indicate or record only in terms of liters compensated to
			 15°C or gallons compensated to 60 °F, provision shall be made for
			 deactivating the automatic temperature-compensating mechanism so the meter can
			 indicate and record, if it is equipped to record, in terms of the uncompensated
			 volume.
S.2.5.3.
Gross and
			 Net Indications.
- A device equipped with automatic temperature
			 compensation shall indicate or record, if equipped to record, both the gross
			 (uncompensated) and net (compensated) volume for testing purposes. It is not
			 necessary that both net and gross volume be displayed simultaneously.
S.2.5.4.
Provision for Sealing
			 Automatic Temperature-Compensating Systems.
- Adequate provision shall
			 be made for an approved means of security (e.g., data change audit trail) or
			 physically applying security seals in such a manner that an automatic
			 temperature-compensating system cannot be disconnected and no adjustment may be
			 made to the system.
S.2.5.5.
Temperature Determination with Automatic Temperature Compensation.
- For
			 test purposes, means shall be provided (e.g., thermometer well) to determine
			 the temperature of the liquid either:
(a) in
			 the liquid chamber of the meter; or
(b) immediately adjacent to the meter in the
			 meter inlet or discharge line. (Added 2007)
S.2.6.
Thermometer Well,
			 Temperature Determination.
For test purposes, means
			 shall be provided
(e.g., thermometer well) to determine the temperature
				of the liquid either in the:
(a)
liquid chamber of the meter;
			 or
(b)
meter
			 inlet or discharge line immediately adjacent to the meter. [Nonretroactive as
			 of January 1, 2012)
(Added 2011)
S.3.
Design of Discharge Lines and
			 Discharge Line Valves.
(Not applicable to milk-metering systems.)
S.3.1.
Diversion of Measured Liquid.
- Except on equipment used exclusively for fueling aircraft, no means
			 shall be provided by which any measured liquid can be diverted from the
			 measuring chamber of the meter or the discharge line thereof. However, two or
			 more delivery outlets may be installed if means is provided to insure that:
(a) liquid can flow from only one such outlet
			 at one time; and
(b) the direction
			 of flow for which the mechanism may be set at any time is definitely and
			 conspicuously indicated.
S.3.2.
Pump-Discharge Unit.
-
			 On a pump-discharge unit, the discharge hose shall be of the wet-hose type with
			 a shutoff valve at its outlet end. However, a pump-discharge unit may be
			 equipped also with a dry-hose without a shutoff valve at its outlet end, but
			 only if:
(a) the dry-hose is as short as
			 practicable; and
(b) there is
			 incorporated in the discharge piping, immediately adjacent to the meter,
			 effective means to insure that liquid can flow through only one of the
			 discharge hoses at any one time and that the meter and the wet-hose remain full
			 of liquid at all times.
S.3.3.
Gravity-Discharge Unit.
- On a gravity-discharge unit, the discharge hose or equivalent pipe
			 shall be of the dry-hose type with no shutoff valve at its outlet end. The
			 dry-hose shall be of such stiffness and only of such length as to facilitate
			 its drainage. The inlet end of the hose or of an equivalent outlet pipe shall
			 be of such height as to provide for proper drainage of the hose or pipe. There
			 shall be incorporated an automatic vacuum breaker or equivalent means to
			 prevent siphoning and to ensure the rapid and complete drainage.
S.3.4.
Discharge Hose.
- A
			 discharge hose shall be adequately reinforced.
S.3.5.
Discharge Valve.
- A
			 discharge valve may be installed in the discharge line only if the device is of
			 the wet-hose type, in which case such valve shall be at the discharge end of
			 the line. Any other shutoff valve on the discharge side of the meter shall be
			 of the automatic or semiautomatic predetermined-stop type or shall be operable
			 only:
(a) by means of a tool (but not a pin)
			 entirely separate from the device; or
(b) by mutilation of a security seal with
			 which the valve is sealed open.
S.3.6.
Antidrain Valve.
- In a
			 wet-hose, pressure-type device, an effective antidrain valve shall be
			 incorporated in the discharge valve or immediately adjacent thereto. The
			 antidrain valve shall function so as to prevent the drainage of the discharge
			 hose. However, a device used exclusively for fueling and defueling aircraft may
			 be of the pressure type without an antidrain valve.
S.4.
Design of Intake Lines (for
			 Milk-Metering Systems).
S.4.1.
Diversion of Liquid to be Measured.
- No means shall be provided by
			 which any liquid can be diverted from the supply tank to the receiving tank
			 without being measured by the device.
S.4.2.
Intake Hose.
- The
			 intake hose shall be:
(a) of the dry-hose
			 type;
(b) adequately
			 reinforced;
(c) not more than 6 m
			 (20 ft) in length, unless it can be demonstrated that a longer hose is
			 essential to permit pickups from a supply tank; and
(d) connected to the pump at horizontal or
			 above, to permit complete drainage of the hose.
S.5.
Marking Requirements.
S.5.1.
Limitation of Use.
- If
			 a meter is intended to measure accurately only liquids having particular
			 properties, or to measure accurately only under specific installation or
			 operating conditions, or to measure accurately only when used in conjunction
			 with specific accessory equipment, these limitations shall be clearly and
			 permanently stated on the meter.
S.5.2.
Discharge Rates.
- A
			 meter shall be marked to show its designed maximum and minimum discharge rates.
			 However, the minimum discharge rate shall not exceed 20 % of the maximum
			 discharge rate.
Note:
Also see example in Section 3.30.
				Liquid-Measuring Devices Code, paragraph S.4.4.1. Discharge Rates. (Added
				2003)
S.5.3.
Measuring
			 Components, Milk-Metering System.
- All components that affect the
			 measurement of milk that are disassembled for cleaning purposes shall be
			 clearly and permanently identified with a common serial number.
S.5.4.
Flood Volume, Milk-Metering
			 System.
- When applicable, the volume of product necessary to flood the
			 system when dry shall be clearly, conspicuously, and permanently marked on the
			 air eliminator.
S.5.5.
Conversion Factor.
- When the conversion factor of 1.03 kg/L (8.6
			 lb/gal) is used to convert the volume of milk to weight, the conversion factor
			 shall be clearly marked on the primary indicating element and recorded on the
			 delivery ticket.
(Added 1989)
S.5.6.
Temperature Compensation for
			 Refined Petroleum Products.
- If a device is equipped with an automatic
			 temperature compensator, the primary indicating elements, recording elements,
			 and recorded representations shall be clearly and conspicuously marked to show
			 the volume delivered has been adjusted to the volume at 15 °C for liters or
			 the volume at 60 °F for gallons and decimal subdivisions or fractional
			 equivalents thereof.
(Added 2007)
S.5.7.
Meter Size.
- Except for milk meters, if the meter model identifier
			 does not provide a link to the meter size (in terms of pipe diameter) on an
			 NTEP Certificate of Conformance, the meter shall be marked to show meter
			 size.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2009]
(Added 2008)
N.
Notes
N.1.
Test Liquid.
(a) A measuring system shall be tested with
			 the liquid to be commercially measured or with a liquid of the same general
			 physical characteristics. Following a satisfactory examination, the weights and
			 measures official should attach a seal or tag indicating the product used
			 during the test.
(Amended 1975)
(b) A milk-measuring system shall be tested
			 with the type of milk to be measured when the accuracy of the system is
			 affected by the characteristics of milk (e.g., positive displacement meters).
(Added 1989)
(Amended 1975 and 1989)
N.2.
Evaporation and Volume Change.
- Care shall be exercised to reduce to a minimum, evaporation losses and
			 volume changes resulting from changes in temperature of the test
			 liquid.
N.3.
Test Drafts.
- Test drafts should be equal to at least the amount delivered by the
			 device in 1 minute at its maximum discharge rate, and shall in no case be less
			 than 180 L (50 gal) or 225 kg (500 lb).
(Amended 1989)
N.4.
Testing Procedures.
N.4.1.
Normal Tests.
- The
			 "normal" test of a measuring system shall be made at the maximum discharge rate
			 that may be anticipated under the conditions of the installation. Any
			 additional tests conducted at flow rates down to and including one-half of the
			 sum of the maximum discharge flow rate and the rated minimum discharge flow
			 rate shall be considered normal tests.
(Amended 1992)
N.4.1.1.
Milk Measuring System.
- The "normal" test shall include a determination of the effectiveness
			 of the air elimination system.
N.4.1.2.
Repeatability Tests.
-
			 Tests for repeatability should include a minimum of three consecutive test
			 drafts of approximately the same size and be conducted under controlled
			 conditions where variations in factors such as temperature, pressure, and flow
			 rate are reduced to the extent that they will not affect the results obtained.
(Added 2001)
N.4.1.3.
Automatic
			 Temperature-Compensating Systems for Refined Petroleum Products.
- On
			 devices equipped with automatic temperature-compensating systems, normal tests
			 shall be conducted:
(a) by comparing the
			 compensated volume indicated or recorded to the actual delivered volume
			 corrected to 15 °C for liters or 60 °F for gallons and decimal
			 subdivisions or fractional equivalents thereof; and
(b) with the temperature-compensating system
			 deactivated, comparing the uncompensated volume indicated or recorded to the
			 actual delivered volume.
The first test shall be performed with the automatic
				temperature-compensating system operating in the "as-found" condition. On
				devices that indicate or record both the compensated and uncompensated volume
				for each delivery, the tests in (a) and (b) may be performed as a single
				test.
(Added 2007)
N.4.2.
Special Tests (Except
			 Milk-Measuring Systems).
- "Special" tests shall be made to develop the
			 operating characteristics of a measuring system and any special elements and
			 accessories attached to or associated with the device. Any test except as set
			 forth in N.4.1. Normal Tests and N.4.5. Product Depletion Test shall be
			 considered a special test. Special tests of a measuring system shall be made at
			 a minimum discharge rate of 20 % of the marked maximum discharge rate or at the
			 minimum discharge rate marked on the device, whichever is less.
(Amended 1978 and 2005)
N.4.3.
Antidrain Valve Test.
-
			 The effectiveness of the antidrain valve shall be tested after the pump
			 pressure in the measuring system has been released and a valve between the
			 supply tank and the discharge valve is closed.
N.4.4.
System Capacity.
- The
			 test of a milk-measuring system shall include the verification of the volume of
			 product necessary to flood the system as marked on the air
			 eliminator.
N.4.5.
Product
			 Depletion Test.
- Except for vehicle-mounted metering systems used
			 solely for the delivery of aviation fuel, the effectiveness of the vapor
			 eliminator or vapor elimination means shall be tested by dispensing product at
			 the normal flow rate until the product supply is depleted and continuing until
			 the lack of fluid causes the meter indication to stop completely for at least
			 10 seconds. If the meter indication fails to stop completely for at least 10
			 seconds, continue to operate the system for 3 minutes. Finish the test by
			 switching to another compartment with sufficient product to complete the test
			 on a multi-compartment vehicle or by adding sufficient product to complete the
			 test to a single compartment vehicle. When adding product to a single
			 compartment vehicle, allow appropriate time for any entrapped vapor to disperse
			 before continuing the test. Test drafts shall be of the same size and run at
			 approximately the same flow rate.
(Added 2005)
N.5.
Temperature Correction for
			 Refined Petroleum Products.
- Corrections shall be made for any changes
			 in volume resulting from the differences in liquid temperatures between the
			 time of passage through the meter and the time of volumetric determination in
			 the prover. When adjustments are necessary, appropriate petroleum measurement
			 tables should be used.
(Added 2007)
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Application.
T.1.1.
To Underregistration and to
			 Overregistration.
- The tolerances hereinafter prescribed shall be
			 applied to errors of underregistration and errors of
			 overregistration.
T.2.
Tolerance Values.
- Tolerances shall be as shown in Table 1.
			 Accuracy Classes and Tolerances for Vehicle-Tank Meters and Table 2. Tolerances
			 for Vehicle-Mounted Milk Meters.
(Amended 1995)
Table 1. Accuracy Classes and Tolerances for
						  Vehicle-Tank Meters
Accuracy Class
Application
Acceptance Tolerance
Maintenance Tolerance
Special Test Tolerance
0.3
- Petroleum products delivered from large capacity
						  (flow rates over 115 L/min or 30 gpm)** devices, including motor-fuel
						  devices
- Heated products (other than asphalt) at temperatures
						  greater than 50 °C (122 °F)
- Asphalt at temperatures equal to or below 50 °C
						  (122 °F)
- All other liquids not shown in the table where the
						  typical delivery is greater than 200 L (50 gal)
0.15 %
0.3 %
0.45 %
0.3A
- Asphalt at temperatures greater than 50 °C (122
						  °F)
0.3 %
0.3 %
0.5 %
0.5*
- Petroleum products delivered from small capacity (at
						  4 L/min (1 gpm) through 115 L/min or 30 gpm)** motor-fuel devices
- Agri-chemical liquids
- All other applications not shown in the table where
						  the typical delivery is [LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO] 200 L (50 gal)
0.3 %
0.5 %
0.5 %
1.1
- Petroleum products and other normal liquids from
						  devices with flow rates** less than 4 L/min (1 gpm) and
- Devices designed to deliver less than 4 L (1
						  gal)
0.75 %
1.0 %
1.25 %
1.5
- Water
Overregistration
1.5 %
1.5 %
1.5 %
Underregistration
1.5 %
1.5 %
5.0 %
*
For 5 gal and 10 gal test drafts, the
						  tolerances specified for Accuracy Class 0.5 in the table above do not apply.
						  For these test drafts, the maintenance tolerances on normal and special tests
						  for 5 gal and 10 gal test drafts are 6 in3 and 11
						  in3, respectively. Acceptance tolerances on normal
						  and special tests are 3 in3 and 5.5
						  in3.
** Flow rate refers to designed or marked maximum flow
						  rate.
(Added 2002) (Amended 2013)
Table 2. Tolerances for Vehicle-Mounted Milk
						  Meters
Indication (gallons)
Maintenance Tolerance (gallons)
Acceptance Tolerance (gallons)
100
0.5
0.3
200
0.7
0.4
300
0.9
0.5
400
1.1
0.6
500
1.3
0.7
Over 500
Add 0.002 gallon per indicated gallon over 500
Add 0.001 gallon per indicated gallon over 500
(Added 1989)
T.2.1.
Automatic Temperature-Compensating Systems.
- The difference
			 between the meter error (expressed as a percentage) for results determined with
			 and without the automatic temperature-compensating system activated shall not
			 exceed:
(a) 0.2 % for mechanical automatic
			 temperature-compensating systems; and
(b) 0.1 % for electronic automatic
			 temperature-compensating systems.
The delivered quantities for each test shall be approximately
				the same size. The results of each test shall be within the applicable
				acceptance or maintenance tolerance.
(Added 2007) (Amended 2010)
T.3.
Repeatability.
- When multiple tests are conducted at approximately the same flow rate
			 and draft size, the range of the test results for the flow rate shall not
			 exceed 40 % of the absolute value of the maintenance tolerance and the results
			 of each test shall be within the applicable tolerance. (Also see N.4.1.2.
			 Repeatability Tests.)
(Added 1992) (Amended 2001 and 2002)
T.4.
Product Depletion Test.
-
			 The difference between the test result for any normal test and the product
			 depletion test shall not exceed 0.5 % of the volume delivered in one minute at
			 the maximum flow rate marked on the meter for meters rated higher than 380 Lpm
			 (100 gpm) or 0.6 % of the volume delivered in one minute at the maximum flow
			 rate marked on the meter for meters rated 380 Lpm (100 gpm) or lower. Test
			 drafts shall be of the same size and run at approximately the same flow rate.
Note:
The result of the product depletion test may
				fall outside of the applicable test tolerance as specified in Table 1. Accuracy
				Classes and Tolerances for Vehicle-Tank Meters.
(Amended 2013)
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Installation
			 Requirements.
UR.1.1.
Discharge
			 Rate.
- A meter shall be so installed that the actual maximum discharge
			 rate will not exceed the rated maximum discharge rate. If necessary, means for
			 flow regulation shall be incorporated in the installation, in which case this
			 shall be fully effective and automatic in operation.
UR.1.2.
Unit Price.
- There
			 shall be displayed on the face of a device of the computing type the unit price
			 at which the device is set to compute.
UR.1.3.
Intake Hose.
- The
			 intake hose in a milk-metering system shall be installed to permit complete
			 drainage and ensure that all available product is measured following each
			 pickup.
UR.1.4.
Liquid
			 Measured.
- A vehicle-tank meter shall continue to be used to measure
			 the same liquid or one with the same general physical properties as that used
			 for calibration and weights and measures approval unless the meter is
			 recalibrated with a different product and tested by a registered service agency
			 or a weights and measures official and approved by the weights and measures
			 jurisdiction having statutory authority over the device.
(Added 2003)
UR.2.
Use Requirements.
UR.2.1.
Return of Indicating and
			 Recording Elements to Zero.
- The primary indicating elements (visual),
			 and the primary recording elements, when these are returnable to zero, shall be
			 returned to zero immediately before each delivery is begun and after the pump
			 has been activated and the product to be measured has been supplied to the
			 measuring system.
(Amended 1981)
UR.2.2.
Ticket Printer, Customer
			 Ticket.
- Vehicle-Mounted metering systems shall be equipped with a
			 ticket printer which shall be used for all sales where product is delivered
			 through the meter. A copy of the ticket issued by the device shall be left with
			 the customer at the time of delivery or as otherwise specified by the customer.
(Added 1993) (Amended 1994)
UR.2.2.1.
Exceptions for the Sale of
			 Aviation Fuel.
- The provisions of UR.2.2. Ticket Printer, Customer
			 Ticket shall not apply to vehicle-mounted metering systems used solely for the
			 delivery of aviation fuel into aircraft and for aircraft-related operations.
(Added 1999)
UR.2.3.
Ticket in Printing Device.
- A ticket shall not be inserted into a device equipped with a ticket
			 printer until immediately before a delivery is begun, and in no case shall a
			 ticket be in the device when the vehicle is in motion while on a public street,
			 highway, or thoroughfare.
UR.2.4.
Credit for Flood Volume.
- The volume of product necessary to
			 flood the system as marked on the air eliminator shall be individually recorded
			 on the pickup ticket of each seller affected.
UR.2.5.
Automatic Temperature
			 Compensation for Refined Petroleum Products.
UR.2.5.1.
When to be Used.
- In
			 a state that does not prohibit, by law or regulation, the sale of
			 temperature-compensated product, a device equipped with an activated
			 automatic-temperature compensator shall be connected, operable, and in use at
			 all times. An electronic or mechanical automatic temperature-compensating
			 device or system may not be removed or deactivated, nor may a compensated
			 device be replaced with an uncompensated device or system, without the written
			 approval of the responsible weights and measures jurisdiction.
Note:
This requirement does not specify the method
				of sale for products measured through a meter. (Amended 2009)
UR.2.5.2.
Period of Use. -
When
			 fuel is bought or sold on an automatic temperature compensation basis, it shall
			 be bought or sold using this basis over at least a consecutive 12-month period
			 unless otherwise agreed to by both the buyer and seller in writing.
(Added 2009)
UR.2.5.3.
Invoices.
- An
			 invoice based on a reading of a device that is equipped with an automatic
			 temperature compensator shall show that the volume delivered has been adjusted
			 to the volume at 15 °C for liters or the volume at 60 °F for gallons
			 and decimal subdivisions or fractional equivalents thereof.
(Added 2007)
Section 3.32.
Liquefied Petroleum Gas and Anhydrous Ammonia
Liquid-Measuring
				Devices
40
A.
Application.
A.1.
General.
- This code
			 applies to devices used for the measurement of liquefied petroleum gas and
			 anhydrous ammonia in the liquid state, whether such devices are installed in a
			 permanent location or mounted on a vehicle.
A.2.
Devices Used to Measure Other
			 Liquid Products not Covered in Specific Codes.
- Insofar as they are
			 clearly appropriate, the requirements and provisions of the code may be applied
			 to devices used for the measurement of other liquids that do not remain in a
			 liquid state at atmospheric pressures and temperatures.
A.3.
Exceptions
. - This code
			 does not apply to mass flow meters. (Also see Section 3.37. Code for Mass Flow
			 Meters.)
(Added 1994)
A.4.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code, LPG and Anhydrous
			 Ammonia Liquid-Measuring Devices shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10.
			 General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Design of
			 Indicating and Recording Elements and of Recorded Representations.
S.1.1.
Primary Elements.
S.1.1.1.
General.
- A device
			 shall be equipped with a primary indicating element and may also be equipped
			 with a primary recording element.
Note
: Vehicle-mounted metering systems shall be
				equipped with a primary recording element as required by paragraph UR.2.6.
				Ticket Printer; Customer Ticket.
S.1.1.2.
Units.
- A device
			 shall indicate, and record if the device is equipped to record, its deliveries
			 in terms of liters, gallons, quarts, pints, or binary-submultiple or decimal
			 subdivisions of the liter or gallon.
(Amended 1987)
S.1.1.3.
Value of Smallest Unit.
- The value of the smallest unit of indicated delivery, and recorded
			 delivery if the device is equipped to record, shall not exceed the equivalent
			 of:
(a) 0.5 L (1 pt) on retail devices;
			 or
(b) 5 L (1 gal) on wholesale
			 devices. (Amended 1987) 
			 40Title amended 1986.
S.1.1.4.
Advancement of
			 Indicating and Recording Elements.
- Primary indicating and recording
			 elements shall be susceptible to advancement only by the mechanical operation
			 of the device. However, a device may be cleared by advancing its elements to
			 zero, but only if:
(a) the advancing
			 movement, once started, cannot be stopped until zero is reached; or
(b) in the case of indicating elements only,
			 such elements are automatically obscured until the elements reach the correct
			 zero position.
S.1.1.5.
Money-Values, Mathematical Agreement.
- Any digital money-value
			 indication and any recorded money-value on a computing-type device shall be in
			 mathematical agreement with its associated quantity indication or
			 representation to within 1 cent of money-value; except that a stationary retail
			 computing-type device must compute and indicate to the nearest 1 cent of
			 money-value. (Also see Section 1.10. General Code, G-S.5.5. Money-Values,
			 Mathematical Agreement.)
(Amended 1984 and 1988)
S.1.1.6.
Printed Ticket.
- Any
			 printed ticket issued by a device of the computing type on which there is
			 printed the total computed price, shall have printed clearly thereon the total
			 volume of the delivery in terms of liters or gallons, and the appropriate
			 decimal fraction of the liter or gallon, and the corresponding price per liter
			 or gallon.
(Added 1979) (Amended 1987)
S.1.2.
Graduations.
S.1.2.1.
Length.
- Graduations
			 shall be so varied in length that they may be conveniently read.
S.1.2.2.
Width.
- In any series
			 of graduations:
(a) the width of a graduation
			 shall in no case be greater than the width of the minimum clear interval
			 between graduations;
(b) the width
			 of main graduations shall be not more than 50 % greater than the width of
			 subordinate graduations; and
(c)
			 graduations shall in no case be less than 0.2 mm (0.008 in) in width.
S.1.2.3.
Clear Interval
			 between Graduations.
- The clear interval shall be not less than 1.0 mm
			 (0.04 in). If the graduations are not parallel, the measurement shall be made:
(a) along the line of relative movement
			 between the graduations at the end of the indicator; or
(b) if the indicator is continuous, at the
			 point of widest separation of the graduations.
S.1.3.
Indicators.
S.1.3.1.
Symmetry.
- The index
			 of an indicator shall be symmetrical with respect to the graduations, at least
			 throughout that portion of its length associated with the
			 graduations.
S.1.3.2.
Length.
- The index of an indicator shall reach to the finest
			 graduations with which it is used, unless the indicator and the graduations are
			 in the same plane, in which case the distance between the end of the indicator
			 and the ends of the graduations, measured along the line of graduations, shall
			 be not more than 1.0 mm (0.04 in).
S.1.3.3.
Width.
- The width of
			 the index of an indicator in relation to the series of graduations with which
			 it is used shall be not greater than:
(a)
the width of the narrowest graduation;*
and
[*Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2002]
(Amended 2001)
(b) the width of the minimum clear interval
			 between graduations.
When the index of an indicator extends along the entire length
				of a graduation, that portion of the index of the indicator that may be brought
				into coincidence with the graduation shall be of the same width throughout the
				length of the index that coincides with the graduation.
S.1.3.4.
Clearance.
- The clearance between the index of an indicator and the graduations
			 shall in no case be more than 1.5 mm (0.06 in).
S.1.3.5.
Parallax.
- Parallax
			 effects shall be reduced to the practicable minimum.
S.1.4.
For Retail Devices Only.
S.1.4.1.
Indication of Delivery.
- A retail device shall be constructed to show automatically its initial
			 zero condition and the amounts delivered up to the nominal capacity of the
			 device.
S.1.4.2.
Return to
			 Zero.
(a) Primary indicating elements
			 shall be readily returnable to a definite zero indication.
(b) Primary recording elements on a
			 stationary retail device shall be readily returnable to a definite zero
			 indication if the device is equipped to record.
(c) Means shall be provided to prevent the
			 return of primary indicating elements and of primary recording elements if
			 these are returnable to zero, beyond their correct zero position.
(Amended 1990)
S.1.5.
For Stationary Retail Devices
			 Only.
S.1.5.1.
Display of Unit
			 Price and Product Identity.
- In a device of the computing type, means
			 shall be provided for displaying on each face of the device the unit price at
			 which the device is set to compute or to deliver as the case may be, and there
			 shall be conspicuously displayed on each side of the device the identity of the
			 product that is being dispensed. If a device is so designed as to dispense more
			 than one grade, brand, blend, or mixture of product, the identity of the grade,
			 brand, blend, or mixture being dispensed shall also be displayed on each face
			 of the device.
S.1.5.2.
Money-Value Computations.
- A computing device shall compute the total
			 sales price at any single-purchase unit price (excluding fleet sales and other
			 price contract sales) for which the product is offered for sale at any delivery
			 possible within either the measurement range of the device or the range of the
			 computing elements, whichever is less. The analog money-value indication shall
			 not differ from the mathematically computed money-value (quantity × unit
			 price = sales price), for any delivered quantity, by an amount greater than the
			 values shown in Table 1. Money-Value Divisions and Maximum Allowable Variations
			 for Money-Value Computations on Mechanical Analog Computers.
(Amended 1995)
Table 1.
Money-Value Divisions and
Maximum Allowable Variations for
						  Money-Value
Computations on Mechanical Analog
						  Computers
Unit Price
Money-Value Division
Maximum Allowable Variation
From
To and Including
Design Test
Field Test
0
$0.25/liter or $1.00/gallon
1¢
± 1¢
± 1¢
$0.25/liter or $1.00/gallon
$0.75/liter or $3.00/gallon
1¢ or 2¢
± 1¢
± 2¢
$0.75/liter or $3.00/gallon
$2.50/liter or $10.00/gallon
1¢ or 2¢
± 1¢
± 2¢
$0.75/liter or $3.00/gallon
$2.50/liter or $10.00/gallon
5¢
± 2½¢
± 5¢
S.1.5.2.1.
Money-Value Divisions, Analog.
- The value of the graduated intervals
			 representing money-values on a computing-type device with analog indications
			 shall be as follows:
(a) Not more than 1 cent
			 at all unit prices up to and including $0.25 per liter or $1.00 per
			 gallon.
(b) Not more than 2 cents
			 at unit prices greater than $0.25 per liter or $1.00 per gallon up to and
			 including $0.75 per liter or $3.00 per gallon.
(c) Not more than 5 cents at all unit prices
			 greater than $0.75 per liter or $3.00 per gallon. (Amended 1984)
S.1.5.2.2.
Money-Value
			 Divisions, Digital.
- A computing-type device with digital indications
			 shall comply with the requirements of paragraph G.-S.5.5. Money-Values,
			 Mathematical Agreement, and the total price computation shall be based on
			 quantities not exceeding 0.01 gal intervals for devices indicating in U.S.
			 customary units and 0.05 L for devices indicating in metric units.
S.1.5.2.3.
Money-Value
			 Divisions, Auxiliary Indications.
-
In a system
			 equipped with auxiliary indications, all indicated money-value divisions shall
			 be identical.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1985.]
S.1.5.3.
Recorded Representations, Point-of-Sale Systems.
- Except for fleet
			 sales and other price contract sales, a printed receipt providing the following
			 information shall be available through a built-in or separate recording element
			 for all transactions conducted with point-of-sale systems or devices activated
			 by debit cards, credit cards, and/or cash:
(a)
			 the total volume of the delivery;
(b) the unit price;
(c) the total computed price; and
(d) the product identity by name, symbol,
			 abbreviation, or code number. (Added 2014)
S.1.6.
For Wholesale Devices
			 Only.
S.1.6.1.
Travel of
			 Indicator.
- A wholesale device shall be readily operable to deliver
			 accurately any quantity from 180 L (50 gal) to the capacity of the device. If
			 the most sensitive element of the indicating system uses an indicator and
			 graduations, the relative movement of these parts corresponding to a delivery
			 of 5 L (1 gal) shall be not less than 5 mm (0.20 in).
(Amended 1987)
S.2.
Design of Measuring
			 Elements.
S.2.1.
Vapor
			 Elimination.
- A device shall be equipped with an effective vapor
			 eliminator or other effective means to prevent the passage of vapor through the
			 meter.
S.2.2.
Provision for
			 Sealing.
- Adequate provision shall be made for an approved means of
			 security (e.g., data change audit trail) or for physically applying a security
			 seal in such a manner that requires the security seal to be broken before an
			 adjustment or interchange may be made of:
(a)
			 any measuring or indicating element;
(b) any adjustable element for controlling
			 delivery rate, when such rate tends to affect the accuracy of deliveries;
			 and
(c) any metrological parameter
			 that will affect the metrological integrity of the device or system.
When applicable, the adjusting mechanism shall be readily
				accessible for purposes of affixing a security seal.
[Audit trails shall use the format set forth in Table
				S.2.2. Categories of Device and Methods of Sealing.]* [*Nonretroactive as of
				January 1, 1995]
(Amended 2006)
Table S.2.2. Categories of Device and
						  Methods of Sealing
Categories of
						  Device
Methods of Sealing
Category 1:
No
						  remote configuration capability.
Seal by physical seal or two event counters:
						  one for calibration parameters and one for configuration
						  parameters.
Category 2:
Remote configuration capability, but access is
						  controlled by physical hardware.
The device shall clearly indicate that it is in
						  the remote configuration mode and record such message if capable of printing in
						  this mode or shall not operate while in this mode.
The hardware enabling access for remote
						  communication must be on-site. The hardware must be sealed using a physical
						  seal or an event counter for calibration parameters and an event counter for
						  configuration parameters. The event counters may be located either at the
						  individual measuring device or at the system controller; however, an adequate
						  number of counters must be provided to monitor the calibration and
						  configuration parameters of the individual devices at a location. If the
						  counters are located in the system controller rather than at the individual
						  device, means must be provided to generate a hard copy of the information
						  through an on-site device.
Category 3:
Remote configuration capability access may be unlimited
						  or controlled through a software switch (e.g., password)
.
The device shall clearly indicate that it is in
						  the remote configuration mode and record such message if capable of printing in
						  this mode or shall not operate while in this mode.
An event logger is required in the device; it
						  must include an event counter (000 to 999), the parameter ID, the date and time
						  of the change, and the new value of the parameter. A printed copy of the
						  information must be available through the device or through another on-site
						  device. The event logger shall have a capacity to retain records equal to 10
						  times the number of sealable parameters in the device, but not more than 1000
						  records are required. (
Note:
Does not require 1000 changes to be
						  stored for each parameter.)
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1995]
(Table
				Added 2006)
S.2.3.
Directional Flow Valves.
- A measuring system shall be equipped with a valve or other effective
			 means, automatic in operation and installed in or adjacent to the measuring
			 element, to prevent reversal of flow of the product being measured.
(Amended 1982)
S.2.4.
Maintenance of Liquid State.
- A device shall be so designed and installed that the product being
			 measured will remain in a liquid state during the passage through the
			 meter.
S.2.5.
Thermometer
			 Well.
- For test purposes, means shall be provided to determine the
			 temperature of the liquid either:
(a) in the
			 liquid chamber of the meter; or
(b)
			 in the meter inlet or discharge line and immediately adjacent to the meter.
			 (Amended 1987)
S.2.6.
Automatic Temperature Compensation.
- A device may be equipped
			 with an adjustable automatic means for adjusting the indication and
			 registration of the measured volume of product to the volume at 15 °C (60
			 °F).
S.2.6.1.
Provision for
			 Deactivating.
- On a device equipped with an automatic
			 temperature-compensating mechanism that will indicate or record only in terms
			 of liters or gallons adjusted to 15 °C (60 °F), provision shall be made
			 to facilitate the deactivation of the automatic temperature-compensating
			 mechanism so that the meter may indicate, and record if it is equipped to
			 record, in terms of the uncompensated volume.
(Amended 1972)
S.2.6.2.
Provision for Sealing.
- Provision shall be made for applying security seals in such a manner
			 that an automatic temperature-compensating system cannot be disconnected and
			 that no adjustment may be made to the system.
S.3.
Design of Discharge Lines and
			 Discharge Line Valves.
S.3.1.
Diversion of Measured Liquid.
- No means shall be provided by which any
			 measured liquid can be diverted from the measuring chamber of the meter or the
			 discharge line therefrom. However, two or more delivery outlets may be
			 permanently installed if means are provided to insure that:
(a) liquid can flow from only one such outlet
			 at one time; and
(b) the direction
			 of flow for which the mechanism may be set at any time is definitely and
			 conspicuously indicated.
In addition, a manually controlled outlet that may be opened
				for the purpose of emptying a portion of the system to allow for repair and
				maintenance operations shall be permitted. Effective means shall be provided to
				prevent the passage of liquid through any such outlet during normal operation
				of the device and to indicate clearly and unmistakably when the valve controls
				are so set as to permit passage of liquid through such outlet.
(Amended 1975)
S.3.2.
Delivery Hose.
- The
			 delivery hose of a retail device shall be of the wet-hose type with a shutoff
			 valve at its outlet end.
S.4.
Marking Requirements.
S.4.1.
Limitation of Use.
- If
			 a device is intended to measure accurately only products having particular
			 properties, or to measure accurately only under specific installation or
			 operating conditions, or to measure accurately only when used in conjunction
			 with specific accessory equipment, these limitations shall be clearly and
			 permanently stated on the device.
S.4.2.
Discharge Rates.
- A
			 device shall be marked to show its designed maximum and minimum discharge
			 rates. The marked minimum discharge rate shall not exceed:
(a) 20 L (5 gal) per minute for stationary
			 retail devices; or
(b) 20 % of the
			 marked maximum discharge rate for other retail devices and for wholesale
			 devices. (Amended 1987)
Note
: Also see example in Section 3.30.
				Liquid-Measuring Devices Code, paragraph S.4.4.1. Discharge Rates. (Added
				2003)
S.4.3.
Location
			 of Marking Information; Retail Motor-Fuel Dispensers.
-
The marking information required in General Code, paragraph G-S.1.
			 Identification shall appear as follows:
(d)
within 60 cm (24 in) to 150 cm
			 (60 in) from the base of the dispenser;
(e)
either internally and/or
			 externally provided the information is permanent and easily read;
			 and
(f)
on a
			 portion of the device that cannot be readily removed or interchanged (i.e., not
			 on a service access panel).
Note:
The use of a dispenser key or tool to access
				internal marking information is permitted for retail motor-fuel dispensers.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2003]
(Added 2006)
S.4.4.
Temperature Compensation.
- If a device is equipped with an
			 automatic temperature compensator, the primary indicating elements, recording
			 elements, and recorded representation shall be clearly and conspicuously marked
			 to show that the volume delivered has been adjusted to the volume at 15 °C
			 (60 °F).
N.
Notes
N.1.
Test Liquid.
- A device
			 shall be tested with the liquid to be commercially measured or with a liquid of
			 the same general physical characteristics.
N.2.
Vaporization and Volume Change.
- Care shall be exercised to reduce to a minimum, vaporization and
			 volume changes.
N.3.
Test
			 Drafts.
- Test drafts should be equal to at least the amount delivered
			 by the device in one minute at its normal discharge rate.
(Amended 1982)
N.4.
Testing Procedures.
N.4.1.
Normal Tests.
- The
			 "normal" test of a device shall be made at the maximum discharge flow rate
			 developed under the conditions of the installation. Any additional tests
			 conducted at flow rates down to and including one-half the sum of the maximum
			 discharge flow rate and the rated minimum discharge flow rate shall be
			 considered normal tests.
(Amended 1998)
N.4.1.1.
Automatic Temperature
			 Compensation.
- On devices equipped with automatic
			 temperature-compensating systems, normal tests shall be conducted as follows:
(a) by comparing the compensated volume
			 indicated or recorded to the actual delivered volume adjusted to 15 °C (60
			 °F); and
(b) with the
			 temperature-compensating system deactivated, comparing the uncompensated volume
			 indicated or recorded to the actual delivered volume.
The first test shall be performed with the automatic
				temperature-compensating system operating in the "as found" condition. On
				devices that indicate or record both the compensated and uncompensated volume
				for each delivery, the tests in (a) and (b) may be performed as a single
				test.
(Amended 1987)
N.4.1.2.
Repeatability Tests.
-
			 Tests for repeatability should include a minimum of three consecutive test
			 drafts of approximately the same size and be conducted under controlled
			 conditions where variations in factors such as temperature, pressure, and flow
			 rate are reduced to the extent that they will not affect the results obtained.
(Added 2001)
N.4.2.
Special Tests.
-
			 "Special" tests shall be made to develop the operating characteristics of a
			 device and any special elements and accessories attached to or associated with
			 the device. Any test except as set forth in N.4.1. Normal Tests shall be
			 considered a special test.
N.4.2.1.
For
			 Motor-Fuel Devices.
- A motor-fuel device shall be so tested at a
			 minimum discharge rate of:
(a) 20 L (5 gal)
			 per minute; or
(b) the minimum
			 discharge rate marked on the device, whichever is less.
N.4.2.2.
For Other Retail Devices.
- A retail device other than a motor-fuel device shall be tested at a
			 minimum discharge rate of the:
(a) minimum
			 discharge rate that can be developed under the conditions of installation;
			 or
(b) minimum discharge rate
			 marked on the device, whichever is greater. (Amended 1973)
N.4.2.3.
For Wholesale Devices.
- A wholesale device shall be so tested at a minimum discharge rate of:
(a) 40 L (10 gal) per minute for a device
			 with a rated maximum discharge less than 180 L (50 gal) per minute.
(b) 20 % of the marked maximum discharge rate
			 for a device with a rated maximum discharge of 180 L (50 gal) per minute or
			 more, or
(c) the minimum discharge
			 rate marked on the device, whichever is least. (Amended 1987)
N.4.3.
Money-Value Computation Tests.
N.4.3.1.
Laboratory Design Evaluation
			 Tests.
- In the conduct of laboratory design evaluation tests,
			 compliance with paragraph S.1.5.2. Money-Value Computations shall be determined
			 by using the cone gear as a reference for the total quantity delivered. The
			 indicated delivered quantity shall agree with the cone gear representation with
			 the index of the indicator within the width of the graduation. The maximum
			 allowable variation of the indicated sales price shall be as shown in Table 1.
			 Money-Value Divisions and Maximum Allowable Variations for Money-Value
			 Computations on Mechanical Analog Computers.
N.4.3.2.
Field Tests.
- In the
			 conduct of field tests to determine compliance with paragraph S.1.5.2.
			 Money-Value Computations the maximum allowable variation in the indicated sales
			 price shall be as shown in Table 1. Money-Value Divisions and Maximum Allowable
			 Variations for Money-Value Computations on Mechanical Analog Computers.
(Added 1984)
N.5.
Temperature Correction.
-
			 Adjustments shall be made for any changes in volume resulting from the
			 differences in liquid temperatures between time of passage through the meter
			 and time of volumetric determination in the prover. When adjustments are
			 necessary, appropriate petroleum measurement tables should be used.
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Application.
T.1.1.
To
			 Underregistration and to Overregistration.
- The tolerances hereinafter
			 prescribed shall be applied to errors of underregistration and errors of
			 overregistration, whether or not a device is equipped with an automatic
			 temperature compensator.
T.2.
Tolerance Values.
- The
			 maintenance and acceptance tolerances for normal and special tests shall be as
			 shown in Table T.2. Accuracy Classes and Tolerances for LPG and Anhydrous
			 Ammonia Liquid-Measuring Devices.
(Amended 2003)
Table T.2. Accuracy Classes and Tolerances for
						  LPG and Anhydrous Ammonia Liquid-Measuring Devices
Accuracy Class
Application
Acceptance Tolerance
Maintenance Tolerance
Special Test Tolerance
1.0
Anhydrous ammonia, LPG (including vehicle-mounted
						  meters)
0.6 %
1.0 %
1.0 %
(Added 2003)
T.3.
Repeatability.
- When
			 multiple tests are conducted at approximately the same flow rate and draft
			 size, the range of the test results for the flow rate shall not exceed 40 % of
			 the absolute value of the maintenance tolerance and the results of each test
			 shall be within applicable tolerance. This tolerance does not apply to the test
			 of the automatic temperature-compensating system. (Also see N.4.1.2.
			 Repeatability Tests).
(Added 1992) (Amended 1997 and 2001)
T.4.
Automatic
			 Temperature-Compensating Systems.
- The difference between the meter
			 error (expressed as a percentage) for results determined with and without the
			 automatic temperature-compensating system activated shall not exceed:
(a) 1.0 % for mechanical automatic
			 temperature-compensating systems; and
(b) 0.5 % for electronic automatic
			 temperature-compensating systems.
The delivered quantities for each test shall be approximately
				the same size. The results of each test shall be within the applicable
				acceptance or maintenance tolerance.
(Added 1991) (Amended 1992, 1996, and 1997)
UR.
User
			 Requirements
UR.1.
Installation
			 Requirements.
UR.1.1.
Discharge
			 Rate.
- A device shall be so installed that the actual maximum discharge
			 rate will not exceed the rated maximum discharge rate. If necessary, means for
			 flow regulation shall be incorporated in the installation, in which case this
			 shall be fully effective and automatic in operation.
UR.1.2.
Length of Discharge Hose.
- The length of the discharge hose on a stationary motor-fuel device
			 shall not exceed 5.5 m (18 ft), measured from the outside of the housing of the
			 device to the inlet end of the discharge nozzle, unless it can be demonstrated
			 that a longer hose is essential to permit deliveries to be made to receiving
			 vehicles or vessels. Unnecessarily remote location of a device shall not be
			 accepted as justification for an abnormally long hose.
(Amended 1991)
UR.2.
Use Requirements.
UR.2.1.
Return of Indication and
			 Recording Elements to Zero.
- The primary indicating elements (visual),
			 and the primary recording elements when these are returnable to zero, shall be
			 returned to zero before each delivery.
UR.2.2.
Condition of Fill of Discharge
			 Hose.
- The discharge hose shall be completely filled with liquid before
			 the "zero" condition is established prior to the start of a commercial
			 delivery, whether this condition is established by resetting the primary
			 indicating elements to zero indication or by recording the indications of the
			 primary indicating elements. (Also see UR.2.1. Return of Indication and
			 Recording Elements to Zero.)
UR.2.3.
Vapor-Return Line.
-
			 During any metered delivery of liquefied petroleum gas from a supplier's tank
			 to a receiving container, there shall be no vapor-return line from the
			 receiving container to the supplier's tank:
(a) in the case of any receiving container to
			 which normal deliveries can be made without the use of such vapor-return line;
			 or
(b) in the case of any new
			 receiving container when the ambient temperature is below 90 °F.
UR.2.4.
Temperature
			 Compensation.
UR.2.4.
1.
Use of Automatic Temperature Compensators.
- If a
			 device is equipped with an automatic temperature compensator, this shall be
			 connected, operable, and in use at all times. Such automatic temperature
			 compensator may not be removed, nor may a compensated device be replaced with
			 an uncompensated device, without the written approval of the weights and
			 measures authority having jurisdiction over the device.
UR.2.4.
2.
Temperature
			 Compensated Sale.
- All sales of liquefied petroleum gas in a liquid
			 state,
when the quantity is determined by an approved measuring system
				equipped with a temperature-compensating mechanism, or by weight and converted
				to liters or gallons, or by a calibrated container, shall be in terms of liters
				or the U.S. gallon of 231 in3 at 15 °C (60
				°F).
(Added 1984)
UR.2.4.
3.
Invoices.
- Any invoice based on a reading of a device that is equipped with an
			 automatic temperature compensator or based on a weight converted to gallons, or
			 based on the volume of a calibrated container, shall have shown thereon that
			 the volume delivered has been adjusted to the volume at 15 °C (60 °F).
(Amended 1984)
UR.2.4.
4.
Automated
			 Temperature-Compensating Systems.
- Means for determining the
			 temperature of measured liquid in an automatic temperature-compensating system
			 shall be so designed and located that, in any "usual and customary" use of the
			 system, the resulting indications and/or recorded representations are within
			 applicable tolerances.
(Added 1987)
UR.2.5.
Ticket in Printing Device.
- A ticket shall not be inserted into a device equipped with a ticket
			 printer until immediately before a delivery is begun, and in no case shall a
			 ticket be in the device when the vehicle is in motion while on a public street,
			 highway, or thoroughfare.
UR.2.6.
Ticket Printer; Customer Ticket.
- Vehicle-mounted metering
			 systems shall be equipped with a ticket printer. The ticket printer shall be
			 used for all sales; a copy of the ticket issued by the device shall be left
			 with the customer at the time of delivery or as otherwise specified by the
			 customer.
(Added 1992)
Section 3.33.
Hydrocarbon Gas
			 Vapor-Measuring Devices
41
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code
			 applies to devices used for the measurement of hydrocarbon gas in the vapor
			 state, such as propane, propylene, butanes, butylenes, ethane, methane, natural
			 gas, and any other hydrocarbon gas/air mix.
(Amended 1984, 1986, 1988, and 1991)
A.2.
Exceptions.
- This code
			 does not apply to:
(a) Liquid-measuring
			 devices used for dispensing liquefied petroleum gases in liquid form. (Also see
			 Section 3.32. Code for Liquefied Petroleum Gas and Anhydrous Ammonia
			 Liquid-Measuring Devices.)
(b)
			 Natural, liquefied petroleum, and manufactured-gas-vapor meters when these are
			 operated in a public utility system.
(c) Mass flow meters. (Also see Section 3.37.
			 Code for Mass Flow Meters.) (Added 1994)
A.3.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code, Hydrocarbon Gas
			 Vapor-Measuring Devices shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General
			 Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Design of
			 Indicating and Recording Elements and of Recorded Representations.
S.1.1.
Primary Elements.
S.1.1.1.
General.
- A device
			 shall be equipped with a primary indicating element and may also be equipped
			 with a primary recording element.
S.1.1.2.
Units.
- A
			 volume-measuring device shall indicate, and record if equipped to record, its
			 deliveries in terms of cubic meters or cubic feet, or multiple or decimal
			 subdivisions of cubic meters or cubic feet.
(Amended 1972 and 1991)
S.1.1.3.
Value of Smallest Unit.
- The value of the smallest unit of indicated delivery, and recorded
			 delivery if the device is equipped to record, shall not exceed:
(a) 1 m3 (1000
			 dm3) (100 ft3) when the
			 maximum rated gas capacity is less than 280 m3/h (10
			 000 ft3/h);
(b) 10 m3 (1000
			 ft3) when the maximum rated gas capacity is 280
			 m3/h (10 000 ft3/h) up
			 to, but not including, 1700 m3/h (60 000
			 ft3/h); and 1 Title changed 1986.
(c) 100 m3 (10 000
			 ft3) when the maximum rated gas capacity is 1700
			 m3/h (60 000 ft3/h) or
			 more. (Amended 1972, 1988, and 1991)
S.1.1.4.
Advancement of Indicating and
			 Recording Elements.
- Primary indicating and recording elements shall
			 advance digitally or continuously and be susceptible to advancement only by the
			 mechanical operation of the device.
S.1.1.5.
Proving Indicator.
-
			 Devices rated less than 280 m3/h (10 000
			 ft3/h) gas capacity shall be equipped with a proving
			 indicator measuring 0.025, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, or 0.25
			 m3 per revolution, (1, 2, 5, or 10
			 ft3 per revolution) for testing the meter. Devices
			 with larger capacities shall be equipped as follows:
(a) Devices rated 280
			 m3 (10 000 ft3) up to but
			 not including 1700 m3/h (60 000
			 ft3/h) gas capacity shall be equipped with a proving
			 indicator measuring not greater than 1 m3 (100
			 ft3) per revolution.
(b) Devices rated 1700
			 m3/h (60 000 ft3/h) gas
			 capacity or more shall be equipped with a proving indicator measuring not more
			 than 10 m3 (1000 ft3) per
			 revolution.
The test circle of the proving indicator shall be divided into
				ten equal parts. Additional subdivisions of one or more of such equal parts may
				be made.
(Amended 1973 and 1988)
S.1.2.
Graduations.
S.1.2.1.
Length.
- Graduations
			 shall be so varied in length that they may be conveniently read.
S.1.2.2.
Width.
- In any series
			 of graduations, the width of a graduation shall in no case be greater than the
			 width of the minimum clear interval between graduations, and in no case should
			 it exceed 1.0 mm (0.04 in) for indicating elements and 0.5 mm (0.02 in) for
			 proving circles.
S.1.2.3.
Clear Interval Between Graduations.
- The clear interval shall be not
			 less than 1.0 mm (0.04 in). If the graduations are not parallel, the
			 measurement shall be made:
(a) along the line
			 of relative movement between the graduations at the end of the indicator;
			 or
(b) if the indicator is
			 continuous, at the point of widest separation of the graduations.
S.1.3.
Indicators.
S.1.3.1.
Symmetry.
- The index of an indicator shall be symmetrical with respect to the
			 graduations, at least throughout that portion of its length associated with the
			 graduations.
S.1.3.2.
Length.
- The index of an indicator shall reach to the finest
			 graduations with which it is used.
S.1.3.3.
Width.
- The width of
			 the index of an indicator in relation to the series of graduations with which
			 it is used shall be not greater than the:
(a)
width of the narrowest graduation
;
*
and
[*Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2002]
(Amended 2001)
(b) width of the minimum clear interval
			 between graduations.
When the index of an indicator extends along the entire length
				of a graduation, that portion of the index of the indicator that may be brought
				into coincidence with the graduation shall be of the same width throughout the
				length of the index that coincides with the graduation.
S.1.3.4.
Clearance.
- The clearance between the index of an indicator and the graduations
			 shall in no case be more than 1.5 mm (0.06 in).
S.1.3.5.
Parallax.
- Parallax
			 effects shall be reduced to the practicable minimum.
S.2.
Design of
			 Measuring Elements.
S.2.1.
Pressure Regulation.
- The vapor should be measured at a normal
			 gauge pressure (psig) of:
(Amended 1991)
(a)
			 2740 Pa ± 685 Pa (11 in of water column (0.40 psig) ± 2.75 in of
			 water column (0.10 psig)) for liquefied petroleum gas vapor; or
(b) 1744 Pa ± 436 Pa (7 in of water
			 column (0.25 psig) ± 1.75 in of water column (0.06 psig)) for natural
			 and manufactured gas.
When vapor is measured at a pressure other than what is
				specified above for the specific product, a volume multiplier shall be applied
				within the meter or to the billing invoice based on the following
				equation:
Click
				here to view image
Where:
VPM = Volume pressure multiplier
AAP = Assumed atmospheric pressure in Pa or psia
GP = Gauge pressure in Pa or psig
NGP = Normal gauge pressure in Pa or psig
The assumed atmospheric pressure is to be taken from Tables 2
				and 2M.
When liquefied petroleum gas vapor is measured at a pressure of
				6900 Pa (1 psig) or more, the delivery pressure shall be maintained within
				± 1725 Pa (± 0.25 psig).
Pressure variations due to regulator lock off shall not
				increase the operating pressure by more than 25 %. (Amended 1980, 1984, and
				1991)
S.2.2.
Provision for Sealing.
- Adequate provision shall be made for
			 applying security seals in such a manner that no adjustment or interchange may
			 be made of any measurement element.
S.2.3.
Maintenance of Vapor State.
- A device shall be so designed and installed that the product being
			 measured will remain in a vapor state during passage through the
			 meter.
S.2.4.
Automatic
			 Temperature Compensation.
- A device may be equipped with an adjustable
			 automatic means for adjusting the indication and registration of the measured
			 volume of vapor product to the volume at 15 °C (60 °F).
S.3.
Design of
			 Discharge Lines.
S.3.1.
Diversion
			 of Measured Vapor.
- No means shall be provided by which any measured
			 vapor can be diverted from the measuring chamber of the meter or the discharge
			 line therefrom.
S.4.
Marking Requirements.
S.4.1.
Limitations of Use.
- If a device is intended to measure
			 accurately only products having particular properties, or to measure accurately
			 only under specific installation or operating conditions, or to measure
			 accurately only when used in conjunction with specific accessory equipment,
			 these limitations shall be clearly and permanently stated on the
			 device.
S.4.2.
Discharge
			 Rates.
- A device shall be marked to show its rated gas capacity in
			 cubic meters per hour or cubic feet per hour.
S.4.3.
Temperature Compensation.
- If a device is equipped with an automatic temperature compensator,
			 this shall be indicated on the badge or immediately adjacent to the badge of
			 the device and on the register.
S.4.4.
Badge.
- A badge affixed
			 in a prominent position on the front of the device shall show the
			 manufacturer's name, serial number and model number of the device, and capacity
			 rate of the device for the particular products that it was designed to meter as
			 recommended by the manufacturer.
N.
Notes
N.1.
Test Medium.
- The device
			 shall be tested with air or the product to be measured. (Amended
			 1991)
N.2.
Temperature and
			 Volume Change.
- Care should be exercised to reduce to a minimum any
			 volume changes. The temperature of the air, bell-prover oil, and the meters
			 under test should be within 1 °C (2 °F) of one another. The devices
			 should remain in the proving room for at least 16 hours before starting any
			 proving operations to allow the device temperature to approximate the
			 temperature of the proving device.
N.3.
Test Drafts.
- Except for
			 low-flame tests, test drafts shall be at least equal to one complete revolution
			 of the largest capacity proving indicator, and shall in no case be less than
			 0.05 m3 or 2 ft3. All
			 flow rates shall be controlled by suitable outlet orifices.
(Amended 1973 and 1991)
Table 1. Capacity of Low-Flow Test Rate Orifices
						  with Respect to Device Capacity
Metric Units
U.S. Customary Units
Rated Capacity
Low-Flow Test Rate
Rated Capacity
Low-Flow Test Rate
Up to and including 7
						  m3/h
0.007 m3/h
Up to and including 250
						  ft3/h
0.25 ft3/h
Over 7 m3/h up to and
						  including 14 m3/h
0.014 m3/h
Over 250 ft3/h up to and
						  including 500 ft3/h
0.50 ft3/h
Over 14 m3/h
0.1 % of capacity rate
Over 500 ft3/h
0.1 % of capacity rate
N.4.
Test Procedures.
- If a device is equipped with an automatic
			 temperature compensator, the proving device reading shall be corrected to 15
			 °C (60 °F), using an approved table.
(Amended 1972)
N.4.1.
Normal Tests.
- The normal test of a device shall be made at a
			 rate not to exceed the capacity rate given on the badge of the meter.
(Amended 1988)
N.4.1.1.
Automatic Temperature
			 Compensation.
- If a device is equipped with an automatic temperature
			 compensator, the quantity of the test draft indication of the standard shall be
			 corrected to 15 °C (60 °F).
N.4.1.2.
Repeatability Tests.
-
			 Tests for repeatability should include a minimum of three consecutive test
			 drafts of approximately the same size and be conducted under controlled
			 conditions where variations in factors such as temperature, pressure, and flow
			 rate are reduced to the extent that they will not affect the results obtained.
(Added 2002)
N.4.2.
Special Tests.
-
			 "Special" tests shall be made to develop the operating characteristics of a
			 device and any special elements and accessories attached to or associated with
			 the device. Any test except as set forth in N.4.1. Normal Tests shall be
			 considered a special test.
N.4.2.1.
Slow Test.
- The device shall be tested at a rate not less than 20 % of
			 the marked capacity rate, or (at the check rate) not less than the minimum flow
			 rate if marked on the device, whichever is less.
(Amended 1988)
N.4.2.2.
Low-Flame Test.
- The
			 device shall be tested at an extremely low-flow rate as given in Table 1. The
			 test shall consist of passing air at a pressure of 375 Pa (1.5 in water column)
			 through the meter for not less than 60 minutes. The meter shall continue to
			 advance at the conclusion of the test period.
(Amended 1990 and 1991)
N.4.2.3.
Pressure Regulation Test.
- On devices operating at a pressure of 6900 Pa (1 psig) or more, a
			 pressure regulation test shall be made at both the minimum and maximum use load
			 to determine the proper operation of the regulator and the proper sizing of the
			 piping and dispensing equipment. These tests may include a test of 24 hours
			 during which the pressure is recorded.
(Added 1984)
N.5.
Temperature Correction.
-
			 Corrections shall be made for any changes in volume resulting from the
			 difference in air temperatures between time of passage through the device and
			 time of volumetric determination in the proving device.
N.6.
Frequency of Test.
- A
			 hydrocarbon gas vapor-measuring device shall be tested before installation and
			 allowed to remain in service for 10 years from the time last tested without
			 being retested, unless a test is requested by:
(a) the purchaser of the product being
			 metered;
(b) the seller of the
			 product being metered; or
(c) the
			 weights and measures official.
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Tolerance Values on Normal Tests
			 and on Special Tests Other Than Low-Flame Tests.
- Maintenance and
			 acceptance tolerances for normal and special tests for hydrocarbon gas
			 vapor-measuring devices shall be as shown in Table T.1. Accuracy Classes and
			 Tolerances for Hydrocarbon Gas Vapor-Measuring Devices.
(Amended 1981 and 2003)
Table T.1. Accuracy Classes and Tolerances for
						  Hydrocarbon Gas Vapor-Measuring Devices
Accuracy Class
Application
Acceptance Tolerance
Maintenance Tolerance
3.0
Gases at low pressure (for example, LPG vapor)
Overregistration
1.5 %
1.5 %
Underregistration
3.0 %
3.0 %
(Added 2003)
T.2.
Repeatability.
- When
			 multiple tests are conducted at approximately the same flow rate and draft
			 size, the range of the test results for the flow rate shall not exceed 0.9 %
			 and the results of each test shall be within the applicable tolerance. (Also
			 see N.4.1.2. Repeatability Test.)
(Added 2002)
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Installation
			 Requirements.
UR.1.1.
Capacity
			 Rate.
- A device shall be so installed that the actual maximum flow rate
			 will not exceed the capacity rate except for short durations. If necessary,
			 means for flow regulation shall be incorporated in the installation, in which
			 case this shall be fully effective and automatic in operation.
UR.1.2.
Leakage.
- The metering
			 system shall be installed and maintained as a pressure-tight and leak-free
			 system.
UR.2.
Use
			 Requirements.
UR.2.1.
Automatic
			 Temperature Compensation.
- A compensated device may not be replaced
			 with an uncompensated device without the written approval of the weights and
			 measures authority having jurisdiction over the device.
UR.2.2.
Invoices.
- A customer
			 purchasing hydrocarbon gas measured by a vapor meter shall receive from the
			 seller an invoice for each billing period. The invoice shall clearly and
			 separately show the following:
(a) The opening
			 and closing meter readings and the dates of those readings.
(b) The altitude correction factor.
(c) The total cubic meters (cubic feet)
			 billed, corrected for elevation.
(d) The charge per cubic meter (cubic foot)
			 after correction for elevation.
(e)
			 All periodic charges independent of the measured gas, such as meter charges,
			 meter reading fees, service charges or a minimum charge for a minimum number of
			 cubic meters (cubic feet).
(f) The
			 total charge for the billing period.
If the vapor meter is equipped with an automatic temperature
				compensator, or any other means are used to compensate for temperature, the
				invoice shall show that the volume has been adjusted to the volume at 15 °C
				(60 °F).
(Amended 1988 and 1991)
UR.2.3.
Correction for Elevation.
- The metered volume of gas shall be corrected for changes in the
			 atmospheric pressure with respect to elevation to the standard pressure of
			 101.56 kPa (14.73 psia). The appropriate altitude correction factor from Table
			 2M. Corrections for Altitude, Metric Units or Table 2. Corrections for
			 Altitude, U.S. Customary Units shall be used. (The table is modified from NIST
			 Handbook 117.)
(Amended 1988)
Elevation correction factors (ACF) were obtained by using the
				following equation:
Click
				here to view image
Where:
GP = gauge pressure
AAP = assumed atmospheric pressure base pressure = 101.560 kPa
				= 14.73 psia
2740 Pa = 11 in of water column = 0.397 psig
1744 Pa = 7 in of water column = 0.253 psig
(Added 1988)
UR.2.4.
Valves and Test Tee.
-
All gas meter installations shall be provided with a
			 shut-off valve located adjacent to and on the inlet side of the meter. In the
			 case of a single meter installation utilizing a liquefied petroleum gas tank,
			 the tank service valve may be used in lieu of the shut-off valve. All gas meter
			 installations shall be provided with a test tee located adjacent to and on the
			 outlet side of the meter. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1990]
(Added 1989)
UR.2.5.
Use of Auxiliary Heated
			 Vaporizer Systems.
- Automatic temperature compensation shall be used on
			 hydrocarbon gas vapor meters equipped with an auxiliary heated vaporizer system
			 unless there is sufficient length of underground piping to provide gas at a
			 uniform temperature to the meter inlet. When required by weights and measures
			 officials, a thermometer well (appropriately protected against freezing) shall
			 be installed immediately up-stream of the meter.
(Added 1990)
Table 2M. Corrections for Altitude, Metric
						  Units
Elevation (meters)
Altitude
Correction
Factor
Assumed
Atmospheric
Pressure
Assumed Atmospheric
Pressure Plus
Gauge Pressure
2.74 kPa
Gauge
Pressure
1.74 kPa
Gauge
Pressure
(kPa)
2.74 kPa
Gauge
Pressure
1.74 kPa
Gauge
Pressure
- 50 to
120
1.02
1.01
100.85
103.59
102.58
above
120 to
300
1.00
0.99
98.82
101.56
100.54
above
300 to
470
0.98
0.97
96.79
99.53
98.51
above
470 to
650
0.96
0.95
94.76
97.50
96.48
above
650 to
830
0.94
0.93
92.73
95.47
94.45
above
830 to
1020
0.92
0.91
90.70
93.44
92.42
above
1020 to
1210
0.90
0.89
88.66
91.40
90.39
above
1210 to
1400
0.88
0.87
86.63
89.37
88.36
above
1400 to
1590
0.86
0.85
84.60
87.34
86.33
above
1590 to
1790
0.84
0.83
82.57
85.31
84.29
above
1790 to
2000
0.82
0.81
80.54
83.28
82.26
above
2000 to
2210
0.80
0.79
78.51
81.25
80.23
above
2210 to
2420
0.78
0.77
76.48
79.22
78.20
above
2420 to
2640
0.76
0.75
74.45
77.19
76.17
above
2640 to
2860
0.74
0.73
72.41
75.15
74.15
above
2860 to
3080
0.72
0.71
70.38
73.12
72.12
above
3080 to
3320
0.70
0.69
68.35
71.09
70.08
above
3320 to
3560
0.68
0.67
66.32
69.06
68.05
above
3560 to
3800
0.66
0.65
64.29
67.03
66.01
above
3800 to
4050
0.64
0.63
62.26
65.00
63.98
above
4050 to
4310
0.62
0.61
60.23
62.97
61.95
above
4310 to
4580
0.60
0.59
58.20
60.94
59.92
Table 2. Corrections for Altitude, U.S. Customary
						  Units
Elevation (feet)
Altitude
Correction
Factor
Assumed
Atmospheric
Pressure
Assumed Atmospheric
Pressure Plus Gauge
Pressure
11 inch WC
7 inch WC
(psia)
11 inch WC (psia)
7 inch WC (psia)
- 150 to
400
1.02
1.01
14.64
15.04
14.89
above
400 to
950
1.00
0.99
14.35
14.74
14.60
above
950 to
1 550
0.98
0.97
14.05
14.45
14.30
above
1 550 to
2 100
0.96
0.95
13.76
14.15
14.01
above
2 100 to
2 700
0.94
0.93
13.46
13.86
13.71
above
2 700 to
3 300
0.92
0.91
13.17
13.56
13.42
above
3 300 to
3 950
0.90
0.89
12.87
13.27
13.12
above
3 950 to
4 550
0.88
0.87
12.58
12.97
12.83
above
4 550 to
5 200
0.86
0.85
12.28
12.68
12.53
above
5 200 to
5 850
0.84
0.83
11.99
12.38
12.24
above
5 850 to
6 500
0.82
0.81
11.69
12.09
11.94
above
6 500 to
7 200
0.80
0.79
11.40
11.79
11.65
above
7 200 to
7 900
0.78
0.77
11.10
11.50
11.35
above
7 900 to
8 600
0.76
0.75
10.81
11.20
11.06
above
8 600 to
9 350
0.74
0.73
10.51
10.91
10.76
above
9 350 to
10 100
0.72
0.71
10.22
10.61
10.47
above
10 100 to
10 850
0.70
0.69
9.92
10.32
10.17
above
10 850 to
11 650
0.68
0.67
9.63
10.03
9.88
above
11 650 to
12 450
0.66
0.65
9.33
9.73
9.58
above
12 450 to
13 250
0.64
0.63
9.04
9.44
9.29
above
13 250 to
14 100
0.62
0.61
8.75
9.14
9.00
above
14 100 to
14 950
0.60
0.59
8.45
8.85
8.70
Section 3.34.
Cryogenic
			 Liquid-Measuring Devices
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code applies to devices used for the measurement of cryogenic
			 liquids such as, but not limited to oxygen, nitrogen, hydrogen, and argon.
(Amended 1986 and 1995)
A.2.
Exceptions.
- This code
			 does not apply to the following:
(a) Devices
			 used for dispensing liquefied petroleum gases (for which see Section 3.32. Code
			 for Liquefied Petroleum Gas and Anhydrous Ammonia Liquid-Measuring
			 Devices).
(b) Devices used solely
			 for dispensing a product in connection with operations in which the amount
			 dispensed does not affect customer charges.
(c) Devices used solely for dispensing
			 liquefied natural gas.
(d) Mass
			 flow meters. (Also see Section 3.37. Code for Mass Flow Meters.) (Added
			 1994)
A.3.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this
			 code, Cryogenic Liquid-Measuring Devices shall meet the requirements of Section
			 1.10. General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Design of Indicating and Recording Elements and of Recorded
			 Representations.
S.1.1.
Primary
			 Elements.
S.1.1.1.
General.
- A device shall be equipped with a primary indicating element and may
			 also be equipped with a primary recording element.
S.1.1.2.
Units.
- A device
			 shall indicate and record, if equipped to record, its deliveries in terms of:
			 kilograms or pounds; liters or gallons of liquid at the normal boiling point of
			 the specific cryogenic product; cubic meters (cubic feet) of gas at a normal
			 temperature of 21 °C (70 °F) and an absolute pressure of 101.325 kPa
			 (14.696 psia); or decimal subdivisions or multiples of the measured units cited
			 above.
(Amended 2002)
S.1.1.3.
Value of Smallest Unit.
- The value of the smallest unit of indicated delivery, and recorded
			 delivery, if the device is equipped to record, shall not exceed the equivalent
			 of:
(a) for small delivery devices:
(1) 1 L;
(2) 0.1 gal;
(3) 1 kg;
(4) 1 lb;
(5) 0.1 m3 of gas;
			 or
(6) 10
			 ft3 of gas.
(b) for large delivery devices:
(1) 10 L;
(2) 1 gal;
(3) 10 kg;
(4) 10 lb;
(5) 1 m3 of gas;
			 or
(6) 100
			 ft3 of gas. (Amended 2002)
S.1.1.4.
Advancement of Indicating and Recording Elements.
- Primary indicating
			 and recording elements shall be susceptible to advancement only by the normal
			 operation of the device. However, a device may be cleared by advancing its
			 elements to zero, but only if:
(a) the
			 advancing movement, once started, cannot be stopped until zero is reached;
			 or
(b) in the case of indicating
			 elements only, such elements are automatically obscured until the elements
			 reach the correct zero position.
S.1.1.5.
Return to Zero.
-
			 Primary indicating and recording elements shall be readily returnable to a
			 definite zero indication. Means shall be provided to prevent the return of
			 primary indicating elements and of primary recording elements beyond their
			 correct zero position.
S.1.2.
Graduations.
S.1.2.1.
Length.
- Graduations
			 shall be so varied in length that they may be conveniently read.
S.1.2.2.
Width.
- In any series
			 of graduations, the width of a graduation shall in no case be greater than the
			 width of the minimum clear interval between graduations, and the width of main
			 graduations shall be not more than 50 % greater than the width of subordinate
			 graduations. Graduations shall in no case be less than 0.2 mm (0.008 in) in
			 width.
S.1.2.3.
Clear
			 Interval Between Graduations.
- The clear interval shall be no less than
			 1.0 mm (0.04 in). If the graduations are not parallel, the measurement shall be
			 made:
(a) along the line of relative movement
			 between the graduations at the end of the indicator; or
(b) if the indicator is continuous, at the
			 point of widest separation of the graduations. (Also see S.1.3.6. Travel of
			 Indicator.)
S.1.3.
Indicators.
S.1.3.1.
Symmetry.
- The index
			 of an indicator shall be symmetrical with respect to the graduations, at least
			 throughout that portion of its length associated with the
			 graduations.
S.1.3.2.
Length.
- The index of an indicator shall reach to the finest
			 graduations with which it is used, unless the indicator and the graduations are
			 in the same plane, in which case the distance between the end of the indicator
			 and the ends of the graduations, measured along the line of the graduations,
			 shall be not more than 1.0 mm (0.04 in).
S.1.3.3.
Width.
- The width of
			 the index of an indicator in relation to the series of graduations with which
			 it is used shall be not greater than the:
(a)
width of the narrowest graduation;*
and
[*Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2002]
(Amended 2001)
(b) width of the minimum clear interval
			 between graduations.
When the index of an indicator extends along the entire length
				of a graduation, that portion of the index of the indicator that may be brought
				into coincidence with the graduation shall be of the same width throughout the
				length of the index that coincides with the graduation.
S.1.3.4.
Clearance.
- The clearance between the index of an indicator and the graduations
			 shall in no case be more than 1.5 mm (0.06 in).
S.1.3.5.
Parallax.
- Parallax
			 effect shall be reduced to the practicable minimum.
S.1.3.6.
Travel of Indicator.
-
			 If the most sensitive element of the primary indicating element uses an
			 indicator and graduations, the relative movement of these parts corresponding
			 to the smallest indicated value shall be not less than 0.5 mm (0.20
			 in).
S.1.4.
Computing-Type Device.
S.1.4.1.
Printed Ticket.
- Any printed ticket issued by a device of the
			 computing type on which there is printed the total computed price shall have
			 printed clearly thereon also the total quantity of the delivery and the price
			 per unit.
S.1.4.2.
Money-Value Computations.
- Money-value computations shall be of the
			 full-computing type in which the money-value at a single unit price, or at each
			 of a series of unit prices, shall be computed for every delivery within either
			 the range of measurement of the device or the range of the computing elements,
			 whichever is less. Value graduations shall be supplied and shall be accurately
			 positioned. The total price shall be computed on the basis of the quantity
			 indicated when the value of the smallest division indicated is equal to or less
			 than the values specified in S.1.1.3. Value of Smallest Unit.
S.1.4.3.
Money-Values, Mathematical
			 Agreement.
- Any digital money-value indication and any recorded
			 money-value on a computing type device shall be in mathematical agreement with
			 its associated quantity indication or representation to within 1 cent of
			 money-value.
S.2.
Design of Measuring
			 Elements.
S.2.1.
Vapor
			 Elimination.
- A measuring system shall be equipped with an effective
			 vapor eliminator or other effective means to prevent the measurement of vapor
			 that will cause errors in excess of the applicable tolerances. (Also see
			 Section T. Tolerances.)
S.2.2.
Directional Flow Valves.
- A valve or valves or other effective
			 means, automatic in operation, to prevent the reversal of flow shall be
			 installed in or adjacent to the measuring device.
(Amended 1978)
S.2.3.
Maintenance of Liquid State.
- A device shall be so designed that the product being measured will
			 remain in a liquid state during passage through the device.
S.2.4.
Automatic Temperature or
			 Density Compensation.
A device shall be equipped with automatic means
			 for adjusting the indication and/or recorded representation of the measured
			 quantity of the product, to indicate and/or record in terms of: kilograms or
			 pounds; or liters or gallons of liquid at the normal boiling point of the
			 specific cryogenic product; or the equivalent cubic meters (cubic feet) of gas
			 at a normal temperature of 21
°
C (70 °F) and an absolute
			 pressure of 101.325 kPa (14.696 lb/in2 absolute).
When a compensator
			 system malfunctions, the indicating and recording elements may indicate and
			 record in uncompensated volume if the mode of operation is clearly indicated,
			 e.g., by a marked annunciator, recorded statement, or other obvious means.
			 *
[*Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1992]
(Amended 1991 and 2002)
S.2.5.
Provision for Sealing.
-
			 Adequate provision shall be made for an approved means of security (e.g., data
			 change audit trail) or for physically applying a security seal in such a manner
			 that requires the security seal to be broken before an adjustment or
			 interchange may be made of:
(a) any measuring
			 or indicating element;
(b) any
			 adjustable element for controlling delivery rate when such rate tends to affect
			 the accuracy of deliveries;
(c) any
			 automatic temperature or density compensating system; and
(d) any metrological parameter that will
			 affect the metrological integrity of the device or system.
When applicable, any adjusting mechanism shall be readily
				accessible for purposes of affixing a security seal.
[Audit trails shall use the format set forth in Table
				S.2.5. Categories of Device and Methods of Sealing]* [*Nonretroactive as of
				January 1, 1995]
(Amended 2006)
Table S.2.5. Categories of Device and
						  Methods of Sealing
Categories of
						  Device
Methods of Sealing
Category 1:
No
						  remote configuration capability.
Seal by physical seal or two event counters:
						  one for calibration parameters and one for configuration
						  parameters.
Category 2:
Remote configuration capability, but access is
						  controlled by physical hardware.
The device shall clearly indicate that it is in
						  the remote configuration mode and record such message if capable of printing in
						  this mode or shall not operate while in this mode.
The hardware enabling access for remote
						  communication must be on-site. The hardware must be sealed using a physical
						  seal or an event counter for calibration parameters and an event counter for
						  configuration parameters. The event counters may be located either at the
						  individual measuring device or at the system controller; however, an adequate
						  number of counters must be provided to monitor the calibration and
						  configuration parameters of the individual devices at a location. If the
						  counters are located in the system controller rather than at the individual
						  device, means must be provided to generate a hard copy of the information
						  through an on-site device.
Category 3:
Remote configuration capability access may be unlimited
						  or controlled through a software switch (e.g., password)
.
The device shall clearly indicate that it is in
						  the remote configuration mode and record such message if capable of printing in
						  this mode or shall not operate while in this mode.
An event logger is required in the device; it
						  must include an event counter (000 to 999), the parameter ID, the date and time
						  of the change, and the new value of the parameter. A printed copy of the
						  information must be available through the device or through another on-site
						  device. The event logger shall have a capacity to retain records equal to 10
						  times the number of sealable parameters in the device, but not more than 1000
						  records are required. (
Note:
Does not require 1000 changes to be
						  stored for each parameter.)
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1995]
(Table
				Added 2006)
S.3.
Design of Discharge Lines and
			 Discharge Line Valves.
S.3.1.
Diversion of Measured Liquid.
- No means shall be provided by which any
			 measured liquid can be diverted from the measuring chamber of the device or the
			 discharge line therefrom, except that a manually controlled outlet that may be
			 opened for purging or draining the measuring system shall be permitted.
			 Effective means shall be provided to prevent the passage of liquid through any
			 such outlet during normal operation of the device and to indicate clearly and
			 unmistakably when the valve controls are so set as to permit passage of liquid
			 through such outlet.
S.3.2.
Discharge Hose.
- The discharge hose of a measuring system shall be of
			 the completely draining dry-hose type.
S.4.
Marking Requirements.
S.4.1.
Limitation of Use.
- If a
			 measuring system is intended to measure accurately only liquids having
			 particular properties, or to measure accurately only under specific
			 installation or operating conditions, or to measure accurately only when used
			 in conjunction with specific accessory equipment, these limitations shall be
			 clearly and permanently marked on the device.
S.4.2.
Discharge Rates.
- A
			 meter shall be marked to show its designed maximum and minimum discharge
			 rates.
S.4.3.
Temperature or
			 Density Compensation.
- Devices equipped with an automatic temperature
			 or density compensator, shall be clearly and conspicuously marked on the
			 primary indicating elements, recording elements, and recorded representations
			 to show that the quantity delivered has been adjusted to the conditions
			 specified in S.2.4. Automatic Temperature or Density Compensation.
N.
Notes
N.1.
Test Liquid.
- A meter
			 shall be tested with the liquid to be commercially measured except that, in a
			 type evaluation examination, nitrogen may be used.
N.2.
Vaporization and Volume Change.
- Care shall be exercised to reduce to a minimum vaporization and volume
			 changes. When testing by weight, the weigh tank and transfer systems shall be
			 pre-cooled to liquid temperature prior to the start of the test to avoid the
			 venting of vapor from the vessel being weighed.
N.3.
Test Drafts.
N.3.1.
Gravimetric Test.
-
			 Weight test drafts shall be equal to at least the amount delivered by the
			 device in 2 minutes at its maximum discharge rate, and shall in no case be less
			 than 907 kg (2000 lb).
N.3.2.
Transfer Standard Test.
- When comparing a meter with a calibrated
			 transfer standard, the test draft shall be equal to at least the amount
			 delivered by the device in two minutes at its maximum discharge rate, and shall
			 in no case be less than 180 L (50 gal) or equivalent thereof. When testing
			 uncompensated volumetric meters in a continuous recycle mode, appropriate
			 corrections shall be applied if product conditions are abnormally affected by
			 this test mode.
(Amended 1976)
N.4.
Density.
- Temperature and
			 pressure of the metered test liquid shall be measured during the test for the
			 determination of density or volume correction factors when applicable. For
			 Liquid Density and Volume Correction Factors (with respect to temperature and
			 pressure) the publications shown in Table N.4. Density or Volume Correction
			 Factors shall apply.
(Amended 1986 and 2004)
Table N.4. Density or Volume Correction
						  Factors
Cryogenic Liquid
Publication
Argon
Tegeler, Ch., Span, R., Wagner, W. "A New Equation of
						  State for Argon Covering the Fluid Region for Temperatures from the Melting
						  Line to 700 K at Pressures up to 1000 Mpa."
J. Phys. Chem. Ref.
						  Data
, 28(3):779-850, 1999.
Ethylene
Smukala, J., Span, R., Wagner, W. "New Equation of
						  State for Ethylene Covering the Fluid Region for Temperatures from the Melting
						  Line to 450 k at Pressures up to 300 Mpa."
J. Phys. Chem. Ref.
						  Data
, 29(5):1053-1122, 2000.
Nitrogen
Span, R., Lemmon, E.W., Jacobsen, R.T, Wagner, W., and
						  Yokozeki, A. "A Reference Thermodynamic Property Formulation for Nitrogen."
J. Phys. Chem. Ref. Data
, Volume 29, Number 6, pp. 1361-1433,
						  2000.
Oxygen
Schmidt, R., Wagner, W. "A New Form of the Equation of
						  State for Pure Substances and its Application to Oxygen."
Fluid Phase
						  Equilib.
, 19:175-200, 1985
Hydrogen
Leachman, J. W., Jacobsen, R. T., Lemmon, E.W., and
						  Penoncello, S.G. "Fundamental Equations of State for Parahydrogen, Normal
						  Hydrogen, and Orthohydrogen"
J. Phys. Chem. Ref. Data
, Volume
						  38, Number 3, pp. 565, 2009.
Note:
A complete database program
						  containing all of the most recent equations for calculating density for various
						  cryogenic liquids is available at
www.nist.gov/srd/nist23.cfm.
There is a fee for download of this database.
(Added 2004)
N.5.
Testing Procedures.
N.5.1.
Normal Tests.
- The
			 "normal" tests of a device shall be made over a range of discharge rates that
			 may be anticipated under the conditions of installation.
N.5.1.1.
Repeatability Tests.
-
			 Tests for repeatability should include a minimum of three consecutive test
			 drafts of approximately the same size and be conducted under controlled
			 conditions where variations in factors such as temperature, pressure, and flow
			 rate are reduced to the extent that they will not affect the results obtained.
(Added 2001)
N.5.2.
Special Tests.
- Any test
			 except as set forth in N.5.1. Normal Tests shall be considered a "special"
test. Tests shall be conducted, if possible, to evaluate any
				special elements or accessories attached to or associated with the device. A
				device shall be tested at a minimum discharge rate of:
(a) 50 % of the maximum discharge rate
			 developed under the conditions of installation, or the minimum discharge rate
			 marked on the device, whichever is less; or
(b) the lowest discharge rate practicable
			 under conditions of installation.
Special tests may be conducted to develop any characteristics
				of the device that are not normally anticipated under the conditions of
				installation.
N.6.
Temperature Correction.
-
			 Corrections shall be made for any changes in volume resulting from the
			 differences in liquid temperature between time of passage through the meter and
			 time of volumetric determination of test draft.
N.7.
Automatic Temperature or Density
			 Compensation.
- When a device is equipped with an automatic temperature
			 or density compensator, the compensator shall be tested by comparing the
			 quantity indicated or recorded by the device (with the compensator connected
			 and operating) with the actual delivered quantity corrected to the normal
			 boiling point of the cryogenic product being measured or to the normal
			 temperature and pressure as applicable.
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Application.
T.1.1.
To Underregistration and to
			 Overregistration.
- The tolerances hereinafter prescribed shall be
			 applied to errors of underregistration and errors of
			 overregistration.
T.2.
Tolerance Values.
- The maintenance and acceptance tolerances for
			 normal and special tests shall be as shown in Table T.2. Accuracy Classes and
			 Tolerances for Cryogenic Liquid-Measuring Devices.
(Amended 2003)
Table T.2. Accuracy Classes and Tolerances for
						  Cryogenic Liquid-Measuring Devices
Accuracy Class
Application
Acceptance Tolerance
Maintenance Tolerance
Special Test Tolerance
2.5
Cryogenic products; liquefied compressed gases other
						  than liquid carbon dioxide
1.5 %
2.5 %
2.5 %
(Added 2003)
T.3.
On Tests Using Transfer
			 Standards.
- To the basic tolerance values that would otherwise be
			 applied, there shall be added an amount equal to two times the standard
			 deviation of the applicable transfer standard when compared to a basic
			 reference standard.
(Added 1976)
T.4.
Repeatability.
- When
			 multiple tests are conducted at approximately the same flow rate and draft
			 size, the range of the test results for the flow rate shall not exceed 40 % of
			 the absolute value of the maintenance tolerance and the results of each test
			 shall be within the applicable tolerance. Also see N.5.1.1. Repeatability
			 Tests.
(Added 2001)
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Installation
			 Requirements.
UR.1.1.
Discharge
			 Rate.
- A device shall be so installed that the actual maximum discharge
			 rate will not exceed the rated maximum discharge rate. If necessary, means for
			 flow regulation shall be incorporated in the installation.
UR.1.2.
Length of Discharge Hose.
- The discharge hose shall be of such a length and design as to keep
			 vaporization of the liquid to a minimum.
UR.1.3.
Maintenance of Liquid State.
- A device shall be so installed and operated that the product being
			 measured shall remain in the liquid state during passage through the
			 meter.
UR.2.
Use
			 Requirements.
UR.2.1.
Return of
			 Indicating and Recording Elements to Zero.
- The primary indicating
			 elements (visual) and the primary recording elements shall be returned to zero
			 immediately before each delivery.
UR.2.2.
Condition of Discharge System.
- The discharge system, up to the measuring element, shall be precooled
			 to liquid temperatures before a "zero" condition is established prior to the
			 start of a commercial delivery.
UR.2.3.
Vapor Return Line.
- A
			 vapor return line shall not be used during a metered delivery. (Amended
			 1976)
UR.2.4.
Drainage of
			 Discharge Line.
- On a dry-hose system, upon completion of a delivery,
			 the vendor shall leave the discharge line connected to the receiving container
			 with the valve adjacent to the meter in the closed position and the valve at
			 the discharge line outlet in the open position for a period of at least:
(a) 1 minute for small delivery devices;
			 and
(b) 3 minutes for large
			 delivery devices to allow vaporization of some product in the discharge line to
			 force the remainder of the product in the line to flow into the receiving
			 container.
(Amended 1976)
UR.2.5.
Conversion Factors.
-
			 Established conversion values (Also see references in Table N.4. Density or
			 Volume Correction Factors.) shall be used whenever metered liquids are to be
			 billed in terms of:
(a) kilograms or pounds
			 based on a meter indication of liters, gallons, cubic meters of gas, or cubic
			 feet of gas;
(b) cubic meters or
			 cubic feet of gas based on a meter indication of liters or gallons, kilograms,
			 or pounds; or
(c) liters or gallons
			 based on a meter indication of kilograms or pounds, cubic meters of gas or
			 cubic feet of gas.
All sales of cryogenics shall be based on either kilograms or
				pounds, liters or gallons of liquid at NBP42, cubic
				meters of gas or cubic feet of gas at NTP1.
(Amended 1986)
UR.2.6.
Temperature or Density
			 Compensation.
UR.2.6.
1.
Use of Automatic Temperature or Density Compensators.
- If a device is equipped with an automatic temperature or density
			 compensator, this shall be connected, operable, and in use at all times. Such
			 automatic temperature or density compensator may not be removed, nor may a
			 compensated42 See Appendix D, Definitions. device be
			 replaced with an uncompensated device, without the written approval of the
			 weights and measures authority having jurisdiction over the device.
UR.2.6.
2.
Tickets or
			 Invoices.
- Any written invoice or printed ticket based on a reading of
			 a device that is equipped with an automatic temperature or density compensator
			 shall have shown thereon that the quantity delivered has been adjusted to the
			 quantity at the NBP of the specific cryogenic product or the equivalent volume
			 of gas at NTP.
UR.2.6.
3.
Printed Ticket.
- Any printed ticket issued by a
			 device of the computing type on which there is printed the total computed
			 price, the total quantity of the delivery, or the price per unit, shall also
			 show the other two values (either printed or in clear hand script).
UR.2.6.
4.
Ticket in
			 Printing Device.
- A ticket shall not be inserted into a device equipped
			 with a ticket printer until immediately before a delivery is begun, and in no
			 case shall a ticket be in the device when the vehicle is in motion while on a
			 public street, highway, or thoroughfare.
UR.2.7.
Pressure of Tanks with
			 Volumetric Metering Systems without Temperature Compensation.
- When the
			 saturation pressure of the product in the vendor's tank exceeds 240 kPa (35
			 psia), a correction shall be applied to the written invoice or printed ticket
			 using the appropriate tables as listed in Table N.4. Density or Volume
			 Correction Factors; or the saturation pressure shall be reduced to 207 kPa (30
			 psia) (if this can be safely accomplished) prior to making a delivery.
(Added 1976)
Section 3.35.
Milk Meters
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code
			 applies to devices used for the measurement of milk; generally applicable to,
			 but not limited to, meters used in dairies, milk processing plants, and cheese
			 factories, to measure incoming bulk milk.
A.2.
Exceptions.
- This code
			 does not apply to mass flow meters. (Also see Section 3.37. Code for Mass Flow
			 Meters.)
(Added 1994)
A.3.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code, Milk Meters shall meet
			 the requirements of Section 1.10. General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Design of Indicating and
			 Recording Elements and of Recorded Representations.
S.1.1.
Primary Elements.
S.1.1.1.
General.
- A meter
			 shall be equipped with a primary indicating element and may also be equipped
			 with a primary recording element.
S.1.1.2.
Units.
(a) A meter shall indicate, and record if the
			 meter is equipped to record, its deliveries in terms of liters or gallons.
			 Fractional parts of the liter shall be in terms of decimal subdivisions.
			 Fractional parts of the gallon shall be in terms of either decimal or binary
			 subdivisions.
(b) When it is an
			 industry practice to purchase and sell milk by weight based upon 1.03 kg/L (8.6
			 lb/gal), the primary indicating element may indicate in kilograms or pounds.
			 The weight value division shall be a decimal multiple or submultiple of 1, 2,
			 or 5. Fractional parts of the kilogram or pound shall be in decimal
			 subdivisions. (Also see S.4.5. Conversion Factor.)
S.1.1.3.
Value of Smallest Unit.
- The value of the smallest unit of indicated quantity and recorded
			 quantity, if the meter is equipped to record, shall not exceed the equivalent
			 of:
(a) 0.5 L or 0.5 kg (1 pt or 1 lb) when
			 measuring quantities less than or equal to 4000 L or 4000 kg (1000 gal or 8600
			 lb); or
(b) 5 L or 5 kg (1 gal or
			 10 lb) when measuring quantities in excess of 4000 L or 4000 kg (1000 gal or
			 8600 lb).
(Amended 1989)
S.1.1.4.
Advancement of Indicating and
			 Recording Elements.
- Primary indicating and recording elements shall be
			 susceptible to advancement only by the mechanical operation of the meter.
			 However, a meter may be cleared by advancing its elements to zero, but only if:
(a) the advancing movement, once started,
			 cannot be stopped until zero is reached; or
(b) in the case of indicating elements only,
			 such elements are automatically obscured until the elements reach the correct
			 zero position.
S.1.1.5.
Return to Zero.
- Primary indicating elements and primary
			 recording elements, if the device is equipped to record, shall be readily
			 returnable to a definite zero indication. Means shall be provided to prevent
			 the return of the primary indicating elements and the primary recording
			 elements, if the device is so equipped, beyond their correct zero
			 position.
S.1.1.6.
Indication of Measurement.
- A meter shall be constructed to show
			 automatically its initial zero condition and the volume measured up to the
			 nominal capacity of the device.
S.1.2.
Graduations.
S.1.2.1.
Length.
- Graduations
			 shall be so varied in length that they may be conveniently read.
S.1.2.2.
Width.
- In any series
			 of graduations, the width of a graduation shall in no case be greater than the
			 width of the minimum clear interval between graduations, and the width of main
			 graduations shall be not more than 50 % greater than the width of subordinate
			 graduations. Graduations shall in no case be less than 0.2 mm (0.008 in) in
			 width.
S.1.2.3.
Clear
			 Interval between Graduations.
- The clear interval shall be not less
			 than 1.0 mm (0.04 in). If the graduations are not parallel, the measurement
			 shall be made:
(a) along the line of relative
			 movement between the graduations at the end of the indicator; or
(b) if the indicator is continuous, at the
			 point of widest separation of the graduations.
S.1.3.
Indicators.
S.1.3.1.
Symmetry.
- The index
			 of an indicator shall be symmetrical with respect to the graduations, at least
			 throughout that portion of its length associated with the
			 graduations.
S.1.3.2.
Length.
- The index of an indicator shall reach to the finest
			 graduations with which it is used, unless the indicator and the graduations are
			 in the same plane, in which case the distance between the end of the indicator
			 and the ends of the graduations, measured along the line of graduations, shall
			 be not more than 1.0 mm (0.04 in).
S.1.3.3.
Width.
- The width of
			 the index of an indicator in relation to the series of graduations with which
			 it is used shall be not greater than:
(a)
the width of the narrowest graduation;*
and
[*Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2002]
(Amended 2001)
(b) the width of the minimum clear interval
			 between graduations.
When the index of an indicator extends along the entire length
				of a graduation, that portion of the index of the indicator that may be brought
				into coincidence with the graduation shall be of the same width throughout the
				length of the index that coincides with the graduation.
S.1.3.4.
Clearance.
- The clearance between the index of an indicator and the graduations
			 shall in no case be more than 1.5 mm (0.06 in).
S.1.3.5.
Parallax.
- Parallax
			 effects shall be reduced to the practicable minimum.
S.1.3.6.
Travel of Indicator.
-
			 If the most sensitive element of the primary indicating element utilizes an
			 indicator and graduations, the relative movement of these parts corresponding
			 to the smallest indicated value shall be not less than 5 mm (0.20
			 in).
S.1.4.
Computing-Type Devices.
S.1.4.1.
Display of Unit Price.
- In a device of the computing type, means
			 shall be provided for displaying on the outside of the device, and in close
			 proximity to the display of the total computed price, the price per unit at
			 which the device is set to compute.
S.1.4.2.
Printed Ticket.
- If a
			 computing-type device issues a printed ticket which displays the total computed
			 price, the ticket also shall have printed clearly thereon the total quantity of
			 the delivery, the appropriate fraction of the quantity, and the price per unit
			 of quantity.
(Amended 1989)
S.1.4.3.
Money-Value Computations.
- Money-value computations shall be of the full-computing type in which
			 the money-value at a single unit price, or at each of a series of unit prices,
			 shall be computed for every delivery within either the range of measurement of
			 the device or the range of the computing elements, whichever is less. Value
			 graduations shall be supplied and shall be accurately positioned. The value of
			 each graduated interval shall be 1 cent.
S.1.4.4.
Money-Values, Mathematical
			 Agreement.
- Any digital money-value indication and any recorded
			 money-value on a computing-type device shall be in mathematical agreement with
			 its associated quantity indicating or representation to within 1 cent of
			 money-value.
S.2.
Design of Measuring
			 Elements.
S.2.1.
Vapor
			 Elimination.
- A metering system shall be equipped with an effective
			 vapor eliminator or other effective means automatic in operation to prevent the
			 passage of vapor and air through the meter. Vent lines from the air (or vapor)
			 eliminator shall be made of metal tubing or some other suitably rigid
			 material.
S.2.2.
Maintaining
			 Flooded Condition.
- The vent on the vapor eliminator shall be
			 positioned or installed in such a manner that the vapor eliminator cannot
			 easily be emptied between uses.
S.2.3.
Provision for Sealing.
-
			 Adequate provision shall be made for an approved means of security (e.g., data
			 change audit trail) or for physically applying a security seal in such a manner
			 that requires the security seal to be broken before an adjustment or
			 interchange may be made of any:
(a) measuring
			 element or indicating element;
(b)
			 adjustable element for controlling delivery rate, when such rate tends to
			 affect the accuracy of deliveries; and
(c) metrological parameter that will affect
			 the metrological integrity of the device or system.
When applicable, the adjusting mechanism shall be readily
				accessible for purposes of affixing a security seal.
[Audit trails shall use the format set forth in Table
				S.2.3. Categories of Device and Methods of Sealing]* [*Nonretroactive as of
				January 1, 1995]
(Amended 2006)
Table S.2.3. Categories of Device and
						  Methods of Sealing
Categories of
						  Device
Methods of Sealing
Category 1:
No
						  remote configuration capability.
Seal by physical seal or two event counters:
						  one for calibration parameters and one for configuration
						  parameters.
Category 2:
Remote configuration capability, but access is
						  controlled by physical hardware.
The device shall clearly indicate that it is in
						  the remote configuration mode and record such message if capable of printing in
						  this mode or shall not operate while in this mode.
The hardware enabling access for remote
						  communication must be on-site. The hardware must be sealed using a physical
						  seal or an event counter for calibration parameters and an event counter for
						  configuration parameters. The event counters may be located either at the
						  individual measuring device or at the system controller; however, an adequate
						  number of counters must be provided to monitor the calibration and
						  configuration parameters of the individual devices at a location. If the
						  counters are located in the system controller rather than at the individual
						  device, means must be provided to generate a hard copy of the information
						  through an on-site device.
Category 3:
Remote configuration capability access may be unlimited
						  or controlled through a software switch (e.g., password)
.
The device shall clearly indicate that it is in
						  the remote configuration mode and record such message if capable of printing in
						  this mode or shall not operate while in this mode.
An event logger is required in the device; it
						  must include an event counter (000 to 999), the parameter ID, the date and time
						  of the change, and the new value of the parameter. A printed copy of the
						  information must be available through the device or through another on-site
						  device. The event logger shall have a capacity to retain records equal to 10
						  times the number of sealable parameters in the device, but not more than 1000
						  records are required. (
Note:
Does not require 1000 changes to be
						  stored for each parameter.)
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1995]
(Table
				Added 2006)
S.2.4.
Directional Flow Valves.
- Valves intended to prevent reversal of flow shall be automatic in
			 operation.
S.3.
Design of Intake Lines.
S.3.1.
Diversion of Liquid to be Measured.
- No means shall be provided by
			 which any liquid can be diverted from the supply tank to the receiving tank
			 without being measured by the device. A manually controlled outlet that may be
			 opened for purging or draining the measuring system shall be permitted.
			 Effective means shall be provided to prevent passage of liquid through any such
			 outlet during normal operation of the measuring system.
(Amended 1994)
S.3.2.
Intake Hose.
- The
			 intake hose shall be:
(a) of the dry-hose
			 type;
(b) adequately
			 reinforced;
(c) not more than 6 m
			 (20 ft) in length unless it can be demonstrated that a longer hose is essential
			 to permit transfer from a supply tank; and
(d) connected to the pump at horizontal or
			 above to permit complete drainage of the hose. (Amended 1991)
S.4.
Marking
			 Requirements.
S.4.1.
Limitation
			 of Use.
- If a meter is intended to measure accurately only liquids
			 having particular properties, or to measure accurately only under specific
			 installation or operating conditions, or to measure accurately only when used
			 in conjunction with specific accessory equipment, these limitations shall be
			 clearly and permanently stated on the meter.
S.4.2.
Discharge Rates.
- A
			 meter shall be marked to show its designed maximum and minimum discharge rates.
			 The marked minimum discharge rate shall not exceed 20 % of the marked maximum
			 discharge rate.
Note:
Also see example in Section 3.30.
				Liquid-Measuring Devices Code, paragraph S.4.4.1. Discharge Rates. (Added
				2003)
S.4.3.
Measuring
			 Components.
- All components that affect the measurement of milk that
			 are disassembled for cleaning purposes shall be clearly and permanently
			 identified with a common serial number.
S.4.4.
Flood Volume.
- When
			 applicable, the volume of product (to the nearest minimum division of the
			 meter) necessary to flood the system when dry shall be clearly, conspicuously,
			 and permanently marked on the air eliminator.
S.4.5.
Conversion Factor.
-
			 When the conversion factor of 1.03 kg/L (8.6 lb/gal) is used to convert the
			 volume of milk to weight, the conversion factor shall be clearly marked on the
			 primary indicating element and recorded on the delivery ticket.
N.
Notes
N.1.
Test Liquid.
(a) A meter shall be tested with the liquid
			 to be commercially measured or with a liquid of the same general physical
			 characteristics. Following a satisfactory examination, the weights and measures
			 official should attach a seal or tag indicating the product used during the
			 test.
(Amended 1989)
(b) A milk measuring system shall be tested
			 with the type of milk to be measured when the accuracy of the system is
			 affected by the characteristics of milk (e.g., positive displacement meters).
(Added 1989)
N.2.
Evaporation and Volume Change.
- Care shall be exercised to reduce to a minimum, evaporation losses and
			 volume changes resulting from changes in temperature of the test liquid.
N.2.1.
Temperature Correction.
-
			 Corrections shall be made for any changes in volume resulting from the
			 differences in liquid temperatures between time of passage through the meter
			 and time of volumetric determination in the test measure. When adjustments are
			 necessary, appropriate tables should be used.
N.3.
Test Drafts.
- Test drafts
			 should be equal to at least the amount delivered by the device in one minute at
			 its maximum discharge rate, and shall in no case be less than 400 L or 400 kg
			 (100 gal or 1 000 lb).
(Amended 1989)
N.4.
Testing Procedures.
N.4.1.
Normal Tests.
- The
			 "normal" test of a meter shall be made at the maximum discharge rate that may
			 be anticipated under the conditions of the installation. The "normal" test
			 shall include a determination of the effectiveness of the air elimination
			 system.
N.4.1.1.
Repeatability Tests.
- Tests for repeatability should include a minimum of three consecutive
			 test drafts of approximately the same size and be conducted under controlled
			 conditions where variations in factors such as temperature, pressure, and flow
			 rate are reduced to the extent that they will not affect the results obtained.
(Added 2002)
N.4.2.
Special Tests.
-
			 "Special" tests shall be made to develop the operating characteristics of a
			 device and any special elements and accessories attached to or associated with
			 the device. Any test except as set forth in N.4.1. Normal Tests shall be
			 considered a special test.
N.4.3.
System Capacity.
- The test of a milk-metering system shall
			 include the verification of the volume of product necessary to flood the system
			 as marked on the air eliminator.
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Application.
T.1.1.
To Underregistration and to
			 Overregistration.
- The tolerances hereinafter prescribed shall be
			 applied to errors of underregistration and errors of
			 overregistration.
T.2.
Tolerance Values.
- Maintenance and acceptance tolerances shall
			 be as shown in Table 1. Tolerances for Milk Meters.
(Amended 1989)
Table 1. Tolerances for Milk Meters
Indication
Maintenance
Acceptance
gallons
gallons
gallons
100
0.5
0.3
200
0.7
0.4
300
0.9
0.5
400
1.1
0.6
500
1.3
0.7
Over 500
Add 0.002 gallon per indicated gallon over 500
Add 0.001 gallon per indicated gallon over 500
(Added 1989)
T.3.
Repeatability.
- When
			 multiple tests are conducted at approximately the same flow rate and draft
			 size, the range of the test results for the flow rate shall not exceed 40 % of
			 the absolute value of the maintenance tolerance and the results of each test
			 shall be within the applicable tolerance. (Also see N.4.1.1. Repeatability
			 Tests.)
(Added 2002)
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Installation
			 Requirements.
UR.1.1.
Plumb and
			 Level Condition.
- A device installed in a fixed location shall be
			 installed plumb and level, and the installation shall be sufficiently strong
			 and rigid to maintain this condition.
UR.1.2.
Discharge Rate.
- A
			 meter shall be so installed that the actual maximum discharge rate will not
			 exceed the rated maximum discharge rate. If necessary, means for flow
			 regulation shall be incorporated in the installation, in which case this shall
			 be fully effective and automatic in operation.
UR.1.3.
Unit Price.
- There
			 shall be displayed on the face of a device of the computing type the unit price
			 at which the device is set to compute.
UR.1.4.
Intake Hose.
- The
			 intake hose shall be so installed as to permit complete drainage and that all
			 available product is measured following each transfer.
UR.2.
Use Requirements.
UR.2.1.
Return of Indicating and
			 Recording Elements to Zero.
- The primary indicating elements (visual),
			 and the primary recording elements when these are returnable to zero, shall be
			 returned to zero before each transfer.
UR.2.2.
Printed Ticket.
- Any
			 printed ticket issued by a device of the computing type on which there is
			 printed the total computed price, the total quantity, or the price per unit of
			 quantity, shall also show the other two values (either printed or in clear
			 script).
(Amended 1989)
UR.2.3.
Ticket in Printing Device.
- A ticket shall not be inserted into a device equipped with a ticket
			 printer until immediately before a transfer is begun. If the meter is mounted
			 on a vehicle, in no case shall a ticket be in the device when the vehicle is in
			 motion while on a public street, highway, or thoroughfare.
UR.2.4.
Credit for Flood Volume.
- The volume of product necessary to flood the system as marked on the
			 air eliminator shall be individually recorded on the ticket of each transfer
			 affected.
Section
			 3.36.
Water Meters
A.
Application
A.1.
General
. - This code
			 applies to devices used for the measurement of water; generally applicable to,
			 but not limited to, utilities type meters installed in residences or business
			 establishments and meters installed in batching systems.
(Amended 2002)
A.2.
Exceptions
. - This code
			 does not apply to:
(a) water meters mounted
			 on vehicle tanks (for which see Section 3.31. Vehicle-Tank Meters);
			 or
(b) mass flow meters. (Also see
			 Section 3.37. Mass Flow Meters.) (Added 1994)
A.3.
Additional Code
			 Requirements
. - In addition to the requirements of this code, Water
			 Meters shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Design of Indicating and
			 Recording Elements and of Recorded Representations.
S.1.1.
Primary Elements.
S.1.1.1.
General.
- A water
			 meter shall be equipped with a primary indicating element and may also be
			 equipped with a primary recording element. Such elements shall be visible at
			 the point of measurement or be stored in non-volatile and non-resettable
			 memory. The display may be remotely located provided it is readily accessible
			 to the customer.
(Amended 2002)
S.1.1.2.
Units.
- A water meter
			 shall indicate and record, if the device is equipped to record, its deliveries
			 in terms of liters, gallons or cubic feet or binary or decimal subdivisions
			 thereof except batch plant meters, which shall indicate deliveries in terms of
			 liters, gallons or decimal subdivisions of the liter or gallon only.
S.1.1.3.
Value of Smallest Unit.
- The value of the smallest unit of indicated delivery and recorded
			 delivery, if the device is equipped to record, shall not exceed the equivalent
			 of:
(a) 50 L (10 gal or 1
			 ft3) on utility type meters, sizes 1 in and smaller;
			 or
(b) 500 L (100 gal or 10
			 ft3) on utility-type meters
,
sizes
			 1½ in and 2 in; or
(c) 0.2 L
			 (1/10 gal or 
			 1/100 ft3) on
			 batching meters delivering less than 375 L/min (100 gal/min or 13 ft 
			 3/min); or
(d) 5 L (1 gal or
1/10
ft
3
) on batching meters
			 delivering 375 L/min (100 gal/min or 13 ft3/min) or
			 more. (Amended 2009)
S.1.1.4.
Advancement of Indicating and
			 Recording Elements.
- Primary indicating and recording elements shall be
			 susceptible to advancement only by the mechanical operation of the
			 device.
S.1.1.5.
Return to
			 Zero.
- If the meter is so designed that the primary indicating elements
			 are readily returnable to a definite zero indication, means shall be provided
			 to prevent the return of these elements beyond their correct zero
			 position.
S.1.1.6.
Proving
			 indicator. -
Utility-type meters shall be equipped with a proving
			 indicator. The individual graduations on a mechanical (analog) proving
			 indicator shall indicate volumes no larger than 
			 1/100 of the value of the smallest unit of
			 indicated delivery required in S.1.1.3. Value of Smallest Unit. For electronic
			 (digital) proving indications, the smallest unit of volume displayed shall be
			 no larger than 
			 1/1000 of the value of the smallest unit
			 of indicated delivery required in S.1.1.3. (Added 2009)
S.1.2.
Graduations.
S.1.2.1.
Length.
- Graduations
			 shall be so varied in length that they may be conveniently read.
S.1.2.2.
Width.
- In any series
			 of graduations, the width of a graduation shall in no case be greater than the
			 width of the minimum clear interval between graduations, and the width of main
			 graduations shall be not more than 50 % greater than the width of subordinate
			 graduations. Graduations shall in no case be less than 0.2 mm (0.008 in) in
			 width.
S.1.2.3.
Clear
			 Interval Between Graduations.
- The clear interval shall not be less
			 than 1.0 mm (0.04 in). If the graduations are not parallel, the measurement
			 shall be made:
(a) along the line of relative
			 movement between the graduations at the end of the indicator; or
(b) if the indicator is continuous, at the
			 point of widest separation of the graduations.
S.1.3.
Indicators.
S.1.3.1.
Symmetry.
- The index
			 of an indicator shall be symmetrical with respect to the graduations, at least
			 throughout that portion of its length associated with the
			 graduations.
S.1.3.2.
Length.
- The index of an indicator shall reach to the finest
			 graduations with which it is used, the width of the minimum clear interval
			 between graduations, and the width of main graduations shall be not more than
			 50 % greater than the width of subordinate graduations. Graduations shall in no
			 case be less than 0.2 mm (0.008 in) in width.
S.1.3.3.
Width.
- The width of
			 the index of an indicator in relation to the series of graduations with which
			 it is used shall not be greater than:
(a)
the width of the narrowest graduation;*
and
[*Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2002]
(Amended 2001)
(b) the width of the minimum clear interval
			 between graduations.
When the index of an indicator extends along the entire length
				of a graduation, that portion of the index of the indicator that may be brought
				into coincidence with the graduation shall be of the same width throughout the
				length of the index that coincides with the graduation.
S.1.3.4.
Clearance.
- The clearance between the index of an indicator and the graduations
			 shall in no case be more than 1.5 mm (0.06 in).
S.1.3.5.
Parallax.
- Parallax
			 effects shall be reduced to the practicable minimum.
S.2.
Design of
			 Measuring Elements.
S.2.1.
Provision for Sealing.
- Adequate provision shall be made for applying
			 security seals in such a manner that no adjustment or interchange may be made
			 of:
(a) any measurement elements;
			 and
(b) any adjustable element for
			 controlling delivery rate when such rate tends to affect the accuracy of
			 deliveries.
The adjusting mechanism shall be readily accessible for
				purposes of affixing a security seal.
S.2.2.
Batching Meters Only.
S.2.2.1.
Air Elimination.
-
			 Batching meters shall be equipped with an effective air eliminator.
S.2.2.2.
Directional Flow Valves.
- Valves intended to prevent reversal of flow shall be automatic in
			 operation.
S.2.3.
Multi-Jet Meter Identification.
- Multi-Jet water meters shall be
			 clearly and permanently marked as such on the device or identified on the
			 Certificate of Conformance.
(Added 2003)
S.3.
Markings
S.3.1.
Location of Marking
			 Information; Utility Type Meters.
- All required
			 markings, including those
required by G-S.1. Identification, shall be either on
				the meter body or primary indicator. [Nonretroactive as of January 1,
				2013]
(Added 2012)
N.
Notes
N.1.
Test Liquid.
- A meter
			 shall be tested with water.
N.2.
Evaporation and Volume Change.
- Care shall be exercised to
			 reduce to a minimum, evaporation losses and volume changes resulting from
			 changes to temperature of the test liquid.
N.3.
Test Drafts.
- Test drafts
			 should be equal to at least the amount delivered by the device in two minutes
			 and in no case less than the amount delivered by the device in one minute at
			 the actual maximum flow rate developed by the installation. The test draft
			 sizes shown in Table N.4.1. Flow Rate and Draft Size for Water Meters Normal
			 Tests, shall be followed as closely as possible.
(Amended 2003)
N.4.
Testing Procedures.
N.4.1.
Normal Tests.
- The
			 normal test of a meter shall be made at the maximum discharge rate developed by
			 the installation. Meters with maximum gallon per minute ratings higher than the
			 values specified in Table N.4.1. Flow Rate and Draft Size for Water Meters
			 Normal Tests may be tested up to the meter rating, with meter indications no
			 less than those shown.
(Amended 1990, 2002, and 2003)
Table N.4.1. Flow Rate and Draft Size for Water
						  Meters Normal Tests
Meter Size (inches)
Rate of Flow (gal/min)
Maximum Rate
Meter Indication/Test Draft
gal
ft3
Less than 
						  5/8
8
50
5
5/8
15
50
5
¾
25
50
5
1
40
100
10
1½
80
300
40
2
120
500
40
3
250
500
50
4
350
1000
100
6
700
1000
100
(Table Added 2003)
N.4.1.1.
Repeatability Tests.
-
			 Tests for repeatability should include a minimum of three consecutive test
			 drafts of approximately the same size and be conducted under controlled
			 conditions where variations in factors such as temperature, pressure, and flow
			 rate are reduced to the extent that they will not affect the results obtained.
(Added 2002)
N.4.2.
Special Tests.
- Special
			 tests to develop the operating characteristics of meters may be made according
			 to the rates and quantities shown in Table N.4.2.a. Flow Rate and Draft Size
			 for Water Meters Special Tests and Table N.4.2.b. Flow Rate and Draft Size for
			 Utility Type Water Meters Special Tests.
(Amended 2003 and 2010)
Table N.4.2.a. Flow Rate and Draft Size for
						  Batching Water Meters Special Tests
Meter Size (inches)
Intermediate Rate
Minimum Rate
Rate of Flow (gal/min)
Meter Indication/Test Draft
Rate of Flow (gal/min)
Meter Indication/Test Draft
gal
ft3
gal
ft3
Less than or equal to 
						  5/8
2
10
1
¼
5
1
¾
3
10
1
½
5
1
1
4
10
1
¾
5
1
1½
8
50
5
1½
10
1
2
15
50
5
2
10
1
3
20
50
5
4
10
1
4
40
100
10
7
50
5
6
60
100
10
12
50
5
(Table Added 2003) (Table Amended 2010)
Table N.4.2.b. Flow Rate and Draft Size for
						  Utility Type Water Meters Special Tests
Meter Size (inches)
Intermediate Rate
Minimum Rate
Rate of Flow (gal/min)
Meter Indication/Test Draft
Rate of Flow (gal/min)
Meter Indication/Test Draft
gal
ft3
gal
ft3
Less than 
						  5/8
2
10
1
¼
5
1
5/8
2
10
1
¼
5
1
5/8 x ¾
2
10
1
¼
5
1
¾
3
10
1
½
5
1
1
4
10
1
¾
5
1
1½
8
100
10
1½
100
10
2
15
100
10
2
100
10
(Table Added 2010)
N.4.3.
Batching Meter Tests.
-
			 Tests on batching meters should be conducted at the maximum and intermediate
			 rates only.
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Tolerance
			 Values.
- Maintenance and acceptance tolerances shall be as shown in
			 Table T.1. Accuracy Classes and Tolerances for Water Meters.
(Amended 2003)
Table T.1. Accuracy Classes and Tolerances for
						  Water Meters
Accuracy Class
Application
Acceptance Tolerance
Maintenance Tolerance
Tolerance for Special
Tests Conducted at the
Minimum Flow Rate
1.5
Water, Other Than Multi-Jet Water Meters
Overregistration
1.5 %
1.5 %
1.5 %
Underregistration
1.5 %
1.5 %
5.0 %
1.5
Water, Multi-Jet Water Meters
Overregistration
1.5 %
1.5 %
3.0 %
Underregistration
1.5 %
1.5 %
3.0 %
T.1.1.
Repeatability.
- When multiple tests are conducted at
			 approximately the same flow rate, each test shall be within the applicable
			 tolerances and the range of test results shall not exceed the values shown in
			 Table T.1.1. Repeatability.
(Added 2002) (Amended 2010)
Table T.1.1. Repeatability
Batching Meters
Utility-Type Meters
Normal Flow Rates
0.6 %
0.6 %
Intermediate Flow Rates
0.6 %
2.0 %
Minimum Flow Rate
1.3 %
4.0 %
(Table Added 2010)
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Batching Meters Only.
UR.1.1.
Strainer.
- A filter or
			 strainer shall be provided if it is determined that the water contains
			 excessive amounts of foreign material.
UR.1.2.
Siphon Breaker.
- An
			 automatic siphon breaker or other effective means shall be installed in the
			 discharge piping at the highest point of outlet, in no case below the top of
			 the meter, to prevent siphoning of the meter and permit rapid drainage of the
			 pipe or hose.
UR.1.3.
Provision for Testing.
- Acceptable provisions for testing shall be
			 incorporated into all meter systems. Such provisions shall include a two-way
			 valve, or manifold valving, and a pipe or hose installed in the discharge line
			 accessible to the proper positioning of the test measure.
UR.2.
Accessibility of Customer
			 Indication.
- An unobstructed standing space of at least 76 cm (30 in)
			 wide, 91 cm (36 in) deep, and 198 cm (78 in) high shall be maintained in front
			 of an indication intended for use by the customer to allow for reading the
			 indicator. The customer indication shall be readily observable to a person
			 located within the standing space without necessity of a separate tool or
			 device.
(Added 2008)
Section 3.37.
Mass Flow Meters
A.
Application
A.1.
Liquids.
- This code
			 applies to devices that are designed to dynamically measure the mass, or the
			 mass and density of liquids. It also specifies the relevant examinations and
			 tests that are to be conducted.
(Amended 1997)
A.2.
Vapor (Gases).
- This code
			 applies to devices that are designed to dynamically measure the mass of
			 hydrocarbon gas in the vapor state. Examples of these products are propane,
			 propylene, butanes, butylenes, ethane, methane, natural gas and any other
			 hydrocarbon gas/air mix.
A.3.
Additional Code Requirements
. - In addition to the requirements
			 of this code, Mass Flow Meters shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10.
			 General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Indicating
			 and Recording Elements.
S.1.1.
Indicating Elements.
- A measuring assembly shall include an indicating
			 element. Indications shall be clear, definite, accurate, and easily read under
			 normal conditions of operation of the instrument.
S.1.2.
Natural Gas Dispensers.
- Except for fleet sales and other price contract sales, a natural gas
			 dispenser used to refuel vehicles shall be of the computing type and shall
			 indicate the quantity, the unit price, and the total price of each delivery.
			 The dispenser shall display the mass measured for each transaction either
			 continuously on an external or internal display accessible during the
			 inspection and test of the dispenser, or display the quantity in mass units by
			 using controls on the device.
(Added 1994)(Amended 2013)
S.1.3.
Units.
S.1.3.1.
Units of Measurement.
- Deliveries shall be indicated and recorded in grams, kilograms, metric
			 tons, pounds, tons, and/or liters, gallons, quarts, pints and decimal
			 subdivisions thereof. The indication of a delivery shall be on the basis of
			 apparent mass versus a density of 8.0 g/cm3. The
			 volume indication shall be based on the mass measurement and an automatic means
			 to determine and correct for changes in product density.
(Amended 1993 and 1997)
S.1.3.1.1.
Natural Gas Used as an
			 Engine Fuel.
- When natural gas is dispensed as an engine fuel, the
			 delivered quantity shall be indicated in "gasoline liter equivalent (GLE)
			 units" or "gasoline gallon equivalent (GGE) units, (b) "diesel liter equivalent
			 (DLE) units" or "diesel gallon equivalent (DGE) units: (." (Also see
			 definitions.) (Added 1994) (Amended 2013)
S.1.3.2.
Numerical Value of
			 Quantity-Value Divisions.
- The value of a scale interval shall be equal
			 to:
(a) 1, 2, or 5; or
(b) a decimal multiple or submultiple of 1,
			 2, or 5.
S.1.3.3.
Maximum Value of Quantity-Value Divisions.
(a) The maximum value of the quantity-value
			 division for liquids shall not be greater than 0.2 % of the minimum measured
			 quantity.
(b) For dispensers of
			 compressed natural gas used to refuel vehicles, the value of the division for
			 the gasoline liter equivalent shall not exceed 0.01 GLE; the division for
			 gasoline gallon equivalent (GGE) shall not exceed 0.001 GGE. The maximum value
			 of the mass division shall not exceed 0.001 kg or 0.001 lb.
(Amended 1994)
S.1.3.4.
Values Defined.
-
			 Indicated values shall be adequately defined by a sufficient number of figures,
			 words, symbols, or combinations thereof. A display of "zero" shall be a zero
			 digit for all displayed digits to the right of the decimal mark and at least
			 one to the left.
S.2.
Operating Requirements.
S.2.1.
Return to Zero.
- Except
			 for measuring assemblies in a pipeline:
(a)
			 One indicator and the primary recording elements, if the device is equipped to
			 record, shall be provided with a means for readily returning the indication to
			 zero either automatically or manually.
(b) It shall not be possible to return
			 primary indicating elements, or primary recording elements, beyond the correct
			 zero position.
(Amended 1993)
S.2.2.
Indicator Reset Mechanism.
- The reset mechanism for the indicating element shall not be operable
			 during a delivery. Once the zeroing operation has begun, it shall not be
			 possible to indicate a value other than the latest measurement, or "zeros" when
			 the zeroing operation has been completed.
S.2.3.
Non-resettable Indicator.
- An instrument may also be equipped with a non-resettable indicator if
			 the indicated values cannot be construed to be the indicated values of the
			 resettable indicator for a delivered quantity.
S.2.4.
Provisions for Power
			 Loss.
S.2.4.1.
Transaction
			 Information.
- In the event of a power loss, the information needed to
			 complete any transaction in progress at the time of the power loss (such as the
			 quantity and unit price, or sales price) shall be determinable for at least 15
			 minutes at the dispenser or at the console if the console is accessible to the
			 customer.
(Added 1993)
S.2.4.2.
User Information.
-
			 The device memory shall retain information on the quantity of fuel dispensed
			 and the sales price totals during power loss.
(Added 1993)
S.2.5.
Display of Unit Price and
			 Product Identity.
S.2.5.1.
Unit
			 Price.
- A computing or money-operated device shall be able to display
			 on each face the unit price at which the device is set to compute or to
			 dispense.
(Added 1993)
S.2.5.2.
Product Identity.
- A
			 device shall be able to conspicuously display on each side the identity of the
			 product being dispensed.
(Added 1993)
S.2.5.3.
Selection of Unit
			 Price.
-
Except for dispensers used exclusively for
			 fleet sales, other price contract sales, and truck refueling (e.g., truck stop
			 dispensers used only to refuel trucks), when a product or grade is offered for
			 sale at more than one unit price through a computing device, the selection of
			 the unit price shall be made prior to delivery using controls on the device or
			 other customer-activated controls.
A system shall not permit a change
			 to the unit price during delivery of a product.
[Nonretroactive as of
			 January 1, 1998]
(Added 1997)
S.2.5.4.
Agreement Between
			 Indications.
-
When a quantity value indicated or
			 recorded by an auxiliary element is a derived or computed value based on data
			 received from a retail motor-fuel dispenser, the value may differ from the
			 quantity value displayed on the dispenser, provided the following conditions
			 are met:
(a)
all total
			 money-values for an individual sale that are indicated or recorded by the
			 system agree; and
(b)
within each element the values indicated or recorded meet the formula
			 (quantity x unit price = total sales price) to the closest cent.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1998]
(Added 1997)
S.2.6.
Money-Value Computations.
- A computing device shall compute the total sales price at any
			 single-purchase unit price (i.e., excluding fleet sales, other price contract
			 sales, and truck stop dispensers used only to refuel trucks) for which the
			 product being measured is offered for sale at any delivery possible within
			 either the measurement range of the device or the range of the computing
			 elements, whichever is less.
(Added 1993)
S.2.6.1.
Auxiliary Elements.
- If a system is equipped with auxiliary
			 indications, all indicated money-value and quantity divisions of the auxiliary
			 element shall be identical with those of the primary element.
(Added 1993)
S.2.6.2.
Display of Quantity and Total
			 Price.
- When a delivery is completed, the total price and quantity for
			 that transaction shall be displayed on the face of the dispenser for at least 5
			 minutes or until the next transaction is initiated by using controls on the
			 device or other user-activated controls.
(Added 1993)
S.2.7.
Recorded
			 Representations, Point-of-Sale Systems.
-
The sales
			 information recorded by cash registers when interfaced with a retail motor-fuel
			 dispenser shall contain the following information for products delivered by the
			 dispenser:
(a)
the total
			 volume of the delivery;
(b)
the unit
			 price;
(c)
the
			 total computed price; and
(d)
the product identity by name,
			 symbol, abbreviation, or code number. [Nonretroactive as of January 1,
			 1986]
(Added 1993)
S.2.8.
Indication of Delivery.
-
The device shall automatically show on its face the
			 initial zero condition
and the quantity delivered (up to the nominal
				capacity). However, the first 0.03 L (0.009 gal) of a delivery and its
				associated total sales price need not be indicated. [Nonretroactive as of
				January 1, 1998]
(Added 1997)
S.3.
Measuring Elements and Measuring
			 Systems.
S.3.1.
Maximum and
			 Minimum Flow-Rates.
(a) The ratio of
			 the maximum to minimum flow-rates specified by the manufacturer for devices
			 measuring liquefied gases shall be 5:1 or greater.
(b) The ratio of the maximum to minimum
			 flow-rates specified by the manufacturer for devices measuring other than
			 liquefied gases shall be 10:1 or greater.
S.3.2.
Adjustment Means.
- An
			 assembly shall be provided with the means to change the ratio between the
			 indicated quantity and the quantity of liquid measured by the assembly. A
			 bypass on the measuring assembly shall not be used for these means.
S.3.2.1.
Discontinuous Adjusting
			 Means.
- When the adjusting means changes the ratio between the
			 indicated quantity and the quantity of measured liquid in a discontinuous
			 manner, the consecutive values of the ratio shall not differ by more than 0.1
			 %.
S.3.3.
Vapor
			 Elimination.
- A liquid-measuring instrument or measuring system shall
			 be equipped with an effective vapor or air eliminator or other effective means,
			 automatic in operation, to prevent the measurement of vapor and air. Vent lines
			 from the air or vapor eliminator shall be made of metal tubing or some other
			 suitable rigid material.
(Amended 1999)
S.3.3.1.
Vapor Elimination on Loading
			 Rack Liquid Metering Systems.
(a) A
			 loading rack liquid metering system shall be equipped with a vapor or air
			 eliminator or other automatic means to prevent the passage of vapor and air
			 through the meter unless the system is designed or operationally controlled by
			 a method, approved by the weights and measures jurisdiction having statutory
			 authority over the device, such that neither air nor vapor can enter the
			 system.
(b) Vent lines from the air
			 or vapor eliminator (if present) shall be made of metal tubing or other rigid
			 material.
(Added 1995)
S.3.4.
Maintenance of Liquid State.
- A liquid-measuring device shall be installed so that the measured
			 product remains in a liquid state during passage through the
			 instrument.
S.3.5.
Provision
			 for Sealing.
- Adequate provision shall be made for an approved means of
			 security (e.g., data change audit trail) or physically applying security seals
			 in such a manner that no adjustment or interchange may be made of:
(a) any measuring or indicating
			 element;
(b) any adjustable element
			 for controlling delivery rate when such rate tends to affect the accuracy of
			 deliveries;
(c) the zero adjustment
			 mechanism; and
(d) any metrological
			 parameter that will affect the metrological integrity of the device or system.
When applicable, the adjusting mechanism shall be readily
				accessible for purposes of affixing a security seal.
[Audit trails shall use the format set forth in Table
				S.3.5. Categories of Device and Methods of Sealing]* [*Nonretroactive as of
				January 1, 1995]
(Amended 1992, 1995, and 2006)
Table S.3.5. Categories of Device and
						  Methods of Sealing
Categories of
						  Device
Methods of Sealing
Category 1:
No
						  remote configuration capability.
Seal by physical seal or two event counters:
						  one for calibration parameters and one for configuration
						  parameters.
Category 2:
Remote configuration capability, but access is
						  controlled by physical hardware.
The device shall clearly indicate that it is in
						  the remote configuration mode and record such message if capable of printing in
						  this mode or shall not operate while in this mode.
[The hardware enabling access for remote
						  communication must be on-site. The hardware must be sealed using a physical
						  seal or an event counter for calibration parameters and an event counter for
						  configuration parameters. The event counters may be located either at the
						  individual measuring device or at the system controller; however, an adequate
						  number of counters must be provided to monitor the calibration and
						  configuration parameters of the individual devices at a location. If the
						  counters are located in the system controller rather than at the individual
						  device, means must be provided to generate a hard copy of the information
						  through an on-site device.]* [*Nonretroactive as of January 1,
						  1996]
Category 3:
Remote configuration capability access may be unlimited
						  or controlled through a software switch (e.g., password). [Nonretroactive as of
						  January 1, 1995]
The device shall clearly indicate that it is in
						  the remote configuration mode and record such message if capable of printing in
						  this mode or shall not operate while in this mode. [Nonretroactive as of
						  January 1, 2001]
An event logger is required in the device; it
						  must include an event counter (000 to 999), the parameter ID, the date and time
						  of the change, and the new value of the parameter. A printed copy of the
						  information must be available through the device or through another on-site
						  device. The event logger shall have a capacity to retain records equal to 10
						  times the number of sealable parameters in the device, but not more than 1000
						  records are required. (
Note:
Does not require 1000 changes to be
						  stored for each parameter.)
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1995]
(Table Added 1995) (Amended 1995, 1998, 1999, and 2006)
S.3.6.
Automatic
			 Density Correction.
(a) An automatic
			 means to determine and correct for changes in product density shall be
			 incorporated in any mass flow metering system that is affected by changes in
			 the density of the product being measured.
(b) Volume-measuring devices with automatic
			 temperature compensation used to measure natural gas as a motor vehicle engine
			 fuel shall be equipped with an automatic means to determine and correct for
			 changes in product density due to changes in the temperature, pressure, and
			 composition of the product.
(Amended 1994 and 1997)
S.3.7.
Pressurizing the Discharge
			 Hose.
- The discharge hose for compressed natural gas shall
			 automatically pressurize prior to the device beginning to register the
			 delivery.
(Added 1993)
S.3.8.
Zero-Set-Back Interlock, Retail
			 Motor-Fuel Devices.
- A device shall be constructed so that:
(a) after a delivery cycle has been completed
			 by moving the starting lever to any position that shuts off the device, an
			 automatic interlock prevents a subsequent delivery until the indicating
			 elements, and recording elements if the device is equipped and activated to
			 record, have been returned to their zero positions;
(b) the discharge nozzle cannot be returned
			 to its designed hanging position (that is, any position where the tip of the
			 nozzle is placed in its designed receptacle and the lock can be inserted) until
			 the starting lever is in its designed shut-off position and the zero-set-back
			 interlock has been engaged; and
(c)
			 in a system with more than one dispenser supplied by a single pump, an
			 effective automatic control valve in each dispenser prevents product from being
			 delivered until the indicating elements on that dispenser are in a correct zero
			 position.
(Added 1993)
S.4.
Discharge Lines and
			 Valves.
S.4.1.
Diversion of
			 Measured Product.
- No means shall be provided by which any measured
			 product can be diverted from the measuring instrument. However, two or more
			 delivery outlets may be permanently installed and operated simultaneously,
			 provided that any diversion of flow to other than the intended receiving
			 receptacle cannot be readily accomplished or is readily apparent. Such means
			 include physical barriers, visible valves, or indications that make it clear
			 which outlets are in operation, and explanatory signs if deemed necessary.
An outlet that may be opened for purging or draining the
				measuring system, or for recirculating product if recirculation is required in
				order to maintain the product in a deliverable state shall be permitted.
				Effective automatic means shall be provided to prevent the passage of liquid
				through any such outlet during normal operation of the measuring system and to
				inhibit meter indications (or advancement of indications) and recorded
				representations while the outlet is in operation.
(Amended 2002 and 2006)
S.4.2.
Pump-Discharge Unit.
- A
			 pump-discharge unit for liquids equipped with a flexible discharge hose shall
			 be of the wet-hose type.
(Added 1993)
S.4.3.
Directional Flow Valves.
- If a reversal of flow could result in errors that exceed the tolerance
			 for the minimum measured quantity, a valve or valves or other effective means,
			 automatic in operation (and equipped with a pressure limiting device, if
			 necessary) to prevent the reversal of flow shall be properly installed in the
			 system. (Also see N.1. Minimum Measured Quantity.)
S.4.4.
Discharge Valves.
- A
			 discharge valve may be installed on a discharge line only if the system is a
			 wet-hose type. Any other shutoff valve on the discharge side of the instrument
			 shall be of the automatic or semiautomatic predetermined-stop type or shall be
			 operable only:
(a) by means of a tool (but not
			 a pin) entirely separate from the device; or
(b) by means of a security seal with which
			 the valve is sealed open.
S.4.5.
Antidrain Means.
- In a
			 wet-hose type device, effective means shall be provided to prevent the drainage
			 of the hose between transactions.
S.4.6.
Other Valves.
- Check
			 valves and closing mechanisms that are not used to define the measured quantity
			 shall have relief valves (if necessary) to dissipate any abnormally high
			 pressure that may arise in the measuring assembly.
S.5.
Markings.
- A measuring
			 system shall be legibly and indelibly marked with the following information:
(a) pattern approval mark (i.e., type
			 approval number);
(b) name and
			 address of the manufacturer or his trademark and, if required by the weights
			 and measures authority, the manufacturer's identification mark in addition to
			 the trademark;
(c) model identifier
			 or product name selected by the manufacturer;
(d) nonrepetitive serial number;
(e)
the accuracy class of the meter
			 as specified by the manufacturer consistent with Table T.2. Accuracy Classes
			 for Mass Flow Meter Applications Covered in NIST Handbook 44, Section 3.37 Mass
			 Flow Meters;* [*Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1995]
(Added 1994)
(f) maximum and minimum flow rates in pounds
			 per unit of time;
(g) maximum
			 working pressure;
(h) applicable
			 range of temperature if other than - 10 °C to + 50 °C;
(i) minimum measured quantity; and
(j) product limitations, if
			 applicable.
S.5.1.
Location of Marking Information; Retail Motor-Fuel Dispensers.
-
The marking information
required in General Code, paragraph G-S.1.
				Identification shall appear as follows:
(a)
within 60 cm (24 in) to 150 cm
			 (60 in) from the base of the dispenser;
(b)
either internally and/or
			 externally provided the information is permanent and easily read;
			 and
(c)
on a
			 portion of the device that cannot be readily removed or interchanged (i.e., not
			 on a service access panel).
Note:
The use of a dispenser key or tool
				to access internal marking information is permitted for retail
				liquid-measuring
devices.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2003]
(Added 2006)
S.5.2.
Marking of Diesel and Gasoline
			 Volume Equivalent Conversion Factor.
- A device dispensing natural gas
			 shall have
(a) either the statement "1
			 Gasoline Liter Equivalent (GLE) is Equal to 0.678 kg of Natural Gas" or "1
			 Gasoline Gallon Equivalent (GGE) is Equal to 5.660 lb of natural
			 Gas",
(b) either ther statement "1
			 Diesel Liter Equivalent (DLE) is Equal to 0.756 kg of Natural Gas" or "1 Diesel
			 Gallon Equivalent (DGE) is Equal to 6.22 lb of Natural Gas"
permanently and conspicuously marked on the face of the
				dispenser according to the method of sale used. (Added 1994)(Amended
				2013)
S.6.
Printer.
- When an
			 assembly is equipped with means for printing the measured quantity, the
			 following conditions apply:
(a) the scale
			 interval shall be the same as that of the indicator;
(b) the value of the printed quantity shall
			 be the same value as the indicated quantity;
(c) a quantity for a delivery (other than an
			 initial reference value) cannot be recorded until the measurement and delivery
			 has been completed;
(d) the printer
			 is returned to zero when the resettable indicator is returned to zero;
			 and
(e) the printed values shall
			 meet the requirements applicable to the indicated values.
S.6.1.
Printed Receipt.
- Any
			 delivered, printed quantity shall include an identification number, the time
			 and date, and the name of the seller. This information may be printed by the
			 device or pre-printed on the ticket.
S.7.
Totalizers for Retail
			 Motor-Fuel Devices.
-
Retail motor-fuel dispensers
			 shall be equipped with a nonresettable totalizer for the quantity delivered
			 through the metering device. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1998]
(Added 1997)
N.
Notes
N.1.
Minimum Measured Quantity.
- The minimum measured quantity shall be specified by the
			 manufacturer.
N.2.
Test
			 Medium.
N.2.1.
Liquid-Measuring
			 Devices.
- The device shall be tested with the liquid that the device is
			 intended to measure or another liquid with the same general physical
			 characteristics.
N.2.2.
Vapor-Measuring Devices.
- The device shall be tested with air or
			 the product to be measured.
N.3.
Test Drafts.
- The minimum
			 test shall be one test draft at the maximum flow rate of the installation and
			 one test draft at the minimum flow rate. More tests may be performed at these
			 or other flow rates. (Also see T.3. Repeatability.)
N.4.
Minimum Measured Quantity.
- The device shall be tested for a delivery equal to the declared
			 minimum measured quantity when the device is likely to be used to make
			 deliveries on the order of the minimum measured quantity.
N.5.
Motor-Fuel Dispenser.
-
			 When a device is intended for use as a liquid motor-fuel dispenser, the type
			 evaluation test shall include a test for accuracy using five starts and stops
			 during a delivery to simulate the operation of the automatic shut-off nozzle.
			 This test may be conducted as part of the normal inspection and test of the
			 meter.
N.6.
Testing
			 Procedures.
N.6.1.
Normal Tests.
- The normal test of a meter shall be made at the maximum discharge rate
			 developed by the installation. Any additional tests conducted at flow rates
			 down to and including the rated minimum discharge flow rate shall be considered
			 normal tests.
(Added 1999)
N.6.1.1.
Repeatability Tests.
- Tests for repeatability should include a
			 minimum of three consecutive test drafts of approximately the same size and be
			 conducted under controlled conditions where variations in factors such as
			 temperature, pressure, and flow rate are reduced to the extent that they will
			 not affect the results obtained.
(Added 2001)
N.6.2.
Special Tests.
-
			 "Special" tests shall be made to develop the operating characteristics of a
			 device and any special elements and accessories attached to or associated with
			 the device. Any test except as set forth in N.6.1. Normal Tests shall be
			 considered a special test. Special tests of a measuring system shall be made to
			 develop operating characteristics of the measuring systems during a split
			 compartment delivery. (Also see Table T.2. Accuracy Classes and Tolerances for
			 Mass Flow Meters.)
(Added 1999)
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Tolerances, General.
(a) The tolerances apply equally to errors of
			 underregistration and errors of overregistration.
(b) The tolerances apply to all products at
			 all temperatures measured at any flow rate within the rated measuring range of
			 the meter.
(Amended 1999)
T.2.
Tolerances.
- The
			 tolerances for mass flow meters for specific liquids, gases, and applications
			 are listed in Table T.2. Accuracy Classes and Tolerances for Mass Flow Meters.
(Amended 1994 and 1999)
Table T.2. Accuracy Classes and Tolerances for
						  Mass Flow Meters
Accuracy Class
Application or Commodity Being
						  Measured
Acceptance Tolerance
Maintenance Tolerance
Special Tolerance
0.3
- Large capacity motor-fuel dispensers (maximum
						  discharge flow rates greater than 100 L/min or 25 gal/min)
- Heated products (other than asphalt) at temperatures
						  greater than 50 °C (122 °F)
- Asphalt at temperatures equal to or below 50 °C
						  (122 °F)
- Loading rack meters
- Vehicle-tank meters
- Home heating oil
- Milk and other food products
- All other liquid applications not shown in the table
						  where the minimum delivery is at least 700 kg (1500 lb)
0.2 %
0.3 %
0.5 %
0.3A
- Asphalt at temperatures greater than 50 °C (122
						  °F)
0.3 %
0.3 %
0.5 %
0.5
- Small capacity (retail) motor-fuel dispensers
- Agri-chemical liquids
- All other liquid applications not shown in the table
						  where the minimum delivery is less than 700 kg or 1500 lb
0.3 %
0.5 %
0.5 %
1.0
- Anhydrous ammonia
- LP Gas (including vehicle-tank meters)
0.6 %
1.0 %
1.0 %
2.0
- Compressed natural gas as a motor-fuel
1.5 %
2.0 %
2.0 %
2.5
- Cryogenic liquid meters
- Liquefied compressed gases other than LP Gas
1.5 %
2.5 %
2.5 %
(Added 1994) (Amended 1999, 2001, and 2013)
T.3.
Repeatability.
- When
			 multiple tests are conducted at approximately the same flow rate and draft
			 size, the range of the test results for the flow rate shall not exceed 40 % of
			 the absolute value of the maintenance tolerance and the results of each test
			 shall be within the applicable tolerance. (Also see N.6.1.1. Repeatability
			 Tests.)
(Amended 1992, 1994, and 2001)
T.4.
Type Evaluation Examinations for
			 Liquid-Measuring Devices.
- For type evaluation examinations, the
			 tolerance values shall apply under the following conditions:
(a) with any one liquid within the range of
			 liquids;
(b) at any one liquid
			 temperature and pressure within the operating range of the meter; and
(c) at all flow rates within the range of
			 flow rates. (Added 1993) (Amended 1994)
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Selection Requirements.
UR.1.1.
Discharge Hose-Length.
-
The length of the discharge hose on a retail
			 motor-fuel device shall not exceed 4.6 m (15 ft) unless it can be demonstrated
			 that a longer hose is essential to permit deliveries to be made to receiving
			 vehicles or vessels. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1998]
(Added 1997)
UR.1.2.
Minimum Measured
			 Quantity.
(a) The minimum measured
			 quantity shall be specified by the manufacturer.
(b) The minimum measured quantity appropriate
			 for a transaction may be specified by the weights and measures authority. A
			 device may have a minimum measured quantity smaller than that specified by the
			 weights and measures authority; however, the device must perform within the
			 performance requirements for the declared minimum measured quantity.
UR.2.
Installation Requirements.
UR.2.1.
Manufacturer's Instructions.
- A device shall be installed in
			 accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and the installation shall be
			 sufficiently secure and rigid to maintain this condition.
(Added 1997)
UR.2.2.
Discharge Rate.
- A
			 device shall be installed so that the actual maximum discharge rate will not
			 exceed the rated maximum discharge rate. Automatic means of flow regulation
			 shall be incorporated in the installation if necessary.
(Added 1997)
UR.2.3.
Low-Flow Cut-Off Valve.
- If a metering system is equipped with a programmable or adjustable
			 "low-flow cut-off" feature:
(a) the low-flow
			 cut-off value shall not be set at flow rates lower than the minimum operating
			 flow rate specified by the manufacturer on the meter; and
(b) the system shall be equipped with flow
			 control valves which prevent the flow of product and stop the indicator from
			 registering product flow whenever the product flow rate is less than the
			 low-flow cut-off value.
(Added 1992)
UR.3.
Use of Device.
UR.3.1.
Unit Price and Product
			 Identity for Retail Dispensers.
- The following information shall be
			 conspicuously displayed or posted on the face of a retail dispenser used in
			 direct sale:
(a) except for dispensers used
			 exclusively for fleet sales, other price contract sales, and truck refueling
			 (e.g., truck stop dispensers used only to refuel trucks), all of the unit
			 prices at which the product is offered for sale; and
(b) in the case of a computing type or
			 money-operated type, the unit price at which the dispenser is set to compute.
(Added 1993)
UR.3.2.
Vapor-Return Line.
-
			 During any metered delivery of liquefied petroleum gas and other liquids from a
			 supplier's tank to a receiving container, there shall be no vapor-return line
			 from the receiving container to the supplier's tank:
(a) in the case of any receiving container to
			 which normal deliveries can be made without the use of such vapor-return line;
			 or
(b) in the case of any new
			 receiving container when the ambient temperature is below 90 °F. (Added
			 1993)
UR.3.3.
Ticket Printer; Customer Ticket.
- Vehicle-mounted metering systems
			 shall be equipped with a ticket printer which shall be used for all sales where
			 product is delivered through the meter. A copy of the ticket issued by the
			 device shall be left with the customer at the time of delivery or as otherwise
			 specified by the customer.
(Added 1994)
UR.3.4.
Printed Ticket.
- The
			 total price, the total quantity of the delivery, and the price per unit shall
			 be printed on any ticket issued by a device of the computing type and
			 containing any one of these values.
(Added 1993)
UR.3.5.
Ticket in Printing Device.
- A ticket shall not be inserted into a device equipped with a ticket
			 printer until immediately before a delivery is begun, and in no case shall a
			 ticket be in the device when the vehicle is in motion while on a public street,
			 highway, or thoroughfare.
(Added 1993)
UR.3.6.
Steps After Dispensing.
- After delivery to a customer from a retail motor-fuel device:
(a) the starting lever shall be returned to
			 its shutoff position and the zero-set-back interlock engaged; and
(b) the discharge nozzle shall be returned to
			 its designed hanging position unless the primary indicating elements, and
			 recording elements, if the device is equipped and activated to record, have
			 been returned to a definite zero indication.
(Added 1993)
UR.3.7.
Return of Indicating and
			 Recording Elements to Zero.
- The primary indicating elements (visual),
			 and the primary recording elements when these are returnable to zero, shall be
			 returned to zero immediately before each delivery. Exceptions to this
			 requirement are totalizers on key-lock-operated or other self-operated
			 dispensers and the primary recording element if the device is equipped to
			 record.
(Added 1995) (Amended 1997)
UR.3.8.
Return of Product to Storage,
			 Retail Compressed Natural Gas Dispensers.
- Provisions at the site shall
			 be made for returning product to storage or disposing of the product in a safe
			 and timely manner during or following testing operations. Such provisions may
			 include return lines, or cylinders adequate in size and number to permit this
			 procedure.
(Added 1998)
Section 3.38.
Carbon Dioxide
			 Liquid-Measuring Devices
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code applies to liquid-measuring devices used for the measurement
			 of liquid carbon dioxide.
A.2.
Exceptions.
- This code does not apply to devices used solely for
			 dispensing a product in connection with operations in which the amount
			 dispensed does not affect customer charges.
A.3.
Additional Code
			 Requirements
. - In addition to the requirements of this code, Carbon
			 Dioxide Liquid-Measuring Devices shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10.
			 General Code.
A.4.
Type
			 Evaluation.
- The National Type Evaluation Program will accept for type
			 evaluation only those devices that comply with all requirements of this code.
(Added 1998)
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Design of Indicating and Recording
			 Elements and of Recorded Representations.
S.1.1.
Primary Elements.
S.1.1.1.
General.
- A device
			 shall be equipped with a primary indicating element and may also be equipped
			 with a primary recording element.
S.1.1.2.
Units.
- A device
			 shall indicate and record, if equipped to record, its deliveries in terms of
			 pounds or kilograms or decimal subdivisions or multiples thereof.
S.1.1.3.
Value of Smallest Unit.
- The value of the smallest unit of indicated delivery, and recorded
			 delivery, if the device is equipped to record, shall not exceed the equivalent
			 of:
(a) for small delivery devices:
(1) 1 kilogram; or
(2) 1 pound
(b) for large delivery devices:
(1) 10 kilograms; or
(2) 10 pounds
S.1.1.4.
Advancement of Indicating and
			 Recording Elements.
- Primary indicating and recording elements shall be
			 susceptible to advancement only by the normal operation of the device. However,
			 a device may be cleared by advancing its elements to zero, but only if:
(a) the advancing movement, once started,
			 cannot be stopped until zero is reached; or
(b) in the case of indicating elements only,
			 such elements are automatically obscured until the elements reach the correct
			 zero position.
S.1.1.5.
Return to Zero.
- Primary indicating and recording elements shall
			 be readily returnable to a definite zero indication. Means shall be provided to
			 prevent the return of primary indicating elements and of primary recording
			 elements beyond their correct zero position.
S.1.2.
Graduations.
S.1.2.1.
Length.
- Graduations
			 shall be so varied in length that they may be conveniently read.
S.1.2.2.
Width.
- In any series
			 of graduations, the width of a graduation shall in no case be greater than the
			 width of the minimum clear interval between graduations. The width of main
			 graduations shall be not more than 50 % greater than the width of subordinate
			 graduations. Graduations shall in no case be less than 0.2 mm (0.008 in) in
			 width.
S.1.2.3.
Clear
			 Interval Between Graduations.
- The clear interval shall be not less
			 than 1.0 mm (0.04 in). If the graduations are not parallel, the measurement
			 shall be made:
(a) along the line of relative
			 movement between the graduations at the end of the indicator; or
(b) if the indicator is continuous, at the
			 point of widest separation of the graduations. (Also see S.1.3.6. Travel of
			 Indicator.)
S.1.3.
Indicators.
S.1.3.1.
Symmetry.
- The index
			 of an indicator shall be of the same shape as the graduations at least
			 throughout that portion of its length associated with the
			 graduations.
S.1.3.2.
Length.
- The index of an indicator shall reach to the finest
			 graduations with which it is used, unless the indicator and the graduations are
			 in the same plane, in which case the distance between the end of the indicator
			 and the ends of the graduations, measured along the line of the graduations,
			 shall be not more than 1.0 mm (0.04 in).
S.1.3.3.
Width.
- The width of
			 the index of the indicator in relation to the series of graduations with which
			 it is used shall be not greater than:
(a)
the width of the narrowest graduation;*
and
[*Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2002]
(Amended 2001)
(b) the width of the minimum clear interval
			 between graduations.
When the index of an indicator extends along the entire length
				of a graduation, that portion of the index of the indicator that may be brought
				into coincidence with the graduation shall be of the same width throughout the
				length of the index that coincides with the graduation.
S.1.3.4.
Clearance.
- The clearance between the index of an indicator and the graduations
			 shall in no case be more than 1.5 mm (0.06 in).
S.1.3.5.
Parallax.
- Parallax
			 effects shall be reduced to the practicable minimum.
S.1.3.6.
Travel of Indicator.
-
			 If the most sensitive element of the primary indicating element utilizes an
			 indicator and graduations, the relative movement of these parts corresponding
			 to the smallest indicated value shall be no less than 5 mm (0.20 in).
S.1.4.
Computing-Type
			 Devices.
S.1.4.1.
Printed
			 Ticket.
- Any printed ticket issued by a device of the computing type on
			 which there is printed the total computed price shall have printed clearly
			 thereon also the total quantity of the delivery and the price per
			 unit.
S.1.4.2.
Money-Value
			 Computations.
- Money-value computations shall be of the full-computing
			 type in which the money-value at a single unit price, or at each of a series of
			 unit prices, shall be computed for every delivery within either the range of
			 measurement of the device or the range of the computing elements, whichever is
			 less.
The total price shall be computed on the basis of the quantity
				indicated when the value of the smallest division indicated is equal to or less
				than the value specified in S.1.1.3. Value of Smallest Unit.
S.1.4.3.
Money-Values, Mathematical
			 Agreement.
- Any digital money-value indication and any recorded
			 money-value on a computing-type device shall be in mathematical agreement with
			 its associated quantity indication or representation to within 1 cent of
			 money-value.
S.2.
Design of Measuring
			 Elements.
S.2.1.
Vapor
			 Elimination.
- A measuring system shall be equipped with an effective
			 vapor eliminator or other effective means to prevent the measurement of vapor
			 that will cause errors in excess of the applicable tolerances.
S.2.2.
Reverse Flow Measurement.
- Effective means, automatic in operation, shall be installed to prevent
			 reverse flow measurement.
S.2.3.
Maintenance of Liquid State.
- A device shall be so designed that
			 the product being measured will remain in a liquid state during passage through
			 the device.
S.2.4.
Automatic
			 Temperature or Density Compensation.
- A volumetric device shall be
			 equipped with automatic means for adjusting the indication and recorded
			 representation of the measured quantity of the product to indicate or record
			 the quantity of the product measured in terms of pounds.
S.2.5.
Provision for Sealing.
-
			 Adequate provision shall be made for an approved means of security (e.g., data
			 change audit trail) or for physically applying a security seal in such a manner
			 that requires the security seal to be broken before an adjustment or
			 interchange may be made of:
(a) any measuring
			 or indicating element;
(b) any
			 adjustable element for controlling delivery rate when such rate tends to affect
			 the accuracy of deliveries;
(c) any
			 automatic temperature or density compensating system; and
(d) any metrological parameter that will
			 affect the metrological integrity of the device or system.
When applicable any adjusting mechanism shall be readily
				accessible for purposes of affixing a security seal.
[Audit trails shall use the format set forth in Table
				S.2.5. Provision for Sealing]* [*Nonretroactive as of January 1,
				1995]
(Amended 2006)
Table S.2.5. Categories of Device and
						  Methods of Sealing
Categories of
						  Device
Methods of Sealing
Category 1:
No
						  remote configuration capability.
Seal by physical seal or two event counters:
						  one for calibration parameters and one for configuration
						  parameters.
Category 2:
Remote configuration capability, but access is
						  controlled by physical hardware.
The device shall clearly indicate that it is in
						  the remote configuration mode and record such message if capable of printing in
						  this mode or shall not operate while in this mode.
The hardware enabling access for remote
						  communication must be on-site. The hardware must be sealed using a physical
						  seal or an event counter for calibration parameters and an event counter for
						  configuration parameters. The event counters may be located either at the
						  individual measuring device or at the system controller; however, an adequate
						  number of counters must be provided to monitor the calibration and
						  configuration parameters of the individual devices at a location. If the
						  counters are located in the system controller rather than at the individual
						  device, means must be provided to generate a hard copy of the information
						  through an on-site device.
Category 3:
Remote configuration capability access may be unlimited
						  or controlled through a software switch (e.g., password)
.
The device shall clearly indicate that it is in
						  the remote configuration mode and record such message if capable of printing in
						  this mode or shall not operate while in this mode.
An event logger is required in the device; it
						  must include an event counter (000 to 999), the parameter ID, the date and time
						  of the change, and the new value of the parameter. A printed copy of the
						  information must be available through the device or through another on-site
						  device. The event logger shall have a capacity to retain records equal to 10
						  times the number of sealable parameters in the device, but not more than 1000
						  records are required. (
Note:
Does not require 1000 changes to be
						  stored for each parameter.)
[
Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1995
] (Table
				Added 2006)
S.3.
Design of Discharge Lines and
			 Discharge Line Valves.
S.3.1.
Diversion of Measured Liquid.
- No means shall be provided by which any
			 measured liquid can be diverted from the measuring chamber of the device or the
			 discharge line therefrom, except that a manually controlled outlet that may be
			 opened for purging or draining the measuring system shall be permitted.
			 Effective means shall be provided to prevent the passage of liquid through any
			 such outlet during normal operation of the device and to indicate clearly and
			 unmistakably when the valve controls are so set as to permit passage of liquid
			 through such outlet.
S.3.2.
Discharge Hose.
- The discharge hose of a measuring system shall be of a
			 wet hose type with a shutoff valve at its outlet end.
S.4.
Marking Requirements.
S.4.1.
Limitation of Use.
- If a
			 measuring system is intended to measure accurately only liquids having
			 particular properties, or to measure accurately only under specific
			 installation or operating conditions, or to measure accurately only when used
			 in conjunction with specific accessory equipment, these limitations shall be
			 clearly and permanently marked on the device.
S.4.2.
Discharge Rates.
- A
			 meter shall be marked to show its designed maximum and minimum discharge rates.
			 The marked minimum discharge rate shall not exceed 20 % of the marked maximum
			 discharge rate.
Note
: Also see example in Section 3.30.
				Liquid-Measuring Devices Code, paragraph S.4.4.1. Discharge Rates. (Note Added
				2003)
N.
Notes
N.1.
Test Liquid.
- The test
			 liquid shall be carbon dioxide in a compressed liquid state.
N.2.
Vaporization and Volume Change.
- Care shall be exercised to reduce vaporization and volume changes to a
			 minimum. When testing by weight, the weigh tank and transfer systems shall be
			 pre-cooled to liquid temperature prior to the start of the test to avoid the
			 venting of vapor from the vessel being weighed.
N.3.
Test Drafts.
N.3.1.
Gravimetric Test.
-
			 Weight test drafts shall be equal to at least the amount delivered by the
			 device in 2 minutes at its maximum discharge rate.
N.3.2.
Transfer Standard Test.
-
			 When comparing a meter with a calibrated transfer standard, the test draft
			 shall be equal to at least the amount delivered by the device in two minutes at
			 its maximum discharge rate.
N.3.3.
Volumetric Prover Test Drafts.
- Test drafts shall be equal to at
			 least the amount delivered in 1 minute at its normal discharge rate.
N.4.
Testing
			 Procedures.
N.4.1.
Normal Tests.
- The "normal" test of a device shall be made at the maximum discharge
			 flow rate developed under the conditions of installation. Any additional tests
			 conducted at flow rates down to and including one-half of the sum of the
			 maximum discharge flow rate and the rated minimum discharge flow rate shall be
			 considered normal tests.
N.4.1.1.
Repeatability Tests.
- Tests for repeatability should include a minimum
			 of three consecutive test drafts of approximately the same size and be
			 conducted under controlled conditions where variations in factors such as
			 temperature, pressure, and flow rate are reduced to the extent that they will
			 not affect the results obtained.
(Added 2002)
N.4.2.
Special Tests.
- Any test
			 except as set forth in N.4.1. Normal Tests shall be considered a special test.
			 Tests shall be conducted, if possible, to evaluate any special elements or
			 accessories attached to or associated with the device. A device shall be tested
			 at a minimum discharge rate of:
(a) not less
			 than the marked minimum discharge rate or 20 % of the maximum rated discharge
			 rate of the device, whichever is less; or
(b) the lowest discharge rate practicable
			 under the conditions of installation.
"Special" tests may be conducted to develop any characteristics
				of the device anticipated under the conditions of installation.
N.4.3.
Density.
- Temperature and pressure of the metered test liquid shall be measured
			 during the test for the determination of density or volume correction when
			 applicable. The appropriate correction values shall apply as specified in Table
			 N.4.4.
N.4.4.
Automatic
			 Temperature or Density Compensation.
- If a device is equipped with an
			 automatic temperature or density compensator, the compensator shall be tested
			 by comparing the quantity indicated or recorded by the device (with the
			 compensator connected and operating) with the actual delivered quantity. The
			 appropriate correction values shall apply as specified in Table N.4.4.
Table N.4.4. Automatic Temperature or Density
						  Compensation
Temp °F
Pressure
Liquid Density
Vapor Density
Vapor Displacement %
PSIA
PSIG
lb/gal
(lb-oz)/gal
lb/cu ft
lb/gal
- 30.00
177.89
163.19
9.127
9 - 2.0
1.989
0.266
2.9
- 29.75
178.75
164.05
9.122
9 - 2.0
1.999
0.267
2.9
- 29.50
179.62
164.92
9.117
9 - 1.9
2.008
0.268
2.9
- 29.25
180.49
165.79
9.113
9 - 1.8
2.018
0.270
3.0
- 29.00
181.36
166.67
9.108
9 - 1.7
2.028
0.271
3.0
- 28.75
182.24
167.54
9.103
9 - 1.7
2.038
0.272
3.0
- 28.50
183.12
168.42
9.098
9 - 1.6
2.048
0.274
3.0
- 28.25
184.00
169.31
9.094
9 - 1.5
2.058
0.275
3.0
- 28.00
184.89
170.19
9.089
9 - 1.4
2.067
0.276
3.0
- 27.75
185.78
171.08
9.084
9 - 1.3
2.077
0.278
3.1
- 27.50
186.67
171.98
9.080
9 - 1.3
2.087
0.279
3.1
- 27.25
187.57
172.87
9.075
9 - 1.2
2.098
0.280
3.1
- 27.00
188.47
173.77
9.070
9 - 1.1
2.108
0.282
3.1
- 26.75
189.37
174.67
9.065
9 - 1.0
2.118
0.283
3.1
- 26.50
190.28
175.58
9.061
9 - 1.0
2.128
0.284
3.1
- 26.25
191.18
176.49
9.056
9 - 0.9
2.138
0.286
3.2
- 26.00
192.10
177.40
9.051
9 - 0.8
2.148
0.287
3.2
- 25.75
193.01
178.32
9.046
9 - 0.7
2.159
0.289
3.2
- 25.50
193.93
179.23
9.041
9 - 0.7
2.169
0.290
3.2
- 25.25
194.85
180.16
9.037
9 - 0.6
2.179
0.291
3.2
- 25.00
195.78
181.08
9.032
9 - 0.5
2.190
0.293
3.2
- 24.75
196.70
182.01
9.027
9 - 0.4
2.200
0.294
3.3
- 24.50
197.64
182.94
9.022
9 - 0.4
2.211
0.296
3.3
- 24.25
198.57
183.87
9.017
9 - 0.3
2.221
0.297
3.3
- 24.00
199.51
184.81
9.013
9 - 0.2
2.232
0.298
3.3
- 23.75
200.45
185.75
9.008
9 - 0.1
2.243
0.300
3.3
- 23.50
201.39
186.70
9.003
9 - 0.0
2.253
0.301
3.3
- 23.25
202.34
187.64
8.998
9 - 0.0
2.264
0.303
3.4
- 23.00
203.29
188.60
8.993
8 - 15.9
2.275
0.304
3.4
- 22.75
204.25
189.55
8.989
8 - 15.8
2.286
0.306
3.4
- 22.50
205.20
190.51
8.984
8 - 15.7
2.296
0.307
3.4
- 22.25
206.16
191.47
8.979
8 - 15.7
2.307
0.308
3.4
- 22.00
207.13
192.43
8.974
8 - 15.6
2.318
0.310
3.5
- 21.75
208.09
193.40
8.969
8 - 15.5
2.329
0.311
3.5
- 21.50
209.06
194.37
8.964
8 - 15.4
2.340
0.313
3.5
- 21.25
210.04
195.34
8.959
8 - 15.4
2.351
0.314
3.5
- 21.00
211.02
196.32
8.955
8 - 15.3
2.362
0.316
3.5
- 20.75
212.00
197.30
8.950
8 - 15.2
2.374
0.317
3.5
- 20.50
212.98
198.28
8.945
8 - 15.1
2.385
0.319
3.6
- 20.25
213.97
199.27
8.940
8 - 15.0
2.396
0.320
3.6
- 20.00
214.96
200.26
8.935
8 - 15.0
2.407
0.322
3.6
- 19.75
215.95
201.26
8.930
8 - 14.9
2.419
0.323
3.6
- 19.50
216.95
202.25
8.925
8 - 14.8
2.430
0.325
3.6
- 19.25
217.95
203.25
8.920
8 - 14.7
2.441
0.326
3.7
- 19.00
218.95
204.26
8.915
8 - 14.6
2.453
0.328
3.7
- 18.75
219.96
205.27
8.911
8 - 14.6
2.464
0.329
3.7
- 18.50
220.97
206.28
8.906
8 - 14.5
2.476
0.331
3.7
- 18.25
221.99
207.29
8.901
8 - 14.4
2.488
0.333
3.7
- 18.00
223.01
208.31
8.896
8 - 14.3
2.499
0.334
3.8
- 17.75
224.03
209.33
8.891
8 - 14.3
2.511
0.336
3.8
- 17.50
225.05
210.36
8.886
8 - 14.2
2.523
0.337
3.8
- 17.25
226.08
211.38
8.881
8 - 14.1
2.534
0.339
3.8
- 17.00
227.11
212.42
8.876
8 - 14.0
2.546
0.340
3.8
- 16.75
228.15
213.45
8.871
8 - 13.9
2.558
0.342
3.9
- 16.50
229.18
214.49
8.866
8 - 13.9
2.570
0.344
3.9
- 16.25
230.23
215.53
8.861
8 - 13.8
2.582
0.345
3.9
- 16.00
231.27
216.58
8.856
8 - 13.7
2.594
0.347
3.9
- 15.75
232.32
217.62
8.851
8 - 13.6
2.606
0.348
3.9
- 15.50
233.37
218.68
8.846
8 - 13.5
2.618
0.350
4.0
- 15.25
234.43
219.73
8.841
8 - 13.5
2.630
0.352
4.0
- 15.00
235.49
220.79
8.836
8 - 13.4
2.643
0.353
4.0
- 14.75
236.55
221.86
8.831
8 - 13.3
2.655
0.355
4.0
- 14.50
237.62
222.92
8.826
8 - 13.2
2.667
0.357
4.0
- 14.25
238.69
223.99
8.821
8 - 13.1
2.680
0.358
4.1
- 14.00
239.76
225.07
8.816
8 - 13.1
2.692
0.360
4.1
- 13.75
240.84
226.14
8.811
8 - 13.0
2.704
0.362
4.1
- 13.50
241.92
227.22
8.806
8 - 12.9
2.717
0.363
4.1
- 13.25
243.00
228.31
8.801
8 - 12.8
2.729
0.365
4.1
- 13.00
244.09
229.39
8.796
8 - 12.7
2.742
0.367
4.2
- 12.75
245.18
230.49
8.791
8 - 12.7
2.755
0.368
4.2
- 12.50
246.28
231.58
8.786
8 - 12.6
2.767
0.370
4.2
- 12.25
247.37
232.68
8.781
8 - 12.5
2.780
0.372
4.2
- 12.00
248.48
233.78
8.776
8 - 12.4
2.793
0.373
4.3
- 11.75
249.58
234.89
8.771
8 - 12.3
2.806
0.375
4.3
- 11.50
250.69
236.00
8.765
8 - 12.2
2.819
0.377
4.3
- 11.25
251.80
237.11
8.760
8 - 12.2
2.832
0.379
4.3
- 11.00
252.92
238.22
8.755
8 - 12.1
2.845
0.380
4.3
- 10.75
254.04
239.34
8.750
8 - 12.0
2.858
0.382
4.4
- 10.50
255.16
240.47
8.745
8 - 11.9
2.871
0.384
4.4
- 10.25
256.29
241.60
8.740
8 - 11.8
2.884
0.386
4.4
- 10.00
257.42
242.73
8.735
8 - 11.8
2.897
0.387
4.4
- 9.75
258.56
243.86
8.730
8 - 11.7
2.911
0.389
4.5
- 9.50
259.70
245.00
8.725
8 - 11.6
2.924
0.391
4.5
- 9.25
260.84
246.14
8.719
8 - 11.5
2.937
0.393
4.5
- 9.00
261.98
247.29
8.714
8 - 11.4
2.951
0.394
4.5
- 8.75
263.13
248.44
8.709
8 - 11.3
2.964
0.396
4.5
- 8.50
264.29
249.59
8.704
8 - 11.3
2.978
0.398
4.6
- 8.25
265.44
250.75
8.699
8 - 11.2
2.991
0.400
4.6
- 8.00
266.60
251.91
8.694
8 - 11.1
3.005
0.402
4.6
- 7.75
267.77
253.07
8.688
8 - 11.0
3.019
0.404
4.6
- 7.50
268.93
254.24
8.683
8 - 10.9
3.032
0.405
4.7
- 7.25
270.11
255.41
8.678
8 - 10.8
3.046
0.407
4.7
- 7.00
271.28
256.59
8.673
8 - 10.8
3.060
0.409
4.7
- 6.75
272.46
257.76
8.668
8 - 10.7
3.074
0.411
4.7
- 6.50
273.64
258.95
8.662
8 - 10.6
3.088
0.413
4.8
- 6.25
274.83
260.13
8.657
8 - 10.5
3.102
0.415
4.8
- 6.00
276.02
261.32
8.652
8 - 10.4
3.116
0.417
4.8
- 5.75
277.21
262.52
8.647
8 - 10.3
3.130
0.418
4.8
- 5.50
278.41
263.72
8.641
8 - 10.3
3.144
0.420
4.9
- 5.25
279.61
264.92
8.636
8 - 10.2
3.159
0.422
4.9
- 5.00
280.82
266.12
8.631
8 - 10.1
3.173
0.424
4.9
- 4.75
282.03
267.33
8.626
8 - 10.0
3.187
0.426
4.9
- 4.50
283.24
268.55
8.620
8 - 9.9
3.202
0.428
5.0
- 4.25
284.46
269.76
8.615
8 - 9.8
3.216
0.430
5.0
- 4.00
285.68
270.98
8.610
8 - 9.8
3.231
0.432
5.0
- 3.75
286.90
272.21
8.604
8 - 9.7
3.245
0.434
5.0
- 3.50
288.13
273.44
8.599
8 - 9.6
3.260
0.436
5.1
- 3.25
289.37
274.67
8.594
8 - 9.5
3.275
0.438
5.1
- 3.00
290.60
275.91
8.589
8 - 9.4
3.289
0.440
5.1
- 2.75
291.84
277.15
8.583
8 - 9.3
3.304
0.442
5.1
- 2.50
293.09
278.39
8.578
8 - 9.2
3.319
0.444
5.2
- 2.25
294.33
279.64
8.573
8 - 9.2
3.334
0.446
5.2
- 2.00
295.58
280.89
8.567
8 - 9.1
3.349
0.448
5.2
- 1.75
296.84
282.14
8.562
8 - 9.0
3.364
0.450
5.3
- 1.50
298.10
283.40
8.556
8 - 8.9
3.379
0.452
5.3
- 1.25
299.36
284.67
8.551
8 - 8.8
3.395
0.454
5.3
- 1.00
300.63
285.93
8.546
8 - 8.7
3.410
0.456
5.3
- 0.75
301.90
287.21
8.540
8 - 8.6
3.425
0.458
5.4
- 0.50
303.18
288.48
8.535
8 - 8.6
3.440
0.460
5.4
- 0.25
304.46
289.76
8.530
8 - 8.5
3.456
0.462
5.4
0.00
305.74
291.74
8.524
8 - 8.4
3.471
0.464
5.4
0.25
307.03
292.33
8.519
8 - 8.3
3.487
0.466
5.5
0.50
308.32
293.62
8.513
8 - 8.2
3.503
0.468
5.5
0.75
309.61
294.92
8.508
8 - 8.1
3.518
0.470
5.5
1.00
310.91
296.21
8.502
8 - 8.0
3.534
0.472
5.6
1.25
312.21
297.52
8.497
8 - 8.0
3.550
0.475
5.6
1.50
313.52
298.82
8.491
8 - 7.9
3.566
0.477
5.6
1.75
314.83
300.13
8.486
8 - 7.8
3.582
0.479
5.6
2.00
316.15
301.45
8.480
8 - 7.7
3.598
0.481
5.7
2.25
317.46
302.77
8.475
8 - 7.6
3.614
0.483
5.7
2.50
318.79
304.09
8.469
8 - 7.5
3.630
0.485
5.7
2.75
320.11
305.42
8.464
8 - 7.4
3.646
0.487
5.8
3.00
321.45
306.75
8.458
8 - 7.3
3.662
0.490
5.8
3.25
322.78
308.08
8.453
8 - 7.2
3.679
0.492
5.8
3.50
324.12
309.42
8.447
8 - 7.2
3.695
0.494
5.8
3.75
325.46
310.77
8.442
8 - 7.1
3.712
0.496
5.9
4.00
326.81
312.11
8.436
8 - 7.0
3.728
0.498
5.9
4.25
328.16
313.46
8.431
8 - 6.9
3.745
0.501
5.9
4.50
329.52
314.82
8.425
8 - 6.8
3.761
0.503
6.0
4.75
330.88
316.18
8.420
8 - 6.7
3.778
0.505
6.0
5.00
332.24
317.54
8.414
8 - 6.6
3.795
0.507
6.0
5.25
333.61
318.91
8.408
8 - 6.5
3.812
0.510
6.1
5.50
334.98
320.28
8.403
8 - 6.4
3.829
0.512
6.1
5.75
336.35
321.66
8.397
8 - 6.4
3.846
0.514
6.1
6.00
337.73
323.04
8.392
8 - 6.3
3.863
0.516
6.2
6.25
339.12
324.42
8.386
8 - 6.2
3.880
0.519
6.2
6.50
340.51
325.81
8.380
8 - 6.1
3.897
0.521
6.2
6.75
341.90
327.20
8.375
8 - 6.0
3.915
0.523
6.3
7.00
343.30
328.60
8.369
8 - 5.9
3.932
0.526
6.3
7.25
344.70
330.00
8.363
8 - 5.8
3.949
0.528
6.3
7.50
346.10
331.41
8.358
8 - 5.7
3.967
0.530
6.3
7.75
347.51
332.82
8.352
8 - 5.6
3.984
0.533
6.4
8.00
348.92
334.23
8.346
8 - 5.5
4.002
0.535
6.4
8.25
350.34
335.65
8.341
8 - 5.4
4.020
0.537
6.4
8.50
351.76
337.07
8.335
8 - 5.4
4.038
0.540
6.5
8.75
353.19
338.49
8.335
8 - 5.4
4.038
0.540
6.5
9.00
354.62
339.92
8.323
8 - 5.2
4.073
0.545
6.5
9.25
356.06
341.36
8.318
8 - 5.1
4.091
0.547
6.6
9.50
357.49
342.80
8.312
8 - 5.0
4.110
0.549
6.6
9.75
358.94
344.24
8.306
8 - 4.9
4.128
0.552
6.6
10.00
360.38
345.69
8.300
8 - 4.8
4.146
0.554
6.7
10.25
361.84
347.14
8.295
8 - 4.7
4.164
0.557
6.7
10.50
363.29
348.60
8.289
8 - 4.6
4.183
0.559
6.7
10.75
364.75
350.06
8.283
8 - 4.5
4.201
0.562
6.8
11.00
366.22
351.52
8.277
8 - 4.4
4.220
0.564
6.8
11.25
367.68
352.99
8.271
8 - 4.3
4.238
0.567
6.8
11.50
369.16
354.46
8.266
8 - 4.2
4.257
0.569
6.9
11.75
370.64
355.94
8.260
8 - 4.2
4.276
0.572
6.9
12.00
372.12
357.42
8.254
8 - 4.1
4.295
0.574
7.0
12.25
373.60
358.91
8.248
8 - 4.0
4.314
0.577
7.0
12.50
375.09
360.40
8.242
8 - 3.9
4.333
0.579
7.0
12.75
376.59
361.89
8.236
8 - 3.8
4.352
0.582
7.1
13.00
378.09
363.39
8.230
8 - 3.7
4.371
0.584
7.1
13.25
379.59
364.89
8.224
8 - 3.6
4.390
0.587
7.1
13.50
381.10
366.40
8.219
8 - 3.5
4.410
0.589
7.2
13.75
382.61
367.91
8.213
8 - 3.4
4.429
0.592
7.2
14.00
384.13
369.43
8.207
8 - 3.3
4.449
0.595
7.2
14.25
385.65
370.95
8.201
8 - 3.2
4.468
0.597
7.3
14.50
387.17
372.48
8.195
8 - 3.1
4.488
0.600
7.3
14.75
388.70
374.01
8.189
8 - 3.0
4.508
0.603
7.4
15.00
390.24
375.54
8.183
8 - 2.9
4.527
0.605
7.4
15.25
391.78
377.08
8.177
8 - 2.8
4.547
0.608
7.4
15.50
393.32
378.62
8.171
8 - 2.7
4.567
0.611
7.5
15.75
394.87
380.17
8.165
8 - 2.6
4.587
0.613
7.5
16.00
396.42
381.72
8.159
8 - 2.5
4.608
0.616
7.5
16.25
397.98
383.28
8.153
8 - 2.4
4.628
0.619
7.6
16.50
399.54
384.84
8.147
8 - 2.3
4.648
0.621
7.6
16.75
401.10
386.41
8.141
8 - 2.2
4.669
0.624
7.7
17.00
402.67
387.98
8.13
4
8 - 2.2
4.689
0.627
7.7
17.25
404.25
389.55
8.128
8 - 2.1
4.710
0.630
7.7
17.50
405.82
391.13
8.122
8 - 2.0
4.731
0.632
7.8
17.75
407.41
392.71
8.116
8 - 1.9
4.751
0.635
7.8
18.00
409.00
394.30
8.110
8 - 1.8
4.772
0.638
7.9
18.25
410.59
395.89
8.104
8 - 1.7
4.793
0.641
7.9
18.50
412.19
397.49
8.098
8 - 1.6
4.814
0.644
7.9
18.75
413.79
399.09
8.092
8 - 1.5
4.835
0.646
8.0
19.00
415.39
400.70
8.085
8 - 1.4
4.857
0.649
8.0
19.25
417.00
402.31
8.079
8 - 1.3
4.878
0.652
8.1
19.50
418.62
403.92
8.073
8 - 1.2
4.900
0.655
8.1
19.75
420.24
405.54
8.067
8 - 1.1
4.921
0.658
8.2
20.00
421.86
407.17
8.061
8 - 1.0
4.943
0.661
8.2
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Application.
T.1.1.
To Underregistration and to
			 Overregistration.
- The tolerances hereinafter prescribed shall be
			 applied to errors of underregistration and errors of
			 overregistration.
T.2.
Tolerance Values.
- The maintenance and acceptance tolerances for
			 normal and special tests shall be as shown in Table T.2. Accuracy Classes and
			 Tolerances for Carbon Dioxide Liquid-Measuring Devices.
Table T.2. Accuracy Classes and Tolerances for
						  Carbon Dioxide Liquid-Measuring Devices
Accuracy Class
Application
Acceptance Tolerance
Maintenance Tolerance
Special Test Tolerance
2.5
Liquid carbon dioxide
1.5 %
2.5 %
2.5 %
(Table Added 2003) (Amended 2003)
T.2.1.
Repeatability.
- When
			 multiple tests are conducted at approximately the same flow rate and draft
			 size, the range of the test results for the flow rate shall not exceed 40 % of
			 the absolute value of the maintenance tolerance and the results of each test
			 shall be within the applicable tolerance. (Also see N.4.1.1
.
Repeatability Tests.)
(Added 2002)
T.3.
On Tests Using Transfer
			 Standards.
- To the basic tolerance values that would otherwise be
			 applied, there shall be added an amount equal to two times the standard
			 deviation of the applicable transfer standard when compared to a basic
			 reference standard.
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Installation Requirements.
UR.1.1.
Discharge Rate.
- A device shall be so installed that the actual
			 maximum discharge rate will not exceed the rated maximum discharge rate. If
			 necessary, means for flow regulation shall be incorporated in the
			 installation.
UR.1.2.
Length
			 of Discharge Hose.
- The discharge hose shall be of such a length and
			 design as to keep vaporization of the liquid to a minimum.
UR.1.3.
Maintenance of Liquid State.
- A device shall be so installed and operated that the product being
			 measured shall remain in the liquid state during passage through the
			 meter.
UR.2.
Use
			 Requirements.
UR.2.1.
Return of
			 Indicating and Recording Elements to Zero.
- The primary indicating
			 elements (visual) and the primary recording elements shall be returned to zero
			 immediately before each delivery.
UR.2.2.
Condition of Discharge System.
- The discharge hose, up to the valve at the end of the discharge hose,
			 shall be completely filled and pre-cooled to liquid temperatures before a
			 "zero" condition is established and prior to the start of a commercial
			 delivery. Means shall be provided to fill the discharge hose with liquid prior
			 to the start of a delivery.
UR.2.3.
Vapor Equalization Line.
- A vapor equalization line shall not be
			 used during a metered delivery unless the quantity of vapor displaced from the
			 buyer's tank to the seller's tank is deducted from the metered quantity. The
			 appropriate correction values shall apply as specified in Table
			 N.4.4.
UR.2.4.
Temperature
			 or Density Compensation.
UR.2.4.
1.
Use of Automatic
			 Temperature or Density Compensators.
- Devices equipped with an
			 automatic temperature or density compensator shall have the compensator
			 connected, operable, and in use at all times. Such automatic temperature or
			 density compensator may not be removed.
UR.2.4.
2.
Tickets or
			 Invoices.
- Any written invoice or printed ticket based on a reading of
			 a device that is equipped with an automatic temperature or density compensator
			 shall have shown thereon that the quantity delivered has been temperature or
			 density compensated.
UR.2.5.
Ticket in Printing Device.
- A ticket shall not be inserted into a
			 device equipped with a ticket printer until immediately before a delivery is
			 begun, and in no case shall a ticket be in the device when the vehicle is in
			 motion while on a public street, highway, or thoroughfare.
UR.2.6.
Sale by Weight.
- All
			 quantity determinations shall be made by means of an approved and sealed
			 weighing or measuring device. All sales shall be stated in kilograms or
			 pounds.
Section
			 3.39.
Hydrogen Gas-Measuring Devices - Tentative Code
This tentative code has a trial or experimental status and is
				not intended to be enforced. The requirements are designed for study prior to
				the development and adoption of a final code. Requirements that apply to
				wholesale applications are under study and development by the U.S. National
				Work Group for the Development of Commercial Hydrogen Measurement Standards.
				Officials wanting to conduct an official examination of a device or system are
				advised to see paragraph G-A.3. Special and Unclassified Equipment.
(Tentative Code Added 2010)
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code
			 applies to devices that are used for the measurement of hydrogen gas in the
			 vapor state used as a vehicle fuel.
A.2.
Exceptions.
- This code
			 does not apply to:
(a) Devices used solely for
			 dispensing a product in connection with operations in which the amount
			 dispensed does not affect customer charges.
(b) The wholesale delivery of hydrogen
			 gas.
(c) Devices used for
			 dispensing a hydrogen gas with a hydrogen fuel index lower than 99.97 % and
			 concentrations of specified impurities that exceed level limits.
(d) Systems that measure pressure, volume,
			 and temperature with a calculating device to determine the mass of gas
			 accumulated in or discharged from a tank of known volume.
A.3.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code, Hydrogen Gas-Measuring
			 Devices shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General Code.
A.4.
Type Evaluation.
- The
			 National Type Evaluation Program (NTEP) will accept for type evaluation only
			 those devices that comply with all requirements of this code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Indicating
			 and Recording Elements.
S.1.1.
Indicating Elements
. - A measuring assembly shall include an indicating
			 element that continuously displays measurement results relative to quantity and
			 total price. Indications shall be clear, definite, accurate, and easily read
			 under normal conditions of operation of the device.
S.1.2.
Vehicle Fuel Dispensers
.
			 - A hydrogen gas dispenser used to fuel vehicles shall be of the computing type
			 and shall indicate the mass, the unit price, and the total price of each
			 delivery.
S.1.3.
Units.
S.1.3.1.
Units of
			 Measurement.
- Deliveries shall be indicated and recorded in kilograms
			 and decimal subdivisions thereof.
S.1.3.2.
Numerical Value of
			 Quantity-Value Divisions.
- The value of an interval (i.e., increment or
			 scale division) shall be equal to:
(a) 1, 2,
			 or 5; or
(b) a decimal multiple or
			 submultiple of 1, 2, or 5.
Examples: quantity-value divisions may be 10, 20, 50, 100; or
				0.01, 0.02, 0.05; or 0.1, 0.2, or 0.5 etc.
S.1.3.3.
Maximum Value of
			 Quantity-Value Divisions.
- The maximum value of the quantity-value
			 division shall not be greater than 0.5% of the minimum measured
			 quantity.
S.1.3.4.
Values
			 Defined.
- Indicated values shall be adequately defined by a sufficient
			 number of figures, words, symbols, or combinations thereof. A display of "zero"
			 shall be a zero digit for all displayed digits to the right of the decimal mark
			 and at least one to the left.
S.1.4.
Value of Smallest Unit
. -
			 The value of the smallest unit of indicated delivery, and recorded delivery if
			 the device is equipped to record, shall not exceed the equivalent of:
(a) 0.001 kg on devices with a marked maximum
			 flow rated of 30 kg/min or less; or
(b) 0.01 kg on devices with a marked maximum
			 flow rate of more than 30 kg/min.
S.2.
Operating Requirements.
S.2.1.
Return to Zero.
(a) The primary indicating and the primary
			 recording elements, if the device is equipped to record, shall be provided with
			 a means for readily returning the indication to zero either automatically or
			 manually.
(b) It shall not be
			 possible to return primary indicating elements, or primary recording elements,
			 beyond the correct zero position.
S.2.2.
Indicator Reset Mechanism.
- The reset mechanism for the indicating element shall not be operable
			 during a delivery. Once the zeroing operation has begun, it shall not be
			 possible to indicate a value other than the latest measurement, or "zeros" when
			 the zeroing operation has been completed.
S.2.3.
Provision for Power
			 Loss.
S.2.3.1.
Transaction
			 Information.
- In the event of a power loss, the information needed to
			 complete any transaction in progress at the time of the power loss (such as the
			 quantity and unit price, or sales price) shall be determinable for at least 15
			 minutes at the dispenser or at the console if the console is accessible to the
			 customer.
S.2.3.2.
User
			 Information.
- The device memory shall retain information on the
			 quantity of fuel dispensed and the sales price totals during power
			 loss.
S.2.4.
Display of Unit Price and Product Identity.
S.2.4.1.
Unit Price
. - A
			 computing or money-operated device shall be able to display on each face the
			 unit price at which the device is set to compute or to dispense.
S.2.4.2.
Product Identity.
- A
			 device shall be able to conspicuously display on each side the identity of the
			 product being dispensed.
S.2.4.3.
Selection of Unit Price.
- When a product is offered for sale at
			 more than on unit price through a computing device, the selection of the unit
			 price shall be made prior to delivery using controls on the device or other
			 customer-activated controls. A system shall not permit a change to the unit
			 price during delivery of a product.
S.2.4.4.
Agreement Between
			 Indications.
- All quantity, unit price, and total price indications
			 within a measuring system shall agree for each transaction.
S.2.5.
Money-Value
			 Computations.
- A computing device shall compute the total sales price
			 at any single-purchase unit price for which the product being measured is
			 offered for sale at any delivery possible within either the measurement range
			 of the device or the range of the computing elements, whichever is less.
S.2.5.1.
Auxiliary Elements.
-
			 If a system is equipped with auxiliary indications, all indicated money value
			 and quantity divisions of the auxiliary element shall be identical with those
			 of the primary element.
S.2.5.2.
Display of Quantity and Total Price.
- When a delivery is
			 completed, the total price and quantity for that transaction shall be displayed
			 on the face of the dispenser for at least 5 minutes or until the next
			 transaction is initiated by using controls on the device or other
			 user-activated controls.
S.2.6.
Recorded Representations, Point
			 of Sale Systems.
- A printed receipt shall be available through a
			 built-in or separate recording element for transactions conducted with
			 point-of-sale systems or devices activated by debit cards, credit cards, and/or
			 cash. The printed receipt shall contain the following information for products
			 delivered by the dispenser:
(a) the total mass
			 of the delivery;
(b) the unit
			 price;
(c) the total computed
			 price; and
(d) the product identity
			 by name, symbol, abbreviation, or code number.
S.2.7.
Indication of Delivery.
- The device shall automatically show on its face the initial zero
			 condition and the quantity delivered (up to the nominal capacity).
S.3.
Design of Measuring
			 Elements and Measuring Systems.
S.3.1.
Maximum and Minimum Flow-Rates.
- The ratio of the maximum to
			 minimum flow-rates specified by the manufacturer for devices measuring gases
			 shall be 10:1 or greater.
S.3.2.
Adjustment Means.
- An assembly shall be provided with means to
			 change the ratio between the indicated quantity and the quantity of gas
			 measured by the assembly. A bypass on the measuring assembly shall not be used
			 for these means.
S.3.2.1.
Discontinuous
			 Adjusting Means.
- When the adjusting means changes ratio between the
			 indicated quantity and the quantity of measured gas in a discontinuous manner,
			 the consecutive values of the ratio shall not differ by more than 0.1
			 %.
S.3.3.
Provision for Sealing.
- Adequate provision shall be made for an
			 approved means of security (e.g., data change audit trail) or physically
			 applying security seals in such a manner that no adjustment may be made of:
(a) each individual measurement
			 element;
(b) any adjustable element
			 for controlling delivery rate when such rate tends to affect the accuracy of
			 deliveries;
(c) the zero adjustment
			 mechanism; and
(d) any metrological
			 parameter that detrimentally affects the metrological integrity of the device
			 or system.
When applicable, the adjusting mechanism shall be readily
				accessible for purposes of affixing a security seal. Audit trails shall use the
				format set forth in Table S.3.3. Categories of Device and Methods of
				Sealing.
Table S.3.3. Categories of Device and Methods of
						  Sealing
Categories of Device
Method of Sealing
Category 1:
No remote configuration
						  capability.
Seal by physical seal or two event counters: one for
						  calibration parameters and one for configuration parameters.
Category 2:
Remote configuration
						  capability, but access is controlled by physical hardware.
The device shall clearly indicate that it is in the
						  remote configuration mode and record such message if capable of printing in
						  this mode or shall not operate while in this mode.
The hardware enabling access for remote communication
						  must be on-site. The hardware must be sealed using a physical seal or an event
						  counter for calibration parameters and an event counter for configuration
						  parameters. The event counters may be located either at the individual
						  measuring device or at the system controller; however, an adequate number of
						  counters must be provided to monitor the calibration and configuration
						  parameters of the individual devices at a location. If the counters are located
						  in the system controller rather than at the individual device, means must be
						  provided to generate a hard copy of the information through an on-site
						  device.
Category 3:
Remote configuration
						  capability access may be unlimited or controlled through a software switch
						  (e.g., password).
The device shall clearly indicate that it is in the
						  remote configuration mode and record such message if capable of printing in
						  this mode or shall not operate while in this mode.
An event logger is required in the device; it must
						  include an event counter (000 to 999), the parameter ID, the date and time of
						  the change, and the new value of the parameter. A printed copy of the
						  information must be available through the device or through another on-site
						  device. The event logger shall have a capacity to retain records equal to 10
						  times the number of sealable parameters in the device, but not more than 1000
						  records are required. (
Note:
Does not require 1000 changes to be
						  stored for each parameter.)
S.3.4.
Automatic Density
			 Correction.
(a) An automatic means to
			 determine and correct for changes in product density shall be incorporated in
			 any hydrogen gas-measuring system where measurements are affected by changes in
			 the density of the product being measured.
(b) Volume-measuring devices with automatic
			 temperature compensation used to measure hydrogen gas as a vehicle fuel shall
			 be equipped with an automatic means to determine and correct for changes in
			 product density due to changes in the temperature, pressure, and composition of
			 the product.
S.3.5.
Pressurizing the Discharge Hose.
- The discharge hose for
			 hydrogen gas shall automatically pressurize to a pressure equal to or greater
			 than the receiving vessel prior to the device beginning to register the
			 delivery. The indications shall not advance as a result of the initial
			 pressurization or the purging/bleeding of the discharge hose.
S.3.6.
Zero-Set-Back Interlock, Retail
			 Vehicle Fuel Devices.
(a) A device
			 shall be constructed so that:
(1) when the
			 device is shut-off at the end of a delivery an automatic interlock prevents a
			 subsequent delivery until the indicating element and recording elements, if the
			 device is equipped and activated to record, have been returned to their zero
			 positions; and
(2) it shall not be
			 possible to return the discharge nozzle to its start position unless the zero
			 set back interlock is engaged or becomes engaged.
(b) For systems with more than one:
(1) dispenser supplied by a single measuring
			 element, an effective automatic control valve in each dispenser prevents
			 product from being delivered until the indicating elements on that dispenser
			 are in a correct zero position; or
(2) hose supplied by a single measuring
			 element, effective automatic means must be provided to prevent product from
			 being delivered until the indicating element(s) corresponding to each hose are
			 in a correct zero position.
S.4.
Discharge Lines and
			 Valves.
S.4.1.
Diversion of
			 Measured Product.
- No means shall be provided by which any measured
			 product can be diverted from the measuring device.
S.4.2.
Directional Flow Valves.
- If a reversal of flow could result in errors that exceed the tolerance
			 for the minimum measured quantity, a valve or valves or other effective means,
			 automatic in operation (and equipped with a pressure limiting device, if
			 necessary) to prevent the reversal of flow shall be properly installed in the
			 system. (Also see N.1. Minimum Measured Quantity.)
S.4.3.
Other Valves.
- Check
			 valves and closing mechanisms that are not used to define the measured quantity
			 shall have relief valves (if necessary) to dissipate any abnormally high
			 pressure that may arise in the measuring assembly.
S.5.
Markings.
- A measuring
			 system shall be conspicuously, legibly, and indelibly marked with the following
			 information:
(a) pattern approval mark (i.e.,
			 type approval number);
(b) name and
			 address of the manufacturer or his trademark and, if required by the weights
			 and measures authority, the manufacturer's identification mark in addition to
			 the trademark;
(c) model
			 designation or product name selected by the manufacturer;
(d) nonrepetitive serial number;
(e) the accuracy class of the device as
			 specified by the manufacturer consistent with Table T.2. Accuracy Classes and
			 Tolerances for Hydrogen-Gas Measuring Devices;
(f) maximum and minimum flow rates in
			 kilograms per unit of time;
(g)
			 maximum working pressure;
(h)
			 applicable range of ambient temperature if other than - 10 °C to + 50
			 °C;
(i) minimum measured
			 quantity; and
(j) product
			 limitations (such as fuel quality), if applicable.
S.5.1.
Location of Marking Information;
			 Hydrogen-Fuel Dispensers.
- The marking information required in General
			 Code, paragraph G S.1. Identification shall appear as follows:
(a) within 60 cm (24 in) to 150 cm (60 in)
			 from the base of the dispenser;
(b)
			 either internally and/or externally provided the information is permanent and
			 easily read; and accessible for inspection; and
(c) on a portion of the device that cannot be
			 readily removed or interchanged (i.e., not on a service access
			 panel).
Note:
The use of a dispenser key or tool to access
				internal marking information is permitted for retail hydrogen-measuring
				devices.
S.6.
Printer.
-
			 When an assembly is equipped with means for printing the measured quantity, the
			 printed information must agree with the indications on the dispenser for the
			 transaction and the printed values shall be clearly defined.
S.6.1.
Printed Receipt.
- Any
			 delivered, printed quantity shall include an identification number, the time
			 and date, and the name of the seller. This information may be printed by the
			 device or pre-printed on the ticket.
S.7.
Totalizers for Vehicle Fuel
			 Dispensers.
- Vehicle fuel dispensers shall be equipped with a
			 nonresettable totalizer for the quantity delivered through each separate
			 measuring device.
S.8.
Minimum Measured Quantity.
- The minimum measured quantity shall satisfy
			 the conditions of use of the measuring system as follows:
(a) Measuring systems having a maximum flow
			 rate less than or equal to 4 kg/min shall have a minimum measured quantity not
			 exceeding 0.5 kg.
(b) Measuring
			 systems having a maximum flow rate greater than 4 kg/min but not greater than
			 12 kg/min shall have a minimum measured quantity not exceeding 1.0 kg.
N.
Notes
N.1.
Minimum Measured
			 Quantity.
- The minimum measured quantity shall be specified by the
			 manufacturer.
N.2.
Test
			 Medium.
- The device shall be tested with the product commercially
			 measured except that, in a type evaluation examination, hydrogen gas as
			 specified in NIST Handbook 130 shall be used.
Note:
Corresponding requirements are under
				development and this paragraph will be revisited.
N.3.
Test Drafts.
- The minimum
			 test shall be one test draft at the declared minimum measured quantity and one
			 test draft at approximately ten times the minimum measured quantity or 1 kg,
			 whichever is greater. More tests may be performed over the range of normal
			 quantities dispensed. (Also see T.3. Repeatability.)
The test draft shall be made at flows representative of that
				during normal delivery. The pressure drop between the dispenser and the proving
				system shall not be greater than that for normal deliveries. The control of the
				flow (e.g.,
pipework or valve(s) size, etc.) shall be such that the flow of
				the measuring system is maintained within the range specified by the
				manufacturer.
N.4.
Tests.
N.4.1.
Master Meter
			 (Transfer) Standard Test.
- When comparing a measuring system with a
			 calibrated transfer standard, the minimum test shall be one test draft at the
			 declared minimum measured quantity and one test draft at approximately ten
			 times the minimum measured quantity or 1 kg, whichever is greater. More tests
			 may be performed over the range of normal quantities dispensed.
N.4.1.1.
Verification of Master
			 Metering Systems.
- A master metering system used to verify a hydrogen
			 gas-measuring device shall be verified before and after the verification
			 process. A master metering system used to calibrate a hydrogen gas-measuring
			 device shall be verified before starting the calibration and after the
			 calibration process.
N.4.2.
Gravimetric Tests.
- The
			 weight of the test drafts shall be equal to at least the amount delivered by
			 the device at the declared minimum measured quantity and one test draft at
			 approximately ten times the minimum measured quantity or 1 kg, whichever is
			 greater. More tests may be performed over the range of normal quantities
			 dispensed.
N.4.3.
PVT
			 Pressure Volume Temperature Test.
- The minimum test with a calibrated
			 volumetric standard shall be one test draft at the declared minimum measured
			 quantity and one test draft at approximately ten times the minimum measured
			 quantity or 1 kg, whichever is greater. More tests may be performed over the
			 range of normal quantities dispensed.
N.5.
Minimum Measured Quantity.
- The device shall be tested for a delivery equal to the declared
			 minimum measured quantity when the device is likely to be used to make
			 deliveries on the order of the declared minimum measured quantity.
N.6.
Testing Procedures.
N.6.1.
General.
- The device or
			 system shall be tested under normal operating conditions of the dispenser.
The test draft shall be made at flows representative of that
				during normal delivery. The pressure drop between the dispenser and the proving
				system shall not be greater than that for normal deliveries. The control of the
				flow (e.g., pipework or valve(s) size, etc.) shall be such that the flow of the
				measuring system is maintained within the range specified by the
				manufacturer.
N.6.1.1.
Repeatability Tests.
- Tests for repeatability should include a minimum
			 of three consecutive test drafts of approximately the same size and be
			 conducted under controlled conditions where variations in factors are reduced
			 to minimize the effect on the results obtained.
N.7.
Density.
- Temperature and
			 pressure of hydrogen gas shall be measured during the test for the
			 determination of density or volume correction factors when applicable. For the
			 thermophysical properties of hydrogen the following publications shall apply:
			 for density calculations at temperatures above 255 K and pressures up to 120
			 MPa, a simple relationship may be used that is given in the publication of
			 Lemmon et al., J. Res. NIST, 2008. Calculations for a wider range of conditions
			 and additional thermophysical properties of hydrogen are available free of
			 charge online at the "NIST Chemistry WebBook"
http://webbook.nist.gov/chemistry,
or available for purchase from NIST
			 as the computer program NIST Standard Reference Database 23 "NIST Reference
			 Fluid Thermodynamic and Transport Properties Database (REFPROP): Version
			 8.0"
http://www.nist.gov/srd/nist23.cfm.
These calculations are based on the
			 reference Leachman, J.W., Jacobsen, R.T, Lemmon, E.W., and Penoncello, S.G.
			 "Fundamental Equations of State for Parahydrogen, Normal Hydrogen, and
			 Orthohydrogen" to be published in the Journal of Physical and Chemical
			 Reference Data
(http://www.nist.gov/manuscript-publication-search.cfm?pub_id=832374)
.
			 More information may be obtained from NIST online at
http://www.boulder.nist.gov/div838/Hydrogen/Index.htm.
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Tolerances,
			 General.
(a) The tolerances apply
			 equally to errors of underregistration and errors of
			 overregistration.
(b) The
			 tolerances apply to all products at all temperatures measured at any flow rate
			 within the rated measuring range of the device.
T.2.
Tolerances.
- The
			 tolerances for hydrogen gas measuring devices are listed in Table T.2. Accuracy
			 Classes and Tolerances for Hydrogen Gas-Measuring Devices. (Proposed tolerance
			 values are based on previous work with compressed gas products and will be
			 confirmed based on performance data evaluated by the U.S. National Work Group.)
Table T.2. Accuracy Classes and Tolerances for
						  Hydrogen Gas-Measuring Devices
Accuracy Class
Application or Commodity Being
						  Measured
Acceptance Tolerance
Maintenance Tolerance
2.0
Hydrogen gas as a vehicle fuel
1.5 %
2.0 %
T.3.
Repeatability.
- When multiple tests are conducted at
			 approximately the same flow rate and draft size, the range of the test results
			 for the flow rate shall not exceed 40 % of the absolute value of the
			 maintenance tolerance and the results of each test shall be within the
			 applicable tolerance. (Also see N.6.1.1. Repeatability Tests.)
T.4.
Tolerance Application on Test
			 Using Transfer Standard Test Method.
- To the basic tolerance values
			 that would otherwise be applied, there shall be added an amount equal to two
			 times the standard deviation of the applicable transfer standard when compared
			 to a basic reference standard.
T.5.
Tolerance Application in Type Evaluation Examinations for Devices.
- For type evaluation examinations, the tolerance values shall apply
			 under the following conditions:
(a) at any
			 temperature and pressure within the operating range of the device,
			 and
(b) for all quantities greater
			 than the minimum measured quantity.
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Selection Requirements.
UR.1.1.
Computing-Type Device; Retail
			 Dispenser.
- A hydrogen gas dispenser used to refuel vehicles shall be
			 of the computing type and shall indicate the mass, the unit price, and the
			 total price of each delivery.
UR.1.2.
Discharge Hose-Length.
- The length of the discharge hose on a retail fuel dispenser:
(a) shall not exceed 4.6 m (15 ft) unless it
			 can be demonstrated that a longer hose is essential to permit deliveries to be
			 made to receiving vehicles or vessels;
(b) shall be measured from its housing or
			 outlet of the discharge line to the inlet of the discharge nozzle;
			 and
(c) shall be measured with the
			 hose fully extended if it is coiled or otherwise retained or connected inside a
			 housing.
An unnecessarily remote location of a device shall not be
				accepted as justification for an abnormally long hose.
UR.1.3.
Minimum Measured
			 Quantity.
(a) The minimum measured
			 quantity shall be specified by the manufacturer.
(b) The minimum measured quantity appropriate
			 for a transaction may be specified by the weights and measures authority. A
			 device may have a declared minimum measured quantity smaller than that
			 specified by the weights and measures authority; however, the device must
			 perform within the performance requirements for the declared or specified
			 minimum measured quantity up to deliveries at the maximum measurement
			 range.
(c) The minimum measured
			 quantity shall satisfy the conditions of use of the measuring system as
			 follows:
(1) measuring systems having a
			 maximum flow rate less than or equal to 4 kg/min shall have a minimum measured
			 quantity not exceeding 0.5 kg; and
(2) measuring systems having a maximum flow
			 rate greater than 4 kg/min but not greater than 12 kg/min shall have a minimum
			 measured quantity not exceeding 1.0 kg.
UR.2.
Installation
			 Requirements.
UR.2.1.
Manufacturer's Instructions.
- A device shall be installed in accordance
			 with the manufacturer's instructions, and the installation shall be
			 sufficiently secure and rigid to maintain this condition.
UR.2.2.
Discharge Rate.
- A
			 device shall be installed so that after initial equalization the actual maximum
			 discharge rate will not exceed the rated maximum discharge rate. Automatic
			 means of flow regulation shall be incorporated in the installation if
			 necessary.
UR.2.3.
Low-Flow
			 Cut-Off Valve.
- If a measuring system is equipped with a programmable
			 or adjustable "low-flow cut-off" feature:
(a)
			 the low-flow cut-off value shall not be set at flow rates lower than the
			 minimum operating flow rate specified by the manufacturer on the measuring
			 device; and
(b) the system shall be
			 equipped with flow control valves which prevent the flow of product and stop
			 the indicator from registering product flow whenever the product flow rate is
			 less than the low-flow cut-off value.
UR.3.
Use of Device.
UR.3.1.
Unit Price and Product
			 Identity for Retail Dispensers.
- The unit price at which the dispenser
			 is set to compute shall be conspicuously displayed or posted on the face of a
			 retail dispenser used in direct sale.
UR.3.2.
Vehicle-mounted Measuring
			 Systems Ticket Printer.
UR.3.2.1.
Customer Ticket.
- Vehicle-mounted measuring systems shall be
			 equipped with a ticket printer which shall be used for all sales where product
			 is delivered through the device. A copy of the ticket issued by the device
			 shall be left with the customer at the time of delivery or as otherwise
			 specified by the customer.
UR.3.2.2.
Ticket in Printing Device.
- A ticket shall not be inserted into a device equipped with a ticket
			 printer until immediately before a delivery is begun, and in no case shall a
			 ticket be in the device when the vehicle is in motion while on a public street,
			 highway, or thoroughfare.
UR.3.3.
Printed Ticket.
- The
			 total price, the total quantity of the delivery, and the price per unit shall
			 be printed on any ticket issued by a device of the computing type and
			 containing any one of these values.
UR.3.4.
Steps After Dispensing.
- After delivery to a customer from a retail dispenser:
(a) the device shall be shut-off at the end
			 of a delivery, through an automatic interlock that prevents a subsequent
			 delivery until the indicating elements and recording elements, if the device is
			 equipped and activated to record, have been returned to their zero positions;
			 and
(b) the discharge nozzle shall
			 not be returned to its start position unless the zero set-back interlock is
			 engaged or becomes engaged by the act of disconnecting the nozzle or the act of
			 returning the discharge nozzle.
UR.3.5.
Return of Indicating and
			 Recording Elements to Zero.
- The primary indicating elements (visual),
			 and the primary recording elements shall be returned to zero immediately before
			 each delivery.
UR.3.6.
Return of Product to Storage, Retail Hydrogen Gas Dispensers.
-
			 Provisions at the site shall be made for returning product to storage or
			 disposing of the product in a safe and timely manner during or following
			 testing operations. Such provisions may include return lines, or cylinders
			 adequate in size and number to permit this procedure.
UR.3.7.
Conversion Factors.
-
			 Established correction values. (Also see references in N.7. Density.) shall be
			 used whenever measured hydrogen gas is billed. All sales shall be based on
			 kilograms.
Appendix D. Definitions
The specific code to which the definition applies is shown in
				[brackets] at the end of the definition. Definitions for the General Code
				[1.10] apply to all codes in Handbook 44.
A
audit trail. -
An electronic count and/or
				information record of the changes to the values of the calibration or
				configuration parameters of a device. [1.10, 2.20, 2.21, 2.24, 3.30, 3.37,
				3.39, 5.56(a)]
automatic temperature or density compensation. -
The use of integrated or ancillary equipment to obtain from the output
				of a volumetric meter an equivalent mass, or an equivalent liquid volume at the
				assigned reference temperature below and a pressure of 14.696
				lb/in2 absolute.
Cryogenic liquids
21 °C (70 °F) [3.34]
Hydrocarbon gas vapor
15 °C (60 °F) [3.33]
Hydrogen gas
21 °C (70 °F) [3.39]
Liquid carbon dioxide
21 °C (70 °F) [3.38]
Liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) and Anhydrous
						  ammonia
15 °C (60 °F) [3.32]
Petroleum liquid fuels and lubricants
15 °C (60 °F) [3.30]
C
calibration parameter. -
Any adjustable parameter
				that can affect measurement or performance accuracy and, due to its nature,
				needs to be updated on an ongoing basis to maintain device accuracy (e.g., span
				adjustments, linearization factors, and coarse zero adjustments). [2.20, 2.21,
				2.24, 3.30, 3.37, 3.39, 5.56(a)]
D
discharge hose. -
A flexible hose connected to the
				discharge outlet of a measuring device or its discharge line. [3.30, 3.31,
				3.32, 3.34, 3.37, 3.38, 3.39]
discharge line. -
A rigid pipe connected to the
				outlet of a measuring device. [3.30, 3.31, 3.32, 3.34, 3.37,
				3.39]
E
event counter. -
A non-resettable counter that
				increments once each time the mode that permits changes to sealable parameters
				is entered and one or more changes are made to sealable calibration or
				configuration parameters of a device. [2.20, 2.21, 3.30, 3.37, 3.39, 5.54,
				5.56(a), 5.56(b), 5.57]
event logger. -
A form of audit trail containing a
				series of records where each record contains the number from the event counter
				corresponding to the change to a sealable parameter, the identification of the
				parameter that was changed, the time and date when the parameter was changed,
				and the new value of the parameter. [2.20, 2.21, 3.30, 3.37, 3.39, 5.54,
				5.56(a), 5.56(b), 5.57]
I
indicating element. -
An element incorporated in a
				weighing or measuring device by means of which its performance relative to
				quantity or money value is "read" from the device itself as, for example, an
				index-and-graduated-scale combination, a weighbeam-and-poise combination, a
				digital indicator, and the like. (Also see "primary indicating or recording
				element.") [1.10]
M
minimum measured quantity (MMQ). -
The smallest
				quantity delivered for which the measurement is to within the applicable
				tolerances for that system. [3.37, 3.39]
N
Non-resettable
totalizer. -
An element interfaced
				with the measuring or weighing element that indicates the cumulative
				registration of the measured quantity with no means to return to zero. [3.30,
				3.37, 3.39]
P
point-of-sale
system. -
An assembly of elements
				including a weighing or measuring element, an indicating element, and a
				recording element (and may also be equipped with a "scanner") used to complete
				a direct sales transaction. [2.20, 3.30, 3.32, 3.37, 3.39]
R
remote configuration capability. -
The ability to
				adjust a weighing or measuring device or change its sealable parameters from or
				through some other device that is not itself necessary to the operation of the
				weighing or measuring device or is not a permanent part of that device. [2.20,
				2.21, 2.24, 3.30, 3.37, 3.39, 5.56(a)]
retail device. -
A measuring device primarily used
				to measure product for the purpose of sale to the end user. [3.30, 3.32, 3.37,
				3.39]
W
wet hose. -
A discharge hose intended to be full
				of product at all times. (Also see "wet-hose type.") [3.30, 3.31, 3.38,
				3.39]
wet-hose
type. -
A type of device designed to be
				operated with the discharge hose full of product at all times. (Also see "wet
				hose.") [3.30, 3.32, 3.34, 3.37, 3.38, 3.39]
Section 4.40.
Vehicle Tanks Used as
			 Measures
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code
			 applies to vehicle tanks when these are used as commercial measures.
A.2.
Exceptions.
- This code
			 does not apply to the following devices:
(a)
			 Devices used solely for dispensing a product in connection with operations in
			 which the amount dispensed does not affect customer charges.
(b) Meters mounted on vehicle tanks (for
			 which see Section 3.31. Code for Vehicle-Tank Meters).
A.3.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code, Vehicle Tanks Used as
			 Measures shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Design of
			 Compartments.
S.1.1.
Compartment
			 Distortion.
- The shell and bulkheads of a vehicle tank shall be so
			 constructed that under any condition of liquid lading they will not become
			 distorted sufficiently to cause a change in the capacity of any compartment (as
			 determined by volumetric test) equal to more than 0.25 L per 750 L (0.5 pt per
			 200 gal), or fraction thereof, of the nominal compartment capacity, or to more
			 than 0.5 L (1 pt), whichever is greater. (This specification prescribes a limit
			 on permissible distortion only, and is not to be construed as setting up a
			 secondary tolerance on compartment capacities to be added to the values given
			 in tolerance paragraph T.2. Tolerance Values.)
S.1.2.
Venting.
- During
			 filling operations, effective venting of a compartment shall be provided to
			 permit air to escape from all spaces designed to be filled with liquid and to
			 permit the influx of air to the compartment during the discharge of liquid
			 therefrom. Venting shall prevent any formation of air pockets.
S.1.3.
Completeness of Delivery.
- A tank shall be so constructed that, when it is standing on a level
			 surface, complete delivery can be made from any compartment through its
			 delivery faucet or valve whether other compartments are full or empty, and
			 whether or not the delivery is through a manifold.
S.1.4.
Fill or Inspection Opening.
- The fill or inspection opening of a compartment shall be of such size
			 and location that it can readily be determined by visual inspection that the
			 compartment has been properly filled or completely emptied and shall be so
			 positioned with respect to the ends of the compartment that the indicator may
			 be positioned as required. In no case shall the opening, if circular, have a
			 diameter of less than 20 cm (75/8 in), or, if other
			 than circular, have an effective area of less than 290
			 cm2 (45 in2).
S.1.5.
Dome Flange and Baffle Plates.
- Any dome flange extending into a compartment shall be provided with
			 sufficient perforations or openings flush with the compartment shell to prevent
			 any trapping of air. All baffle plates in a compartment shall be so cut away at
			 top and bottom, and elsewhere as necessary, as to facilitate loading and
			 unloading.
S.1.6.
Compartment and Piping Capacities and Emergency Valve.
- If a
			 compartment is equipped with an emergency (or safety) valve, this shall be
			 positioned at the lowest point of outlet from the compartment, and the
			 compartment capacity or capacities shall be construed as excluding the capacity
			 of the piping leading therefrom. However, the capacity of the piping leading
			 from such a compartment shall be separately determined and reported, and may be
			 separately marked as specified in S.4. Marking of Compartments.
S.1.6.1.
On Vehicle Tanks Equipped for
			 Bottom Loading.
- On equipment designed for bottom loading, the
			 compartment capacity shall include the piping of a compartment to the valve
			 located on the upstream side of the manifold and immediately adjacent thereto
			 or, if not manifolded, to the outlet valve, provided that on or immediately
			 adjacent to the marking as specified in S.4. Marking of Compartments the
			 following words or a statement of similar meaning shall be affixed: "Warning:
			 Emergency valves must be opened before checking measurement."
S.1.7.
Expansion Space.
- When a compartment is filled to the level of the highest indicator in
			 the compartment, there shall remain an expansion space of at least 0.75 % of
			 the nominal compartment capacity as defined by that
			 indicator.
S.2.
Design of Compartment Indicators.
S.2.1.
General.
- An indicator
			 shall be so designed that it will distinctly and unmistakably define a capacity
			 point of its compartment when liquid is in contact with the lowest portion of
			 the indicator.
S.2.2.
Number
			 of Indicators.
- In no case shall a compartment be provided with more
			 than five indicators.
(Amended 1972)
S.2.3.
Identification of Multiple
			 Indicators.
- If a compartment is provided with multiple indicators,
			 each such indicator shall be conspicuously marked with an identifying letter or
			 number.
S.2.4.
Location.
- An indicator shall be located:
(a)
			 midway between the sides of its compartment;
(b) as nearly as practicable midway between
			 the ends of its compartment, and in no case offset by more than 10 % of the
			 compartment space or 15 cm (6 in), whichever is less;
(Amended 1972)
(c) so that it does not extend into, nor more
			 than 15 cm (6 in) from that section of the compartment defined by a vertical
			 projection of the fill opening;
(Amended 1974)
(d) at a depth, measuring from the top of the
			 dome opening, not lower than 46 cm (18 in) for fill openings of less than 38 cm
			 (15 in) in diameter, or, if other than circular, an effective area of less than
			 1130 cm2 (175 in2), and
			 not lower than 61 cm (24 in) for larger fill openings; and
(e) to provide a clearance of not less than 5
			 cm (2 in) between indicators.
S.2.5.
Permanence.
- Any
			 indicator that is not intended to remain adjustable and all brackets or
			 supports shall be securely welded in position.
S.2.6.
Adjustable Indicators.
-
			 Adequate provision shall be made for conveniently affixing a security seal or
			 seals:
(a) to any indicator intended to remain
			 adjustable, so that no adjustment of the indicator can be made without
			 mutilating or destroying the seal; and
(b) to any removable part to which an
			 indicator may be attached, so that the part cannot be removed without
			 mutilating or destroying the seal.
S.2.7.
Sensitiveness.
- The
			 position of any indicator in its compartment shall be such that at the level of
			 the indicator a change of 1.0 mm (0.04 in) in the height of the liquid surface
			 will represent a volume change of not more than the value of the tolerance for
			 the nominal compartment capacity as defined by that indicator.
S.3.
Design of Compartment
			 Discharge Manifold.
- When two or more compartments discharge through a
			 common manifold or other single outlet, effective means shall be provided to
			 ensure that:
(a) liquid can flow through the
			 delivery line leading from only one compartment at one time and that flow of
			 liquid from one compartment to any other is automatically prevented;
			 or
(b) all compartments will
			 discharge simultaneously.
If the discharge valves from two or more compartments are
				automatically controlled so that they can only be operated together, thus
				effectively connecting these compartments to one another, such compartments
				shall, for purposes of this paragraph, be construed to be one
				compartment.
S.4.
Marking of Compartments.
S.4.1.
Compartment Identification.
- Each compartment of a multiple-compartment tank shall be conspicuously
			 identified by a letter or number marked on the dome or immediately below the
			 fill opening. Such letters or numbers shall be in regular sequence from front
			 to rear, and the delivery faucets or valves shall be marked to correspond with
			 their respective compartments.
S.4.2.
Compartment Capacity, Single
			 Indicator.
- A compartment provided with a single indicator shall be
			 clearly, permanently, and conspicuously marked with a statement of its capacity
			 as defined by its indicator.
S.4.3.
Compartment Capacity, Multiple Indicators.
- A compartment
			 provided with two or more indicators shall be clearly, permanently, and
			 conspicuously marked with a statement identifying:
(a) each indicator by a letter or number;
			 and
(b) immediately adjacent to
			 each letter or number, the capacity of the compartment as defined by the
			 particular indicator.
N.
Notes
N.1.
Test Liquid.
- Water or
			 light fuel oil shall be used as the test liquid for a vehicle-tank
			 compartment.
N.2.
Evaporation and Volume Change.
- Care shall be exercised to reduce to a
			 minimum, evaporation losses and volume changes resulting from changes in
			 temperature of the test liquid.
N.3.
To Deliver.
- A
			 vehicle-tank compartment shall be gauged "to deliver." If the compartment is
			 gauged by measuring the test liquid into the tank, the inside tank walls shall
			 first be thoroughly wetted.
N.4.
Gauging of Compartments.
- When a compartment is gauged to
			 determine the proper position for an indicator or to determine what a capacity
			 marking should be, whether on a new vehicle tank or following repairs or
			 modifications that might affect compartment capacities, tolerances are not
			 applicable, and the indicator shall be set and the compartment capacity shall
			 be marked as accurately as practicable.
N.5.
Adjustment and Remarking.
- When a compartment is found upon test to have an error in excess of
			 the applicable tolerance, the capacity of the compartment shall be adjusted to
			 agree with its marked capacity, or its marked capacity shall be changed to
			 agree with its capacity as determined by the test.
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Application.
T.1.1.
To Excess and to Deficiency.
- The tolerances hereinafter prescribed shall be applied to errors in
			 excess and in deficiency.
T.2.
Tolerance Values.
-
			 Maintenance and acceptance tolerances shall be as shown in Table 1. Maintenance
			 and Acceptance Tolerances on Vehicle-Tank Compartments.
Table 1. Maintenance and Acceptance Tolerances on
						  Vehicle-Tank Compartments
Nominal Capacity of Compartment
Maintenance and Acceptance
						  Tolerances
Gallons
Expressed in Quarts
Expressed in Gallons
200 or less
2
0.5
201 to 400, inclusive
3
0.75
401 to 600, inclusive
4
1.0
601 to 800, inclusive
5
1.25
801 to 1000, inclusive
6
1.50
over 1000
Add 1 quart per 200 gallons or fraction thereof
Add 0.25 gallon per 200 gallons or fraction
						  thereof
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Conditions of Use.
UR.1.1.
Filling.
- A vehicle
			 shall stand upon a level surface during the filling of a compartment.
UR.1.2.
Delivering.
- During a
			 delivery, a vehicle shall be so positioned as to assure complete emptying of a
			 compartment. Each compartment shall be used for an individual delivery only;
			 that is, an individual delivery shall consist of the entire contents of a
			 compartment or compartments.
(Amended 1976)
Section 4.41.
Liquid Measures
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code
			 applies to liquid measures; that is, to rigid measures of capacity designed for
			 general and repeated use in the measurement of liquids.
A.2.
Exceptions.
- The code
			 does not apply to test measures or other volumetric standards.
A.3.
Additional Code
			 Requirements
. - In addition to the requirements of this code, Liquid
			 Measures shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Units.
(a) The capacity of a liquid
			 measure shall be 0.1 L, 0.2 L, 0.5 L, 1 L, 2 L, 5 L, or a multiple of 5 L, and
			 the measure shall not be subdivided.
(b) The capacity of a liquid measure shall be
			 1 gill, ½ liq pt, 1 liq pt, 1 liq qt, ½ gal, 1¼ gal,
			 1½ gal, or a multiple of 1 gal, and the measure shall not be subdivided.
			 However, 3 pt and 5 pt brick molds and 2½ gal (10 qt) cans shall be
			 permitted when used exclusively for ice cream.
S.2.
Material.
- Measures shall
			 be made of metal, glass, earthenware, enameled ware, composition, or similar
			 and suitable material. If made of metal, the thickness of the metal shall not
			 be less than the appropriate value given in Table 1. Minimum Thickness of Metal
			 for Liquid Measures.
Table 1. Minimum Thickness of Metal for Liquid
						  Measures
Nominal Capacity
Minimum Thickness
For Iron or Steel, Plated, or Unplated
						  (inch)
For Copper or Aluminum (inch)
1 pint or less
0.010
0.020
1 quart, ½ gallon, 1 gallon
0.014
0.028
Over 1 gallon
0.016
0.032
S.3.
Capacity Point.
- The capacity of a measure shall be determined
			 to a definite edge, or to the lowest portion of a plate, bar, or wire, at or
			 near the top of the measure, and shall not include the capacity of any lip or
			 rim that may be provided.
S.4.
Reinforcing Rings.
- Reinforcing rings, if used, shall be
			 attached to the outside of the measure and shall show no divisions or lines on
			 the inside surface of the measure.
S.5.
Discharge.
- A measure
			 equipped with a discharge faucet or valve shall be susceptible to complete
			 discharge through the faucet or valve when the measure is standing on a level
			 surface.
S.6.
Marking
			 Requirements.
- A measure shall be marked on its side with a statement
			 of its capacity. If the capacity is stated in terms of the pint or quart, the
			 word "Liquid" or the abbreviation "Liq" shall be included.
T.
Tolerances
T.1. - Maintenance tolerances in excess and
			 in deficiency shall be as shown in Table 2. Maintenance Tolerances, in Excess
			 and in Deficiency, for Liquid Measures. Acceptance tolerances shall be one-half
			 the maintenance tolerances.
Table 2. Maintenance Tolerances, in Excess and in
						  Deficiency, for Liquid Measures
Nominal Capacity
Tolerance
In Excess
In Deficiency
fluid drams
cubic inches
fluid drams
cubic inches
½ pt or less
2.0
0.4
1.0
0.2
1 pt
3.0
0.7
1.5
0.3
1 qt
4.0
0.9
2.0
0.5
½ gal
6.0
1.4
3.0
0.7
fluid ounces
cubic inches
fluid drams
cubic inches
1 and 1¼ gal
1.0
1.8
4.0
0.9
1½ gal
1.5
2.7
6.0
1.4
fluid ounces
cubic inches
fluid ounces
cubic inches
2 gal
2.0
3.5
1.0
1.8
3 and 4 gal
4.0
7.0
2.0
3.6
5 gal
6.0
11.0
3.0
5.4
10 gal
10.0
18.0
5.0
9.0
Section 4.42.
Farm Milk Tanks
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code
			 applies to farm milk tanks on the premises of producers when these are used, or
			 are to be used, for the commercial measurement of milk.
A.2.
Exceptions.
- This code
			 does not apply to tanks mounted on highway vehicles.
A.3.
Additional Code
			 Requirements
. - In addition to the requirements of this code, Farm Milk
			 Tanks shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Components.
- A farm milk tank, whether stationary or portable, shall be
			 considered suitable for commercial use only when it comprises:
(a) a vessel, whether or not it is equipped
			 with means for cooling its contents;
(b) a means for reading the level of liquid
			 in the tank, such as a removable gauge rod or surface gauge; and
(c) a chart for converting level-of-liquid
			 readings to volume. Each compartment of a subdivided tank shall, for the
			 purposes of this code, be construed to be a farm milk tank.
S.2.
Design of Tank.
S.2.1.
Level.
- A farm milk
			 tank shall be designed to be in normal operating position when it is in level.
			 The tank shall be so constructed that it will maintain its condition of level
			 under all normal conditions of lading.
S.2.2.
Level-Indicating Means.
- A tank shall be permanently equipped with sensitive means by which the
			 level of the tank can be determined.
S.2.2.1.
On a Stationary Tank.
- A stationary tank shall be provided with
			 such level-indicating means as a two-way or circular level, a plumb bob,
			 two-way leveling lugs, or the like; or the top edge or edges of the tank shall
			 be so constructed throughout as to provide an accurate reference for level
			 determinations; provided, that when leveling lugs or the top edge or edges of
			 the tank are used as the reference for level determinations, there shall be
			 supplied with the tank a sensitive spirit level of appropriate dimensions, and
			 the positions where such level is intended to be used shall be permanently
			 marked on the reference surface of the tank; and provided further, that when
			 leveling lugs are used they shall be so designed, constructed, and installed at
			 the factory that any alteration of the original position or condition, such as
			 by hammering or filing, would be difficult and would become obvious. A
			 stationary tank with a nominal capacity of 2 000 L or 500 gal, or greater shall
			 be provided with at least two similar level-indicating means, and these shall
			 be located in opposite and distant positions from each other to facilitate an
			 accurate level determination in both directions of the tank's horizontal plane.
(Amended 1980)
S.2.2.2.
On a Portable Tank.
-
			 A portable tank shall be provided with either a two-way or a circular
			 level.
S.2.3.
Portable Tank.
- A portable tank shall be of the center-reading type;
			 that is, it shall be so designed that the gauge rod or surface gauge, when
			 properly positioned for use, will be approximately in the vertical axis of the
			 tank, centrally positioned with respect to the tank walls.
S.2.4.
Capacity.
-
A farm milk tank shall be clearly and permanently
			 marked on a surface visible after
installation with its capacity as determined by the
				manufacturer. The capacity shall not exceed an amount that can be agitated
				without overflowing and that can be measured accurately with the liquid at
				rest. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1979]
S.3.
Design of Indicating
			 Means.
S.3.1.
General.
-
A tank shall include indicating means and shall be
			 calibrated over the entire range of the volume of the tank from 5 % of capacity
			 or 2 m3 (500 gal) whichever is less, to its maximum
			 capacity. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
(Added 1985)
S.3.2.
Gauge-Rod Bracket or Supports.
- If a tank is designed for use with a gauge rod, a substantial and
			 rigid gauge-rod bracket or other suitable supporting elements for positioning
			 the gauge rod shall be provided. A gauge rod and its brackets or other
			 supporting elements shall be so constructed that, whenever the rod is placed in
			 engagement with the bracket or supports and released, the rod will
			 automatically seat itself at a fixed height and in a vertical position. When a
			 gauge rod is properly seated on its brackets or supports, there shall be a
			 clearance of at least 7.5 cm (3 in) between the graduated face of the rod and
			 any tank wall or other surface that it faces.
S.3.3.
Gauge Rod.
- When
			 properly seated in position, a rod shall not touch the bottom of the tank
			 unless this is required by the design of the supporting elements. The rod shall
			 be graduated throughout an interval corresponding to the volume range within
			 which readings of liquid level are to be made.
S.3.4.
Surface-Gauge Bracket or
			 Supports.
- If a tank is designed for use with a surface gauge, a
			 substantial and rigid surface-gauge bracket or other suitable supporting
			 elements for positioning the surface gauge shall be provided. A surface gauge
			 and its brackets or other supporting elements shall be so constructed that,
			 whenever the gauge assembly is placed in engagement with the bracket or
			 supports, the indicator, if not permanently mounted on the tank, will
			 automatically seat itself in correct operating position, and the graduated
			 element will be vertically positioned and will be securely held at any height
			 to which it may be manually set.
S.3.5.
Surface Gauge.
- When
			 properly engaged with its bracket and set to its lowest position, a surface
			 gauge shall not touch the bottom of the tank. The gauge shall be graduated
			 throughout an interval corresponding to the volume range within which readings
			 of liquid level are to be made.
S.3.6.
External Gauge
			 Assemblies.
S.3.6.1.
Design and
			 Installation.
- The gauge assembly shall be designed to meet sanitary
			 requirements and shall be readily accessible for cleaning purposes. The gauge
			 assembly shall be mounted in a vertical position and equipped with a sliding
			 mechanism to assist in determining the liquid level.
S.3.6.2.
Gauge Tube.
- The
			 gauge tube shall be borosilicate glass or approved rigid plastic or rigidly
			 supported flexible tubing with a uniform internal diameter not less than 2 cm
			 (¾ in). It shall be designed and constructed so that all product in the
			 gauge can be discarded in such a manner that no product in the gauge tube will
			 enter the discharge line or tank.
(Amended 1983)
S.3.6.3.
Scale Plate.
- The
			 scale plate shall be mounted adjacent to and parallel with the gauge tube and
			 be no more than 7 mm (¼ in) from the tube.
S.3.6.4.
Scale Graduations.
-
			 The graduation lines shall be clear and easily readable and shall comply with
			 the requirements of paragraphs included under S.3.7. Graduations.
S.3.6.5.
Venting.
- An external
			 gauge tube shall be adequately vented at the top, open to the atmosphere. Any
			 attachment to the gauge tube shall not adversely affect the operation of this
			 vent.
(Added 1984)
(Added 1977)
S.3.7.
Graduations.
S.3.7.1.
Spacing and Width of
			 Graduations.
- On a gauge rod or surface gauge, the spacing of the
			 graduations, center to center, shall be not more than 1.6 mm (0.0625 in or 
			 1/16 in) and shall not be less than 0.8 mm
			 (0.03125 in or 
			 1/32 in). The graduations shall not be
			 less than 0.12 mm (0.005 in) in width, and the clear interval between adjacent
			 edges of successive graduations shall be not less than 0.4 mm (0.015625 in or 
			 1/64 in).
S.3.7.2.
Values of Graduations.
- On a gauge rod or surface gauge, the graduations may be designated in
			 inches or in centimeters and fractions thereof, or may be identified in a
			 numerical series without reference to inches or centimeters or fractions
			 thereof. In either case, a volume chart shall be provided for each such rod or
			 gauge and each tank with which it is associated, showing values in terms of the
			 graduation on the rod or gauge. If a rod or gauge is associated with but one
			 tank, in lieu of linear or numerical series graduations and volume chart,
			 values in terms of volume of liquid in the tank may be shown directly on the
			 rod or gauge.
S.3.7.3.
Value
			 of Graduated Interval.
- The value of a graduated interval on a gauge
			 rod or surface gauge (exclusive on the interval from the bottom of the tank to
			 the lowest graduation) shall not exceed:
(a) 2
			 L for a tank of a nominal capacity of 1000 L or less; ½ gal for a tank
			 of a nominal capacity of 250 gal or less;
(b) 4 L for a tank of a nominal capacity of
			 1001 L to 2000 L, inclusive; 1 gal for a tank of a nominal capacity of 251 gal
			 to 500 gal, inclusive;
(c) 6 L for
			 a tank of a nominal capacity of 2001 L to 6000 L, inclusive; 1½ gal for
			 a tank of a nominal capacity of 501 gal to 1500 gal, inclusive;
(d) 8 L for a tank of a nominal capacity of
			 6001 L to 10 000 L, inclusive; 2 gal for a tank of a nominal capacity of 1501
			 gal to 2500 gal, inclusive; or
(e)
			 8 L plus 4 L for each additional 10 000 L or fraction thereof, for tanks of
			 nominal capacity above 10 000 L or 2 gal plus 1 gal for each additional 2500
			 gal or fraction thereof, for tanks with nominal capacity above 2500 gal.
(Amended 1980)
S.3.8.
Design of Indicating
			 Means on Tanks with a Capacity Greater than 8000 Liters or 2000 Gallons.
-
Any farm milk tank with a capacity greater than 8000
			 L, or 2000 gal, shall be equipped with an external gauge assembly.
			 [Nonretroactive and applicable only to tanks manufactured after January 1,
			 1981]
(Added 1980)
S.4.
Design of Volume Chart.
S.4.1.
General.
- A volume
			 chart shall show volume values only,
over the entire range of the
			 volume of the tank from 5 % of capacity or 2 m3 (500
			 gal) whichever is less, to its maximum capacity.*
All letters and
			 figures on the chart shall be distinct and easily readable. The chart shall be
			 substantially constructed, and the face of the chart shall be so protected that
			 its lettering and figures will not tend easily to become obliterated or
			 illegible.
[*Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
(Amended 1985)
S.4.2.
For a Tank of 1 000 Liters, or
			 250 Gallons, or Less.
- The volume chart for a tank of nominal capacity
			 of 1000 L, or 250 gal, or less shall show values at least to the nearest 1 L,
			 or ¼ gal.
S.4.3.
For
			 a Tank of 1 001 Liters to 2000 Liters, or 251 to 500 Gallons.
- The
			 volume chart for a tank of nominal capacity of 1001 L to 2000 L, or 251 gal to
			 500 gal, inclusive, shall show values at least to the nearest 2 L, or ½
			 gal.
S.4.4.
For a Tank of
			 Greater than 2000 Liters, or 500 Gallons.
- The volume chart for a tank
			 of nominal capacity of greater than 2000 L, or 500 gal, shall show values at
			 least to the nearest gallon, or 4 L.
(Amended 1980)
S.5.
Gauging.
S.5.1.
Level.
- A farm milk
			 tank shall be level, as shown by the level-indicating means, during the
			 original gauging operation.
S.5.2.
To Deliver.
- A farm milk tank shall be originally gauged "to
			 deliver." If the tank is gauged by measuring the test liquid into the tank, the
			 inside tank walls shall first be thoroughly wetted and the tank shall then be
			 drained for 30 seconds after the main drainage flow has ceased.
S.5.3.
Preparation of Volume Chart.
- When a tank is gauged for the purposes of preparing a volume chart,
			 tolerances are not applicable, and the chart shall be prepared as accurately as
			 practicable.
S.6.
Identification.
- A tank and any gauge rod, surface gauge, spirit level,
			 and volume chart intended to be used therewith shall be mutually identified, as
			 by a common serial number, in a prominent and permanent manner.
N.
Notes
N.1.
Test Liquid.
- Water shall
			 be used as the test liquid for a farm milk tank.
N.2.
Evaporation and Volume Change.
- Care shall be exercised to reduce to a minimum, evaporation losses and
			 volume changes resulting from changes in temperature of the test
			 liquid.
N.3.
To Deliver.
- A farm milk tank shall be tested "to deliver." If the tank is gauged
			 by measuring the test liquid delivered into the tank, the inside tank walls
			 shall first be thoroughly wetted and the tank then shall be drained for 30
			 seconds after the main drainage flow has ceased.
N.4.
Level.
- A farm milk tank
			 shall be level, as shown by the level-indicating means, during gauging and
			 testing.
N.5.
Test Methods.
- Acceptance tests of milk tanks may be of either the prover method or
			 the master meter method provided that the master metering system is capable of
			 operating within 25 % of the applicable tolerance found in T.3. Basic Tolerance
			 Values. Subsequent tests may be of either the prover method or the master meter
			 method provided that the master metering system is capable of operating within
			 25 % of the applicable tolerance found in T.4. Basic Tolerance Values, Master
			 Meter Method.
N.5.1.
Verification of
			 Master Metering Systems.
- A master metering system used to gauge a milk
			 tank shall be verified before and after the gauging process. A master metering
			 system used to calibrate a milk tank shall be verified before starting the
			 calibration and re
-
verified at least every quarter of the tank
			 capacity, or every 2000 L (500 gal), whichever is greater. The above process of
			 re-verifying the master metering system may be waived if the system is verified
			 using a NIST traceable prover with a minimum of two tests immediately before
			 and one test immediately after the gauging process and that each test result is
			 within 25 % of T.3. Basic Tolerance Values.
(Added 2001) (Amended 2012)
N.5.2.
Temperature Changes in Water
			 Supply.
- When using a master metering system to gauge or calibrate a
			 milk tank, the official shall monitor the temperature of the water before and
			 after changing sources of supply. If the water temperature of the new source
			 changes by more than 2.8 °C (5 °F) from the previous supply, the
			 official shall re-verify the accuracy of the master metering system as soon as
			 possible after the system reaches temperature equilibrium with the new supply
			 source.
(Added 2001)
N.6.
Reading the Meniscus.
-
			 When a reading or setting is to be obtained from a meniscus formed by milk or
			 other opaque liquid, the index or reading line is the position of the highest
			 point of the center of the meniscus. When calibrating a device with water and
			 the device is to be used with an opaque liquid, the reading should be obtained
			 accordingly; that is, the position of the highest point of the center of the
			 meniscus.
(Added 1984)
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Application.
- The
			 tolerances hereinafter prescribed shall be applied equally to errors in excess
			 and errors in deficiency.
T.2.
Minimum Tolerance Values.
- On a particular tank, the maintenance
			 and acceptance tolerance applied shall be not smaller than the volume
			 corresponding to the graduated interval at the point of test draft on the
			 indicating means or 2 L (½ gal), whichever is greater.
(Amended 1980)
T.3.
Basic Tolerance Values.
-
			 The basic maintenance and acceptance tolerance shall be 0.2 % of the volume of
			 test liquid in the tank at each test draft.
(Amended 1975)
T.4.
Basic Tolerance Values, Master
			 Meter Method.
- The basic maintenance and acceptance tolerance for tanks
			 tested by the master meter method shall be 0.4 % of the volume of test liquid
			 in the tank at each test draft.
(Added 1975)
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Installation.
- A
			 stationary tank shall be rigidly installed in level without the use of
			 removable blocks or shims under the legs. If such tank is not mounted
			 permanently in position, the correct position on the floor for each leg shall
			 be clearly and permanently defined.
UR.2.
Level Condition.
UR.2.1.
Stationary Tank.
- A
			 stationary farm milk tank shall be maintained in level.
UR.2.1.
1.
Leveling Lugs.
- If leveling lugs are provided on a stationary tank, such lugs shall
			 not be hammered or filed to establish or change a level condition of the
			 tank.
UR.2.2.
Portable Tank.
- On a portable tank, measurement readings shall be made only when the
			 tank is approximately level; that is, when it is not out of level by more than
			 5 % or approximately three degrees in any direction.
UR.3.
Weight Chart.
- An
			 auxiliary weight chart may be provided, on which shall be prominently displayed
			 the weight per unit volume value used to derive the weight values from the
			 official volume chart.
UR.4.
Use.
- A farm milk tank shall not be used to measure quantities greater
			 than an amount that can be agitated without
			 overflowing.
Section
			 4.43.
Measure-Containers
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code
			 applies to measure-containers, including lids or closures if such are necessary
			 to provide total enclosure of the measured commodity, as follows:
(a) Retail measure-containers intended to be
			 used only once to determine at the time of retail sale, and from bulk supply,
			 the quantity of commodity on the basis of liquid measure. The retail
			 measure-container serves as the container for the delivery of the
			 commodity.
(b) Prepackaged
			 measure-containers intended to be used only once to determine in advance of
			 sale the quantity of a commodity (such as ice cream, ice milk, or sherbet) on
			 the basis of liquid measure. The prepackaged measure-container serves as the
			 container for the delivery of the commodity, in either a wholesale or a retail
			 marketing unit.
A.2.
Exceptions.
- This code does not apply to rigid containers used
			 for milk, cream, or other fluid dairy products, which are covered by packaging
			 requirements.
A.3.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this
			 code, Measure-Containers shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General
			 Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Units.
- The capacity of a measure-container shall be a multiple of or a binary
			 submultiple of a quart or a liter, and the measure shall not be subdivided.
			 However, for prepackaged measure-containers, any capacity less than ¼ L
			 or ½ liq pt shall be permitted.
(Amended 1979)
S.2.
Capacity Point.
- The
			 capacity of a measure-container shall be sharply defined by:
(a) the top edge;
(b) a line near the top edge; or
(c) the horizontal cross-sectional plane
			 established by the bottom surface of the removable lid or cap when seated in
			 the container.
S.3.
Shape.
- A measure-container shall be designed as some suitable
			 geometrical shape, and its capacity shall be determined without distortion from
			 its normal assembled shape.
S.4.
Marking.
S.4.1.
Capacity
			 Point.
- If the capacity point of a measure-container is defined by a
			 line, the container shall be marked conspicuously on its side with a suitable
			 statement clearly identifying this line as the capacity point.
S.4.2.
Capacity Statement.
- A
			 measure-container shall be clearly and conspicuously marked with a statement of
			 its capacity in terms of one of the units prescribed in Section S.1. Units.
N.
Notes
N.1.
Test Liquid.
-
			 Water shall be used as the test liquid for a measure-container.
N.2.
Preparation of Container for
			 Test.
N.2.1.
General.
-
			 Before an actual test is begun, a measure-container shall, if necessary, be so
			 restrained that it will maintain its normal assembled shape and that its sides
			 will not bulge when it is filled with water.
N.2.2.
Restraining Form for
			 Test.
N.2.2.1.
For Rectangular
			 Containers of One Liter, One Quarter Less.
- Bulging of the sides of a
			 rectangular measure-container of 1 L (1 qt) capacity or less may be controlled
			 by holding against each side of the container, with a cord, rubber bands, or
			 tape, a metal plate or a piece of heavy cardboard slightly smaller than the
			 side of the container.
(Amended 1979)
N.2.2.2.
For Rectangular Prepackaged
			 Measure-container of Two Quarts or Two Liters or Greater.
- A
			 rectangular prepackaged measure-container of 2 L (2 qt) capacity or greater
			 shall be supported during a test by a rigid restraining form. This form shall
			 restrain not less than the entire area of the central two-thirds of each side
			 of the container, measured from bottom to top. The inside width dimension of
			 any side panel of the restraining form shall be 1.6 mm
			 (1/16 in) greater than the corresponding outside
			 dimension of the container. (The outside width dimension of any side panel of
			 the container shall be established by adding to the inner side center-of-score
			 to center-of-score dimension two thicknesses of the board used, and the sum
			 thus obtained shall be rounded off to the nearest 0.4 mm
			 (1/64 in).)
(Amended 1979)
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Tolerances on
			 an Individual Measure.
- The acceptance tolerances in excess and in
			 deficiency on an individual measure shall be as shown in Table 1. Acceptance
			 Tolerances, in Excess and in Deficiency, for Measure-Containers.
T.2.
Tolerance on Average Capacity.
- The average capacity on a random sample of 10 measures selected from a
			 lot of 25 or more shall be equal to or greater than the nominal capacity.
(Amended 1979)
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Limitation of Use.
- The
			 use of a measure-container with a rectangular cross section of a capacity of 2
			 L (2 qt) or greater shall be limited to the packaging, in advance of sale, of
			 ice cream, sherbet, or other similar frozen desserts.
(Amended 1979)
Table 1. Acceptance Tolerances, in Excess and in
						  Deficiency, for Measure-Containers
Nominal Capacity
Tolerance
In Excess
In Deficiency
milliliters
milliliters
¼ liter or less
10
5.0
½ liter
15
7.5
1 liter
20
10.0
Over 1 liter
Add per liter 10 milliliters
Add per liter 5.0 milliliters
fluid drams
cubic inches
fluid drams
cubic inches
½ pint or less
3
0.6
1.5
0.3
1 pint
4
1.0
2.0
0.5
1 quart
6
1.4
3.0
0.7
2 quarts
9
2.0
4.5
1.0
3 quarts
10
2.4
5.0
1.2
4 quarts
12
2.8
6.0
1.2
Over 4 quarts
Add per quart 3 fluid drams
Add per quart 0.7 cubic inch
Add per quart 1.5 fluid drams
Add per quart 0.35 cubic inch
Section 4.44.
Graduates
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code
			 applies to subdivided glass measures of capacity, either cylindrical or conical
			 in shape.
A.2.
Additional
			 Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code,
			 Graduates shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Units.
- Nominal capacities, graduation ranges, values of graduated
			 intervals, and numbered graduations applicable to single-scale graduates and to
			 the appropriate portions of double scale graduates shall be as shown in Table
			 1. Design Details for Graduates.
Table 1. Design Details for
						  Graduates
Nominal Capacity
To be Graduated Between
Value of Graduated Intervals
Number at Each Graduation Divisible
						  by
milliliters
millilit
ers
milliliters
milliliters
5
1 and
5
½
1
10
2 and
10
1
2
25
5 and
25
5
5
50
10 and
50
5
10
100
20 and
100
10
20
500
100 and
500
25
50
1000
200 and
1000
50
100
minims
minims
minims
minims
60
15 and
60
5
10a
120
30 and
120
10
20b
fluid drams
fluid drams
fluid drams
fluid drams
4
1 and
4
½
1
8
2 and
8
1
2
fluid ounces
fluid ounces
fluid ounces
fluid ounces
2
½ and
2
¼
½
4
1 and
4
½
1
8
2 and
8
½
1
16
4 and
16
1
2
32
8 and
32
2
4
a And, in addition, at the
						  first (15-minim) graduation.
b And, in addition, at the
						  first (30-minim) graduation.
S.2.
Initial Interval.
- A graduate shall have an initial interval
			 that is not subdivided, equal to not less than one-fifth and not more than
			 one-fourth of the capacity of the graduate.
S.3.
Shape.
- A graduate of a
			 capacity of more than 15 mL (4 fl dr) may be of either the cylindrical or
			 circular conical type. A graduate of a capacity of 15 mL (4 fl dr) or less
			 shall be of the single-scale cylindrical type.
S.4.
Material.
- A graduate
			 shall be made of good-quality, thoroughly annealed, clear, transparent glass,
			 free from bubbles and streaks that might affect the accuracy of measurement.
			 The glass shall be uniform in thickness and shall not be excessively
			 thick.
S.5.
Dimensional
			 Proportions.
S.5.1.
On a
			 Circular Conical Graduate.
- The inside measurement from the bottom of a
			 circular conical graduate to the capacity graduation shall be not less than two
			 times the inside diameter at the capacity graduation. The inside measurement
			 from the bottom of the graduate to the point representing one-fourth of the
			 capacity shall be not less than the inside diameter at that point.
S.5.2.
On a Cylindrical Graduate.
- The inside measurement from the bottom of a cylindrical graduate to
			 the capacity graduation shall be not less than five times the inside diameter
			 at the capacity graduation.
S.6.
Base.
- The base of the
			 graduate shall be perpendicular to the vertical axis of the graduate. The
			 diameter of the base shall be of such size that the empty graduate will remain
			 standing on an inclined surface of 25 %, or approximately 15 degrees, from the
			 horizontal.
S.7.
Design of
			 Graduations.
S.7.1.
General.
- Graduations shall be perpendicular to the vertical axis of the
			 graduate and parallel to each other. Graduations shall be continuous, of
			 uniform thickness not greater than 0.4 mm (0.015 in), clearly visible,
			 permanent, and indelible under normal conditions of use.
(Amended 1977)
S.7.2.
On a Single-Scale Graduate.
- On a single-scale graduate, the main graduations shall completely
			 encircle the graduate and subordinate graduations shall extend at least
			 one-half the distance around the graduate.
S.7.3.
On a Double-Scale or a Duplex
			 Graduate.
- On a double-scale or duplex graduate, there shall be a clear
			 space between the ends of the main graduations on the two scales, and this
			 space shall be approximately 90 degrees from the lip of the graduate and shall
			 conform to the requirements of Table 2. Clear Space Between Ends of Main
			 Graduations on Double Scale Graduates.
Table 2. Clear Space Between Ends of Main
						  Graduations on Double Scale Graduates
Inside Diameter of Graduate at the Graduations
						  (inches)
Clear Space Between Ends of Main Graduations
						  (inch)
Less than 1.5
1/8 to ¼
1.5 to 3, inclusive
¼ to ½
Over 3
3/8 to 
						  5/8
S.8.
Basis of Graduation.
- A
			 graduate shall be graduated "to deliver" when the temperature of the graduate
			 is 20 °C (68 °F), and shall be marked accordingly in a permanent and
			 conspicuous manner.
S.9.
Marking Requirements.
- Each main graduation shall be marked to show its
			 value. Intermediate graduations shall not be marked. Value figures shall be
			 uniformly positioned either directly upon or immediately above the graduations
			 to which they refer. Figures placed upon graduations shall be set in from the
			 ends of the graduations a sufficient distance to allow the ends of the
			 graduations to be used in making a setting.
N.
Notes
N.1.
Test Liquid.
- Water shall
			 be used as the test liquid for graduates.
N.2.
Temperature Control.
-
			 During the test of a graduate, appropriate precautions shall be exercised to
			 reduce any detrimental temperature effects to the practicable minimum.
T.
Tolerances
T.1. - Maintenance and
			 acceptance tolerances in excess and in deficiency shall be as shown in Table 3.
			 Maintenance and Acceptance Tolerances, in Excess and Deficiency, for Graduates
			 for graduates that are graduated "to contain" or "to deliver." (The tolerance
			 to be applied at any graduation is determined by the inside diameter of the
			 graduate at the graduation in question.)
Table 3.
Maintenance and Acceptance Tolerances, in Excess
						  and
in Deficiency, for Graduates
Inside Diameter of Graduate
Tolerance
Inside Diameter of Graduate
Tolerance
From
To But Not Including
From
To But Not Including
millimeters
milliliters
inches
minims
0
16
0.1
0
9/16
2
16
21
0.2
9/16
13/16
3
21
26
0.4
13/16
11/16
6
26
31
0.6
11/16
15/16
10
31
36
0.8
15/16
19/16
15
36
41
1.1
19/16
113/16
20
41
46
1.4
113/16
21/16
30
46
51
1.8
21/16
25/16
40
51
56
2.2
25/16
29/16
50
56
61
2.8
29/16
213/16
65
61
66
3.4
213/16
31/16
80
66
71
4.1
31/16
35/16
95
71
76
4.8
35/16
39/16
110
76
81
5.6
39/16
313/16
130
81
86
6.4
33/16
41/16
150
86
91
7.2
91
96
8.1
96
101
9.0
(Amended 1974)
Section 4.45.
Dry Measures
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code
			 applies to rigid measures of capacity designed for general and repeated use in
			 the measurement of solids, including the capacities of ½ bu or
			 more.
A.2.
Exceptions.
(a) This code does not
			 apply to "standard containers" used for the measurement of fruits and
			 vegetables and as shipping containers thereof.
(b) This code does not apply to berry baskets
			 and boxes. (Also see Section 4.46. Code for Berry Baskets and Boxes.)
(Added 1976)
A.3.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code, Dry Measures shall meet
			 the requirements of Section 1.10. General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Units.
- The capacity of a
			 measure shall be 1 bu, a multiple of the bushel, or a binary submultiple of the
			 bushel, and the measure shall not be subdivided or double-ended.
S.2.
Material.
- A dry measure
			 shall be made of any suitable material that will retain its shape during normal
			 usage.
S.3.
Shape.
-
			 A measure, other than a basket, of a capacity of ½ bu or less, shall be
			 cylindrical or conical in shape. The top diameter shall in no case be less than
			 the appropriate minimum diameter shown in Table 1. Minimum Top Diameters for
			 Dry Measure other than Baskets. The bottom of a measure, other than a basket,
			 shall be perpendicular to the vertical axis of the measure and shall be flat,
			 except that a metal bottom may be slightly corrugated. The bottom of a measure
			 shall not be adjustable or movable.
Table 1. Minimum Top Diameters for Dry Measures
						  other than Baskets
Nominal Capacity
Minimum Top Diameter Inches
1 pint
4
1 quart
53/8
2 quarts
65/8
½ peck
8½
1 peck
107/8
½ bushel
13¾
S.3.1.
Conical Dry Measure.
- If conical, the top diameter shall exceed
			 the bottom diameter by not more than 10 % of the bottom diameter.
S.4.
Capacity Point.
- The capacity of a measure shall be determined by the top edge of the
			 measure.
S.5.
Top
			 Reinforcement.
- The top edge of a measure shall be reinforced. On a
			 wooden measure other than a basket, of a capacity of 1 qt or more, this
			 reinforcement shall be in the form of a firmly attached metal band.
S.6.
Marking Requirements.
- A
			 measure shall be conspicuously marked on its side with a statement of its
			 capacity. If the capacity is stated in terms of the pint or quart, the word
			 "Dry" shall be included. The capacity statement shall be in letters of the
			 following dimensions:
(a) At least ½ in
			 high and ¼ in wide on a measure of any capacity between ½ pt and
			 1 pk.
(b) At least 1 in high and
			 ½ in wide on a measure of a capacity of ½ bu or more.
(c) On a measure of a capacity of ¼ pt
			 or less, the statement shall be as prominent as practicable, considering the
			 size and design of such measure.
N.
Notes
N.1.
Testing Medium.
N.1.1.
Watertight Dry Measures.
- Water shall be used as the testing medium for watertight dry
			 measures.
N.1.2.
Non-Watertight Dry Measures.
- A dry measure shall be tested
			 either volumetrically using rapeseed as a testing medium or geometrically
			 through inside measurement and calculation.
(Amended 1988)
T.
Tolerances
T.1. - Maintenance tolerances in excess and
			 in deficiency shall be as shown in Table 2. Maintenance Tolerances, in Excess
			 and in Deficiency, for Dry Measure. Acceptance tolerances shall be one-half the
			 maintenance tolerances.
Table 2. Maintenance Tolerances, in Excess and in
						  Deficiency, for Dry Measures
Nominal Capacity
Tolerance
In Excess Cubic Inches
In Deficiency Cubic Inches
1/32 pint or less
0.1
0.05
1/16 pint
0.15
0.1
1/8 pint
0.25
0.15
¼ pint
0.5
0.3
½ pint
1.0
0.5
1 pint
2.0
1.0
1 quart
3.0
1.5
2 quarts
5.0
2.5
½ peck
10.0
5.0
1 peck
16.0
8.0
½ bushel
30.0
15.0
1 bushel
50.0
25.0
Section 4.46.
Berry Baskets and
			 Boxes
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code
			 applies to baskets and boxes for berries and small fruits in capacities of 1
			 dry quart and less.
A.2.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this
			 code, berry baskets and boxes shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10.
			 General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Units.
- The capacity of a berry basket or box shall be ½ dry pint, 1
			 dry pint, or 1 dry quart.
S.2.
Materials.
- A berry basket or box shall be made of any suitable
			 materials that will retain its shape during normal filling, storage, and
			 handling.
S.3.
Capacity
			 Point.
- The capacity of a berry basket or box shall be determined by
			 its top edges.
N.
Notes
N.1.
Method of Test.
- A berry basket or box may be tested either volumetrically, using rape
			 seed as the testing medium, or geometrically through accurate inside dimension
			 measurement and calculation.
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Tolerances on Individual
			 Measures.
- Maintenance and acceptance tolerances in excess and
			 deficiency on an individual measure shall be as shown in Table 1. Maintenance
			 and Acceptance Tolerances in Excess and in Deficiency.
T.2.
Tolerances on Average Capacity.
- The average capacity on a random sample of 10 measures selected from a
			 lot of 25 or more shall be equal to or greater than the nominal capacity.
(Amended 1979)
Table 1. Maintenance and Acceptance Tolerances in
						  Excess and in Deficiency
Nominal Capacity
Tolerance
In Excess Cubic Inches
In Deficiency Cubic Inches
½ pint
1
0.5
1 pint
2
1.0
1 quart
3
1.5
Section 5.50.
Fabric-Measuring
			 Devices
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code
			 applies only to mechanisms and machines designed to indicate automatically
			 (with or without value-computing capabilities) the length of fabric passed
			 through the measuring elements.
A.2.
Devices Used to Measure Other
			 Similar Material in Sheet, Roll, or Bolt Form.
- Insofar as they are
			 clearly appropriate, the requirements and provisions of this code apply also to
			 devices designed for the commercial measurement of other material similar to
			 fabrics, in sheet, roll, or bolt form.
A.3.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code, Fabric-Measuring Devices
			 shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Units.
- A
			 fabric-measuring device shall indicate lengths as follows:
(a) For devices indicating in metric units,
			 lengths shall be indicated in terms of 5 cm; 10 cm; 25 cm; or 50 cm and meters.
In addition, lengths may be indicated in terms of any or all of
				the following subdivisions: millimeters and centimeters.
(b) For devices indicating in U.S. customary
			 units, lengths shall be indicated in terms of 
			 1/8 yd; ¼ yd; or ½ yd; and
			 yards.
In addition, lengths may be indicated in terms of any or all of
				the following subdivisions: 
				1/8 yd; 
				1/16 yd; inches and feet.
Digital indicators may indicate values in decimal fractions.
				(Amended 1977)
S.2.
Design of Indicating
			 Elements.
S.2.1.
Graduations.
S.2.1.1.
Length.
- Graduations shall be so varied in length that they may be conveniently
			 read.
S.2.1.2.
Width.
- In any series of graduations, the width of a graduation shall in no
			 case be greater than the width of the minimum clear interval between
			 graduations, and the width of main graduations shall be not more than 50 %
			 greater than the width of subordinate graduations. Graduations shall in no case
			 be less than 0.2 mm (0.008 in) in width.
S.2.1.3.
Clear Interval between
			 Graduations.
- The clear interval between graduations shall be at least
			 6 mm for cm graduations (¼ in for 
			 1/8 yd graduations), and 3 mm for 20 cm
			 graduations (
1/
8 in for 1 in
			 graduations).
S.2.2.
Indicator.
S.2.2.1.
Symmetry.
- The index of an indicator shall be symmetrical with respect
			 to the graduations, at least throughout that portion of its length associated
			 with the graduations.
S.2.2.2.
Length.
- The index of an indicator shall reach to the finest
			 graduations with which it is used, unless the indicator and the graduations are
			 in the same plane, in which case the distance between the end of the indicator
			 and the ends of the graduations, measured along the line of the graduations,
			 shall be not more than 1.0 mm (0.04 in).
S.2.2.3.
Width.
- The index of
			 an indicator shall not be wider than the narrowest graduations with which it is
			 used, and shall in no case exceed 0.4 mm (0.015 in).
S.2.2.4.
Clearance.
- The
			 clearance between the index of an indicator and the graduations shall in no
			 case be more than 1.5 mm (0.06 in).
S.2.2.5.
Parallax.
- Parallax
			 effects shall be reduced to the practicable minimum.
S.2.3.
Money-Value
			 Computations.
S.2.3.1.
Full-Computing Type.
- In this type, the money value at each of a series
			 of unit prices shall be computed automatically for every length within the
			 range of measurement of the fabric-measuring device. Value graduations shall be
			 provided and shall be accurately positioned. The value of each graduated
			 interval shall be 1 cent at all prices per yard of 30 cents and less, and shall
			 not exceed 2 cents at higher prices per yard. Five-cent intervals may be
			 represented in the two-cent range by special graduations, but these shall not
			 be positioned in the clear intervals between graduations of the regular
			 series.
S.2.3.2.
Limited-Computing Type.
- In this type, the money value at each of a
			 series of unit prices shall be computed automatically only for lengths
			 corresponding to a definite series of length graduations. There shall be no
			 value graduations. At no position that the chart can assume shall two value
			 figures at the same price per yard be completely and clearly exposed to view at
			 one time. Money values shown shall be mathematically accurate, except that a
			 fraction of less than ½ cent shall be dropped and the next higher cent
			 shall be shown in the case of a fraction of ½ cent or more. One of the
			 following requirements shall be met:
(a)
			 There shall be a money-value computation for each length graduation within the
			 range of measurement of the device.
(b) No money-value computation shall be
			 exposed to view except at such times as the device shows a length indication
			 for which a corresponding series of value indications is computed.
(c) Each column or row of money-value
			 computations shall be marked to show the length to which the computations
			 correspond, the device shall be marked to show the character and limitations of
			 the computations, and there shall be computations corresponding to at least 10
			 cm (1/8 yd) throughout the range of measurement of
			 the device.
S.2.4.
Return to Zero.
-
			 Primary indicating elements shall be readily returnable to a definite zero
			 indication. Means shall be provided to prevent the return of the indicating
			 elements beyond their correct zero positions.
S.3.
Marking Requirements.
- If
			 a device will not accurately measure all fabrics, it shall be marked to
			 indicate clearly its limitations.
S.4.
Design Accuracy.
-
			 Indications of length and money value shall be accurate whether the values of
			 the indications are being increased or decreased.
N.
Notes
N.1.
Testing Medium.
- A
			 fabric-measuring device shall be tested with a suitable testing tape
			 approximately 7.62 cm (3 in) wide and with a graduated length of at least 11 m
			 (12 yd), made from such material and having such surface finish as to provide
			 dimensional stability and reduce slippage to the practicable minimum.
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Tolerance
			 Values.
- Maintenance and acceptance tolerances shall be as shown in
			 Table 1. Maintenance and Acceptance Tolerances for Fabric-Measuring Devices.
Table 1. Maintenance and Acceptance Tolerances
						  for Fabric-Measuring Devices
Indication of Device (yards)
Maintenance Tolerance
Acceptance Tolerance
On Under-registration (inches)
On Over-registration (inches)
On Under-registration (inches)
On Over-registration (inches)
2 or less
3/8
¼
¼
1/8
3
3/8
5/16
¼
5/32
4
½
5/16
¼
5/32
5
5/8
3/8
5/16
3/16
6
¾
3/8
3/8
3/16
7 and 8
1
½
½
¼
9
1¼
5/8
5/8
5/16
10 and 11
1½
¾
¾
3/8
12 and 13
1¾
7/8
7/8
7/16
14 and 15
2
1
1
½
Over 15
Add 
						  1/8 inch per indicated
						  yard
Add 
						  1/16 inch per indicated
						  yard
Add 
						  1/16 inch per indicated
						  yard
Add 
						  1/32 inch per indicated
						  yard
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Installation
			 Requirements.
UR.1.1.
Installation.
- A fabric-measuring device shall be securely supported
			 and firmly fixed in position.
UR.2.
Use Requirements.
UR.2.1.
Limitation of Use.
- A
			 fabric-measuring device shall be used to measure only those fabrics that it was
			 designed to measure, and in no case shall it be used to measure a fabric that a
			 marking on the device indicates should not be measured.
UR.2.2.
Return of Indicating Elements
			 to Zero.
- The primary indicating elements shall be returned to zero
			 before each measurement.
Section 5.51.
Wire- and
			 Cordage-Measuring Devices
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code applies to mechanisms and machines designed to indicate
			 automatically the length of cordage, rope, wire, cable, or similar flexible
			 material passed through the measuring elements.
A.2.
Additional Code
			 Requirements
. - In addition to the requirements of this code, Wire- and
			 Cordage-Measuring Devices shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General
			 Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Units.
- A wire- or cordage-measuring device shall indicate lengths in terms of
			 feet, yards, or meters, or combinations of units of the same measurement
			 system, and shall have minimum increments with values that do not exceed the
			 equivalent of 0.1 meter or 0.1 yard.
(Amended 1989)
S.2.
Design of Indicating
			 Elements.
S.2.1.
Graduations.
S.2.1.1.
Length.
- Graduations shall be so varied in length that they may be conveniently
			 read.
S.2.1.2.
Width.
- In any series of graduations, the width of a graduation shall in no
			 case be greater than the width of the minimum clear interval between
			 graduations, and the width of main graduations shall be not more than 50 %
			 greater than the width of subordinate graduations. Graduations shall in no case
			 be less than 0.2 mm (0.008 in), nor more than 1.0 mm (0.04 in), in
			 width.
S.2.1.3.
Clear
			 Interval between Graduations.
- The clear interval between graduations
			 shall be at least as wide as the widest graduation, and in no case less than
			 0.8 mm (0.03 in).
S.2.2.
Indicator.
S.2.2.1.
Symmetry.
- The index of an indicator shall be symmetrical with respect
			 to the graduations, at least throughout that portion of its length associated
			 with the graduations.
S.2.2.2.
Length.
- The index of an indicator shall reach to the finest
			 graduations with which it is used, unless the indicator and the graduations are
			 in the same plane, in which case the distance between the end of the indicator
			 and the ends of the graduations, measured along the line of the graduations,
			 shall be not more than 1.0 mm (0.04 in).
S.2.2.3.
Width.
- The index of
			 an indicator shall not be wider than the narrowest graduations with which it is
			 used, and shall in no case exceed 0.4 mm (0.015 in).
S.2.2.4.
Clearance.
- The
			 clearance between the index of an indicator and the graduations shall in no
			 case be more than 1.5 mm (0.06 in).
S.2.2.5.
Parallax.
- Parallax
			 effects shall be reduced to the practicable minimum.
S.2.3.
Zero Indication.
-
			 Primary indicating elements shall be readily returnable to a definite zero
			 indication.
S.3.
Design of Measuring Elements.
S.3.1.
Sensitiveness.
- If the most sensitive element of the indicating
			 system utilizes an indicator and graduations, the relative movement of these
			 parts corresponding to a measurement of 30 cm (1 ft) shall be not less than 6
			 mm (¼ in).
S.3.2.
Slippage.
- The measuring elements of a wire- or cordage-measuring
			 device shall be so designed and constructed as to reduce to the practicable
			 minimum any slippage of material being measured and any lost motion in the
			 measuring mechanism.
S.3.3.
Accessibility.
- A wire- or cordage-measuring device shall be so
			 constructed that the measuring elements are readily visible and accessible,
			 without disassembly of any supporting frame or section of the main body, for
			 purposes of cleaning or removing any foreign matter carried into the mechanism
			 by the material being measured.
S.4.
Marking Requirements.
S.4.1.
Limitation of Use.
- If
			 a device will measure accurately only certain configurations, diameters, types,
			 or varieties of materials, or with certain accessory equipment, all limitations
			 shall be clearly and permanently stated on the device.
S.4.2.
Operating Instructions.
- Any necessary operating instructions shall be clearly stated on the
			 device.
S.4.3.
Indications.
- Indicating elements shall be identified by suitable words or legends
			 so that the values of the indications will be unmistakable.
S.5.
Design Accuracy.
- Indications of length shall be accurate whether the values of the
			 indications are being increased or decreased.
N.
Notes
N.1.
Testing Medium.
- Wherever
			 feasible, a wire- or cordage-measuring device shall be tested with a steel tape
			 not less than 10 mm (3/8 in) in width and at least
			 15 m (50 ft) in length. When a device cannot be tested in this manner because
			 of the design of the device, it shall be tested with a dimensionally stable
			 material appropriately marked and compared at frequent periodic intervals with
			 a steel tape in order to assure that any marked interval is not in error by
			 more than [1/3] of the tolerance of the device at that particular interval.
(Amended 1981)
N.2.
Minimum Test.
- Tests
			 shall be conducted at a minimum initial increment of 5 m (20 ft) and
			 appropriate increments up to at least 15 m (50 ft).
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Tolerance Values.
-
			 Maintenance and acceptance tolerances shall be as shown in Table 1. Maintenance
			 and Acceptance Tolerances for Wire- and Cordage-Measuring Devices.
Table 1. Maintenance and Acceptance Tolerances
						  for Wire- and Cordage-Measuring Devices
Indication of Device (feet)
Acceptance and Maintenance
						  Tolerances
On Underregistration (inches)
On Overregistration (inches)
20
6
3
Over 20 to 30
8
4
Over 30 to 40
10
5
Over 40 to 50
12
6
Over 50
Add 2 inches per indicated 10 feet
Add 1 inch per indicated 10 feet
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Installation
			 Requirements.
UR.1.1.
Installation.
- A wire- or cordage-measuring device shall be securely
			 supported and firmly fixed in position.
UR.2.
Use Requirements.
UR.2.1.
Limitation of Use.
- A
			 wire- or cordage-measuring device shall be used to measure only those materials
			 that it was designed to measure, and in no case shall it be used to measure a
			 material that a marking on the device indicates should not be
			 measured.
UR.2.2.
Return to
			 Zero.
- The primary indicating elements of a wire- or cordage-measuring
			 device shall be returned to zero before each measurement.
UR.2.3.
Operation of Device.
-
			 A wire- or cordage-measuring device shall not be operated in such a manner as
			 to cause slippage or inaccurate measurement.
UR.2.4.
Cleanliness.
- The
			 measuring elements of a wire- or cordage-measuring device shall be kept clean
			 to prevent buildup of dirt and foreign material that would adversely affect the
			 measuring capability of the device.
Section 5.52.
Linear Measures
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code
			 applies to any linear measure or measure of length, whether flexible or
			 inflexible, permanently installed or portable.
A.2.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code, Linear Measures shall
			 meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.M.
Units.
- A linear
			 measure may be in total length, and the total length may be subdivided in any
			 or all of the following:
(a) centimeters and
			 tenths of the centimeter;
(b)
			 meters; and
(c) multiples of
			 meters.
An one-meter measure may be graduated, in addition, to show 0.1
				m and multiples of 0.1 m subdivisions.
S.1.
Units.
- A linear measure
			 may be in total length, and the total length may be subdivided in any or all of
			 the following:
(a) inches and binary
			 submultiples of the inch;
(b)
			 feet;
(c) yards and multiples of
			 yards.
A 1 -yard measure may be graduated, in addition, to show [1/3]
				yd and [2/3] yd subdivisions. A flexible tape may be graduated in tenths or
				hundredths of a foot, or both tenths and hundredths of a foot. (Any other
				subdivisions are allowable only on measures of special purposes and when
				required for such purposes.)
S.2.
Material.
S.2.1.
Flexible Tape.
- A
			 flexible tape shall be made of metal.
S.2.2.
End Measure.
- If an end
			 measure is made of material softer than brass, the ends of the measure shall be
			 protected by brass (or other metal at least equally hard) securely
			 attached.
S.3.
Finish.
- Measures shall be smoothly finished.
S.4.
Design.
S.4.1.
Rigid Measure.
- A rigid
			 measure shall be straight.
S.4.2.
Folding Measure.
- A folding measure shall open to a definite
			 stop, and when so opened shall be straight.
S.5.
Graduations.
S.5.1.
General.
- Graduations
			 shall be perpendicular to the edge of the measure.
S.5.2.
Width.
- The width of
			 the graduations on any measure shall not exceed one-half the width of the
			 smallest graduated interval on the measure, and in no case shall be wider than
			 0.75 mm (0.03 in).
(Amended 1982)
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
For Measures Except Metal Tapes.
- Maintenance tolerances in excess and in deficiency for measures except
			 metal tapes shall be as shown in Table 1. Maintenance Tolerances, in Excess and
			 in Deficiency, for Linear Measures Except Metal Tapes. Acceptance tolerances
			 shall be one-half the maintenance tolerances.
Table 1. Maintenance Tolerances, in Excess and in
						  Deficiency, for Linear Measures Except Metal Tapes
Nominal Interval from Zero
Tolerance
Feet
Inch
½ or less
1/64
1
1/32
2
1/16
3
3/32
4
1/8
5
5/32
6
3/16
T.2.
For Metal Tapes.
- Maintenance and acceptance tolerances in
			 excess and in deficiency for metal tapes shall be as shown in Table 2.
			 Maintenance and Acceptance Tolerances, in Excess and in Deficiency, for Metal
			 Tapes. Tapes of 10 m (25 ft) or over shall be tested at a tension resulting
			 from a load of 5 kg (10 lb). Tapes less than 10 m (25 ft) shall be tested at a
			 tension resulting from a load of 2.5 kg (5 lb). However, flexible metal tapes
			 of 10 m (25 ft) or less that are not normally used under tension shall be
			 tested with no tension applied. All tapes shall be supported throughout on a
			 horizontal flat surface whenever tested.
(Amended 1972)
Table 2. Maintenance and Acceptance Tolerances,
						  in Excess and in Deficiency, for Metal Tapes
Nominal Interval from Zero
Tolerance
Feet
Inch
6 or less
1/32
7 to 30, inclusive
1/16
31 to 55, inclusive
1/8
56 to 80, inclusive
3/16
81 to 100, inclusive
¼
Section 5.53.
Odometers
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code
			 applies to odometers that are used or are to be used to determine the charges
			 for rent or hire of passenger vehicles and trucks and buses. (When official
			 examinations are undertaken on odometers that form the basis for the payment of
			 fees or taxes to, or the preparation of reports for, governmental agencies, and
			 in similar cases, the requirements of this code shall be applied insofar as
			 they are applicable and appropriate to the conditions of such special uses.)
(Amended 1977)
A.2.
Exceptions
. - This code
			 does not apply to taximeters (for which see Section 5.54. Code for Taximeters).
			 (Amended 1977)
A.3.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this
			 code, Odometers shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Design of Indicating Elements.
S.1.1.
General.
- The primary indicating element of an odometer may be:
(a) the distance-traveled portion of the
			 "speedometer" assembly of a motor vehicle;
(b) a special cable-driven
			 distance-indicating device; or
(c)
			 a hub odometer attached to the hub of a wheel on a motor vehicle. (Amended
			 1977)
S.1.2.
Units.
- An odometer shall indicate in terms of miles or kilometers.
			 (Amended 1977)
S.1.3.
Minimum Indicated Value.
- The value of the interval of indicated
			 distance shall be:
(a) for odometers
			 indicating in kilometers, 0.1 km; or
(b) for odometers indicating in miles, 0.1
			 mi. (Amended 1977)
S.1.4.
Advancement of Indicating
			 Elements.
- The most sensitive indicating elements of an odometer may
			 advance continuously or intermittently; all other elements shall advance
			 intermittently. Except when the indications are being returned to zero, the
			 indications of an installed odometer shall be susceptible to advancement only
			 by the rotation of the vehicle wheel or wheels.
(Amended 1977)
S.1.5.
Readability.
- Distance
			 figures and their background shall be of sharply contrasting colors. Figures
			 indicating tenth units shall be differentiated from other figures with
			 different colors, or with a decimal point, or by other equally effective means.
			 Except during the period of advance of any decade to the next higher
			 indication, only one figure in each decade shall be exposed to view. Any
			 protective covering intended to be transparent shall be in such condition that
			 it can be made transparent by ordinary cleaning of its exposed surface.
(Amended 1977)
S.1.6.
Digital Indications and
			 Representation.
- Digital indicating odometers (discontinuous
			 registration) shall "round off" indications to the nearest minimum division or
			 truncate indications to the lower minimum division.
(Added 1990)
N.
Notes
N.1.
Testing Procedures.
N.1.1.
Test Methods.
- To
			 determine compliance with distance tolerances, a distance test of an odometer
			 shall be conducted using one or more of the following test methods:
(a) Road Test. - A road test consists of
			 driving the vehicle over a precisely measured road course.
(b) Fifth-Wheel Test. - A fifth-wheel test
			 consists of driving the vehicle over any reasonable road course and determining
			 the distance actually traveled through the use of a mechanism known as a "fifth
			 wheel" that is attached to the vehicle and that independently measures and
			 indicates the distance.
(c)
			 Simulated-Road Test. - A simulated-road test consists of determining the
			 distance traveled by use of a roller device, or by computation from rolling
			 circumference and wheel-turn data.
(Amended 1977)
N.1.2.
Test Runs.
- Not less
			 than two test runs shall be conducted. Acceleration and deceleration shall be
			 carefully controlled to avoid spinning or skidding the wheels.
(Amended 1977)
N.1.2.1.
For Devices Indicating in
			 Miles.
- The test runs shall be 2 mi in length, shall start from, and
			 finish at, a dead stop with a minimum of 80 % of the run between 30 mi/h and 45
			 mi/h.
(Added 1977)
N.1.2.2.
For Devices Indicating in
			 Kilometers.
- The test runs shall be 3 km in length, shall start from,
			 and finish at, a dead stop with a minimum of 80 % of the run between 50 km/h
			 and 75 km/h.
(Added 1977)
N.1.3.
Test Conditions.
N.1.3.1.
Tire Stabilization.
-
			 Road tests or fifth-wheel tests shall be preceded by a run of at least 8 km or
			 5 mi, for the purpose of stabilizing tire pressures. Simulated road tests on a
			 roller device shall be made at stable tire pressures.
(Amended 1977)
N.1.3.2.
Tire Pressure.
- At
			 the completion of the test run or runs, the tires of the vehicle under test
			 shall be checked to determine that the tire pressure is that operating tire
			 pressure posted in the vehicle. If not, the tire pressure should be adjusted to
			 the posted tire pressure and further tests may be conducted to determine the
			 operating characteristics of the odometer.
(Amended 1977)
N.1.3.3.
Vehicle Loading.
(a)
Passenger Load.
- During the
			 distance test of an odometer, the vehicle may carry two persons.
(b)
Truck Cargo Load.
- Truck
			 odometers shall be tested by one of the following methods:
(1) the truck is loaded with one-half of the
			 maximum cargo load; or
(2) unloaded
			 if unloaded test tolerances are applied. (Amended 1977 and 1987)
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
To Underregistration and to
			 Overregistration.
- The tolerances hereinafter prescribed shall be
			 applied to errors of underregistration and errors of
			 overregistration.
T.2.
Tolerance Values.
- Except for unloaded trucks, maintenance and
			 acceptance tolerances on odometers shall be 4 % of the interval under test.
(Amended 1977and 1987)
T.2.1.
Tolerances for Unloaded Trucks.
- Maintenance and acceptance tolerances on truck odometers shall be 5 %
			 for underregistration and 3 % for overregistration of the interval under test.
(Added 1987)
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Inflation of Vehicle Tires.
- The operational tire pressure of passenger vehicle and truck tires
			 shall be posted in the vehicle and tires shall be maintained at the posted
			 pressure.
(Amended 1977)
Section 5.54.
Taximeters
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code
			 applies to taximeters; that is, to devices that automatically calculates at a
			 predetermined rate or rates and indicate the charge for hire of a
			 vehicle.
A.2.
Exceptions.
- This code does not apply to odometers on vehicles that are rented on a
			 distance basis (for which see Section 5.53. Code for Odometers).
(Amended 1977)
A.3.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code, Taximeters shall meet
			 the requirements of Section 1.10. General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Design of Indicating and
			 Recording Elements.
S.1.1.
General.
- A taximeter shall be equipped with a primary indicating
			 element. (Amended 1988 and 2015)
S.1.1.
1. Recording Elements.
- A receipt providing information as required in S.1.9.
			 Recorded Representations shall be available from a taximeter or taximeter
			 system through an integral or separate recording element for all transactions
			 conducted. [Nonretroactive January 1, 2016]
(Added 2015)
S.1.2.
Advancement of Indicating
			 Elements.
- Except when a taximeter is being cleared, the primary
			 indicating and recording elements shall be susceptible of advancement only by
			 the movement of the vehicle or by the time mechanism.
(Amended 1988)
S.1.3.
Visibility of Indications.
- The indications of fare, including extras, and the mode of operation,
			 such as "time" or "hired," shall be constantly displayed whenever the meter is
			 in operation. All indications of passenger interest shall be easily read from a
			 distance of 1.2 m (4 ft) under any condition of normal operation.
(Amended 1977, 1986, and 1988)
S.1.3.1.
Minimum Height of Figures,
			 Words, and Symbols.
- The minimum height of the figures used to indicate
			 the fare shall be 10 mm and for extras, 8 mm. The minimum height of the
			 figures, words, or symbols used for other indications, including those used to
			 identify or define, shall be 3.5 mm.
(Added 1986)
S.1.3.2.
Lighting of
			 Indications.
-
Integral lighting shall be provided to
			 illuminate the fare, extras, the rate or rate code, and the taximeter status
			 (i.e., vacant, hired, and time off). [Nonretroactive as of January 1,
			 1989]
(Added 1988) (Amended 1990)
S.1.3.3.
Passenger's
			 Indications
.
-
A supplementary indicating
			 element installed in a taxi to provide information regarding the taxi service
			 to the passenger, shall clearly display the current total of all charges
			 incurred for the transaction. The accruing total of all charges must remain
			 clearly visible on the passenger's display (unless disabled by the passenger)
			 at all times during the transaction. [Nonretroactive as of January 1,
			 2016]
(Added 2015)
S.1.3.3.1.
Additional
			 Information.
- Additional information shall be
			 displayed or made available through a passenger's indicating element (as
			 described in S.1.3.3. Passenger's Indications) and shall be current and reflect
			 any charges that have accrued. This additional information shall
			 include:
(a)
an itemized
			 account of all charges incurred including fare, extras, and other additional
			 charges; and
(b)
the rate(s) in use at which any fare is calculated.
Any additional information made available must not
				obscure the accruing total of charges for the taxi service. This additional
				information may be made accessible through clearly identified operational
				controls (e.g., keypad, button, menu, touch-screen). [Non retroactive as of
				January 1, 2016]
(Added 2015)
S.1.3.3.2.
Fare and Extras
			 Charges.
- The indication of fare and extras charges on
			 a passenger's indicating element shall agree with similar indications displayed
			 on all other indicating elements in the system.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2016]
(Added 2015)
S.1.4.
Actuation of Fare-Indicating
			 Mechanism.
- When a taximeter designed to calculate fares upon the basis
			 of a combination of distance traveled and time elapsed is operative with
			 respect to fare indication, the fare-indicating mechanism shall be actuated by
			 the distance mechanism whenever the vehicle is in motion at such a speed that
			 the rate of distance revenue equals or exceeds the time rate, and may be
			 actuated by the time mechanism whenever the vehicle speed is less than this and
			 when the vehicle is not in motion. Means shall be provided for the vehicle
			 operator to render the time mechanism either operative or inoperative with
			 respect to the fare-indicating mechanism.
(Amended 1977)
S.1.5.
Operating Condition.
S.1.5.1.
General.
- When a
			 taximeter is cleared, the indication "Not Registering," "Vacant," or an
			 equivalent expression shall be shown. Whenever a taximeter is set to register
			 charges, it shall indicate "Registering," "Hired," or an equivalent expression
			 and the rate at which it is set shall be automatically indicated (Rate 1 or
			 Rate A, for example).
(Amended 1988)
S.1.5.2.
Time not Recording.
-
			 When a taximeter is set for fare registration with the time mechanism
			 inoperative, it shall indicate "Time Not Recording" or an equivalent
			 expression.
(Amended 1988)
S.1.6.
Fare Identification.
-
			 Fare indications shall be identified by the word "Fare" or by an equivalent
			 expression. Values shall be defined by suitable words or monetary
			 signs.
S.1.7.
Extras.
- Extras shall be indicated as a separate item and shall not be included
			 in the fare indication. They shall be identified by the word "Extras" or by an
			 equivalent expression. Values shall be defined by suitable words or monetary
			 signs. Means may be provided to totalize the fare and extras if the totalized
			 amount returns to separate indications of fare and extras within 5 seconds or
			 less.
(Amended 1988)
S.1.7.1.
Nonuse of Extras.
- If
			 and when taximeter extras are prohibited by legal authority or are discontinued
			 by a vehicle operator, the extras mechanisms shall be rendered inoperable or
			 the extras indications shall be effectively obscured by permanent means.
- All indications of fare and extras shall be protected from
				unauthorized alteration or manipulation. (Amended 2015)
S.1.9.
Recorded
			 Representation.
-
A printed receipt issued from a
			 taximeter, whether through an
integral or separate recording element, shall include
				as a minimum, the following information when processed through the taximeter
				system:
(a)
date;
(b)
unique
			 vehicle identification number, such as the medallion number, taxi number,
			 vehicle identification number (VIN), permit number, or other identifying
			 information as specified by the statutory authority;*
(c)
start and end time of the
			 trip;*
(d)
distance traveled, maximum increment of 0.1 km (0.1 mi);*
(e)
fare in $;
(f)
each rate at which the fare was
			 computed and the associated fare at that rate;*
(g)
additional charges (in $) where
			 permitted such as extras, any surcharges, telecommunication charges, and taxes
			 shall be identified and itemized;*
(h)
total charge for service in $
			 (inclusive of fare, extras, and all additional charges);*
(i)
trip number, if available;**
			 and
(j)
telephone
			 number (or other contract information) for customer
			 assistance.**
Note:
When processed through the taximeter or
				taximeter system, any adjustments (in $) to the total charge for service
				including discounts, credits, and tips shall also be included on the receipt.**
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1989] *[Nonretroactive as of January
				1, 2000] **[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2016]
(Added 1988) (Amended 1999 and 2015)
S.1.9.1.
Multiple Recorded
			 Representations.
S.1.9.1.1.
Duplicate Receipts.
-
A recording
			 element may produce a duplicate receipt for the previous transaction provided
			 the information printed is identical to the original with the exception of time
			 issued. The duplicate receipt shall include the words "duplicate" or "copy."
			 The feature to print a duplicate receipt shall be deactivated at the time the
			 meter is hired for the next fare. [Nonretroactive as of January 1,
			 2000]
(Added 1999)
S.1.10.
Non-fare Information.
-
The fare and extras displays may be used to display
			 auxiliary
information provided the meter is in the vacant
				condition and such information is only displayed for10 seconds, or less. If the
				information consists of a list of information, the list may be displayed one
				item after another, provided that each item is displayed for 10 seconds, or
				less. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2002]
(Added 2000)
S.2.
Basis of Fare Calculations.
- A taximeter shall calculate fares only upon the basis of
(a) distance traveled;
(b) time elapsed; or
(c) a combination of distance traveled and
			 time elapsed. (Amended 1977):
S.2.1.
Initial Time and Distance Intervals.
- The time and distance
			 intervals of a taximeter shall be directly proportional as expressed in the
			 following formula:
Click
				here to view image
(Added 1990)
S.3.
Design of Operating
			 Control.
S.3.1.
Positions of
			 Control.
- The several positions of the operating controls shall be
			 clearly defined and shall be so constructed that accidental or inadvertent
			 changing of the operating condition of the taximeter is improbable. Movement of
			 the operating controls to an operating position immediately following movement
			 to the cleared position shall be delayed enough to permit the taximeter to come
			 to a complete rest in the cleared position.
(Amended 1988)
S.3.2.
Flag.
- If the control
			 for the operating condition is a lever-arm and flag, the flag shall be at its
			 highest position when the taximeter is cleared, and in this position the whole
			 of the flag shall be above the level of the taximeter housing.
S.3.3.
Control for Extras Mechanism.
- The knob, handle, or other means provided to actuate the extras
			 mechanism shall be inoperable whenever the taximeter is cleared.
S.4.
Interference.
-
			 The design of a taximeter shall be such that there will be no interference
			 between the time and the distance portions of the mechanism device at any speed
			 of operation.
(Amended 1977 and 1988)
S.5.
Provision for Security Seals.
- Adequate provision shall be made to provide security for a taximeter.
			 Security may be provided either by:
(a)
			 Affixing security seals to the taximeter and to all other components required
			 for service operation of a complete installation on a vehicle, so that no
			 adjustments, alterations, or replacements affecting accuracy or indications of
			 the device or the assembly can be made without mutilating the seal or seals;
			 or
(b) Using a combination of
			 security seals described in paragraph (a) and, in the case of a component that
			 may be removed from a vehicle (e.g., slide mounting the taximeter), providing a
			 physical or electronic link between components affecting accuracy or
			 indications of the device to ensure that its performance is not affected and
			 operation is permitted only with those components having the same unique
			 properties.
The sealing means shall be such that it is not necessary to
				disassemble or remove any part of the device or of the vehicle to apply or
				inspect the seals.
(Amended 1988 and 2000)
S.6.
Power Interruption, Electronic
			 Taximeters.
(a) After a power
			 interruption of 3 seconds or less, the fare and extras indications shall return
			 to the previously displayed indications and may be susceptible to advancement
			 without the taximeter being cleared.
(b) After a power interruption exceeding 3
			 seconds, the fare and extras indications shall return to the previously
			 displayed indications and shall not be susceptible to advancement until the
			 taximeter is cleared.
After restoration of power following an interruption
				exceeding 3 seconds, the previously displayed fare shall be displayed for a
				maximum of 1 minute at which time the fare shall automatically clear and the
				taximeter shall return to the vacant condition.* [*Nonretroactive as of January
				1, 2002]
(Added 1988) (Amended 1989, 1990, and 2000)
S.7.
Anti-Fraud Provisions,
			 Electronic Taximeters. -
An electronic taximeter may have provisions to
			 detect and eliminate distance input that is inconsistent with output of the
			 vehicle's distance sensor. When a taximeter equipped with this feature detects
			 input inconsistent with the distance sensor:
(a) The meter shall either filter out the
			 inconsistent distance input signals or cease to increment fare based on
			 distance until the distance input signal returns to normal. If the meter ceases
			 to increment fare based on distance, the taximeter may continue to increment
			 fare based on elapsed time;
(b) The
			 taximeter shall provide a visible or audible signal that inconsistent input
			 signals are being detected; and
(c)
			 The taximeter shall record the occurrence in an event logger. The event logger
			 shall include an event counter (000 to 999), the date, and the time of at least
			 the last 1000 occurrences.
(Added 2001)
N.
Notes
N.1.
Distance Tests.
N.1.1.
Test Methods.
- To
			 determine compliance with distance tolerances, a distance test of a taximeter
			 shall be conducted utilizing one or more of the following test methods:
(a)
Road Test.
- A road test
			 consists of driving the vehicle over a precisely measured road
			 course.
(b)
Fifth-Wheel Test.
- A fifth-wheel test consists of driving the vehicle over any reasonable
			 road course and determining the distance actually traveled through the use of a
			 mechanism known as a "fifth wheel" that is attached to the vehicle and that
			 independently measures and indicates the distance.
(c)
Simulated-Road Test.
- A
			 simulated road test consists of determining the distance traveled by use of a
			 roller device, or by computation from rolling circumference and wheel-turn
			 data.
(Amended 1977)
N.1.2.
Test Procedures.
- The
			 distance test of a taximeter, whether a road test, a simulated-road test, or a
			 fifth-wheel test, shall include at least duplicate runs of sufficient length to
			 cover at least the third money drop or 1 mi, whichever is greater, and shall be
			 at a speed approximating the average speed traveled by the vehicle in normal
			 service. In the case of metric-calibrated taximeters, the test should cover at
			 least the third money drop or 2 km, whichever is greater.
(Amended 1977)
N.1.3.
Test Conditions.
N.1.3.1.
Vehicle Lading.
-
			 During the distance test of a taximeter, the vehicle shall carry two persons,
			 or in the case of a simulated-road test, 70 kg or 150 lb of test weights may be
			 substituted in lieu of the second person.
N.1.3.2.
Tire Pressure.
- At
			 the completion of test run or runs, the tires of the vehicle under test shall
			 be checked to determine that the tire pressure is that operating tire pressure
			 posted in the vehicle. If not, the tire pressure should be adjusted to the
			 posted tire pressure and further tests may be conducted to determine the
			 operating characteristics of the taximeter.
(Amended 1977)
N.2.
Time Test.
- If a
			 taximeter is equipped with a timing device through which charges are made for
			 time intervals, the timer shall be tested at the initial interval, four
			 separate subsequent intervals, and an average time test of at least four
			 consecutive subsequent time intervals.
(Amended 1988)
N.3.
Interference Test.
- If a
			 taximeter is equipped with a timing device through which charges are made for
			 time intervals, a test shall be conducted to determine whether there is
			 interference between the time and distance elements. During the interference
			 test, the vehicle's operating speed shall be 3 km/h or 4 km/h, or 2 mi/h or 3
			 mi/h faster than the speed at which the basic distance rate equals the basic
			 time rate. The basic rate per hour divided by the basic rate per mile is the
			 speed (km/h or mi/h) at which the basic time rate and basic distance rate are
			 equal.
(Amended 1988)
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Tolerance Values.
T.1.1.
On Distance Tests.
-
			 Maintenance and acceptance tolerances for taximeters shall be as follows:
(a) On Overregistration: 1 % of the interval
			 under test.
(b) On
			 Underregistration: 4 % of the interval under test, with an added tolerance of
			 30 m or 100 ft whenever the initial interval is included in the interval under
			 test.
T.1.2.
On
			 Time Tests.
T.1.2.1.
On
			 Individual Time Intervals.
- Maintenance and acceptance tolerances on
			 individual time intervals shall be as follows:
(a) On Overregistration: 3 seconds per minute
			 (5 %).
(b) On Underregistration: 9
			 seconds per minute (15 %) on the initial interval, and 6 seconds per minute (10
			 %) on subsequent intervals.
T.1.2.2.
On Average Time Interval
			 Computed After the Initial Interval.
- Except for the initial interval,
			 maintenance and acceptance tolerances on the average time interval shall be as
			 follows:
(a) On Overregistration: 0.2 second
			 per minute (0.33 %).
(b) On
			 Underregistration: 3 seconds per minute (5 %). (Amended 1991)
T.1.3.
On
			 Interference Tests.
T.1.3.1. The
			 registration of a taximeter in the "time on" position shall agree within 1 % of
			 its performance in the "time off" position.
(Added 1988)
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Inflation of Vehicle Tires.
- The operational tire pressure of passenger vehicles and truck tires
			 shall be posted in the vehicle and shall be maintained at the posted pressure.
(Amended 1977)
UR.2.
Position and Illumination of
			 Taximeter.
- A taximeter shall be so positioned and illuminated that its
			 indications, operational markings, and controls of passenger interest can be
			 conveniently read by a passenger seated in the back seat of the vehicle.
(Amended 1985 and 1986)
UR.3.
Statement of Rates.
- The
			 distance and time rates for which a taximeter is set, including the initial
			 distance interval and the initial time interval, the local tax rate, and the
			 schedule of extras when an extras indication is provided shall be conspicuously
			 displayed inside the front and rear passenger compartments. The words "Rate,"
			 "Rates," or "Rates of Fare" shall precede the rate statement. The rate
			 statement shall be fully informative, self-explanatory, and readily
			 understandable by the ordinary passenger, and shall either be of a permanent
			 character or be protected by glass or other suitable transparent material.
(Amended 1977, 1988, 1990, and 1999)
Section 5.55.
Timing Devices
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code applies to devices used to measure time during which
			 services are being dispensed (such as vehicle parking, laundry drying, and car
			 washing). This code also applies to Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE)
			 when used to assess charges for time-based services in addition to those
			 charged for electrical energy.
(Amended 2015)
A.2.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code, Timing Devices shall
			 meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Design of Indicating and
			 Recording Elements and of Recorded Representations.
S.1.1.
Primary Elements.
S.1.1.1.
General.
- A timing
			 device shall be equipped with a primary indicating element, and may also be
			 equipped with a primary recording element. A timing device incorporated into an
			 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment system for use in assessing charges for
			 timing separate from charges for electrical energy shall be equipped with the
			 capability to provide a recorded representation of the transaction through a
			 built-in or separate recording element. A readily observable in-service light
			 or other equally effective means that automatically indicates when laundry
			 driers, vacuum cleaners, and car washes are in operation shall be deemed an
			 appropriate primary indicating element.
(Amended 1979 and 2015)
S.1.1.2.
Units.
- A timing
			 device shall indicate and record, if the device is equipped to record, the time
			 in terms of minutes for time intervals of 60 minutes or less and in hours and
			 minutes for time intervals greater than 60 minutes.
S.1.1.3.
Value of Smallest Unit.
- The value of the smallest unit of indicated time and recorded time, if
			 the device is equipped to record, shall not exceed the equivalent of:
(a) one-half hour on parking meters
			 indicating time in excess of two hours;
(b) six minutes on parking meters indicating
			 time in excess of one but not greater than two hours; or
(c) five minutes on all other devices, except
			 those equipped with an in-service light. (Amended 1975)
S.1.1.4.
Advancement of Indicating and
			 Recording Elements.
- Primary indicating and recording elements shall be
			 susceptible to advancement only during the mechanical operation of the device,
			 except that clocks may be equipped to manually reset the time.
S.1.1.5.
Operation of In-Service
			 Indicator Light.
- For devices equipped with an in-service indicator
			 light, the indicator shall be operative only during the time the device is in
			 operation.
(Amended 2015)
S.1.1.6.
Discontinuous Indicating
			 Parking Meters.
- An indication of the time purchased shall be provided
			 at the time the meter is activated in units of no more than one minute for
			 times less than one hour and not more than two minutes for times of one hour or
			 more. Convenient means shall be provided to indicate to the purchaser the
			 unexpired time.
(Added 1975) (Amended 1976)
S.1.2.
Graduations.
S.1.2.1.
Length.
- Graduations
			 shall be so varied in length that they may be conveniently read.
S.1.2.2.
Width.
- In any series
			 of graduations, the width of a graduation shall in no case be greater than the
			 width of the minimum clear interval between graduations and the width of main
			 graduations shall be not more than 50 % greater than the width of subordinate
			 graduations. Graduations shall in no case be less than 0.2 mm (0.008 in) in
			 width.
S.1.2.3.
Clear
			 Interval Between Graduations.
- The clear interval shall be not less
			 than 0.75 mm (0.03 in). If the graduations are not parallel, the measurement
			 shall be made:
(a) along the line of relative
			 movement between the graduations at the end of the indicator; or
(b) if the indicator is continuous, at the
			 point of widest separation of the graduations.
S.1.3.
Indicators.
S.1.3.1.
Symmetry.
- The index
			 of an indicator shall be symmetrical with respect to the graduations, at least
			 throughout that portion of its length associated with the
			 graduations.
S.1.3.2.
Length.
- The index of an indicator shall reach to the finest
			 graduations with which it is used, unless the indicator and the graduations are
			 in the same plane, in which case the distance between the end of the indicator
			 and the ends of the graduations, measured along the line of the graduations,
			 shall be not more than 1.0 mm (0.04 in).
S.1.3.3.
Width.
- The width of
			 the index of an indicator in relation to the series of graduations with which
			 it is used shall be not greater than:
(a) the
			 width of the widest graduation; and
(b) the width of the minimum clear interval
			 between the graduations.
S.1.3.4.
Parallax.
- Parallax
			 effect shall be reduced to a practicable minimum.
S.1.4.
Recorded
			 Representations.
S.1.4.1.
Recorded Representations, Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE) Timing
			 Devices.
- A timing device incorporated into an EVSE for use in
			 assessing charges for timing separate from charges for electrical energy shall
			 issue a recorded representation itemizing the charges for these services as
			 defined in Section 3.40. Electric Vehicle Fueling Systems.
(Added 2015)
S.1.4.1.1.
Duplicate Receipts.
- Duplicate receipts are permissible, provided the word "duplicate" or
			 "copy" is included on the receipt.
(Added 2015)
S.1.4.2.
Recorded Representations, All
			 Other Timing Devices
. - A printed ticket issued or stamped by a timing
			 device shall have printed clearly thereon:
(a)
			 the time and day when the service ends and the time and day when the service
			 begins, except that a self-service money-operated device that clearly displays
			 the time of day need not record the time and day when the service begins;
			 or
(b) the time interval purchased,
			 and the time and day that the service either begins or ends. (Added 2015)
(Amended 1983 and 2015)
S.2.
Marking
			 Requirements, Operating Instructions.
- Operating instructions shall be
			 clearly stated on the device.
S.3.
Interference.
- The design of the EVSE shall be such that there
			 will be no interference between the time and electrical energy measurement
			 elements of the system.
(Added 2015)
S.4.
Provisions for Sealing.
-
			 Adequate provisions shall be made to provide security for the timing element.
			 (Added 2015)
S.5.
Power
			 Interruption.
- In the event of a power loss, the information needed to
			 complete any transaction (i.e., delivery is complete and payment is settled) in
			 progress at the time of the power loss (such as the quantity and unit price, or
			 sales price) shall be determinable through one of the means listed below or the
			 transaction shall be terminated without any charge for the electrical energy
			 transfer to the vehicle:
(a) at the
			 EVSE;
(b) at the console, if the
			 console is accessible to the customer;
(c) via on site Internet access; or
(d) through toll-free phone access.
For EVSEs in parking areas where vehicles are commonly left for
				extended periods, the information needed to complete any transaction in
				progress at the time of the power loss shall be determinable through one of the
				above means for at least eight hours.
(Added 2015)
S.5.1.
Transaction Termination.
- In the event of a power loss, either:
(a) the transaction shall terminate at the
			 time of the power loss; or
(b) the
			 EVSE may continue charging without additional authorization if the EVSE is able
			 to determine it is connected to the same vehicle before and after the supply
			 power outage.
In either case, there must be a clear indication on the receipt
				provided to the customer of the interruption, including the date and time of
				the interruption along with other information required under S.1.4.2. Recorded
				Representations, All Other Timing Devices.
(Added 2015)
S.5.2.
User Information.
- The
			 EVSE memory, or equipment on the network supporting the EVSE, shall retain
			 information on the quantity of time and the sales price totals during a power
			 loss.
(Added 2015)
N.
Notes
N.1.
Test Method.
- A timing
			 device shall be tested with a timepiece with an error of not greater than plus
			 or minus 15 seconds per 24-hour period. In the test of timing devices with a
			 nominal capacity of 1 hour or less, stopwatches with a minimum division of not
			 greater than one-fifth second shall be used. In the test of timing devices with
			 a nominal capacity of more than one hour, the value of the minimum division on
			 the timepiece shall be not greater than one second. Time pieces and stopwatches
			 shall be calibrated with standard time signals as described in National
			 Institute of Standards and Technology Special Publication 432, NIST Time and
			 Frequency Dissemination Services, or any superseding publication.
(Amended 1978)
N.2.
Broadcast Times and Frequencies.
- Time and frequency standards are broadcast by the stations listed in
			 Table N.2. Broadcast Times and Frequencies.
Table N.2.* Broadcast Times and
						  Frequencies
Station
Location, Latitude, Longitude
Frequency (MHz)
Times of
Transmission
(UTC)
WWV
Fort Collins, Colorado 40°41' N 105°02'
						  W
2.5
5.0
10.0
15.0
20.0
Continuous
WWVH
Kauai, Hawaii 21°59' N 159°46' W
2.5
5.0
10.0
15.0
Continuous
CHU
Ottawa, Canada 45°18' N 75°45' W
3.330
7.335
14.670
14.670
Continuous
*From NIST Special Publication 559, "Time and Frequency Users'
				Manual," 1990. (Added 1988)
N.3.
Interference Tests, EVSE.
- On an EVSE equipped with a timing device used to calculate time-based
			 charges in addition to any charges assessed for electrical energy, a test shall
			 be conducted to ensure that there is no interference between time and
			 electrical energy measuring elements.
(Added 2015)
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Tolerance Values.
-
			 Maintenance and acceptance tolerances for timing devices shall be as follows:
T.1.1.
For Timing Devices Other Than
			 Those Specified in T.1.2. For Time Clocks and Time Recorders and T.1.3. On
			 Parking Meters.
- The maintenance and acceptance tolerances shall be:
(a) On Overregistration: five seconds for any
			 time interval of one minute or more; and (Amended 1986)
(b) On Underregistration: six seconds per
			 indicated minute. (Amended 1975)
T.1.2.
For Time Clocks and Time
			 Recorders.
- The maintenance and acceptance tolerances on over-
regi stration and underregistration shall be three seconds per
				hour, but not to exceed one minute per day.
(Amended 1975)
T.1.3.
On Parking Meters and Other
			 Timing Devices Used to Assess Charges for Parking.
- The maintenance and
			 acceptance tolerances are shown in Table T.1.3. Maintenance and Acceptance
			 Tolerances for Parking Meters and Other Timing Devices Used to Assess Charges
			 For Parking.
(Amended 2015)
Table T.1.3.
Maintenance and Acceptance Tolerances for Parking
						  Meters and
Other Timing Devices Used to Assess Charges for
						  Parking
Maintenance and Acceptance
						  Tolerances
Nominal Time Capacity
On Overregistration
On Underregistration
30 minutes or less
No tolerance
10 seconds per minute, but not less than 2
						  minutes
Over 30 minutes to and including 1 hour
No tolerance
5 minutes plus 4 seconds per minute over 30
						  minutes
Over 1 hour
No tolerance
7 minutes plus 2 minutes per hour over 1 hour
(Amended 2015)
T.2.
Tests Involving Digital
			 Indications or Representations.
- To the tolerances that would otherwise
			 be applied, there shall be added an amount equal to one-half the minimum value
			 that can be indicated or recorded.
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Statement of Rates.
- The
			 following information shall be clearly, prominently, and conspicuously
			 displayed:
(a) the price in terms of money per
			 unit or units of time for the service dispensed; and
(b) for a timing device other than an EVSE,
			 the number of coins the device will accept and be activated by at one time.
(Amended 1976 and 2015)
UR.2.
Time Representations.
-
			 Any time representation shall be within plus or minus two minutes of the
			 correct time in effect in the area, except on an individual clock used only for
			 "time out"; in addition, the time indication of the "time-out" clock shall be
			 the same as or less than that of the "time-in" clock.
(Amended 1975)
Section 5.56.(a)
Grain Moisture
			 Meters
Section 5.56. was reorganized into two sections beginning
				with the 1997 Edition of NIST Handbook 44. This Section, 5.56.(a), applies to
				all NTEP grain moisture meters. It also applies to any grain moisture meter
				manufactured or placed into service after January 1, 1998.
(Code reorganized and renumbered 1996)
A.
Application
A.1.
General Code.
- This code
			 applies to grain moisture meters, that is, devices used to indicate directly
			 the moisture content of cereal grain and oil seeds. The code consists of
			 general requirements applicable to all moisture meters and specific
			 requirements applicable only to certain types of moisture meters. Requirements
			 cited for "test weight per bushel" indications or recorded representations are
			 applicable only to devices incorporating an automatic test weight per bushel
			 measuring feature.
(Amended 2003)
A.2.
Exceptions.
- This code
			 does not apply to devices used for in-motion measurement of grain moisture
			 content or seed moisture content.
A.3.
Type Evaluation.
- The
			 National Type Evaluation Program (NTEP) will accept for type evaluation only
			 those devices that comply with this code. State enforcement will be based upon
			 the effective dates identified with each requirement when specific dates are
			 shown.
(Added 1993)
A.4.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code, 5.56.(a) Grain Moisture
			 Meters shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Design of Indicating, Recording, and Measuring Elements.
			 S.1.1.
Digital Indications and Recording Elements.
(a) Meters shall be equipped with a digital
			 indicating element.
(b) The minimum
			 height for the digits used to display moisture content shall be 10
			 mm.
(c) Meters shall be equipped
			 with a communication interface that permits interfacing with a recording
			 element and transmitting the date, grain type, grain moisture results, test
			 weight per volume results, and calibration version identification.
(d) A digital indicating element shall not
			 display, and a recording element shall not record, any moisture content values
			 or test weight per volume values before the end of the measurement
			 cycle.
(e) Moisture content results
			 shall be displayed and recorded as percent moisture content, wet basis. Test
			 weight per bushel results shall be displayed and recorded as pounds per bushel.
			 Subdivisions of these units shall be in terms of decimal subdivisions (not
			 fractions).
(f) A meter shall not
			 display or record any moisture content or test weight per volume values when
			 the moisture content of the grain sample is beyond the operating range of the
			 device, unless the moisture and test weight representations include a clear
			 error indication (and recorded error message with the recorded
			 representation).
(g) On
			 multi-constituent meters (e.g., meters which also measure grain protein),
			 provision shall be made for displaying and recording the constituent label
			 (such as moisture, protein, etc.) to make it clear which constituent is
			 associated with each of the displayed and recorded values.
(Added 1995)
(Amended 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, and 2003)
S.1.2.
Selecting or Recording Grain or
			 Seed Type and Class.
- Provision shall be made for selecting and
			 recording the type and class or multi-class group (as appropriate) of grain or
			 seed to be measured. The means to select the type and class or multi-class
			 group of grain or seed shall be readily visible and the type and class or
			 multi-class group of grain or seed selected shall be clearly and definitely
			 identified. Abbreviations for grain types and multi-class groups indicated on
			 the meter must meet the minimum acceptable abbreviations listed in Table S.1.2.
			 Grain Types and Multi-Class Groups Considered for Type Evaluation and
			 Calibration and Their Minimum Acceptable Abbreviations.
(Amended 1993, 1995, and 2007)
Table S.1.2. Grain Types and Multi-Class
						  Groups Considered for Type Evaluation and Calibration and
						  Their
Minimum Acceptable
						  Abbreviations
Grain Type
Grain Class
Minimum Acceptable
						  Abbreviation
Barley
All-Class Barley*
BARLEY
Six-Rowed Barley
SRB
Two-Rowed Barley
TRB
Corn
---
CORN
Grain Sorghum
---
SORG or MILO
Oats
---
OATS
Rice
All-Class Rough Rice*
RGHRICE
Long Grain Rough Rice
LGRR
Medium Grain Rough Rice
MGRR
Small Oil Seeds (under
						  consideration)
---
---
Soybeans
---
SOYB
Sunflower seed (Oil)
---
SUNF
Wheat
All-Class Wheat*
WHEAT
Durum Wheat
DURW
Hard Red Spring Wheat
HRSW
Hard Red Winter Wheat
HRWW
Hard White Wheat
HDWW
Soft Red Winter Wheat
SRWW
Soft White Wheat
SWW
Wheat Excluding Durum*
WHTEXDUR
Note:
Grain Types marked with an asterisk (*) are
				"Multi-Class Calibrations."
[Nonretroactive as of January 1,
				1998]
(Table Added 1993) (Amended 1995, 1998, and 2007)
S.1.3.
Operating Range.
- A
			 meter shall automatically and clearly indicate when the operating range of the
			 meter has been exceeded. The operating range shall specify the following:
(a)
Temperature Range of the Meter.
- The temperature range over which the meter may be used and still
			 comply with the applicable requirements shall be specified. The minimum
			 temperature range shall be 10 °C to 30 °C. No moisture value may be
			 displayed when the temperature range is exceeded. An appropriate message shall
			 be displayed when the temperature of the meter is outside its specified
			 operating range.
(b)
Temperature Range of each Grain or Seed.
- The temperature range
			 for each grain or seed for which the meter is to be used shall be specified.
			 The minimum temperature range for each grain shall be 0 °C to 40 °C. No
			 moisture value may be displayed when the temperature range is exceeded. An
			 appropriate error message shall be displayed when the temperature of the grain
			 sample exceeds the specified temperature range for the grain.
(c)
Moisture Range of the Grain or
			 Seed.
- The moisture range for each grain or seed for which the meter is
			 to be used shall be specified. Moisture and test weight per bushel values may
			 be displayed when the moisture range is exceeded if accompanied by a clear
			 indication that the moisture range has been exceeded.
(Amended 2003)
(d)
Maximum Allowable Meter/Grain
			 Temperature Difference.
- The maximum allowable difference in
			 temperature between the meter and the sample for which an accurate moisture
			 determination can be made shall be specified. The minimum temperature
			 difference shall be 10 °C. No moisture value may be displayed when the
			 maximum allowable temperature difference is exceeded. An appropriate error
			 message shall be displayed when the difference in temperature between the meter
			 and the sample exceeds the specified difference.
(Added 1993) (Amended 1995)
S.1.4.
Value of Smallest Unit.
- The display shall permit moisture value determination to both 0.01 %
			 and 0.1 % resolution. The 0.1 % resolution is for commercial transactions; the
			 0.01 % resolution is for type evaluation and calibration purposes only, not for
			 commercial purposes. Test weight per bushel values shall be determined to the
			 nearest 0.1 pound per bushel.
(Amended 2003)
S.1.5.
Operating Temperature.
(a) Warm-up period: When a meter is turned on
			 it shall not display or record any usable values until the operating
			 temperature necessary for accurate determination has been attained, or the
			 meter shall bear a conspicuous statement adjacent to the indication stating
			 that the meter shall be turned on for a time period specified by the
			 manufacturer prior to use.
(b) A
			 meter shall meet the requirements of T.2. Tolerances when operated in the
			 temperature range of 10 °C to 30 °C (50 °F to 86 °F) or within
			 the range specified by the meter manufacturer.
(c) If the manufacturer specifies a
			 temperature range, the range shall be at least 20 °C (36 °F). (Added
			 1993) (Amended 1995 and 1996)
S.2.
Design of Grain Moisture
			 Meters.
S.2.1.
Minimum Sample
			 Size.
- Meters shall be designed to measure the moisture content of
			 representative-size grain samples. The minimum allowable sample size used in
			 analysis shall be 100 g or 400 kernels or seeds, whichever is smaller.
(Added 1993) (Amended 1995)
S.2.2.
Electric Power Supply.
S.2.2.1.
Power Supply, Voltage and
			 Frequency.
(a) A meter that operates
			 using alternating current must perform within the tolerances defined in Section
			 T.2. Tolerances over the line voltage range 100 V to 130 V, or 200 V to 250 V
			 rms as designed, and over the frequency range of 59.5 Hz to 60.5 Hz.
(b) Battery-operated instruments shall not
			 indicate or record values outside the applicable tolerance limits when battery
			 power output is excessive or deficient.
S.2.2.2.
Power Interruption.
-
			 A power interruption shall not cause an indicating or recording element to
			 display or record any values outside the applicable tolerance limits.
(Added 1988)
S.2.3.
Level Indicating Means.
- A meter shall be equipped with a level indicator and leveling
			 adjustments if its performance is changed by an amount greater than the
			 applicable tolerance when the meter is moved from a level position to a
			 position that is out of level in any upright direction by up to 5 %
			 (approximately three degrees). The level-indicating means shall be readable
			 without removing any meter parts requiring a tool.
(Added 1988) (Amended 1994)
S.2.4.
Calibration Integrity.
S.2.4.1.
Calibration Version.
-
			 A meter must be capable of displaying either calibration constants, a unique
			 calibration name, or a unique calibration version number for use in verifying
			 that the latest version of the calibration is being used to make moisture
			 content and test weight per bushel determinations.
(Added 1993) (Amended 1995 and 2003)
S.2.4.2.
Calibration Corruption.
- If calibration constants are digitally stored in an electronically
			 alterable form, the meter shall be designed to make automatic checks to detect
			 corruption of calibration constants. An error message must be displayed if
			 calibration constants have been electronically altered.
(Added 1993) (Amended 1995)
S.2.4.3.
Calibration Transfer.
- The instrument hardware/software design and
			 calibration procedures shall permit calibration development and the transfer of
			 calibrations between instruments of like models without requiring user slope or
			 bias adjustments.
[
Note:
Only the manufacturer or the
				manufacturer's designated service agency may make standardization adjustments
				on moisture meters. This does not preclude the possibility of the operator
				installing manufacturer-specified calibration constants under the instructions
				of the manufacturer or its designated service agency.] Standardization
				adjustments (not to be confused with grain calibrations) are those physical
				adjustments or software parameters which make meters of like type respond
				identically to the grain(s) being measured. [Nonretroactive as of January 1,
				1999]
(Added 1994) (Amended 1998)
S.2.5.
Provision for Sealing.
-
			 Provision shall be made for applying a security seal in a manner that requires
			 the security seal to be broken, or for using other approved means of providing
			 security (e.g., audit trail available at the time of inspection as defined in
			 Table S.2.5. Categories of Device and Methods of Sealing) before any change
			 that affects the metrological integrity of the device can be made to any
			 mechanism.
Table S.2.5. Categories of Device and
						  Methods of Sealing
Categories of
						  Device
Methods of Sealing
Category 1:
No
						  remote configuration capability.
Seal by physical seal or two event counters:
						  one for calibration parameters (000 to 999) and one for configuration
						  parameters (000 to 999). If equipped with event counters, the device must be
						  capable of displaying, or printing through the device or through another
						  on-site device, the contents of the counters.
Category 2:
Remote configuration capability, but access is
						  controlled by physical hardware.
A device shall clearly indicate that it is in
						  the remote configuration mode and shall not be capable of operating in the
						  measure mode while enabled for remote configuration.
The hardware enabling access for remote
						  communication must be at the device and sealed using a physical seal or two
						  event counters: one for calibration parameters (000 to 999) and one for
						  configuration parameters (000 to 999). If equipped with event counters, the
						  device must be capable of displaying, or printing through the device or through
						  another on-site device, the contents of the counters.
Category 3:
Remote configuration capability access may be unlimited
						  or controlled through a software switch (e.g., password).
When accessed for the purpose of modifying
						  sealable parameters, the device shall clearly indicate that it is in the
						  configuration mode and shall not be capable of operating in the measuring
						  mode.
An event logger is required in the device; it
						  must include an event counter (000 to 999), the parameter ID, the date and time
						  of the change, and the new value of the parameter (for calibration changes
						  consisting of multiple constants, the calibration version number may be used
						  rather than the calibration constants). A printed copy of the information must
						  be available through the device or through another on-site device. The event
						  logger shall have a capacity to retain records equal to 25 times the number of
						  sealable parameters in the device, but not more than 1000 records are required.
						  (Note: Does not require 1000 changes to be stored for each
						  parameter.)
Category 3a:
No
						  remote capability, but operator is able to make changes that affect the
						  metrological integrity of the device (e.g., slope, bias, etc.) in normal
						  operation.
*When accessed for the purpose of modifying
						  sealable parameters, the device shall clearly indicate that it is in the
						  configuration mode and shall not be capable of operating in the measuring
						  mode.
Same as Category 3
Category 3b:
No
						  remote capability, but access to metrological parameters is controlled through
						  a software switch (e.g., password).
*When accessed for the purpose of modifying
						  sealable parameters, the device shall clearly indicate that it is in the
						  configuration mode and shall not be capable of operating in the measuring
						  mode.
Same as Category 3
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1999] [*Nonretroactive
				as of January 1, 2014]
(Amended 1998 and 2013)
Note
: Zero-setting and test point adjustments are
				considered to affect metrological characteristics and must be sealed. (Added
				1993) (Amended 1995 and 1997)
S.2.6.
Determination of Quantity and Temperature.
- The moisture meter
			 system shall not require the operator to judge the precise volume or weight and
			 temperature needed to make an accurate moisture determination. External
			 grinding, weighing, and temperature measurement operations are not permitted.
			 In addition, if the meter is capable of measuring test weight per bushel,
			 determination of sample volume and weight for this measurement shall be fully
			 automatic
and means shall be provided to ensure that measurements of
			 test weight per volume are not allowed to be displayed or printed when an
			 insufficient sample volume is available to provide an accurate measurement.
			 [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2004]
(Added 1994) (Amended 1995 and 2003)
S.3.
Accessory Equipment.
- When the operating instructions for a moisture meter require accessory
			 equipment separate from and external to the moisture meter, such equipment
			 shall be appropriate and complete for the measurement.
S.4.
Operating Instructions and Use
			 Limitations.
- The manufacturer shall furnish operating instructions for
			 the device and accessories that include complete information concerning the
			 accuracy, sensitivity, and use of accessory equipment necessary in obtaining a
			 moisture content. Operating instructions shall include the following
			 information:
(a) name and address or trademark
			 of the manufacturer;
(b) the type
			 or design of the device with which it is intended to be used;
(c) date of issue;
(d) the kinds or classes of grain or seed for
			 which the device is designed to measure moisture content and test weight per
			 bushel; and
(Amended 2003)
(e) the limitations of use, including but not
			 confined to the moisture measurement range, grain or seed temperature, maximum
			 allowable temperature difference between grain sample and meter, kind or class
			 of grain or seed, moisture meter temperature, voltage and frequency ranges,
			 electromagnetic interferences, and necessary accessory equipment.
(Added 1984)
N.
Notes
N.1.
Testing Procedures.
-
			 Field evaluation of grain moisture meters shall be performed by one of the
			 following methods:
N.1.1.
Air Oven
			 Reference Method Transfer Standards.
- Official grain samples shall be
			 used as the official transfer standards with moisture content and test weight
			 per bushel values assigned by the reference methods. The reference methods for
			 moisture shall be the oven drying methods as specified by the USDA GIPSA. The
			 test weight per bushel value assigned to a test weight transfer standard shall
			 be the average of 10 test weight per bushel determinations using the quart
			 kettle test weight per bushel apparatus as specified by the USDA GIPSA.
			 Tolerances shall be applied to the average of at least three measurements on
			 each official grain sample. Official grain samples shall be clean and naturally
			 moist, but not tempered (i.e., water not added).
(Amended 1992, 2001, and 2003)
N.1.2.
Minimum Test.
- A minimum
			 test of a grain moisture meter shall consist of tests using samples
(need not exceed three) of each grain or seed type for which
				the device is used, and for each grain or seed type shall include the
				following:
(a) tests of moisture
			 indications, using samples having at least two different moisture content
			 values within the operating range of the device; and
(b) if applicable, tests of test weight per
			 volume indications, with at least the lowest moisture samples used in (a)
			 above.
(Added 2003)
(Amended 1986, 1989, and 2003)
N.1.3.
Meter to Like-Type Meter Method
			 Transfer Standards.
- Properly standardized reference meters using
			 National Type Evaluation Program approved calibrations shall be used as
			 transfer standards. A reference meter shall be of the same type as the meter
			 under test. Tests shall be conducted side-by-side using, as a comparison
			 medium, grain samples that are clean and naturally moist, but not tempered
			 (i.e., water not added).
(Added 2001)
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
To Underregistration and to
			 Overregistration.
- The tolerances hereinafter prescribed shall be
			 applied to errors of underregistration and errors of
			 overregistration.
T.2.
Tolerances.
T.2.1.
Air Oven
			 Reference Method.
- Maintenance and acceptance tolerances shall be as
			 shown in
Table T.2.1. Acceptance and Maintenance Tolerances Air Oven
				Reference Method. Tolerances are expressed as a fraction of the percent
				moisture content of the official grain sample, together with a minimum
				tolerance.
(Amended 2001)
Table T.2.1. Acceptance and Maintenance
						  Tolerances Air Oven Reference Method
Type of Grain, Class, or Seed
Tolerance
Minimum Tolerance
Corn, oats, rice, sorghum, sunflower
0.05 of the percent moisture content
0.8 % in moisture content
All other cereal grains and oil seeds
0.04 of the percent moisture content
0.7 % in moisture content
(Amended 2001)
T.2.2.
Meter to Like-Type Meter Method.
- Maintenance and acceptance tolerances shall be as shown in Table
			 T.2.2. Acceptance and Maintenance Tolerances Meter to Like-Type Meter Method.
			 The tolerances shall apply to all types of grain and seed.
(Added 2001)
Table T.2.2. Acceptance and Maintenance
						  Tolerances Meter to Like-Type Meter Method
Sample Reference Moisture
Tolerance
Up to 22 %
0.5 % in moisture content
(Added 2001)
T.3.
For Test Weight Per Bushel
			 Indications or Recorded Representations. -
The maintenance and
			 acceptance tolerances on test weight per bushel indications or recorded
			 representations shall be as shown in Table T.3. Acceptance and Maintenance
			 Tolerances Test Weight per Bushel. Tolerances are (+) positive or (-) negative
			 with respect to the value assigned to the official grain sample.
(Amended 1992 and 2003)
Table T.3. Acceptance and Maintenance Tolerances
						  Test Weight per Bushel
Type of Grain or Seed
Tolerance (Pounds Per Bushel)
Corn, oats
0.8
All wheat classes
0.5
Soybeans, all barley classes, all rice classes,
						  sunflower, sorghum
0.7
(Added 2003)
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Selection Requirements.
UR.1.1.
Value of the Smallest Unit on
			 Primary Indicating and Recording Elements. -
The resolution of the
			 moisture meter display shall be 0.1 % moisture and 0.1 pounds per bushel test
			 weight during commercial use.
(Amended 2003)
UR.1.2.
See G-UR.1.2.
			 Environment.
UR.2.
Installation Requirements. -
The grain moisture meter shall be installed in an environment within the
			 range of temperature and/or other environmental factors specified in the
			 operating instructions.
UR.3.
Use Requirements.
UR.3.1.
Operating Instructions. -
The operating instructions for the use of the
			 grain moisture meter shall be readily available to the user, service
			 technician, and weights and measures official at the place of installation. It
			 shall include a list of accessory equipment and the kinds of grain or seed to
			 be measured with the moisture meter.
(Amended 1988)
UR.3.2.
Other Devices Not Used for
			 Commercial Measurement. -
If there are other moisture meters on the
			 premises not used for trade or determining other charges for services, these
			 devices shall be clearly and conspicuously marked "Not for Use in Trade or
			 Commerce."
UR.3.3.
Maintaining Integrity of Grain Samples. -
Whenever there is a time lapse
			 (temperature change) between taking the sample and testing the sample, means to
			 prevent condensation of moisture or loss of moisture from grain samples shall
			 be used. For example, a cold grain sample may be kept in a closed container in
			 order to permit the cold grain to come to the operating temperature range of
			 the meter before the grain moisture measurements are made.
UR.3.4.
Printed Tickets.
(a) Printed tickets shall be free from any
			 previous indication of moisture content or type of grain or seed
			 selected.
(b) The customer shall be
			 given a printed ticket at the time of the transaction or as otherwise specified
			 by the customer. The printed ticket shall include the date, grain type, grain
			 moisture results, test weight per bushel, and calibration version
			 identification. The ticket information shall be generated by the grain moisture
			 meter system.
(Amended 1993, 1995, 2003, and 2013)
UR.3.5.
Accessory Devices.
			 -
Accessory devices, if necessary in the determination of a moisture
			 content value, shall be in close proximity to the moisture meter and allow
			 immediate use.
UR.3.6.
Sampling. -
A grain sample shall be obtained by following appropriate
			 sampling methods and equipment. These include, but are not limited to grain
			 probes of appropriate length used at random locations in the bulk, the use of a
			 pelican sampler, or other techniques and equipment giving equivalent results.
			 The grain sample shall be taken such that it is representative of the
			 lot.
UR.3.7.
Location. -
Also see G-UR.3.3. Position of Equipment.
UR.3.8.
Level Condition. -
If
			 equipped with a level indicator, a meter shall be maintained in a level
			 condition.
(Added 1988)
UR.3.9.
Current Calibration Data. -
Grain moisture determinations shall be made using only the most recently
			 published calibration data.
(Added 1988)
UR.3.10.
Posting of Meter Operating
			 Range. -
The operating range of the grain moisture meter shall be
			 clearly and conspicuously posted in the place of business such that the
			 information is readily visible from a reasonable customer position. The posted
			 information shall include the following:
(a)
			 The temperature range over which the meter may be used and still comply with
			 the applicable requirements. If the temperature range varies for different
			 grains or seed, the range shall be specified for each.
(b) The moisture range for each grain or seed
			 for which the meter is to be used.
(c) The temperature range for each grain or
			 seed for which the meter is to be used.
(d) The maximum allowable difference in
			 temperature that may exist between the meter and the sample for which an
			 accurate moisture determination can be made.
(Added 1988)
Section
			 5.56.(b)
Grain Moisture Meters
Section 5.56. was reorganized into two sections beginning
				with the 1997 Edition of NIST Handbook 44. This Section, 5.56.(b), applies to
				all non-NTEP grain moisture meters manufactured or placed into service before
				January 1, 1998.
(Code reorganized and renumbered 1996)
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code
			 applies to grain moisture meters; that is, devices used to indicate directly or
			 through conversion and/or correction tables the moisture content of cereal
			 grain and oil seeds. The code consists of general requirements applicable to
			 all moisture meters and specific requirements applicable only to certain types
			 of moisture meters.
A.2.
Exceptions
. - This code does not apply to devices used for in-motion
			 measurement of grain moisture content or seed moisture content.
A.3.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code, 5.56.(b) Grain Moisture
			 Meters shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Design
			 of Indicating and Recording Elements and of Recorded Representations.
S.1.1.
Primary Elements, General.
- A meter shall be equipped with a primary indicating element and may
			 also be equipped with a primary recording element. If the meter indicates
			 directly and/or is equipped to record, the meter shall indicate and/or record
			 its measurements in terms of percent moisture content, wet basis. Subdivisions
			 of this unit shall be in terms of decimal subdivisions (not fractions). If the
			 meter indicates in the conventional scale and requires conversion or correction
			 tables, the resulting values after use of such tables shall be in terms of
			 percent moisture content, wet basis. Subdivisions of this unit shall be in
			 terms of decimal subdivisions (not fractions).
S.1.2.
Digital Indications.
S.1.2.1.
Measurement Completion.
- A digital indicating element shall not display any values (either
			 moisture content or conventional scale) before the end of the measurement
			 cycle.
S.1.3.
Graduations.
S.1.3.1.
Length.
- Graduations shall be so varied in length that they may be conveniently
			 read.
S.1.3.2.
Width.
- In any series of graduations, the width of a graduation shall in no
			 case be greater than the width of the minimum clear interval between
			 graduations, and the width of the main graduations shall be not more than 50 %
			 greater than the width of subordinate graduations. Graduations shall in no case
			 be less than 0.2 mm (0.008 in) in width.
S.1.3.3.
Clear Interval between
			 Graduations.
- The clear interval shall be not less than 0.75 mm (0.03
			 in) between graduations. If the graduations are not parallel, the measurement
			 shall be made:
(a) along the line of relative
			 movement between the graduations at the end of the indicator; or
(b) if the indicator is continuous, at the
			 point of widest separation of the graduations.
S.1.4.
Indicators.
S.1.4.1.
Symmetry.
- The index
			 of an indicator shall be symmetrical with respect to the graduations, at least
			 throughout that portion of its length associated with the
			 graduations.
S.1.4.2.
Length.
- The index of an indicator shall reach to the finest
			 graduations with which it is used, unless the indicator and the graduations are
			 in the same plane, in which case the distance between the end of the indicator
			 and the ends of the graduations, measured along the line of the graduations,
			 shall be not more than 1.0 mm (0.04 in).
S.1.4.3.
Width.
- The width of
			 the index of an indicator in relation to the series of graduations with which
			 it is used shall be not greater than:
(a) the
			 width of the widest graduation; nor
(b) the width of the minimum clear interval
			 between graduations.
When the index of an indicator extends along the entire length
				of a graduation, that portion of the index of the indicator that may be brought
				into coincidence with the graduation shall be of the same width as the
				graduation throughout the length of the index that coincides with the
				graduation.
S.1.4.4.
Clearance.
- The
			 clearance between the index of an indicator and the graduations shall in no
			 case be more than 1.5 mm (0.06 in).
S.1.4.5.
Parallax.
- Parallax
			 effects shall be reduced to the practicable minimum.
S.1.5.
Recording Elements.
S.1.5.1.
General.
- If a meter
			 is equipped with a recording element, it shall record in terms of percent
			 moisture content, wet basis only, and not in terms of conventional
			 scale.
S.1.5.2.
Measurement
			 Completion.
- A recording element shall not record any values before the
			 end of the measurement cycle.
S.1.5.3.
Range of Moisture Content.
- A recording element shall not record any values when the moisture
			 content of the grain sample is beyond the operating range of the
			 device.
S.1.6.
Design of Direct Reading Grain Moisture Meters.
S.1.6.1.
Grain or Seed Kind and Class
			 Selection and Recording.
- Provision shall be made for selecting and
			 recording, if equipped to record, the kind and class (as appropriate) of grain
			 or seed to be measured. The means to select the kind and class of grain or seed
			 shall be readily visible and the kind and class of grain or seed selected shall
			 be clearly and definitely identified in letters (such as Wheat or WHT, HRWW,
			 etc.).
S.1.6.2.
Operating Range.
-
A meter shall automatically and
			 clearly indicate when the operating range of the meter has been exceeded or the
			 manufacturer shall:
(a)
clearly and conspicuously mark the operating ranges on the meter;
			 or
(b)
furnish
			 the operating ranges of the meter and the means to clearly and conspicuously
			 display this information on or immediately adjacent to the device.
The operating range shall specify the
				following:
(a)
the
			 temperature range over which the meter may be used and still comply with the
			 applicable requirements;
(b)
the moisture range for each
			 grain or seed for which the meter is to be used;
(c)
the temperature range for each
			 grain or seed for which the meter is to be used; and
(d)
the maximum allowable difference
			 in temperature between the meter and the sample for which an accurate moisture
			 determination can be made.
Examples of clearly indicating these conditions include
				an error indication, flashing the displayed moisture value, or blanking the
				display. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1989]
(Amended 1986 and 1988)
S.1.6.3.
Value of Smallest Unit.
- The value of the minimum indicated or recorded moisture indication
			 shall not be greater than 0.1 %.
S.1.7.
Electric Power
			 Supply.
S.1.7.1.
Power Supply, Voltage and Frequency.
(a)
A meter that operates using
			 alternating current must perform within the tolerances defined in Section T.2.
			 Tolerance Values over the line voltage range 100 V to 130 V, or 200 V to 250 V
			 rms as designed, and over the frequency range of 59.5 Hz to 60.5
			 Hz.
(b)
Battery-operated instruments shall not indicate or record values outside the
			 applicable tolerance limits when battery power output is excessive or
			 deficient.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1989]
S.1.7.2.
Power Interruption.
-
A power interruption shall not
			 cause an indicating or recording element to display or record any values
			 outside the applicable tolerance limits. [Nonretroactive as of January 1,
			 1989]
(Added 1988)
S.1.8.
Level Indicating Means.
-
A meter shall be equipped with a level indicator and
			 leveling adjustments if its performance is changed by an amount greater than
			 the applicable tolerance when the meter is moved from a level position to a
			 position that is out of level in any upright direction by up to 5 %
			 (approximately 3 degrees).
The level-indicating means shall be readable without
				removing any meter parts requiring a tool. [Nonretroactive as of January 1,
				1989]
(Added 1988) (Amended 1994)
S.1.9.
Operating
			 Temperature.
(a)
A
			 meter shall not display or record any usable values until the operating
			 temperature necessary for accurate determination has been attained, or the
			 meter shall bear a conspicuous statement adjacent to the indication stating
			 that the meter shall be turned on for a time period specified by the
			 manufacturer prior to use.
(b)
A meter shall meet the
			 requirements of T.2. Tolerance Values when operated in the temperature range of
			 2 °C to 40 °C (35 °F to 104 °F) or within the range specified
			 by the meter manufacturer.
(c)
If the manufacturer specifies a
			 temperature range, the range shall be at least 10 °C (20 °F) and shall
			 be marked on the device. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1989]
(Added 1988)
S.2.
Design of Measuring
			 Elements.
S.2.1.
Design of
			 Zero-Setting and Test Point Mechanisms.
- If a grain moisture meter is
			 equipped with a zero setting and/or test point mechanism(s), this (these)
			 mechanism(s) shall be adjustable only with a tool outside and entirely separate
			 from this mechanism or enclosed in a cabinet. This requirement shall not apply
			 to manual operations that the operator must make (following operating
			 instructions) in order to obtain a meter reading on a grain sample.
S.2.2.
Provision for Sealing.
-
			 Provision shall be made for applying a security seal in a manner that requires
			 the security seal to be broken before an adjustment can be made to any
			 component of the grain moisture meter that is set by the manufacturer or
			 authorized service representative and not intended to be adjusted by the
			 user.
S.3.
Accessory Equipment.
- When the operating instructions for a moisture
			 meter require accessory equipment separate from and external to the moisture
			 meter, such equipment shall be appropriate and complete for the measurement.
S.3.1.
Grain-Test Scale.
- If
			 the moisture meter requires the weighing of the grain sample, the weighing
			 device shall meet the requirements of the General Code and those applicable
			 portions of the Scales Code.
S.3.2.
Thermometers or Other Temperature Sensing Equipment.
(a) The temperature sensing equipment or
			 thermometer shall be designed to be in direct contact with a grain sample in a
			 closed container. It is acceptable to insert thermometer through a small hole
			 in the lid of the container used to hold the grain sample.
(b) A separate thermometer or other
			 temperature sensing equipment shall have temperature divisions not greater than
			 the temperature increments used by the manufacturer in the correction table.
(Amended 1988)
S.3.3.
Conversion and Correction
			 Tables.
- Conversion and correction tables, charts, graphs, slide rules,
			 or other apparatus to convert the conventional scale values read from a
			 moisture meter to moisture content values, if such apparatus is required, shall
			 be appropriate and correct for the moisture meter being used and shall be
			 marked with the following information:
(a)
			 name and address or trademark of the manufacturer;
(b) the type or design of the device with
			 which it is intended to be used;
(c) date of issue;
(d) the kinds or classes of grain or seed for
			 which the device is designed to measure moisture content;
(e) the limitations of use, including but not
			 confined to the moisture measurement range, grain or seed temperature, kind or
			 class of grain or seed, moisture meter temperature, voltage and frequency
			 ranges, electromagnetic interferences, and necessary accessory equipment;
			 but
(f) values exceeding any
			 measurement range shall not be included. (Added 1984)
S.3.4.
Operating Instructions and Use
			 Limitations.
- Operating instructions shall be furnished by the
			 manufacturer with each device with all of the information required by paragraph
			 S.3.3. Conversion and Correction Tables. Complete information concerning the
			 accuracy, sensitivity, and use of accessory equipment (e.g., test weight per
			 bushel equipment, thermometer, etc.) necessary in obtaining moisture content
			 shall be included.
N.
Notes
N.1.
Testing Procedures.
N.1.1.
Transfer Standards.
-
			 Official grain samples shall be used as the official transfer standards with
			 moisture content values assigned by the reference methods. The reference
			 methods shall be the oven drying methods as specified by the USDA GIPSA.
			 Tolerances shall be applied to the average of at least three measurements on
			 each official grain sample. Official grain samples shall be clean and naturally
			 moist, but not tempered (i.e., water not added).
(Amended 1992)
N.1.2.
Minimum Test.
- A minimum
			 test of a grain moisture meter shall consist of tests with:
(a) samples (need not exceed three) of each
			 grain or seed for which the device is used; and
(b) samples having at least two different
			 moisture content values within the operating range of the device.
(Amended 1986 and 1989)
N.1.3.
Temperature Measuring Equipment.
- The accuracy of accessory temperature measuring equipment shall be
			 determined by comparison with a calibrated temperature sensor, such as a total
			 immersion thermometer with 0.1 °C (0.2 °F) subdivisions, indicating
			 over a range of from 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F) with a
			 maximum error of ± 0.1 °C (0.2 °F). Tests shall be conducted at
			 two temperatures using liquid baths (e.g., ice water and room temperature
			 water). The two temperatures selected shall not exceed the range of
			 temperatures identified in the moisture meter operating instructions.
(Amended 1988)
T.
Tolerances
43
T.1.
To Underregistration and to
			 Overregistration.
- The tolerances hereinafter prescribed shall be
			 applied to errors of underregistration and errors of
			 overregistration.
T.2.
Tolerance Values.
- Maintenance and acceptance tolerances shall be as
			 shown in Table T.2. Acceptance and Maintenance Tolerances for Grain Moisture
			 Meters. Tolerances are expressed as a fraction of the percent moisture content
			 of the official grain sample, together with a minimum tolerance.
43 These tolerances do not apply to
				tests in which grain moisture meters are the transfer standards.
Table T.2. Acceptance and Maintenance Tolerances
						  for Grain Moisture Meters
Type of Grain or Seed
Tolerance
Minimum Tolerance
Corn, oats, rice, sorghum, sunflower
0.05 of the percent moisture content
0.8 % in moisture content
All other cereal grains and oil seeds
0.04 of the percent moisture content
0.7 % in moisture content
T.3.
For Test Weight Per Bushel Devices.
- The maintenance and
			 acceptance tolerances on separate test weight per bushel devices used to
			 determine the test weight per bushel of grain samples for the purposes of
			 making density corrections in moisture determination shall be 0.193 kg/hL or
			 0.15 lb/bu. The test methods used shall be those specified by the USDA GIPSA
			 using a dockage-free sample of dry hard red winter wheat.
(Amended 1992 and 2003)
T.4.
Thermometers or Other Temperature
			 Sensing Equipment.
- The tolerance for a separate thermometer or
			 temperature sensing equipment used to determine the temperature of grain
			 samples for the purpose of making temperature corrections in moisture
			 determinations shall be ± 0.5 °C (1 °F).
(Added 1988)
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Selection Requirements.
UR.1.1.
Value of the Smallest Unit on
			 Primary Indicating and Recording Elements.
- The value of the smallest
			 unit on a moisture meter, whether the moisture meter reads directly in terms of
			 moisture content, or when the conventional scale unit is converted or corrected
			 to moisture content, shall be equal to or less than 0.1 %.
UR.1.2.
Environment.
-
			 Equipment shall be suitable for the environment in which it is used including,
			 but not limited to, the effects of wind, weather, and RFI.
UR.2.
Installation Requirements.
- The grain moisture meter shall be installed in an environment within
			 the range of temperature and/or other environmental factors specified:
(a) in the operating manual; and
(b) on the conversion or correction tables if
			 such tables are necessary for the operation of the device.
UR.3.
Use Requirements.
UR.3.1.
Operating Instructions.
- The operating instructions for the use of the grain moisture meter
			 shall be readily available to the user, service technician, and weights and
			 measures official at the place of installation. It shall include a list of
			 accessory equipment, conversion and correction charts if any are required to
			 obtain moisture content values, and the kinds of grain or seed to be measured
			 with the moisture meter.
(Amended 1988)
UR.3.2.
Other Devices not used for
			 Commercial Measurement.
- If there are other moisture meters on the
			 premises not used for trade or determining other charges for services, these
			 devices shall be clearly and conspicuously marked "Not for Use in Trade or
			 Commerce."
UR.3.3.
Maintaining Integrity of Grain Samples.
- Whenever there is a time lapse
			 (temperature change) between taking the sample and testing the sample, means to
			 prevent condensation of moisture or loss of moisture from grain samples shall
			 be used. For example, a cold grain sample may be kept in a closed container in
			 order to permit the cold grain to come to the operating temperature range of
			 the meter before the grain moisture measurements are made.
UR.3.4.
Printed Tickets.
-
			 Printed tickets shall be free from any previous indication of moisture content
			 or type of grain or seed selected.
UR.3.5.
Accessory Devices.
-
			 Accessory devices, if necessary in the determination of a moisture content
			 value, shall be in close proximity to the moisture meter and allow immediate
			 use.
UR.3.6.
Sampling.
- A grain sample shall be obtained by following appropriate sampling
			 methods and equipment. These include, but are not limited to, grain probes of
			 appropriate length used at random locations in the bulk, the use of a pelican
			 sampler, or other techniques and equipment giving equivalent results. The grain
			 sample shall be taken such that it is representative of the lot.
UR.3.7.
Location.
- See
			 G-UR.3.3. Position of Equipment.
UR.3.8.
Level Condition.
- If
			 equipped with a level indicator, a meter shall be maintained in a level
			 condition.
(Added 1988)
UR.3.9.
Operating Limitation.
-
			 Unless otherwise specified by the meter manufacturer, moisture determinations
			 shall not be made when the difference in temperatures between the grain sample
			 and the meter exceeds 10 °C (20 °F).
(Added 1988)
UR.3.10.
Current Calibration Chart or
			 Data.
- Grain moisture determinations shall be made using only the most
			 recently published calibration charts or calibration data.
(Added 1988)
UR.3.11.
Posting of Meter Operating
			 Range.
- The operating range of the grain moisture meter shall be
			 clearly and conspicuously posted in the place of business such that the
			 information is readily visible from a reasonable customer position. The posted
			 information shall include the following:
(a)
			 The temperature range over which the meter may be used and still comply with
			 the applicable requirements. If the temperature range varies for different
			 grains or seed, the range shall be specified for each.
(b) The moisture range for each grain or seed
			 for which the meter is to be used.
(c) The temperature range for each grain or
			 seed for which the meter is to be used.
(d) The maximum allowable difference in
			 temperature that may exist between the meter and the sample for which an
			 accurate moisture determination can be made.
(Added 1988)
Section 5.57.
Near-Infrared Grain Analyzers
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
			 -
This code applies to near-infrared (NIR) grain analyzers; that is,
			 devices used to indicate the constituent values (other than moisture content)
			 of grain using near-infrared reflectance or transmittance technology. These
			 instruments may analyze either whole grain or ground grain samples. The code
			 consists of general requirements applicable to all NIR analyzers and specific
			 requirements applicable only to certain types of NIR analyzers, grain types, or
			 grain constituents. In addition to meeting the requirements of this code, a
			 whole grain NIR analyzer that displays a measured moisture value must also
			 comply with the requirements of the Grain Moisture Meters Code.
(Added 2001)
A.2.
Exceptions. -
This code
			 does not apply to devices used for in-motion measurement of grain constituent
			 values.
A.3.
Calibrations. -
The National Type Evaluation Program (NTEP) Certificate of Conformance
			 (CC) shall indicate the native moisture basis of each calibration. The "native"
			 moisture basis is the default moisture basis of the sealable constituent
			 calibration (or constituent calibration pair when a non-displayed moisture
			 calibration is also involved). If an NIR analyzer uses a self-generated
			 moisture measurement internally but does NOT display or record a moisture
			 value, the moisture calibration shall be considered to be a part of the
			 constituent calibration. For such calibrations, the CC shall state: "Includes
			 non-displayed moisture calibration." Changes to any part of such calibrations
			 shall require changes to the CC.
(Added 2001)
A.4.
Additional Code Requirements. -
In addition to the requirements of this code, Near-Infrared Grain
			 Analyzers shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General Code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Design of Indicating, Recording, and Measuring Elements.
S.1.1.
Digital Indications and Recording
			 Elements
.
(a)
Analyzers shall be equipped with
			 a digital indicating element.
(b)
The minimum height for the
			 digits used to display constituent values shall be 10 mm.
(c)
Analyzers shall be equipped with
			 a communication interface that permits interfacing with a recording element and
			 transmitting the date, grain type or class, constituent values, the moisture
			 basis for each constituent value (except moisture), and calibration version
			 identification. If the analyzer converts constituent results to a manually
			 entered moisture basis, the "native" concentration and the "native" moisture
			 basis must appear on the printed ticket in addition to the converted results
			 and the manually entered moisture basis.
(Amended 2001 and 2003)
(d)
A digital indicating element
			 shall not display, and a recording element shall not record, any constituent
			 value before the end of the measurement cycle.
(e)
Constituent content shall be
			 recorded and displayed as percent of total mass at the specified moisture
			 basis. The moisture basis shall also be recorded and displayed for each
			 constituent content result (except moisture). If a whole grain analyzer that is
			 calibrated to display results on an "as is" moisture basis does NOT display or
			 record a moisture value, it must clearly indicate that results are
expressed on an "as is" moisture basis. Ground grain
				analyzers must ALWAYS display and record a moisture measurement for "as is"
				content results (except moisture).
(Amended 2001 and 2003)
(f)
An analyzer shall not display or
			 record any constituent value that is beyond the operating range of the device
			 unless the constituent value representation includes a clear error indication
			 (and recorded error message with the recorded
			 representation).
(g)
If an NIR analyzer is used to determine a moisture value, either to
			 determine the moisture of an "as is" constituent content measurement or to
			 convert from one moisture basis to another, the moisture measurement must be
			 concurrent with the measurement of other constituents.
(h)
If the analyzer incorporates a
			 built-in printer, or if a printer is available as an accessory to the analyzer,
			 the information appearing on the printout shall be arranged in a consistent and
			 unambiguous manner.
(Added 2003)
[Nonretroactive as of January 1,
				2003]
(Added 2001)
S.1.2.
Selecting and Recording
			 Grain Class and Constituent.
-
Provision shall be made
			 for selecting and
recording the type or class or multi-class group of
				grain and the constituent(s) to be measured. The means to select the grain type
				or class or multi-class group and the constituent(s) shall be readily visible
				and the type or class or multi-class group of grain and the constituent(s)
				selected shall be clearly and definitely identified in letters (such as HRWW,
				HRSW, WHEAT, etc., or PROT, etc.). A symbol to identify the display of the type
				or class or multi-class group of grain and constituent(s) selected is permitted
				provided that it is clearly defined adjacent to the display. Minimum acceptable
				abbreviations are listed in Table S.1.2. Grain Types and Multi-Class Groups
				Considered for Type Evaluation and Calibration and Their Minimum Acceptable
				Abbreviations. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2003]
If more than one calibration is included for a given
				grain type, the calibrations must be clearly distinguished
from one another.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2004]
(Amended 2003 and 2007)
Table S.1.2.
Grain Types and Multi-Class Groups
						  Considered for Type Evaluation and
Calibration and Their Minimum Acceptable
						  Abbreviations
Grain Type
Grain Class
Minimum Acceptable
						  Abbreviation
Barley
Two-Rowed Barley
TRB
Six-Rowed Barley
SRB
All-Class Barley*
BARLEY
Corn
---
CORN
Soybeans
---
SOYB
Wheat
All-Class Wheat*
WHEAT
Durum Wheat
DURW
Hard Red Spring Wheat
HRSW
Hard Red Winter Wheat
HRWW
Hard White Wheat
HDWW
Soft Red Winter Wheat
SRWW
Soft White Wheat
SWW
Wheat Excluding Durum*
WHTEXDUR
[Note: Grain Types marked with an asterisk (*) are "Multi-Class
				Calibrations"]
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2003]
(Table Amended 2001 and 2007)
S.1.3.
Operating Range.
-
An analyzer shall automatically and clearly indicate
			 when the operating
range of the device has been exceeded. The statement of
				the operating range shall be specified in the operator's manual and shall
				operate as follows:
(a)
The ambient temperature range over which the analyzer may be used and
			 still comply with the applicable requirements shall be specified. The minimum
			 temperature range shall be 10 °C to 30 °C. No constituent value may be
			 displayed when the temperature range is exceeded. An appropriate error message
			 shall be displayed when the temperature of the analyzer is outside its
			 specified operating range.
(b)
The constituent range at the
			 moisture basis specified in Table N.1.1. Constant Moisture Basis for Type
			 Evaluation and Field Inspections shall be specified for each grain or seed for
			 which the analyzer is to be used. A constituent value may be displayed when the
			 constituent range is exceeded if accompanied by a clear indication that the
			 constituent range has been exceeded.
(Amended 2001)
(c)
For whole grain analyzers only,
			 the temperature range shall be specified for each grain or seed for which an
			 analyzer is to be used. The minimum temperature range for each grain shall be
			 10 °C to 30 °C. No constituent value may be displayed when the
			 temperature range is exceeded. An appropriate error message shall be displayed
			 when the temperature of the grain sample exceeds the temperature range for the
			 grain. The requirements of this subsection (c) are not applicable to ground
			 grain analyzers.
(d)
For whole grain analyzers, the maximum allowable difference in
			 temperature between the instrument environment (ambient temperature) and the
			 sample for which an accurate constituent determination can be made shall be
			 specified. The minimum temperature range shall cover at least 10 °C. No
			 constituent value may be displayed when the maximum allowable temperature
			 difference is exceeded. An appropriate error message shall be displayed when
			 the difference between the ambient temperature
and the sample temperature exceeds the specified
				difference. The requirements of this subsection (d) are not applicable to
				ground grain analyzers. [Nonretroactive and effective as of January 1,
				2003]
S.1.4.
Operating
			 Temperature.
(a)
An
			 analyzer shall not display or record any usable values until the internal
			 operating temperature necessary to meet tolerance requirements has been
			 attained, or the analyzer shall bear a conspicuous statement adjacent to the
			 indication stating that the analyzer shall be turned on for a time period
			 specified by the manufacturer prior to use.
(b)
If an instrument does not meet
			 tolerance requirements because there is an upper internal operating temperature
			 limit that could be exceeded when operating within the ambient temperature
			 range specified by the manufacturer, then a means of sensing and indicating an
			 over-temperature condition must be provided.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2003]
S.1.5.
Value of Smallest Unit.
-
The display shall permit
			 constituent value determination to both 0.01 % and 0.1 % resolution. The 0.1 %
			 resolution is for commercial transactions; the 0.01 % resolution is for
			 calibration purposes only, not for commercial purposes. [Nonretroactive as of
			 January 1, 2003]
S.2.
Design of NIR Analyzers.
S.2.1.
Minimum Sample Size.
-
Analyzers shall be designed to measure constituent
			 values of representative size grain samples. The minimum allowable sample size
			 used in analysis shall be 20 g. [Nonretroactive as of January 1,
			 2003]
S.2.2.
Electric Power Supply.
S.2.2.1.
Power Supply, Voltage and Frequency.
-
An analyzer that operates using alternating current must perform within
			 tolerance requirements over the line voltage range 100 V to 130 V and over the
			 frequency range of 59.5 Hz to 60.5 Hz. [Nonretroactive as of January 1,
			 2003]
S.2.2.2.
Power Interruption.
-
A power
			 interruption shall not cause an indicating or recording element to display or
			 record any values outside the applicable tolerance limits. [Nonretroactive as
			 of January 1, 2003]
S.2.3.
Level Indicating Means.
-
Analyzers shall be equipped with a level indicator
			 and leveling adjustments if its performance is changed by an amount greater
			 than the tolerance requirement when the instrument is moved from a level
			 position into a position that is out of level in any upright direction by up to
			 5 % (approximately three degrees). The level-indicating means shall be readable
			 without removing any instrument parts requiring a tool. [Nonretroactive as of
			 January 1, 2003]
S.2.4.
Environmental Conditions.
-
I
nstrument optics and electronics must be
			 protected from exposure to dust by either sealing these areas or by protecting
			 them with a dust filtration system suitable for the removal of air-borne grain
			 dust. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2003]
S.2.5.
Calibration Transfer and
			 Verification.
S.2.5.1.
Calibration Transfer.
-
The instrument
			 hardware/software design and calibration procedures shall permit calibration
			 development and the mathematical transfer of calibrations between instruments
			 of like models.
Note: Only the manufacturer or the manufacturer's
				designated service agency may make calibration transfer or slope adjustments on
				near-infrared grain analyzers and, except for instrument failure and repair,
				only during a prescribed period of time during the year. This does not preclude
				the possibility of the operator installing the manufacturer-specified
				calibration constants or standardization parameters under the instructions of
				the manufacturer or the manufacturer's designated service agency. Nor does it
				preclude operator bias adjustments when made under the conditions specified in
				UR.2.8. Slope and Bias Adjustments. [Nonretroactive and effective as of January
				1, 2003]
(Note added 1995) (Amended 1995)
S.2.5.2.
Calibration Version.
-
An instrument must be capable of displaying either
			 calibration constants, a unique calibration name, or a unique calibration
			 version number for use in verifying that the latest version of the calibration
			 is being used to make constituent determinations, and that the appropriate
			 instrument settings have been made for the calibration being used.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2003]
(Amended 2001)
S.2.5.3.
Calibration
			 Corruption.
-
If calibration constants are digitally
			 stored in an electronically alterable form, the analyzer shall be designed to
			 make automatic checks to detect corruption of calibration constants. An error
			 message must be displayed if calibration constants have been electronically
			 altered. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2003].
S.2.6.
Provision for Sealing.
-
An event logger is required in the device; it must
			 include an event
counter (000 to 999), the parameter ID, the date and
				time of the change, and the new value of the parameter (for calibration changes
				consisting of multiple constants, the calibration version number may be used
				rather than the calibration constants.)
A printed copy of the information must be available
				through the device or through another on-site device. The event logger shall
				have a capacity to retain records equal to 25 times the number of sealable
				parameters in the device, but not more than 1000 records are required. (Note:
				Does not require 1000 changes to be stored for each parameter.) [Nonretroactive
				as of January 1, 2003]
(Amended 1997)
S.3.
Accessory Equipment.
-
When the operating instructions for an NIR analyzer
			 require accessory equipment separate from and external to the analyzer, such
			 equipment shall be appropriate and complete for the measurement.
			 [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2003]
S.3.1.
Grinders.
-
The make and model of grinder used for ground grain NIR
			 analyzers must be specified by the manufacturer and required as auxiliary
			 equipment in the determination of constituent values for applicable grain
			 types. [Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2003]
S.4.
Operating Instructions
			 and Use Limitations.
-
The manufacturer shall furnish
			 operating instructions for the device and accessories that include complete
			 information concerning the accuracy, sensitivity, and use of accessory
			 equipment necessary in obtaining a constituent value. Operating instructions
			 shall include the following information:
(a)
name and address or trademark of
			 the manufacturer;
(b)
the type or design of the device for which the operating instructions
			 are intended to be used;
(c)
date of
			 issue;
(d)
the
			 kind or classes of grain or seed for which the device is designed to measure
			 constituent values; and
(e)
the limitations of use,
			 including but not limited to constituent range, grain or seed temperature, kind
			 or class of grain or seed, instrument temperature, voltage and frequency
			 ranges, electromagnetic interferences, and necessary accessory
			 equipment.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2003]
N.
Notes
N.1.
Testing
			 Procedures.
N.1.1.
Field
			 Inspection. -
Whole grain samples shall be used as the official field
			 inspection standards.
Five samples per grain type or class shall be used to check
				instrument performance. Each sample will be analyzed once. One of the samples
				will be analyzed an additional four times to test instrument repeatability. For
				ground grain instruments, the ground sample will be repacked four times. A new
				grind is not required. Test results must be converted to the standard moisture
				bases shown in Table N.1.1. Constant Moisture Basis for Type Evaluation and
				Field Inspection before applying the tolerances of Table T.2. Acceptance and
				Maintenance Tolerances for NIR Grain Analyzers. Test results on whole grain
				analyzers that produce results on an "as is" basis without displaying or
				recording a moisture value shall be converted to the standard moisture bases
				shown in Table N.1.1. Constant Moisture Basis for Type Evaluation and Field
				Inspection using sample moisture values determined with the facility's moisture
				meter (which must be certified for commercial use).
(Amended 2001)
Table N.1.1. Constant Moisture Basis for
						  Type Evaluation and Field Inspection
Grain Type or
						  Class
Constituents(s)
Moisture Basis
Durum Wheat, Hard Red Spring
Wheat, Hard Red Winter Wheat,
						  Hard
White Wheat, Soft Red Winter
						  Wheat,
Soft White Wheat
Protein
12 %
Soybeans
Protein Oil
13 %
Two-rowed Barley Six-rowed
						  Barley
Protein
0 % (dry basis)
Corn
Protein
Oil Starch
0 % (dry basis)
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2003]
(Table
				Added 2001)
Constituent values shall be assigned to test samples by the
				Grain Inspection, Packers and Stockyards Administration (GIPSA). Tolerances
				shall be applied to individual sample measurements, the average of individual
				measurements on each of the five test samples, and the maximum difference
				(range) in results for five analyses on one of the test samples.
(Amended 2001)
N.1.2.
Standard Reference Samples. -
Reference samples used for field inspection purposes shall be clean and
			 selected to reasonably represent the constituent range. These samples shall be
			 selected such that the difference between constituent values obtained using the
			 GIPSA standard reference method and an official GIPSA NIR grain analyzer does
			 not exceed one-half of the acceptance tolerance shown in Table T.2. Acceptance
			 and Maintenance Tolerances for NIR Grain Analyzers for individual test samples
			 or 0.375 times the acceptance tolerance shown for the average of five samples.
(Amended 2001and 2003)
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
To Underregistration and to
			 Overregistration. -
The tolerances hereinafter prescribed shall be
			 applied to errors of underregistration and errors of overregistration and shall
			 be based on constituent values expressed at the moisture bases shown in Table
			 N.1.1. Constant Moisture Basis for Type Evaluation and Field Inspection.
(Amended 2001)
T.2.
Tolerance Values. -
Acceptance and maintenance tolerances shall be equal. Tolerances for
			 individual samples and the average for five samples are as shown in Table T.2.
			 Acceptance and Maintenance Tolerances for NIR Grain Analyzers.
Table T.2. Acceptance and Maintenance Tolerances
						  for NIR Grain Analyzers
Type or Class of Grain
Constituent
Individual Samples (percent)
Average for Five Samples (percent)
Range for Five Retests (percent)
Durum Wheat, Hard Red Spring Wheat,
Hard Red Winter Wheat, Hard White
Wheat, Soft Red
Winter Wheat, Soft
White Wheat
protein
0.60
0.40
0.40
Soybeans
protein
0.80
0.60
0.60
oil
0.70
0.50
0.50
Two-rowed Barley Six-rowed Barley
protein
0.70
0.50
0.50
Corn
protein
0.80
0.60
0.60
oil
0.70
0.50
0.50
starch
1.00
0.80
0.80
(Amended 2001)
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Installation Requirements. -
The NIR analyzer shall be installed in an environment within the range
			 of temperature and/or other environmental factors specified in the operating
			 manual.
UR.2.
User
			 Requirements.
UR.2.1.
Operating
			 Instructions. -
The operating instructions for the NIR analyzer shall be
			 readily available to the user, service technician, and weights and measures
			 official at the place of installation. It shall include a list of accessory
			 equipment if any are required to obtain constituent values, and the type or
			 class of grain to be measured with the NIR analyzer. If an NIR analyzer has the
			 capability, the user is permitted to select the moisture basis to be used on
			 any measurement.
(Amended 2001)
UR.2.2.
Other Devices Not Used for
			 Commercial Measurement. -
If there are other NIR analyzers on the
			 premises not used for trade or determining other charges for services, these
			 devices shall be clearly and conspicuously marked "Not for Use in Trade or
			 Commerce."
UR.2.3.
Printed
			 Tickets.
(a)
Printed tickets
			 shall be free from any previous indication of constituent or grain type
			 selected. The printed ticket shall indicate constituent values and the moisture
			 basis associated with each constituent value (except moisture). If the analyzer
			 is calibrated to display results on an "as is" moisture basis and does NOT
			 display or record a moisture value, the ticket must clearly indicate that
			 results are expressed on an "as is" moisture basis.
(Amended 2001)
(b)
The customer shall be given a
			 printed ticket showing the date, grain type or class, constituent results, and
			 calibration version identification. If the analyzer converts constituent
			 results to a manually entered moisture basis, the "native" concentration and
			 the "native" moisture basis must appear on the printed ticket in addition to
			 the converted results and the manually entered moisture basis. If the manually
			 entered moisture basis is intended to be the moisture value for an "as is"
			 constituent concentration measurement, that moisture value must have been
			 obtained on the same sample and must have been measured on a moisture meter
			 certified for commercial use. The information presented on the ticket shall be
			 arranged in a consistent and unambiguous manner. The ticket shall be generated
			 by the near-infrared grain analyzer system.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2003]
(Amended 2001)
UR.2.4.
Grinders. -
Place
			 grinders in a separate room from the NIR analyzer to avoid instrument
			 contamination. If a separate room is not available, the grinder may be in the
			 same room with the NIR analyzer provided the grinder is not placed within one
			 meter of the air intake on the NIR.
UR.2.5.
Sampling. -
Samples
			 shall be obtained by following appropriate sampling methods and equipment.
			 These include, but are not limited to grain probes of appropriate length used
			 at random locations in the bulk, the use of a pelican sampler, or other
			 techniques and equipment giving equivalent results. The sample shall be taken
			 such that it is representative of the lot. If an NIR analyzer permits user
			 entry of the moisture value for an "as is" constituent measurement, that
			 moisture value must have been obtained on the same sample and must have been
			 measured on a moisture meter certified for commercial use.
(Amended 2001)
UR.2.6.
Level Condition. -
If
			 equipped with a level indicator, an analyzer shall be maintained in a level
			 condition.
UR.2.7.
Operating
			 Limitation. -
Constituent determinations shall not be made when the
			 difference in temperatures between the grain sample and the instrument
			 environment (ambient temperature) exceeds manufacturer
			 recommendations.
UR.2.8.
Slope and Bias Adjustments. -
Bias changes shall be made only on the
			 basis of tests run on a current set of Standard Reference Samples (SRS)
			 traceable to GIPSA Master Instruments.44 A written
			 explanation and record of all calibration changes, including those changes made
			 by a manufacturer or the manufacturer's designated service agency, shall be
			 maintained. The log shall indicate the date and magnitude of changes in bias
			 and slope constants and the instrument serial number. A Calibration Adjustment
			 Data Sheet for each log entry shall be available for inspection upon request by
			 the field inspector. Data Sheets shall be retained by the user for a period of
			 no less than 18 months following any calibration adjustment. The Data Sheet
			 must show: date of test and adjustment, serial number of the instrument,
			 calibration identification, the nature of the adjustment, the unique
			 identification number and source of sample sets used, and, for each sample
44 Established error must be known.
in the set, reference values, initial instrument results
				(except in the cases of instrument failure and repair), and instrument results
				after calibration adjustment or instrument repair.
(Amended 1995)
Section 5.58.
Multiple Dimension
			 Measuring Devices
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code applies to dimension and volume measuring devices used for
			 determining the dimensions and/or volume of objects for the purpose of
			 calculating freight, storage, or postal charges based on the dimensions and/or
			 volume occupied by the object. A multiple dimension measuring device:
(a) is generally used to measure
			 hexahedron-shaped objects; and (Added 2008)
(b) may be used to measure irregularly-shaped
			 objects. (Added 2008)
(Amended 2008)
A.2.
Other Devices Designed to Make
			 Multiple Measurement Automatically to Determine a Volume.
- Insofar as
			 they are clearly applicable, the provisions of this code apply also to devices
			 designed to make multiple measurements automatically to determine a volume for
			 other applications as defined by Section 1.10. General Code paragraph G-A.1.
			 Commercial and Law-Enforcement Equipment.
A.3.
Additional Code Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code, Multiple Dimension
			 Measuring Devices shall meet the requirements of Section 1.10. General
			 Code.
A.4.
Exceptions.
- This code does not apply to:
(a)
			 devices designed to indicate automatically (with or without value-computing
			 capabilities) the length of fabric passed through the measuring elements (also
			 see Section 5.50. for Fabric-Measuring Devices);
(b) devices designed to indicate
			 automatically the length of cordage, rope, wire, cable, or similar flexible
			 material passed through the measuring elements (also see Section 5.51. for
			 Wire- and Cordage-Measuring Devices); or
(c) any linear measure, measure of length, or
			 devices used to measure individual dimensions for the purpose of assessing a
			 charge per unit of measurement of the individual dimension (also see Section
			 5.52. for Linear Measures).
A.5.
Type Evaluation.
- The
			 National Type Evaluation Program (NTEP) will accept for type evaluation only
			 those devices that comply with all requirements of this code.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Design
			 of Indicating and Recording Elements and of Recorded Representations.
S.1.1.
Zero or Ready
			 Indication.
(a) Provision shall be made
			 to indicate or record either a zero or ready condition.
(b) A zero or ready condition may be
			 indicated by other than a continuous digital zero indication, provided that an
			 effective automatic means is provided to inhibit a measuring operation when the
			 device is in an out-of-zero or non-ready condition.
S.1.2.
Digital Indications.
-
			 Indicated and recorded values shall be presented digitally.
S.1.3.
Negative Values.
-
			 Except when in the tare mode, negative values shall not be indicated or
			 recorded.
S.1.4.
Dimensions
			 Indication.
- If in normal operation the device indicates or records
			 only volume, a testing mode shall be provided to indicate dimensions for all
			 objects measured.
S.1.5.
Value of Dimension/Volume Division Units.
- The value of a device
			 division "d" expressed in a unit of dimension shall be presented in a decimal
			 format with the value of the division expressed as:
(a) 1, 2, or 5;
(b) a decimal multiple or submultiple of 1,
			 2, or 5; or
(c) a binary
			 submultiple of a specific U.S. customary unit of measure.
Examples: device divisions may be 0.01, 0.02, 0.05; 0.1, 0.2,
				or 0.5; 1, 2, or 5; 10, 20, 50, or 100; 0.5, 0.25, 0.125, 0.0625, etc.
S.1.5.1.
For Indirect
			 Sales.
- In addition to the values specified in S.1.5. Value of
			 Dimension/Volume Division Units, the value of the division may be 0.3 inch and
			 0.4 inch.
S.1.5.2.
Devices
			 Capable of Measuring Irregularly-Shaped Objects. -
For devices capable
			 of measuring irregularly shaped objects, the value of the division size (d)
			 shall be the same for the length axis (x) and the width axis (y) and may be
			 different for the height axis (z), provided that electronic rotation of the
			 object to determine the smallest hexahedron is calculated in only a
			 two-dimension horizontal plane, retaining the stable side plane as the bottom
			 of the hexahedron.
(Added 2008)
S.1.6.
Customer Indications and
			 Recorded Representations.
- Multiple dimension measuring devices or
			 systems must provide information as specified in Table S.1.6. Required
			 Information to be Provided by Multiple Dimension Measuring Systems. As a
			 minimum, all devices or systems must be able to meet either column I or column
			 II in Table S.1.6. Required Information to be Provided by Multiple Dimension
			 Measuring Systems.
(Amended 2004)
Table S.1.6. Required Information to be Provided
						  by Multiple Dimension Measuring Systems
Information
Column
						  I1
Column
						  II1
Column III
Provided by device
Provided by invoice or other means
Provided by
invoice or other
means as
specified in
contractual
agreement
Customer present
Customer not present
1. Device
						  identification2
D or P
P
P
P or A
2. Error message (when applicable)
D or P
P
N/A
N/A
3. Hexahedron
						  dimensions3
D or P
P
P
P or A
4. Hexahedron volume (if
						  used)3
D or P
P
P
P or A
5. Actual weight (if
						  used)3
D or P
P
P
P or A
6. Tare (if used)3
D or P
N/A
N/A
N/A
7. Hexahedron measurement
						  statement4
D or P or M
P
P
P or G
A
= AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST BY
						  CUSTOMER5
D
= DISPLAYED
G
= PUBLISHED GUIDELINES OR
						  CONTRACTS
M
= MARKED
N/A
= NOT APPLICABLE
P
= PRINTED or RECORDED IN A MEMORY DEVICE
						  and AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST BY
CUSTOMER5
Notes:
1 As a minimum all devices
						  or systems must be able to meet either column I or column II.
2 This is only required in
						  systems where more than one device or measuring element is being used.
3 Some devices or systems
						  may not utilize all of these values; however as a minimum either hexahedron
						  dimensions or hexahedron volume must be displayed or printed.
4 This is an explanation
						  that the dimensions and/or volume shown are those of the smallest hexahedron in
						  which the object that was measured may be enclosed rather than those of the
						  object itself.
5 The information "available
						  upon request by customer" shall be retained by the party having issued the
						  invoice for at least 30 calendar days after the date of invoicing.
(Amended 2004)
S.1.7.
Minimum Lengths.
-
			 Except for entries of tare, the minimum length to be measured by a device is 12
			 divisions. The manufacturer may specify a longer minimum length.
S.1.8.
Indications Below Minimum and
			 Above Maximum.
- When objects are smaller than the minimum dimensions
			 identified in paragraph S.1.7. Minimum Lengths or larger than any of the
			 maximum dimensions plus 9 d, and/or maximum volume marked on the device plus 9
			 d, or when a combination of dimensions for the object being measured exceeds
			 the measurement capability of the device, the indicating or recording element
			 shall either:
(a) not indicate or record any
			 usable values; or
(b) identify the
			 indicated or recorded representation with an error indication. (Amended
			 2004)
S.1.9.
Operating Temperature.
- An indicating or recording element shall not
			 indicate nor record any usable values until the operating temperature necessary
			 for accurate measuring and a stable zero reference or ready condition has been
			 attained.
S.1.10.
Adjustable
			 Components.
- Adjustable components shall be held securely in adjustment
			 and, except for a zeroing mechanism (when applicable), shall be located within
			 the housing of the element.
S.1.11.
Provision for Sealing.
(a) A
			 device shall be designed with provision(s) for applying a security seal that
			 must be broken, or for using other approved means of providing security (e.g.,
			 data change audit trail available at the time of inspection), before any change
			 that detrimentally affects the metrological integrity of the device can be made
			 to any measuring element.
(b) Audit
			 trails shall use the format set forth in Table S.1.11. Categories of Devices
			 and Methods of Sealing for Multiple Dimension Measuring Systems.
Table S.1.11. Categories of Devices and Methods
						  of Sealing for Multiple Dimension Measuring Systems
Categories of Devices
Methods of Sealing
Category 1:
No remote
						  configuration.
Seal by physical seal or two event counters: one for
						  calibration parameters and one for configuration parameters.
Category 2:
Remote configuration
						  capability, but access is controlled by physical hardware.
Device shall clearly indicate that it is in the remote
						  configuration mode and record such message if capable of printing in this
						  mode.
The hardware enabling access for remote communication
						  must be at the device and sealed using a physical seal or two event counters:
						  one for calibration parameters and one for configuration parameters.
Category 3:
Remote configuration
						  capability access may be unlimited or controlled through a software switch
						  (e.g., password).
An event logger is required in the device; it must
						  include an event counter (000 to 999), the parameter ID, the date and time of
						  the change, and the new value of the parameter. A printed copy of the
						  information must be available through the device or through another on-site
						  device. The event logger shall have a capacity to retain records equal to 10
						  times the number of sealable parameters in the device, but not more than 1000
						  records are required. (
Note:
Does not require 1000 changes to be
						  stored for each parameter.)
S.2.
Design of Zero and Tare.
S.2.1.
Zero or Ready Adjustment.
- A device shall be equipped with means by which the zero reference or
			 ready condition can be adjusted, or the zero reference or ready condition shall
			 be automatically maintained. The zero reference or ready control circuits shall
			 be interlocked so that their use is prohibited during measurement
			 operations.
S.2.2.
Tare.
- The tare function shall operate only in a backward direction (that is,
			 in a direction of underregistration) with respect to the zero reference or
			 ready condition of the device. The value of the tare division or increment
			 shall be equal to the division of its respective axis on the device. There
			 shall be a clear indication that tare has been taken.
S.3.
Systems with Two or More
			 Measuring Elements.
- A multiple dimension measuring system with a
			 single indicating or recording element, or a combination indicating-recording
			 element, that is coupled to two or more measuring elements with independent
			 measuring systems, shall be provided with means to prohibit the activation of
			 any measuring element (or elements) not in use, and shall be provided with
			 automatic means to indicate clearly and definitely which measuring element is
			 in use.
Note:
This requirement does not apply to
				individual devices that use multiple emitters/sensors within a device in
				combination to measure objects in the same measurement field.
(Amended 2004)
S.4.
Marking Requirements.
(Also see G-S.1. Identification, G-S.4.
			 Interchange or Reversal of Parts, G-S.5.2.5. Permanence, G-S.6. Marking
			 Operational Controls, Indications, and Features, G-S.7. Lettering, G-UR.2.1.1.
			 Visibility of Identification, and G-UR.3.1. Method of Operation.)
S.4.1.
Multiple Dimension Measuring
			 Devices, Main Elements, and Components of Measuring
Devices.
- Multiple dimension measuring devices,
				main elements of multiple dimension measuring devices when not contained in a
				single enclosure for the entire dimension/volume measuring device, and other
				components shall be marked as specified in Table S.4.1.a. and explained in the
				accompanying notes, Table S.4.1.b. Multiple Dimension Measuring Systems Notes
				for Table S.4.1.a.
Table S.4.1.a. Marking Requirements for Multiple
						  Dimension Measuring Systems
To Be Marked With Jl
Multiple Dimension Measuring
						  Equipment
Multiple
Dimension
Measuring Device
and Indicating
Element in Same
Housing
Indicating
Element not
Permanently
Attached to
Multiple
Dimension
Measuring
Element
Multiple
Dimension
Measuring
Element not
Permanently
Attached to the
Indicating
Element
Other
Equipment
(1)
Manufacturer's ID
x
x
x
x
Model Designation
x
x
x
x
Serial Number and Prefix
x
x
x
x (2)
Certificate of Conformance Number (8)
x
x
x
x (8)
Minimum and Maximum Dimensions for Each Axis (3)
x
x
x
Value of Measuring Division, d (for each axis and
						  range)
x
x
x
Temperature Limits (4)
x
x
x
Minimum & Maximum speed (5)
x
x
x
Special Application (6)
x
x
x
Limitation of Use (7)
x
x
x
Table S.4.1.b. Multiple Dimension Measuring
						  Systems Notes for Table S.4.1.a.
1. Necessary to the dimension and/or volume measuring
						  system, but having no effect on the measuring value, e.g., auxiliary remote
						  display, keyboard, etc.
2. Modules without "intelligence" on a modular system
						  (e.g., printer, keyboard module, etc.) are not required to have serial
						  numbers.
3. The minimum and maximum dimensions (using upper or
						  lower case type) shall be marked. For example:
Length: min _______ max _______
Width: min _______ max _______
Height: min _______ max _______
4. Required if the range is other than - 10 °C to
						  40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F).
5. Multiple dimension measuring devices, which require
						  that the object or device be moved relative to one another, shall be marked
						  with the minimum and maximum speeds at which the device is capable of making
						  measurements that are within the applicable tolerances.
6. A device designed for a special application rather
						  than general use shall be conspicuously marked with suitable words visible to
						  the operator and the customer restricting its use to that application.
7. Materials, shapes, structures, combination of object
						  dimensions, speed, spacing, minimum protrusion size, or object orientations
						  that are inappropriate for the device or those that are appropriate.
8. Required only if a Certificate of Conformance has
						  been issued for the equipment.
(Amended 2004 and 2008)
S.4.2.
Location of Marking Information.
- The required marking information shall be so located that it is
			 readily observable without the necessity of the disassembly of a part requiring
			 the use of any means separate from the device.
N.
Notes
N.1.
Test Procedures.
N.1.1.
General.
- The device
			 shall be tested using test standards and objects of known and stable
			 dimensions.
N.1.2.
Position
			 Test.
- Measurements are made using different positions of the test
			 object and consistent with the manufacturer's specified use for the device.
N.1.2.1.
Irregularly-Shaped Test
			 Object Placement.
- Irregularly-shaped test objects must be measured
			 while placed on a stable side. The rotation of the object to determine the
			 smallest hexahedron should be calculated in a two-dimensional plane, retaining
			 the stable side plane as the bottom of the hexahedron.
(Added 2008)
N.1.3.
Disturbance Tests, Field
			 Evaluation.
- A disturbance test shall be conducted at a given
			 installation when the presence of disturbances specified in T.6. has been
			 verified and characterized if those conditions are considered "usual and
			 customary."
N.1.4.
Test
			 Object Size.
- Test objects may vary in size from the smallest dimension
			 to the largest dimension marked on the device, and for field verification
			 examinations, shall be an integer multiple of "d."
N.1.4.1.
Test Objects.
-
			 Verification of devices may be conducted using appropriate test objects of
			 various sizes and of stable dimensions. Test object dimensions must be known to
			 an expanded uncertainty (coverage factor k = 2) of not more than one-third of
			 the applicable device tolerance. The dimensions shall also be checked to the
			 same uncertainty when used at the extreme values of the influence factors.
The dimension of all test objects shall be verified using a
				reference standard that is traceable to NIST (or equivalent national
				laboratory) and meet the tolerances expressed in NIST Handbook 44 Fundamental
				Considerations, paragraph 3.2. (i.e., one-third of the smallest tolerance
				applied to the device).
(Added 2004)
N.1.4.2.
Irregularly-Shaped Test
			 Objects
. - For irregularly-shaped test objects, at least one angle shall
			 be obtuse and the smallest dimension for an axis shall be equal to or greater
			 than the minimum dimension for that axis.
(Added 2008)
(Amended 2008 and 2012)
N.1.5.
Digital Zero Stability.
-
			 A zero indication change test shall be conducted on all devices which show a
			 digital zero. After the removal of any test object, the zero indication shall
			 not change. (Also see G-UR.4.2. Abnormal Performance.)
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Design.
- The tolerance for a multiple dimension measuring device is a
			 performance requirement independent of the design principle used.
T.2.
Tolerance Application.
T.2.1.
Type Evaluation.
- For
			 type evaluations, the tolerance values apply to tests within the influence
			 factor limits of temperature and power supply voltage specified in T.5.1.
			 Temperature and T.5.2. Power Supply Voltage.
T.2.2.
Subsequent Verification.
- For subsequent verifications, the tolerance values apply regardless of
			 the influence factors in effect at the time of the verification. (Also see
			 G-N.2. Testing with Nonassociated Equipment.)
T.2.3.
Multi-interval (Variable
			 Division-Value) Devices.
- For multi-interval devices, the tolerance
			 values are based on the value of the device division of the range in
			 use.
T.3.
Tolerance Values.
- The maintenance and acceptance tolerance values
			 shall be ± 1 division. (Amended 2004)
T.4.
Position Tests.
- For a
			 test standard measured several times in different positions by the device all
			 indications shall be within applicable tolerances.
T.5.
Influence Factors.
- The
			 following factors are applicable to tests conducted under controlled conditions
			 only.
T.5.1.
Temperature.
-
			 Devices shall satisfy the tolerance requirements under the following
			 temperature conditions.
T.5.1.1.
Temperature Limits.
- If not marked on the device, the temperature
			 limits shall be - 10 °C to 40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F).
T.5.1.2.
Minimum Temperature Range.
- If temperature limits are specified for the device, the range shall be
			 at least 30 °C or 54 °F.
T.5.1.3.
Temperature Effect on Zero
			 Indication.
- The zero indication shall not vary by more than one
			 division per 5 °C (9 °F) change in temperature.
T.5.2.
Power Supply Voltage.
T.5.2.1.
Alternating Current Power
			 Supply.
- Devices that operate using alternating current must perform
			 within the conditions defined in paragraphs T.3. through T.6., inclusive, from
			 - 15 % to + 10 % of the marked nominal line voltage(s) at 60 Hz, or the voltage
			 range marked by the manufacturer, at 60 Hz.
(Added 2004)
T.5.2.2.
Direct Current Power Supply.
- Devices that operate using direct current shall operate and perform
			 within the applicable tolerance at any voltage level at which the device is
			 capable of displaying metrological registrations.
(Added 2004)
(Amended 2004)
T.6.
Disturbances, Field Evaluation.
- The following requirements apply to devices when subjected to
			 disturbances which may normally exist in the surrounding environment. These
			 disturbances include radio frequency interference (RFI), electromagnetic
			 interference (EMI), acoustic changes, ambient light emissions, etc. The
			 difference between the measurement indication with the disturbance and the
			 measurement indication without the disturbance shall not exceed one division
			 "d" or the equipment shall:
(a) blank the
			 indication;
(b) provide an error
			 message; or
(c) the indication
			 shall be so completely unstable that it could not be interpreted, or
			 transmitted into memory or to a recording element, as a correct measurement
			 value.
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Selection Requirements.
- Equipment shall be suitable for the service in
			 which it is used with respect to elements of its design, including but not
			 limited to, its maximum capacity, value of the division, minimum capacity, and
			 computing capability.
UR.1.1.
Value of
			 the Indicated and Recorded Division.
- The value of the division
			 recorded shall be the same as the division value indicated.
UR.2.
Installation
			 Requirements.
UR.2.1.
Supports.
- A device that is portable and is being used on a counter, table, or
			 the floor shall be so positioned that it is firmly and securely
			 supported.
UR.2.2.
Foundation, Supports, and Clearance.
- The foundations and support of a
			 device installed in a fixed location shall be such as to provide strength,
			 rigidity, and permanence of all components, and clearance shall be provided
			 around all live parts to the extent that no contacts may result when the
			 measuring element is empty, nor throughout the performance range of the device
			 such that the operation or performance of the device is adversely
			 affected.
UR.2.3.
Protection
			 from Environmental Factors.
- The indicating and measuring elements of a
			 device shall be adequately protected from environmental factors such as wind,
			 weather, and RFI that may adversely affect the operation or performance of the
			 device.
UR.3.
Use
			 Requirements.
UR.3.1.
Minimum
			 and Maximum Measuring Ranges.
- A device shall not be used to measure
			 objects smaller than the minimum or larger than the maximum dimensions marked
			 on the device.
UR.3.2.
Special Designs.
- A multiple dimension measuring device designed and
			 marked for a special application shall not be used for other than its intended
			 purpose.
UR.3.3.
Object
			 Placement.
- If the object being measured must be transported (e.g.,
			 shipped) on a stable side, that irregularly-shaped object must be measured
			 while placed on that stable side. The electronic rotation of the object to
			 determine the smallest hexahedron shall be calculated in a two-dimensional
			 horizontal plane, retaining the stable side plane as the bottom of the
			 hexahedron.
(Added 2008)
(Amended 2008)
UR.4.
Maintenance Requirements.
UR.4.1.
Zero or Ready Condition.
- The zero-setting adjustment of a multiple dimension measuring device
			 shall be maintained so that, with no object in or on the measuring element, the
			 device shall indicate or record a zero or ready condition.
UR.4.2.
Level Condition.
- If a
			 multiple dimension measuring device is equipped with a level-condition
			 indicator, the device shall be maintained in a level condition.
UR.4.3.
Device Modification.
-
			 The measuring capabilities of a device shall not be changed from the
			 manufacturer's design unless the modification has been approved by the
			 manufacturer and the weights and measures authority having jurisdiction over
			 the device.
UR.5.
Customer Information Provided.
- The user of a multiple dimension
			 measuring device or system shall provide transaction information to the
			 customer as specified in Table UR.5. Customer Information Provided.
(Added 2004)
Table UR.5. Customer Information
						  Provided
Information
No Contractual Agreement
Contractual Agreement
Customer Present
Customer not Present
1. Object identification
N/A
P
P or A
2. Billing method (scale or dimensional weight if
						  used)
D or P
P
P or A
3. Billing rate or rate chart
D or P or A
P or G or A
P or A
4. Dimensional weight (if used)
P
P
P or A
5. Conversion factor (if dimensional weight is
						  used)
D or P or A
P
P or G
6. Dimensional weight
						  statement1 (if dimensional weight is used)
D or P
P
P or G
7. Total price
P
P
P or A
A
= Available upon Request by
						  Customer2
D
= Displayed
G
= Published Guidelines or
						  Contracts
M
= Marked
N/A
= Not Applicable
P
= Printed
Notes:
1 This is an explanation
						  that the dimensional weight is not a true weight but is a calculated value
						  obtained by applying a conversion factor to the hexahedron dimensions or volume
						  of the object.
2 The information "available
						  upon request by customer" shall be retained by the party having issued the
						  invoice for at least 30 calendar days after the date of invoicing.
(Added 2004)
Agency No. 209.02
Section 5.59.
Electronic Livestock,
			 Meat, and Poultry Evaluation Systems
and/or Devices
The status of Section 5.59. Electronic Livestock, Meat, and
				Poultry Evaluation Systems and/or Devices was changed from "tentative" to
				"permanent" effective January 1, 2013.
(Added 2005) (Amended 2012)
A.
Application
A.1.
General.
- This code
			 applies to electronic devices or systems for measuring the composition or
			 quality constituents of live animals, livestock and poultry carcasses, and
			 individual cuts of meat or a combination thereof for the purpose of determining
			 value.
A.2.
Additional Code
			 Requirements.
- In addition to the requirements of this code, Electronic
			 Livestock, Meat, and Poultry Evaluation Systems shall meet the requirements of
			 Section 1.10. General Code.
A.3.
Exceptions.
- This code does not apply to scales used to weigh
			 live animals, livestock and poultry carcasses, and individual cuts of meat
			 unless the scales are part of an integrated system designed to measure
			 composition or quality constituents. Scales used in integrated systems must
			 also meet NIST Handbook 44, Section 2.20. Scale requirements.
S.
Specifications
S.1.
Design and Manufacture. -
All design and manufacturing specifications
			 shall comply with American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) International
			 Standard F2342 Standard Specification for Design and Construction of
			 Composition or Quality Constituent Measuring Devices or Systems.
N.
Notes
N.1.
Method of Test. -
Performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM Standard
			 F2343 Test Method for Livestock, Meat, and Poultry Evaluation
			 Devices.
N.2.
Testing
			 Standards. -
ASTM Standard F2343 requires device or system users to
			 maintain accurate reference standards that meet the tolerance expressed in NIST
			 Handbook 44 Fundamental Considerations, paragraph 3.2. Tolerances for Standards
			 (i.e., one-third of the smallest tolerance applied).
N.3.
Verification. -
Device or
			 system users are required to verify and document the accuracy of a device or
			 system on each production day as specified by ASTM Standard F2341 Standard
			 Practice of User Requirements for Livestock, Meat, and Poultry Evaluation
			 Devices or Systems.
N.3.1.
Official
			 Tests. -
Officials are encouraged to periodically witness the required
			 "in house"
verification of accuracy. Officials may also conduct official
				tests using the on-site testing standards or other appropriate standards
				belonging to the jurisdiction with statutory authority over the device or
				system.
T.
Tolerances
T.1.
Tolerances on Individual
			 Measurements. -
Maintenance and acceptance tolerances on an individual
			 measurement shall be as shown in Table T.1. Tolerances.
Table T.1. Tolerances
Individual linear measurement of a single
						  constituent
± 1 mm (0.039 in)
Measurement of area
± 1.6 cm (0.25 in2
						  )
For measurements of other constituents
As specified in ASTM Standard F2343
UR.
User Requirements
UR.1.
Installation
			 Requirements.
UR.1.1.
Installation. -
All devices and systems shall be installed in accordance
			 with manufacturer's instructions.
UR.2.
Maintenance of Equipment.
UR.2.1.
Maintenance. -
All
			 devices and systems shall be continually maintained in an accurate condition
			 and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and ASTM Standard
			 F2341.
UR.3.
Use
			 Requirements.
UR.3.1.
Limitation
			 of Use. -
All devices and systems shall be used to make measurements in
			 a manner specified by the manufacturer.
UR.4.
Testing Standards. -
The user of a
			 commercial device shall make available to the official with statutory authority
			 over the device testing standards that meet the tolerance expressed in
			 Fundamental Considerations, paragraph 3.2. Tolerances for Standards (i.e.,
			 one-third of the smallest tolerance applied). The accuracy of the testing
			 standards shall be verified annually or on a frequency as required by the
			 official with statutory authority and shall be traceable to the appropriate SI
			 standard.